1. School or Soi:iul Sciences - South a. School or Education

2. School or Socio! Sciences - North 3. North Theatre Ill 4. North T heatre• I and lJ 5. School nf Humanlli•s 6. Drama and Music Studios 7. Matthow Flinders Theat re H. LihrRry 9. Union

10. Shor>• R•Histry

t 2. Sport• Cantre t3. School or Earth Sr. iences 14. Mointennncn Workshop 15. Physlcol Sciences Workshop 16. School or PhysicAI Sciences

School or MHthemotir.a l Sciences South Theatres I nod lJ

19. School or Blological Sciences

Flindern M11clicol Centrn 20. Residential Plats 2 t. Clin ical Car• 22. Medical Sciences 23. Clinlcol Sciences 24. l.r.cture Theat res 25. Suppliesl l,ibrary 26. Eneri:y Plant

The Flinders University of South Australia

CALENDAR

Volume II

1 9 7 8

The Un1vers1ty s postal address 1s

BEDFORD PARK SOUTH AusTRALIA 5042 and its telephone number 1s

275 3911

Published by The Flinders University of South Australia Printed at Letterpress Adelaide

Foreword

The Calendar 1s pubhshed 1n two Volumes

Volume One (conta1n1ng details of staff commntees and boards Statutes pnzes and scholarships and other 1nformauon about the Un1vers1ty) ts published tn March of the year to which It refers

Volume Two (conta1n1ng details of courses of study 1nclud1ng syllabuses and Statutes relevant to course structures) ts pubhshed in the previous December

Contents

Pnnc1pal Dates 1023 Enrolment of Students I 032 Rules Applicable to Students on Un1versuy Premises 1033 Statutes I 97

0 1 Interpretation 6 I Matnculation 6 2 Enrolment of Students 4 6 3 Academrc Terms 6 6 4 Maintenance of Order 6 6 5 Conduct of Examinations 16 7 3 Masters Degrees 17

Schedule I (The Degrees of Master of Arts Master of Economics and Master of Science) 19

Appendix A 19 Appendix B 20

Schedule 2 (The Degree of Master of Arts-Drama) 21 Schedule 3 (The Degree of Master of Educauon) 21

Appendix 21 Schedule4 (The Degree of Master of Psychology) 22 Schedule5 (The Degree of Master of Social Adm1n1strat1on) 23 Schedule6 (The Degree of Master of Educauonal Adm1n1strat1on) 23

7 4 Degrees of Doctor of Philosophy and Doctor of Medicine 24 Schedule 1 (The Degree of Doctor 0£ Philosophy) 27 Schedule 2 (The Degree of Doctor of Med1c1ne) 27

7 5 Degrees of Doctor of Letters and Doctor of Science 29 Rules for Higher Degree Theses 29

7 6 Prizes and Scholarships 31

7 7 Admission to Degrees 31 7 8 Academic Dress 31

10 1 Bachelors DegreesandDiplomas 33 Schedule l (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of

Bachelor of Arts in the School of Human1ues) 35 Schedule 2 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of

Bachelor of Arts in the School of Social Sciences) 36 Appendix A 37 Appendix B 39 Appendix C 39

Schedule 3 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Ans 1n the School of Mathemaucal Sciences) 42

Schedule 3A (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Ans in the School of B1olog1cal Sciences) 47

Schedule 4 (The First Year of the Degree of Bachelor of Science) 49

Schedule 5 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1n the School of Mathematical Sciences) 52

Schedule 6 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Saence in the School of Physical Sciences)

Appendix A AppendixB Append1xC

Schedule 7 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1n the School of B1olog1cal Sciences)

Schedule 8 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Science 1n the School of Earth Sciences)

AppendtxA Append1xB

Schedule 9 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Economics)

Schedule 10 (The Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Education)

Schedule lOa (The Orchnary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Education) (Physical Education)

Schedule 11 (The Degree of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery 1n the School of Med1c1ne)

Schedule 12 (The Honours Degree of Bachelor of Medical Saence 1n the School of Med1c1ne)

Schedule 18 (The Degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strat1on)

Appendix A Schedule 14 (The Degree of Bachelor of Special

Educauon) Schedule 15 (The Diploma 1n Educauon) Schedule 16 (The Diploma 1n Social Sciences)

Appendix A Schedule 17 (The Diploma 1n Educational Adm1n1strauon) Schedule 18 (The Diploma 1n Nutrition and D1eteucs in the

School of Med1c1ne) Schedule 19 ( The Diploma 1n Applted Psychology)

Syllabuses School of Human1ues

English French Span1Sh and Portuguese Drama Philosophy Italian Visual Arts Musicology Cognates Honours Topics

School of Social Sciences Economics Economic History Geography History American Studies Politics

55 56

62 69

70

74 75 76

81

82

84

86

88

88 89

90 91 98 94 95

96 96

IOI 174

108 106 118 118 124 184 140 148 149 170

201 818 202 218 218 227 244 249

Psychology 263 Asian Studies 285 Sociology 291 Multidisc1plznary Topics 304 Social Administration 311

School of Mathematical Sciences 401 434 School of Physical Sciences 501 527

lnterd1sc1pl1nary Topics 501 Chemistry 507 Physics 518

School of B1olog1cal Sciences 601 618 School of Med1c1ne 701 723

School of Earth Sciences 801 818 Marine Geology and Geophysics Meteorology and Oceanography

School of Educauon 901 946 Index to Topics 1001

STATUTES'

Statute 0 1 Interpretation

I In these Statutes -the maswhne includes the fem1n1ne and vice versa the singular includes the plural and vice versa expressions referring to wnung shall unless the contrary intention appears be construed as 1nclud1ng references to pnnt1ng lithography photography and other modes of represenung or reproducing words in a v1s1ble form words or expressions contained 111 these Statutes shall be interpreted 111 accordance with the prov1s1ons of the Acts Interpretation Act 1915 1975 (as amended) as 111 force at the date at which these Statutes be<-ome b1nd1ng upon the University

6 I Matriculation GENERAL

l To become a matnculated student of the Un1versny a candidate shall (a) have satisfied the educat1onal requuements specified below and (b) at an appointed ttme in the presence of the Registrar or other duly appointed person sign the Matrxculatton Roll on every page of which shall be printed the following

I hereby enter myself 1n the 1oll of matriculated students and I acknowledge that I am bound by the Statutes regulauons and other lawful dtrecttons of The Flinders Universay of South Australia

MATRICULATION EXAMINATION

2 A Matriculatton Exam1nauon shall be held towards the end of each calendar ye1r The examination shall be designed 111 general scope and standard for candidates who have completed five years of academic secondary educauon (following seven years of primary educauon) in South Australta

3 (a) The subjects available at the Matnculatton Examination shall be Group I Amencan History Ancient History Art Austrahan History Classical Studies Dutch Economics Enghsh French Geography German Hunganan Itahan Latvian L1thuan1an Medieval History Modern European History Modern Greek Modern World History Music (History and Ltterature) Music (Theory and Practice) Spanish and such other sub1ects as may be approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Joint Matnculation Committee 0

Group II Biology Chemistry Geology Mathemaucs I Mathemaucs II Mathematics IS Physics and such other sub1ects as may be approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Joint Matnculauon Committee (b) Candidates results in each subject shall be class1hed (not necessarily for publication) 1n such manner as may be approved by the Council on the recommendauon of the Joint Matnculat1on Committee

The followmg s1 bje<:ts have been so approved

Chmese Indonesian Japanese Malay and Ukrammn-al the Matnculanon exammauons conducted by the Public Exam nauons Board of Somh Australia

Hebrew Pohsh and Russian-at the Higher School Cernf1ca1e Exammauons conducted by the V1cto11an Umversmes and Schools Exammauons Board m accordance wnh the arrangemems made by the Pubhc Exammauons Board of South Australia l litatute~ 0 I to 5 2 and Statutes 8 I to 9 2 are pubhshed m Volume One of the Calendar

STATUTE 61 Contd

EDUCATIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MATRICULATION

4 To fulfil the educational requtrements for matnculauon a candidate shall (a) present at one Matnculauon Examinauon not less than five subjects which shall include at least one subject from each of Group I and Group II provided that a candidate presenting Mathemattcs IS shall not also present either Mathemancs I or Mathematics II and provided (i) that not more than two History subjects shall be counted (11) that Ancient History and Classical Studies shall not both be counted (111) that Modem European History and Modern World History shall not both be counted and (1v) that a candidate presenting Malay may not also present Indonesian (b) attain in five subjects so presented an aggregate of scaled marks not less than a figure determined from ume to time by the Council provided that 1£ a candidate shall present more than hve subjects the aggregate of marks shall be his hve highest scaled marks 10

subjects which comply with the requirements of section (a) of this Clause

5 A candidate who produces evidence satisfactory to the Jomt Matnculauon Committee {a) that he was prevented by illness from attending or completmg the Matnculat1on Exam1nauon tn the subject or subjects concerned or (b) that he sat1shed such other grounds as may be approved by the Joint Matnculat1on Committee may have an assessment made of the results which he was ltkely to obtain in each subject concerned or may be examined in any manner approved by the Joint Matr1culatton Committee Such assessment or exam1nat1on 1£ approved by the Publtc Examtnauons Board and the Joint Matriculation Committee may be used for the purposes of complying with the provisions of clause 4 of this Statute

6 The syllabus of any proposed new subject at the Matr1culatton exam1nat1011 and any substantial alteration to any existtng syllabus shall be (a) drawn up by a Sub1ect Committee of the PubltcExaminauons Board of which Subject Committee the Chauman shall be a member of the full ume academic staff of either the Universtty of Adelaide or the Fltnders Universlly of South Ausualta (b) after approval by the Publtc Examinations Board submitted to the two Un1versittes

No new syllabus or substantial alteration to any existing syllabus shall be operative unless and until it has been approved for the purpose of both Un1verstt1es For the purpose of this clause an alterauon shall be regarded assubstanual if declared to be so by the Chairman of the relevant Public Exam1nat1ons Board Subject Committee or by the Joint Matr1culat1on Committee

THE MATRICULATION BOARD

8 There shall be a Matr1culat1011 Board consisttng of the Vice Chancellor or his nominee who shall be Chairman the Chairmen of the several Schools or thetr nominees and six other members of the academic staff appointed by the Council

9 (a) The Board shall advise the Council on all apphcations under tlns Statute for status for prov1s1onal matnculatton and for adult matnculat1on and on such other matters as the Council may refer to tt (b) In the case of a candidate for matnculatton who presents evidence sausfactory to the Matnculatton Board that he ts suffering from a physical (or other) disability of a severe and cont1nu1ng nature the Counctl on the advice of the Board may vary the prov1s1onsof clauses 4 and 5

THE JOINT MATRICULATION COMMITTEE

10 (a) There shall be a Joint Matrtculauon Committee of The Un1versttyof Adelaide and The Fhnders University of South Australta cons1st1ng of eleven members (b) Each University Council shall appoint ftve members (c) The ten appointed members shall elect a Chauman If an appointed member be elected

2

STATUTE 61 Contd

Chairman he shall thereupon cease to be an appointed member and the resultant vacancy shall be filled by the relevant University Council

11 In add1uon to us po,vers under clauses 3 and 5 the Joint Matnculauon Committee shall advise the Council of the t'vo Universities on any matters related to matnculauon

STATUS

12 A candidate who submus sausfactory evidence of educauonal quahhcauons gained otherwise than at the Matnculat1on Exam1nat1on may be declared quahhcd for matriculation or be granted such status towards matnculat1on as shall be determined in each case

13 A candidate \Vho under Clause 12 ts granted status to,vards matr1cu latton on account of educational quahhcat1ons obtamed outside South Australta may be requued to sausfy the Matr1culauon Board that his knowledge of English is sufficient for the purpose of undertaking University studies

PROVISIONAL MATRICULATION

14 A candidate who has not fulfilled the educational requuements for mau1culat1on specified 1n Clause 4 may be admitted to prov1s1onal matnrulauon by the Council for a specified penod on such condiuons as may be determined 10 each case Only 111 e""cept1onal circumstances may such provisional matnculatton be renewed

15 (a) A candidate admitted to provisional matnculauon shallcomplywithsecuon (b)of Clause 1 and shall be deemed dunng the penod of provisional matnculat1on to be a matriculated student of the Un1vers1ty and hts fulftlhng thecondtt1011s prescnbed \Vtthtn the period specified shall ipso facto confirm his status as a matr1rulated student from the date of his s1gn1ng the Matnculauon Roll (b) If a candidate admitted to provisional matnrulat1on fails to comply with the cond1t1ons prescribed w1th1n the penod spec1hed hts status as a matnrulated student shall thereupon lapse and an entry to that effect shall forthwith be made 111 the Matnculation Roll

ADULT MATRICULATION

16 The Council may make such modthcattons in theprov1s1ons of lhts Statute as it deems ht for a person who has attained the age of twenty oneyearsorwho for a continuous penod of at least thtrty three months has ceased to undergo full ume secondary education

OPERATIVE DATE

17 This Statute shall come tnto force on lstApnl 1969 when the Matnrulauon Statute in force on 31st March 1969 shall be repealed

SAVING CLAUSE

18 (a) Notw1thstand1ng the prov1s1ons of Clause l(a) a candidate 'vho before lst Apnl 1969 had fulfilled the educational requtrements for matr1culat1on under any former Matn01lat1on Statute by passing 10 appropriate subJ ects at the matnculat1on exam1nat1on prescribed in that Statute shall remain quahhed for matnculauon

3

STATUTES 61to62

(b) A cand1dale who before 31st March 1969 h1.d partially fuH1lled the educallonal requuements for matnculat1on under Clause 7(a) o( the Statute G l Matncul tt1on 1n force al that date may compkle his quahf1cauons for matnculauon by attaunng at any Matriculauon Exam1nat1on a grade of Dor higher 111 any subject which 1s a\ a1l1.bleat the Matr1culauon Examinanon and 'vould have quahfied him for matr1culauon under the former Statute

\DDITIONAL NOTES

These notes do not form part of the Statute

Pre requisites Most ftrst year Un1vers1ty courses assume no previous knowledge of the subject but several assume a kno,vledge of the corresponding matnculat1on subject

Languages French I (Stream A) assumes a knowledge of the course 111Frend11.t I\!Iatnculauon level while French I (Stream B) assumes d knowledge of the course at Le1.v1ng level Introductory French 1s available to students wtth httle or no previous knowledge of French Spanish I does not assume any previous knowledge of Spanish Nauve speakers and students wllh Matnculat1011 Spanish should consult the d1sc1phne concerning possible altemauve arrangements for Spanish I To qualify for admatance to the adv.inccd course 1n ltaltdn I students should have a knowledge of Italian at Matnculat1on standard lt"l.han IZ 1s available to students \Vllh little or no previous kno\vledge of Italian

Sciences Introductory Mathematics assumes a knowledge of Mathemaucs to Year 11 Secondary School level Mathematics topics 61127 61128 63216 assume a knowledge of Matnculat1on Mathemaucs IS Mathemaucs topics 61116 63116 63114 assume a knowledge of Matnculauon Mathemaucs I and II Moreover only students who hdveatta1ne<l at least a B pass 111 each of these subjects are advised to enrol Physics I assumes that students have a kno\vledgeof the courses at Matr1cul 1t1on level in Physics and Mathemaucs IS or Mathematics I how·ever a knov • .t!edge of MathcmdUcs II 1s desuable Introduction to Physics assumes no previous knowledge Chemistry I assumes that students have 1. knowledge of the course at Matnculat1on level 111

Chemistry Introducuon to Chemistry assumes no previous kno".rlcdge B1olog1cal Science I and Perspectives in Biology and Earth Sciences I assume no previous knowledge of Biology and Geology respccuvely

6 2 Enrolment of Students

The Council may prescnbe rhat students 'vho \\ t!>h to commence a coutse of study for 1ny degree or diploma shall apply for admission to that course of study by a particular date An application for adm1ss1on submitted after that date will nol necei.sanly be accepted and 1£ accepted w1ll 1nrur such late adm1ss1on fee as the Council may prescnbe

2 The Council having regard to the resources of the Un1versay w11.h respect to st"l.fhng accommodauon and fac1hues available for teaching may place hmuauons on the numbers of students Lo be admitted to any course of study foradegreeord1ploma or to any particular course and may determine the method by \Vhich students will be admitted Only students granted adm1ss1on may enrol for such courses

3 All students shall enrol no later rh1.n the date prescnbed ead1 ye"l.r b) the Council An enrolment submitted after that date \VIII not necessanly be accepted and 1f accepted will incur such late enrolment fee as the Counctl may p1escnbe 1

I Late enrolmem fcr 1s .$20

4

STATUTE 6 2 Contd

4 In add1uon to Tu1uon or Rcg1strat1011 fees every student shall pay a Student Services Fee prescnbed by the Council

5 In parucular cases the Council may reduce or waive .iny fee payable by a student or students The Registrar shall have po\ver to grant an extension of time for the payment of fees or reduce or waive any 11.te fee if he deems the reasons for being late to be adequate 6 Fees shall be paid at the ume of enrolment except that a student may elect to pay hts fees for the second and thud terms dunng the fust two weeks of the relevant terms A student who elects to pay his fees by terms but whose fees are not paid before the end of the second week of the relevant term will incur such add1t1onal fee as may be prescribed by the Council unless an extension of ume has been approved 1n advance by the Registrar

7 A student who has neither quahhed to mdtriculate nor been grdnted prov1s1onal matnculauon may not enrol in dny topic except in circumstances dnd under cond1uons approved by Council on the recommendation of the Matricul'luon Board A student granted such approval to enrol shall sign the Matnculauon Roll \vhich shall be appropnately annotated He shall pay the same fees and be subJeCt to the same statutes regulations and rules as a matnculated student but he shall not beel1g1ble for thea\vard of any scholarship or pnze Such a student may not enrol for any degree or diploma nor present towards Jny degree or diploma any topics passed by him unless he shall have become a matnculated student Council shall make regulauons govenung the 1mplementatton of dus clause 8 A student \vho enrols 111 the University shall be sub1ect to the statutes regulations and other lawful d1rccuons of the Universlly until he qualifies for the degree or diploma for which he ts enrolled or until he nouhes the Registrar in \Vnung of his w1thdrJwal as a student or unhl he fails to re enrol by the last day of the enrolment penod in any year follo\v1ng that 111 \\ h1ch he 'vas enrolled

9 ••A student who has l\Vtce fatled to pass a Part or a part ume student who has t\vtce failed to sausfy the appropriate Exam1nauons Board 1n exam1nat1ons for any course shall be precluded from enrolling again 111 the Un1verslly unless and unul permitted by the Council on the recommendat1on of the Board of the School in lVh1ch helvtshes toenrolor re enrol and then only under such cond1uons as the Board may prescnbe

10 ••A student is deemed to have failed 1£ he wuhdra\VS from a course or a Part after the last day of the second term or fails to present himself for the annual ex.im1nat1on unless he provides reasons considered sausfactory by 1.he Chairman of the School

11 Not\v1thstand1ng the prov1s1ons of clauses 9 and 10 o[ tins Stdtute a student who at any ume withdraws from or does not enrol in consecutive years in the course lc.id1ng to the degree of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery w11l not be perm1Ued to re enrol in that course wtthout the pnor approval of the Standing Co1nmitteeof theBo'lrd of the Sd1ool of Medicine

12 ••The Board of the appropnate School may at any time review the academic progress of a student If the Board Judges his progress to be unsatisfactory 1t may require him to show cause why he should be permitted to conunue with his studies or to enrol for further studies 111 the Un1verstty Afttr cons1derat1on of the students rep1csentauons (1£ any) and all other circumstances the Board may decide (a) to take no action or (b) to permit the student to take only such courses \vtth1n the School as it may approvedunng thecurrentor follo\v1ng year or (c) recommend to the Council that the student be precluded from further studies in that School and the Council after making such inquiry as It tlunks ht may preclude the student from taking further studies w1th1n that School Any student who has been precluded from a particular School under this clause may be precluded from enrolling 111 another School in the Un1vers1ty by the Council on tl1e recommendation of the Board of the School 1n \Vh1ch he wishes to enrol

13 If 1t appears to the Board of the appropnate School that ll IS not in the interests of the U1uvers1ty or of other students or of the public (having regard to the profession for which the student is quahfy1ng) that any student should be permitted to enter upon or proceed '"1tl1 a course of studies the Board may recommend to the Council that the enrolment of

I or studentsu1rolkd undt:r the 01111 'iy te 1 Chuscs9 10-ind 12 aresupl'fM.ded by Cl.1.usl~S 9and \Oof'it-imtl 10 I B1du.-lors Degrcu -ind Diplomas

5

STATUTES 6 3 to 6 4

such a student be not permuted or be terminated Such arecommcndauon shall be referred to the Board of D1sc1pl1nc which shall conduct an 1nqu1ry under lhecond1uons prescnbed for 1nvest1gaung complaints against students and advise lheCounc1l Afterrece1v1ng such advice the Council may reject or terminate the enrolment of the student

REGULATIONS MADE UNDJ::R CLAUSE 7 I There shall be a category or non m1.U1culated students up 10 .i rumulauve hmn or three such stude11ts Ill any d1soplme or six such studencs ma smgle-d1saphneSchool at any one nme v.ho may bl' enrollOO ma School at the d1screuon of that Sdmol pmv1dt'li that m lheop1111on of the \la1nculauon Board these Regulauons and other Council pohaes have been compiled w11h

2 Apphcauons must be rece1vl'<i annually

No non matriculated student may enrol m mon 1han 12 u111ts many one year

No mum\ or renewmg apphcat10n will be cons1d("red 1£ received -iher !st Febnrnry (28th February 111 1976 only)

5 No non mamculated student may coum mw'l.rds any degree or diploma an) 111111s gained v. bile a non ma1nculant student excepl as provided undH 6 below

6 A non m1.tr1culattd student who after not kss than three and not more th.in four ytar of study 111.~ (I) saushed the reqmrements for l11l conversion of prov1s1onal ffi'l.lncuJauon 10 full n11.mcula11on ovu S6 um ts aud (2) gamed .i grade of C or belier 11 at least 1wo hrst year 12 unu topics leading to a ma1or sequence Ill d1ffen.·nt d1sc1plmes or mat least 27 units from fm;t )ear 1op1cs luted undu Si.atute 10 I Schedule 4 in al h.ist 1wo d1Herent d1sc1plmes shall be granted full mamculauou si.atus and shall then beallov.t'd to count towards .idegree ord1ploma thoseunns gained while a non mau1cula1ed student prov1dt'd that.iny unns gamed ma top1csub1cct toa pre-requisite shall not be counted unless the pre-reqmsnl h1.~ also been sausfled the wa1vmg of a pre requmtl by a d1se1plme or School Bo.ird .J-iall not constitute l11e fulf1lme11t of that pre n,iumte for l11e purposLs of this paragraph

7 The apphcauon of the above regulauons shall always be hmued to the availabdny o[ places wnhm such quotas as may be approved by Council aftu all mamculall'll apphcams h1.Vl bet'fl enrolled

6 3 A cad em ic T crms

I The first term shal1 begin on the ninth Monday 1n the year and shall end on the Saturday preceding the eighteenth Monday in the year Lectures shall begin on the second Monday in Lerm provided that wnh the approval of the School or Schools concerned lectures in any course may begin a week earlier

2 The second term shall begin on the t\'venty second Monday 1n the year and shall end on the Saturday preceding the thuty fusl Monday in the year 3 The t'11rd term shall begin on the thirty fifth Monday in the year and shall end on the Saturday preceding the forty fourth Monday in the year

4 The Council shall have po,ver to vary these dates to meet any special cucumstanccs ans1ng 1n any year

5 The length of terms 111 the School of Med1c1ne shall be as determined from ume to time by the Council on the recommenda uon of the Academic Commntee

6 'f iUa1ntenan€e of Order1

l Students of the Un1versny are bound by the Statutes Regulauons and other la"'ful direcuons of the Un1versny and are expected. to conduct themselves in a manner lvhich does not 1mpau the funcuon1ng of the University and the reasonable freedom of other persons to pursue thetr studies researches duties or lawful act1v1t1es in the Un1vers1tyor to part1c1pate 1n the hfe of the University

1 This Statute replaces Statute 6 4 Ducrplane subject to allowance by the Governor

6

STATUTE 6 4 Contd

DEFINITIONS

2 In tlus Statute unless lhe context olherw1se requrres lhe expression 'Expel and expulsion means the cancellauon of enrolment of a student and

term1nat1on of all nghts and pnvdeges as a student of lhe Un1vers1ty including lhenghtto enter or to be on land or premises of the Un1vers1ty and thenght toparuc1pate1n the hfeof the Un1vers1ty and such expulsion may be for etther a specified or an indefinite penod Misconduct includes

(1) any conduct \Vh1ch tmpaus the reasonable freedom of other persons to pursue lhe1r stud1e) researches duties or la\vful acuvu1es 1n the University or to part1c1pate in the hfe of the Un1versHy (2) wilful d1sobechence of a reasonable duecuon of a senior officer of lhe University (3) acting dishonestly or unfairly 1n connection wuh any examinauon conducted by or wttlun the University or the preparauon or presentation of any essay exercise or lhesis or faihng to comply wuh the requirements of a supervisor of any examinauon (4) assaulung attempting to assault or lhreaten1ng a person on University premises (5) dtsobeymg or fa1hng to observe any prov1s1on of any Statute or rule or any resoluuon of the Council (6) d1vulg111g any conhdenual mfonnat1on relaung to any Un1versHy matter (7) entenng any placew1th1n thepremisesof the Un1versllywh1ch the student ts forbidden by a senior o[bcer of the University or by a by law statute or regulation to enter

(8) fa1hng to comply with any penalty imposed under this Statute (9) fa1hng to leave any building or part of a butld1ng of the Un1vers1ty forthwith upon being directed by a senior officer of the Un1versHy to leave tt (10) 1num1daung obstrucung d1sturb1ng delaying or 1nfluenang improperly or '1.ttempung so to do any Board of Enquiry or Appeals Commtttce set up under this Statute or any member of any such Board of Enquiry or Appeals Committee or any witness who 1s appearing or who has been called to appear before any such Board of Enquiry or Appeals Committee (11) w11fully damaging or lvrongfully dealing with any Un1vers1ty property or any property upon University premises (12) w11£ully obstructing or attempting to deter any officer or employee of the Un1vers1ty in the performance of duties (13) w11fully obstrucung any teaching or research activity examination or official meeung or proceeding of the Universtty

Senior officer of the University means the Chancellor the Pro Chancellor the Vice Chancellor the Pro Vice Chancellor the Chairman of a School the Registrar the Librarian the Dean of a Hall of Residence any member of the academic staff of the Un1vers1ty and any person for the ume being acung 1n the office of any such officer and any other member o[ the staff of the University whom the Council may designate as a senior officer for the purposes of this Statute Student means an enrolled student of the Un1verstty other than one who is a full ume

member of the staff of the University Supervisor means any person appointed by the Un1vers1ty to supervise an exam1nat1on

of lhe Un1verstty Teaching staff means the Professors Readers Seruor Lecturers Lecturers Senior

Tutors Senior Demonstrat,ors Tutors and Demonstrators of the Un1vers1ty

3 A decision by a person or body exercising any powerorauthoruyunder this Statute that a student has been guilty of misconduct is conclusive save as herein provided

COMPLAINTS OF ALLEGED MISCONDUCT

4 Any complaint alleging misconduct on the pan of a student or stud en ts shall be made in wnttng to the Vice Chancellor a Pro Vice Chancellor or the Chairman of one of the Schools of the Un1versuy

7

STATUTE 6 4 Contd

5 (1) Where a complaint alleging misconduct on the part of a student is made to the Vice Chancellor or where it otherwise appears to the Vice Chancellor that any 'lCl or om1ss1on or alleged act or om1ss1on on the part of a student may amount to misconduct the Vice Chancellor may suspend the student for a penod not exceeding 28 days and 1n that event shall forthwith refera charge of misconduct 1n wnt1ng to the Registrar to be dealt wah by a Board of Enquiry which shall proceed to deal wnh the charge and to determine (a) whether the charge is proved (b) whether the suspension shall be confirmed conunued tenn1nated or revoked (c) whether any further or other penalty shall be imposed In relauon to the proceedings of the Board of Enquuy the prov1s1ons of clauses 14 to 26 below shall apply (2) The Board of Enquiry may terminate the suspension pnor to the conclusion of Its heanng of the reference (3) The prov1s1ons of Clause 7 of tlus Statute shall not operate so as to prevent the Vice Chancellor from exerc1s1ng tl1e powers conferred by th 1s clause and where such powers are exercised Clause 7 shall not apply (4) Where the matter has been referred 1n lvnt1ng to be dealt with by a Board of Enquiry pursuant to sub clause (1) of this clause theprov1s1onsof clauses 8 9 IO 12 and 13 shall not apply

6 Acuon taken 1n accordance with any of the prov1s1ons of Clause 5 above shall be confnmed in wnung addressed to the student concerned and notified 111 wnung to the Registrar

7 When a complaint of alleged m1sc0nduct has been referred to the Vice Chancellor a Pro Vice Chancelior or a Chairman of School ans1ng from a matter in or 1n connecuon wtth wluch that officer is or has been involved the officer concerned shall fonhwnh refer the complaint to one of the other named officers who shall then takeacnon as prescnbed in Clause 8 below

8 On rece1v1ng a complaint alleging misconduct on the part of a student whether such complaint has been received duectly or has been referred by another officer 1n accordance with Clause 7 above the Vice Chancellor Pro Vice Chancellor or Chairman of School shall (I) enter upon a summary enquiry in accordance lVllh clauses 9 and IO belolv or (2) determine to take no action on the matter and 111 that event inform the complainant accordingly

SUMMARY ENQUIRIES

9 In conducung a surrunary enqulfy the Vice Chancellor Pro Vice Chancellor or Chairman of School shall (1) inform the student of the details of the compl,unt wluch has been made (2) convene a meeung with the person making the complaint the student complained against and any other person deemed relevant by the officer conducung the enquiry provided that 1£ any person so1nv1ted does not attend the summary enquiry may proceed If 111 the absolute d1screuon of the officer conducting 1t the complaint 1s of 'lm1noror tnv1al nature (3) give each person appeanng and having kno\vledge of the matter reasonable opportunity to be heard (4) 1£ so desued by the student complained against and the person making the complaint permit both or either of them to be 'lss1sted at the enquiry by another member of the Un1versuy provided that the member nominated by eHher 1s not also a pracuuoner of the Supreme Court of South Australia (5) explore reasonable avenues £orsetthng the compla1ntbefore1nvok1ng 'lny d1sc1phnary powers (6) have the power to conduct the enquiry in such manner as that officer deems appropnate and to terminate the proceedings at any point 1£ in theop1n1on of that officer tt 1s 1mposs1ble for any reason to complete the enquuy

10 (I) If dunng or after a surrunary enqutry the Vice Chancellor Pro Vice Chancellor or Chairman of Sd1ool concludes that there is no case to ans\ver that officer shall d1sm1ss tl1e complaint fortlnvuh

8

STATUTl. 6 4 Contd

(2) If the Vice Chancellor Pro Vice Chancellor or Cha1nnan of School finds .i. compla1nl proved 1n respect of what 1n the absolute d1screuon of that officer 1s considered to be a minor act of misconduct the officer concerned may (a) impose no penalty (b) impose a hne of not more than S20 on the student and/or (c) suspend the student for a penod of not more than 7 days (3) If dunng the course of a summary enquiry it appears to the Vice Chancellor Pro Vice Chancellor or Chauman of School that the misconduct alleged should not be dealt wllh summarily or 1f that officer finds it necessary to terminate the summary enquuy (otherwise than as provided by sub clauses (1) and (2) of this clause) the off1cerconcerned shall refer a charge of misconduct 1n lvnung to the Registrar to be dealt with by a Board of Enquuy as provided 1n clauses 14 to 26 below (4) The findings of the Vice Chancellor Pro Vice Chancellor or Ch·urman of School together \Vlth the reasons for such findings tnd any penalty imposed by thatoff1cer shall be not1hed forthwnh 1n wnt1ng to the student concerned and to the Registrar

11 A student who IS suspended under clause 5 or under clause 10 shall dunng theperuxl of suspension not be entltled to enter or be on the land and premises of the Un1versny for any reason or purpose except for the purposes of the hearing by a Board of Enquiry to '"h1ch the mauer has been referred or the hearing of any appeal from such Board or except as may be otherwise authonsed by the Vice Chancellor

APPEALS ARISING FROM SUIVIMARY ENQUIRIES

12 A student may appeal to a Board of Enquuy from the f1nd1ngs of or the tmpos1t1on of any penalty by the Vice Chancellor Pro Vice Chancellor or Chairman of School who has conducted a summary enquuy The Board of Enquiry may afhrm annul or vary lhe hnd1ngs and may also or alternauvely affirm annul reduce or increase any penalty or impose another penalty 111 tts place The decision of the BoardofEnqu1ryupon an appeal 1s f 1nal and conclusive and shall be reported to the next succeed mg meeting o[ the Council and recorded in the minutes of that meeung

13 (1) An appeal shall be instituted by notice 111 wnl1ng lodged with the Registrar by the student concerned wulun fourteen days after the dec1s1on appealed against has been notified to the studenl

(2) The notice shall specify concisely the nature and grounds of the appeal 1nd whether the whole or part only and \Vhtch part of the deas1on appealed against ts complained of and shall also state with suff1c1ent part1culanty the grounds of such compla1nl 1nd except by leave of the Board of Enquuy the appellant shall not be enutled at the heanng of the appeal to rely on any ground not so 'itated (3) Where the Board of Enquuy considers that the notice of appeal does not comply with the requirements of sub clause (2) of this clause It may (a) refuse to hear the appeal or (b) adjourn the heanng unul the requirements of sub clause (2) have been comphed \Vtth to the sat1sfacuon of the Board and permit thenouceof appeal to beamended as necessary for this purpose or (c) conunue or ad1ourn the heanng on such terms as the Board may in ttsd1sc1euon think ht (4) The Board of Enquiry shall consider the hnd1ngs of the officer who conducted the summary enquiry and the reasons for such f1nd1ngs No other evidence shall be received on the heanng except by leave of the Bo1.rd of Enquiry (5) Sub1ect as aforesaid the prov1s1ons of clauses 16 to 23 belo\v shall mutat1s mutandzs apply

BOARD OF ENQUIRY

14 (1) There shall be \v1th1n the Un1verstty a Board of Enquiry to be selected on each occasion on which H t~ called to s1t 1n the manner hereinafter prescnbed

9

STATUTE 6 4 Contd

(2) A Board of Enquiry shall consist of a Chairman two members of the full time teadung staff and two Sludents (3) At the regular March meeungof theAcadem1cConun11teeeach year the Registrar shall selecl by random selecuon two panels cons1sung respecuvely of fifty members of the full nme leachmg staff and ftfty studen1s These two panels shall be known as the Full ume Teaching Staff Panel and the Student Panel respectively and shall remain tn existence until the selecuon of the succeeding panel provided that tf any member of the Full time Teaching Staff Panel or the Student Panel shall cease to be a member of the full time teaching staff or a student that person shall thereupon cease to be a member of a panel (4) The Chauman of a Board of Enquiry shall be a pracUt1onerof the Supreme Court of South Australia who 1s not a member of th.eCounctl or of anyConun1tteeof the Un1vers1ty or a member of staff of the Un1versny ora student of the Un1vers1ty The Chairman shall be nominated by the President for the time being of the Law Society of South Austrah t Incotporated (5) Whenever a Board of Enquiry is called upon to sit the Registrar shall constitute a Board by (a) requesung the President of the Law Society of South Austraha Incorporated to nominate a person \vho shall be Chairman ol the Board for thal occasion and (b) making a random selecuon of two members of the full trme teadung staff panel and two members of the student panel 1n the manner prescribed below (1) the Registrar shall by making sud1 random selections as may be necessary and by consulung the persons so selected establish a hst of eight members of the full nme teaching staff panel and a hst of eight members of the student panel who are available and wtlhng to serve on a Board of Enquiry (u) the Registrar shall give the charged student or students and lhe University representative at least 7 days notice of the time date and place of lhe 1n1ual selecnon of the members of lhe Board of Enquiry (111) the charged student or students and the University representative shall each be entitled to be present at the in1ual selection of members of the Board but 1f any or all of them are not present the Registrar shall proceed with the 1n1ttal selection 1n their absence (1v) lhe Registrar shall by random selection proceed to make the 1n1t1al selectton of two members from each of the lists established under (1) above (v) lh.e charged student and the Un1verslly representauve shall if presenl each be entitled to challenge not more than three persons as they are selected by the Registrar w1lhout ass1gn1ng any reason (v1) where the Board 1s being consututed 10 hear charges against more than one student the charged students shall 1f present be entitled between them to challenge not more than 1hree persons as 1hey are selected by lhe Registrar \V1thout assigning any reasons and the University representative shall similarly be entitled to challenge not more than three persons (vu) the names of any persons challenged 111 accordance w1lh (v) and (v1) above shall be discarded for that Board of Enquiry and lhe Registrar shall make further random selections from the appropriate lists to replace them (v111) lhe members selected 1n accordance w1lh (1) to (vu) above shall be the members of lhe Board of Enquiry for that occasion provided lhat 1£ any person so selected shall pnor to conunencement of th.e hearing be unable or unwtlhng to participate or bedtsquahfted by the Chairman 1n accordance w·1lh sub clause 14(6) below the Registrar shall make a further random selccuon from the appropriate panel and 111 that event the person secondly selected shall unless unable or unw1lhng to paruc1patt take the place o( the person who had earlier s1gn1hed an 1nab1hty or unw1lhngness to part1c1pate and the Registrar shall conunue to make random selecuons from lhe appropriate panel unul two persons have been selected therefrom who are able and wllltng to actorunul thesa1d panel is exhausted (6) Once a Board of Enquiry has been conslltuted in accordance \V1th sub clause 14(5) above any challenge against a member of the Board by a charged student or the Un1vers1ty representative may be made only by spec1fy1ng 1n \Vrtttng the grounds for the challenge and after considering such grounds 1he Chairman of the Board shall have absolute d1scret1on to rule whelher or not lhe member concerned shall be dtsquahhed from sitting on the Board (7) The random selecuons referred to 1n sub clauses 11(3) and (5} above shall be made by lot or by such other process as lhe Registrar decides to be an appropnate random process and except as provided for 1n clause 14(3) shall be made by the Reg1strar1n the presence of

10

STATUTE 6 4 Contd

at least one member of the full time teaching staff and one student

(8) If a panel becomes exhausted before a full Hoard of Enquiry is constlluted a Board of three or four members may act provided that one of them 1s the Chairman appointed in accordance with this Statute (9) If on any occasion It is found to be 1mposs1ble to appomt a Board of Enquiry as here1nbefore provided the Chancellor may for the occasion 1n question appoint a Board of Enquiry compns1ng the Chauman and two members none of whom shall be members of the panels or members of the Appeals Committee and the Board of Enquiry so appointed shall be a Board of Enquiry w1th1n the meaning of this Statute The appointment by the Chancellor of a Board of Enquiry under this sub clause shall be conclusive evidence that it ts 1mposs1ble to appoint a Board of Enquiry as hereinbefore in this clause provided

15 The functions of a Board of Enquiry shall be (1) to hear and ad1udicate upon any charge or charges of misconduct which have been referred to tt in accordance with this Statute (2) to hear and ad1udicate upon any appeal referred to 1t 1n accordancewtth this Statute and (3) to impose any penalty tn accordance with this Statute and with Statute 6 5 Conduct of Examinations

16 (1) A Board of Enquuy constituted to hear a charge or charges of misconduct shall be empowered (a) to deal wtth a charge or charges of misconduct against another student or other students sub1ect to the consent of the student or students concerned and the University representative (b) to deal with another charge or other charges against the same student (c) to hear concurrently charges of misconduct against more than one student where the alleged offences anse from the same event provided that any charged student may request a separate heanng in which event the Chairman shall haveabsoluted1screuon to determine whether the Board shall conduct a separate heanng of the charges against that student (d) if ll forms the op1n1on that in the interests of JUSUce lt should do so either to refrain from deahng with any charge or charges of misconduct or at any stage of hearing a charge before H pronounces a decision to refrain from further heanng (2) If a Board of Enquuy refrains from heanng any charge or charges the Registrar shall select a new Board of Enquiry which shall have the power to deal wHh the charge or charges as if H had been ong1nally selected to deal with that charge or those charges

17 Whenever a Board of Enquiry has been constituted (I) the Chauman shall preside (2) the quorum shall be three persons of whom one shall be the Chairman (3) the Chatrman shall have a dehberat1ve but not an add1t1onal casting vote (4) the Registrar shall appoint a member of the adm1n1strative staff to act as Secretary of the Board (5) subject to the requnement of a quorum the Board shall conunue to act notwithstanding any vacancy tn Its membership (6) the Board shall conunue to act notw1thstand1ng that after H has been so constauted new panels have been selected (7) any member of the Board may continue to act notw1thstand1ng that since the Board was so constituted that member has ceased to be a student or a member of the teaching staff

18 If after the constnuuon of the Board of Enquny and before It has made us finding the Chauman shall die or become incapable by reason of accident illness or prolonged absence of con unuing to act as Chauman of the Board of Enquiry 1t shall be dissolved and the Registrar shall constitute a new Board of Enquuy which shall commence de nova A statement in wnung by the Chanman of 1ncapac1ty by reason of accident illness or prolonged absence of continuing to act as Chanman of the Board of Enquuy shall be conclusive thereof and in case the Chauman ts unable to make such a statement a statement of the Chancellor to the same effect shall be conclusive 1

' ' 19 To secure prompt heanng of complaints or appeals to be referred to a Board of Enquiry 'the Registrar shall constaute such number of Boards as the Vice Chancellor deems necessary or desuable

11

STATUTE 6 4 Contd

HEARING OF BOARDS OF ENQUIRY

20 In respect of a hearing before a Board of Enquiry the following prov1s1ons shall be observed (1) The Registrar shall give each charged student notice in wntu1g not less than twenty one days before the date of the heanng of the place and ume of the commencement of the heanng and of the students nghts under this clause (2) Each charged student shall be entitled to select one other student of the Un1versHy or one member of the staff of the Un1vers1ty (being in either case a person 'vill1ng to act) as the students adviser for the purposes of the heanng and the name of such adviser shall be notified 1n writing to the Secretary of the Board not later than two days before the date of the hearing (3) As an alternative to sub clause (2) above the student may elect to have a legal representative (being a pract1t1oner of the Supreme Court of South Australia) for the purpose of the hearing in which case the name of such legal representative shall be noufted in wnung to the Secretary of the Board not later than seven days before the date of the hearing but the Board may in Its d1scret1on at any ume and upon such terms as 1t thinks fa allow the student to have a legal representative nonv1thstand1ng an insufficiency or absence of notice (4) The Vice Chancellor shall appoint one member of the staff of the University to represent the University at the heanng provided that if a student elects to be legally represented at the hearing the Vice Chancellor may appoint a legal representative (being a pract1t1oner of the Supreme Court of South Australia) for the purpose of the hearing (5) Lach charged student the students adviser or legal representauve (1f any) and the Un1vers1ty representative shall be enutled to be present throughout the heanng except (a) 1f they or any of them fail to comply wtth a direction of the Chairman of the Board 10 which case the Board may continue the heanng tn camera tn the absence of any or all of them (b) when the members of the Board wish to confer among themselves or to consider their decision (6) Any hearing of a Board of Enquiry may proceed or continue in the :lbsence of the student the students adviser or legal representauve and the Universlly representative provided that proper notice has been given as to the ttme date and place of that heanng (7) The charged student or the students adviser (or legal representauve) but not both may call and examine any witness cross examine any witness called on the part of the Un1verslty and sub1ect to sub clause (9) below address the Board at the conclusion of the evidence (8) The Un1versay representative whether a legal representative or otherwise may call and examme wltnesses cross examine wiu1esses called on the part of the student and subject to sub clause (9) below address the Board at the conclusion of the evidence (9) (a) A Board of Enquiry may rn Its d1scret1on 1n any case before 1t determine that all submissions to the Board shall be in wnttng (b) Whenever any subm1ss1on has been received by the Board 1n wnung thL Board the student and the Universuy representative shall each have the right to cdll before It the author of such subm1ss1on and to quesuon the author on any matter set out in the subm1ss1on (c) After the University has made a wnuen subm1ss1on to the Board a copy of any wntten subm1ss1on made to the Board by or on behalf of a student charged shall be supphcd to the University representative who shall be entttled to make an answenng submission 1n wnung to the Board and vice versa (IO) A heanng of the Board shall be tn pnvateunless the student elects that llshall be open to members of the University provided that when two or more students are charged before the Board and their election under this sub clause differs the heanng shall be in pnvate (I I) At every heanng the Board shall have complete authority to keep order tn the proceedings 1nclud1ng the authonty to order any person to leave because of unruly conduct and It may order that an open heanng be continued in pnvate 1£ 1n Its op1n1on order cannot be otherwise kept (12) Subject to this Statute and to any rules or regulations made thereunder the procedure of the Board 1nclud1ng the order in which evidence may be called and addresses heard is tn the discreuon of the Board

12

STATUTE 6 4 Contd

21 (I) A student shall be guilty of misconduct if in the opinion of the maJonty of the Board including the Chairman the student (a) wilfully interrupts the proceedings of 1ny Board (b) acts in an insolentmannertotheBoardoramembertnereotdunng the s1Lt1ngs thcrco( (c) 10 the presence of the Board obstructs or assaults any person 1n attendance or any officer of the Un1verslly tn the execuuon o[ duly (d) w1lfully disobeys any duecuon made by the Board to lea\e and remain outside the place where the Board 1s meeting (e) \Vtlfully prcvancates in g1v1ng evidence to the Board (2) The Board in whose presence any offence under this clause is commuted may forthwith impose on that student one or both of the following pcnalues (a) a fine of up to $40 (b) suspension for not more than 28 days of the nght to enter or be on the land and premises of the Un1versHy or any specified bu1ld1ng or land of the Un1versHy or any specified part thereof (3) Every such penally sh tll be good and valid without J.ny other order or adJud1cat1on whatsoever (4) If any student found guilty of misconduct under sub section (I) hereof makes to the Board before its ns1ng such an apology for the misconduct as the Board in its uncontrolled discretion deems sausfactory the Board may if It thinks ht remll thcpenalty c11.herwholly or 1n part

22 The findings of a Board of Enquiry together \Vtth the Board s reasons and any penalties imposed by 1l shall be pubhshcd 1n wnung

23 Any findings and penalties handed down by a Board of [nqu1ry shall be 1eported to the next succeeding meeting of dte Council and recorded 1n the mn1utes of that meeung

PENALTIES OF BOARDS OF ENQUIRIES

24 A Board of Enquiry may impose any one or more of the follo\vtng penalues (I) a fine of up to $40 (2) suspension from attendances J.l classes (3) suspension from use of labordtoncs (4) suspension from use of the hbrary (5) suspension of the nght to enter or be on the land and premises of dte University or any spec1f1ed budding or land of the Un1verslty or any spec1f1ed pd.rt thereof (6) exclusion or suspension fro1n dttcndance at any exammat1on imposed pnor to or dunng the currency thereof (7) cancellauon or refusal or credit for any exam1nauon 1n any case \vhcrc cheaung or dishonesty 1n exam1nat1ons is estabhshed (8) expulsion from the Un1vcrs1ty for a spec1f1ed period (9) expulsion from the Un1versny and 1n add1t1on thereto or 1n substitution therefor may order th'l.t resutuuon be made to the Un1versny or any other organ1sauon or person of any property taken or removed or for any damage to property or loss incurred as 'l. result of any act of misconduct

25 Any penalty imposed bya Board of Enqu1ry may be suspended by the Board upon such terms as the Board may determine

26 (1) A student who has been expelled from the University (othervnse than fora spec1flcd penod) shall not be re enrolled except by the perm1ss1on of the Council (2) A student who has been expelled from the Un1versHy for a specified penod shall not have any of the nghts and pnv1leges of an enrolled student or be re enrolled dunng the penod of such expulsion (3) A student whose nght to enter or be on the l 'l.nd and premises of the U n1ve1 s1ty has been suspended by a Board of Enquiry pursuant to clause 24 or by the Appeals Comm1tteeon an appeal from a Board o[ Enquny shall not have any of the nghts and pnv1lcges of an enrolled student or be re enrolled dunng the penod of suspension

13

STATUTE 6 4 Contd

APPEALS COMMITTEE

27 (1) The Council shall at Its regular March meeting each year appoint an Appeals Committee cons1st1ng of five members of the Council including one student 1nember unless no student member 1s \V1lhng to accept appointment (2) The Council may at any tune fill any vacancy in tl1e membership of the Appeals Conun1ttee (3) A quorum of the Appeals Committee shall be three and it may conunue to act notw1thstand1ng any vacancy 10 us memberslup (4) Where the Otancellor is of the op1n1on that a member of the Appeals Commatee is involved 10 or tn connection wnh a matter under reference or appeal to the Committee or has sat as a member of the Board of Disc1phne from \V}11ch the appeal is made lhc member shall not participate 10 the Conun1uee s consideration of that matter and his place may be taken by another member of the Council appointed by the Chancellor to do so

28 A student may appeal from thehnd1ngs of or the nnpos1t1on of any penalty by a Board of Enquiry other than underclause21 to theAppealsComm1tteewh1ch tnay affirm annul or vary the fmd1ngs and may also or altemanvely affirm annul reduce or increase any penalty or impose another penalty 1n as place The dec1s1on of the Appeals Conunittec upon an appeal ts final and conclus1ve and shall be reported to the next succeedmg meeung of the Council and recorded 111 the minutes of that meeung

29 (I) An appeal shall be 1nst1tuted by nouce 1n wnt1ng lodged with the Registrar by the student concerned wtthtn fourteen days after the decision appealed against has been not1f1ed to the student (2) The nouce shall specify concisely the nature and grounds of the appeal and whether the whole or part only and which part of the decision appealed against ts compla1nedof and shall also state with suff1c1ent paruculanty the grounds of such complaint and except by leave of the Appeals Conun1ttee the appellant shall not be enutledat the heanngof the appeal to rely on any ground not so stated (3) The Appeals Conun1ttee may refuse to hear any appeal which in its d1scret1on 1t considers does nol comply with the requuements of due notice 30 (1) The Registrar shall cause to be transmuted to the Appeals Committee the record of the proceechngs before the Board of Enquiry together with any documents or things received m evidence on the heanng before the Board of Enqurry (2) No evidence shall be received on the heanng of the appeal other than such transcript and documents and things except by leave of the Appeals Committee (3) Subject as aforesaid the Appeals Commatee shall observe mulatis mutandts the provisions made 111 respect of Boards of Enquiry 1n clauses 17 and 20 above

GENERAL

31 (1) In the 1mpos1tton of any penalty under this Statute the authority imposing the penally shall take cognizance of any other penalty imposed upon the sludenl by any authonty outside the University 1n respect of or anstng oul of the same misconduct (2) If any penalty IS imposed by an authonty outside the Un1vcrsay tn respect of misconduct which has already been penalised under this Statute or if for any other reason n may seem desuable an authonty empowered to impose a penalty under thtsStatutemay remll suspend on such terms as n may think proper terminate or reduce the penalty or replace It by another penalty to which the student agrees to submtt An agreement by a student to subm1l to a penalty does not prejudice any nghtof appeal against the findings of the authonty

32 (I) A fine unposed under this Statute shall be paid into the general funds of the Un1vers1ty (2) A fine imposed under this Statute ts payable w1th1n fourteen days gf its 1mpos1t1on or if the hne ts imposed 1n absentia w1th1n fourteen days of receipt by the student of not1hcauon of its 1mposition provided that an extension of time for payment may be granted by the person or body 1mpos1ng the fine and provided also that payment of a fine

14

STATUTE 6 4 Conld

shall be suspended while an appeal from the decision imposing it 1s in progress

33 If a srudent does not comply with any penalty properly imposed under this Statute the Registrar shall report the matter to the Counctl and 1f the Counctl 1s satisfied that the penalty has not been comphed wt th 1 t may by resolution expel the student concerned for a penod of one year

34 A Board of Enquiry and the Appeals Committee may proceed with the hearing of any charge of alleged misconduct by a student or of any appeal and may impose any penalty in respect thereof in accordance with this Statute notwithstandmg that subsequent to the alleged offence the person concerned ceased to be a student of the Un1verslly

35 Any nonce requued to be given to a student under thtsStatuteshall be sufhcient1f it ts given In person to the sruden tor is sent by Registered post or cerufied mail addressed to the student at the last address known to the Registrar as the srudent s place of residence and when given by post shall be deemed to have been received by the student at the exptry of four clear days after posting

36 (1) The Council ts empowered to make rules or reguld.tions not 1ncons1stent with the Act or any Statute fo,r the maintenance of order within the Un1vers1ty and for carrying out or giving effect to this Statute (2) Notlung tn this Statute affects the power of any person or body in the Un1vers1ty duly authorised to administer any University regulauon not inconsistent wnh this Statute and tn parttcular nothing in this Statute affects any power of any person or body witlun the Uni verstty to preclude a student from a course or otherwise deal with the student s case by reason of failure to satisfy academic requirements

37 (I) Statute 6 4 D1sc1pltne enacted on the tenth day of December 1970 is repealed (2) Notwithstanding such repeal (a) The Full time Teaching Staff Panel and the Student Panel appointed under the repealed Staru.te and In office 1mmediately before such repeal shall until a Full time Teadung Staff Panel and a Student Panel are first appointed pursuant to sub clause 14(3) of this Statute respecuvely conunue In office and be deemed to be panels appointed under this Sta tu te (b) The Appeals Committee appointed under the repealed Statute and In office immediately before such repeal shall be deemed to have been appointed under this Statute and shall continue tn office unul an Appeals Committee ts first appointed underclause27 of this Statute (c) Any complaint of misconduct made under the repealed Statute and not disposed of before such repeal may be dealt with under the prov1s1ons of the repealed Statute which shall con unue in force so far as necessary for that putpose (3) Such repeal shall not (a) Affect the operation of the repealed Statute or alter the effect of the doing suffering or om1ss1on of anything pnor to such repeal or (b) Affect any duty obhgat1on or hab1hty imposed created or Incurred or any penalty forfeiture or punishment Incurred or imposed or hable to be incurred or Imposed pnor to such repeal or (c) Affect any proceeding or remedy In respect of any such duty obligation ltabihty penalty forfetture or punishment as aforesaid

RULES MADE UNDER CLAUSE 36(1) OF

STATUTE D 4 MAINTENANCE OF ORDER

l A Board of Enquiry may drrect that tn respect of any sitting of any open heanng all observers be requtred to idenufy themselves before being admitted to the meeting room

2 No heanng of a Board of Enquuy shall proceed for longer than ten hours on any one day or continue past the hour of 10 pm on any day \ 1

3 Each Board of Enquiry shall ma1nta1n a complete record of us hearmg by such method as the Board may reasonably determine and arrange

15

STATUTES 6 4 to 6 5

4 One copy of the record of the heanng or any part thereof shall be made available to the student charged or the students adviser (or legal representative) on request to the Secretary of the Board

5 At the conclusion of the heanng of any matter referred to it the Board of Lnqu1ry may subject to the consent of the student charged and the University representattve duect that the full record of Its heanng or any part thereof be transmitted to the Library where H shall be accessible to any member of the Un1vers1ty

6 5 Conduct of Examinations

A student shall not dunng any exam1nat1on (1) have in his possession any books notes or dtagrams other than those which the examiners have specified may be taken into that particular cxaminatton or (2) duectly or induectly give assistance to any other student or (3) directly or 1ndrrectly accept assistance from any other student or (4) permit any other student to copy from or otheiw1se use hts papers or (5) use any papers of any other student or (6) by any other improper means whatever obtain or endeavour to obtain duectly or 1nd1tectly assistance 1n hts work or give or endeavour to give directly or 1nduectly assistance to any other student or (7) be guilty of any breach of good order or propnety

2 When a student is alleged to have committed a breach of any of the provisions of thts Statute a complaint shall be made 1n respect thereof to the Board of D1sophne and such complaint shall be dealt with under the prov1s1ons of the Statute 6 4 D1sc1phne and tf the complaint is found proved the student tn addition to any other penalty which may be imposed by the Board of Discipline shall lose that examination

3 A student who rs detected comm Hung or apparently commnttng a breach of any of the prov1s1ons of this Statute shall be summanly dismissed from the exam1nat1on room

4 A student may not communicate wlth a member of the teaching staff of the University on any matter relating to any exam1natton between the holding of that exam1nauon and the pubhcatton of the results""

All such enqun1es should be dnec1ed to the Registrar

16

STATUTE 7 !J

7 3 Masters Degrees

l There shall be degrees of Master of Arts Master of Arts (Drama) Master of Economics Master of Educauon Master of Educational Admnustratlon Master of Psychology Master of Social Adm1n1strauon Master of Science and Master of Science in Clinical Biochemistry These degrees shall be adm1n1stered by the Academic Committee which shall have regard to the recommendations of the Boards of the Schools

2 A person who wishes to become a candidate fora masters degree shall make application to the Registrar submnung an outline of the studies the person proposes to pursue and details of the person s qual1hcat1ons for undertaking them A person who ts not a graduate of the University shall submit documentary evidence of the persons qualifications and academic record

3 A person who holds an Honours Degree of the Un1vers1ty or who holds quahhcauons deemed by the Board of the appropnate School to be at least equivalent to an Honours Degree of the University may be accepted for enrolment as a candidate for a degree of Master (ET SEQ) provided that (a) the candidature and programme of studies have been approved by the Board of the appropnate Sd1ool (b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropnately supervised and that the appltcant IS Judged by the Board of the appropriate School to be qualified to undertake It and (c) the apphcant may be requued as a pre requ1slte for enrolment as a candidate to undertake and to complete to the sausfachon of the Board of the appropnate School such quahfy1ng exam1nauons as may be prescribed by the Board

4 A person who does not hold an Honours Degree of the Un1vers1ty or who does not hold quahhcattons deemed by the Board of the appropnate School to beat least equivalent to an Honours Degree of the Un1verslly will be required as a pre requ1slle to enrolment as a candidate to undertake such topics and to complete to the sausfaction of the Board of the appropnate School such quahfy1ng examinations as may be prescnbed by the Board provided that (a) the candidature and programme of studies have been approved by the Board of the appropriate School and (b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropriately supervised and that the applicant Is 1udged by the Board of the appropriate School to be quahhed to take it

5 Notwithstanding the prov1s1ons of clause 4 the Academic Committee may 1n special cases and subject to such cond1t1ons as theCommitteemay prescribe 1n each case accept as a candidate a person who does not hold a degree of a University or a quahhcat1on deemed by the Board of the appropriate School to be at least equivalent to a degree of a Un1vers1ty but who has given evidence satisfactory to the Committee of hmess for masters studies and whose candidature ls supported by the Board of the appropriate School

6 The Academic Committee may accept a candidate at any ume and shall specify the month from which the candidature shall be dated

7 The Academic Committee may accept at any ttme a student takmgqualify1ng topics or examinations as pre requisite to enrolment as a candidate and shall specify when the student shall enrol and the amount of ume which shall be permitted for the completion of those topics or exam1nat1ons

8 When an applicant has been accepted as a candidate or as a qualifying student the applicant shall enrol as a student in the appropnateSchool of the University and shall pay the appropnate fees

9 A srudent shall re enrol dunng the prescnbed enrolment penod each year until such time as (a) the student has completed to the sausfact1on of the Board of theappropnateSchool all of the topics or exam1nattons required as a pre requisite to enrolment as a candidate or (b) the student has completed all work requued for the award of a Masters degree or (c) the student has ceased to be a student of the Un1vers1ty

10 A candidate may be accepted as a full ume student or a part ttme student but a part

17

STATUTE 7-' Contd

time student will be accepted only if the Board of the appropriate School is sat1shed that the student is able to devote sufhc1mt time to the approved studies and subject to such conditions as the Board may prescribe

11 For each student the Board of the appropriate School shall appoint one or more supervisors who shall be members of the academic staff of the University one of whom shall be appointed as the chief supervisor In special curumstances an add1t1onal supervisor who ts external to the University may be appointed In the case of students whose degree programme includes coursework a co ordinator for the coursework sub1ects shall be appointed 1n addttion to the thesis supervisor (if a thesis 1s required)

12 Where a student has only one supervisor and that supervisor ceases to be a member of staff of the U niverstty or 1s absent from the U nivers1ty for a period exceeding three months the Board of the appropriate School may after one month and shall after three months appoint a new supervisor or temporary supervisor who shall act in place of the supervisor

13 A student shall pursue the approved studies under the supervision of the appointed supervisor or supervisors to the satisfaction of the Academic Conun1ttee (and subject to any special condtt1ons that may be approved by the Committee) At the end of each academic year each supervisor shall submll a written report to the Board of the appropriate School on the work of each student under the Supervisors charge In ilie case of a qualtfying student or a candidate who 1s proceeding to a Masters degree euher \vholly or partly by coursework the annual report may take the form of a report of examinauon results to the Board of the appropriate School The Supervisor shall also report to the School Board when 1n the Supervisors opinion a student is not making satisfactory progress or 1s not fulhlltng the conditions prescribed for the candidature or appears unhkely to reach the standard required The School Board shall report accordingly to the Academic Comnuttee

14 If 1n the op1n1on of the Academic Committee a student is not making satisfactory progress ilie Comnuttee may terminate the enrolment of the student who shall thereupon cease to be a student of the Un1verslly

15 Schedules defining the nature and extent of the work to be completed by candidates and the fees to be paid by candidates and qualifying students shall be drawn up from ume to time by the Academic Committee Such schedules shall become effecuve from the date of approval by the Council or from such other dates as the Council may determine

16 On compleuon of the approved programme of studies a candidate proceeding to a degree either wholly or partly by thesis shall lodge wtth the Registrar four copies of ilie thesis prepared in accordance wHh the rules for theses approved by the Academic Committee

17 After considering the reports of the examiners of a candidate the Board of the appropriate School shall report to the Academic Commlttee whether tn Its view (a) the degree should be awarded or (b) the degree should be awarded sub1ect to minor amendments to the thesis as may be specified or (c) the candidate should be requued to take an oral examination or (d) the degree should not be awarded but the candidate should be permuted to resubmit the thesis or take such further exam1nat1on as the Board of the appropnaLe School shall prescribe or both or (e) the degree should not be awarded and the cand1date should not be allowed to present for the degree again

18 If after considerauon of a report of the Board of the appropriate School the Academic Commlttee agrees that a Masters degree should be awarded to a candidate it shall recommend accordingly to the Council

19 The Council shall admit to a degree any student who has fulfilled all of the conditions prescnbed for that degree

20 The Academic Committee may delegate to the School Boards any or all of its powers and functions specified 1n clauses 5 6 7 and 13 of thts Statute

21 A School Board may delegate to Hs Examinations Board lts Standing Committee or any other spec1hed committee of the Board any or all of us functions specified in this Statute or 1n any Schedule to tlus Statute Any such delegauon of functions must be reported to the Academic Committee

18

STATUTE 7 5 Contd

SCHEDULE 1 THE DEGREES OF MASTER OF ARTS, MASTER OF ECONOMICS AND MASTER OF SCIENCE

1 A candidate may not qualify for the degree of Master of Arts Master of Economics or Master of Science until the expuauon of one year from the date upon which the candidate qualified for an honours degree of the University or HS approved equivalent or two years from the date upon which the cand1datequahf1ed for the ordinary degree of the Un1verslty or HS approved equivalent

2 Except by perm1ss1on of theAcademicComm1uee a full t1mecand1date shall pursue the approved studies for the Masters degree for not more than two years and a part ume candidate for not more than three years from the month from which the candidature was dated

3 When approving a candidate s programme of studies the Board of the appropriate School shall determine whether the degree shall be taken by examination or by thesis or by both

4 Any School which offers a Masters degree either wholly or partly by coursework and exam1nauon may specify the programme of studies for that degree in an appendix to this Schedule

5 At least three months before a candidate 1s due to submtt a thesis to the Registrar for examinauon or to complete the prescribed work in the case of a Masters degree by examinauon the candidates supervisor shall noufy the Board of the appropnate School and shall recommend the appointment of examiners

6 The Board of the appropnateSchool shall appoint two or more examiners at least one of whom shall be external to the Un1vers11y except that for students in the School of Social Sciences proceed1nJ? to the Master of Arts or Master of Economics degrees either wholly or partly by examtnauon the thesis component shall be examined by at least one external examiner and each topic of the coursework programme shall be examined by at least two examiners who may be internal or external to the Universlly

7 The examiners shall each submit to the Board of the appropriate School a wntten report on the students thesis and in the case of students proceeding to the degree either wholly or partly by coursework a report of the exam1nat1on results of each coursework topic

APPENDIX A

MASTER OF ARTS AND MASTER OF SCIENCE BY COURSEWORK IN THE SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

1 The Board of the School shall appoint a Committee of three including the students Supervisor to oversee the students programme of studies The student shall do the work required of him by the Comma tee

2 The Commntee shall approve each term the courses or essays being undertaken and shall report the details to the Board

3 The student shall pass six approved topics (lecture courses or seminars) at honours or post graduate level of which at least three shall be an advancement on the standard programmes of the honours year

4 In addtt1on to work described 1n paragraph 3 above the student shall give approximately half of his time to study under the detailed superv1s1on of his Supervisor and shall wnte a number of essays on topics approved by his Commlltee Such essays should be ong1nal and presented in adequate form in terms of style and content They should embody the results of independent study and reflection but need not contain original mathemaucal results The number and length of these essays may be vaned at the d1scret1on of the Committee but should not exceed six essays of about ten pages each

19

STATUTE 7 S Contd

5 The students Committee may if it deems flt ask the student as a formal requirement to present a public seminar on his work

6 For each student on the recommendation of the appropnate Committee the Board shall appoint an Examining Committee of three examiners of whom at least one must be external to the Un1vers1ty The Exam1n1ng Committee shall meet at the appropnate lime to conduct the examinauon of the candidate and shall report its findings to the Examinauons Board of the School

7 In lts assessment of the candidate the Exam1n1ng Committee will take into cons1derauon the results obtained by the candidate in the six approved topics the essays written by the candidate and the report of the candidates Supervisor It may in add1t1on administer to the candidate any further tests oral or wntten that tt considers necessary

8 The Examining Committee shall make one of the following recommendations (a) That the degree of Master of Arts or Master of Soence (as appropnate) be awarded (b) That the candidate do further spec1f1ed work before undergoing a re exam1nat1on ( c) That the degree be not awarded

APPENDIX B

THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF SCIENCE IN CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY IN THE SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

I In order to be admitted to the course of studies leading to the degree a candidate must have quahfted for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Science of the Un1vers1ty 1nclud1ng ma1or approved studies in Biochemistry or Chemistry the degree of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery of the University or for an equivalent degree or quahftcallon approved by the Board of the School of Medicine

2 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Science in Chn1cal Biochemistry a candidate shall sausfactonly complete the coursework (Part One of the requuements) and ong1nal research (Part Two of the requirements) prescnbed by this Schedule

3 The topics constttuttng the course of studies for the degree are

Part One 94501 Analytical B1ochem1stry 94502 Chnical Laboratory Practice 94503 Laboratory Management 94504 Chemical Pathology 94505 Practical Chn1cal Chemistry

Part Two 94506 Research Pro1ect and D1ssertauon for MSc

in Chnical Biochemistry

9 unlls 3 units 3 units 9 units

12 unns

36 unus

4 The content of the topics shall be prescnbed from ume to ume 1n the syllabuses

5 The topics compnsing Part One of the requirements for the degree must be completed satisfactonly before presentation of the dissertation embodying the results of the research pro1ect compns1ng Part Two of the requuements

6 Wnlun twelve months of the students admission to candidature for the degree the Board of the School of Med1c1ne shall approve the sub1ectmatterof the students proposed research pro1ect and d1ssertauon and shall appoint a member of staff to supervise the proposed research

7 The Board of the School of Medicine shall appoint two examiners at least one of whom shall be an external examiner to examine the d1ssertat1on presented 10 fulfilment of the requuements of Part Two of the course of studies and to examine the student orally on the research constttuting the sub1ect matter of the d1ssertauon

20

STATUTE 7 3 Contd

SCHEDULE 2 THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF ARTS (DRAMA)

A person may be accepted as a candidate for the degree of fvlaster of Ans (Drama) 1f he holds an Honours dei;ree of the Un1versuy with a ma1or in Drama or professional experience or quahflcauons deemed by the Board of the School of Human1ues to be at least equivalent to an Honours degree of the Un1vers1ty with a ma1or Ul Dram.i

2 To qualify for the degree of Master of Arts (Drama) a candidate shall complete sausfactonly a course of studies representing two years of full time study \vhich shall be specified in each case by the Board of the School of Human1ues The Board may specify a programme of studies for the degree tn an appendix to this schedule

3 Except \Vlth the permission of the Bodrd of the School of Human1ues a full time candidate shall pursue .i programme of approved studies for the degree for not more than two years and a part ume candidate for not more than three years from the month from which the candidature was dated

4 At least three months before a candidate 1s due to submit a thesis to the Registrar for exam1natton or to complete the prescnbed work for the degree the candidates Supervisor shall noufy the Board of the School of Humantttes and shall recommend the appointment of examiners

5 The Board of the School of Humanities shall appoint at least one exam1ne1 who shall be external to the Unrversuy 6 The examiners shall each submit to the Board of the School of Human1ues a written report on the cdndtdate s thesis or performance 1n exam1nat1ons or both

SCHEDULE 3 THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF EDUCATION

A person m.t) be accepted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Education 1£ that person holds the Diploma 111 Educ'1.t1on or the Degree of Bachelor of Education or the degree of Bachelor of Educatton (Physical Education) of the Un1vers1ty at d level approved by the Board of the School of Education or a quahficatlon deemed by the Board to be at least equivalent to Diploma 1n Educauon or the Degree of Bachelor of Educauon or the Degree of Bachelor of Educauon (Physical Educauon) of the University

2 A candidate may not quahfy for thedegree of Master of Educauon unul the exp1rat1on of one yedr from the date upon wluch the c.ind1datequahfted for an Honours degree of the Un1versny ortts approved equ1valen t or t\VO years from the date upon which the candidate quahf1ed for an ordinary degree of the Un1versuy or Its ipproved equivalent

3 Except by perm1ss1on of the Board of the School of Education a full time candidate shall pursue those approved studies for the degree of Master of Lducauon for not more th.in three years and a part ume candidate for not more than six years from the month from \Vhtch the candidature was dated

4 The Board of the School of Education may specify the programme of studies for the degree tn an appendix to thts Schedule

5 At least three 1nonths before a student is due to submit a thesis to the Registrar for exam1nallon the candidates supervisor shall nottfy the Board of the School of Lduc'llton and sh'lll recommend the appointment of examiners The Board shdll dppoint two or more examiners at least one of \vhom shall be external to the Un1verstty

6 The examiners shall each submit to the Board of the Sd1ool of Education a wntten report on the student s thesis

APPENDIX

THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF EDUCATION

1 To quahfy for the degree of Master of Education candidates shall sausfactonly complete a programme repre<;ent1ng two years of full ttme study The programme shall consist of two parts

21

STATUTE 7' Contd

2 Part I shall comprise 36 coursework units selected from the following topics two being selected from Group A

at least

Group A 53510 Educauonal Psychology 53520 Philosophy of Educatton

[

3530 Sociology of Education or l'.i3535 Education and Social Theory

[

3550 History of Western Educatton Social Class and the Educatton System

or 3555 Schoohng Systems

53560 Statistics and Research Methods 1n Education 53501 Comparative Education

Group B 53640 The Handicapped Child 53570 Science Education 53590 Educational Evaluation Issues Models

and Techniques 53620 Physical Education Current Development and

Research in Theory and Practice 53565 53502 53503

Teruary Education Directed Study Directed Study

(9 units) (9 unus) (9 untts)

(9 unlls)

(9 units)

(9 untts) (9 units) (9 untts)

(9 untts) (9 units)

(9 unas)

(9 units) (9 untts)

(4\i units) (9 units)

A candidate holding the honours degree of Bachelor of Educatton or Its equivalent may be granted status for part or all of Part I

3 Failure to achieve a grade of C or better 1n at least one topic 1n each year of enrolment in Part I wtll consutute pnma facie evidence of unsausfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 clause 14

4 Part II shall compnse (1) advanced coursework consisting of intensive reading under the guidance of an intenm supervisor leading to the submission of a dissertation proposal Bl which an intended research pro1ect is delineated and JUstihed The proposal shall be examined by a commtttee which shall either accept the proposal re1ect It or require that tt be re submitted w1th1n a stated ume The proposal shall be submitted w1th1n one term of enrolment 1n Part II 1n the case of full time students and wttlun two terms of enrolments tn Part II 111 the case of part time students 1

(11) the preparauon of a dissertauon embodying the outcome of the proposed research

5 In no case shall the ume available for Part II be less than one year full ume 01 two years part time

SCHEDULE 4 THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY

A person may be accepted as a candidate for the degree of M'l.ster of Psychology 1f the person holds an Honours degree of the Universlly tn the held of Psychology or a degree which entailed four years of study in Psychology orqualthcat1onsdeemed by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be at least equivalent to these

2 To qualify for the degree of Master of Psychology a candidate shall sat1sfactonly complete a course of studies representing t'vo years of full tune study

3 Satisfactory completion of 72 unns of work shall include at least 12 units of supervised practicum and a 6 unit dissertation Coursework shall include four half year topics together with options selected from those 4 unit topics designated by the Board of the School of Social Sciences Coursework shall normally be examined by the instructors

The Pan of 4(1) which specifies nme hmn; for the submission of thesis proposal does not apply 1ocand1d'ltesenrolkd m Part II pnor m 1977

22

STATUTE 7 3 Contd

4 l!.xcept by permission of die Board of the School of Social Sciences a full t1mecand1date shdll pursue the approved studies for the M'lster s Degret for not more than two years and apart tune candidate for not mote than three years from the month which thecandtd.tture was dated 5 The Board of the School of Social Sciences rnay specify the programme of studies for the degree 111 an appendix to tlus Schedule

6 A research 1nvest1gauon shall be undertaken which 'v11! contribute to the overall assessment Exren1al examiner<> may be asked to assess the thesis butord111anly this will be carried out 1nterna1ly by at least two examiners

SCHEDULE 5 THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION

I A person may be accepted .is 'l car1dtdate for the degree of rviaster of Soc1'll Adm1111strauon 1f that person holds the degree of Bachelor of Social Ad1n1111strat1on of the Universuy w·11.h hti:,h credll or chstinction 111 the course or quahhc 1t1ons deen1ed h} the Bourd of the School of Soc1 ll Sciences to be equivalent to these

2 To qualtfy for the debrtc of Master of Sooal Adrn1n1stratton a c1.nd1datt shall sat13facto1lly co1nplete48 units rtpresenunf:, one} ear off ull ume study and co1np11s1ng 24 unus by thesis and 24 unus by coursework 3 The Board of the School of Social Sciences 1na} specify thep1ogrunn1cof 5tud1ts for the dcf:,rce in an appendix to tins Schedule

4 fhe Board of thc'ichool of Son al Sctencts shall appoint two or more ex 11111ner3 .it least one of whom shall be external to the Un1versll} for the thesis and for the cou1se\\Or!.. pro~ra1nme each topic of the programme shall bee.,,am1ned byatle'l!:>l twoexa111111u3 who muy he tnte1nal or external to the Un1vers1ty

SCHEDULE 6 THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION

1 For admission to the course of studies for the degree of Master of Educauonal Adm1n1strauon candidates (1) shall have met one of the follow1ng requirements (a) qualthcauon for the degree of Bachelor of Educauon of the Un1vers1ty or for an approved degree of another 1nsutu uon or (b) quahhcauon for a post graduate Diploma in Educauon of the Untverstty or for an approved post graduate Diploma in Education of another 1nst1tul!on (c) sausfactory completion of an approved four year course of teacher preparauon at a ternary institution or (d) such other special quahf1c'lUons as are <1cceptable to the Board of the School (2) shall have not less than two years relevant work expenence (3) shall have their candidature approved by the Chairman of the School or the Chairman s nominee

2 The Board of theSchool 1n special cases and subject to such cond1uons as the Bo'lrd may prescnbe tn each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not qualified for a degree or who has less than two years relevant cxpenence but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To qualify for the degree the candidate shall sausfactonly co1nplete 72 unas

(1) The untts shall include (a) 58651 Evolving Concepts of administration (4~unns)

(b) 58656 Research methods for the adm1n1strator

23

STATUTE 71

(c) 53657 (d) 53658 (e) 53685

The Australian educauon system The planning process Research pro1ect

36 uni ts chosen from the follow1ng topics (£) 53652 Patterns o( organ1sauon and

organ1sat1onal change (g) 53653 (h) 53654 (1) 53655 (J) 53681 (k) 53682

Commun1cat1on and interpersonal relallons Planning techniques Personnel in educauon S)Stems The organ1sauonal process Current issues and problems 1n educauon (Educauonal Adm1n )

(1) 53683 Alten1ative educational str'lteg1es (m)4J.2 units chosen from the £0I1ow1ng topics

53671 Planning and adm1n1stenng the educauonal programme

53672 I:conomics of education 53673 Concepts of work leisure and recreauon 53674 The school .i.nd the communuy 53675 Computers and management 53676 Planning techniques II

(n) 4!7 units selected from the following topics provided that they have not previously been credtted to the degree 53684 Special interest topic

(Educauonal Administr'lnon) A topic selected from those listed 111 (m)

(4J.2unlts)

(18 units)

(4J.2unlts)

Candidates may with theapprovdlof theStand1ngComm1ueeof thLSd1ool i.ubstllutedn approved mai.ter s level topic for the top1c(s) listed under clauses (k) and (n) (2) Part ume candidates ,..,.111 be required e>.cepl \Vllh the permission of the Standing Committee to take topic 53656 and either topic 53651 or topic 53658 tn their first semester of enrolment

4 Failure to achieve a grade of C or better in a top1cortop1cs tot'1lhng at lea!it nine unlls 111 each year of enrolment until all coursC\vork has bec.n completed ,..,.ill constitute prinia facie evidence of unsausfactory progress for the purposes of Statute 7 3 Clause 14

5 Except by perm1ss1on of the Board of the School full lime graduate students ~hall pursue their approved studies for Lhc degree of Master ofI:ducdllonal Adm1n1strauon fo1 not more than three ye'1rs and part time studenls for not more than six ye'1rs from the month from \Vh1ch thetr candidature , .. as dated

6 Cand1dales who dcsue that courses \\l'h1ch they have s'l.t1sfactonly completed u1 the Un1versuy or elsC\vhen. be credaed lo\vards the degree of Master of I ducauonal Admin1str.i.t1on may on wnnen appltcauon be granted such exempuon from the requirement~ of (3) as the Board sh.i.11 deternune

7 l!.xcept with the permission of l.he Board a student may not enrol 111 any year tn '1

combination of topics valued at more than 39 units

8 On completton of the work for the degree a candidate m.i.y be required to take an oral exam1n.i.t1on

7 4 Degrees of Doctor of Phzlosophy and Doctor of Med?c1ne

There shall be degrees of Doctor of Philosophy dnd Doctor of l\iled1c1ne These degrees shall be administered by 1.he Academic Com1n1ttee wluch shall have rebard to the recommendauons of the Boards of the Schools

2 A person who w·1shes to become a c ind1date fora doctoral degree shall mdkc apphcauon to the Registrar subm1tung an outline of the stud1e!i the person proposes to pursue and detalls of the person s quahftcauons for undert.i.k1ng them A person ,..,.ho 1s notdgraduate

24

STATUTE 7 4 Contd

of the University shall submll documenlary evidence of quahhcauons and academic record

3 A person who holds an Honours Degree of the Un1vers1ty or who holds quahhcat1ons deemed by the Board of the appropriate School to be at least equiv<1.lent to an Honours Degree of the University may be accepled for enrolment as a Doctor of Philosophy student provided that (a) the candidature and programme of studies have been approved by the Board of the appropriate School and (b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropriately supervised and that the apphcant is Judged by the Board of the .ippropnate School to be qualified to undertake it and (c) che <1.pplicant may be required as a pre requisite for enrolment as a doctoral student to under Lake and to complete to the satisfaction of the Board of the appropriate School sud1 qualifying exam1nat1ons as may be presented by the Board

4 A person who holds the degree of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery of the Universlly or who holds quahhcauons deemed by the Board of I.he School of Med1c1ne to be at least equivalent to the degree of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery of the University may be accepted for enrolment as a Doctor of Medicine student provided chat {a) the candidature and programme of studies have been approved by the Board of the School of Medicine and (b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and appropnately supervised and that the <1.pphcant is 1udged by the Board of the School of Medicine to be qualified to undertake lt and (c) che applicant may be required as a pre requisite for enrolment as a doctoral student to undertake and to complete to the sausfaction of the Board of the School of Medicine such qualifying examinations as may be prescnbed by the Board

5 A person who does not hold an Honours Degree of the University orwhodoesnothold quahhcationsdeemed by the Board of theappropnateSchool to be<1.t least equivalent to an Honours Degree of the Un1ver<;ity will be requ1ted as a pre requislle to enrolment as a doctoral student to underLake such topics and to complete to the sausfacuon of the Board of the appropriate School such qualifying exam1nallons as may be prescnbed by the Board provided that (a) I.he candidature and programme of studies have been approved by the Board of the appropnate School and (b) the proposed programme of studies can be conveniently pursued and supervised Wllhin the Universlly and that the applicant ts 1udged by the Board of the appropriate School to be quahhed to take lt

6 Not\v1thstand1ng the prov1s1ons of clause 5 the Academic Commtttee may in special cases and sub1ect to such condiuons as the Committee may prescnbe in eachcaseacceptasa doctoral student a person who does not hold a degree of a Un1verslty or a quahhcauon deemed by the Board of the appropnate Sd1ool to be at least equivalenl to d degree of a Un1vers1ty but who has given evidence sausfactory to the Committee of fitness for doctoral studies and whose candidature is supported by the Board of U1e appropn 1te School

7 The Academic Committee may accept a doctoral student at any time and shall specify the mooch from which the candidature shall be dated

8 The Academic Committee may accept at any time a student taking quahfy1ng topics or examinations as pre requ1s1te to enrolment as a doctoral student and shall specify \Vhen the student shall enrol and Lhe amount of umewhich shall be permitted for thecompleuon of those topics or exam1nauons

9 When an applicant has been accepted as a doctoral student or as a student taking qualifying topic<; or examinauons as a pre requisite to enrolment as a doctoral student the apphcant shall enrol as a student in the appropnate School of the Universlly and shall pay the appropriate fees

IO A student shall re enrol dunng the prescnbed enrolment penod each year until such tune as (a) the student has completed to the sat1sfo.cuon of the Board of theappropnate School all of the topics or exam1nat1ons required dS a pre requisite to enrolment as a doctoral student 0' (b) the student has completed all the work iequired for the award of a doctoral degree or

25

STATUTE 7 4 Contd

(c) the student has ceased to be a student of the Un1verstty

I I A doctoral student may be accepted as a full ume or part ume candidate but a part time candidate will be accepted only 1f the Board of theappropnateSchool 1s saushed that the part tune candidate is able to devote sufficient time to the approved studies and subject to such conditions as the Board may prescribe

12 For each student the Board of the appropnate School shall appoint one or more Supervisors who shall be members of the academic staff of the University one of whom shall be appointed as the Chief Supervisor In special circumstances an additional Supervisor who ts external to the University may be appointed

13 Where a student has only one Supervisor and th.it Supervisor ceases to be a member of the staff of the Un1vers1ty or 1s absent from the Un1versny for a penod exceeding three months the Board of the appropnate School may after one month and shall after three months appoint a new Supervisor or a temporary Superv1sor\vho shall act in place of the Supervisor

14 A student shall pursue the approved studies under d1e superv1s1on of the appointed Supervisor or Supervisors to the sausfacuon of the Academic Committee (and subject to any special condttlons that may be approved by the Comnuttee) At the end of each academic year each Supervisor shall submlt a wntten report to the Board of the appropnate School on the work of each student under the Supervisor s charge In the case of a student who 1s taking qualifying topics or exam1nauons the annual report may take the form of a report of examtnauon results to the Board of the appropnate School The Supervisor shall also report to the School Board when in the Supervisors op1n1011 a student ts not making satisfactory progress or ts not fulf1ll1ng the condiuons prescnbed for the candidature or appears unlikely to reach the standard requued

15 If tn the op1n1on of the Academic Commatee a student is not making s.it1sfactory progress the Committee may after consulung the Board of the appropnate School terminate the enrolment of the student \vho shall thereupon ce.ise to be a student of the Un1verstty 16 Schedules defining the nature and extent of the \vork to be completed by lhe candidates and the fees to be paid by candidates and students undertaking quahfy1ng studies shall be drawn up from time to time by the Academic Committee Such schedules shall become effective as from the date of approval by the Counctl or from such other date as the Council may determine

17 On compleuon of the approved programme of studies a student proceeding to a doctoral degree ellher wholly or partly by thesis shall lodge wtth the Registrar fourcoptes of the thesis prepared 1n accordance wnh the rules for theses approved by the Ac.idem1c Committee

18 After cons1denng the reports of the examiners of a candidate for a doctoral degree the Board of the appropnate School shall report to the Academic Commutee ,vhether 1n Its view (a) the degree should be awarded or (b) the degree should be awarded subject to minor amendments to the thesis as may be specified or (c) 1n the case of a candidate who has submitted a thesis for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy an appropnate Masters degree should be awarded or (d) the candidate should be required to take an oral exam1nauon or (e) the degree should not be awarded but the candidate should be permllted to resubmit the thesis or take such further exam1nauon as the Board of the appropnate School shall prescnbe or both or (f) the degree should not be awarded and the candidate should not be allowed to present for the degree again

19 If after cons1derauon of a report of the Board of theappropnateSchool the Academic Commatee agrees that a doctoral degree should be awarded to a candidate Jt shall recommend accorchngly to the Council

20 The Counctl shall admit to a degree any student who has fulftlletj all of thecond1nons prescribed for that degree

21 The Academic Committee may delegate to the School Boards any or all of us po,vers and functions spec1f1ed 111 clauses 6 7 8 and 14 of thts Statute

26

STATUTE 7 4 Contd

22 A School Board may delegate to its I:xam1nauons Board HS Standing Committee or other specified committee of the Board any or all of us functions specified in th1sStatuteor in any schedule to this Statute

SCHEDULE 1 THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

Except by permission of the Board of the appropnate School a full time candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy shall pursue the approved studies w1th1n the Un1vers1ty for a penod of not less than two and not more than four years and a part ume candidate for a penod of not less than three and not more than s1x years from the month from which the candidature was dated

2 The Board of the appropnate School may permit a candidate to pursue at another Un1vers1ty or approved insutuuon such part of the candidates studies as 1t thinks ht In such cases the candidate will be requtred to work for at least two years w1tlun the Un1vers1ty except that 1n exceptional ctrcumstances the Board may approve a reducuon in this penod under such cond1tlons as lt may determine in each case

3 In any year of the candidature a candidate may be permitted by the Supervisor to spend not more than nine weeks away from the Un1vers1ty on fieldwork but any penod of absence 10 excess of nine weeks must be approved in 1dvance by the Board of the appropnate School

4 At the conclusion of the approved studies or by the end of the fourth year from thedate of reg1suauon as a full time student or by the end of the sixth year of registration as a part ume student each candidate for the degree shall present a thesis embodying the results of the work done dunng the candidature and conta1n1ng a <;1gn1hcant contnbuuon to knowledge or scholarship w1tlun the scope of the subject provided that 1n exceptional circumstances and by special penn1ss1on of the Board of the appropnate School an extension of ume may be allo,ved

5 Matenal previously presented for any other degree shall not form a substantial part of the thesis presented for the degree

6 In the case of a candidate who ts requued to undertake quahfy1ng topics and exam1nauons any work undertaken before the completton of thequahfy1ngexaminauon shall not be presented for the degree wtthout the approval of the Board of the appropnate School

7 At least three months before a student 1s due to submn a thesis to the Registrar for examination the candidates Supervisor shall notify tl1e Board of the appropnatc School and shall recommend the appo1nunent of examiners

8 The Academic Commatee on the recommcndauon of the Board of the appropnate School shall appoint at least two examiners who shall be external to the Un1vers1ty and may appoint additional examiners

9 The examiners shall each submll to the Board of the appropnate School a wntten reporl on t.11e candidate s thesis

SCHEDULE 2 THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF MEDICINE

The degree of Doctor of Med1c1ne wtll be awarded for an onginal contnbutton of d1st1nguished ment to the knowledge or understanding of any branch of med1c1ne It will normally be awarded follow1ng the subm1ss1on of a thesis It may in exceptional cucumstances be awarded on the basis of pubhshed work

2 To be eligible to become a candidate for the degree of Doctor of Med1c1ne a person shall et th er hold the degree of Bachelor of MedicineandBachelorof Surgery of the University or hold the degrees of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Surgery or an equivalent degree of a Universtty other than the Fhnders University of South Austraha ipproved for this purpose by the Board of the School

27

STATUTE 74 Contd

3 The thesis or published work shall not be submitted until at least five years after the candidate has qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surbery or an equivalent degree nor until the candidate has spent at least frve years follo\ving graduauon substantially engaged in the pracuce and study of med1c1ne or 111 <;c1ent1flc work relevant to medicine

ADMISSION TO THE DEGREE BY THESIS

4 Candidates \Vho hold the degree of Bachelor of Med1c1ne and Bachelor of Sur~ery of Flinders University may carry out the studies and research to\vards the degree of Doctor of Mechc1newttlun the School of Medicine the Fltnders Medical Centre or any other place or places approved by the Board of the School of Med1c1ne

5 Candidates who hold the degrees of Bachelor of Med1c1nednd Bachelor of ~urgery or an equivalent degree from another 1nstitut1on will normally be required to complete al least six academic terms of the work for the degree w1th1n the School of Med1c1ne the Flinders Medical Centre or an approved affiliated 1nstltunon

6 The thesis shall be accompanied by four copies of a separate summary of notmo1e than 500 words 1ndicat1ng the problem invest1g1.ted the procedures used the general results obtained and the 1na1or conclusions reached but not containing .1.ny illustrauons or tables

ADMISSION TO THE DEGREE BY PUBLISHED WORK

7 A candidate w·1sh1ng to proceed to the degree on the basts of published work shall apply In wnt1ng to the Registrar on the prescnbed form g1v1ng particulars of the work the candidate proposes to submll together \vith a curriculum vtlae

8 If the candidature is approved by the Board of the School of Medicine the candidate shall lodge with the Registrar four sets of repnnts or copies of such work bound 10

accordance \Vllh the Rules for Higher Degree Theses

9 The bound \Vork shall Include (a) an tntroducuon descnbing the theme of the pubhshed work submated and staung ho'" the pubhcation 1s related to the theme The 1ntroductton must also indicate \Vhich portions of the work are claimed to be original (b) a statement which 111 the case of work earned outcon1ouitly clearly states the extent to wh1d1 the candidate was responsible for the 1n1tiat1on conduct and d1recuon of such con101nt research and (c) a statement which clearly indicates any portions of the work submitted that have previously been submitted for any degree tn the U1uvers1ty or any other inslltution (a candidate may not submll as the main content of the research undertaken any work or material which has previously been submitted for a University degree or other award)

IO To establtsh pnma facie worthiness for exam1nat1on of published work a candidate may before submitung publtshed work submit Lo the Board of the School of Med1c1ne (1) a hst of publications (u) the 1ntroduct1on 1equired by section 13 above and (111) a curriculum vztae

EXAMINATION FOR DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF MI:DICINE

I I On determ1n1ng that the thesis or published work 1s pnma facie worthy o( examinauon for the degree of Doctor of Med1c1ne the Board of the School shall recommend to the Academic Committee the appo1nt1nent of three examiners one o( whom shall be a member of the academic staff of the School and two of whom shall beexamtners extem'll to the Un1vers1ty

28

STATUTE 7 5

12 The examiners shall each submit to the Board of the School of Med1c1ne a wntten report on the candidate s thesis or published work

13 The Board of the School may require the candidate to pass an oral examtnauon upon the subject of the work undertaken and related matters Should the candidate be resident abroad the candidate may undergo this examinatton at any medical school approved by the Board provided that the candidate shall meet any expenses involved

7 5 Degrees of Doctor of Letters and Doctor of Science

1 There shall be a degree of Doctor of Letters and a degree of Doctor of Science

2 To be eltg1ble to become a candidate for a higher doctorate a person shall eHher be a graduate of the Un1vers1ty of at least hve years standing or hold equ1valentquahhcauons in another un1vers1ty or insutuuon recognised for the purpose by the University and have a substantial association wtth the University

3 A person wishing to become a candidate shall furnish satisfactory evidence that he has made a substantial and scholarly contnbut1on to the advancement of letters the arts or science On the basts of such evidence the Board of theappropnateSchool shall determine whether or not to accept lum as a candidate for the appropnate degree

4 The award of the degree shall bedeterm1nedon acons1derat1on of such of lus pubhshed work and any unpubhshed work that the candidate may submlt in support of his candidature

5 A candidate in subm1tt1ng his pubhshed or unpublished work shall state the main sources from which his 1nforrnat1on is denved and the extent to which he has availed himself of the work of others especially where JOtnt pubhcations are concerned A candidate shall indicate what part if any of the work submltted for the degree has been submitted for another degree in any university

6 The candidate shall lodgew1th the Registrar three copies•of the work submitted for the degree The Academic Committee on the recommendauon of the Board of theappropnate School shall appoint examiners at least two of whom shall be external to the University 7 After cons1denng the reports of the examiners the Board of the appropnateSchool may recommend to the Council that the degree be awarded

8 The fee to be paid on acceptance as a candidate shall be prescnbed from Ume to ume by the Council

Rules for Higher Degree Thesest

The form and method of reproduction of each thesis to be submitted for a degree shall be subject to approval as follows (a) a sample copy of each of four representative pages tn the form proposed by the candidate shall be submllted to the Libranan so that the method of reproduction may be approved (b) unless otheiwise approved by the L1branan theses shall be presented on quarto or A4 paper on one side of the paper only double spaced and with margins of at least 1J.21nches on the left hand side and 7.t 1nch on thenght hand side and sufhc1entat the top and bottom to allow for tr1mm1ng dunng b1nd1ng

2 Each thesis when submitted for a degree shall be 1n the form and by the mer.hod of reproducuon approved by the L1branan tn accordance with clause 1 above

"The Rules for l!agher Degree Theses apply for the presrnrnnon of unpublished material

tCand1da1es are advised to consult the following pubhrnuons for guidance m the preparauon of theses Australia CS IR 0 Gwde to authors (Melb CS IR O 195!1) Trelease SF How lo write sc enttf c and techmca/ papers (Ba\umore W1lhams & W1lkms 1958) Royal Society of London General notes on the preparation of sc1enl1f1c papers (Land Royal Soc1e1y 1950) Turab an KL Manual for wntas of term papers theses and dissertations rev ed (Chic Umv Pr 19,5) La Nau e J A Presentalion of hntor1cal theses nous for un un ly students (Melb Umv Pr 1966) Crutchley B Preparation of manuscripts and cor eel ons of proofs 2nd ed (Cambndge Umv Pr 1964)

29

RULES FOR THESES Contd

3 When the thesis is submitted for exam1natton four copies shall be lodged with the Registrar If the thesis or any part of 1t is typewritten the four copies shall include the original and the first carbon copy

4 The thesis shall incorporate in the following order

{a) a title page g1v1ng the tale of the thesis in full the names and degrees of the candidate the name of the School of the Un1versuy associated with the work and the date when submitted for the degree (b) a table of contents (c) a summary 111 not more than 500 words (d) the follow1ng declaration signed by the candidate

I certify that this thesis does not incorporate without acknowledgement any matenal previously submitted for a degree or diploma in any Un1vers1ty and that to the best of my knowledge and belief it does not contain any matenal previously pubhshed or wntten by another person except where due reference 1s made in the text

{e) an acknowledgement by the candidate of help given or work camedout by any other person or organisation (f) the main text (g) appendices if any (h) bibliography

5 Diagrams figures photographs etc should where pracucable be drawn or photographed on quarto or A4 paper All full page figures should form a right hand page with the legend either at the bottom or 1£ necessary on the page facing the figures Di3.grams maps tables etc exceeding quarto or A4 sue should be folded so as to read as a nght hand page when open If diagrams figures photography etc are to be mounted on a page a dry mounung process should be used

6 Wherever possible tables should be inserted in the appropriate place in the text but lengthy or bulky tables should appear as an appendix

7 The thesis shall be sewn trimmed and bound wllh suff covers covered with dark cloth

8 On the spine of the thesis shall be given in gold lettering of su1tables1ze the surname of the candidate and the utle of the thesis abbreviated if necessary If the lettering will not ht across the spine it shall run along the spine reading from top to bottom

9 When published papers are submitted as addiuonal evidence they shall be bound 1n the back of the thesis as an appendix 10 When a thesis is accepted for the award of a degree two copies shall be lodged by the Registrar in the Library and one copy shall not be available for loan In the case of a typewritten thesis the two copies shall be the ong1nal and the first carbon copy and the onginal copy shall not be available for loan In appropriate cases the second copy lodged 1n the Library may by arrangement with theL1branan be housed in a School This second copy must be available for loan to approved borrowers on demand

11 Unless otherwise approved by the Academic Committee u1 '1.ccordance wllh the provisions of clause 13 below access to theses accepted for the award of a degree shall be subject to the following cond1t1ons (a) academic staff and research students of the Un1vers1ty may consult any thesis without the pnor consent of the author (b) for three years after the degree has been awarded other readers must obtain the consent of the author or the head of the discipline concerned or the Ltbranan before being permitted to consult the thesis (c) for three years after the degree has been awarded no copy may be made of the thesis or part of It without the pnor consent of the author

12 When a thesis has been accepted for the award of a degree the author shall be asked if he ts prepared to waive the condiuons referred to 1n clause ll(b) and (c) above

13 A request from an author to place a specific restncuon on access to his thesis other than those referred to in clause 11 above will be subject to approval by the Academic Committee Such request will be considered by the Committee only on the grounds that the thesis contains confidenualmatenal or that1twasa cond1t1on imposed by the owner of pnvate records and matenal used by the author

30

STATUTES 7 5-7 8

14 Each person consulung a th es ts shall sign a statement acknow ledg1ng that he has been given access to the thesis for consultation only and that no part will be published or paraphrased without the pnor consent of the author and that the authors lnerary rights will be respected

7 6 Prizes and Scholarships

The Council may make rules governing the award of any pnze or scholarship w1th1n the University

2 The Council may vary the rules from time to ume but the tttleand purpose of any pnze or scholarship shall not be changed

3 Only students who are taking the relevant exam1nat1on or examtnallons for the first time shall be ehgtble for the award of any pnze or scholarship awarded on performance in such exam1nat1on or examinations

4 A pnze or scholarship shall be awarded only 1[ there is a student considered to be of sufhaent ment

7 7 Admission to Degrees

A candidate for adm1ss1on to a degree in the Universtty shall be presented by the Chatrman of the School in which he has quahhed for his degree to the Chancellor at a ceremony for the purpose at such ume as the Council shall determine Provided that the Chancellor may appoint a substttute for himself or for a Chairman and that a candidate may be admitted either in absentia or on attendance at a meeting of the Counal if the Counctl so approves

2 The forms of presentation for and adm1ss1on to a degree shall conform to the following-Form of Presentation Mr Chancellor I present to you

who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed for adm1ss1on to the Degree of

in the School of

Form of Admission In the name of the Un1vers1ty I admit you

to the Degree of tn The Fhnders Un1verstty of South Austraha

3 The Council may resolve to admlt any person honons causa to any degree for dtsttncuon in scholarship letters the arts or public service on the recommendation of the Honorary Degrees Committee which shall compnse the Chancellor the VICe Chancellor and the Chairmen of the Schools

4 The admission of a candidate to a degree of the Universtty shall be evidenced by a ceruhcate given under the common seal of the Universny

7 8 Academic Dress

1 The academic dress for undergraduates shall be a plain black gown wtth open sleeves

2 The academic dress for graduates of the University shall be go,vn hood and cap as set out 1n clauses 3 to 7 below

3 The gown shall be (1) for Bachelors a plain black gown wtth open sleeves sht verucally from the shoulders and caught together at the bottom of the sin

31

STATUTE 7 8 Contd

(2) for Masters a plain black gown with glove sleeves having horizontal sltts to free the arms (3) for Doctors of Philosophy a gown of dark blue wllh short wide sleeves the gown and sleeves faced with scarlet to the width of three inches (4) for Doctors (other than of Philosophy) a gown of scarlet with short wide sleeves the gown and sleeves faced with the same colour as the piping of the hood to the width of three inches

4 The hood shall be a rounded cape of dark blue without a hnp1pe (1) for Bachelors other than Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery hned with white and having coloured ptping to the width of half an inch (2) for Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery hoed with apple green (3) for Masters hned with pale blue and having coloured p1p1ng to the width of half an inch (4) for Doctors of Philosophy hoed wtth scarlet (5) for Doctors (other than of Phtlosophy) hned with scarlet and having coloured piping to the width of half an inch

5 The cap shall be (1) for Masters a black trencher cap with black tassel (2) for Doctors of Philosophy a black trencher cap with dark blue tassel (3) for Doctors (other than of Philosophy) a black velvet bonnet wtth dark blue cord and tassel

6 The colour of the p1p1ng shall be (I) for the degrees of Bachelor of Arts Master of Arts and Doctor of Letters gold (2) for the degrees of Bachelor of Science Master of Science and Doctor of Science mauve (3) for the degrees of Bachelor of Economics and Master of Economics dark red (4) for the degrees of Bachelor of Education Bachelor of Education (Physical Education) Bachelor of Special Education Master of Education and Master of Educational Administration tangenne (5) for the degree of Bachelor of Social Administration Master of Social Administration scarlet and (6) for the degree of Master of Psychology cerise

7 In the case of the degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery Bachelor of Medical Science (Honours) and Doctor of Medicine the colour of the lining or p1p1ng (as appropnate) shall be apple green

8 The styles and colours of gowns hoods pipings and caps shall be matched to standard samples held by the Registrar

9 The ceremonial dress for the Chancellor the Vice Chancellor and for other officers shall be as approved by the Counctl from ume to time

10 The ceremonial dress of members of the Council and of Boards of the Schools who are not graduates shall be the same as the academic dress for the Doctor of Philosophy but without the scarlet facings on the gown and without a hood

32

STATUTE 10 I Contd

10 I Bachelors Degrees and Diplomas

ExLept as provided in clause 4 the BaLhelors degrees and the diplomas offered in the Un1versuy and the SLhools in which the degrees and diplomas sh'111 be taken shall be those speL1hed in the appropnate 1sLhedules to this Statute

2 S<lledules and syllabuses as approved by the CounLil on the recommendauon of the Board of the appropnate School shall define theLourseof studies to be undertaken foreaLh ordinary Honours or post graduate BaLhelor s degree and for eath d1plom<1

3 A students programme of studies for the year shall be approved by the Chairman of the appropnate SLhool or lus nominee

4 On the reLommendauon of the Board of the School the ALademu. Committee may approve a students adm1ss1on to Land1dature for an Honours degree 1n that S<hool although the degree is not specified in the Schedules as be1ng avatlable in that SLhool provided that the degree is one which is offered in the Un1versay and that the student enrols for a programme of studies equivalent to a programtne of studies available for an Honours degree ln that SLhool

5 There shall be such c1ass1hLatlons of pass and fatl for topILs ln the ordinary and post graduate Bachelor s degree and in the diploma as shall be determined by the Coun<.il •

6 There shall be su<.h dassiftcauons for the Honours degree as shall be determined by the Coun<.Il i 7 A student \vho fails to quah(y for an Honours degree may be awarded an ordinary degree

8 A student who does not obtain grades of C or better u1 at least one thud of the units attetnpted in any two Lonsecuuve years of enrolment 1n the Universtty shall be precluded from enrolling again in the U111vers1ty unless and until permitted by the Coun<.11 on the recommendauon of the Board of the School in \vhtLh he wishes to enrol or re enrol and then only under sud1 Lond1tions (if any) as the Coun<.tl on the recommendation of the Board 1nay pres<.nbe Units are the measure of we1ghttng given to topi<.s determined tn each case by the Board of the appropnate S<.hool a normal year s work by a full ume student be1ng valued at 36 unlls :t 9 Unless a student provides reasons Lons1dered satisfaLtory by the Chauman of theS<.hool or his nominee a student will be deemed to have failed a topt<. if he wtthdraws from enrolment in that topic after two thirds of the durauon of the teadung penod for that tOplL

I 0 The Board of the appropnate SLhool may at any time review the aLademic progress of a student If the Board judges his progress to be unsatisfactory It may require him to show cause why he should be permitted to Lonttnue wllh lns studies or to enrol for further studies 111 the Un1verstty After Lonsiderauon of the students representations (1f any) and

-The Coun1,.1I IMs determined that the tlass1hrnuon of pass and foil £or top1 s shall be the £ullowmg 1.,rades

A D1stm1..uon

B Credu

C Pa>>

NGP Non Craded I as

N \ Not As essed

D Compensatory Result

F Fail

A gndeof A B CorD 111any10p1e, will >UbJed to the hm11at10n on the number ofD grade~ whKh may bee,ounted ns1 It m the full number of units for !hat Lop1t bemg uedued toward> thedegreern diploma A i::ndtof F will re snit m no units for that top1L bemg uedued towards the degree or diploma I or the purpo>es of S hedules n1..orporatmg the grades NGP (Non Graded Pass) or NA (Not \sse~ ed) tht i;rades NGP and N\ are deemed to be at least cqu1vaknt to .i grade of C (Pass)

t The Counul has determmed that the lass1h<..auon> for !he Honour> degree sh ill be First Cla~s SCC,ond Clas> DIVISIOll A D1vmon B Tlurd Class

j: Unit we11.,htmgs do not apply 111 tht Sdiool of Mediune

33

STATUTE IO I Contd

all other c1rcumst.ances the Board may decide (a) to take no acuon or (b) to permit the student to take only such topics within the School as ll may approve dunng the current or following year or(c) recommend to theCounctl that the student be precluded from further studies in that Slhool and the Council after making such inqurry as It thinks flt may preclude the student from taking further studies w1th1n that School Any student who has been precluded from a parucular School under this c..Jause may be precluded from enrolhng 1n another School in the University by the Council on the recommendauon of the Board of the School in which he wishes to enrol

I l Exam1nattons shall be held at tunes approved by the Council

12 In each School there shall be an Exam1nauons Board l.ompnsing members of the academic staff of that School and such other persons not being persons enrolled for a bachelors degree or a diploma in the School as the Board of the School may appotntfrom ume to ttme If two or more Schools share respons1b1hty for the teaching of any degree or diploma a Joint Examinations Board may be appointed by the Al.ademic Committee on the recommendauon of the appropnate Schools from among the members of the Exam1nat1ons Boards of those Schools

13 The Examinations Boards shall have the following duues (a) to adm1n1ster such penochc exam1nauons as may be prescnbed and to determine the results obtained by students in each topic or course taking mto account the results of examinauons and any other forms of assessment (b) to determine in the case of any student who fails to pass a top1cwhatfurtherwork and examinauons the student must complete sat1sfactonly before being granted a passing grade in that topic (c) to recommend to the School Board what restr1l.t1ons (if any) should be placed on a students future programme of study (d) to determine which students should be granted supplementary or special exam1nat1ons

14 The Academic Commutee and/or Boards of the appropnate Schools may prescnbe pohc1es to be followed by the Exam1nauons Boards in thed1s<ltargeof then funcuons and the Exam1nauons Boards shall give effect to those pohc1es provided (a) that 1n case of conflict thepohcy (if any) of theAcademicComm1tteeshall over rule the policy of the Board of the School and (b) the decisions of the Exam1nat1ons Boards concerning parurular students shall not be sub1ect to review by the Boards of the Schools

15 With the approval of the Board of the appropnate School the funl.t1ons of the Examinauons Board of a School may be discharged by the Standing Committee of the Board Where the Standing Committee meets 1n place of the Exam1nat1ons Board the prov1s1ons of tlus statute perta1n1ng to the Examinations Board shall apply mutatis mutandis to the Standing Committee

16 The member or members of the teaching staff responsible for each topic shall report to the appropnate Exam1nauons Board on theperformanl.e of each student enrolled in that topic

17 On the recommendauon of the Board of the appropnate School the Council may determine the amount of status (1£ any) a student shall be granted towards a degree or diploma on the basis of work completed or quahftcations obtained 1n the Un1verstty or elsewhere 18 Schedules and syllabuses shall take effect from the date of approval by the Counl.il or such other date as the Council may detemune and shall be pubhshed in the University C'.alendar and in such other pubhcauons as the Counctl may del.1de

19 In all cases where the statutes schedules or syllabuses affecung the course of study for any degree or diploma of the University have been or shall be suspended repealed or altered the Council may nevertheless allow students who have previously enrolled under those statutes schedules or syllabuses to complete then course of study thereunder but may impose such cond1Uons or mcxhf1cat1ons as the Council may deem desirable 1n each case

20 If by any reason of physical d1sab1hty a student is unable co perform any of the work presl.Ttbed for a topic the appropriate Board may allow him to subsntute for sulh work other work or another topic substanually equal in standard and in such cases may impose such other condu1ons as it may deem desirable

34

STATUTE 10 I Contd

21 The appropnate schedule may require that all the work for a degree or diploma be completed within a specified penod of time

22 A student shall be entitled to be admitted to a degree or diploma 1f he has fulfilled all the conditions prescnbed by this statute and the sLhedule appropnate to Lhat degree or diploma

SCHEDULE 1 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THE SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES

In this schedule the course of study for the degree is set out in terms of basiLdisLiphnes topics units and grades defined as follows A basic d1sc1plinein the School of Human1ues is a d1sc1phne1n which at least36 unttsare being attempted 1n a ma1or sequenLe cons1sung of at least 12 units at fust year level 12 units at second year level and 12 units at thud year level The Board may specify L"Ore requirements w1th1n each disctphne and these are set out in the d1sc1phne syllabuses A topic ts a prescnbed amount of academic work for whu..h a fmal result is recorded Units are the measure of we1ghung given to top Ks determined 1n each 1..ase by the Board of the appropnate School a normal years work by a full ume student being valued at 36 UllltS

Grades are the class1hcauons of pass and fatl for top11..s ui the ordinary degree and shall be

A D1st1nLtton B Credit C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fail

A grade of A B or Ctn any toptt w11lresult1n the full number of units tor that topic being credtted towards the degree• A grade of D will result 1n the full number of unlls for that topic being credited for the degree subJect to clause 2 below A grade of F 1n any top1L wtll result in no un1ts for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 To qualify for the ordinary degree a student must complete at least 108 units wtth a grade of C or better in at least 84 units and a grade of Dor better 1n the rema1n1ng units These grades must include a grade of C or better 1n the24 units wluLh constitute the third year levels of the two baste d1sc1phnes The 108 untts requued for the degree must be made up in the follow1ng way (a) 36 units making up a ma1or sequence tn a basic disLiphne within the School of Humanities (the basic d1sc1phnes available are Drama English FrenLh ltahan Philosophy Spanish and Visual Arts Wuh the permission of the Board Musicology may also be taken as a baste d1sc1phne)

and

(b) 36 units making up a ma1or sequence in a second different bastL d1sc1phne This basic d1sc1phne may be taken w1th1n the School of Humaniuesorw1th1nany other Sthool1n the University Wah the permission of the Board IL may alten1at1vely be taken at the Un1versay of Adelaide when the Board will speufy the untt we1ght1ng to be attathed to that basic discipline Where the second basic d1sc1phne ts taken outside the Sthool of Human1ues penniss1on may be given for It to consist of less than the normal 36 units

and

(c) 36 units (or however many more are requtred to make up the minimum total of 108 unas) which may be selected from any discipline or disLiphnes within the University (or wh1th may wt th the permission of the Board be taken wholly or tn part at the University of Adelaide) provided that not more than 48 un11s for the degree are taken from the School of Social Sciences and provided that not more than 36 units for the degree are taken at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide Where topics are taken at the Universttyof Adelaide the Board will specify the unit we1ghttng to be attached to them

For lhe purpose o( this S<.hcdule the grade NGP (Non graded Pass) 1s dt:emed to be at least cqu1valent to a grade C (Pass)

35

STA1 UT!:. JO I Contd

3 A student who gains a grade of D in any topic u1 a d1supline 1n the Sthool of Humanities may not proteed to higher level work in that disupline without the perm1ss1on of the Board

4 A student who fatls the same topic twite may not re enrol in that topic without the perm1ss1on of the Board

5 Except with the permission of the Board a student may not enrol 111 any year in more than 48 units for the ordinary degree

6 A student may enrol for the Honours degree as a full lime or as a part time student on such conditions as the Board may determine

7 A student may proceed to the Honours degree after completing 72 unlls towards the ordinary degree including at least 24 units 1n sequente 10 each of two bas1t d1sc1plmes provided that his performance 10 those units is c..onsidered by the Board to be of a sufhc1ently high standard A full ttme student proceeding to Honours under the provisions of this clause will be required to 1...omplete 72 unas of Honours topits over two years The Board of the School may review a students performanc..e at the end of the first Honours year and may 1£ it deems that his work has not been of a sufficient standard refuse hnn permission to proceed to theHonours degree A student \Vho has1.01npleted the first l-Ionours year but does not proceed to the second Honours year may be awarded the ordinary degree or may be required to undertake such add1uonal studies and exam1nat1ons as the Board shall detern11ne to qualify for the 01dinary degree

8 A student may proceed to the Honours degree after tomplet1ng all therequ1tements for the ordinary degree or if he holds any other degree or teruaryqualif1tauon deemed to be of an equivalent standard provided that his performan1...e 111 fulhlhng those requirements or that other degree or quahhcauon is cons1de1ed by the Board to be of a sufficiently high standard A full ume student proceeding to Honours under the provisions of this dause will be required to complete 36 units of Honours topics w1th1n one ac1dem1c yeu

9 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not en10I in any Honours year 111 more than 45 units

SCHEDULE 2 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THE SCHOOL OF SOCIAL SCIENCES

1 In thts Sthedule A discipline is a ma1or area of study in which teath1ng is offered Social S1.ienced1sc1phnes are those adm1n1stered w1th1n the School of Soual Sciences and tompnse Amen1...an Studies Asian Studies r:conomic History Economics Geogr"Iphy 1-Iistory Poltucs Psythology Sot.1ology A ba.!JlC disczpline ts a Social Science d1st1phne 10 wh1th a ma1or sequente of at least 36 unlls ts being auempted cons1sung of 12 ftri>t year level units and al least 24 upper level units spet.tfu .. d by the Board as tonstllul1ng a 1na1or sequence 111 that discipline Ma1or sequence requirements are specified 111 Appendix A A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for \vluch a final result ts recorded A cognate topic is a topic in another d1st1phne speofted by a bas11. dt•Ktpltne a<> being dosely related to study in that basic d1suphne Cognate toptt..S are approved as such by the basic d1s1.1phne in consultauon wuh the student "It the time of enrolment A multid1sc1plinary topic is a topll. designated as such by the Board of the Sc..hool Mulud1sc1pJ1nary top11...s are listed in Appendix B Units are a me.tsurt of we1ghung given to topics determined. 1n eath c..ase by the Board of tht' .i.ppropnatt Sthool a normal years work by a full tune student being valued at 36 units Grades are the class1h1...auons of pass and fail for topics tn the ordinary degree and shall be

A D1suncuon B Credtt C Pass D Compensator) Result I Inc..omplete F Fail

36

STATUTE 10 I Contd

A Grade of A B or C 1n any topic will result in the full number of units for that topic being <.red1ted towards the degree ExLept as stated in clause 2 below a grade of D will resull in the full number of unlts for that topic being credlted for the degree A grade of F 111 any topic will result 1n no untts for that topic being <.red1ted towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordinary degree a student shall Lomplete at least 108 unlts wllh a grade of C or better in at least 84 units and a grade of Dor better 111 the rema1n1ng units The 108 units shall 111<.lude (I) a minimum of 36 and a maxrrnum of 48 first year level units of which 24 of the hrst36 completed shall be in Social Scienced1suphnes and no more than l 2of the fust36 fnst year level untts in any one disctphne (2) at leasl36 untts wah a grade of C or better in ama1orsequence in one bas1cdisciphne in the Siliool of Social S<.tences as spec1f1ed in the programme for thedtsLiphne in Appendix A (3) 12 unltssele<.ted from cognate top Ks unless a se<.ond ma1or sequen<.e of 36 units from a d1sciphne other than the bas1<. d1sc1phne is Lompleted This sequence may be taken from any other discipline walun the Un1vers1ty or with the permi~s1on of the Board 1t m'ly be taken at the Universlly of Adelaide in a dtsuphne not offered \V1th1n the University under the condiuons specified in Appendix A Ma1or sequen<.e requtrements are listed 111 AppendIX A (4) 12 untts sele<.ted from mulud1s<.1phnary topKs hsted 1n Appendix B {5) Up to 36 units of ele<.uve top1<.s where a second ma1or sequenLe is not taken sele<.ted from any d1sc1phne or d1s<.1phnes w1th1n the Un1verslly or whKh may wuh the permission of the Board be taken wholly or in part at the Un1versttyof Adelaide provided that not more than 36 unlts for the degree are taken at the Un1versny of Adelaide Where topics are taken at the Untversay of Adel.ude the Board will specify the unit weightings to be auaLhed to them

3 Except 'vlth the permission of the Board a student may not pro<.eed to any top1<.s at second or thud year level unnl he has completed or is enrolled to <.omplete at least36 untts at fust year level

4 At least 4 unHs of work must be <.ompleted 10 any disciphne before any unlls 10 that d1sc1phne may be <.redtted tO\vards the degree except that topt<. 67111 Computing I (3 untts) and top1<. 67112 Computing II (3 uotts) may be <.redited as separate topKs

5 Except with the permission of the Board a student shall <.omplete the<.ourseof study for the degree w1tlun a penod of IO consecuuve year'! or where credtt has been granted for work <.on1pleted elsewhere within suili penod as the Boa1dmay determine at the time that credtt ts granted

6 Ex<.ept with the permission of the Board a student may not enrol in any year 1n a <.ombinauon of topi<.s valued at more than 39 unlts

7 A student who holds any other degree or other approved ternary quahhcauon may be granted status in not more than 36 unlts on ac<.ount of that quahf1cat1on A student who has not <.ompleted a degree or other teruary quahhcauon may be granted status in not more than 72 untts for previous teruary study

8 :Cx<.ept with the permission of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twt<.e

9 A student may proceed to the Honours degree of Ba<.helor of Arts provided that his performance tn the ordinary degree was of a standard <.ons1dered sufftuent by the Boa1d or 1£ he holds any other degree or ternary quahhcation deemed to be of an equivalent standard provided that his performance in obta1n1ng this quahhcat1on was of a standard <.onsidered sufficient by the Board

10 To qualify for the Honours degree of Ba<.helor of Arts a student shall <.omplete sat1sfactonly at least 36 units at Honours level in one or two d1sc1phnes including at least 12 units of thesis A students <.ourse of study for the Honours degree must be approved by the Head(s) of D1sc1phne(s) involved Honours programmes are outhned 1n Appendix C

Appendix A BASIC DISCIPLINE REQUIREMENTS

The followtng requirements for ma1or sequences 1n bast<. d1suphnes have been approved by the Board of the S<.hool of Social Suences for the ordinary degree of Bachelo1 of Arts

37

STATUTE 10 I Contd

SOCIAL SCIENCES

American Studies 36 untts compnstng 12 units t..hosen from eaher a History I topic or 35110 Pohttcs Ior 381 IOSoc1ologyI and 12 units from topics tn American Studies at ea<.h of second and thud year levels Second year level units must be completed pnor to enrolment 1n thud year level unns In addu1on students participate 1n a senes of seminars designed to hnk the topics _!aken in second and thud years

Asian Studies 36 units compns1ng 12 untts selected from the following topics

30110 Economics I 32110 Geography I

A H 1story I topic 35110 Poht1<.s I 36110 Psychology I 37150 Indonesian I 38110 Sociology I

(12 unlls) (12 units) (12 units) (12 untts) (12 untts) (12 units) (12 units)

and 12 unus from topics 1n Asian Studies at each of second and thud year levels Second year level units must be completed pnor to enrolment 10 third year level units Students offering 37150 Indonesian I as the first year of a maJor sequence in Asian Studies may not count this topic as a 12 unit Social Science first year topi<. for purposes of clause 2(1) of the Schedule and will still be required to complete 24 fnst year units in So<.1al S<.ience disctphnes

Economic History 36 unlls comprising 30110 Econom1<.s I (12 units)

and 12 units from topics in Economic History at each of se<.ond and thud year levels

Economics 36 units compns1ng 30110 Economi<.s I (12 units) and 12 units from topics in Economics a teach of second and tlurd year levels and 1nclud1ng the following topics

30201 Macro e<.onom1cs 30202 Micro economi<.s

(6 units) (6 units)

Topic 30110 Economics I must be completed pnor to enrolment 1n se<.ond year level topics and second year level topics must be completed pnor to enrolment in thud year level topi<.s

Geography 36 units comprising 32110 Geography I (12 untts) and 24 units from topics in Geography at Second and Third year levels 1nclud1ng at least 6 untts from the following top1<.s

32302 Urban Geography 32303 I:nvuonmental Perception and Behaviour 32304 Geography and Pubh<. Polley

12 untts of second year level topics must be completed pnor to enrolment 1n Thud year level topics

History 36 units compns1ng 12 unas horn topics 111 History at each of hrst second and thud year levels The topics shall be selected from offerings in each of the ftrst se<.ond and thrrd years of the degree programmes in sequence

38

Appendix B MULTIDISCIPLINARY TOPICS

STATUTE IO I Contd

The following topics have been approved as multtd1sc1phnary topics whH .. h satisfy the degree requirement specified 1n item 2 (4) of Statute 10 l Schedule 2

39204 Abong1nes and Austrahan Society 39205 The Ecology of Man and Society 39206 Revolution 39207 Sooal Change 1n Europe and Asta 39208 Urban1zauon 39209 Leisure and Redeauon 39211 Demography 39212 Pubhc Dec1s1on Making 39213 Social Sttucture of Modem Bntatn 39214 Research Techniques and their Apphcat1ons

American Studies

Appendix C HONOURS PROGRAMMES

Joint honours only, is offered usually consisting of the following (a) 34401 Studies tn American Social Cnuc1sm (b) Honours course work tn the second d1sophne ( c) 34430 Thesis

Asian Studies A single Honours programme consists of the following (a) four topics from among the Asian Studies

Honours topics being offered (b) 37430 Thesis of not more than 15 000 words Economic History joint honours only ts offered usually cons1sung of the follow1ng (a) One or two of the Econom1c History Honours topics offered (b) Honours course work 10 the second d1sc1phne (c) 31430 Them

Economics A single Honours programme consists of the following (a) All of the following topics 30401 Advanced Macro economics 30402 Advanced Microeconomics 30406 Honours Economics special topics 30409 Reading seminar (b) One topic from among third year topics which

have not already been completed (c) 30430 Thesis of not more than 15 000 words

Geography A single Honours programme consists of (a) Two topics from among the Geography Honours topics

being offered which may include by special arrangement a topic from another disctphne or School (6 units each)

(b) 32422 Modern Geographical Thought (c) 32440 Thesis and Literature Review

History A single honours programme consists of the £01low1ng

(6 units) (6 unlls) (6 units) (6 untts) (6 unlls) (6 units) (6 untts) (6 units) (6 units) (6 unas)

(12 units) (12 units) (12 umts)

(24 unas) (12 units)

(6 or 12 units) (12 or 18 unlls)

(12 units)

(4 unas) (4 units) (4 unlts) (4 unlts)

(6 units) (14 units)

(12 untts) (6 units)

(18 units)

(a) Two topics one horn among the History Honours otfenngs tn eaLh half year (12 units each) (24 units)

(b) 33430 Thesis of not more than 15 000 words (12 unlls)

39

STATUTE JO l Contd

Politics

The thesis is wntten under the superv1s1on of a member of the History staff and is due on Ottober I st Work in progress seminars are held dunng fust and setond terms

A single Honours programme consists of the following (a) Three topics from among the Pohucs Honours topics being offered

(6 unlls eath) (18 unus) By speetal arrangements this may include an Honours topic from another disLiphne or from the PoltttLS Department at the Un1vcrsny of Adelaide

(b) 35421 General pdper and reading tourse (by exanunauon) (t) 35430 Thesis of 10 000 to 15 000 words

The thesis 1s wntten under the supervision of a member of the Poht1cs staff and should be 1nlt1ated in late DeLember of the previous year Work in progress seminars are held In first term

Psychology

(6 units) (12 units)

An Honours programme 111 Psythology provides a grounding for studentsentenngetther an academK or professional held of psychology and will sausfy the bastt aLa<lemK requuements for membership of the Austrahan PsyLhologiLJl Souety Work Lons1sts of

(a) Both of the follow1ng toptLS 36401 ConLeptual Foundanons of Psythology 36407 Design and Measurement

(b) Any two of the remaining Psychology Honours topic.'> being offered (4 unlls each)

(c) 36440 Thesis of not more than 15 000 words

Sociology

The thesis should be i111uated early Ill February for Lons1derat1on of the hypothesis procedures and methods of analysts at a meeung 111 early Marth The thesis should be Lompleted by the fust \Veek of 0Ltober

The Honours prograrrune 1n Sociology Lons1sts of (a) Three Louisework topKs in Sociology of 6 units eatll (b) 38440 SoL1ology Honours Th es ts

Joint Honours

(6 units) (4 unns)

(8 units) (18 units)

{18 untts) (18 units)

Joint Honours programmes may be worked out between the student and the I-leads of D1sc1phnes involved and are usually of the form (a) Coursework in one d1suphne (b) Coursework in a setond d1sLtphne (c) 39430 Thesis either singly or Jointly supervised

{12 units) (12 units) (12 units)

A hrst year History toptL must becompletedpnor to enrolment 111 setond year level toptts and second year level toptts must be completed pnor to enrolment n1 thud year level topics

Politics 36 units compns1ng 35110 Pohucs I (12 untts) and 24 unlts from toptLS in Pohucs at SCLond and thud yedr levels

Psychology 36 units Lompns1ng Topic 36110 Psychology I (12 units) wh1th must be completedpnor to enrolment in any other Psychology top1t 12 units of setond year level topics 1ndud1ng one top1t from eaLh of the following groups

Group I 36204 Leaming and Mot1vat1on 36206 Physiological Psychology 36207 PerLepUon and Information

Protess1ng 36208 Human Development

40

(4 units) (4 unus)

(4 unns) (4 units)

Group II 36203 Personality 36205 Human Ab1hues 36202 Attitude Theory and Attitude Change 36212 Soaal Interacuon and lhe Self

and 12 units from th1rd year level topics

Sociology 36 uni ts compns1ng

ST A fUTE 10 J Contd

(4 untts) (4 units) (4 units) (4 unus)

38110 Sociology I (12 unns) and 24 units from topics in Sociology at second and th1rd year levels

Since So<..1ology I 1s being introduced for the first ume 1n 1978 students who have passed'\ f1rst year So<..tal Science top1<.. pnor to 1978 as the f1rst year of a Sociology ma1 or may offer that topic in place of 38110

Other Schools In add1t1on the following requtrements for ma1or sequences in bast<.. d1s<..1pl1nes in other Schools have been approved by the Board of the respecuveSchool for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Arts Students completing these major sequences will be exempt from the cognate requtrement specified 1n uem 2 (3) of Statute 10 1 Schedule 2

Humanities Ma1or sequen<.e requuements ford1sc1phnes 10 the School of Human1ues are spec1hed 1n Schedule 1 The Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Arts 111 the Sd1ool of Humanities

Biological Sciences 36 units compns1ng 12 unns 1n 86110 Perspccuves in Biology (12 units) 12 unlls selected from the £ollow1ng • 86210 Introduction to Cellular and Molecular Biology 86251 Plant Structure and Funcuon

(4 unus) (3 units)

(3ll unns) (2\.5: UllllS)

(3J4 Ulllts) (2~ untts)

(3 units) (2 units)

86252 Animal structure and Funttton 86253 Microbial Structure and Funcuon 86261 Population Biology 87263 Plant Evolutton 87255 Vertebrate Physiology 87275 Introducnon to Behavioural Biology

12 units sele<.ted from the follow1ng •

87255 Vertebrate Physiology 87263 Plant Evoluuon 87275 Introducuon to Behavioural Biology 87300 B1olog1cal Evolution 87341 Plant Growth and Development Al or 87342 Plant Growth and Development A2 or 87343 Plant Grolvth. and Development A3 87344 Planl Growth and Development Bl or 86345 Plant Growth and Development B2 or 86346 Plant Growth. and Development B3 87359 Env1ronmental Physiology 87363 Ecology 87376 Behavioural Biology A 87377 Behavioural Biology B 88334 Population Geneucs 88335 Development Geneucs 88345 Mtcrobtology A

(3 unus) (2~ units) (2 units)

(86252 86210 °' 86201) (2% umts) (86251) (2% untts) (86251) (3~ umts) (86251) (4~ unus) (86251) (2% unus) (86c51) (3% unus) (86251) (4% umts)

(86251 86252) (2~ unus) (86261) (3% umts) (87375) (3% unus) (87376) (3% umts) (86261) (3% um ts) (86261) (3%umts)

(86201 or 862!0 86253) (3~ units)

Jn each o[ the 10p1cs offered m th1~ sequence a knowledge of the sub1ec1 mattero[ 86110 Per.;pecuvea m Biology (or 86100 B10log1cal Science I) and any 10p1cs numbered m brackets 1s anumed ~1udcnts w1shmg to proceed to prognmmc Bl 111 B1olog1l'lll ~UC/Iles after hav111g 1akln 86110 Penpt'CIJVe~ in Biology will normally be. rc.:1u1red 10 undenake fonhu study and .iuam a ~nsfi.ctory level befort bung atu•ptt>d m programml' B2 U topic 86100 B1olog1cal Science I has been taken mstead of 86110 other 1op1cs may be .1oelected wtlh the approval ol the llo~d

41

STATUTE 10 I Contd

88346 M1crob1ology B

"' 8834 7 M1crob1ology B 88349 Immunology

(88345) (2~ um ts)

(88345)(3~umt>)

(88345 88346or88347)(3~umt>)

and any second year level topic from the above hst

Mathematical Sciences

OPTION A

(Professor f N Darroch)

First year 61127 Algebra BI 61128 Algebra Bii 63126 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus BI Second year 61221 Matrix Theory I 65251 Probab1hty and Stat1sucs I 65213 Probab1hty and Statistics II 63221 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bii Third year 65351 Random Vanables 65311 Stat1st1cal Inference I 65312 Stausucal Inference II and e1ther67331 Linear Programming or67332 lntroduct1on to Operational Research I

OPTION B

(Professor J N Darroch)

Frrst year 61127 Algebra BI 61128 Algebra Bii 63126 D1ffercnual and Integral Cakulus BI Second year Four second year level topics given 1n the School of Mathematical Sciences Thud year Four second or thud year level topics given m the Sd1ool of Mathemaucal Sciences chosen subject to pre requ1stte cond1t1ons

University of Adelaide Students may be permitted to make up a second ma1or sequence at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide under the following cond1nons (a) that the ma1or sequence is taken 1n a d1sc1phne not offered 111 the Un1verslly (b) that the approval of the Board has been granted (c) that the approval of the Head of Department concerned at the Un1verstty of Adelaide has been obtained and (d) that the student has already completed 12 first year units 10 the d1sc1phne conc..emed

SCHEDULE 3 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THE SCHOOL

OF MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

In this Schedule the course of study for the degree ts set out in terms of top1c..s units grades and programmes o[ study defined as follow·s A topic is a prescnbed amount of academic work for wluch a final result IS rec..orded Units are the measure of ":e1ght1ng given to topics detemuned In each case by the Board of the appropnate School Grades are the class1fKa11ons of pass and fail for top Ks 1n the ordinary degree and shall be A D1sunct1on B Credit C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fail

42

ST AT UTE 10 I Contd

A grade of A B C Dor NGP 1n any topic will result 1n the full number of units for that topu .. being credited towards the degree A grade of F 1nany top1cw1ll result in no units for that top1t. being credued to\vards the degree A programme of studies ts an approved combinauonof topics represenung a normal years work by a full time student

2 To qualify for the ordinary degree a student shall obtain a total of at least 108 unns subject to the minimum ftrst year sec..ond year and thud year requuements 'lnd provided that the student (a) shall pass all mathematics topics \Vlth a grade of A B C or NGP (b) shall not be permttted to count more than 24 untts with a grade of D (c) may substitute first ye'lr level topics for the optional second year le\ el topics and \vlth the perm1ss1on of the Board may substttute first year level topICs for opuon'll third year level topics and (d) may attempt second third or fourth year level topu.s before aU lnst scc..ond or thnd year topics are completed provided the necessary pre requisaes are satisfied

3 In the first year of the degree a student shall complete not less than 36 units including etther61l16 Algebra A (9 unns) and 63116 Differential and Integral Calculus Al (15 units) or 61127 Algebra BI (2 unns) and 61128 Algebra Bil (4 units) and 63126 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BI (6 units) and at le1st one fast year level topic other than a mathematics topic 4 In the second year of the degree a student shall c..omplcte not less than 36 untts compns1ng 24 second year level mathemaucs untts 1ndud1ng the follow1ng topics (ea1..h worth 3 units)

63221 D1f£erenual and Integral Calculus Bil or6321 l D1fferential and Integral Calculus AU•

63222 Dtfferenual and Integral Cakulus Bill or 63212 D1fferenual and Integral Ca1culus Alli

63223 Dtfferenual and lnlegral Cakulus BIV or 63213 Differenual and Integral Calculus AIV

61221 65251 67lll 67212 63241 67252

Matnx Theory 1• Probab1hty and Statistics I Computtng I if not already done N umencal Analysis I D1£ferenual Lquattons 1• Classical Mechanics

and further second year or higher level untts taken 1n the School of i\!Iathemaucal Suences B1olog1cal Sciences Earth Sciences Humanities Physical Soences or Social Suent..es and

5 In the thud year of the degreea studentshallcompletenot less than 36unus from one of the thud year level programmes specified belo\v

(a) Applied Mathematics 21 thud year level mathemaucs units as specthed (each top11.. worth 3 units) 63311 Complex analysis A or 63321 Complex Analysis B 63342 Parual Differential Equanons I 63343 Parual D1fferent1al Equauons II 67303 Calculus of Vanattons 67351 Continuum Mechanics 67353 Analyucal Mec..han1cs 67399 Apphed Mathemaucs Reading Topic..

and a further 15 units drawn from the se1...ond third or fourth year level tcoll.s offered in the School of Mathemallcal Sciences and the se1..ond and third year top11..s offered 1n the Schools 0£ B1olog1cal Sciences Earth Sciences Human1ues Physical Sc1enc..es or Social Sc1enc..es Each one term topic at fourth year level in the School of Mathematl(.al Sciences ts given the value 4 unus

(b) General Mathematics 18 thud year level m'lthemaucs unus 1nclud1ng the follow1ng (eat.h topic wonh 3 unns)

Students who have tal..en61i16Algebra Aand63116 D1fferen11al and Integral Caltulus \I\\ 1\1 not beorrmmed ioenrol 1n 1hesc 1ap1rs They will subsmu1e othei- topics as approved by the co ordinator 01 undergraduate 1each1ng m ma1hcm-illl'S

43

STATUTE 10 I Contd

63311 60399 61211 61212

Complex Analysis A or 63321 Complex Analysis B General Mathematics Reading Topic Foundauons of Anthmeuc Foundations of Geometry

and a further 18 un1ti. drawn from the second third or fourth year level lopics offered 111 the St.hoot of Mathemaucal Sciences and the set.ond and third year toptt.s offered 111 the St.hools of B1olog1t.al Sciences Earth Suences 1-lumanities Physical St.1ent.es or Soc1"1.l Sciences Each one term toptt.al fourth year level in the School of Mathemat1t.al Suent.es 1s given the value 4 units

(c) Numerical Analysis 18 third year level mathematics unus as specified (each topic worth 3 units) 63311 Complex Analysis A or 63321 Complex Analysis B 63342 Parual D1fferenl1al Equ'l.ttons I 67312 NumerKal Methods of Linear Algebra 67313 Approx1mauon of Funcnons 67316 Numencal Soluttons of D1fferenual Equations 67389 C.Omputational Project

and a further 18 units drawn from the second thud or fourth year level top1t.-s offered 1n the School of Mathematical Sciences and the second and third year top1<...s offered 111 the Schools of B1ologKal Suen<...es Eanh Suences Human1t1es Phys1t.al Suent.es or Sot.1al Suences Each one term toptcatfourth year level 1n the School ofMathcmaut.alSuen<...ests given the value 4 units

(d) Probability and Statistics 24 third year level mathemaucs unus as specified (each topic worth 3 units) 63311 Complex Analysts A or 63321 Complex Analysis B 65311 Stausttt.al Inference I 65312 Stat1sUt.al Inference II 65313 Stat1sucal Inference III 65342 Markov Processes I

65351 Random Vanables 65399 Probabduy and Stat1sucs Reading Toptc

'l.nd a further 12 units drawn from the set.and thud or fourth year level toptt.s offered 111 the St.hoot of Mathe1nattt.al St.tent.es and the set.and and third year toptt.s offered 111 the Schools of B1olog1cal Sciences :Carth Sciences Human1ues Physical Scient.es or Sot.1al S<-1ences Each one term topic at £ourth year level 111 the School ofMathemaucal St.1enccs 1s given the value 4 units

(e) Pure Mathematics 30 thud year level mathematics unus as specified (ead1 topic worth 3 unlts) 61311 Algebra I 61312 Algebra II 61313 Algebra Ill 61243 Classical D1fferent1al Geomeuy 63311 Complex Analysts A 63312 Founer Analysis 63313 Integrauon Theory 63351 Topology 63352 Functional Analysis I 63399 Pure Mathemaucs Reading Topic

and a further 6 units drawn £ram the second third or fourth year level topics offered 1n the School of Mathematical Sc1ent.es and the second and third year LDp1t.s offered 111 the Schools of B1olog1cal St.iences Earth Sciences l-luman1t1es Physical Sciences or Social Sciences Each one term top1cat fourth year level 111 the School of Mathcmaucal St.1ent.cs ts given the value 4 unlts

6 To qualify for the Honours degree a student shall complete either an Honours programme as specified 111 clauses or a course of study for the Honours degree as spe<..1hed 1n clause 9

7 A student who has quahf1ed for the ordinary degree 0£ Bachelor 0£ Arts or obtained .i

44

STATUTE 10 I Contd

quahhc.auon deemed by lhe Board to be equivalent may be permitted by the Board lo enrol for the Honours degree of Bac.helor of Arts by taking an Honours programme

8 (a) The Honours programme may be 1aken in any one of thefollow1ngspcc.1ahzauons (1) apphed mathematics (u) numencal analysis and computing science (111) probab1hty and stausucs and (1v pure mathematics Entry into an Honours programme in a given speuahzauon will be restru..ted to those students who have quahhed for the ordinary degree in the same spel.tahzauons or are deemed by the Board to have equ1valenl quahhcauons (b) In eaLh of the programmes of study for the Honours degree specified 1n paragraph (a) a student will complete ten lop1c.s (c) Each programme c.ons1sts of a certain number of c.ompulsory topu...s and d Lerta1n number of optional toptts (d) The opuonal toptl.s may be selected from among the Honoursorgrc1.du'lte level top1Ls 1n any field offered tn the School of Mathematical Sciences in the current year or 1n the Faculty of Mathemattcal Sciences at the Un1vers1tyof Adelaide Topics may also beLhosen from those at a suff1c1ently high level whiLh are ava1]Jble 1n other Sl.hools of Flinders Untversny and which represent a sequel to thud year level already Lompleted by the student (e) A student may be permitted to subsutute a proJCCt for thesem1narorfor one or more of the opuonal top1c.s (£) The compulsory topic.s 1n the 1nd1cated speciahzauons are as follows

(1) Applied Alathematzcs The Lompulsory topics are those ldught at the Honours or graduate level in Apphed Mathematics 111 the Sd1ool of Mathematical Sctenc.es 1n the current year In Jdd1uon a seminar proJec.t or reading topic counted as one topic must be taken

(n) Numerical Analysis and Computing Science The compulsory topics are those taught at the Honours or graduate level 1n numerical analysis and computer science 111 the School of Mathematical Sciences 1n the current year In addu1on a seminar project or reading topil. counted as one topic. must be taken

(u1) Probability and Slattstzcs The student must take as compulsory topics 65466 Honours seminars 1n probabiltty and stattstu..s and six top1c.s in probab1hty or staust1cs at the 1-lonours level given c1.t euher Flinders University or the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide

(1v) Pure Mathematics The compulsory topics are 64406 Honours seminar 1n pure mathematics (counts as two topiLs) An Honours topic. 1n algebra An llonours topic. in geometry or topology 631 l l Topics 111 complex analysis 63153 Functtonal analysis

9 (a) The course of studies for the Honours degree may be taken 1n any one of 1he following spec1ahzat1ons (1) systems analysts and control (eLonom1cs and management) and (u) systems analysis 'lnd control (conunuous and 1ndustnal proc.esses) Entry into a cou1 se of studies for the Honours degreew1ll berestncted to students who have at least a B pass Ill each of Malrll.ulat1on Mathemauc.s I and II or \vho obtained a perm1ss1on from the Board (b) The topics in the courses may be taken in any order as long as the pre requisite requirements are satisfied (c.) The topics 1n the 1nd1cated spec.iahzauons are as follows

(i) Systems analyst.I and control (economics and managerncnl) 30165 Ec.onom1c.s (Systems Analyst~ and Control) A 61116 Algebra A 63116 D1£ferent1al and Integral Calculus AI 67111 C.Ompuung I or equivalent 67112 Compuung II

45

STATUTE IO I Contd

30201 30202 61222 63222 65242 65251 65213 67113 67212 67213 30304 63311 65343 65351 65311 65342 67120 67273 67312 67303 67331 30406 67471 63471 67332 67333 67337 63472 65317 67492

Macro e<.onom1cs Micro economics Matnx Theory II D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BIII D1fferent1al Equauons II Probab1l1ty and Stausucs I Probab1hty and Stat1st1cs II Programming Languages Numencal Analysis I Numencal Analysis II Industnal Organ1zauon Complex Analysis Time Senes Techniques Random Variables Stat1sucal Inference I Markov Processes I Data Structure and List Processing Data Management and Apphcations Numencal Methods of Linear Algebra Calculus of Variauons Linear Programming Honours I.:.conom1cs Special Topic (Econometrics) Control Structure and Organ1zauon Control Theory Introduction to Operauonal Research I Introducuon to Operauonal Research II Dynamic Programming and NetworJ...s Convexity and Optimization Samphng Theory Seminar

(u) Systems analysis and control (continuous and industrial processes) 6lll6 Algebra A 63116 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus AI 67111 Computing I or equivalent 67112 Compuung II 76100 Physics I 61222 Matrix Theory II 63222 Differential and Integral Calculus BIII 63242 D1fferenual Equauons II 65251 Probab1hty and Scatisucs I 65213 Probab1hty and Stat1st1cs II 67212 Numencal Analysis I 67213 Numerical Analysis II 67252 Classical Mechanics 75291 Physics Laboratory IIS 76221 Electromagneuc Theory I 76283 Electronics 76293 Electronics Laboratory 63312 Founer Analysts 63311 Complex Analysis 63341 Differential Equauons III 63362 Elementary Hiibert Space Techniques 65342 Markov Processes I 65343 Time Senes Techniques 67120 Data Structure and List Processing 67303 Calculus of Vanauons 67312 Numen<.al Methods of Linear Algebra 67313 Approx1mauon of Functions 67322 Numencal Soluuon of D1fferenual Equations 76383 Instrumentauon 76393 Instrumentation Laboratory

46

67471 67472 63471 63342 63343 63463 67464 67465 73200 67492

Control Stru<.ture and Organ1zat1on Operating Systems Control Theory Partial D1fferent1al Equations I Parual Differential Equauons II Advanced Hilbert Space Techniques Signals in Systems Synthesis of Systems Chemical Dynamics Seminar

STATUTE IO I Conld

SCHEDULE 3A THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ARTS IN

THE SCHOOL OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

In this Schedule the course of study for the degree ts set out 1n terms of topics untts grades and programmes of study defined as follows A topic ts a prescnbed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to topics determined 1n ea1...h 1...ase by the Board of the appropnate School Grades are the class1hcat1ons of pass and fail for topics in the ordinary degreeand shall be

A D1stinct1on B Credit C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Compensatory Result F Fad A grade of A B C NGP or D 1n any topic will result in the full number of untts for that topic being 1...redaed towards the degree subject to the hmaattons of clauses 2 and 3 hereunder A grade of F 1n any topic will result in no unas for that topic being credaed towards the degree A programme of studzesis an approvedcomb1nauon of top1csrepresenung a normal years work by a full time student and 1s valued at 36 unus

2 To qualify for the ordinary degree a student shall obtain a total of at least 108 units 1nclud1ng (a) at least 36 units from each of the Fust Year AB2 and AB3 programmes hsted 1n clause 5 (b) a grade of C or better in top1<. 86110 Perspecuves 1n Biology (c) a grade of C 1n atleast6 units of hrst year level topics from theS1...hool of Earth Sc1en1...es Mathemaucal Sciences or Physical Sciences (d) each of the topKs hsted in the core of programme AB2 (e) 36 unlls making up a ma1or sequence in a second basil. disuphne in the School of Human1ues Mathematical Sciences or Social Sc1en1...es (£) no more than 48 untts of first year level topics (g) no more than a total of 24 units with a grade of D and furthermore no more than a total of 12 units of D shall be from topics hsted in programmes AB2 and AB3 (h) no more than 6 units of Special Topics 1n Biology

3 S talus towards the B A 1n Biology (1) A student who holds any other degree or approved ternary quahhcauon may be granted status in not more than 36 units on account of that quahhcat1on (u) A student may be granted status tn not more than 72 units for approved ternary work which has not been counted towards a completed degree or other tertiary quahhcauon (111) Status of grade Din biology topics will normally not be accepted as a quahhcat1on for entry into the AB2 AB3 or AB4 programmes but will not disbar the student from enrolment in biology topics where such topics form part of a programme offered by another School The hmitauons of D grade status may be regarded as expunged by sausfactory performance in appropnate biology topics at a more advan1...ed level of study

47

STATUTE JO I Contd

4 To qualify for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Arts a student shall undertake a presc...Tibed course of 'vork in a held of biology outlined for Programme AB4 in clause 5 5 The programmes of study for the ordinary and Honours degree of Bachelor of Arts shall be

FIRST YEAR

In tne first year of the degree a student shall c...ompletenot less than 36 units indud1ng 861 IO Perspec...t1ves 1n Biology (12 unns) and at least 12 untts of other hrst year level topu .. s taken 1n the Schools of Humanittes Mathemaucal Sciences or Social Sciences

PROGRAMME AB2 1

86250 B1ostattst1cs2 86261 Populauon Biology 86210 Introduction to Cellular and Molecular Biology 86253 M1c...Tob1al Structure and Functions 86252 Animal Structure and Function' 86251 Plant Sttuc...ture and Funcuon3

87275 Introduction to Behavioural Biology

Optzonsi

(2\.i units) (3J.2 units)

(4 untts) (3 unns)

(3ii units) (3 unus) (2 unus)

Sa.and year level topics may be taken from any Sc...hool at least 12 units of wh1d1 must be part of a maJOr sequence 1n the School of Humanities Mathemattc...-a1 Sciences or Social Sctene,es Fust year level topics may also be taken as options provided the tot1l fnst year unus do not exceed 48

\ knowledge or 1111.• mbieu m-i.uer 0£ 86110 Perspectives m Biology 1s assumed m ea h of the Bto\Og} top1n ofkft'd 111 tlus prognmme

!Thl'Te arc th «'ways m wlnlh a student may l"Omplete the st.itmits rcqu11emt'l1t (a) 61204111uuduuo1y 'i!'lllSlln j1 umts) {b) 862..oO B1ostat1stlls (2!i umts) (t) fu2 I Probab1l11y and 'itausu s I (3 u1111s) .md/or 65213 Probab1ht) and S1ans11ts II (3 umts)

S1ude1Hs are required to take at least two of lhe 1hrceStruuurcand FunlllOn top1ts hsted Thet-ombmanon thosen will dtiennme the range of third year top1u wlud1 t m he t1ken

fhe ava1hb1luy of options and t1lrri11na11ons d opuons Is ~tihjt't..l to limt 1ahk ltmuauons

PROGRAMME AB3 ' 2 ' •

TOPICS IN BIOLOGY

Third Year Level

87343 87344 87345 87346 87362 87363 87376 87377 87360 87361

Plant Growth and Development AllI Plant Growth and Developmenl Bl or Plant Growth and Development Bil or Plant Gro,vth and Development Biii Phys1olog1cal Systems Ecology Behavioural Biology A Behavioural Biology B Neurophysiology of the Brain or Neurophysiology of the Brain

(86251) (4~ units) (86251) (2~ units) (86251) (3~ units) (86251) (4~ units)

(86202 86252) (4~ umts) (86261) (3~ units) (87275) (3~ units) (87275) (3~ units)

(2\.i unlls) (3~ unas)

lA1 least 15 or the u111ts musl be taken from the tlurd }t:ar levrl tnp1n offert<d hy the !>chool of Btolo~lt ii Snl"IKCS

7Jn ead1 of the biology top1u oUered m tlus prognmme 1 J..nowll"dge of the subJet.I matter of Bbl 10 Perspet.llH'S 111 Biology and of any top1t~ numbert-<l m bratkeis 1s assumed

'Smdents arc permuud 10 rake up to 12 unus of saund year k'\d topll."1i from 1ny 'ithool

"The availab1luy or opuons and (omhmanons of opuons ls subiat to timetable hmuauons

48

88333 Cytogeneucs 88334 Populauon Gcneucs 88335 Developmental Genetics 88345 M1crob1ology A 88346 M1crob1ology B or 8834 7 M 1crob1ology B 88348 M1crob1al Genetics 88319 In1munology 88357 Cell and Dcvclopmcnt'll Biology 89300 B1olog1cal Evoluuon 89314 Cell and Membrane Physiology AI or 89315 Cell and Membrane Physiology A2 89316 Cell and Membrane Physiology BI or 89317 Cell and Membr-1nc Physiology B2

STATUT1. 10 I Contd

(86203 or 86210) (3% um ts) (86261) (3% um ts)

(86203 86201) (3% umts) (86201 or 86210 86253) (3% umts)

(88315) (2% umls) (88345) (3% umts)

(86203 and 88345) (~% unns) (88345 88316 or 883!7) (3% um ts)

(8620! 86203 86204 86252) (3% umts) (3 unlls)

(86202 86251) (2% um ts) (86202 86251) (3% UlllLS)

(86202 86252) (2% umls) (86202 86252) (3% unns)

89324 B1olog1cal Informat1on i\ilolcLular Nature and Expression

89326 B1oc.hem1c'll Control 1\Icc.han1sms 89330 B1ochem1stry Laboratory 87255 Vertebrate Physiology

(86201) (2% unlls) (86201) (2% um ts

(3 units) (3 units)

In addH1on to the above students may be permitted to enrol in up to 6 unHs of Spe<..1al topH.s 111 B1ology (topic 89350) subJCLl to their availab1luy 'lnd lo speLlfil. approval by the topic l.O ordinator

Second year level3 86201 Cell Metabolism 86202 Cell Physiology 86203 Cell Genetics 86204 Cell Grolvth and Development 86253 Microbial Structure and Funcuon 86252 Animal Structure and Funcuon 86251 Plant Structure 'lnd FunLt1on 87221 General Metabohsm 87263 Plant Evolunon 87255 Venebratc Physiology

Non biology options

(31-i: units) (86201) (3li unns)

(2 units) (IM unlls) (3 unns)

(3% umts) (3 units)

(86201) (2% unns) (21-i: unns)

(3 unns)

At least 12 third year level topics must be taken as p1.rtof a major sequence tn theSthool or Humanities MathemanLal SL1CnLes or Social St.1ences

PROGRAMME AB4

Fields of studyava1l.iblc 1ndudc Animal Physiology Beh'1.vtouralB1ology B1ochem1st11' Cell Physiology Cytogenen<..-s Developmental Biology Et.ology Genetics M1LTOb1ology Pal'1.oob1ology Plant Physiology Populatton GcnenLS and Biology , ... llh Psythology Ll1g1b1l1ty for enrolment 111 partKular'lreas depends on topKs taken 1n Progrtmme AB3

SCHEDULE 4 THE FIRST YEAR OF THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE•

In this SLhcdule the t.ourse of study for the first year of the degree 1ssct out 111 terms of topics u111ts and grades defined as follows A topic I!. l prescribed '1.n1ount of 'lcadem1c \vork for wluch a fln.i.l result 1<1 H.cotdc.d Units an. the measure of wctghung given to topll.S determined 10 each Lase by the Board of the appropriate School Grades'lre the das<11fic.allons of p'lss and fat! for topics 10 theorchnary d~rec and shall be

-Thi~ &heduk IS unlk'I" TC\'IC\\ for 1978

49

STATUTE 10 J Contd

A D1sttnt.t1on B Credit C Pass NGP Non gr1ded Pass D Compcns'ltory Result F F1.Il

A grade 0£ J\ B C NGP or D 111 any topic \Ylll result 111 the full number o( units for the topic being crc<lucd tO\Yards die degree sub1ect to tht llmll'lUons of Schtdule 5 (Cl'lusc 2(h)) Schedule 6 (Clause 2) Schedule 7 (Clause 2) and Schedule 8 (Claust 2) A grade of r 111 any topic will result 111 no unas for the topic. being credited towards the degree

2 A student shall select at least 36 units from one or more of the Groups A B and C 1nclud1ng at least 18 units from Group A and not less than 24 units from Groups A and B comb1ned At least one of the topics 71100 Chemistry I 76100 Physics I 81100 Earth Sciences I and 86100 B1ologtcal Science I from Group A shall be selected

Group A 71101 Introduction to Chem1stry(l)(2) or 71102 lntroducuon to Chemistry A(l) (2) or 71100 Chem1stryl(l)

or or

Group B or or

or or

Group C

75100 Introduction t0Phys1cs(l)(2) 75101 Introducuon toPhysicsS (I) (2) 76100 Phys1csl(l)

81100 Earth Sciences (I) 86100 BiologicalSc1encesl

63116 D1f£erenual and Integral Calculus Al 63114 D1fferenaal and Integral Calculus SI 63~16 D1fferenaal and Integral Calculus Bl

61116 Algebra A 61127 Algebra BI and61 I28 Algebra Bil 61128 Algebra Bil 60101 Introductory Mathemaucs (!)

67111 Computing I 67112 Compuung II

Topics 111 the series Perspecuve 111 Physical Science (2 units each) Topics from the Schools of Human1t1es or Social Sciences

(9 units) (6 unus) (9 untts)

(9 unus) (6 units) (9 untts)

(9 units) (9 units)

(15 untts) (IO units)

(6 units)

(9 units) (6 units) (4 unus) (9 units)

(S units) (.3 units)

3 Students 1ntend1ng 10 proceed 10 parucular second and third year programmes must 1nc.lude among theu chosen hrst year topics any pre rcqu1sne topics listed belo\Y and are also advised to select the recommended topics

Second year programmes

Mathematics

Physics (Pl P3)

1\l1n1mum pre requisite topics

61127 Algebra Bl 61128 Algebra Bl! 63126 D1fferennal and Integral

Cala1lus BI

61128 Algebra Bl! 63126 D1fferenual and Integral

Calculus BI 76100 Physics I

Reco,nme,1ded topics

71100 Chemistry I

(I) Pracucal and tu1or1al clann ano compulsory for 11udents enrolled m 1he&e topics

(2) These 1op1cs may nol be taken enher ooncultl.'mly Wllh or followmg lhe conespondmg 1op1cs from lhe same disc1phne m Group A.

(3) This topic may not be taken eilher concurrently Wllh or followmg any iop1c from Group B

50

Physics (P2)

Chemistry (P5)

Chemistry & Phys1es (P6)

Chemistry & Biology (P7)

Chemistry & Earth Sciences (PS)

General Earth Sciences

Meteorology and Oceanography

Geophysics

61128 Algebra Bil 63126 D1£ferenttal and Integral

Calculus BI 76100 PhysKs I

71100 Chemistry I 76100 Physics I or satisfactory ptrform u1ce 111 75100 Introducuon to Physics 63126 D1fferennal and

Integral Calculus BI 61128 Algebra Bil

71100 Chemistry I 76100 Physics I 63126 D1fferent1al and Integral

Calculus BI 61128 Algebra Bil

71100 Chemistry I 86100 Biolog1lal Science I 63126 D1fferennal and Integral

Cakulus BI 6 ll 28 Algebra Bil

71100 Chemistry I 81100 Earth Suences I 76100 Physics I or 75100

Introduct1on to Physics 63126 Differential and Integral

Cak.ulus BI 61128 Algebra Bil

81100 Earth Sc1enles I

81100 Earth Slten1.,es I• 76100 Phys11.,s I 63126 Differential and Integ1al

Cal1.,ulus BI 61128 Algebra Bil

81100 Earth Scien1.,es J• 76100 Physics I 63126 Differenual and Integral

Cal1.,ulus BI 61128 Algebra Bil

STATUTE 10 I Contd

75100 Introduction to Phys1es or 76100 Phys11.,s I

76100 Physics I

61128 Algebra Bii 63126 D1fferenual and

Integral Cal1.,ulus BI

71100 Chemistry I 76100 Physics I

In some tases the Bo.ird o[ the SLhool of I:arth Sue11<..es ma} Lons1dcr pernuttmg students with outs! ind mg gradl 'i JU

Pan I l\fathemauts and Physics to pr0teed on to Part II Meteorology and Oceanogr.iphy or C'oophyslts without havmi, done SJlOO Earth Sueuces I

51

'iTATUTE JO I Contd

Geology

Hydrology (E28)

Biology (B2)

81100 Earth SLtenLes I 71100 Chemistry I

81100 Earth SL1enLes I 61128 Algebra Bil 63126 D1fferenual and Integral

CalLulus BI 76100 Physics I or 71100 Chemistry I

86100 B1ologH.al SuenLe I

61128 Algebra Bil 63126 D1fferenttal and

Integral Calculus Bl

76100 PhysKs I

71100 Chemistry I or 76100 PhysKs I

76100 Phys1Ls 71100 Chemistry 63126 D1fferenttd.l and

Integral Calculus BI

61128 Algebra Bil

SCHEDULE 5 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN THE SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

In tlus SLhedule the Lourse of study for the degree is set out in terms of topKs units grades and programmes of study defined as follo,vs A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result ts recorded Units are the measure of weighting given to top Ks determ1ned 1n ead1 Lase by the Bo'lrd of the appropriate SLhool Grades are the dass1fKat1ons of pass and fail for top Ks 111 the ordinary degree and shd.ll be

A D1sttnLtlon B Creda C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Compensatory Result I lnLomplete F Fall

A grade of A B C Dor NGP 1n any toptL will result 1n the full number of units for that top1L being Lred1ted towards the degree A grade of Fin any topiL ,., ill result 111110 units for that topiL being ued1ted towards the degree A programme of studies 1san approved LOinb1nanon of toplLS represenung a normal yea1 s work by a full ume student

2 To qualify for the ordinary degree a student shall obtain a total of 'lt least 108 u111ts subJeLt to the m1n1mum fust year seLond year and third year requirements and provided that the student (a) shall pass all mathematlLS topKs 'v1th a grade of A B C or NGP (b) shall not be pe1m1tted to LOunt more than 24 units wllh a grd.de of D (L) may substitute first year level toptLS for the optional setond year level topKsand 'v1th the perm1ss1on of the Board n1ay substltute fnst year level toplLS for optlond.l thtrd year level topKs and (d) may attempt setond thud or founh year level topKs before all first seLond or third year topKs are LOmpleted provided the neLessary pre requisites J.re sausfted

3 In the first year of the degree a student shall LOmplete not less than 36 unlts tnLlud1ng either 61116 Algebra A (15 unlls) and 63116 D1fferent1al J.nd Integral CalLulusAI (9 units) or 61127 Algebrd. BI (2 units) and 61128 Algebra Bii (4 un1ls) and 63126 D1fferent1al and Integral CalLulus BI (6 units) dlld other first year toptLS as presLnbed 111 Llause 2 of SLhedule 4 The First Year of the Degree of Bathelor of SLienLe

52

STATUTE 10 I Contd

4 In the second year of the degree a student shall c..omplete not less than 36 unlts c..ompns1ng 24 sec..ond year level mathemauc..s units 1nc..lud1ng the following topKs (eac..h worth 3 units)

63221 Differential and Integral Cakulus Bii or6321 l D1fferent1al and Integral Calc..ulus All•

63222 D1fferenl1al and Integral Cakulu!. Biii or 63212 D1£ferenual and Integral Cakulus Alli

63223 D1fferenual and Integral Cakulus BIV or 63213 Drfferenual and Integral Calc..ulus AIV

61221 Matrix Theory 1• 65251 Probability and Staustics I 67111 Computn1g I if not already done 67212 Numenc..al Analysis I 63241 Differential Equauons 1• 67252 Class1c..al Mec..ha1uc..s

and further sec..ond year or higher level un1ls taken in the Sc..hools of Mathe1natKal Sc..1enc..es B1ologKal Suenc..es Earth Sc..1enc..es Hum1nit1es PhysKal Suenc..es or Soc..1al Sc..1enc..es and

5 In the third year of the degree a student shall cornpletenot less than 36unlls from one of the third year level programmes spec..1hed belo\v

(a) Applied Mathematics 21 thud year level mathematKS unlls as speuhcd (eac..h topu ... worth 3 units)

63311 Complex Analysis A or 63321 Complex Analysts B 63342 Parttal D1fferent1al [quat1ons I 63343 Partial D1fferenual Equations II 67303 Calculus of Vanat1ons 67351 Conunuum Mechan1c..s 67353 Analyuc..al Mec..han1c..s 67399 Apphed Mathe1nauc..s Reading Topic

and a further 15 unrts drawn from the sec..ond thud or fourth year level toptc..s offered in the SLhool of Mathemat1Lal Suenc..es and the sc<-ond and thtrd year topKs offered 111 the Sd1ools of BiologKal Suen<-es Earth Suen<-es Human1t1es Phys1<-al Suen<-e<; or Soual S<-tenc..es Ea<-h one term topt<-at fourth year level in the S<-hool of MathematKal S<-ten<-es is given the vdlue 4 units

(b) General Mathematics 18 thud year level m.ithemaucs untts tndud1ng the follow1ng (eac..h topK \VOrth 3 units)

63311 Complex Analysts A or 63321 Complex Analysis B 60399 General Mathematics Reading TopI<-61211 Foundations of Anthmellc 61212 Foundauons of Geometry

and a further 18 units drawn from these<-ond third or fourth year level topics offered 1n the School of Mathemat1Lal Sciences and the se<-ond and thud year topI<-S offered 1n the Schools of B1ologKal Suen<-es Earth Suences Humanlttes Physical S<-1en<-es or So<-1al Sc1en<-es EaLh one term toprcatfourth year level In the School of M1.themalKal S<-ien<-es ts given the value 4 units

(<-) Numerical Analysis 18 thud year level mathematics unlls as specified (each topt<- worth 3 units) 63311 Compex Analysis A or 63321 Complex Analysis B 63342 Parual Differenual Equations I 67312 Numencal Methods of Linear Algebra 67313 Approxunauon of Func..uons 67316 Numerical Solutions of Differential [quauons 67389 Computauonal Pro1ect

and a further 18 unus drawn from these<-ond thud or fourth year level topl<-S offered In the

Smdu 1~ who h'lve tdkt'l1fi!116 Algehr'IA aud 63116 D1ffercmnl and mtegril akulus \I 1"ill 1101bepuml\ted tormol 111 these top1ts They will s1 b~tllutt other topi s dS .ipproved by the lO onhn1tor o[ unde~ndu He tnlh nr:; m mathtm 111u

53

STATUTE JO I Contd

Sthool of Mathematical Sciences and the second and thnd year topics offered in the Schools of B1olog1tal Sciences Earth Saences Human1t1es Physical Sciences or Sot1al Sciences Each one term topic at fourth year level 1n the Schoo I of Mathemat1calSc1enLes 1s given the value 4 unus

(d) Probability and Statistics 24 third year level mathemaucs units as speL1f1ed (each topic worth 3 unas) 63311 Complex Analysis A or 63321 Complex Analysis B 65311 Stausucal Inference I 65312 Stattsucal Inference II 65313 StaUsUcal Inference III 65342 Markov Processes I 65351 Random Vanables 65399 Probab1hty and Stausucs Reading Topit

and a further 12 units drawn from the second thud or fourth year level top1u; offered in the Sthool of Mathematical Sciences and the second and thud year topics offered tn the Sthools of Btolog1cal Sciences Earth Sciences Humanities Physical Sciences or Soc1al Sciences Each one term topic at fourth year level in theSchoolof Mathematical Sciences ts given the value 4 unas

(e) Pure Mathematics 30 third year level mathematics units as specified (each toptL worth 3 untts) 61311 Algebra I 61312 Algebra II 61313 Algebra III 61243 Classical D1fferent1al Geometry 63311 Complex Analysts A 63312 Founer Analysts 63313 Integration Theory 63351 Topology 63352 Functional Analysts I 63399 Pure Mathemaucs Reading Topic

and a further 6 units drawn from the second thud or fourth year level topics offered 1n the School of Mathematical Sciences and the second and third year top1ts offered in the Sthools of Biolog1tal Sciences Earth Sciences Human1ues Phys1Lal Sciences or Sot.1al St1entes Each one term topic al fourth year level 1n the Siliool of Mathematical Sciences ts given the value 4 units 6 A student who has qualified for the ordinary degree of Bachelor o{ Science or a quahf1cauon deemed by the Board to be equivalent may be permitted by the Board to enrol for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Science

7 (a) The Honours degree may be taken in any one of the following spec1ahzattons (1) apphed mathematics (n) numencal analysts and computing science (111) probab1hty and staust1cs and (1v) pure mathematics Entry tnto an Honours programme 1n a given spec1ahzauon will be restncted to those students who have quahfted for the ordinary degree tn the same speL1ah1auons or 1re deemed by the Board to have equivalent quahhcauons (b) In each of the programmes of study for the Honoursdegreespeuhed 1n paragraph (a) a student \VIII complete ten topics (c) Each programme consists of a certain number of compulsory topics and a certain number of opttonaI topics (d) The optional topics may be selected from among the Honours or graduate level topics tn any field offered tn the School of Mathemaucal Sciences in the current year or in the Fat.ulty of Mathematical Sciences at the Untverstty of Adelaide Topics may also beLhosen from those at a sufficiently high level which are available in other ~chools of Flinders University and which represent a sequel to thud year level already completed by the student (e) A student may be permuted to subsutute a pro1ect for thesemmaror foroneormoreo[ the opuonal topics (f) The compulsory topics tn the indicated speciahzat1ons are as follows

54

STATUTE 10 I Contd

(1) Applied Mathematics The compulsory 1op1cs are those taught at the Honours or graduate level tn apphed mathematics 111 the School of Mathematical Sciences 1n the t.urrent year In addiuon a seminar pro1ect or reading topic counted as one 1op1<. must be taken

(n) Numerical Analysis and Computing Science The t.ompulsory top1<.s are those taught at the l-Ionours or graduate level 1n numen<.al analysis and computer sc1en<.e in the School of Mathemau<.al Suences 111 the <.urrent year In addition a seminar pro1ect or reading 1op1<. counted .is one topic must be taken

(u1) Probability and Statistics The student roust take as compulsory topics (a) 65466 Honours Seminar 1n Probab1hty and Stausucs and (b) stx topics 1n probab1hty or stat1st1<.s al the Honours level given at either Fhnders Un1vers1ty or the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide

(1v Pure Mathematics The c.ompulsory topics are (a) 61406 Honours Seminar tn Pure Mathemaucs (counts as two topics) and (b) An Honours topic 10 algebra An Honours topic 10 geometry or topology 63411 Topics in Complex Analysis 63453 Funcllonal Analysts II

SCHEDULE 6 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN THE SCHOOL OF PHYSICAL SCIENCES

1 In this Schedule the course of study for the degree ts set out 1n terms of programmes top1<.s unus and grades defined as follows A programme ts an approved comb1nauon of topics representing a years full ume study A topic 1s a prescnbed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded Units are the measure of \ve1ghung given 10 topics determined tn each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal years \Vork by a full ume student being valued at 36 units &rades are the class1hcauons of pass and fail for topics 111 the ordinary degree and shall be

A D1suncuon B Credit C Pass NGP Non graded pass NA Not Assessed D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fail

A grade of A B C D NGP or NA tn any topic will subJe<.t to the prov1s1ons of clauses 2 and 3 hereunder result in the full number of units for that top1cbe1ngcred1ted towards the degree A grade of F 1n any toptcwill result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordinary degree a student shall subJe<.t to theprov1s1ons of dauses3 4 5 and 6 hereunder complete 108 units compns1ng al least 84 untts at a grade of C or better and no more than 24 unns at a grade of o• 3 The I 08 units which make up the ordinary degree shall include (a) more than 35 unns selected according 10 the requ1tements for the first year of the degree of Bachelor of Science as prescribed 1n Schedule 4 (b) more than 35 un11s resulting from sausfactory completion of one of the second year level programmes approved by the Count.il on the recommendation of the Board of the School Details of the approved programmes are set out tn Appendix A

Pratucal dassesarecompulsory forstudenuenrolkdm the School Unsausfattory parucipauon wdl rt'Suh m fa1lurem the prognmme

55

STATUTE 10 I Contd

(c.) more than 35 unns resulting from satisfactory t..ompleuon of one of the thud year level programmes approved by the Counol on the recommendauon of the Board of the School Details of the approved programmes are set out 1n Appendix B The 108 units shall include no more than 48 units al first year level

4 En trance to second and thud year level programmes will depend on compleuon of not less than 18 units of grade C or better in the fust year of thedegree of Bat..helor of Sc1cnc.e and sausfactory fulf1lment of the specific pre requisites for the appropnate topKs of that programme

5 The Exam1nat1ons Board may grant a maximum of 6 conceded units 111 any of second or tlurd year level programmes listed 1n order to bnng a students total 1n that programme to the requrred number of units not exceeding 36 units Any such conceded unns ,.,..111 be counted as unspecified compensatory result unlts (grade D) for the purpose of clause 2 above but a topic. grade of fall (F) will be unchanged on the students ac.adem1c ret..ord

6 Exc.ept with the permission of the Board a student may not enrol more than tw1t..e 1n the same topic

7 To quahfy for the Honours degree a student shall c.omplete sausfac.tonly at least 36 uni ts in one of the Honours programmes approved by the Council on the recommendauon of the Board of the School Details of approved Honours programmes are set out 1n Appendix C

8 Entrant..e into an Honours programme is normdlJy restnt..ted to students who have achieved a suff1oently high standard in an appropnate thud year level programme or HS

equivalent

9 A student who \\l'tthdra,vs dunng the Honours year shall not re enrol as an Honours student 111 the St..hool except lVIth the permission of the Board and on such conditions as 11

may determine

Appendix A SECOND YEAR PROGRAMMES

Pl

This Programme leads to further studies for the Ordinary and Honours Degrees of Bachelor of Science 111 Phystc.s It normally leads to Programmes P31 P32 or P34 Entry into the Programme is normallyrestrtcted to thosestudentswho havec.ompleted not less than 18 units of Grade C or better 1n the Fust Y car of the Degree of Bat..helorof Suent..c (St..hedule 4) 1nduding 76100 Phys1t..s I and who have taken 61116 Algebra A or 61128 Algebra Bii and 63114 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus SI or 63126 Differential 1nd Integral Calt..ulus BI

The Programme compnses the following topics Unus Term

PHYSICS TOPICS (CORE)

76221 Electromagnetic Theory I 2~ I 76222 Waves and Optics 2~ 2 76231 Quantum Mechanics I 2~ 2 76261 Atomic and Nuclear Physics I 2~ 3 76283 Electronics 2~ 3 76291 Phys1t..s Laboratory II 2 I 76292 Physics Laboratory III 2 2 76293 Electron1c.s Laboratory 2 3

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS (CORE)

70211 MechanKs I 2~ 2 70212 Mechanics 11 2~ 3

56

STATUTE 10 I Contd

MATHEMATICS TOPICS Students who have taken 61128 Algebra Bii and 63126 D1fferent1.i.l and Integral Calculus BI take the following topics 61221 Matrix Theory I 3 l 63221 Differential and Integral Calculus Bil 3 I 63222 D1fferenual and Integral CalLulus Bill 3 2 63241 D1fferent1al Equations I 3 l 67203 Special }unctions 3 3

Students who have taken 61116 Algebr.i. A and 63114 Differenual and Integral CalLulus SI take the following topics

63221 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bil 3 I 63222 Dtfferenual and Integral Calculus Biii 3 2 67203 Special Functions 3 3

and further addiuonal topics of at least 4 units total weight Lhosen sub1ect to the approval of the Professor responsible for the co ord1nauon of undergraduate teaLh1ng 1n PhysiLs

P2 This Programme leads to further studies for the Ordinary and Honours Degrees of Bachelor of SL1ence 1n Physics wuh supporting studies 1n Biology Chemistry Larth Sciences or one of the Arts disciplines It normally leads to Programmes P31 or P32 It may also lead to Honours work in Biology Chemistry or Earth Sciences provided that the appropnate topu._s are taken 1n second and third year Requirements for entry into tlns Programme are as prescnbed for Programme Pl The Programme compnses the follow1ng topiLs

PHYSICS TOPICS (CORE)

76221 Electromagneuc Theory I 2* 76222 Waves and Opucs 2~

76231 Quantum Mechanl<.S I 2~ 76261 Atomic and Nudear Physics I 2~

76291 Physt<.s Laboratory II 2 75292 Phys1Ls Laboratory IIIS 1

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS (CORE)

70211 Mechant<.s I 2~

70212 Me<.hantcs II 2~

MATHEMATICS TOPICS

63221 Differential and Integral Cal<.ulus Bii 3 63222 D1fferenual and Integral Cakulus Bill 3 63241 Differential Equanons I 3 67203 Special Functions 3

OPTIONAL TOPICS

1 2 2 3 1 2

2 3

1 2 1 3

Topics of at least 6 units total weight Lhosen sub]e<.t to the approval of the Professor responsible for the co ord1natton of undergraduate tea<.hing in Physics

P3

This programme leads to further studies for the Ordinary and Honours Degrees of Bachelor of Suen<.e tn PhysILS Subject to the approval of the Board of the School of Mathemattcal Sciences H may also lead to the Ordinary and Honours Degrees of Bachelor of S<.1ence in Mathematt<.s Specthcally lt is designed for students who intend to proceed to the Theoreu<.al Physics Programme P34 or to Programmes in the S<.hool of Mathemattcal S<.1ences (provided that

57

STATUTE 10 I Contd

the appropnate choice of opuonal topic(s) ts made) Entry into this Programme is normally restncted to those students who have completed not less than 18 units of GradeC or better in the Fust Year of the Degree of Bachelor of S<..1ence (Schedule 4) 1n<Jud1ng 76100 Physics I and 61116 Algebra A or 61128 Algebra Bii and 63114 Differenual and Integral Calculus SI or 63126 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BI The Programme compnses the following topics

PHYSICS TOPICS (CORE)

76221 Electromagnet1L Theory I 76222 Waves and Optics 76231 Quantum Mechanics I 76261 Atomic and Nuclear Physics I 76291 Physics Laboratory JI or 76294 Physics

Laboratory IIA 75292 Physics Laboratory JIIS

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS (CORE)

70211 70212

Mechanics 1•• Mechanics II

MATHEMATICS TOPICS

63221

63222

63223

63241 67203

Differential and Integral Calculus Bii or 63211 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus An• D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Biii or 63212 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AIII• Differential and Integral Calculus BIV or 63212 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Arv• D1fferenual Equations I Special Funcuons

2~ 2M 2~ 2~

2 l

2~ 2~

3

3 3 3

l 2 2 3

1 or3 2

2 3

2

3 l 3

and at least onet of the following topics chosen subject to the approval of the Professor responsible for the coordination of undergraduate teaching 10 Physics

61221 61222 61243 63311 63242 65251 65213 67lll 67212 67213

Matnx theory Itt Matnx Theory II Classical D1fferenual Geometry Complex Analysts Differential Equations II Probability and Stat1st1cs I Probab1ltty and Stat1st1cs II Computing I Numencal Analysis I Numencal Analysts II

P5

(Programme adviser Professor] 0 M Bockns)

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

l 2 3 l 2 l 2 l 2 3

This programme is for students 1ntend1ng to study the three ma1or areas of t.hem1stry (1norgan1c organ it. and physical) at third year level for the ordmary degree of Bat.helor of Sc1ent.e 1n chemistry or as a prelude to more spec1ahzed studies leading to an Honours degree

Studems who have 1aken 63126 D1f£eremml and Integral Cakulus BI will not normally bepenmtted to enrol m these sub1ec1s

In special cases smdents may be permitted to enrol m 67252 Classu:al Me<liamcs m~d of 70211 MKhamts I

tit may be necessary for students w1shmg to keep open lhe poss1b1hty of entry mto Part 111 MathemaU<;SProgrammes to rake more than one toplt from the hst of optional top1t-s

ttMust be taken unless 61116 Algebra A has been taken m first year

58

STATUTE 10 I Contd

Entry to this programme is normally restntted to those studenls who have completed nol less than 18 untts of Grade C or beuer 1n the Fust Year of theDcgreeofBachelorof Science (Schedule 4) including 71100 Cherrustry I and \Vho have taken 76100 Physics I or have sausfattonly tompleted 75100 Introducuon to Physics and \vho have taken 61116 Algebra A or 61128 Algebra Bil and 63114 D1Hcrenual and Integral Calculus SI or 63126 Differential and Integral Caltulus BI The programme tompnses the following toptts

CHEM1STRY TOPICS

71291 71292 71293 72200 72201 73200 73201 73203 73204

Chemistry Laboratory II (Organic) Chemistry Laboratory II (Physical) Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganic) Organic Chemistry Organic Structure Determ1nat1on Chemical Dynamics Thermodynam1ts Inorganic Chemistry Molecular Properues

PHYSICS TOPICS

75291 Phys1ts Laboratory 115 76221 Electromagnellc Theory I

MATllE.\lATICS TOPICS

63221 D1£ferent1al and Integral Calculus Bil 63222 Differential and Integral Calculus Biii

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPIC

70311 Matenals Sc1enLe I

OPTIONAL TOPICS

2 2 2 3~ 2 2~ 2~ 2% 2%

I 2%

3 3

1 2 3

1 & 2 3 2 3 3 2

I 2

Add1l!onal topICs of at least2 un1ts total weight Lhosen preferably from lhe recommended option~ listed below Other topics may only be <.hosen subjc<..t to the approv'l.l of the Professor responsible for the <..oord1nat1on of undergriduate te.adung 111 Chemistry and subject to constderauons of ume table and pre-requ1s1tcs

'\.IATHE.?\.IATICS TOPICS

63223 D1££erenttal and Integral Calculus BIV 63241 D1Herent1al Equations I 65204 lntroduclOry Stat1st1Ls

PHYSICS TOPICS

76222 Waves and Opucs AND 75292 Physics Laboratory IIIS

76231 76261

Quantum Mechan1ts 1 Atomic and Nudcar Physt<..s I

EARTH SCIENCES TOPICS

83208 Earlh s Crust and Upper Mantle 84211 Petrology

P6

(Programme adviser Professor] 0 M Bockrzs)

3 3 3 I 3 1 & 2

3% 2 2% 2 2% 3

3 3 2~ I

This 1s a programme 1n chemical physics for students \Vtth mathemat1cal 1ntcrests and ab1hty lvho 'v1sh to pursue broader studies 1n a sequenual third year Programme (PSI) for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Soence or a prelude to further studies in e1therphys1<..s or chemistry leading to an Honours degree

59

ST\TUTE 10 I Contd

Entry to tlus programme 1s nonnally restricted to those students who have (.Ompletcd not less than 28 units of Grade Cor better in the Fust Year of the Degree of Bachelor of S(.ien(.e 1ntlud1ng 71100 Chemistry I 76100 Physics I and at least 63126 Differenual and Integral Calculus Bl and 61128 Algebra Bii The programme compnses the £ollol'nng topics

CHEMISTRY TOPIC3

71292 71293

71291 73200 73201 73203

or

Chemistry Laboratory II (Physical) Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganic)

Chemistry Laboratory II (Organic) ChemK 'll Dynamics Thermoclynamics InorganK Chemistry

73205 B101norgan1c Chemistry

or

72200 73204

Organl(. Chemistry Molecular Properties

PHYSICS TOPICS

75291 Physics Laboratory US 76221 Electromagnet1(. Theory I 76231 Quantum Mechanics I 76261 Atom1(. and Nuclear Physics I

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS

70211 Me(.han1ts I

MATHEMATICS TOPICS

2 2

2 2~ 2~ 2~

2~

2 3

I 2 1 3

3

I & 2 2

I I 2 3

2

Students who have taken 63126 D1ffercnual and Integral Calculus Bl and 61128 Algebra Bil take the following topics

63221 D1ffcrent1al and Integral Calculus Bil 3 I 63222 D1£fercnt1al and Integral Calculus Bill 3 2 63241 Dllferennal Equauons I 3 I 67203 Special Funcuons 3 3

Students who have taken 61116 Algebra A and 63114 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus SI take the follow1ng topics 63221 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus Bii 3 1 63222 Dllferennal and Integral Calculus Bill 3 2

and topics of at least 3 units total weight chosen subject to the approval of the Professor coord1nat1ng undergraduate teachtng 111 Chemistry

P7

(Programme adviser Dr E W Della)

This programme is for students with a particular interest 1n the chemistry of b1olog1tal systems who intend to study chemistry with some biology at thud year level for the orchnary degree of Bachelor of Science or as a prelude to more speuahzed studies leading to an Honours degree Entry to this programme 1s normally restricted to those students 'vho have completed not less than 18 units of Grade C or better 1n the First Year of theDegrecof Ba(.helor of Sc1en(.e (S(.hedule4) 1nclud1ng 71100 Chemistry I and who have taken 86100 Biology Iand61l16

60

STATUTE JO I Contd

Algebra A or 61128 Algebra Bii and 63114 Differential and Integral Cak.ulus SI or 63126 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BI The Programme compnses the following topics

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71291 Chemistry Laboratory II (Organic) 2 l 71292 Chemistry Laboratory II (Physu .. al) 2 2 71293 Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganil.) 2 3 72200 Organic Chemistry 3~ l & 2 72201 Organic Strul.ture Determ1nat1on 2 3 73200 ChemKal Dynamil.s 2~ 2 73201 Thermodynamics 2~ 3 73204 Mole1..ular Properues 2~ 2 73205 B101norgan1c Chemistry 2~ 3

BIOLOGY TOPICS 86201 Cell Metabolism 3~ l 86202 Cell Physiology 3~ 2 86253 Microbial Structure and Function 3 2 87221 General Metabolism 2~ 3

OPTIONAL TOPICS Add1t1onal topics of at least2 units total weight Lhosen preferably from lherewmmended opuons listed below Other topil.s may only be Lhosen sub1eLt to the approval of I.he Professor responsible for I.he co ord1nauon of undergraduate teal.h1ng 1n Chemistry an<l subjelt to the cons1derat1ons of time table and pre requisites

PHYSICS TOPIC 76221 Electromagnetll. Theory I

MATHEMATICS TOPIC 63221 D1£ferent1al and Integral Calculus Bii

BIOLOGY TOPICS 86203 Cell Genetics 86204 Cell Growth and Development 86251 Plant StruLture and Funcuon 86252 Animal Structure and Function

PS (Programme adviser Professor D ] M Bevan)

3

2 rn 3 3~

3 3 3 l

This is a programme for students who wish to pursue the study of both chemistry and earth sl.ienl.es in a sequen ual thud year Programme (P4 l) for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Sc1enl.e or as a prelude to further studies 1n e1therchem1stryorearth Sltenl.es leading to an Honours dtgree I:ntry to this programme is normally restricted to those students who have LOmpleted not less than 18 units of Grade C or better in the First Year of the Degree of Bad1elorof Sl.1enl.e (Sl.hedule 4) including 71100 Chemistry I 81100 Earth SLiences I and who have taken 76110 Physics I and 61l16Algebraor61128AlgebraBII and 63114 Differenual and Integral Calculus SI or 63126 Differential and Integral Calculus BI The Programme Lompnses the follow1ng topll.S

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71292 71293 73200

Chemistry Laboratory II (Physical) Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganic) Chem1Lal Dynamtl.S

2 2 2~

2 3 2

61

STATUTE 10 I Contd

73201 73203 73204

Thermodynamics Inorganic Chemistry Molecular Properues

EARTH SCIENCES TOPICS

83208 84211 84205 84281

Earth s Crust and Upper Mantle Petrology Sedimentary Environments Mod & Anc Optical Mineralogy and Petrography Laboratory

PHYSICS TOPICS

75291 Physics Laboratory IIS 76221 Electromagneuc Theory I

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPIC

70311 Materials Science I

OPTIONAL TOPICS

3 2~ 3

4

l 2~

3 3 2

3 I 3

Additional topics of at least 4 untts total weight chosen from topics offered by the School of Earth Sciences

Appendix B THIRD YEAR PROGRAMMES

P31 PHYSICS

This Programme 1s designed for the studenl who 1s interested 1n the expenmental and theoreucal aspects of Physics It provides a satisfactory terminating programme of studies for the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Science in Physics as well as prov1d1ng a basts for entry into the Honours Physics Programme The Programme compnses the following lop1cs

PHYSICS TOPICS (CORE)

76311 Elementary Mathemaut.al Phys1t.s 2~ 2 76321 Electromagneuc Theory II 2~ I 76331 Quantum Mechanics II 2~ 3 76341 Discharge and Plasma Physics 2~ 3 76351 Thermal Physics I 2~ l 76352 Thermal Physics II 2~ 2 76361 Atomic and Nuclear Physics II 2~ 2 76371 Physics Reading Topic I 2~ 3 76383 Instrumentation 2~ 2 76391 PhysKs Laboratory IV 2~ I 76392 Physics Laboratory V 2~ 3 76393 Instrumentation Laboratory 2~ 2

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPIC (CORE)

70321 Sohd State Science l~ 3

OPTIONAL TOPICS

Additional topics of at least 4 units total we1ghtandinclud1ng 6331 l Complex Analysis 1£ not taken 1n second year chosen subject to the approval of the Professor responsible for the coord1nat1on of undergraduate teat.bing 1n Physics

62

STATUTE 10 I Contd

P32 PHYSICS

This Programme ts designed for the studeiu lvho wishes to quahfy for the Ordinary or Honours Degree of Bac..helor of Science in Physic..s and who wishes to have the maximum freedom of choice of options consistent with these ob1ect1ves The Programme comprises 1.he follolv1ng 1op1cs

PHYSICS TOPICS (CORE)

76311 Elementary Mall1emaucal Physics 76321 Electromagnetic Theory II 76351 Thermal Physics I 76352 Thermal Physu . .s II 76361 Atomic & Nuc..lear Physics II 76391 Physics Laboratory IV 76392 Physics Laboratory V

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPIC (CORE)

70321 Solid Slate Sc1en<.e

OPTIONAL TOPICS

2 I l 2 2 l 3

3

Add1uonal topics of at leasl 16 units total \Vetghl and 1nc.lud1ng 63311 Complex Analysis 1f not taken 1n the second year chosen subject lo the approval of lhe Professorn.spons1ble for the coord1nation of undergraduate teadung 1n Physics

P34 THEORETICAL PHYSICS

This Programme ts designed for the student who is pnmanly interested tn theoretu..al physics It leads to the Ordinary or Honours Degree of Bachelor of Sc1encetn Physics and lVIlh the appropnate choice of options can lead to Honours Programmes 1n theS<.hool of l\<Ia1hemat1cal Sciences Entry into the Programme 1s normally restn<.ted to students who have sausfa<.tonly c..ompleted Programmes Pl or P3 The Programme compnses the follolvtng topics

PHYSICS TOPICS (CORE)

763ll Elementary Mathematical Physics 2~ 2 76321 Electromagneuc Theory II 2~ l 76331 Quantum Mechanics II 2~ 3 76341 Disc.barge and Plasma Physics 2~ 3 76351 Thermal Physics I 2~ I 76352 Thermal Physics II 2~ 2 76361 Atomic and Nuclear Physics II 2~ 2 76391 Physics Laboratory IV 2~ I 76392 Physics Laboratory V 2~ 3

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPIC (CORE) 3 70321 Sohd State Science 2~

OPTIONAL TOPICS

Five add1uonal topics chosen from the followtng provided lhat 63311 Complex Analysts must be included if not taken in Part II Preferred Opuonal 1op1cs

613 ll Algebra I 3 I 63242 D1fferen11al Equations II 3 2 63311 Complex Analysts 3 I 63342 Parual D1fferent1al Equattons I 3 2 63343 Parual D1fferenttal Equauons II 3 3 67212 Numencal Analysts I 3 2

63

STATUTI'.. 10 I Co111d

67213 67303 67353 76371

Numerical Analysis II Calculus of Vanations Analyucal Mechanics Physics Reading Topic I

Other Opuonal topics 61312 Algebra II 63312 Founer Analysis 63351 Topology 63362 Elementary Hilbert Space Techniques 67312 Numencal Methods of Linear Algebra 67316 Numencal Solutions of D1fferenual

Equations

3 3 3 2~

3 3 3 3 3

3

3 3 3 3

2 2 I 2

or other topics \Vlth the approval of the Professor responsible for the coord1nat1on of undergraduate teaching in Physics

P40 CHEMISTRY

(Programme adviser Professor] 0 M Bockns)

Entry to this Programme 1s normally restricted to students who have completed sat1sfactonly the Programme P5 and 1t leads to etther of the Honours Prognmmes 111

Chemistry (P48 P49) The Programme compnses the follolv1ng topics

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71392 Chemistry Laboratory IIIA 72310 Introducuon to Heterocycl1c Chemistry 7231 I Aromat1ctty 73311 Statlst1cal Thermodynamics 73318 Computing Methods 111 Chemistry 73325 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry 73326 Valency and Molecular Spectroscopy

OPTIONAL TOPICS

4~ 2 2 2~ 2 2~ 2~

all 3 I 2 I I 2 3

Add1uonal topics of at least 18 untts total weight chosen preferably from the recommended options listed below these must include at least 4 units of laboratory topics Topics other than those listed may only be chosen subject to the approval of the Professor responsible for the coordination of undergraduate teaching 111 Chemistry 1r>d subject to cons1derattons of time table and pre requ1sues

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71393 Chemistry Laboratory IIIB 71394 Chemistry Laboratory IIIC 72312 Physical Organic Chem1slry 72313 Chemistry of Free Radicals 72314 Molecular Rearrangements 72315 Modem Organic Synthesis 72316 Organometalhc Chemistry 73310 Reacuon K1nettcs 73314 Adsorption and Catalysis 73317 Crystal Chem1slry 73321 Electrochem1stry (Ionics) 73327 B101norgan1c Systems

PHYSICS TOPICS

76222 \Vaves and Opucs AND 75292 Physics Laboratory 1115

64

3 rn 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 rn

2of3 1 of3

3 I 2 3 3 3 2 I 3 3

2

76283 Electronics AND 76293 Electronics Laboratory

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS

70311 Matenals Science I 70300 Environmental science 70321 Solid State Science

P41

CHEMISTRY AND EARTH SCIENCES

(Programme advrser Professor D ] M Bevan)

STATUTE 10 I Contd

2~ 2 2~

3

I 3 3

Entry to this Programme 1s normally restncted to students who have completed sausfactonly the Programme PS and 1t leads to certain of the Honours Programmes in Chemistry and Earth Sciences The Programme compnses the following topics

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71392 Chemistry Laboratory IIIA 73311 Statistical Thermodynamics 73317 Crystal Chemistry 73318 Compuung Methods in Chemistry 73321 Electrochemtstry (Ionics) 73325 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry

EARTH SCIENCES TOPICS

8431 l Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenes1s 84205 Sedimentary Environments Mod and Anc 84318 Sedimentary Geochemistry 84392 Igneous and Metamorpluc

Petrogenes1s Laboratory

OPTIONAL TOPICS

4~

2~ 2 2 2 2~

3 3 2~

3

all 3 I I I 3 2

2 3 2

2

Additional topics of at least l ll1 u111ts total weight chosen preferably from the recommended opuons listed below these must include at least 2~ units of laboratory topics Topics other than those listed may only be chosen subject to the approval of the Professor responsible for the coord1nat1on of undergraduate teaching in Chemistry and subject to cons1derauons of time table and pre requ1s1tes

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71393 Chemistry Laboratory IIIB 71394 Chemistry Laboratory IIIC 73310 Reaction K1neucs 73314 Adsorption and catalysis 73326 Valency and Molecular Spectroscopy

EARTH SCIENCES TOPICS

82205 Regional Oceanography 84315 Sotl Saence 83204 Explorauon Geophysics I 84316 Hydrology and Vegetauon

PHYSICS TOPICS

76222 Waves and Optics AND 75292 Physics L 'lhoratory IIIS

3 rn 2 2 2~

2~

2

2of3 l of3

3 2 3

2

65

ST \TUTE JO I Contd

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS

70300 Environmental Science 70312 Materials Saence II 70313 Matenals Science III

P42 CHEMISTRY AND BIOLOGY

(Programme adviser Dr M J Thompson)

2 2 2

3 2 3

Entry to this Programme is normally restncted to students who have completed sausfactor1ly the Programme P7 and It leads to euher of the Honours programmes {P48 P49) in Chemistry or to lhe Honours programme B4 (Bto chemistry) 1n the School of B1olog1cal Sciences The Programme compnses the following topics

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71392 Chemistry Laboratory IIIA 4~ all 3 72310 Introduction to Heterocychc

Chemistry 2 I 72313 Chemistry of rree Radicals 2 I 72315 Modem Organic Synthesis 2 3 72316 Organometall1c Chemistry 2 3 73318 Compuung Methods in Chemistry 2 I 73321 Electrochem1stry (Ionics) 2 3 73327 B101norgan1c Syst~s rn 3

BIOLOGY TOPICS

89326 Biochemical Control Mechanisms 2~ 3

OPTIONAL TOPICS

Addtuonal topics o{ at least 15~ units total weight chosen preferably from the recommended opuons hsted below lhese must include at least4~un1ts of laboratory topics of which at least I~ unns should be chemistry Toptcsother than lhose listed may only be chosen subject to the approval of the Professor responsible for the coord1nauon of undergraduate teaching 1n Chemistry and subject to consideration of tune table and pre requisites

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71393 Chemistry Laboratory IIIB 71394 Chemistry Laboratory IIIC 72311 Aromattcny 72312 Physical Organic Chemistry 72314 Molecular Rearrangements 73310 Reaction Kineucs 73311 Stat1sucal Thermodynamics 73314 Adsorpuon and Catalysts 73317 Crystal Chemistry 73325 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry 73326 Valency and Molecular Spectroscopy

BIOLOGY TOPICS

87362 Physiological Systems 87275 Introducuon to Behavioural Biology 88333 Cytogenet1cs• 88345 M1crob1ology A• 88346 M1crob1ology B or

Biology !op1a wuh auoaated laboralory work

66

3 2ol3 rn I ol3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2~ I 2 2 2 I 2~ 2 2~ 3

3~ 3 2 2 3~ I 3~ I 2~ 2

88347 Microbiology B• 88349 Immunolog~ 89312 Biophysics 89324 Biological Information

Molecular Nature and Expression 89329 B1ochem1stry of Cell Surfaces

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS

70300 Envnonmental Science

• Biology topics wnh aMOOated laboratory work

P50 MATERIALS SCIENCE

STATUTE lO I Co111d

3% 2 3~· 3 3% 3

2% 2 3 I

2 3

(Programme adviser Associate Professor H ] de Bruin)

This programme differs somewhat from the more traditional programmes of physics and chemistry prov1d1ng a broader spectrum of topics taken from a greater vanety of disciplines and 1s adm1n1stered by a special Committee appointed by the Board of the School of Physical Sciences Entry to this programme is normally restricted to students who have completed sat1sfactonly one of the Programmes Pl P2 or P5 and n is one palh of enLry n1to the Honours Programme 1n inorganic and physical chemistry This programme compnses the follow1ng topics

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS

70311 Materials Science I 2% 1 70312 Materials Science II 2 2 70313 Materials Science III 2 3 70321 Sohd Stale Science 2% 3

CHEMISTRY TOPICS

71392 ChemisLry Laboratory IIIA 4% all 3 73311 Stausucal Thermodynamics 2% 1 73317 Crystal Chemistry 2 1 73318 Compuung Methods 10 Chemistry 2 1 73322 Electrochem1stry (Electrod1cs) 2 3

PHYSICS TOPICS

76283 Electronics and 76293 Electronics Laboratory 4% 3

EARTH SCIENCES TOPICS

84283 Opucal Mineralogy and Petrography Laboratory A 1% 2

OPTIONAL TOPICS

Add1uonal topics of at least 4 10 unus total weight chosen preferably from the recommended opttons hsted below the m1n1mum number of units required depends on the number of second year topics from the above hst whtchhavealready been taken Other topics may only be chosen subject to the approval of the programme adviser

MATHEMATICS TOPIC

67365 Linear Theory of Elast1c1ty

CHEMISTRY TOPIC'i

73310 Reacuon K1neucs 73315 Surface Saence 73325 Advanced Inorgaruc Chemistry 73326 Valency and Molecular Specuoscopy

3

2 2 2% 2%

3

3 2 3 3

67

STATUTF 10 I Contd

EARTH SCIENCF.5 TOPIC

84211 Pelrology

PHYSICS TOPICS

76222 Waves and Opncs and 75292 Physics Laboratory IIIS

INTERDISCIPLINARY TOPICS

70211 M echan1cs I 70314 New Energy Sources

P51 CHEMICAL PHYSICS

(Programme adviser Professor] 0 M Bockrzs)

2~

2~ 2

,.

3

2

2 3

This programme provides for studies 1nChemislry Physics and Mathematics The core is designed to allow for subsequent entry into Honours Programmes in either Inorganic and Physical Chemistry or Physics Entry to this programme is normally resrncted lo students who have complcled sat1sfaclorily lhe Programme P6

The Programme compnses the follow1ng topics

61221 Malnx Theory (1) 63342 Parual D1fferenual Equations 1•• 70321 Sohd State Science 70391 Chemical Physics Laboratory 73310 Reacuon Kmetics 73314 Adsorption and Catalysis 73317 Crystal Chemistry 73326 Valency and Molecular Spectroscopy 76222 \Vaves and Opncs 76321 Electromagnetic Theory II 76351 Thermal Physics I

OT

73311 Stattsucal Thermodynamics

OPTIONAL TOPICS

3 3 2M 5 2 2 2 2~ 2~ 2~ 2~

2~

I 2 3

all 3 3 2 l 3 2 l I

Addn1onal topics or at least 8 11 units total weight chosen preferably from the recommended opuons hsted below the m1n1mum number of units requued depends on whether or not 61221 Matnx Theory I is taken Other topics may only be chosen subject to the approval of the Programme adviser

63311 Complex Analysis A 3

or

63321 Complex Analysis B 3 I 70300 Envuonmental Science 2 3 70311 Matenals Science I 2~ I 72311 Aromal1c1ty 2 2 72316 Organometallic Chemistry 2 3 73318 Compuung Methods in Chemistry 2 I

or

76311 r:Iementary l\tlathemaucal Physics 2~ 2 73322 Lleclrochc1n1stry (E.lectrodICs) 2 3

Not to be taken 1( 61116 Alg('bta A has been taken prevmusly

Students who lack 1he pre Tf"ljUISUe for63312 (1 e 66223 D1((erenual and lrne'Jll"al Calculus BIV) maybt permuted 10 enrol mstead m 65251 Probab1lny and Stansucs I

68

ST \TUTE 10 I Co 11d

73325 76331 76361

Ad\ 'lnccd Inor~antc Chcm1s1ry Qu'lntum Mech uucs II Ato1ntc 'lnd Nucle1.r Physics u•

2~ 2~

2'!

'itudcnts tntcndmg to proce<.'tl to an Honours Propamme 111 Physic~ P39 shuukl mdutk 1h1s topic

Appendix C HONOURS PROGRAMMES

P39 PHYSICS

2 3 2

f.ntry into the Honours Physics Programme ts restricted to students \vho have achieved a su£hc1enlly high standard in an appropnateTlurd Year Programmeor1tsequ1valenl The Programme compnses lectures and pro1ec1 work The pro1ect work 1ncludes for students spec1ahs1ng 10 experimental physics experiments earned out 111 the research laboratories under the superv1s1on of a member of staff or for theoretit 1 physics students further reading or lecture courses or research work earned out under the superv1s1on of a member of slaff Students will be examined on each topic taken and on theu pro1ect work Students spec1ahs1ng 10 expenmental physics take 76471 Phys1csSem1narand seven olher topics Students spec1ahs1ng 10 theoretical physics take 76471 Physics Seminar 76472 Theoret1c,tl Physics Seminar and eight other topics The add1uonal topics are chosen sub1ecl to the approval of the Professor responsible for the coord1nauon of undergraduale teoclung physics normally the ma1oruy of these lop1csw1ll be chosen from the follow1ng

76331 76341 76371 76421 76431 76432 76433

76441 76442 76451 76461

Quantum Mechanics 11• Discharge and Plasma Physics• Physics Reading Topic I Relat1v1ty and I:.lectromagnet1c Theory Advanced Quantum Mechanics Special Topics 1n Quantum Mechanics Spectroscopy

Atomic Colltston Processes Plasma Physics Advanced Stausucal Mechanics Nuclear Theory I

P48 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

(Programme adviser Professor] W Clark Lewis)

Term 3 3 3 I 2 3

Nol offered tn 1977

2 3 I

Nol offered tn 1977

Entry into the Honours organic chemistry programme ts normally restricted to sludents who have achieved a sufficiently high standard tn Program1ne P40 or P42 I:.ntry [rom other Programmes may be approved by special arrangement \Vlth the Professor of Chemistry concerned Tlus Honours programme will consist of a research pro1ect upon \vluch a report will be required together \vtth auendance at lectures research colloqu1a and seminars and a reading course leading to appropnate exam1nauons Research 'vork ts available 10 the helds of natural products heterocychc chemistry stenoche1n1stry rcacuon mechanisms organometalhcs and physical organic chemistry

Musi be 1aken 1{ not 1aken m lhnd year

69

STATU fE 10 I Contd

P49 PHYSICAL OR INORGANIC CHEMISTRY

(Programme adviser Professor f 0 M Bockns) Entry 1nlo Honours physical or 1norgan1c chemistry 1s normally restncled to students who have achieved a suff1c1ently high standard 1n Programmes P40, P41 P42 P50 or P51 This Honours programme consists of a research pro1ecl and attenddnce al research seminars and colloquia and lhe equivalent of aboul stx lop1cs chosen 1n consullauon with the research supervisor Students will be examined in each topic taken Research work is available 1n the general area of theoretical chemistry, spectroscopy X ray crystallography, electrochem1stry sohd state and surface chmustry

SCHEDULE 7 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN THE SCHOOL OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES 1 In tlus schedule the course of sludy for the degree IS set out 1n terms of topics units, grades and programmes of study defined as follows A topic 1s a prescribed .tmount of academic work for which a hnal result 1s recorded Units are the measure of \ve1ghung given to topics determined 1n each case by the Board of the Appropriate 'ichool Grades are the dass1ficanons of pass and fatl for topics In the ordinary degree and shall be

A D1snncuon B Crcdu C Pass NGP Non graded Pass NA Not Assessed D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fail subJecl lO the hmuat1ons of claui,e3 below a grade of A B C D NGP or NA 1nanytop1c will result tn the full number of units for that lop1c being crcdned towards the de~ee Topics 1n which a grade of F has been received will not be credited towards the degree A programme of stud1es1san approved comb1nat1on of topics represenunga normal }ears work by a full ume student and consists of a m1n1mum of 36 unHs

2 To quahfy for theord1narvdegrcc a student shall subject to dause3 hereunder obtain a total of at least 108 units 1nclud1ng (a) At least ~6 units Crom toptc'i listed 1n Schedule 4 which together satisfy the requnements for the first year of thedegrecofBachelorof Sc1enceand \vh1ch 1nclude86IOO B1olog1cal Samce 1• and (b) At least ~6 units from the topics specified 1n d.tuse 7 for programme 82 and (c) At least 36 units from topics 'ipec1hed 1n clause 7 for progrdmme B3

3 In dccumulat1ng the 108 unus requucd for the 1ltgree a sludent (a) \VIII be permuted to enrol in the full B2 pro~r 1n1me if he or she h t'i obt·unttl l.t1her (1) A grade of C or beuertn 86100 B1olog1calSaenct I .ind 1n 'lt le-t'>l 15 further units off tr\l year level top1cst )Isled 1n Schcdule1 with not less th'ln 6of 1hest unus from 1op1c'i l1~1ed 1n ~roups A or B of Schedule 1 or (u) a grade of D 1n 86100 B1ologicalSc1ence I J.nd 'lgr'ldeof C or httter 1n 11le.t\t15 further units from hrst ,ear level 1op1cs hstcd 1n groups A or B of 'ichedule 4 (h) may be permitted to proceed \\uh some \\Ork 1n pro~r 1mmt B2 1£ he or she has obta1ncd ellher

• \lthmui;h 1op1c 8bl 10 Per5pn11Hi 111h1olugy1\11()1.I\ 11hbl1 to ~mdtnl\tmolhil r. r lht K ... dt1:1N Ill l"Ul'pllOll"ll 1ucums1.utcn(\1tcbJs.1 dwngt m tT1«1hnem fn11n a BA to 1B & ) mtlupon,p11h1,11 11101ht \ch 10111.<1 ml mdt'lll\ who havt" wlr.en 86110 Pl"l"lpt'tll\l'S 111 bmlogl m"ly ho. l>t"nnlllt~I tn n111111 1h1' 1m• ml• 1ht r.r~I \!"'or nl 1h1 d<"grt'(' nf Rachrloro[ \.i:lt'fl<Tand subJt'C1 to ,..11d'1C10fl compkunn of ~mh add111Qn-i.I \ ml. t.\ 1h1 Bt,.uddttt nnm('<. m nchrd"l" 1nJy hr- pMmlllnl IQ rnrol m J>roj,nmmt 82.

t For the purpu..n of l1mn.1111m on lhf" numbf"r of f1r~1\IC'Ur10111c' tllllllltd '"'" ud~ •ht drgrt.T 70101 Tnuotlunion 111 Physical 'ictt'llfl"I Chem1s1rv .11111 7010'.l lnuoduclmn 10 I hys1cJI \(1l1ltl~ Ph)\lc\ l•lll bl ro111md t\ f11~1 )F.<c lt\C'I 1op10.

70

STATUTE 10 I Contd

(i) a grade of C or better m 86100 B1olog1cal Science I and eatheT in at least 6 further unus from first year level topics hstcd in groups A or B of Schedule 4 oTin at least 12 further units from first year level topics listed 1n group C of Schedule 4 or (u) a grade of Din 86100 Btological Soence I and a grade of Corbeuer1n atleast9 further unns from fust year level topics hsted in group A of Schedule 4 and enrols in topics su££1c1ent 10 complete the requuements of the first) ear of the degree of Bachelor 0 [ Saence as set out 1n Schedule 4 In such cases no more than 9 units of D grade may be counted towards the fnst year of the degree (c) shall not be pemutted to count more than 48 units of hrst year level topics 1 (d) Shall be n:qu1red to obtJ1n at least 15 units of grade C or better from the follo\\ 111~ topics 71100 76100 SHOO 86100 63ll6 63114 63126 61116 61127 61128

Chemistry I Physics I Earth Sciences I B1olog1cal Soence I Differenual and Intcgr.il Calculus Al D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus SI Dtfferenual and Integral Calculus Bl Algebra A Algebra Bl Algebra Bil

9 units 9 UllllS

9 unus 9 units

15 unns 10 units 6 units

10 unlls 2 units 1 units

(e) shall not be permuted to count more t1r1n 24 u111t'i from topics with" hr.uh.., or n 'l.nd runhc.rmore (f) shall not be permuted to count more than 12 units from topics with a grade of D to,vards the combined total required for programmes B2 and B3 (g) shall count tOlvards the degree each of the topics listed in the core of programme B2 (h) will normally not be permitted to enrol 1n more than 4 units or Special topics in biology (1) shall 1ndude a grade of D or better 1n at least 6 units of laboratory work 1n biology opuons 1n programme B3i t 4 Status towards the B Sc 1n Biology (1) A studenl who holds any other degree or approved teruary quahftcauon m..1y be granted stalus 1n not more lhan 36 unlls on .iccounl of that quahf1cat1on (u) A student may be granted status 1n not more lhan 72 units for approved teruary work ,.,.h1ch has not been counled lowards a completed degree or other lernary quahr1c-.iuon (111) Status of grade D in biology lop1cs• will normally not be accepted as a quahhcauon for mtry into the B2 B3 or B4 programmes but \Vlll not disbar the student from enrolment in biology topics where such topics form part of a progr.imme oHered by another School The I 1m1tat1ons of D grade status may be regarded as expunged by sausfactory performance in appropriate biology topics at a more advanced level of study

5 A studmt who has quahhed for lheord1narydegreeofBachelorof Socnceorwho holds a qualtftcation deemed by lhe Board to be equivalent or who holds a le'iscrquahhcauon and sausfactonly completes such add1uonal work as thcBoardprescnbl'S in each case may be pemnued by the Board to enrol for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Sc1c.nce A candidate for lhe Honours degree 1s requucd to ha' c reached a high standard 1n the ordinary degree work preferably 1n the coursC\vork as a'" hole but at least 1n those sub1octs relaung to the field in which the Honours work is to be undertaken

6 To qualify for lhf' Honours degree of Bachelor of Science a studen1 shall undertake a prescribed course or "ork 1n a held of btology outlined for programme B4 1n clause 7

7 The programmes of study for the onhnary and Honours degree of B.ichelor of Science shall be

t For the purposn of lunuauon on lhc number of fm1year10p1cscoun1rd 1owatds lhcdegrtt 70101 lntroducuon to Phyuc:al Sonicrs. Oi.l!llllsay and 70102 lntroducuon to Pbygcal Soencn. PhJ5!CS will be counicd as £1nt year li:w!I 1op1cs

tt t ,, 1he purpo<;<:s ol 1h1s ll'.qu1n·11llnt 1hc uml.5 o{ laboratory "ork aswn;nnl" th i=h lOJll<" ill hi: dd1m 111} th 'ichool Board Sutu\o{ gradell "di 11onnall} ocgr.11111.'d "htn 1lwlt"ld of pass l1m11sordot"SU01 ptmlll ~uu.I} of tht wp11 'It .1mon_

ad\;am:n.l ll"l-el m du· mstuuumis m "Inch the 1op1c \\as rompkted

71

STATUTF JO I Contd

Topic 65204 86201 86202 86203 86204 86253 86252 86251 86261

Core Introductory Stat1sucs2 Cell Metabolism Cell Physiology Cell Genetics

PROGRAMME B2'

Cell Growth and Development M1crob1al Strucrure and Funcuon AnunaI Structure and Funcuon Plant Structure and Function Population Biology

Options3

TOPICS IN BIOLOGY

87221 General Metaboltsm 87263 Plant Evolution 87275 Introduction to Behavioural Biology

The followmg non biology topics are approved~ 32110 Geography I 32202 The And Lands 32206 The Geography of B1onc Resources 361!0 Psychology I 36206 Physiological Psychology5

39205 61127 61128 63126 63241 63243 67111 71 IOO 72200 72201 73200 73201 76!00 76221 76222

and all other Psychology II topics Ecology of Man and Soc1e1y Algebra BI Algebra Bil D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus BI Differential Equations I Population Dynamics Computing I Chemistry I Organic Chem1stry6 Oq~anic Structure Detenn1nauon Chemical Dynamics6 Thennodynamics6 Physics I Electromagnetic Theory 16 Waves and Optics 6

Units 4 3~ 3~ 2 rn 3 3~ 3 3~

2~ 2~ 2

12 6 6 12

4 6 2 4 6 3 3 3 9 3~ 2 2~ 2~ 9 2~ 2~

1 A knowledge of lhe subject mauu of86100 B1olog1eal Sciences I 1s assumed m ead1 of the bmlogy lop1csoffercd 111 tlus programme Pre rtqu1s1tes for topics offered by Schools other than the School ofB1olog1rnl Sciences should becht"CkOO m the appropnatc syllabm entry i There are three ways m which a sLudent may complete the smusucs requirement (a) 6.'>201 I111rodm:1ory Stausuc~ (1 unns) (b) 86250 Biostausncs (2ij unns) (c) 6J251 Probab1luy and StJusucs I {3 uuus) and/or 6.'>213 Probab1hty and Stal!sucs II (3 uiuts) Opuon (b) 1s reoorrunrnded for students who ha\C not studied mathcmaucs 10 a k'\tl cqmvalcnl to matnculauon mathemaucs IS and opllon (c) for smdenlS who have a spenal mtcrcst m combmm~ biolog~ with m.tthcmallo !The availab1hty of opuons and combmauons of opnons 1s subJCCl 10 umetable hmuauons 1 Although t11e topics hued h.wc bcrn 1denuficd a• being of spec1 II rekv'lnce to biology students othtr top1n may be of 111terest top irlicular smdcnts ,md may be taken w1lh the approv<ll of lhe Board s Students w1shmg to complete a maior stquence 111 psychology as recognised by thcSthool of Sona I Science. (1 e 36 um ts of psychology over3 ynrs) m'ly be required to u11der1ake ms1mcuon m stausucsaddmonal to lh'lt available m the B2 core and are advised m seek counsellmg from t11e Psychology disc1phne 'Laboratory work may be taken 111 con1uncnm1 wuh these topics as £o11ows

71291 Chem1s1ry labora1ory II (orgamc) (2 unus) w1lh 72200 71292 Chemistry laboratory II (physical) (2 unus) with 73200 or 73201 76291 Physics J.aboratory II (2 unu.s) or 75291 Physics laboratory II<) {I unll} with 76221 76292 Phys1cs l.aboratory Ill (2 umts) or 75292 Physics laboratory IIJS (I unn) wnh 76222

72

82204 82205 82206 84202

Hydrology7

Rt>g1onal Oceanography7

Meteorology and Chmatology7

Sedtmentology and Straugraphy

STATUTE 10 I Contd

2 2~ 2~ 2

Any other topic or topics from other Schools wtth the approval of the Board

PROGRAMME B31 2 3

TOPICS IN BIOLOGY

87221 87263 87341 87342 87343 87344 87345 87346 87359 87362 87363 87374 87376 87377 87360 87361 88333 88334 88335 88345 88346 88347 88348 88349 88357

89300 89312 89313 89314

89315

89316

89317

89324

General Metabohsm (86201) Plant Evoluuon Plant Growth and Development AI (86251) or Plant Gruwth and Development All (86251) or Plant Growth and Development AIII (86251) Plant Growth and Development BI (86251) or Plant Growth and Development Bil (86251) or Plant Growth and Development Biii (86251) Environmental Physiology (86251 82652) Phys1olog1cal Systems (86202 86252) Ecology (86261) Introducuon to Behavioural Biology (86252) Behavioural Biology A (87375) Behavioural Biology B (87376) Neurophysiology of the Brain or Neurophysiology of the Brain Cytogenet1cs (86203) Populauon Genetics (86261) Developmental Genettcs (86203 86204) M1crob1ology A (86201 86253) M1crob1ology B (88345) or M1crob1ology B ( 88345) M1crob1al Geneucs (86203 and 88345) Immunology (88345 88346 or 88347) Cell and Developmental Biology (86201 86203 86204 86252) Biological Evolution Biophysics (86202) Biophysics (86202) Cell and Membrane Physiology AI ( 86202 86251) or Cell and Membrane Physiology All ( 86202 86252) Cell and Membrane Physiology BI (86202 86251) or Cell and Membrane Physiology Bii (86202 86252) Biological Informauon Molecular Nature and Expression (86201)

3~ 3 3~ 2~

'Topic 82291 Me1corolog1cal Ocea11ograph1cal and Hydrolog1cal \feasurcmenls (3 unlls) 1s available lO s1Udl11ts enrolled m 82201 82205 and 82206 Sub-sccuons of this topic may be made .1va11able to s1uden1s enrolled m the appropriate theory 1op1c

• Normally al leas! 18 o[ tht unns taken mus1 be from 1he thmi year level topics oUered by the School o[ Btolog1cal SCICllCCS 1 Wnh tht approval o[ the Board students may be perm1ued to t.1ke up to 12 unlls of SlCond year ltvel topics [rom .iny school 'In each of the biology topics oHerffi 111 this programme a knowledge of the subj eel maucr of 86100Bmlogica\Soencel .ind any topics numbered Lil br.ickcls IS auumcd Pre rcquultes for lop1cs ofrered by School~ other than the School of Bmlog1t'll Sae11ccs should be checked m the appropriate sylhbus entry

73

STATUTE 10 I Contd

89326 89329 89330

B1ochem1cal Control Mechanisms (86201) B1ochem1stry of Cell Surfaces (86201) B1ochem1stry Laboratory (89324 89326 or 89329)

2~ 3

3

In add1uon to the above students may be pernutted to enrol in up to 4 unus of special topics 1n biology (topic 89350) subject to their avatlabil1ty and to speaf1c approval by lhe topic co-onbnator The following non biology topics are approved4

36314

63241 63243 72310 73324 81306 81305 39205

Psychophysiology of States of Awareness5

and all other Psychologf III top1cs D1fferenual Equauons I Populauon Dynamics Introducuon to Heterocychc Chem1stry6

B101norgan1c Chemistry Hydrology and Vegetation Sotl Science Ecology of Man and Society

1 3 3 2 2 2 2 6

Any other topic or topics from other Schools ,.,.1th the approval of lhe Board

PROGRAMME B4

Fields o[ study available 1ncludeAnunal physiology Behavioural biology B1ochem1stry B1ophys1cs Cell physiology Cytogeneucs Developmental biology Ecology Gmet1cs Microbiology Palaoob1ology Plant physiology and Biology with Psychology

SCHEDULE 8 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN THE SCHOOL OF EARTH SCIENCES

In this Schedule the course of studies for the degree 1s set out 1n terms of topics units and grades defined as follows A topic 1s a prescnbed amount of academic work for which a fmal rcsull 1s recorded Units are lhe measure of we1ghung given to topics detenn1ncd in each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal years \York by a full ume student being valued at 36 units Grades are the class1f1cauons of pass and fail for topics in theonbnal)' degree and shall be-

A D1sunct1on B Credu C Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fad

A grade of A B C or Din an) top1<. "ill subject to clause 2 hereund(_r resuh 111 the full number of units for that top1cbe1ngned1tcd tO\V1.rds the degree A E;"r1de F 111 any tOJllC\\ 111 result in no unns for that topic being crOOued tO\\ ards du .. degre<.

2 (a) ro qualify for the onhnary degree Ill E1rth '5c1ences a studt.nl shall ro1npl(_tC J.

1 The ava1hbd11y of non biology 1opK:S ls i.ub1cr1 10 11 neMble hmuauons \hh u1-,h the 1 1110. h\tl'lf ha\!.' l>1.'t.ll tdl"m f 1..:l J~ bcmgof spcr1al n-la'alla:' to biology s1ulkuts othcr 1op1cs ma} be >hmcr1-s1 IOJ:>iuUndar 1mlt111 and ma\ be uken 1A1lh 1heappro,,d of ilil' Roanl is1ud...nu "''shmg tocompklt'a maiors.tqu('ll«' m ps}lholO),"i as n.•co1.,nrn_..J b} 1he'if"h loOl 1f'fo•1, l 'inen ""'(I e 't6 u1111s of r•s1diol81!;) O\IT 3 )MTS) arl ad rn_.,j I 1 sedc 1nunSO".l1111g from rhe P~)dmlos.,"'\ d1S0".1phnl

7139-1 LlR'flllSll') l.aboraiory llIC' ( l't um ts) mav be 1al.en ' nh 1op1< 72'110)

74

STATUTE IO I Contd

m1n1mum of 108 uruts such lhat 84 unus arc at a grade of C (or NGP•) or better .ind no more than 24 unns at grade D (b) Topics ~h.ill be selected subject to approv.il by the D1sc1phne coordinators and shall include (1) Topics fora mnumum of 36 units and a m.ix1mum of 18 unus 1nclud1ng8l IOOI:arth Sciences I \Vhtch satisfy the requirements of Schedule 4 {2) Topics for at least a further 51 units as hstcd 1n Appendix A of \vh1ch at least 15 units mu~t be obtained from group II topics

3 Except \Vllh the perm1ss1on of the Board J student may not enrol more than t\v1ce 1n the same topic

4 I!.ntr.ince to the 1-lonours year 1s normally restncted lo thoscstudents'"ho havesansf1ed the Earth 5c1enccs 1-lonours pre rcqu1sttes ts set out 1n Appendix B hereunder

5 To quahfy £or the Honours Degree a student shall complete sat1~£1ctonly a cour'iC of studies approved by the Council on the rccommcndation 0£ the Board of the School Details 0£ the approved courses of study are set out 111 Appendix B hereunder

6 A student \vho \V1thdra,vs dunng the Honours year <;hall not bcperm1tted to re-enrol as an 1-lonours student 1n the School except wnh the perm1~s1on of the Board and on 'iuch condH1ons as tt m.iy determtnt

Appendix A roPICS OFFJ<RED IN TllE SCHOOL OF EARTH SCIENCES

81100 Larth Sciences

GROUI I TOPIC'> Intcrd1saphn.iry 81202 Computing Tech1uqut'i tn I:arth <ic1<.nccs

GROUP 1 TOPICS D1sc1phne 0£ \I 1nne Geolog) and Gcophvs1cs 83201 Exploration Gcophy'itCS I 83208 Earth s Crust and Upper Mantle 83293 Gcophy'l1c.il \tap Intcrprctat1on I <1boratory I 83291 Gcophy'i1cal Model Lxpcnmcnls I aboruon. 81211 Petrolo~v 81205 ~echment try Lnvuon1nents Modern ind Ancient 84213 Structur.il C'cology 81281 Opuc.il M1nenlogy ll}(l Peuo~rdphy I abor.itory 81282 5tructur '1 C'eology L1horatory 81283 Opucal \llnC'ralogy L1hor1tory A 81299 Gcolo~1c-1I F1dd c.,mp

GROUI

82201 82202 82211 82215 82206 82207 82291

1 TOPICS D1'ic1phne of Metcoroloi;n' ind Oce UlOhr,phy Applied \ .. tronomv Pl.ill('( 1n. 'X:tC'llCC 1-1, droloi.,' Rc.g1on 11 ()c<-1001.,1 1pln Wlcttorolo!{\ .ind ( lun.itolog) rhe \Vt ,llH T Foree 1st I Wlcterolof.1nl Occ-.nogr1ph1c-tl 1nd l-l\dmlog1r1I 1\Je ISUrClll('llh

GROUP II TOPIQ. D1st1phne 0£ Wl1nnc Ceola~} ind Ccoph}SIC'i 83110 i:,p)orthon C'roph}Stc'i II 81108 E1rthqu 1J...C' 5e1smolog) and the [1nh !> lntc11or 8311 l Ihdrogeolo~ 81306 H)drolog) .ind\ eget1non 81111 I~neous ind l\Iet,n101ph1c Petrogcnl'>lS

NGP non graded pau ('in: Schn!ulc I 3 and 5 )

(9 units)

(2 untts)

(3 UllllS)

(3 units) (2 untts) (2 units)

(2!7 untts) ('l units) (~ units) (4 units) (2 units)

(1'2 unus) (2 lllllts)

(21~ 11111ts) (2 1~ unus) (21z llllllS)

(211 llllih)

(212 unus) (I Ulllt)

(3 Unll'i)

(1 unit~) (1 unit~) (2 unit~) (2 Ulllt!>)

(3 nnns)

75

STATUTE. 10 I Contd

84314 84315 84317 84318 84386 84392 84393 81395 84399 84397 83391 83392 83394

Economic Mineral Deposits Soil Science Tectonics Sedimentary Geochemistry Hydrolog1cal Field Laboralory Igneous and Metamorphic Pctrogenes1s Laboratory Sedimentary I:nv1ronmenls Laboratory Sed1ment•ry [nvtronmenls and Petrogencs1s Laboratory Geophysical and Geologtcal field Camp l'vhneralogy and Geochem1cal Methods Geophysical Map Interpretauon Laboratory II Gcophystcal Fxpenments Laboratory Geochronoloby

GROUP n TOPICS D1sc1phne of Meteorology and Oceanography 82303 Dynamical Oceanography 82305 Dynamical Meteorology 82306 Selected Aspects of Meteorology and Oceanography 82307 Mcteorolog1cal and Oceanograplucal Dold Analysis 82311 M1crometeorology and Cl1matonomy 82312 Rad1auon 1n the Atmosphere 82317 The Weather 1'orecast II 82321 Physical Oceanography 82391 Meteorolog1cal and Oceanog1aph1cal Mlasurements II

Appendix B HONOURS COURSI:S IN THE DISCIPLINI: OF METEOROLOGY

AND OCEANOGRAPHY

E41 METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY

(Course adviser Professor P Schwerdtfeger)

(2 unlls) {2!4 u111ts)

(2 Uilll.'J) (2!4 unll::.)

(2 unlls) (3 units) (3 ututs) (4 units

(4 unus) (2 unus) (2 units) (2 Uillt.'J) (2 unll,1;i)

(2 units) (2 units) (2 units) (1 unu)

(2 units) (2 units) (1 unit)

(2 unlls) (9 UllltS)

Entry requuements [ntry into tins course ts normally restncted to those students lvho have

either

satisf1ed the requirements of the ordinary degree of B Sc 1n the Schools of M'lthc1nat1cal or Physical Sciences dnd obtained an aver'lge grade of B or better 111 the group B topics hstcd belo\v

or

saushed the requuemuus of the ordinary degree of B Sc in the School of I:.i.rlh Sc1ences obtained a grade of C or better fore 1ch of the topics hstcd belo'" ind an avcr.i.gcgradeof B or heller 111 the group B topics belo\V

Group B 82303 Dynamical Oceanography 82305 Dyn•m1cal Meteorology 82312 Rad1at1on 111 the Atmosphere 82321 Physical Ocec1nography Group C 63223 Dtffcrenual ind Integral C'llculus BIV 63241 D1ffr_renual Lquattons I 63342 Parual Dtfferenual Equ•t1ons I 67203 Special Functions 70212 Mechanics II 76221 Electromagnettc Theory I 76283 Cleclron1cs 76293 Electronics LJ.boratory

76

STATUTE 10 I Contd

81201 82201 82202 82215 82206 82291 82306 82307 82311 82391

Computing in Earth Science~ Applied Astronomy Planetary Science Regional Oceanography Meteorology and Climatology Meteorological Oceanograph1cal and Hydrolog1cal Measurements Selected Aspects of Meteorology and Oceanography Meteorological and Oceanograph1cal Data Analysts Mtcrometeorology and Chmatonomy Meteorological and Oceanograph1cal Measurements II

E42 OCEANOGRAPHY

Entry requirements Entry into this course 1s normally restricted to those students who have

eithcr

saushed the requuements of theordtnarydegrecof B Sc in the Schools of Mathematical or Physical Sciences and obtained an average grade of B or better 1n the group B topics listed below

or saushed the requuements of the ordinary degree of B Sc in the School of Earth Sciences obtained 1. grade of C or better for each of the topics hstc.d below and an averagegr1.deof B or better in the group B topics below

Group B 82215 Regional Oceanography 82303 Dynamical Oceanogrdphy 82305 Dynamical Meteorology 82321 Physical Oceanography

Group C 63223 Differenual and Integral Calculus BIV 63241 Dtfferenual I:quallons I 63312 P1.rual D1ffcrennal I:quat1ons I 67203 Special Functions 70212 Mechanics II 76221 Electromagncuc Theory I 76283 Electronics 76293 Electron1cs Laboratory 81201 Compuung 111 Earth Sciences 82202 Planetary Science / 82206 Meteorology and Climatology 82291 Metcorolog1cal Oceanograph1c1l and Hydrolog1cal l'Vlcasurements 82306 Selected Aspects of Meteorology and Oceanography 82307 Meteorolog1cal and Oceanograph1cal Data An'llys1s 82391 Mctcorologtcal and Oceanograph1cal Measurements II

E43 METEOROLOGY (Course adviser Dr R A D Byron Scott)

Entry requirements Entry into this course ts normally restricted to those students who have

euhcr

sat1sf1ed the requuements of theord1narydegreeofB Sc 1n the Schools of Mathematical or Physical Sciences and obtained an average grade of B or better 1n the group B topics hsted below

or

saushed the requuements of the ordinary degree of B Sc tn the School of Earth Sciences

77

STATUTE JO I Contd

obtained a grade of C or better for each of the topics listed below and an averagegradeofB or better 1n the group B topics belov.•

Group B 82206 Meteorology and Chmatology 82303 Dynamical Oceanography 82305 Dynamical Meteorology 82312 Rad1auon in the Atmosphere

Group C 63223 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BIV 63241 D1fferenual Equations I 63342 Parual Differenual Equations I 67203 Special Functions 70212 Mechanics II 76221 Electromagnetic Theory I 76283 Electronics 76293 Electronics Laboratory 81201 Compunng in Earth Sciences 82201 Applied Astronomy 82215 Regional Oceanography 82291 Meteorological Oceanograph1cal and Hydrological Measurements 82306 Selected aspects of Meteorology and Oceanography 82307 Meteorological and Oceanograph1cal Data Analysis 82311 Micro meteorology and Cl1matonomy 82391 Meteorolog1cal and Oceanograph1cal Measurements II

Course requirements These Honours Courses are designed to enable students to choose the extent and drrecuon of spec1ficauon which most suns them Students enrolled 111 any of them will study a m1n1mum of six topics The balance of their tune \VIll be spent 1n pursuing an approved research topic the nature of which should be discussed wah the course adviser who will also recommend suitable lecture topics from amongst those offered in Earth Sciences Physical Sciences and Mathemaucal Sciences at both Flinders and Adelaide Univers1ues The following Honours topics are regularly offered by the D1sc1phne

82401 Atmosphenc C1rrulat1on Theory 82402 Atmosphenc Development Theory 82403 Atmospheric Instabthty Theory 82405 Ocean C1rculauon Theory 82406 Problems 1n Geophysical Fluid Dynamics 82407 Turbulence 82408 Sea Level and Tides 82409 Spherical Astronomy (only if 82201 Applied Astronomy has not been taken)

HONOURS COURSES IN THE DISCIPLINE OF MARINE GEOLOGY

AND GEOPHYSICS

E44 GEOPHYSICS (Course adviser Dr F H Chamalaun)

Entry requuements Entry into the Geophysics Honours Course JS normally restr1cted to those students who have

either sat1sf1ed the requ1ranen ts of the ordinary degree of B Sc 1n the Schools of Mathematical or Physical Sciences and obtained an average of B or better for the follow1nggroupof topics 81100 Earth Soences I 83208 Earth s Crust and Upper Mantle 83308 Earthquake Seismology and the Earth s Interior

or

sat1sf1ed the requirements of the ordinary degree of B Sc 1n the School of [arth Sciences and obtained a grade of C or better for each of the top1csl1sted below and an average grade of B or better for the group B topics

78

Group B 83204 Explorauon Geophysics I 83208 Earth s Crust and Upper Mantle 83308 Earthquake Seismology and the Earth s Interior 83293 Geophysical Map Interpretation Laboratory 83294 Geophysical Model Experimental Laboratory 83391 Geophysical Map Interpretation Laboratory II 83392 Geophysics Experiments Laboratory

Group C 84211 Petrology 84205 Sechmentary Envtronments Modem and Ancient 84213 Suucrural Geology 84307 Tectonics 84281 Opucal Mmeralogy and Petrology Laboratory 84299 Geological Field Camp 63223 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BIV 63242 D1fferenual Equauons II 84399 Geophysics and Geology Field Camp 76221 Electromagnet1c Theory I 76283 Electronics 76293 Electronics Laboratory

STATUTE JO I Contd

Course requirements Srudents enrolled in this Honours Course will study a m1n1mum of 6 topics 1nclud1ng those listed below and others selected in consultation with the course adviser Each student will also undertake a research pro1ect leading to an Honours Thesis Performance dunng the year will be assessed on the basis or course work examinauons Honours Thesis and paruc1pauon 1n research seminars

83409 Seminars 1n Topical Geophysics 83406 Marme Geophysics 83410 Geomagnetic Induction Phenomena 83413 Palaeomagneusm and Plate Tectonics 83414 Seismic Data Processing and Interpretation

E45 GEOLOGY (Course adviser Dr A E Grady)

E46 MARINE GEOLOGY (Course adviser Professor C C von der Borch)

Entry requuements Enny into the Geology and Manne Geology Honours Courses 1s normally restricted to those students who have satisfied the requuements of the ordinary degree of B Sc 1n the School of Earth Setences and obtained a grade of Corbetter for each of the topics listed below and an average grade of B or better for the group of topics as a whole

81201 83204 83208 83293 83294 84211 84205 84213 84281 84282 84299 70311 71203 73201

Compuung 1n Earth Sciences• Exploration Geophysics I Earths Crust and Upper Mantle Geophysical Map Intetpretatton Laboratory I Geophysical Model Experiments Laboratory Petrology Sedimentary Envuonments Modem and Ancient Structural Geology Opucal Mmeralogy and Petrology Laboratory Structural Geology Laboratory Geological Field Camp Matenals Saence I Inorganic Chemistry Thermodynamics

81201 nm required where a student has gamed a grade o! C or better Lil 67111 Compuuog I

79

STATUTE 10 I Contd

65204 73317 84311 84314 84307 84318 84392 84393 84397 84399

Introductory Srausucs Crystal Chemistry Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenes1s Economic Mmeral Depostts Tectonics Sedimentary Geochemistry Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenes1s Laboratory Sechmentary Environments Laboratory Mineralog1cal and Geochem1cal Methods Geophysical and Geolog1cal Field Camp

Course requtrements Students enrolled 10 these Honours Courses will study a m1n1mum of 6 topics selected from those hsted below and others selected 10 consult>.t1on with the course adviser Each student will also undertake a research project leading to an Honours Thesis Performance dunng the year will be assessed on the basis of coursework exam1nat1ons Honours Thesis and paruc1pauon in research seminars

83406 Manne Geophysics 84402 Current Aspects of Manne Geology 84404 Current Aspects of Marine Geochemistry 84401 Petrofabncs and Expenmental Deformation 84403 Advanced Mineralogy and Petrogenes1s 84405 Mineral Explorauon Seminars

E48 HYDROLOGY (Course adviser Professor J W Holmes)

Entry requirements Entry into the Hydrology Honours Course is normally restricted to those students who have satisfied the requirements of the ordinary degree of B Sc in the School of Earth Sciences and obtained a grade of C or better for each of the topics listed below and an average grade of B or better for the group of topics as a whole

63223 Dtfferenual and Integral Calculus BIV 81201 Computing in Earth Sciences 82214 Hydrology 82215 Regional Oce•nography 82206 Meteorology and Climatology 82291 Meteorological Oceanograph1cal and Hydrolog1cal Measurements 83204 I:xplorat1on Geophysics I 83293 Geophysical Map Interpretation Laboratory I 84213 Structural Geology 84282 Structural Geology Laboratory 65204 Introductory Stausucs 82311 Mtcrometeorology and Chmatonomy 83314 H ydrogeology 84305 Soil Science 84306 Hydrology and Vegetation 84393 Sedimentary Environments Laboratory 84396 Hydrological Field Laboratory

and e1rher

75291 76221 76222 76283 76293 or 71293 73201 73203 73204 70311 73321

80

Physics Laboratory IIS Electromagnetic Theory I Waves and Optics Electronics Electronics Laboratory

Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganic) Thermodynamics Inorganic Chemistry Molecular Properties Matenals Science I I:lectrochem1stry

STATUft.10 I Co td

Course requirements Students enrolled in this Honours Course will study a mnumum of 6 topics 1nclud1ng those hsted below and others selected 1n consultauon wnh the course adviser Each student will also undertake a research project leading to an Honours Thesis Performance dunng the year will be assessed on the basts of course work exam1na11ons Honours Thesis and paruc1pauon in research seminars

83401 Isotope Hydrology 84402 Current Aspects of Manne Geology 84404 Current Aspects of Manne Geochemistry

SCHEDULE 9 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

In this schedule the course of study for the degree ts set out 10 terms of topics cognate topics unns and grades defined as follows A topic 1s a prescnbed amount of academic work for wlnch a final result 1s recorded A cognate top1c1s a top1c tn another d1sc1phne specified by thed1sc1phneo£Econom1csas being closely related to the study of Economics Cognate topics are approved as such by the D1sc1pltne of Economics 10 consultauon with the student at the ume of enrolment Units are the measure of weighting given to topics determined 111 each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal years work by a full ume student being valued at 36 unus Grades are the class1hcauons of pass and fail for topics 111 the ordinary degree and shall be

A D1st1nctton B Credn C Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fat! A grade of A B or C 10 any top1c\v1ll result in the full numberof untts for that topic being credited to\vards the degree Sub1ect to the prov1s1ons of clause2 a grade of D will result in the full number of units for that topic being credned towards the degree A grade of F \Vtll result in no units for that topic being credtted towards the degree

2 To quahfy for the ordinary degree a student shall complete 108 units with a grade of C or better 10 at least 84 unlls and a grade of D or better 10 the rema1n1ng untts The degree shall 1nclude (a) A m1n1mum of 36 and a maximum of 48 first year level units of \Vhich 24 of the hrst36 completed shall be 1n Social Sciences or Mathemaucs d1sc1phnes and no more than 12 of the ftrst 36 first year level units are 10 any one dtsaphne {b) 30110 Economics I (12 untts) wllh a grade of C or better {c) 30201 Macro economics

30202 Micro economics 30203 Economic S tat1sucs A 30204 Economic Stausucs B with a grade of C or better 1n 18 units

(d) 30301 International Economics

(6 units) (6 units) (6 untts) (6 untts)

(6 units)

and a minimum of 12 and a maximum of 24 add1t1onal units 10 thud year level Economics topics \Vlth a grade of C or better in 18 unHs (e) A m1n1mum of 78 units of Economics and cognate topics

3 Except wuh the permission of the Board a student may not proceed to any topics at second or thud year level unnl he has completed or is enrolled tocompleteat least36 units at first year level

4 Lxcept wtth the penn1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol 10 any year 10 a comb1natton of topics valued at more than 39 untts

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student shall complete h1s course of studies for the degree w1th1n a penod of 10 consecunve calendar years or where credll has been granted for work done else\vhere within such penod as the Board shall determine at the time that credtt 1s granted

81

STATUTE 10 I Contd

6 A student who holds any other degree or other approved teruary qual1f1cat1on may be granted status in not more than 36 units on account of that quahf1cauon A student who has not completed a degree or other ternary quahhcauon may be granted status 111 not more than 72 untts on account of the work completed

7 Except wtth the pemuss1on of the Board no topic may be attempted more than t\VJce

8 A student may proceed to the Honours degree after compleung all the requuements for the ordinary degree or if he holds any other degree or teruary quahhcauon deemed to be of an equivalent standard provided that his performance in fulhl11ng thoserequuementsor that other degree or qualtflcauon is considered by the Board of the School of Social Sciences to be of a sufftc1ently high standard

9 To qualify for the Honours degree a student shall complete sausfactonly at least 36 units at Honours level 1nclud1ng a thesis in a programme approved by the Council on the recommendation of the Board of the School of Social Sciences Details of the programme o( studies are spec1f1ed 10 Appendix C ci Schedule2 The ordinary and Honours degree of Bachelor of Arts 10 the School of Social Sciences

SCHEDULE 10 THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF EDUCATION

1 In tlus schedule the course o( study for the degree IS set out 10 terms of topics units and grades defined as follo\vs A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic \VOrk for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of we1ghung given to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropriate School a normal years work by a full lime student being valued at 36 units Grades are the class1hcauons of pass and fail for topics 10 the ordinary degree and shall be

A D1st1nction B Creda C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Frul A grade of A B C or NGP in any topic will resulttn the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree Except as 1nd1cated 1nclause2 agradeofD will result in the full number of units for that topic being credited for the degree The grade of F 1n any topic \Vtll result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 To qualify for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Educauon a student shall complete at least 126 untts with a grade of C or better in 102 units and a grade of Dor better in the remaining 24 units 3 Of the first 72 units completed56 to include at least one of the topics listed in clause3(c) and 3(d) shall be at agradeof NGP orC or better and the rema1n1ng 16atagradeof Dor better (a) 36 fust year units and 24 second year level unlls 10 any d1sc1phneordisc1phnes wtthin the Un1vers1ly other than Education (60 units)

(b) 53110 Teaching Onentauon (0 units) (c) 53211 Human Development and Lducat1on (6 unlls) (d) 53215 Curnculum Theory (6 unlls)

4 Of the next 36 units completed 28 units (whid1 shall include 53340 Teaching Observauon and Expenence or 53342 Teaching Observauon and Experience -Abong1nal Educauon) shall be passed at grade NGP or C or better and the rema1n1ng 8 units at grade Dor better The units shall be selected in accordance with either clause 4(a) or 4(b) (a) (i) 12 units selected from the following topics

53218 53221 53222

82

Cross Cultural Perspectives in Education Power and Authonty 10 Educauon Psychology and Educauon

(6 units) (6 unus) (6 unns)

53223 53224 53225 53226 53227 53228

Sociology o[ Education Aestheucs and Educal1on Research Methods 1n Educauon Science and Education Philosophy and Education Educal1on and Society 1n Australia An HIStoncal Analysts

53229 H tstory of Ideas Some Sources 1n 18th and 19lh Century Enghsh Thought of Contemporary

ST\TUTE IO I Contd

(6 unns) (6 unns) (6 unlts) (6 unlls) (6 units)

(6 untts)

Educational Theories (6 units) 53231 Language 1n Educanon (6 unus) 53241 Education and Social Theory (6 u1uts)

Of the two Philosophy topics (53724 and 53727) only one may be taken Of the three History topics (53721 53728 and 53729) only one may be taken and of the two Soc1ology topics (53741and53723) only one may be taken

(11) 53310 Psychology and Teaching the Basic SubJects

(i11) 6 units selected from the follow1ng topics 53331 Problems Pnnc1ples and Techniques of

Evaluauon 53332 School Organ1zauon and Adm1111strauon 53333 Handicapped Children 1n Ordinary Schools 53334 Social lnteracuon 53335 Clear and Cnucal Tl11nk1ng 53336 The School Educauon of Gifted Children 53337 Educational Media 53338 Abong1nes and Education (1v) 1)3340 ll 1ch1ni; Obi.c1v1t1on and Cxp<.ncnce (v) r,331)Q Lxprcss1onal Ac11v1ues

(10 unus)

(3 units) (3 UtlllS) (3 unus) (3 untts) (3 units) (3 units) (3 Ulllts) (3 units) (1 units) (1 units)

(b) To complete the Abong1nal Lducauon strand the follo\'/tng topics sh·dl be completed

(i) 53807 Children from l'vhnonty Group Backgrounds (6 units) (11) 53218 Cross Cultural Perspecuves 111 Education (6 units) (111) 53310 Psychology and Teaching the Basic Sub1ects (IO ututs) (1v) 53342 Teaching Observauon and Expcnence

(Abong1nal educauon) (v) 6 units from the topics listed 111 (4)(a) 'lbove

(8 unlls) (6 ututs)

5 In the [ounh (1nterno;l11p) yc'lr of the degree the following 18 unll'i 'ihdll be completed at a s;r 1de of C or bcllcr

53401 Teaching Internshtp 53410 Apphcauons of Educanonal Theory 53480 Pnmary School Methods

(6 units) (6 unlls} (6 units)

6 Except with the permission of the Board a student mny not proceed to any topics at second year level unul he has completed or 1s enrolled to complete at least 36 unit~ at first year level

7 Except\v1th thepenn1ss1on of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the degree \V1th1n a penod of 10 consecutive years or where credll has been granted for work completed elsewhere walnn such penod as the Board may determine at the tune that credit 1s granted

8 Except \Vtth the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol 1n any year 111 a comb1nat1on of topics valued at more than 39 units

9 A student who holds any other degree or other approved terttary quahhcat1on may be granted status 1n not more than one thud of the total units for this degree on accounl of thal quahhcauon A student who has not completed a degree or other leruary quahhcauon may be granted status in not more than two thuds of the total units for this degree for previous teruary study

IO Except with the perm1ss1011 of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twice

11 A student may proceed to the Honours degree of B'lchelor of Educauon provided that hts performance 111 the first 108 unus of the Bachelor of Educauon was of a standard

83

'iT\TUTE 10 l Contd

considered suff1c1ent by the Board or 1f he has completed all d1e requnements for t.he ordinary degree at a sufficient standard or 1£ he holds any other degree or tertiary qualthc'ltton deemed to be of an equivalent standard provided that his performance rn obtarnxng this quahhcatlon was of a standard considered suf£1c1ent by tl1e Board

12 To qualify for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Educauon a student shall complete sattsfactonly al least 36 unHs 1n an approved programme of studies The Honours programme comprises (a) Two topics from among the following

53510 Educauonal Psychology 53520 Philosophy of Education 53530 Sociology of Education 53535 Educatton and Social Theory 53640 The Handicapped Child 53550 History of Western [ducation

53555 53560 53565 53570 53590 53620

social class and the educatton system Schooling Systems Stat.1sUcs and Research Methods in Educauon Tertiary [ducat1on Science I:ducat1on Educallonal Evaluation issues models techniques Physical Educauon current developments and research and theory and pracuce

5350 I Comparauve Educanon

(9 units) (9 units) (9 untts) (9 units) (9 unlls)

(9 units) (9 untts) (9 units) (9 untts) (9 units) (9 untts)

(9 units) (9 untts)

(b) An appropnate topic (or topics) at third year level suff1c1enl for the completion of a maJor sequence tn any d1sc1phne 1n the Untversuy other than I:ducallon These topics .i.pproved by the Board and normallycarry1nga 12 unit we1ghung \Viii count as9 units for the purposes of tlus schedule

(c) 53490 Spec1<1.l Methods Theory .i.nd Apphc'll!Otl (9 units)

SCHEDULE 10A THE ORDINARY AND HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF EDUCATION (PHYSICAL EDUCATION)

In this sc.hedule t.he course of study for the dtgree 1s set out 111 tc.1ms of topic~ units lnd grades defined as follows A topic 1s 'l prescnbed unount of ac'ldt1n1c \vork for wluch 1 fin'll resuh 1:, rccotded Unllsare the measure of \ve1~hung given to topics determined Ill C'lch c1:,t hy the Bo trd of the approp11ate School 1 normal )C'lr s work by '1 full t1n1e student being\ ilued .it 36 llllllS

Grades are the class1£1cat1ons of pass and fat! for topics 111 the ordinary degree and shall be A D1sunct1on B Credn C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Co1npensatory Result I Incomplete F Fatl

A grade of A B Cor NGP 111 any lop1c\vtll resull1n the full number of units forthattoptc be1ngcred1ted towards the degree Exct.ptas 1nd1cated 1nclause2 agradeofD will result.111 the full number of units for that topic being credited for the deg1ee The gr-ide of F 1n any topic \Vlll result tn no units for that topic being credited to\vards the degree

2 To qualify for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Educatton (Physical Lducat1on) a student shall complete 144 units with a grade of C or better in 120 units and 1neeun~ the following requirements ( l) The 120 units at C level or bettersh.i.ll 1nclude<1ll the units spcc1f1ed 111 sections (g) and (I) below '\IHI It least 6 unlls of t11osc sptc1hecl 111 '>lcllons (l) .i.nd (f) below

84

ST\ TUTE 10 I Contd

(b) 36 of the u1uts specified by sections (c) and (h) and (J) below· shall comprise a maJor sequence as defined in Schedule 2 clause 2 or its equivalent in another Sd1ool of the University (c) 36 first year level unlts

(d) 53110 Teaching Onentauon (e) 53211 Human Development and Education {f) 12 unlts selected from the following

(0 units) (6 units)

53218 Cross Culturdl Perspectives in Lducauon {6 units) 53221 Power and Authority 1n Educallon (6 units) 53222 Psychology and Education (6 units) 53223 Sociology of Education (6 units) 53224 Aesthetics and Education (6 units) 53225 Research Methods in Education {6 units) 53226 Science and £ducatton (6 units) 53227 Philosophy and Education (6 units) 53228 Education and Society in Australia (6 units) 53229 History of Ideas educauonal theones (6 unlls) 53231 Language 111 Educauon (6 units) 53241 Educauon and Social Theory (6 units)

Of the two Philosophy topics (53224 and 53227) onl) one may be taken Of the three History topics (53221 53228 and 53229) only one may be taken and of the two Sooology topics (53241 and 53223) only one may be taken

{g) The following Physical Educatton topics 53261 Physical Acuv1ty phys1olog1cal bases 53262 Physical Activity forms 111 society 53362 Phy:.1cal Activity gro\vth and <lLvelopn1ent 53363 Physical Acuvny analysis measurement and evaluauon 53364 Physical Activity acqu1sit1on of skills 53461 Physical Activity theor) and practice of tra1n1ng 53462 The Physical Educdtlon Profession 53463 Duected Stud)

(h) 12 second year level units 111 a non education baste discipline (J) 12 t.lurd year level units 111 a non educauon basic d1sophne (k) 5'>450 Physical Education 111 Schools (I) 53470 Teaching Internship (P £) (m) Either 53310 Psychology and Teaching of the baste subjects

or all of the followtng topics 533'>7 Educauonal Media 53217 Introduction to Peddgogy 53440 Special Methods (P E )

(6 u111ts) (6 Unit<;) (6 Ullll'>) (6 UTlltS) (6 UllllS) (4 unus) (4 units) (4 units)

(12 Unlls) (l2 untts)

(6 units) (8 unns)

(I 0 u111ts) (3 units) (3 UllllS) (4 units)

3 Except wHh the perm1ssron of the Board a student may not proceed to any topics at second year or thud year level unttl he has completed or 1s enrolled to complete at least36 units at first year level

4 Except \Vllh the permission of the Board a student shall complete thecou1seof study for the degree \V1th1n a penod of IO consecutive years or \\here nedn has been granted fo1 work completed elsewhere wtth1n such penod as the Board may determine at the time thdt credll 1s granted

5 Except wnh the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol in any year tn a comb1nation of topics valued at more than 39 untts

6 A student 'vho holds any od1er degree or other approved te1 ttal) quahftcauon may be granted status 111 not more than one tlurd of the total untts for llus degree on account of that quahficat1on A student \vho has not completed a degree or other te1t1ary qualthcauon may be granted status 1n not mote than t\\O thuds of the total u111ts for this degree for previous tertiary study

7 Except wtth the perm1ss1on of the Board no topic may be atten1pted more than t\vrce

8 A <;tudent 1na) proceed to the Honours degree of Bachelor of Educauon (Physical 1:'..ducauon) provided that hrs performance in the first 144 units of the Bachelor of I:ducauon (Physical Education) Wds of a standard considered sufficient by the Board or 1£

85

STATUTE 10 I Contd

he holds any othei degree or tertiary quahhcauon deemed to be of an equivalent standard provided that his performance in obtaining th1squal1hcauon was of a standard cons1dc1ed sufftctent by the Board

9 To quahfy for the Honours degree of Bachelor of Education (Physical Education) a student shall complete 36 units meeung the follow1ng requirements

(<1) 53620 Physical Lduc.<1tlon current developments 'lnd resedtLh in theo1y and pr.:1.ct1ce (9 unit~)

(b) Ont of tht follo\v1n~ topics 53510 Educauonal Psychology (9 u1uts) 53520 Philosophy of Educauon (9 unlls) 53530 Sociology of Education (9 unILs) 535.50 History of Western Education (9 unll<;) 53560 Stausucs and Research Methods or Its equivalent (9 unas) 53501 Comparative Education (9 units) 53640 The Handicapped Child (9 ututs) 53570 Science Education (9 units) 53590 Educational Ev.:1.luat1on issues models techniques (9 unlls)

(c) 53431 Physical Education Honours Thesis (12 unas) (d) Course work or supervised study tn any School u1 the University chosen tn

consultauon wtth the students supervisor cons1denng the students preparation for his proposed thesis and approved by the Board (6 unns)

SCHEDULE 11 THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY IN THE SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

In this schedule a topic is a prescribed amount of academic work forwh1ch a final result ts recorded Grades are the class1hcauons of pass and fail for work towards the degree taken 1n the School of Med1c1ne In returning results 1n individual topics the following grades shall be used

A D1st1ncuon outstanding performance B Credit performance considerably better than average C Pass clearly satisfactory but not 1mpress1ve performance NGP Non graded pass (for use 1n topics which can be assessed only on a

sausfactory/unsat1sfactory basis) D Compensatory result marginally sausfactory performance NA Not assessed I Incomplete F Fail clearly unsatisfactory performance

In returning results for the work of each year of the course as a whole the following grades shall be used

NGP Non graded pass I Incomplete F Fail

2 To quahfy for the degree of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery a student shall sat1sfactonly complete the course of studies prescnbed by this schedule dunng not less than six years of full time study unless granted status for studies previously undertaken in the University or elsewhere

3 The topics to be studied in the vanous years of the course and the other work to be earned out shall be as follows

First Year (Mark II Curriculum from 1978) 90150 The Biological Basis of Med1c1ne 90151 The Physical and Chemical Basis of Med1c1ne 90152 The Behavioural Basis of Med1c1ne

86

Elective topics (see separate heading below)

Second Year (l\ilark I Curriculum) 90201 The Structure and Function of the Human Body I 90212 Some Considerations 1n Medical and 1-Iealth Care

Elective topics (see separate heading belmv) Nursing att'lchment (see separate heading below)

TJurd Year (Mark I Curriculum) 90301 The Structure and Funcuon of the I-Iuman Body II 90302 Disordered Structure and Function of the Human Body 90~03 Pnnc1ples of Phannacology 90304 Anatomy D1ssecuon 90306 Human Behaviour 90307 Introduction to Clinical Medicine 90325 People their distnbuuon their envuonment

and their diseases

Elecuve topics (see separate heading below) Nursing 'lttachment (see separate heading below)

Fourth Year (A-lark I Curriculum) 90401 Chn1cal Skills 90402 Chn1cal Sciences

Elecuve topics (see separate heading below) Nursing att1.chment (see separate heading below) Fifth Year (Mark I Curriculum) 90501 Med1c1ne term 90502 Obstetrics 'Ind Gynaecology term 90503 Paed1atncs term 90504 Psychiatry term 90505 Surgery term

Elective topics

ST\ I UTF 10 I Cn11td

Each student \Vtll normally be required to take elecuve topics a1nounung to one quarter of the years work 111 each of the first second third and fourth years of the course Thcelecuve topics approved for each year of the course are prescnbed in the syllabuses

Nursing attachment Each student admHted to the course 1n 1976 or subsequent years unless spec1£1cally exempted 1s required to undertake a hve day nursing attachment wuh1n the 1-hnders Medical Centre during a scheduled vacauon penod between the end of the first ye1.r of the course and the beg1nn1ng of the hf th year of the course Details of the nursing attachnient are given under the syllabuses relating to the fust year of the course

4 The content of the topics and the arrangemenL of work w1tlun them sh'lll be as prescnbed from ttme to time in the syllabuses

5 Progression through the course 1s determined on the basis of the students performance Hl the \Vork of each year as a whole Each student is required to obtain a non graded pass in the work of each year of the course in order to be permitted to proceed to the subsequent year Only 1n exceptional circumstances \V1ll a non graded pass in the work of the year as 1. whole be a'varded to a student \Vho has been a\varded (1) 'l. final bradc of r 1n a cote topic or ma1or component ol 1 c.ore topic or (11) 'l. hn1.l grade of D in one thud or 1nore of the topics or ffi'l.JOr co1nponcnts of topics compns1ng 'l. year s work

6 A student 'vho h1.s twice £1.iled 1n the work of any yeJr of the course c;hall be precluded from re cnrolhng 1n the course unless and unttl permitted by the Council on the recommendauon of the Board and then only under such cond1uons as the Board may prescribe

7 In add1t1on to the prov1s1ons of cl1.use 6 of this schedule the Board 'IS provided under clause 10 of Statute 10 l Bachelors Degrees may at any time review the academic progress of a student If the Board judges the students progress to be unsansfactory 1t may requue the student to show cause why he or she should beperm1tted to cont1nucwHh stud1e~ 111 the School and after cons1derauon of the students represcntauons and dll other

87

5T A rUTE JO I Contd

circumstances may take acuon as provided for in clause 10 of Statute 10 I 1ncluding recommend to Council that the student be precluded from further studies 1n the School

SCHEDULE 12 THE HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MEDICAL SCIENCE IN THE SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

In this schedule a topic isa prescribed amount of academic work for which a final result 1s recorded

2 In order to be ehg1ble for adm1ss1on as a candidate for the degree a student shall have demonstrated outstanding ability 1n her or his studies 1n the course for the degree of B M BS or equivalent degree

3 A student who wishes to enrol as a candidate for the degree must apply to the Board of the School of Mcd1c1ne for approval of her or his proposed programme of studies 'lnd for appointment of a member of the 'lcadern1c st tff to supervise her or his programme of studies

4 To quahfy for the d«;gree a candidate (a) shall undertake a programme of studies amounung to the equivalent of one academic year of full time study in topic 91401 Honours Medical Science as prcscnbed tn the syllabus for that topic and shall satisfy the examiners 1n that topic and (b) shall havesuccessfullycompleted the thud year of thecourseof studies for the degree of BM BS of the Un1vers1ty or the equivalent proportion of an undergraduate medical course in another approved University

5 Except wllh the permission of the Board a candidate will be requued to sausfactonly complete her or his approved programme of studies for the degree in one academic year \Vhere permission ts granted for the programme of studies to extend over more th'ln one academic year the Board shall 1nd1cate at the t1meo£ approving the programme of studies the ume available for satisfactory compleuon of the students programme

6 The Exam1nauons Board of the School shall appoint three or more examiners for each candidate for the degree

7 1 he examinauon for the degree shall cons1i;t of the essay requued to be submitted dunng the programme of studies a thesis on the candidates approved research project and an oral examinauon

SCHEDULE 13 THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION

In this schedule the course of study for the degree is set out in terms of topics units and grades defined as follows A topic 1s a prescribed amount of academic work for 'vh1ch a final resull is recorded Units are the measure of we1ght1ng given to topics determined 1n each case by the Bo'lrd of the appropnate School a normal years work by a full ume student being valued 'lt 36 units Grades are the classifications of pass and fatl for topics 1n the ordinary degree and sh'lll be

NGP Non graded Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fail

A non graded pass rn any topic will result in the full number of units for th.it topic being credited to\vards the degree Except as stated 10 cl'luse 3 below· a grade of D \vill re!)ult 1n the full number of units for that topic being credited for the degree A grade of F 111 any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree A d1sc1pl1ne 1s a maJor area of study 111 which teaching 1s offered

88

STATUTE 10 I Co111d

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strauon a candidate (I) shall have qualified for a degree of the Un1vers1ty or for an approved degree of another 1nst1tut1on (2) except \Vlth the perm1ss1on of the Board shall have included n1 his undergraduate studies a m1n1mum of 36 units or the equivalent from d1saphnes 10 the social and behavioural sciences approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences and listed in Appendix A (3) shall have his candidature approved by the Chairman of the School of Social Sciences or his nominee Except wuh the permission of the Board such approval 1s conungent upon at least one years experience other thm as a student

3 (l) To qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1stration a student shall complete sausfactonly a programme of studies as specified in Appendix A requtnng two years of full ume study or tts equ1valent1n part ume study Satisfactory completion of the programme requires at least 72 units at graduate (degree) level with a non graded pass in at least 28 units 1n first year graduate level topics including those topics so specified in Appendix A and a grade of D in the remainder of the 36 unns in fUSl year A non graded pass ts required 1n 36 unns tn second year graduate level topics A student who completes the second year with no unlls of F grade and no more than 12 units of D grade 111 second year topics may apply to the School Board for a further exam1nauon 1n topics relaung to those units of D grade (2) Persons who hold the Diploma in Social Admin1strat1on of the Univer<;1ty are quahhed for and may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strauon on surrender of their Diploma 4 Except \Vtth the permission of the Board a student may not proceed to any topics at second year graduate level unttl he has completed or1s enrolled to complete at least36 units at first year graduate level

5 Except with the penn1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol 1n any year 1n a combinauon of topics valued at more than 39 units

6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a studentshaJl complete the course of study for the degree wtth1n a penod of four consecutive years or lvhere credu has been granted for work completed elsewhere w1th1n such other penod as the Board may determine at the time credit 1s granted

? Except wuh the perm1ss1on of the Board no topic may be attempted more than nv1ce

Appendix A APPROVED DISCIPLINES

The d1sc1phnes 111 the social and behavioural sciences referred 10111 clause2(2) of Schedule 13 include Anthropology Biology Economics Educ..it1on Geography History I aw Philosophy Politics Psychology Sociology and other related dtsc1phnes

PROGRAMME REQUIREMENTS

1 he two year programme consists of a core first year (1n which a non gr'lded pass must be obtained 1n50818Soc1al \Vork Pracucel) and a second year in 'vhtch the student nominates two areas of study to be undertaken 111 assoc1at1on \Vlth a practicum

First Year 50811 Human Development 'l.nd the Social Environment 50812 lntroducuon to Social \Vork 50813 Social Work Methods I 50814 Social \Vork i\Iethods II 50815 Social Adm1n1strat1on 1)0816 Social Pohcy 5081? Social Welfare Services 50818 Social \Vork Pracuce I

89

STATUTE 10 I Contd

Second Year 50911 Advanced Practice 50912 Management 1n Social Welfare 50916 Social Policy Analysis 50918 Advanced Practicum

In the second year the student nominates two areaso( study which he pursues throughout the three terms Concurrent wllh these studies is an advanced practicum Students may choose any two areas of study provided they are not within the same group

SCHEDULE 14 THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SPECIAL EDUCATION

1 In this schedule the course of study for the degree is set out in terms of topics unus and grades defined as follows A topic is a prescnbed amount of academic \Vork for \vh1ch a final resull 1s recorded Units are the measure of we1ght1ng given to topics determined 111 each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal year s work by a full ume student being valued at 36 units Grades are the classihcauons of pass and fall for topics tn the ordinary degree .u1d shall be

A D1sunct1on B Credu C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Co1npensatory Result I Incomplete F Fall

A grade of A B C or NGP 111 any topic will result 1n the full number of units (or that topic being credited towards the degree Except as stated in clause 3 below a grade of D \VIII

result in the full number of units for that topic being credited toward the degree A grade of F 1n any topic will result 111 no untts for that topic being credHed to\vards the degree

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for lhe degree of Bachelor of Special Education a candidate (1) shall have met one of the follow1ng requirements (a) quahhcauon for the degree of Bachelor of Educauon of the Un1verslly or for an approved degree of another 1nstltut1on or (b) quahficat1on for a post graduate Diploma 111 Educauon of lhe UniversHy or for an approved post graduate Diploma 111 :Cducauon of another insutution or (c) satisfactory completion of an approved three year course of teacher prepJrauon at a teruary 1nsutuuon provided that 111 special cases a candidate may be accepted ,..,-ho has quahflcauons that are acceptable to the Board (2) shall have completed a m1n1mum of t\VO years expenence as a full ume classroom tracher acceptable to the Board of the School provided that the Board 1n spec1JI cases may accept as a candidate a person who has gained relevant work expenence 111 an allied profession (3) shall have his candidature approved by the Chairman of the School or lus 1101ninee

3 To qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Special Education a studenr shall complete at least 72 units with a grade of NGP or C or better 111 at least 56 units and a grade of Dor better in the rema1n1ng units

'I hese units shall 1nclu,de (a) 53810 Curnculum Theory and Special Educauon (b) 53803 'Ihe Social Psychology of Exceptional Chtldren (c) 53802 lntroducuon to Exceptional Children

Issues 111 Special Education (d) 12 units selected from the follow1ng topics

53804 General Mental Scholasuc Retardauon 53805 Learning D1sab11tties

90

53806 Behaviour Problems and then Mdnagement 53807 Children from Mtnonty Group Backgrounds 53808 Communication Disorders

(6 units) (8 unns)

(6 units)

(6 units) (6 units) (6 Units) (6 units) (6 unus)

STATUT1'.. 10 I Contd

(f) 53913 Research Methods in Special Educauon

(g) 18 units selected from the follow1ng topics 53905 Advanced Reading Mental Retardauon 53906 Advanced Readmg Behaviour Problems 53907 Advanced Reading Children from Minority

Group Backgrounds 53908 Advanced Reading Commun1cauon Disorders 53910 Advanced Reading Leanung D1sabiht1es

(h) 53903 Practtcal Experience with Handicapped Children

(1) 9 untts selected from 53912 Research Pro1ect tn Special Educauon

or a further topic from those hsted in clause 3(g) above or topic(s) dpproved by the Standing Committee of the School

(6 units)

(9 units) (9 unns)

(9 units) (9 unus) (9 units)

(9 units)

(9 units) (9 untts)

4 Except \Vllh the perm1ss1on of the Board of the School a student must complete the course of study for the degree wnh1n a period of three consecutive years

5 Except with the pernuss1on of the Board a student may not enrol in any year 111 .i

comb1nauon of topics valued at more than 39 unus

6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twice

SCHEDULE 15 THE DIPLOMA IN EDUCATION

In tl11s schedule the course of study for the diploma ts set out 1n tc1ms of topics units and grades defined as follo,vs

A topic ts a prescnbcd amount of 1cadem1c \\ ork for which a f11r1l result IS recorded

Un1H are the n1tasure of wughung given to topics determined in each c.ise by the Board of the clppropndlC School .i norm'll years work by a full t1me student being \Jlued 'll 36 UllllS

Grades are the cl'lssihc'lt1ons of JJ'lSS and fail for topics tn the d1plom.i and shall be

A D1st1ncuon B Credit C Pass NGP Non graded Pass D Compensatory Resull I Incomplete F Fail

A grade of A B C or NGP tn any top1cw1ll result in the full number of units for lhat topic being credited towards lhe diploma Except as stated 1n clause 3 belo,v a grade of D will result 10 the full number of units for that topic being credited for the diploma A grade of F in any topic will result 1n no units for that topic being credned towards the d1plomJ.

2 For admission to the course of studies for the Diploma xn Educauon a candidate (1) shall have met one of the following requuements (a) quahf1catton for a degree of the Untvcrsuy other than the degree of Bachelor of Education or the Bachelor of Education (Physical Educauon) (b) quahhcauon for an approved degree or its equivalent from another tertiary insutuuon (2) shall have Ins candidature approved by the Chatrman of the School or his nominee

The Board of the School 10 special cases and subject to such cond1t1ons as the Board may prescnbe 10 each case may accept as a candidate a person \vho has not quahhed for '1

degree but who has given sausfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To qualify for the diploma a student shall complete sausfactonly a programme of studies leading t':tlher to a secondary teaching quahhcauon or to a pnmary teaching quahhcauon \vilh the poss1b1hty of concentrauon on Abong1nal t:Ju.cauon 1n either option

91

STATUTE 10 I Contd

(1) For the secondary teaching opuon a student shall complete 36 units lvtth a grade of NGP or C or better in al least 28 units (which shall include 53745 Teadung Observauon and Practice) and a grade of D or better tn the rema1ninb 8 units

The 36 units shall include (a) 18 units selected from the following topics

53218 Cross Cullural Perspectives in Educauon 53221 Power and Authonty in Educauon 53222 Psychology and Educauon 53223 Sociology of r.ducauon 53224 Aestheucs and Educauon 53225 Research Methods in Educauon 53226 Science and Educauon 53227 Phtlosophy and Education 53228 Educauon and Soaety in Australia 53229 History of Ideas some sources 111 18th century and

53231 53241

(b) 53217 (c) 53337 (d) 53745

19th century English thought of contemporary educauonal theones Language in Educauon Education and Social Theory

Introducuon to Pedagogy Educauonal Media Teaching Observauon and Pracuce (Diploma of Educanon)

(e) 9 units selected from the Special Methods (Dip Ed ) topics avatlable

(6 unus) (6 untts) (6 unus) (6 unlts) (6 units) (6 UllllS)

(6 units) (6 units) (6 unus)

(6 unus) (6 UllllS)

(6 units)

(3 units) (3 units)

(3 unns)

(9 unns)

(2) For the pnmary teaching option a student shall in the ftrst yearcomplete36 unttswtth a grade of NGP or C or better m al least 28 untts (which shall 1nclude 53340 Teaching Observation and Experience) and a grade of Dor better in the remain mg 8 untts and 111 the 1nternsh1p year shall complete 18 unns at a grade of NGP or C or better

The 54 unus shall include (a) 12 units selected front among those topics

hsted in 3(1 )(a) above (b) 53310 Psychology and Teaching the Baste

(12 untts)

SubJects (10 untts) (c) 53217 lntroducuon to Pedagogy (3 unns) (d) 53337 Educauonal Media (3 units) (e) 53340 Teaching Obscrvauon and Expct icnce (4 units) (f) 53350 Express1onal Acuv1ues (1 units) (g) 53704 Teaclung Intcmsh1p (Dip Ed) (6 units) (h) 53705 Apphcauons of Educational Theory (6 units) (1) 53706 Pnmary School Methods (Dip Ed ) (6 units)

(3) For the Abong1nal eclucauon strand a student shall include the following topics (a) For the secondary teaching option (1) 53217 Introducuon to Pedagogy (n) 53337 Educational Media (111) 53807 Chlldren from M1nonty Group

Backgrounds (iv 53218 Cross Cultural Perspectives in

Educauon (v) 53746 Teaching Observauon and Pracuce

(Abong1nal Education) (vt) 6 units selected from topics hsted 111 3(l)(a) above (vu) 9 units selected from the Special Methods

(Dtp Ed ) topics available (b) for the pnmary teaching opuon (1) The topics hsted 1n 3(3)(a)(1) (iv) above (u) 53342 Teaching Observauon and Pracncc

(Abong1na1 Educauon)

92

(3 unJts) (3 units)

(6 unns)

(6 unns)

(3 untts) (6 units)

(9 untts)

(18 unJts)

(8 UilltS)

(in) 53310 Psychology and Teaching of the Basic Sub1ects

(1v) The topics listed in 3(2)(g) (i) above

STATUTE JO I Contd

(10 unas) (18 units)

4 Except with the perm1s~ion of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma wllhtn a penod of two consecutive years for the secondary teaching opuon \Vllhtn three consecutive years for the pnmary teaching option or where credll has been granted for work completed elsewhere wtth1n such penod as the Board may determine at the time that credn 1s granted

5 Except with the permission of the Board a student may not enrol 1n any year 1n a combination of topics valued at more than 39 units

6 Except wuh the permission of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twice

SCHEDULE 16 THE DIPLOMA IN SOCIAL SCIENCES

In this schedule the course of study for the degree 1s set out in terms of topics units and grades deftned as follows A topic ts a prescnbed amount of academic work for which a final result is recorded Units are the measure of we1ghung given to topics determined tn each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal year s work by a full ume student being valued at 36 unlts Grades are the class1£1cat1ons of pas~ and fail for topics 111 the ordinary degree and shall be

A D1snnct1on B Credit C Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete r Fail

A grade of A B orC 1n any topic will result 10 the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree Except as stated tn clause 3 below a grade of D will result 1n the full number of untts for that top1c be1ngcredlled towards the degree A grade of Fin any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 For admission to the course of studies for the Diploma 1n Social Sciences a c1nd1date (1) shall have met one of the following requirements (a) quahhcat1on for a degree of the Un1versay or (b) quahhcatton for an approved degree or an approved equivalent from another tertiary 1nsututlon (2) shall have completed the requuements for a baste d1sc1phne prescribed 111 Schedule 2 l he Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts tn the School of Social Sciences or equivalent \Vork approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences (3) shall have his candidature approved by the Chaun1an of the School of Social Sciences or his nominee

'I he Board of the School of Social Sciences 10 special cases and sub1ect to such condu1ons as the Board may prescribe 1n each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not quahfted for a degree bul who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To quahfy for the Diploma 111 Social Sciences a student shall complete sat1sfactonly at least36 unlls from one of theprogrammesof studiesspec1hed in Appendix A with agrd.de of C or better in at least 28 units and a grade of D or better in the rema1n1ng units 'I he 36 units shall include at least 24 units from Honours level toptcs and may include (l) a maximum of 12 units from thud year level topics and (2) a maxnnum of 12 untts of thesis

4 Except with theperm1ss1on of the Board a student shall complete the course of study for the diploma w1th1n a penod of 3 consecutive years or where credit has been granted for work completed elsewhere wnh1n such penod as the Board may determine at the ume that credit is granted

5 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol 111 any year 10 a combinauon of topics valued at more than 39 unlls

93

ST AT UTE IO I Contd

6 Except with the pemussion of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twice

7 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board no topic presented for the diploma may repeat work undertaken for earher degrees unless four years have elapsed since the previous degree was awarded

Appendix A

The follow1ng programme requirements have been approved by the Board

AMERICAN STUDIES

The programme for students taking the Diploma in Social Sciences 1n Amencan Studies will be as follows (a) Two thud year level American studies topics (6 units each) (b) Honours topic 34401 Studies in American Social Cnticism (c) 'I bests of approximately 15 000 words to be written under the

superv1s1on of a member of the staff of American studies

ASIAN STUDIES

(12 units) (12 untts)

(12 unus)

Students taking the Diploma 1n Social Sciences 1n Asian Studies will complete 36 units chosen from the followtng (a) at least 24 units selected from honours level Asian Studies topics (b) a maxunum of 12 units chosen from the followtng

37302 Poht1cal and economic development 1n S E Asia 32212 South East Asta 33302 'I he Paruuon of India 1935 1947 30302 Economic Development 35306 Southeast Asian Political Development 38305 Sociology of the Third World 39207 Social Change in Europe and Asia

(12 units) (6 units) (6 unus) (6 units) (6 units) (6 units) (6 unlts)

In special cases the Director of Asian Studies may approve a thesis worth 12 units of approximately 15 000 words to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of the staff

GEOGRAPHY

Students studying geography for the Diploma tn Social Sciences will complete 36 units chosen from the followtng

(a) Honours topics up to a total of 36 units These may include up to 6 units from anotherdisctphneorSchool deemed by the head of the d1sciphne of geography to be relevant to the advanced study of geography and may include a 12 unlt thesis

(b) Up to a maximum of 12 units chosen from the following topics 32302 Urban Geography 32303 Environmental Perception and Behaviour 32304 Geography and Pubhc Pohcy 32204 Physical Geography Geomorphology 32206 The Geography of B1ouc Resources 32207 Geography of Economic Act1v1ty 32208 Techniques in Geography

(6 untts) (6 unHs) (6 unlts) (6 units) (6 untts) (6 units) (6 untts)

1 op1cs from another School or dtsciphne deemed by the head of the d1sc1phne of geography to be cognate to the advanced study of geography may also be taken

HISTORY

(a) A maximum of 12 units selected from thud year level history topics (b) At least 24 untts selected from honours level history topics

POLITICS

(a) 35421 General Paper and Reading Course (b) 35425 B1bhograph1c Studies in Pohucs (c) One further honours level topic (d) Two thud year level Pohucs topics

SOCIOLOGY

(6 untts) (12 unHs) (6 units)

(6 untts each)

This Diploma is intended to enable holders of pass degrees in Sociology and other people whose quahhcat1on is s1m1lar to proceed to further studies in Sociology The purpose of

94

STATUTE 10 I Contd

tlus Diploma programme 1s to allow continuing students or students returning to the Universtty who do not wish to pursue studies for research degrees to acquire skills in applied sociological research which will be useful on areas ltke social planning public decision making etc The Diploma tn Soctal Sciences in Sociology will be composed of 36 unus which does not include a thesis This programme 1s not available 111 1978

SCHEDULE 17 THE DIPLOMA IN EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION

1 In this schedule the course of study for the Diploma ts set out 1n terms of topics and untts defined as follows A topic ts a prescribed amount of academic work for which a hnal result 1s recorded Units are the measure of weighttngg1ven to topics determined in each case by the Board of the appropnate School a normal years work by a fuJl ume student being valued at 36 unus

2 For admission to the course of studies for the Diploma in Educational Adm1n1strauon candidates (I) shall have met one of the follow1ng requnements (a) quahhcat1on for the degree of Bachelor of Educauon of the University or for an approved degree of another 1nstuuuon or (b) quahhcauon for a post graduate Diploma in Education of the Un1vers1ty or for an approved post graduate Diploma in Educanon of another 1nsutuuon (c) satisfactory compleuon of an approved four year course of teacher preparauon at a teruary 1nst1tuuon or (d) such other special qualthcauons as are acceptable to the Board of the School (2) shall have not less than two years relevant work expenence (3) shall have thetr candidature approved by the Chairman of the School or the Chauman s nominee

3 The Board of the School in special cases and subject to such cond1uons as the Board may prescnbe 1n each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not quahhed fora degree or who has less than two years relevant expenence but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

4 1 o quahfy for the Diploma a candidate shall sat1sfactonly complete 36 unns

(1) These units shall 1nclude (a) 53651 Evolving ConceplS of the Adm1n1strator (b) 53656 Research Methods for the Adm1n1strator (c) 53657 The Austrahan Education System

(4%: units)

(d) 53658 The Planning Process (e) and eaher

53653 Commun1cat1on and lnlerpersonal Relattons

or

53655 Personnel in Educauon Systems

(2) 18 units chosen from the following (£) 53652 Patterns of Organ1sauon and

(g) (h) (>)

or

53654 53681 53653

Organ1sat1onal Change Planning Techniques The Organ1sauonal Process Commun1cauon and Interpersonal Relauons

53655 Personnel in Education Systems

provided the course chosen ha!> not already been credued towards the diploma

(J) 41i units chosen from the follow1ng 53671 Planning and Admm1stenng the Educauonal

Programme 53672 Economics of Education

95

STATUTE JO I Contd

53673 Concept" of Work Leisure and Recreation 53674 1 he School and lhe Communlly 53675 Compulers and M.inagemenl 53676 Planning Techniques II 53683 Altemauve Educational Strategies

(3) Part ume candidates will be required e>.cept \Vllh lhe perm1ss1011 of the Standing Committee to take topic 53656 and either topic.5365 l or topic 53658 111 then fust semester of enrolment 5 Except with the permission of the Board a candidate shall complete !.he course of study for the Diploma w1th1n a penod of 3 consecuuve years

6 Candidates \vho desire that courses which they have completed 10 the Un1versuy or clse,vhere be crechted to\vards the Diploma of Educational Adm1n1stration may on wntten apphcauon be granted such exempuon from the requirements of (4) as the Board shall determine

7 Except \VIth the pem11ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol in any yedr in a comb1nat1011 of topics 'alued at more than 39 units

8 Except with !.he pemuss1on of the Board no topic may be attempted more than twice

SCHEDULE 18 THE DIPLOMA IN NUTRITION AND DIETETICS IN THE SCHOOL OF MEDICINE

In this schedule a topic is a prescribed amount of academ1c\vork for,vh1ch a final result 1s recorded Grades are the class1f1cauons of pass and fail for topics in the course of studies and shall be

NGP Non graded pass F ::: Fail I ::: Incomplete

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Diploma in Nutnt1011 and D1etcucs a candidate ( 1) shall have quahfled for a Bachelors Degree of the University in some area of the life sciences or for an equivalent degree or approved equivalent quahftcauon from anothe1 teruary u1st1tuuon (11) shall have completed some approved training 111 biochemistry and (iu) shall have his or her candidature approved by the Cha1rm'ln and Dean of the School of Mechc1ne or his nominee

3 1 o qualify for the Diploma 111 Nutr1uon and D1etet1cs a student shall complete sat1sfactonly the top1c92401 D1eteucs and Human Nutnuon the content of which sh ill be as prescnbed from time to ttme in the syllabuses

4 1 he course of study and 1nternsh1p for the Diploma shall normally be taken over one year Except \Vlth the perm1ss1on of the Board a studenl shall complete the course of study and internship for the Diploma wnh1n a penod of two consecutive years or \Vhere status has been granted for \vork completed else\vhere \Vllh1n such penod as the Board may determine at the time !.hat status is granted

SCHEDULE 19 THE DIPLOMA IN APPLIED PSYCHOLOGY

1 In this schedule !.he course of study for the degree IS set out in terms of topics unusand grades defined as follows A topic is a prescnbed amount of academic work for winch a final result is recorded Units are the measure of we1ghllng gtven to topics determined in each c1seby the Board of the appropnate School a normal years work by a full ume student being valued at 36 UllllS

Grades are the classificauons of pass and fail for topics 1n the ordinary degree and shall be

96

STATUTE 10 I Contd

A D1st1ncuon B Credn C Pass D Compensatory Result I Incomplete F Fail

A grade of A B or C in any topic will result in the full number of units for that topic being credited towards the degree A grade of D or F 1n any topic will result in no units for that topic being credited towards the degree

2 For adm1ss1on to the course of studies for the Diploma 1n Apphed Psychology a candidate (1) shall have met one of the follow1ng requirements (a) quahhcauon for a degree of the University or (b) quahflcauon for an approved degree or an approved equivalent from another teruary inst1tut1on (2) shall have completed the requirements for a ma1or sequence 1n the d1sc1phne of Psychology as prescribed 1n Schedule 2 1 he Ordinary and Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts in the School of Social Sciences or equivalent work approved by the Board of the School of Social Sciences (3) shall have his candidature approved by the Chairman of the School 0£Soc1al Sciences or his nominee

The Board of the School of Social Sciences 1n special cases and sub1ect to such cond1uons as the Board may prescnbe 1n each case may accept as a candidate a person who has not quahhed for a degree but who has given satisfactory evidence of fitness for candidature

3 To quahfy for the Diploma 1n Apphed Psychology a student shall complete at a pass level or better al least 36 units 1he36 units shall consist of no less than 26 units from the Diploma inApphedPsychology or other available Honours level psychology topics and may include (a) one 4 unit third year level psychology topic and (b) up to 6 units from another d1sc1pl1ne or School deemed by the head of thed1sc1pl1ne of psychology to be relevant to the study of apphed psychology

4 Except lVllh the perm1ss1on of the Board a student who fails to attain the pass level o(C or above 1n two or more topics may not proceed to the compleuon of the diploma

5 Lxccpt \VI th the perm1ss1on of the Board a student sh'lll complete the course of study for the diploma wnh1n a penod of 3 consecutive years ,:>r where credit h•s been gronted for work compleled elsewhere wuh1n such period as the Board m'ly determine at the ume that crecht ts granted 6 Except with the perm1ss1on of the Board a student may not enrol in any year 1n a / comb1nauon of topics valued at more than 39 untts

7 Except with the permission of the Board no topic presented for the diploma may repeat 'vork undertaken for earlier degrees unless four years have elapsed since the previous degree \Vas a'varded

97

SYLLABUSES

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

SYLLABUSES

Students are expected to procure the prescribed edition of all set lext-books. Where no ,edition is prescribed they should procure the lalest edition. Those books indicated by an asterisk (•) are available in paperback or student editions.

SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES Dean o[ Studies: Dr.]. F. Harwood

MAJOR SEQUENCES Except where specifically provided to the contrary. any of the MajorTopics here listed may be offered instead as a cognate. The term Set Books is used for books of which students are expected to have their own copies; they are not expected 10 have their own copies of books listed as Preliminary Reading, Recommended Reading or Further Reading. If students wish to acquire for themselves books in addition to those listed as Set Books they are recommended to acquire those indicated by a dagger (tJ. Preliminary Reading is reading which the student is expected to have cOmpleted before the commencement of teaching and on which he may at any time be tested. Further Reading and Recommended Readirig, \Vhere not othenvise specified, indicate reading which the student is expected to do in the course of studying th.c Set Books. ·Disciplines may from time to time·issue further lists of books as reading either required or merely recomn1ended. Study methods and assessment procedures vary.from discipline to discipline. Students are advised to read the separate entries for each discipline, where information on these matters will be found. Lectures, tutorials, seminars and practical classes are held 'vithin the School, and supervised and unsupervised projects inay also be prescribed. ParticUlar importance is attached to the personal supervision of undergraduates in tulorials. In certain topics the tutorial is the.principal teaching medium. Students auend tutorials either individually or in small groups. Regular \Vork in the language laboratory prepares candidates for the oral cxaminadons in f!Jreign languages. Students in the School of Humanities are invited to attend lectures or seminars held in topics or disciplines in which they are interested but for which they have not formally enrolled. Students \Vhose work is of sufficiently high standard may proceed to an Honours degree, either by embarking on a two-year Honours programme after completing 24 units in each of two major sequences and 24 units of cognates, or by embarking on a one-yC'dr Honours programme on completion of the Ordinary degree, i.e. 36 units in each of two major sequences and 36 units of Cognates. For details o{ the Honours programmes, see index. The tern1 Level refers to the lowest level at which a 1opicmay be taken. Level: First Year thus means that the topic in question may be 1aken in First, Second or Third Year of the Ordinary degree; Level: Second year means that a topic may be taken in Second or Third Vear; Level: Third Year means thal a topic may be taken in Third Vear only.

IMPORTANT NOTE

Students who have queries conce~ning the regulations in forC"e in the School, or problems relating to their degree in general, are advised loC"onsult the Dean of Studies for assistance. On mauers in Lerna I to a discipline, students arc ad vis('(! to C"Onsult tht• relevant Director o( S1udics. "fhc allention or students is drawn to the Srhool's policy that, t'Xcepl in spt'cial c:ircu1nstances approved by the School Board, only the thirty students selerttxl lo enrol in ·ropic 13130 will be permined to take more than 12 of their first 36 units at First Y car Level in any,ont• discipline.

S1·l IKK1k, ant1·1·1·x1 hook~<111· u11ui1c,l 11-;11lin).lon "·hich ,uuh·111, 1na~· lw1t-.,1nl.Stml1·11hmt•c·xp11ud111ha\"t'1lwirc1w11 1upic·' ol :.II liooJ,;, lh1t'I a' S1·1 book, m T1·x.1 loook': mulliplc-1 opir' of thrw bnol\ will no!' hr ;i,·;1il;1bk iu llw I .ibr.tl)". 1'11·li111in;11\· ir;ulin).I h 11-.ulin).I which 1lu· 'Uuh111 j, t~IK' lt1l 1oh;l\·1·unn11lr111I h1:fow llwcom1m11u1m111 ol ttrnhing ;m1l rn1·whith lw m:t\' ;11;uw1inw 1 ... 1,-.,u,\. F1111llt"J u-.uli11gant1·R11rnm1w1uhd 11-.uling, win-it· 1101 utlw1wi~1·s1n·c ifit\I, irnlk:m• rmclini.: whiil1 1h1·

0

,mtlc1ll h c-xpr11nl 1111!0 in 1lw101nwof ,u11l~·i11A 1hrS1·l IK11>k,. Rdt"111111· INK1k' ;m•INNlk' whith tlw \1Utl11u will foul u,dul in 1Jw IOlll'>t' of ,1ml!·ing 1lw topic' for which 1h1" ;nr 'P•1·ifitd ..

IOI

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

SPECIAL TOPIC'i

A nu1nbe1 of <l1sc1pl1ne ... w1th1n the School offer one or 1norc Special Topics ts 1ndtcdted 1n their <;;yllabusc.'I The follow1n~ gcner1.l dcf1n1llon tnd condttion'> 1pply to ill .'luch Special 1 op1cs A student\\ ho h.i.s de\ eloped .t parua1J,r interest not catcrul for b) the 'ilandard orfcnni:?;.'1 of tht d1sc1phne may propose such 1 parucul tr uea of interest as a spec11.l .'ltudy In cons1dtnni:?; any such propo~"l.! tht d1scipl1nt will have p 1rt1cula1 rtg 11rl lo tht 1t 1.den11c content of the area and the ava1lab1hty of appropnate suptrv1s1on

!02

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Atla;or Topics 1n English

The d1sc1pline offers the rod.JOT sequence 10110 Enghsh I (12 unit~) 10210 En~hsh II (12 unll<>) 10310 1<..ngltsh III (12 unns)

For cognates offerld by the d1sc1phne sel index In English stud1e<; the main method of teach111g is throue;h personal superv1s1011 .ind group d1scuss1011 111 tutorial classes Con<;equently thoue;h attendance at lectures 1s opuonal students are obhged to altend tu ton.tis and uty student who fails to atttnd It

least half of the tutonals 1n a p'lrt1cular course will norm'llly be con<;1dered not to h'lve done that course In that event such students \Vill be asked to withdraw where that is possible \V1th1n the lime prescnbed by the School of Hum'ln1ues for wuhdra" ti \Vlthout prejudice \Vhere th.tt 1s not possible or where a student fails to \VIthdra\v a gr.i.dt of failure will be recorded Enhhsh students p.trucularly those 'vho pl 1n to pursue thl subject blyond ftrst yt.tr tre advised to acquire personal cop1lS of the NILA Style Sheet revised ed1t1on an adcqu.1te d1cuonary e ~ The concise Oxford dictionary of current Enr;hsh and a Iner 1q h . .u1dhook such as Thrall Htbln.rd and Holman A handbook lo literature

10110 ENGLISH I TWENTIETH CENTURY LITERATURE IN ENGLISH

Dr NII Wc111~te1n.

Unus 12 Le, cl 1-tr'it yec1r Dur 1t1on Whole c1c.1dem1c yt If (lei!>!> C'ontc1ct 3 lee.lures d.nd ont tutonal pu W(t'k pit" furthtr tu ton th c1; .111 lllf..,td Prt rcqu1slles None ( o nqu1~ttes None

)tn1rtun' All !>tudcnts takt 'ice.non A (A'>ptct~ of Modtrn Po('try) and 'iert1on B (A~ptrts of iVtode1n 1-auon) I hcst two slrtton'> c1rc tc1ugh1 concu1nntly du1111h renns I u1d II In I trn1 III '>tU(ltnts sdtct one of tht options listed 111 'icrtlon (

Sccuon A ASPECT<; OF MODFR~ POETRY (Terms I .tnd II) (Dr J F Harwood) Tins <;truon hc1<> t\\O 111 un um!> todt \Clop sktlh 111 th{'rlo<;t n.1d1nE{Of pot tn ind to 1ntrocluc t tht '>ludenl to 1 nu1nbtx of 111 IJOr l\\C'Titath c<'ntury pou;

)el book5 The Prn~u1n book of E11~li~li tiene (Ptnhuln 1q70)• 1' hot I 'i ( olirctrd poem\ 1909 1962 (I 1hu 196~)· I 1wnnrt D l-l )elected pornH (POU{Ulll l<J72)• I o\\tll R \rlecled poenn (I 1htr)• Pl tth '> TIU' <oloHll\ (I 1bu \lJ67) Aru/ (}< 1htr l96fi)• Yt 11'> \\ B )elrtted poetry (M 1< mill 111 ICJ70)• Bold A rd The Ga1nbrzd'{r book of F11£{li~h t'erw 1939 1975 (( unhndgt lln1' Pr 1971)•

~c.cuon B A'it HIS OF MODERN FICTION (I cnns I and II) (Atlr A ~ Brar) l-1\t l(<Of..,lli'>l'd cl t"'>lr<> of 1nodtrn fie 11011 (( 1oup I) will ht '>lud1td piu'> 1 'id(( lion of '1

huthu fnt 110\tl" (to bt cho..,011n con'>t1lt1t1on \\llh th< cou1'>< tutor) from ( roup II

103

SYLLABUSES-H.UMANITIES

Set books GROUP! Conrad J Hearl of darkness and The secret sharer (Bantam)• Faulkner \V As I lay dying (Penguin)• Forster E M A passage to Indra (Penguin)• Joyce J A portrall of the artist as a young man (Pe1u~u1n)• La\vrence D H The rainbow (Penguin)• GROUP II Buri;ess A A clockwork orange (Penguin)• Dostoyevsk1 F Crime and punishment tr D Magarshack (Penguin)• Greene G The power and the glory (Peni;tun)• Golding W The inheritors (Faber)• Heller ] Catch 22 (Corgi)• Huxley A Brave new world (Penguin)• James H The turn of the screw (Dent)• Kafka F Metamorphosis and other stones tr \V and E Muir (Peni;tun)• Tomasi di Lampedusa G The leopard tr A Colquhoun (Fontana)• Ngug1 Wa Thiong o A grain of wheal (Heinemann Educational)•

Section C THIRD TERM OPTIONS One of the follo\ving options to be taken 1n thud term Further details\\ 111 be available from the Eni;hsh Office

I Australian Luerature (Mr B Matthews)

The option involves a study of modern Australian writers - their preoccupat1ons characteristic attitudes development and relauonsh1p to con1emporary urban Aus1ral1a

2 American Lller'lture 1900 to the Present (Dr L Baird)

This opuon 1s intended to present some of the charactenstic themes and forms 1n American wriung of the twentieth century 1nclud1ng Southern hcuon reahsm non realism and the counterculture

3 Anglo lnsh Literature (not offered 1n 1978)

4 The Indian Novel 1n English (Dr S C Harrex)

In this course students will study representative examples of contemporary Indian hcuon written in English examining these works 1n relauon to the1rsoc1al and cultural contexts

10210 ENGLISH II STUDIES IN SHAKESPEARE AND THE NINETEENTH CENTURY

Dr S C Harrex Un11s 12 Level Second year Duranon Whole academic year Class Contact 2 lecturcs and 2 tutorials per week (Terms I II) 1 lecture and I tu tonal per week (Term III) Pre requisite A sansfactory stand.ird 1n 10110 En~hsh I Co requ1sue None

Section E SHAKESPEARE (Terms I and II)

At least ten plays Recommended set text Barnet S ed The Complete Signet Classic Shakespeare (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1972)

Secnon F NINETEENTH CENTURY ENGLISH NOVELS (Terms I II and Ill)

A selection of at least e1~lll of the follow1nis novel~ Persuasion Frankenste111 fVutherznl{ Heights Jane Eyre Bleak House Van1ly Fair Mzddlemarch Wash1n~ton Squan TPn of the d Urbennlles New Grub Street The Picture of Dorian Grav News fro1n Nowhere

Section c N1NE.TEENTll cr .. TURY E~GI ISH POETRY (Terms I II ind Ill)

The follow1nl{ poets Blake \Vords\\Orth Colendge Keats fcnnyson l-lopJ...1ns H.ird\ Time may be made ava1l1ble 1n tutonols for the study of other nineteenth ctntlH) pott~

Note The attention of students 1s drawn to the cognates offen.d bv the d1\ciphnt of En!jhsh 1n parucular the topic 10221 Practical Cnt1cism

104

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

10310 ENGLISH Ill ADVANCED STUDIES IN PRE ROMANTIC AND MODERN

LITERATURE

Unns 12 Level Third year Dur.i.uon Whole academic year Class Contact 2 hours per 'veek

!tls FA Hughes

Pre requisite A sausfaclory standard 1n 10210 Enghsh II Co requ1snes None

Students offer three secuons (one per term) from the followtn~ hst At least two must be chosen from Group A (Pre Romantic) the third from eilherGroup A or Group B In some cases and where time tabling permits students may take t\VO of their sections 10 one term Groups of secuons bracketed together on the hst below are des1q-ned to consutute full coherent courses 1£ taken 10 sequences but each secuon 1s also available as an 1nd1v1dual opuon on the same terms as all other sections

Group A

The Bdllad Spect,tl Author Slvrft

{

Comedy F1cuon and Society Augustan ism Selected Studies 10 Eighteenth Century Luerature

{

Sixteenth Century Poetry Seventeenth Century Poetry Milton Mediaeval Romdnces Development of the English Langudge Iceland1c Sagas The Mechaeval Lyne Rencussance Drama Shakespeare s Contemporaries

Group B

Special Autho1 Jane Austen Spec1.al Author Blake Special Author D H Lawrence Special Author 1-lenry James Scl(,nce F1cuon Farct S'lttre 'lnd Comedy (1n Drama) Studies 10 New Literatures 10 English Special Author TS Ehot Three Ex1stent1dl Novelists Special Author Aldous lluxley

Notes

1) It ts possible thal not all the sections listed '1.bove will be taught 1n 1978 or that more topics will be offered 11) The attenuon of students 1s drawn to the cogn.ate~ offered by the D1sc1pl1nt of I.n~l1sh p'lrllcularly 10320 Tlurd Year H.alf Co~nates tn En~ltsh

105

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

fvla1or Topics in French Director o( Studies Dr E A Close

The d1sciphne offers lhree ma1or sequences (.i) l l l 10 rrench I

11210 rrench II 11310 French III

(12 units) (12 unlls) (12 unus)

~tudenl!i rnay be .idm1ued to a two year Honour!! programme after French II or Jone yeJr Honouro; pro~ramme aher J.rench III

or (b) 11113 Introductory 1'rench A 11114 Introductory rrcnch B I 1220 French IIA 11330 French IIIA

(6 unas) (6 units)

(12 units) (12 units)

"tudent<; may be .idm1tted to a one ye.tr Honours programme after French IIIA

or (c) 11114 Introductory French B (6 unns) 11220 French IIA (12 units) 11330 French IIIA (12 unu<;)

French opuons (6 units)

Students may be admitted to a one year Honours progrunme on completion of the!ie 36 units A wide range of coghates 1s offered in French ~tud1es see 1nde>.. Students fro1n 'ichools other than Human1ues requtnng a number of units other than those it<;ted as ava1lable should consult the Dnector of Studies

Reference books The (ollow1ng books are recommended to all students of rrench Harrap s new shorter Frenlh and English dictionary ed J E Mansion revHe<l M Ferltll and P rorbes (Harrap 1967)

Harrap s standard French and English dzct1onary (French Enghsh p'lrt revised edu1on 2 vols 1972 Enghsh French part revised ed1uon 111 preparation) and M Grev1sst Lebon usa~e (any edn ) are useful works of reference and students who wish to !ipec..1Jhze 111 French or who intend to te.ich the sub1ect themsdves after co1npleung their degrees n1ay , .. 1sh 10 have 1he1r own copies

The btsl French reference d1ct1on.J.ry 1s Jva1l'lble 111 the library Robert P D1ct1onna1re alphah"eltque el analor{ique de la lan~ue fran~aHl ('ioc1ete du llOUVCJU Llttr~ 1967)

Assess1nenl and examination procedures 1n French L.J.n~uJge sk1lb JTC tested dunng th<' ye.J.r and 1bo Ill tx.i.m1nauon It th< <nd of tht yt 'lr AssessnH'lll methods for .ill other topics 1n 1'r<'nch J.rf' dC'nd<d on 'll tht be~1nn1nh of tht academic V<'ar Ill collsuh 111011 with thf' stud<'nt<; or£enng th ll topic

11110 FRENCH I lll n1r111brr~ of frf'1/(lt \laff

l ln1t.., 12 lt\tl 111..,l\tlr Du1 1llon \\'holt lt 1dunu \t 1r C 1...,.., ( 0111 u t ">tt undu 11Hln 1du 1l ..,t< 11011.., Pn H'<JllhlH \I 111 u ul 111011 J< n nc h 01 < Oll\Oll of th< Du cc 101 of C.,1ud1t.., ( () ll'<Jlll..,11(.., '\011<

1'1c1Hl1 J pro\ldt\ 111 1ntrod1u11on to con1tn1po111\ 1'1c1ah htt1 u111c hfc uul thcnu.,hl ">pt ( I 1 I ( lnph l~I \ ..., pl H l d Oii I \[ Ll(h of tlH (on (( 1npo1 II\ I 1 {I}( h l ht Ill l LllCI ( I lit Ill l Id101n1tu i'HIHh 1 ... tu11.,ht th101u..,h pop11!11 I<''' 1111h1tlLJu, \Ollh' 111d lh1tlH\ L\

dc \ ( lopul 111 thc I 1111.,11 IL,( I 1hcn !LOI\ UHi Ill \Ill ii I (Oil\ ( 1.., 111011 t,I OllJl" \II '>llldt1H!i offtr °'ecuon.., A 111d B ">tudcnt.., "ill ht '>ti< nntd It n11d \tu IC(OHhnt, to tht 11 pn,hr<''>'i onc \tn un "111 off< 1 ">t< 11011 ( uid thc othc r \\ill offc 1 C.,<c lion D

!Ob

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

<:iecuon A LANGUAGE (rums I II III) (Dr T G Fenriell) (1) \Vnuen rrench Ch.ss Contact 2 hours per lVcek

Sel book Byrne LS R and Churchill EL A com/1rehe11s1ve Fn.nch i;rammar(BI tcl..\\lll 1963)

(11) Spokln French Cl iss (on tact Languoge laboratory 2 hours per week throu~hout tht yL u Convcrs lllon I hour per week throughout the year Student<; 'lre.i.lso enc_our 11..,td tci 111 1kc ust of the l.iboratory s fac1httes pnv.i.tely 10 improve their fluency

Set books Armstrong L E The phonetzcs of French (Bell 1962) Poht1er R L and H'lgl\vara M P Active review of French (Blaisdell 1963)

Section B C"oNTE\-tPOR\RY FRENCH THEAlRF (r1rst half yt lr) (Nlr D A Askt>w)

Cl.ts<; Contact l lecture per week and 2 tutorials for the whole secuon

Set book Bree Germaine and Kroff Alexander Y eds Twentieth century French drama (Collier Macnu11an Co 1969)

5ect1on C FRE"<CH C1'1E\I\ (Second h'lH )C'lt) (Professor IS Laurie) Cl.ts!> Contact I lecture per week and 3 tuton'lls !or the wholt '>ect1on 2 houl '> ~c1 cu11ng per week

Set books An) two of the follo\vtn~ Anne<; R French c11ie1na s111ce 1946 \Ol!> I and II 2nd cd (7wcm1ner I 970) }ord Ch Hzslozre du c11zlma fran(alS conte1npora1n }94, 77 (l!.d1uons rr ltlCC' Empirt 1977) 5tephenson R dnd Debnx ] R The cinema as art (Penguin 196t'j) Vohn 1ne V and Ford Ch Cznema pour vous (Julh.ird)

Stct1on D 1,1 E'!>J\ t.. Rt\ It.\\ OF BASIL I RF"<Cll (' R \ '\l'\tAR (C.,cconcl h&lf yt 11) (Dr E A Clo~t>J Cl l!>S C..ont'lct I lecture per week

'iet book Pohtztr R L o.nd l.J.1g1w.uo. M P lcllvt' rev1t'w of I'rrnclt (Bl'll'icidl 196!)

llnu~ 6 le\d 1'1rstyeu

11113 INTRODUCTORY FRENCH A Air }) A A~J..rw

Dur 111011 First half ve 1r C 11..,s ( ont.ict Six hours ptr \\eek Pn lt(}lll'>lle Con<;ent of the Directo1 of ',1ud1t'> ( o rtqu1s1tts ~ont

I h1.., toptc .issu1nes no pre\ 1ous kncn\ lecl1..,< of I HtlC 11 It 1nt1od11ct~ ... on1t of tht b l'>IC 'itructurt'i of French JtlCI 1nu1 1te'i 'itudt n!'i Ullo the '>k.lih of H 1d1nh \\ nt1111.., "Pt 1!..11u, incl lt!lol(lllllg to the l.1ngu lgl A B B (' !(It\ l'ilOtl ('Ollf'>l \\ tlh rn nch p lflt( tp Ult'> pn '>llll'i to !>tttduH'> tht snuauo11'> tht \ lft n1ost ill..t h tot nro11ntr1 In I 1 nH t t.., foJC 1gnc 1.., I nH.,u 11..,t l 1bortlory sess1ons1.1re U'itcl to practise 'itrurtures studied 1n cl ts'> lnttoduc tory }renc h A l!lo I\ 11l 1blr t 1tht 1 l.., t '>df cont 111ncl topic 01 l'> p Ill of 1 nl IJOr ... cquu1ce (()Jl'il'itlllh of Inuoductot\ I n IH h A Introduc [{)f\ r n nc h B r ru1c h IIA r IC ll( h IIIA

\rt books Rlpondez s 11 vous plali 3 \O}s (BBC Pubhc<1t1on!>) Pol111tr R 1 llt~l\\llt \IP 1nd(11duntr JR I f(/ullt (Bl11'>dtll llJhb)

I07

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

11114 INTRODUCTORY FRENCH B Professor I S Laune

Units 6 Level First year Durauon Second half year Class contact Six hours per week Pre requisite Con~cnt of the Director of Studies Co requisites None

Tins topic assumes an elementary kno\vledge of French (equivalent to that provided 1n 11113 Introductory French A) and students \Vllh some previous kno,vledge of the Iangua~e may prefer to enter French studies at this point rather than tnrol 1n Introductory French A The topic completes the study of the basic structures 1n rrench begun 1n Introductory rrench A and 1s intended to provide students wHh the baste ab1lny to read and wrlle I rench and to speak and understand the language reach in~ 1s conducted in classes .ind 111

practice sessions In the Language Laboratory Extensive read1n~ mattnal ts 1nt1oduccd tn this toptc organized around short colour hlms of rrance 'vith d I rcnch commentary Introductory French B is available cnher as a self contained topic or "l.S part of a m,Jor sequence cons1st1ng of Introductory French B frcnch IIA French IIIA and 6 further units of French opuons to be td.ken at an appropriate ume after consultauon with thl D1n.ctor of Studies

Set books Pohtzer R L Hag1wara M P and Carduner J R L Echelle (Bl usdell 1966) Chron1ques de France (Pans ADPF ct CLE 1nternauonal 1976) The folio\\ tn~ bool-..lets \VIII be set for 1978 Survol de la Provence La Garo1111e Toulou'ie Noel h Se({urel Le V111 en f ranee I a Tapissene de Bayeux Aubusson capitale de la tapissene Chartres Le Rh111

Unus 12 Level Second year

11210 FRENCH II All menibers of French 'itaff

Durauon Whole academic year C'l.1ss Contact See under 1nd1v1dual scc.t1ons Prt requisite As Hlsfactory st.i.nd nd 1n 11110 F1u1ch C'o requ1s1te~ None

t;1udtnts offer 5cct1011 A and ANY r\VO of Sections B C D E l- ( I-I I

"-,(cuon A l \'\C UACl. (rerm.., I II Ill) (Dr T ( ln1nell)

(1) \Vntten fnnch C'l t~s Cont tct I hour ptr week tluoughout the yt 11

\rt books Byrne L ') R and C'hurch1ll E I A co1nprehen 'ilt'I' French l'.{ran1111ar (Bl 1rl-..\\ t II I <161)

(11) 'ipol-..en 1-nnrh ( 11~.., (on tact L tngua~e l<ihor llor} I hour pt r \\ u !... 1h1ou~hout tlH 't 11

(onvtrs1t1on I hourpcrwetk throut,hout tht yt11 No 'iU book "-,ut1CJ11B "-,f\f'\Hf'\Ill(f'\llR' IR\'\Cf(lll'ito1 'iuOndhlif\(ll)(1\/1 /)A A\krw) l'ikew)

CJ 1..,~ C 0111 ut Ind!\ 1duc1.l 1u1on ti<> ,.., rt'(]111n-c:l

Prelu111nary rradua, t\I1ndrou R laFran(eau.\XVllf'etXII/lr'iJf'Clf\ Nou,t\lc Cho(Pll} 19{)7) \.lou~n10 R I I'\ AI Ir el XV/Ir 1urle1 (P ll V J<Jb7) I OU{{h J A111ntrod11c/1011 to 'it';r11ten1th centun lranrr (I ont,1n1n 1970)

No 'i( I boo!... ...,((11011( (J\ ... 'iJ(\I l-R•'\Cllil1tR\llR•("-,uo11dh11f\tll)(1\lr /) J hhrll)

( 1,..,.., Connet 2 cl l\'i(~ per \\t(I-..

I08

SVLLABUSF.S-HUMANJTIES

This secuon provides an introduction to the literature of 17th century France Set books La Bruyere J de Les caracteres de Theophraste (Gamier Flammanon) La Fayette M M La pnncesse de Cleves (Garnier Flammanon) La Rochefoucauld F de Maximes et reflexions (L1vre de Poche) La Fontaine J Fables (Garnier Flammanon) Pascal B Pens€es (L1vre de vie ed1uons du Seuil) Mourgues 0 de An anthology of French 17th century lyric poetry (0 UP 1966)

Secuon D MODERN FRENCH LITERATURE AND IDEAS (Ftrsthalf year) (Professor I s Laurie) (a) Feminism in France (not available in 1978) (b) Intellectual Adventures a survey of 20th century French Prose (Dr D S Hawley)

Class Contact One semmar per week (90 minutes)

This section provides an 1ntroduct1on to the authors and literary movements which have shaped contemporary French prose The readings will form the basis for a d1scuss1on of the ma1or developments 1n French literature from the fin de s1ecle aestheuctsm of Proust and the Surreahst revoluuon of the twenues through Sanre s ex1stenuahsm to the nouveau roman and its progeny

Set books Breton A Nad1a (Galhmard 1972) Malraux A La Vo1e royale (L1bra1ne Generate Francaise 1954 L1vre de Poche no 86) Proust M Un amour de Swann Du cOte de chez Swann (Galhmard 1975) Robbe-Gnllet A Dans le labynnthe (M1nu1t 19:J9) Roche M Codex (Seuil 1974) Sanre ] P La Nausle (Galhmard 1972)

Recommended reading Breton A Les manifestes du surr€alume (Galhmard 1963) Rabbe Gr1llet A Pour un nouveau roman (Galhmard 1964)

Background and general reference works available 1n the Un1vers1ty Library Bersan1 ] et al La liltErature en France depuis 1945 (Borda 1971) Nadeau M Le roman fran)ais depuis la guerre rev ed (Galhmard 1970) Ra1mond M La cnse du roman des lendemains du naturahsme aux annees v1ngt (J Coru 1966) Raimond M Le roman depuis la rlvolut1on1 chaps 4 5 (A Cohn 1968)

Section E FRENCH POETRY (Second half year) (Professor I S Laurie)

Class Contact l lecture per \veek

Set books Faral E Petite grammaire de l anc1en fran,azs (Xlle et Xllle siecles) (Hachette 1968) Pauph1let A ed Poetes et romanciers dy moyen age (Ple1ade) Secuon F HISTORICAL FRENCH LINGUISTICS (First half year) (Dr T G Fennell)

Class Contact 1 lecture per week An elementary kno\vledge of Laun \Vtll be assumed

Preliminary reading Wartburg W von Evolution et structure de la langue fran<;a1se (Francke 1962)

All students must read this book before lectures begin and they will be examined on tt in the first week of the half year

The follow1ng works should be consulled 1n lhe Universtty Library

Fouche P Phonttique histonque du fran~ais 3 vols (Khncks1eck 1952 1969) Foulet L Petite .i;yntaxe de l ancien fran~azs (Classtques francais du moyen age Champion 1965) Nyrop K Grammaire Justonque de la langue franr;aise vols I and II (Picard 1939) Pope M K From Latin to modern f'rencfl (Manchester Univ Pr 1961) Brunot F and Bruneau C Pr{cis de grammaire Justonque de la langue franr;a1se (Masson 1949) Bloch 0 and Wanburg W von D1ctzonna1re etymologique de la langue franf;a1se (Presses Un1versita1res de France 1964) Bourc1ez E E ] Prlc1s Justonque de phonetzque fran§aise (Khncksieck 1958)

109

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Secuon C fRENCH LITERATURE 1820 1860 (Second half year) (Dr E A Clam)

The aim of the course is lo provide a suivey of som<. of the main currents in I rench htcrature of the pcnod Rom,n1uc1sm the Art for Arts sake 1novement the nse of the novel and Reahsm

Set books Balzac H de Eugenie Grandel (L1vre de poche) Flaubert G !vladame Bovary (Folio or Lrvre de pochc) Hugo V flernani et Ruy Blas (L1vre de poche)

Preface de Cromwell (Class1ques Larousse) M{nmfe P Colomba (Harrap paperback) Stendhal Le Rouge et le noir (Folio or L1vre de pochc.) The poetry of France vol Ill 1800 1900 eel A 1\11 Boase (Methuen 1973)

Reference books Brereton G An introduction to the French poets (l'vlelhuen 1973) Cobban A A history of modem France vols II and III (Penguin)• Rant A \V The nineteenth century (Nelson 1966)

Secuon I-I SPECIAL 1 OPIC I (I 1rst or second half year) (All members of staff} Class Contact At instructors d1screuon

Secuon I Srr,.c1AL TOPIC II (Fust of second half year) (All me1nbers of staff)

Cla!.S Contact At instructors d1screuon

NOTE The attentton of students is drawn to the av.ulab1hty of half cogn Hes related to sections B C E F G 1-1 I above

11220 FRENCH llA

Units 12 All members of French staff

Level Second year Durauon 'Vhole academic yc.ar Class Contact See under 1nd1v1dual sections Pre requ1sne A sallsfactory standard 1n 11114 Introductory J.rench B Co requ1s1tes None

Students offer Secuons A B and C

Secllon A LANGUAGE (Terms I II Ill) (Dr T G Fennell)

1) \Vntten French Class Contacl 2 hours per week

Set book Byrne LS R andChurdull EL Acomprehens1veTrenchgra1nniar(Bh.ckvvell 1963)

(n) Spoken French Cl'lss Cont'lCt Language Laboratory 2 hour!. per wetk Lluoughout tht- year Conversauon I hour per week throughout tht. year Stud1.nts are also encouraged to make use of the laboratot} s faC1l1ues private!) to 11npro\ e theu fluency

Set books Annstrong L E The phonetics of French (Bell 1962) PohtLer R L and I-lag1wara M P Active review of French (Bla1sdcll 1963)

Section B CoNTE'1PORARY fRENCH THEATRE (first half year) (Mr D A A~kew)

Class Contact I lecture per lveek and 2 1uto11als for the whole section

Set book Bree Gern1a1ne and Kroff Alexander Y ed Twentieth century 1' rench drama (Col her Macmillan Co 1969)

Secuon C fRI'..NCH CINEMA (Second half yea1) (Professor l S Laurie)

Class Contact 1 lecture per week and 3 tu Lona ls for the whole :;ecuon 2 hours sci ccrung per week

Set books Any two of the following

!10

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Armes R French cinema since 1946 2nd cd vols I and II (Zwemmer 1970) Ford Ch Histoire du cinema fran1a1s contemporazn 1945 77 (France Emp1re 1977) Stephenson R and Debnx J R The cinema as art (Penguin 1965) Volmane V and Ford Ch Cinema pour vous (]ulhard)

NOTE Theauention of students ts dra,vn to the hstof cognates offered by thed1sc1phneof French

Units 12 Level Th1rd year

11310 FRENCH Ill All members of French staff

Durauon Whole 1cadem1c year Class Contact Sec under 1nd1v1dual secuons Pre requ1s1te A sausfactory standdrd tn 11210 Frend1 II Co requ1snes None

Students offer Secuon A and ANY TWO of Secuons B C D E F G H I Attenuon rs drawn to the hm1tat1ons on ava1lab1hty h<itcd for these sections

Section A LANGu \C"E (Terms I II III) (Dr E A Close) (1) Written French Class Contact 1 hour per week

Sel books Byrne L S R and Church1ll :C L A comprehens1veI'renchgrammar(Blackwell 1963) Grev1sse M Le bon usage (Duculot)

(u) Spoken French Cld!)S Contact 1 hour per \Veek throughout the year

Reference books Dayan F La phrase les modalites de l e'<press1on (•v•tlJble tn Langua~e Laboratory) Secuon B SEVENTEEVTH CE"i'TURY FRANCE (First or second half year) (Afr D A Askeu1) Askew)

Not 1va1lable to students who h•ve taken Section B of rrench II or Cogn1.te 11202 I he syllabus 1s as for Sccuon B of French II ::iectton c CLASSICAi FRENCH LITERATURE (Second half year) (Mr D A Askew)

Not dva1lable to students \Vho have taken Section C of rrench II or Cognate 11203 The syllabus 1s dS for Secuon C of French II Section D MODERN FRENCH LITERATURE AND IDEAS (First half year) (Professor I s I aurie) I S Laurie)

Subject for 1978 Intellectual Adventures a survey of 20th century rrcnch pro!)e The syllabus ts as for Secuon D of French II

Secuon E FRENCH POETRY (Second half year) (Professor I S Laurie)

Not available to students who have taken Section E of French II or Cognate 11206 The syllabus is as for Section E of French II Sccuon F H1sTORICAL FRE..,CH L1"iGUtsT1cs (Fust half year) (Dr T G Fennell)

Not avatlable to students who have taken Secuon F of French II or Cognate 11207 The syll•bus is as for Sccuon F of French II

Sectton G FRENCH LITERATURE 1820 1860 (Second half year) (Dr C A Close)

The syllabus IS as for Section C of French II

Secuon H SPECIAI ToPIC I (First OR Second half year) (All members of staff)

A student may not offer under thts section any field of !)tudy already presented under Sections Hor I of French II or 1n Cognates 11209 or 11219

Secuon I 5PECl\L TOPIC II (First OR Second h-.lf year) (All menibers of staff)

A student may not offer undtr this secuon any field of study already presented under Secuons Hor I of rrench II or 1n Cognate!) 11209or11219

NOTE The attenuon of students 1s drawn to cognates offered by the d1sc1pltne of French

Ill

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Un11s 12 Level Thnd year

11330 FRENCH lllA All members of French staff

Durauon Whole ac1.demic year Class Contact See under 1nd1vidual sections Pre requisite Satisfactory standard in 11220 French IIA Co requisites None

Students offer Sections A B and C

Secuon A LANGUAGE PART I (Terms I II III) (Dr T G Fennell)

(i) Wntten french Class Contact l hour per \Veek throughout the year Set bonk Byrne LS R andChurclull EL A comprehens1veFrenchgrammar(Black\Vcll 1963)

(n) Spoken French Class Contact Language Laboratory I hour per week throughout the year Conversation l hour per week throughout the year

Section B LANGUAGE PART II (Terms I II III) (Dr E A Close)

Class Contact I hour per week throughout the year

Set books Byrne L S R and Churchill E L A comprehensive French grammar (Blackwell 1963) Grev1sse M Le bon usage (Duculot)

Secuon C Students offer any ONE of Secuons B to I from topic 11310 not included elsewhere in the degree

ll2

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Ma1or Topics zn Spanish and Portuguese

Director of Studies Dr E Gomez Soto

Timetable Co ordinator Mr B Judge

The disciphne offers l\vo ma1or sequences

A 12110 Spanish I 12210 Spanish II 12310 Spanish III

or B 12120 Spanish IA 12210 Spamsh II 12310 Spanish III

(12 umts) (12 units) (12 umts)

(12 umts) (12 unm) (12 unns)

For offenngs in Portuguese and Brazilian Studies and other cognates see elsewhere m this syllabus

Unns 12 Levtl l<nst year

12110 SPANISH I INTRODUCTION TO MODERN SPANISH FOR

SPANISH SPEAKERS AND MATRICULANTS IN SPANISH

All members of Staff

Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Language classes and Language Laboratory 3 per 'veek (Terms I II Ill) C1v1ltzat1on - l per week (Terms I II) Luerature - 1 per week (Term I) 2 per week (Terms II Ill) No week contains more than 6 contact hours Pre requtsltes For nauve speakers of Spanish and Matnculants 1n Spanish Co rcqu1sttes None

Assessment will be made on the basis of wntten work throughout the year (language exercises and lnerary assignments) language proficiency tests and examinauons Wntten and spoken Spanish will be studied and students are expected to acquire a knowledge o{ the geography art music and history of Spain Students study sections A B and C

Secuon A LANGUAGE (Terms I II III) (Mr B Judge and other members of staff) There wtll be classes tn modem Spanish grammar syntax cranslat1on language essay work and audio comprehension (work based on taped matenal) Translauon into good Enghsh of comparable standard 1s obligatory

Set books As for 12120 Spanish IA

Reference books Da Silva Z S On with Spanish (Harper &: Row 1970) Harmer L C and Norton F J A manual of modem Spanish (Unt Tutorial Press) Ramsey M M and Spaulding R K A textbook of modem Spanish (Holt Rinehart&: Winston 1964)

Sectton B SPANISH CIVILIZATION (Terms I II 111) {All members of staff)

The programme for tlus secuon of the course for competent speakers and matnculants tn Spanish will be 1denucal with that for 12120 Spanish IA

Secuon c MODERN SPANISH LITERATURE (Terms I II Ill) (All members of staff)

Set books As for Spanish IA and in add1uon (Term I) Basco Ibaii.ez V La barraca (Harrap) Garcia Lorca F Bodas de sangre (Losada)

Assessment \Vtll be by assignments and by exam1nauon In the latter quesuons may be asked on any of the prescnbed texts The questions will be mainly of the context type of wluch translation into good English of comparable standard ts an obligatory part

113

SYLLABUSE.5-HUMANITIES

Units 12 Level First year

12120 SPANISH IA INTRODUCTION TO MODERN SPANISH

All members of staff

Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact C1v1hzat1on or Lllerature 1 per week Term I 3 per week Term II 'lnd 2 per \veek rerm III Language cl'lsses and Language Laboratory Te 1n I 5 perlveek Terms II and III 3 per lveek No week contains more th'ln 6 contact hours Pre rcqu1s1tes None Nauve speakers and students \Vllh m'ltttculauon Spanish see 12110 Spanish I

Assessment \v11l be made on the basis of wnuen work throughout the year (language exercises and literary assignments) l1nguage prof1c1ency tests and exam1nauons Students will be expected to acquire a \Vork1ng knowledge of elementary spoken and \Vrtllen Spanish the geography art music and history of Spain Students study secuons A B and C

Beginners Section A LANGUAGE (Terms I II III) (Mr W A R Richardson and other mcrnbers of staff)

Set books Langenscheidt s standard dictionary of the English and Spanish languages ed C C Smuh G A Davies and H B Hall (Hodder and Stoughton) OR Collins Spanish dictionary ed C C Smuh (Collins) Da Silva Z S Spanish A short course (Harper & Row)

The oral exam1nat1on includes d1ctat1on reod1ng and comprehension fhe \Vntten exam1nat1on which is based on Spanish A short course and on work done 111 the weekly grammar and translation classes may also include exercises in comprehension translation and free compos1t1on

Section B SPANISH CIVILIZATION (Terms I II) (All members of staff)

Set book Perceval M The Spantards - how they live and work (David & Charles) Cyclostyled matenal may also be supplied dunng lectures This sccuon w11l be tested orally at the end of the year

Section c MODERN SPANISH LITERATURE (Terms II III) (All members of staff)

Set books A selecnon of modem Spanish shorlslonesand two short film scnpts (cyclostyled matenal will be provided) Poetry (cyclostyled matenal will be provided) Garcia Lorca F La zapatera prod1g1osa (Harrap) Delibes M El cam1no (Harrap) Assessment \VIII be by assignments .ind by exam1nauon In the latter quesuons may be asked on any of the prescribed texts The questions will be mainly of the context type of \vh1ch translation into good Enghsh of comparable standard 1s an obhgatory part

Recommended l1sten1ng Delibes M Selected readings from El camino Machado A and Garcia Lorca F Selected poems

12199 SPANISH 18 INTRODUCTION TO MODERN SPANISH FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS

All members of staff

Un11s 9 Level Flfst ye•r except for students 10 the School of Human1ues Duration \Vhole ocadem1c year Class Contact Language classes 3 per \veek Tenn I 2 per week Term II l per week Term

114

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

III Language Laboratory 2 per week Term I 1 per week Terms II III Medical Text work l per week Tenn III Pre requ1s1tes None Native speakers and students with matriculation Spanish should contact the Director of Studies

Assessment will be made on the basis of written language 'vork throughout the year language proficiency tests and exam1nat1ons Students will be expected to acquire a working knowledge of elementary spoken and written Spanish and to comprehend a series of general medical essays written by the most famous Spanish medical authority of this century Students must study Secuons A and C For Section B see below

Section A LANGUAGE (Terms I II III) (Mr W A R Richardson and others) Set books Langensche1dt s standard dictionary of the Enghsn and Spanish languages ed C C Smith G A Davies and H B Hall (Hodder and Stoughton) OR Collins Spanish dictionary ed C C Smuh (Collins) Da Silva Z S Spanish a short course (Harper & Row 1977)

The oral examinauon includes dictation reading and comprehension The wrilten examinauon which ts based on Spanish a short course will also include exercises tn comprehension and translation from other sources

Section B SPANISH CIVILIZATION (Terms I II) (All members of staff)

Set book Perceval M The Spaniards - how they live and work 2nd ed (David & Charles 1972) Cyclostyled material may also be supphed during lectures

This senes of background lectures on Spanish C1vihzauon may well be of interest to students but attendance ts optional and H will not be examined There is one lectute per week during Terms I II

Section c MEDICAL TEXTS (Staff) Set book Marail6n G La mediczna y nueslro tiempo (Espasa Calpe 1963)• Cyclostyled material may also be supplied

Reference book Rutz Torres F D1cc1ona110 inglls espaTiol y espanol ingles de med1cina (Alhambra)

Assessment will be by class 'vork and a comprehension quesuon on a text included in the final language examinauon

NB 12320 Option B Portuguese & Braz1han Studies l 1s available to medical students who can satisfy Mr Richardson that they have an adequate kno,vledge of Portuguese

Un11s 12

12210 SPANISH II CONTEMPORARY SPAIN AND SPANISH AMERICA

All members of staff

Level Second year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact 6 lectures per week Language classes 2 per week Language Laboratory 1 per week Converi.auon Class l per week (see Section E) Pre requisites A satisfactory standard in 12120 Spanish IA or 12110 Spanish I (studenlS proceeding from 12110 should contact the Director o( Studies as soon as possible) Co requisites None

Assessment \Vtll be made on the basis of written work throughout the year (language exercises essays and hterary assignments) language proficiency tests and exam1nauons This is a second year outltne topic 1n the hterature drama and history of contemporary Spain and Spanish Amenca designed to develop the comprehension and appreCldtlon of contemporary spoken and wnttcn Spanish Weekly grammar translauon and laboratory classes are continued and there will be language essays eve1y thud \vcck Students study Secuons D E r and G

115

S\'l.LABUSES-HUMANITIES

Secnon D LANGUAGE (Terms I II III) (Mr B judge and other members of staff)

Set books Langenschezdt s standard dictionary of the English and Spanish languages by C C Smtth G A Davies and H B Hal1 (Hodder & Stoughton) OR Collins Spanish dictionary ed C C Smith (Collins)

Reference books Da Stlva Z S On with Spanish (Harper&: Row 1970) Harmer L C and Norton F J A manual of modern Spantsh (Univ Tutorial Pr) Ramsey M M and Spaulding R K A textbook of modern Spanish (Hoh Rinehart & Winston 1964)

Section E SPANISH AMERICAN CIVILIZATION (Terms I II Ill) (Dr E Gomez Soto)

Set book Richard F S H1spanoamerica moderna (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich) Supplementary cyclostyled matenal will be given outdunngclasses The set book and tlus matenal form the basis for conversation classes and will be examined orally dunng the course of them

Reference book Arc1n1egas G Latin America a cultural history (Barne & Rockhff 1969)

Section F CONTEMPORARY SPANISH LITERATURE (Terms I III) (Professor K Garrad and Mr B fudge)

Set books Calvo Sotelo J La muralla (Harrap) Olmo L La camisa (Pergamon)• Perez Caldos B Doria Perfecta (Hernando) Buiiuel L Virid1ana ([ra)•

Section G CONTEMPORARY SPANISH AMERICAN LITERATURL (Terms I II) (Dr E G6mez Soto and Mr W A R Richardson) Set books A selection of Spanish Amencan short stones by H Quiroga I Rulfo and G Gabnel Garcia M<trquez (Cyclostyled matenal w1Il be provided) Caballero Calder6n E Siervo sin tierra (Bedout)• Neruda P Poesias (Cyclostyled matenal provided)

Recommended listening Qunoga H Selected short stones Neruda P Alturas de Macchu Picchu Mistral G Poesias Rulfo J Luvina and Diles que no me maten

In the literature exam1nat1on questions may be asked on any of the prescribed texts The questions may include translations from any of the texts

Units 12 Level Thud year

12310 SPANISH Ill GOLDEN AGE SPAIN

Professor K Garrad and Mr B fudge

Duration Whole academic year C.lass Contact 2 lectures/sem1nars per week per Sections I J and K Language Class I per week Language Laboratory (audio comprehension) and/or Grammar I per week C.onversauon Class l per week Pre requ1s1te Asatisfactorystandard tn 12210 Spanish II Students proceeding from 12210 Spanish II should contact the Director of Studies as soon as possible Co requisites None Assessment will be made on the basis of wnuen work throughout the year (language exercises essays and literary assignments) and exam1nauons Weekly grammar translation and essay classes are continued together with work 10 the

116

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Language Laboratory Secuon I J and K are intended to serve as an 1ntroduct1on to Spanish literature history and thought before 1700 Srudents study Secuons H I J and K

Section H LANGUAGE (Terms I II III) (All members of staff)

The cxam1nauon consists of one passage of literature for translauon into [nghsh and one passage of modern English for translation into Spanish The oral exam1nat1on includes conversation

Section I SPANISH BALLADS (Term I) (Mr B Judge)

Reference book Foster D W The early Spanish Qallad (Twayne s 1971)

Set book Smith C C Spanish ballads (Pergamon 1965)• C.yclostyled material \v1ll also be provided

Sectton J GOLDEN AGE VERSE DRAMA (Terms II and III) (Professor K Garrad and Mr B judge)

Set books Tirso de Molina El condenado por desconfiado ed Rogers D (Pergamon) Lope de Vega El castigo sin venganza (Pergamon)•

NoTF There arc a number of Golden Age Plays ava1lablc on tape in the Language Laboratory

Section K GoLoEN AGE PROSE LITERATURE(Terms II and III) (Professor K Garrad and Mr B judge)

Set books C..erv'l.ntes Saavedra M de Don Qui1ote (Col Austral Lsp'l.sa Calpe)• Ro1as F de La Celestina (cydostyled and taped matenal will be provided) Rojas R de The Spanish bawd La Celestina tr Cohen J M (Penguin)

Literature Exam1nauon questions may include uanslauon

117

SYLLABUSF.S-HU:MANITIF.S

Ma1or Topics m Drama Director of Studies Mr M Morley

fhe d1sc1phne offers the maJor sequence 131 lO Drama I (12 units) 13210 Drama II {not offered 1n 1978) or 13220DramaIIAor13230 DramaIIB or 13250 Dram'l IID (not offered 1n 1978) or 13270 Drama III: (not offe1ed 111 1978) (12 units) 13310 Drama III or 13320 Drama IIIA or 13330 Drama IIIB or 13390 Drama IIIC (12 untts)

All topics listed witlun the above statement of ma1or sequences may be taken as cognates provided the cond1uons of pre rcqu1s1tes and co requ1s1tes are met It should be noted however that the follow1ng comb1nauons of topics 1nay not be presenttd tow'l.rds the degree

13220 and 13310 13230 and 13320

I or further offtnngs 1n the Drama Centre and other cognates see index

l'.)tudents enrolling 1n d1 ama studies should setk advice concern1ng the alternatives offered This advice 1s ava1lable from Mr M Morley 111 room 270 School of l-Iu1nan1ues Where a co ordinating staff member is absent on Study Leave students are asked to consult the Dulctor of Studies before enrolment In particular students are asked to note the information concerning the Drama Centre published in the Calendar The Dram'l Centre C'lters for highly motivated students who \vish to undertake basic i.tudtes leading to\vards a career in theaue film television and radio 111 acung wnt1ng for hhn and telev1s1on d1rectton management stage management and other related .ict1v1t1es Students will be chosen for their ab1hty to mo' e towards'0. spec1al11ed act1v1ty 111 second and third years Occasionally students of excepuonal 'lb1l1ty will be encouraged to 1nove towards a lVrtttng spec1ahzauon 1nclud1ng theatre and radio after thetr ftrst year There lvill be an opportunity for students to change areas of intended speci.tl1zat1on at the end of first year but they will have to furnish evidence to support thetrch 1nge of 1ntent1on l'.)pec1al1sed studies of m1meand modern dance are offered at the third and fourth year levels of thl BA degree Advanced specialised training is available at the postgraduate level (see MA (Drama)) 'Some Drama topics are available only to students admitted to the Drama Centre Other Drama topics are open to general enrolment 111 the School of I-Iuman1ues \Vhere there are pre requ1site or co requisite studies or where admission to topics 1s by 1nterv1ew aud1t1on or other means these requirements are specified 1n each topic set out below In any year students 111 some topics may be required to be ava1lable for a part or the whole of one week 111 V'tcat1on llme Whete such a poss1b1hty exists the requ1rement IS again sholvn in the 1nd1v1dual topic 1nformauon Such requirements will be not1f1ed at least a te1 m 1n advance In 1978 there wtll be a d1sc1pl1ne producuon 111 which all Drama students are el1g1ble for involvement urespecuve of whether they are members of the Drama Centre or not Tius producuon will be dunng the second half of the year and will be directed by Professor W Cherry Students part1c1pat1ng 111 performances for the public must expect add1uonal calls on their nonnally free hours 111 the day and especially the evenings immediately preceding and including the performances and they should plan their work accordingly Students must provide themselves with and wear suitable pracuce clothes for all performance classes and rehearsals A track sutt 1s recommended for all acting classes Students taking Movement Expression and Mime classes must provide themselves with and wear dance shppers ugh ts and a close htllng top Students taking any pracucalclasses must provide theuown make up whererequued for classes and performances All students undertakmg a maJor in Drama can expect to take enher a viva or a wntten exam1nanon at the end of the final year Questions will be drawn from the complete range of the ma1or studies and will concentrate on an understanding of baste issues of the Drama courses

The follo,v1ng books are considered as basic works o[ reference to be consulted 1n connecuon with all topics 111 Drama

The Oxford companion to the thealret Clark B H ed European theones of the drama (Crown I966)t Nagler A M ed A source book 1n theatrical history (Dover 1959)t B'lwden L A The Oxford companion to film (0 U P 1976) D1ck1nson Thorold A discovery of cinema (0 UP 1971)

118

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

13110 DRAMA I Co ord1naung staff members Mr ~1 Morley Professor W Cherry

b Mr N F C Purdo,1

Untts 12 Levtl Fust year Duration Whole academic year C..IJ.ss C..ontact Lectures - 1 hour weekly Senun'lrs - 2 hours 'vcekly PLrfonn'lnce study sessions - 3 hours weekly No week contains more than 6 contact hours Pre requ1s1tLs None C.O rcqu1sttes None

Assessment \VIII be based on 1nd1v1dual seminar p'lpers group work and \Vnllcn work throughout the year and 'l pracllc'll cnuc1s1n c>i.erc1sc at the end of the course

1 he course \VIII consist of l\VO secuons

A Plays and Films in their C.Ontexts (hrst hal£ 0£ year) and B Drama m the 19th and 20th Cmtunes (second half of year)

A PLAYS AND FILMS JN THEIR CONTEXTS

Attenuon \VIII be duected to theatre performances and hims from a number of social contexts They will be dealt wuh as anthropologtcal polu1cal and scxu'l.l 'ls well as dramauc pheno1nena

Book list Available from the Dran1a Ofhce

B DRAMA IN THE 19TH AND 20TH CENTURIES

An 1nrroducuon to some of the major lrends 1n European drama from Ibsen to the present day E1nphas1s \Vlll also be placed on theones of the drama and the stage from Anstotle to Brecht and on the development of the drama \V1tlun the context of 1novements such as Reahs1n Naturahsm and Express1on1sm Any edtuon of the plays hsted may be used Set books Ibsen I-I Ghosts (Penguin) Stnndberg A Plays (Methuen) Corngan R W Masterpieces of the modem German theatre (Maan1llan) Brecht B Mr PuntJla a,id hrs man Afaltr (l\.1ethuen) DU:rrenmatt F Play Strrndberg (Cape) The physzcrsts (Cape) fnsch M Four plays (Methuen) Crant D Realism (!Vlethuen 1970) I ur~t L R and Sknne P N Naturalism (Methuen 1971) Dawson S Drama and the dramatic (Methuen 1970) Hayman R How to read a play (Methuen) Morley M A students guide to Brecht (Hc1nem'l.nn 1977)

13210 DRAMA II MODERN DRAMA CONCEPTS AND PRACTICES

Co orchn'lt1ng staff me1nber ilfr iW !Ylorlcy

Not offered 1n 1978

Unus 12 Level Second year Durauon \Vhole ac'l.dem1c ye'l.r Glass C..ontact Lectures - 2 hours weekly futonals - 1 hour'' cekl) PLrfonnJncc study sessions - 3 hours occas1onally No \\CCk contains more than 6cont1ct hours Pre requ1sttc 13110 Go rcqu131tes None

Assessrnent will be made on the basis of wntten 'vork throughout the yL 1r rh1s study 1s an 1nlroducuon to the analysis and reahsauon o[ dr'l1nauc 'lCUon th1ough con~1derallon of drama 1n modern times

119

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

13220 DRAMA llA CINEMA STUDIES I

C.o ord1nat1ng stafC members Afr G H Anderson & Mr M Morley

lJnHs 12 Levels Second year Duration Whole academic year C..lass C..Ontact Screening study sessions - four hours weekly Sem1n1rs - two hours weekly No week contains more than six contact hours Pre requ1s1tes 13110 or 13120 C..O requisites None

Assessment will be based on 1nd1v1dual seminar papers lvnuen \Vork and performance studies

This topic will consist of tlvo secuons A Farce 1n the Cinema B German Cinema

A FARCE IN THE CINEMA

Set books Brownlow K The parades gone by (Secker & Warburg 1969) Lebel ] P (lrs P D Stov1n) Buster Keaton (Zwemmer 1964) Lahue K C & Brewer T Kops and custards (Oklahoma Uni Pr 1968) Lahue K C World of laughter (Oklahoma Um Pr 1966) Lahue K (. & Gill Samuel Clown princes and court ;esters (Yoseloff 1970) Marx Brothers The four Marx brothers in Monkey businessb duck soup (Lonmer 1972) Blesh R Keaton (Secker & Warburg 1967) Keaton B My wonderful world of slapstick (Doubleday 1960) Everson W K The art of W C Fields (Allen & Unw1n 1968) Robinson D The great funnies a history of film comedy (Studio V1sta/Duuon P1ctureback 1969) McC..affrey D W Four great comedians (Zwemmer) Barr C Laurel rl:r Hardy (Cahf Un1 Pr 1968) Everson W K The fJ/ms of Laurel & Hardy (Citadel) Asplund U (trs Paul Bnuen Austin) Chaplin s films (Wren 1971) Fields W C (Ous Cnblecobhs) Never give a sucker!T1ll1e and Gus (Lonmer 1973) McCabe J Mr Laurel & Mr Hardy (Grosset & Dunlap 1967) B GERMAN CINEMA

The course will be concerned with a survey of the development of the German Cinema from 1919 with particular attention to the lvork of specified duectors

Sel books Eisner L H Murnau (Secker 8: Warburg 1973) Jensen P M The cinema of Fritz Lang (Barnes 1969) Arnhcim R Film as art (Faber 1958) Kracauer S From Caligari to Hrll~r (Pnnceton Uni Pr 1966) Eisner L H Frilz Lang (0 U P )

Unus 12 Level Second year

13230 DRAMA llB AUSTRALIAN THEATRE AND CINEMA

Co ord1naung staU member Mr G R Worby

Durauon Whole academic year Class ContacL 7 hours weekly 1nclud1ng seminars tutonals and sueen1ngs No week contains more than 7 contact hours Pre requmtes 13110 or l3120 (1976) Co requ1s1tes None

120

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Assessment will be made on the basis of seminar and tutorial presentations performance studies and projects

The coursew1ll be concerned wuh developments tn theatre and cinema in Ausaaha since the tum of the century Sub1ects for cons1derauon w1ll 1nclude the enauc and penod1c growth of the ftlm industry from the silent era to contemporary experimental and commercial onema v•ntlng for theatre performance trends development of major theaae companies exploration of nauonal image and tdenuty through myth legend and acuons free enterpnseand subsidised performing arts television and radio influences and organisauon

Set books Baxter ] Australian cinema (Angus & Robertson 1971) Boyd R The Australian ugliness 2nd ed (Pehcan 1968)• Blundell G ed Four Australian plays (Penguin) Clark C M H A short history of Australia (Mentor 1963)• K1ppax H G ed Three Australian plays (Penguin 1965)• McGutre P The Australian theatre (0 UP 1948) Palmer V The legend of the n1net1es (Melbourne Univ Pr 1963) Reade E Australian silent films a pictorial history of silent films from 1896 1929 (Lansdowne 1970) Rees L The making of Australian drama (Angus & Robertson 1973)• Serie G From deserts the prophets come (Heinemann 1973)• Horne D The lucky country (Penguin 1971)•

Further reading hsts of play texts and source material will bed1str1buted throughout the year

13250 DRAMA II D PLAYS AND FILMS IN THEIR CONTEXTS II-RITUALS

Co ordinaung staff member Mr N F C Purdon Not offered 1n 1978

Unus 12 Level Second year Durauon Two terms Class Contact Seminars - 2 hours weekly Performance study sessions- 2 hours weekly No week contains more than 4 contact hours Pre-requ1s1les 13110 or 13120 Co requ1sttes None

Assessment will be based on 1ndiv1dual seminar papers and on group work Texts will be selected from liturgies and ceremonies collected from Egypt Assyna Ana to ha Greece and Rome as well as contemporary cultures such as those of Bah China Japan India and abong1nal Austraha Reference will also be made to the Chnstian Mass to opera and to ballet Part of the course work w11l 1ncludethedevising of a scenano by the group involved

Not offered 1n 1978

Un1ts 12 Level Second year Durauon Whole academic year

13270 DRAMA llE THEATRE STUDIES

Class Contact No week contains more than 6 contact hours Pre requisites 13110 or 13120 Co requ1sttes None

121

SYLLABUSE.'i-HUMANITIE'i

13310 DRAMA Ill CINEMA STUDIES II

Co ord1naung staff members Mr G H Anderson & Mr M Morley

Unns 12 Level Third year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Screening study sessions- 4 hours weekly Seminars- 2 hours weekly No week contams more than 6 contact hours Pre requ1sue 13210 or 13230 or 13250 or 13270 Co requisite None

See syllabus for 13220

13320 DRAMA lllA AUSTRALIAN THEATRE AND CINEMA

Units 12 Level Thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact. No \veek contains more than 6 contact hours Pre requ1s1tes 13210 or 13220 or 13250 Co req u1snes None

See syllabu.., for 13230

13330 DRAMA lllB RITUALS

Co ord1naung staff member Mr N F C Purdon

Units 12 Level Third year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact. Pre requisite 13210 or 13220 or 13230 or 13250 or 13270 Co requ1s1te None Assessment will be based on 1nd1v1dual seminar papers and on group \Vork

Texts will be selected from hturg1es and ceremonies collected from Egypt Assyna Anatolia Greece and Rome as well as contemporary c..ultures suLh as thoseo(Bal1 Cluna India and abongtnal Austraha Parucular attenuon will be given to Japan Reference,v1Il also be made to the Chnst1an Mass to opera and to b'lllet Part of the course work will include the dev1s111g of a scenano by the group involved

Book list Avatlable from the Drama Office

13300 DRAMA lllD PRACTICE AND PRINCIPLES OF CRITICISM

THEATRE & FILMfTELEVISION

(Not offered 1n 1978)

Units 12 Level Thud year

Co ordtnaung staff member Mr G Brealey

Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Seminars and v1ew1ng sessions - 6 hours weekly Pre requ1s1te 13210 or 13220 or 13230 or 13250 or 13270 Co requtstte None

122

SYLLABUSF.S-HUMANJTJES

Assessment will be based on written work throughout the year

This topiL will consist of an exam1nat1on of the role of the cnuc of theatre film TV and radio 1n modem society Wlili particular reference both to ma1or cnucal works and to occasional cnucism in newspapers and Journals The course wtll be 1nLroduced by a short survey of the history of cr1uc1sm of the performtng arts and will then develop a senes of pracucal exercises 1n cnuc1sm Papers on the role of the cnttc will be lvntten by those taking the course Students will also be expected to attend films and plays throughout the year and to produce wntten cnucal reacuons

Units 12 Level Thud year

13390 DRAMA lllC BERTOL T BRECHT

Co ordinating staff member Mr M Morley

Durauon Whole academic year Class ContacL Seminars - 4 hours weekly No w·eek contains more than 3 contact hours Pre requ1s1tes 13210 or 13220 or 13230 or 13250 or 13270 Co requ1s1te None

Assessment will be based on wntten work throughout the year

An examination of the development and sources of Bret.ht sdrama selected plays from the years 1918 1945 will be studied in detail Attenuon will also be paid to his theories and methods of stage production

Book list Brecht B Collected plays ed by J Willett and R Manheim vols l 5 6 7 (Vintage) Brecht B St Joan of the stockyards (Methuen) Bret.ht B The resistible rise of Arturo Vi (Methuen) Brecht B The Messingkauf dialogues (Methuen) Brecht B Mr Punt1la and his man Matti (Methuen) Willett J The theatre of Bertolt Brecht (Methuen) Morley M A students guzde to Brecht (Heinemann)

123

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Ma1or Topics m Philosophy

Director~£ Studies Mr R ] Allen

The d1sc1phne offers the ma1or sequence

14110 Philosophy I 14210 Philosophy II 14310 Philosophy III

For cognates offered by the d1sc1phne see below

(12 units) (12 untts) (12 units)

Philosophy I Students may offer the common course and either one of Section A or B except that 1n special circumstances and with the approval of thed1sc1phne students may offer any two of topics 14201 14209 14211 14219 14221 14226 and39202 provided that any speohc pre requtsttes or co requ1s1tes for topics offered are saushed

Philosophy II Students may offer ANY TWO of topics 14201 14209 14211 14219 14221 14228 provided that normally 14110 Philosophy I has already been completed for the degree and provided that any spec1f1c pre requ1s1tes or co requ1s1tes for topics offered are sausf1ed

PhilosophyIII StudentsmayofferANYTWOoftop1cs1420114209142111421914221 14228 provided that normally 14210 Philosophy II has already been completed for the degree and provided that any spec1f1c pre requ1sues for topics offered are satisfied

Philosophy cognates Besides the ma1or sequence the d1sc1phne offers Philosophy cognate topics Students wishing to offer a Philosophy cognate top1c(or topics) toward the degree may enrol 1n any of topics 14201 14209 14211 14219 14221 14228 provided that not more than 24 units are offered as cognate topics and that normally 36 units have been completed toward the degree

Students may offer any of topics 1420114209 14211 14219 14221 14228 either as a Philosophy cognate topic or as part of a ma1or sequence 1n Phtlosophy but may not offer any topic as both a cognate and as part of a ma1or sequence

Topic 14228ts1nterd1sc1phnary with special 1nterestforSoc1alSuencesstudents Cognate topics 14111 14113 are special introductory topics 1n Phtlosophy available to students from schools other than Human1ues and Social Sciences who are only able to offer a hmited number of units from topics in Human1t1es towards the degree (For 2nformal1on on Topics 14111 14113 and 14228 see the Calendar entry Cognates in the School of Humanities)

Assessment Assessment procedures will be determined 1n consultauon with the c:..lasses except as expressly specified in topics 14204 14205 14217 14218 and 14221 and will probably involve group assessment in most cases

14110 PHILOSOPHY I AN INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHY

(Professor B H Medlin Mr S G 0 Hair Mr R J Allen Mr I E Hunt and Mr K H Sievers)

Units 12 Level Fltst year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 tutorials per week Pre requ1s1tes None Co requisites None

Students shall offer the Common Course and either one of Set.t1on A or B ext.ept that 1n special curumstances and with the approval of thed1sciphne students may offer any t\vo of topics 14201 14209 14211 14219 14221 14228 provided that any specific pre requ1s1tes or co requ1sttes for topics offered are sat1sf1ed A broad course outline is determined by a planning committee of teaching staff and tutonal representauves elected by each tutonal in the course Each tutonal determines Its own form of '\ssessment subJect to the poht.1es of the

124

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Phtlosophy Consultauve Comnuttee but many tutorials will probably use group assessment

Three topics are offered

Common Course A broad history of philosophy from ancient nmes to the present day The development of philosophical ideas will be studied 1n a socio economic contexl The course runs throughout the terms l and 2 Reading No set book

Recommended preliminary reading Russell B History of Western p/Ulosophy (Allen & Unw1n)• Thomson George Capitalism and after (China Pohcy Study Group 1976) Thomson G From Marx to Mao Tse Tung (China Policy Study Group 1975) Wolff R P About philosophy (Prenuce Hall 1976)

Further texts will be recommended throughout the course

Workload I x 750 word essay and l x 2 500 word essay

Secuon A PROBLEMS OF PHILOSOPHY

A bnef introducuon to current problems in the theory of knowledge and social philosophy The course runs throughout term 3

No set book

Recommended reading Chalmers A What is thzs thing called science1 (Queensland Univ Pr 1977) Selsam H & Martel H Reader in Marxist philosophy (International 1963) Wolff R P About philosophy (Prcnuce Hall 1976)

Workload l x 4 000 word essay Section B LOGIC

A bnef introducuon to Formal Logic The course runs throughout term 3

Set book Copt I M Introduction to logic 4th ed (Macrrullan 1972)

Workload Weekly exercises

125

sYLLABUS&S-HUMANITIES

Topics m Philosophy II, Philosophy III and Philosophy Cognates

14201 EPISTEMOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Mr K H Srevers

Not offered in 1978

Units 6 Level Normally second or thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact 1 lecture and I tutorial per week Pre requisttes Philosophy I or penn1ss1on of instructor Co requisites None

14202 EPISTEMOLOGY AND METAPHYSICS II Not offered m 1978

Unns 6

14203 MORAL PHILOSOPHY Dr L E Johnson

Level Normally second or thud year Duration Fust half year Class Contact Three hours per week Pre requisite Philosophy I or permission of instructor Co requisues None

This year Moral Philosophy w1Il be concerned wuh environmental ethics Topics will include ethical 1mphcauons of the populauon explosion ethical obhgat1ons with respect to nature our relevant moral obhgat1ons to others and related topics

Set book Passmore J Mans responsibility for nature (Duckworth 1974)

Further reading Stoppard T Jumpers (Faber & Faber) Regan T and Singer P eds Animalnghtsandhumanobltgation(Prenuce Hall 1976) Aiken W & Follette H eds World hunger and moral obligation (Prenuce Hall 1977)

Not offered 10 1978

Not offered in 1978

Unus 6

14204 LOGIC II Mr I D Barnett

14205 LOGIC Ill Mr I D Barnett

14207 SOCIAL PHILOSOPHY Mr R ] Allen

Level Normally second or thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact l lecture and I tutorial per week Pre requ1sue Philosophy I or any other hrst year level ma1or topic 10 the School of Humaniues or the School of Socia] Sciences or the penn1ss1on of the instructor Co requ1s1tes None

126

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

A sludy of normative pohl1cal and social theones 'lnd of lhe pohl1cal 'lnd social 1mphcallons of vanous ph1losoph1cal theories of value and morahty and of sonic etlncal problems and ideas ans1ng within social and poht1cal theory fhe course will cover such general topics as thrones of social JUSUcc thcones of polllIC'll obhgat1on dc1nocracy and the Stall theories of ahcnauon hberallon and revoluuon

No set books

It 1s rccornmended that sludents read the following books amongst others th'lt ,v1ll be detailed dunng the year

Barry B Political argument (Routledge 1965) Beclau H ed Justice and equality (Prentice Hall 1971) Fe1nblrg J ~oc1al philosophy (Prentice IIall 1973) Marx K andEngels F ed L Feuer Bas1cwrztingsonpobt1csandphilosophy(Fontana 1971) Mill J S On liberty uttlttananism representative government (Everyman) Nonck R Anarchy state and Utopia (B lSIC Books 1974) Rawls J A theory of 1ustice (Clarendon 1972)

Assess1nent Group assessment on the basis of one short d1scuss1on paper and one long (5 000 l\Ord) essay per person

Units 6

14208 PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY AND SOCIAL SCIENCE Afr R ] Allen

Level Normally second or third year Dur.1t1on Whole academic year Class Contact I lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre rcqutslles Plulosophy I or any other first year level major topic 1n the School of Hum'lnll1es or the School of Social Sciences or the penn1ss1on 0£ the instructor Co requ1s1tes None

A study of explanation and theory in tl1esoc1'll sciences and of 1mportantconcepls themes and p1oblen1s 1n social lhcory posn1v1st m'ltcnahstand 1dcahslapproaches to history and social thtory structur'lhsm functtonahsm 1nd1v1duahsm and collect1v1sm 111 social theory determ1n1sm ut lustory values in social science human nature and soct'll theory ideology

No set books

It IS rtcom1nended that students read the [ollow1ng books 'lmongst others that will be dct'l1kd dunng the course

Blackburn R ed Ideology tn social science {Fontana 1972) Dray W ed Philosophical analysis and history (Harper and Row 1966) LaJ... 'ltos I and Musgrave A eds Criticism and the growth of knowledge (C"lmbndge Univ Pr 1970) Marx K and Engels F ed L Feuer Bancwnt1ngs1npoltt1csandphilosophy(Fontana 1971) Ryan A The philosophy of social science (Macmillan 1970) Ry'ln A ed The philosophy of social explanation (Oxford 1973) Therborn G Science class and society (NL B 1976) \V1nch P The idea of a social science (Routledge 1958)

Assessment Group asses~ment on the basis of one short d1~cussion paper 'lnd one long (5 000 word) essay per person

14209 MARXISM-LENINISM I Not offered tn 1978

127

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Unas 6

14211 MARXISM-LENINISM II Mr I E Hunt

Level Normally second or third year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact 2 lectures and 2 tutonals per week Pre requisite Philosophy I or any other first year level ma1or topic in lhe School of Humanities or the School of Social Sciences or the permission of the instructor Co requ1s1tes None

A discussion of the basic pnnc1pals of h1stoncal matenahsm and d1alecucal matenahsm focussing on the relevancy of Mannsm Len1n1sm to the Australian snuat1on class struggle the state Impenahsm in Australia Assessment paruc1pauon and reading as for Marxism Len1n1sm I

14214 SPECIAL STUDIES IN POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY I Not offered tn 1978

14215 SPECIAL STUDIES IN POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 11 Not offered in 1978

Unns 6

14216 ANCIENT AND MEDIAEVAL PHILOSOPHY Mr K H Szevers

Level Normally second or thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact I lecture and 1 tu tonal per week Pre requ1sues Philosophy I or penn1ss1on of instructor Co requ1sues None

The purpose of this topic 1s to introduce the student to ma1or phllosoph1cal problems by studying in detail the views of important figures or movements 10 the history of ancient and mediaeval philosophy [mphas1s will be put on understanding lhe systems of 1nd1v1dual philosophers as well as themes or problems which concerned the philosophers of this ume The ma1or figures to be covered are Plato andAnstotle Auenuon will also be paid to the presocraucs stoics epicureans sceptics and the mediaevals Because of the close connection between science and philosophy at this ume matenal in the history of science will also be covered

Reading Thomson G Aeschylus and Athens 4th ed (Lawrence & Wishart 1973) Thomson G The fzrsl philosophers 2nd ed (Lawrence & Wishart 1961) Burnet J Early Greek philosophy 4th ed (Adam & Charles Black 1930) Allan D T The philosophy of Aristotle (0 UP 1963) Copleston F A lustory of philosophy vol I Greece & Rome (Doubleday 1967) Copleston F A h1storyofph1losophy vol II mediaeval philosophy AugusunetoScotus (Doubleday 1967) Copleston F A history of philosophy vol III Ockham to Suarez (Doubleday 1967) Field G C The philosophy of Plato (0 UP 1961) Saunders J L ed Greek and Roman philosophy after Anstolle (Free Pr 1966) W1ppel J and Wolter AB !rled1aeval philosophy from St Augustine to Nicholas of Gusa (Free Pr 1969)

Units 6

14217 MODERN PHILOSOPHY Dr L E Johnson

Level Normally second or thud year Durauon Second half year

128

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Class Conract 3 hours per week lecture and lutonal Pre requ1sue Philosophy I Co requisites None

The purpose of this section is to introduce the student to ma1orphilosoph1cal problems by studying in some detail the v1e\vs of important figures 1n the history of modern philosophy Invesugauons \VIII be made concerning the rauonahsts lhe emp1nc1sts and Kant

14218 PHILOSOPHY OF MATHEMATICS Nol offered 111 1978

14219 SPECIAL TOPIC IN PHILOSOPHY linlls 6 Le' el Normally second or thud year Durauon To be arranged Class Contact To be arranged Pre reqtusues Philosophy I or perm1ss1on of instructor Co requisites None

A philosophical topic to be announced pnor to the start of the academic year The topic may be nominated by sraff or students with the approval of the D1sc1phneof Ph1losophy Texts and methods of assessment to be determined

Units 6

14221 ORIENTAL PHILOSOPHY Dr L E Johnson

Level Normally second or thud year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact 2 hours per week lecture and tutonal Pre requ1sue Philosophy I or permission of instructor Co requ1s1tes None

Considerations of metaphysics epistemology and theory of value 111 oriental philosophy lnvesugauons \VIII be made concerning the Indian philosoph1cal trad1t1ons Taoism Confucianism and vanous aspects of Buddhism Empha~1s will be on ph1losoph1cal theory and ph1losoph1cal apphcauons

Set books Burtt E A ed Teachings of the compassionate Buddha (New Amencan Library 1955) Confucius Analects Edgerton r ed Bhagavad glla (Harper & Row 1968) I Ching (New Amencan Library 1971) L'lo tzu The way arid its power with text of Tao Te Ching (Allen & Unw1n 1934) Muller M ed The Upanzsads (Dover) 5uzuk1 D T Introduction to Zen Buddhism (Rider 1964) 71mrner H Philosophies of India (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1951)

Proposed assessment procedure written work Optional exam1nauon (open ume hm1t) or opuonal essay wah viva No group assessment

14222 PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS OF ECONOMIC THEORY Mr S G 0 Hair

lTn1ts 6 Level Normally second or third year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Philosophy I or any other first year level ma1or topic 10 the School of I--lum'1n1ues or the School of Social Sciences or the perm1ss1on of the instructor Co requ1s1tes None

An 1nvest1gat1on of methodological and conceptual questions of economic theory

129

\

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Unas 6

14223 WOMENS STUDIES Ms E A Storey

Level Normally second or thud year Duration \\'hole academic year Class Contact 2 hour se1n1nar per week Pre rcqu1slle Philosophy I or pcrm1ss1on of instructor As 'l cobnate no pre requ1s1tc Co requ1s1tt None

'\7omen s Studies ts an exam1nauon of the status and roles of women in society Small self m'lnagtng groups meeung enher tn the un1verslly or elsewhere (private homes communuy halls or workplaces) 'lre the baste unll of organts'lt1011 in the course \vhose work ts co ordtn'lted by an advisory commtttee rons1st1ng of cl1.~s represent 1t1ves formtr students of Womens Studies and the convenors Part1c1pat1on of 11011 enrolled students from outside and 'v1th1n the un1vcrs1ty 1s actively cncoura~ed The philosophy of the course rcquues full p'lrUc1pauon of those involved Topics that may be discussed are 111 1.reas such as the family history the '"omens movement \\Omens health \Vomen dnd socialtsm rape \vomcn and the media

Nose~ books

Recom1ncnded reading (General)

Bookr Beauvou S de The second sex (Knopf 1952) Lncel S M1.ckenz1e N and Tebbutl M Women and society an Australian study (Cheslure 1974)• F1ges [ Palrzarchal altztudes (Stein & Day 1970) fuestone S The dialectic of se'\ the case for a femzn1st revolullon (Cape 1971) Friedan B The feminine mystzque {Norton 1963) f'odwtn M W and Wollstonecr1.ft M A v1nd1cat1on of the nghls of wonien (Norton 1967) Greer G The female eunuch (1\llacG1bbon & Kee 1970) l'vlackenz1e N TVomen In Australia (Cheshire 1962)• fVhll J S The sub1ection of women (1\ll IT Pr 1970) M1lleu K Sexual politics (Hart Ddv1s 1971) Mitchell J Womens estate (Penguin 1971) Oakley A Sex gender and society (Sun Books 1972) '>chnen M ed Feminism the essential lustoncal wnl1ngs (V1nt'lge 1972) '>ullerot C Women society and change (\V1edenfeld & N1chobon 1971)

Books on particular topics \VIII be rccommendtd al the beg1nn1ng of the year

Pe11od1cals To be reco1nmended

Not offered 1n 1978

llnus 6

14224 FEMINISM Ms E A Storey

14225 POLITICS AND ART Professor B H Medlin

Level Norm1.lly second or thtrd year Duration \Vhole ac1.demtc year Class Contact I or 2 two hour meetings per week Pre requ1stte Philosophy I or permission of instructor As a cogn1.te no pre requtslte Co requ1s1te None

I Outline of the Study fhe study will begin wuh a preliminary d1scuss1on by the teacher of the social role of the 'll ts The d1scuss1on will be tentative 1n that 1nany of the views will be presented 1s senously requ1nng further exam1nauon The d1scuss1on will also be dogmatic 111 that many of the v1e\vs presented \Vlll be inadequately supported by argument this lauer for the

130

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

rea~on that ll is considered desirable to involve part1c1panLs as early as possible after a framev;ork h.is been provided An attempt will be made Lo 1nd1cate points \\here the argument 1s insufficient The d1scuss1on will consist largely of an examination of the views on Artand Literature of Mao Tse Tung It will be contended that these views dre essentially correct though they cannot be apphed mechanically to Australian cond1uons A rough set of gu1del1nes for the examination of ex1sllng art \Vtll be generated from these views More unportant the d1scuss1on will examine bnefly the poss1b1hty of a progressive art in local cond1uons the cond1uons necessary for the development of such an a1 l and thecntena ford1stingu1sh1ng the progressive from the backwdrd The formal purpose of tlus prel1m1nary d1scuss1on will be to provide so1ne structure for the study as a whole The prehm1nary d1scuss1on will be concluded after four se~s1ons ror the rest of the study participants 1nclud1ng the teacher will present their O\Vn projects These may be papers d1scuss1ng a penod of ltter.i.ture for exarnple d school of pa1nungs a film They may dlso be creauve works ~uch as hims pa1nungs or poems There may also be social activ1ues relevant to the course

II Conduct of the Study fhcre \VIII be a number of prel11n1nary meetings These meeungs will (l) Enlarge the b1bhography of recommended reading (2) Approve an assessment procedure (3) Approve pro1ects to be offered by parucipants (4) Elect an organ111ng commlttee for the study

III Assessment A form of group assessment will be recommended It will also be recommended that the tedcher should be assessed on his conduct of the study

IV Enrolment and participation The parucipauon of people from outside the Un1vcrsny 1s encouraged - paruculdr!y people wuh little academic trauung It is hoped to dtt1ac1 also parucipants who are engdged in the study or pracuce of the ans It will be possible to pa1 t1c1p.ite in the study wllhout formally enrolling for It Non enrolled paruc1pants n1ay choo~e whether or not they should be assessed though ll 1s hoped that .ill participants will prest.nlcont.r1buuons

Preliminary reading B.ixandall L ed Radical Perspectives in the arts (Pelican 1972)• J'vlao Tse Tung On literature and art (Foreign Languages Pr 1967)• Tho1nson G The human essence (China Policy Study Group 1974)* Tho1nson G Capitalism and after (Cluna Pohcy Study Group 1975)• Tho1nson G From Marx to Mao Tse Tung (China Pohcy Study Group 1975)• Venable V Human nature the Marxian view (l\!Iered11n 1966)*

Relommended reading Marx K and Engels F Commun1~t manifesto (I ore1gn Langu1ges Pi )* Lenin V I Imperialism the highest stage of capitalism (I 01e1gn L.ingu1.ges Pr) Horo\vllz D From Yalta to Vietnam (Penguin 1967)• Ho1owuz D Imperialism and revolution (Allen Lane 1969)* 0 lI.i1r S G The definition of the working class (cyclo~tylcd paper to be distnbuted) Hinton \V Fanshen (Pelican 1972)* Snow E Red Star over China (Pelican 1972)• Playford ] and KH<>ner D eds Australian cap1talisni (Pelican 1972)* J'vlcQueen H A new Brzlannia (Pelican 1970)>11' Berger ] Art and revolution (We1denfeld & Nicobon 1969) C'audwell C Illusion and reality (La\vrence and \Vishart 191)8) frotsky L Leon Trotsky on literature and art ed P N Seigel (Pdthfinde1 1970)*

Una~ 6

14227 SOCIAL AESTHETICS Professor B H Medlin

Level Normally thud ye1r Duration Whole acade1n1c year

131

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Class Contact 2 hour seminar per week Pre requisite 14225 Politics and Art or permission of 1nsttuctor Co requisltes None

An examination of the ma1or quesuons relaung to a radical theory of art The contt1but1ons of some of the major theonsts of this century will be analysed 1n detail The matenal covered will range widely over Europe and the thud world Students will be encouraged to pursue their own particular interest They will also be encouraged to discuss some current developments 1n the arts The workload will normally take the form of a d1ssertat1on Group assessment

Preliminary reading Arvon H Marxist aesthetics {Cornell Univ Pr 1973) Baxandall L ed Radical perspectives in the arts {Pelican 1972) Ben1am1n W Illuminations {Fontana 1973) Caudwell C Studies & further studies in a dying culture (Monthly Review Pr 1971) Caudwell C Illusion and reality (Internauonal Pub 1973) Craig D ed Marxists on literature (Pelican 1975) Ea15leton T Marxism & literary criticism (Methuen 1976) Lifshitz M The philosophy of art of Karl Marx (Pluto 1973) Lukacs G The historical novel (Merlin 1972) Lukacs G The meaning of contemporary realism (Merhn 1962) Lunacharsky A On literature & art (Progress Pub 1973) Morawski S Inquiries into the fundamentals of aesthetics (MIT Pr 1974) Plekhanov G Art & social life (Lawrence & Wishart 1953) Sanchez Vazquez A Art & society essays in Marxist aesthetics (Monthly Review 1973) Thomson G The human essence (China Policy Study Group 1974) Trotsky L Literature & revolution (Ann Arbor 1960)

14228 IMPERIALISM

(Mr IE Hunt)

Units 6 Level Normally second or thud year Durauon Second half year Class Contact l two hour seminar and I one hour tutorial Pre requ1S1te Philosophy I or permission of instructor Go requ1s1te None

An experimental approach will be adopted to both the subject matter and lts teaclung Themes such as the following will be considered (a) Theoretical analysis of 1mpenahsm (b) The Cold War and in parucular the lndo China War (c) Underdevelopment and intervention 1n the Thud World and Australia (d) The culture of 1mpenahsm

The study will probably centre around a two hour weekly session which will be used for seminars and lectures In addition tutorials will provide for a closer focus on the areas selected for study Reference books Barnet R J Intervention and revolution (MacG1bbon & Kee 1970) rrank A G Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America (Monthly Review Pr 1970) Frdnk A G Latin America underdevelopment or revolution (Monthly Review Pr 1970) Fanon F The wretched of the earth (Pehcan 1971) Hobson J A Imperialism a study 3rd ed (Allen & Unwin 1961) ]alee P The pillage of the Third World (Monlhly Review Pr 1968) ]alee P The Thzrd World in world economy (Monthly Review Pr 1969) Jenkins R Exploitation (MacG1bbon & Kee 1969) Kemp T Theories of imperialism (Dobson 1967) Kolko G The roots of American foreign policy (Beacon 1969) Lenin V I lmperzalism the highest stage of capitalism (Foreign Languages Pr 1970)

132

SYLLABUSES-HUMA.NmES

Lumsden I ed Close the 49th parallel the Americanization of Canada (Toronto Univ Pr 1970) Magda££ H The age of imperialism (Monthly ReVIew Pr 1969) Mandel E Europe vs America' Contradictions of imperialism (Monthly Review Pr 1970) Rhodes R I Imperialism and underdevelopment a reader (Monthly Review Pr 1970)

Asse~s,ncnt procedure To be determined 1n consultauon with the class

133

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Ma1or Topics m Italian Duector of Studies Mr D ] 0 Connor

The d1sc1phne offers three m'1Jor sequence::,

(A) 15110Itahanl 152 I 0 Itah'1n II 15310 Itah'1n III

OR

(B) 15130 Italian IB

OR

115210 Italian JIB (available 1979)

15310 Italian III

((') 15120 Italian Il 115210 Italian II

(111 1979 15220 Itah'1n IIB) together with

15221 Second ye'1r half cognate in Italian

15310 ltahan III

1'or cognatt.s offered by the D1sc1phne see index

lJruts 12 I C'vcl 1' irst ye.ir

15110 ITALIAN I Professor G A A Go1n1n

Durallon 'Vhole academic ye'1r

(12 units) (12 units) (12 units)

(12 unlls)

(12 units) (12 unlls)

(12 units) (12 units)

(6 units)

(12 unlls)

C'l'1ss C'ont'1ct Lectures tutonals convcrsi.uon cl'1sses L'1nguagc Labor'1tory session::, 5 01 6 hours weekly Pie requisites i\tl'1tnculat1011 st'1ndard 1n Italian 01 an equlv'11cnt kno,vledge of the 1'1nt;uage Students with little or no previous knowledge of thl language should uuol 1n 15130 I! 1h'1n IB or 15120 hahan IZ lo requ1sttes None

As\'eHrnenl Assessment \VIII be on the basis of assignment<; and ex1m1nat1ons both dunng ind at the uul of the year

AC grade or better 111 Itahan I w1ll be '1W1rded to students who score '111 1ggrt.gateof at le t::it 1i0% over Sections A (Language) B (Literature) dlld C (Background) provided th'lt one of 5cct1ons A and B has been passed at level C or helter 'lnd the other 'lt level D or beucr Prel11n1nary reading Cole J P Italy Chatto & '\'1ndus 1964) 11.earder H and Waley D P ed A short h1slory of Italy from classical times to the present day (Cambridge Univ Pr 1966)• Nichols P ltalrn Italia (Font in'l/Colhns 1975)•

5ecuon A LAN GU \GE

(I) A rev1s1on of the structures of the Italian language 'vi th full tre ttment of the pnnctpal points of grammar and syntax a study of the sounds of Italian 1. lus sccuon compnscs 25 ks-;ons designed to consolidate the students knowledge of ll'lhan 'lnd to develop proficiency 1n the spoken language {2) 18 language laboratory sessions running parallel to the'"ork tn \ l) above togetherwuh sptctal classes in conversation (3) Approxnnately 20 lessons devoted to the study of further points of gr'lmmar and synt'lX ind to the analysts of especially -;elected passages of Italian prose taken 1na1nly from newspapers and magannes and designed to develop the students reading '1.tld co1nprehens1on skills Special lectures on Italian metncs

134

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Set books Carsantba G and Lepschy A L Inlontn in Italia (BBC 1968) Katennov K La lingua italzana per stranien - corso media - leztoni (Perug1a Ed1z1on1 Guerra 1976) Katennov K La lingua italzana per stranzen - corso medzo - esercni e test (Perugia Ed1L1oni Guerra 1976) Eha P I verbz 1talian1 ad uso degli stranierz (Mondadon 1955) Olher material to be supphed by the d1sc1phne

For reference McCormick C A Baste Italian grammar (Cheshire 1969) For d1cllonanes see NOTE follow1ng details of course Section B LITERATURE (l) One to two hours per week throughout the year will be devoted to aspects of Italian lnerature from tts ong1ns lo the present day This will be essenually a suivey study with emphdsls on the h1stoncal development of Itahan ltteraturc and detailed examtndtton of selected representative texts provided by the d1sc1phne (2) A cnucal approach to the novel One session per week to develop basic tcch111ques of reading a novel Conducted 10 Itahan

Set books Marotta G Gli atunni del tempo IHomp1an1) Tob1no M Le libere donne dz Magliano (Mondadou) Tobtno M Per le antiche scale (Mondadon)

Secuon c AN INTRODUCTION TO ITALY A scnes of lectures one hour per week 1n the frrst half of the year dealing with sahenl aspects of the lnstory and geography of Italy with particular emphasis on contemporary Italy (social poht1cal and economic development governments church st'ltL relJUons education mass media behaviour patterns) Set books No specific books are prescnbed for this secuon students should refer to the three books hstcd for preltm1nary reading to the fnst year programme Other reading mate1 ial will be supplted by the d1sc1phne The following works are strongly recon1mended for further reading Jucker N Italy (Thames & Hudson 1970) Mammarella G L Italia dopa il fascismo I944 1968 (II Multno 1970) \V1lhs F R Italy chooses Europe (0 UP 1971) \Viskemann E Italy since 1945 (Macmillan 1971)

NOTE As well as the texts prescnbed for each section each student should possess an Italian Lnghsh dictionary for the purpose of raptd consultation

Recommended are Ragazz1n1 G Di:nonarzo inglese ilaliano italtano inglese (Zanichelh 1967) or The Sansonz Dzclionanes English Italian Italian Fnglzsh (Sinsotu 197r:i) or Ragazz1n1 G and B1ag1 A Italian and English Dictionary (Zanichelh Longman 1973) or Reynolds B ed The concise Cambridge llalzan Dictionary (Cambndge Univ Pr 1975) or Dizzonarzo Garzanti italiano tnglese inglese zlaliano (Garzanti 1972)

Anyone proceeding beyond ftrst year Italian should also posse~s l bOOd Itahan dictionary

Recommended are Devoto G and dlt G C Dizionano della lingua ital:ana (Le Monnier 1971) or M1ghonni B Vocabolano della lingua ztaliana (Parav1a 1965) or Dtzionano Garzantz della lingua ztalzana (Ga1zant1 Ed1z1one Econom1ca 1965)

15130 ITALIAN IB Miss M A Baker and Mr D J 0 Connor

lJnlls 12 Level Fust year Duration Whole academic year

135

SYLLABUSF.S-HUMANITIF.S

Class Contact Lectures tutonals conversation classes language laboratory sessions a total of 6 hours weekly throughout the year Pre-requtsltes None but students are required to consult with the D1sc1phne Co requ1saes None

Students who have completed Matriculation Italian or its equivalent should enrol in 15110 Italian I This is an intensive language course for Beginners emphasiZing the comprehension and use of both spoken and wntten Itahan The aim of the course is to give students a reasonable skill in communicating simply in spoken Itahan to give them a knowledge of basic Italian grammar and a certain competence ln wntten composinon and translation These latter aspects of the wntten language are treated much more fully 10 Italian IIB The course also includes studies in literature and an introducuon to Twentieth Century Italy

Assessment Assessment is made on the basts of assignments and examinauons both dunng and at the end of the year AC grade or better in Italian IB will be awarded to students who score an aggregate of at least50% over SecuonsA (Language) B (Literature) and C (Background) provided that one of Sections A and B has been passed at level C or better and the other at level D or better

Preliminary Yeadzng As for 15110 Itahan I

Section A LANGUAGE The class normally has five hours per week of language in the fnsthalf of the year reduced to four hours per week ln the latter half of the year Work is divided between lectures conversation classes tutonals and language laboratory sessions

Set books Katennov K e Bonos1 M C La lingua italzana per stranieri - corso elementare ed intermedio 3a ed1zione (Perug1a Ed1zion1 Guerra 1976) McCormick C A Basic Italian grammar (Cheshire 1969) Eha P I verhi ztalianz ad uso degli stranzen (Ediz1on1 Scolast1che Mon&icion 1955) Speroni C and Gohno C Panorama ztaliano 3rd ed (Holt Rmehart & Winston 1974)

For d1ctionanes see NOTE follow1ng details of 15110 Italian I

Section B LITERATURE (1) A suivey of ltahan lync poetry from Petrarch to Leopardi One hour per week 10 the second half of the year will be devoted to an exam1nauon of developments in Italian lync poetry from the 14th to the early 19th century tt will treat the following aspects Petrarch Renaissance poetry Baroque poetry Arcadia and Leopardi Annotated texts will be supplied by the discipline (2) One hour per week ln the second half of the year will be devoted to the study of aspects of 20th century Itahan narrative

Set books Calvino I Marcovaldo (E1naudi Letture per la scuola media) Addtt1onal matenal to be supplied by the Disc1phne

Section c AN INTRODUCTION TO ITALY This section ts the same as 15110 Italian I Secuon C For recommended d1ctionar1es see NOTE following detatls of 15110 Itahan I

15120 ITALIAN IZ Miss M A Baker and Mr D ] 0 Connor

Unns 12 Level First year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact 5 to 6 hours per week including lectures tutorials conversauon classes and language laboratory sessions Pre requ1sttes None but students are requned to consult with the D1sciphne Co requ1sttes None Students who have completed Matnculation Itahan or Its equivalent should enrol in 15110 Itahan I

136

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Assessment Assessment will be on the basis of assignments and examinations both dunng and at the end of the year

The topic 1s designed for students with little or no previous knowledge of the language and -urns at prov1d1ng them with a basic knowledge of spoken and written Italian The topic also includes (a) A senes of lectures one per week 1n the hrst half of the year deahngwith sahent aspects of the History and Geography of Italy with particular emphasis on contemporary Italy (social pohucal and economic development government church state relauon<i education mass media behaviour patterns) (b) a hngu1suc study of a selection of modern Italian texts

Students w1sh1ng to proceed from Italian IZ to complete a ma1or sequence 1n Italian are advised that the pre requisite for theu entry into Italian III will be completion of both 15220 Italian IIB and 15221 Second year half cognate 10 Italian

Sel books Katennov K e Bonos1 M C La lzngua ztalzana per slranien - corso elementare ed intermedio 3a ed1none (Perug1a Ed1zion1 Guerra 1976) McCormick C A Basic Italian grammar (Cheshtre 1969) Eha P I verbt italtanz ad uso degli stranien (Ed1z1on1 scolast1che Mondadon 1955) Speroni C and Gohno C Panorama italtano 3rd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1974) C'alvtno I Marcovaldo (E1naudi Letture per la scuola media) Add1uonal matenal to be supplied by the D1sc1pline

For recommended d1ct1onanes see NOTE following details of 15110 Itahan I

15210 ITALIAN II Professor G A A Gamin and Dr G G A Bolognese

Unlls 12 Level Second year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Lectures tutonals conversation classes language laboratory sessions Advanced stream - 5 hours weekly Beginners slleam - between 5 and 6 hours weekly Pre requ1snes A satisfactory standard in 15110 Itahan I (In language work and 1n1ually 1n hterature the d1st1nctlon between Advanced Students and Beginners applies as in 15110 Italian I 1977) or a satisfactory standard 10 15120 Italian IZ Co requ1sltes 15221 Second year half cognate in Italian for students presenting 15120 Itahan IZ as their pre requisite Assessment Assessment will be made on the basis of assignments and examinauons both dunng and at the end of the year AC grade or better will be awarded to students who score an aggregate of at least 50% over 'iect1ons A or Al (Language) and B (Literature) provided that one of the Sections has been passed at level C or better and the other at level D or better

Advanced students offer Sections A and B Beginners offer Secuons Al and Bl

Secuon A LANGUAGE (Advanced) This section (2 3 hours per week throughout the year) ts designed to develop further the skills already acquired 10 Itahan I and to afford practice 10 translauon hngu1suc and styhst1c analysts (1) Advanced ltahan grammar and syntax word study elementary styhsttcs translauon into Italtan compos1uon in Italtan (2) Language laboratory work designed to afford pracuce 111 aur.tl comprehension sentence construction and instantaneous translation classes tn conversation

Set books Katennov K La lzngua italiana per stranien - Corso supenore (Guerra 1975) Material to be supplied by the d1sc1phne

For reference Battaglia S and Pern1cone V La grammatica italiana 2nd ed (Loescher 1963) Mighonn1 B and Ch1appelh F Lingua e stile (Le Monnier 1973)

137

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Section AI LANGUAGE (Beginners) This secuon (3 hours per week throughout the year) deals with the fol1ow1ng aspects ( 1) Advanced I tahan grammar and syntax compos1t1on 10 I tahan translation into I tahan further exercises ln reading and aural comprehension conversation classes (2) Language laboratory sessions in reading and aural comprehension

Set books C'arsaniga G and Lepschy A L lncontn in Italia (BBC 1968) Katennov K La lingua ilahana per stranien- Corso medio Eserc1z.1 e test (Guerra 1976)

Katennov K La lingua italiana per stran1eri - Corso superiore (Guerra Hl75) Other matenal to be provided by the D1sc1phne

For reference Bauzgha S and Pern1cone V La grammatica llaliana 2nd ed (Loescher 1963) M1ghonni B and Ch1appelh F Lingua e stile (Le Monnier 1973)

Section B LITERATURE (Advanced) (I) Two monograph1c studies (each of two hours per week) one ln the first and one 1n the second half year In the hrsthalf year students may choose between eilher(a) The poelry of Leopardi or (b) Society and Song folk and popular music in Italy from theearhest ballads to contemporary songs of commitment In the second half year the monograph1c study will be The problem of the South ln postwar Itahan narrative

(2) A tutonal course of one hour per week 1n the first half year consisting of a survey o( methods of hterary cntic1sm apphed lo Anosto s Orlando funoso Set books For The poetry of Leopardi Leopardi G Canti con unascelta di prose acura di Francesco Flora (:Cd1zioni Scolast1che Mondadon)

For Society and Song Vetton G ed Canti popolan ztaliani (Newton Compton 1976)• Vetton G ed Canzoni italiane di protesta (Newton Compton 1974)•

For The problem of the South Jov1ne F Le terre del Sacramento (E1naudi) Sc1asc1a L Glt z.11 dt Sicilia (Einaud1) Alvaro C Ultimo diano (Garzanu) Stlone I L avventura dz un povero cnstiano (Mondadon) Levi C Tutto il miele e finito (E1naudi) Fiore T Un popolo di formiche (Laterza) Scotellaro R L uva puttanella (Laterza) Marotta G Gli alunnt del tempo (Bompiani)

For the Tutonal course Anosto L Orlando funoso raccontato da Jtalo Calvino (Etnaudi Struzu)•

Preliminary reading For The problem of the South A summary of the pertinent wnungs of Sturzo Gramsct Salvem1n1 will be available from the Disc1phne before the course commences

Recommended reading For Society and Song N1gra C Canti popolan del P1emonte (Etnaudi 1957) Leydi R I canti popolan ztalianz (Oscar Mondadon 1973)"" Dess1 S and Pintor G ed La ch1tarra e il potere (Savelli 1976)"" Dess1 S ed Cercando un altro Egilto (Savelh 1976)•

Secuon Bl LITERATURE (Beginners) (1) Two monographic studies (each of two hours per week) one tn the fust and one in the second half year In the first half year students will study a novel by Cesare Pavese (emphasis will be placed on both hngu1suc and hterary analysis) In the second half year the monograph will be The poetry of Leopardi

Set books For Pavese Pavese C Prima che il gallo canti (Mondadon)

138

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

For The poetry of Leopardi Leopardi G Canti con una scelta di prose a cura di Francesco Flora (Mondadon)

15310 ITALIAN Ill Mr D ] 0 Connor & Dr G G A Bolognese

Untts 12 Level Third year Duration Whole academic year Cl l~S Contact Lectures lutonals conversation classes - approximately 5 hours weekly Pre requisite A satisfactory standard tn 15210 Italian II for former Italian IZ students a satisfactory standard also 1n 15221 Second year half cognate tn Italian Co requ1s1tes None

Assessment Assessment will be made on the basis of assignments ind exam1nat1ons both dunng the year and 1.t the end of the year AC grade or better will be awarded to students who score an aggregate of at least 503 over Sections A (Language) and B (Literature) provided that one of the Sections has been passed at level C or better and the other at level D or better

Students offer Secuons A and B

Secuon A LANGUAGE 2 3 hours per week throughout the year tnclud1ng advanced translation into ltdhan composttton styltsncs phonetics and prdcttce tn reading comprehension dnd grdmmaucal analysis based on material selected from a modern Italian novel

Set books M1gltonn1 B and Ch1appelh F Lingua e stile (Le Monnier 1973) P drtse G fl prete hello (E1naud1 Struzzi) Other matenal to be provided by the d1sc1pltne

For reference B'ltt'lgha S and Pern1cone V La grammatica italiana 2nd cd (Loescher 1963)

Sectton B LITERATURE

Tvvo monograph1c studies 1n the first half year either (a) The poetry of Leopardi or (b) Society and Song folk and popular music 1n Italy from the earliest ballads to contemporary songs of comm1unent In the second half year Dantes Commedia Set boohs I or The poetry of Leopardi As for 15210 Italian II Sectton B

Fo1 Society and Song As for 15210 Itahan II Section B

For Dantes Commedia Ahgh1en D Ladivznacommedia eds CH Grandgent&C S S1ngleton(HarvardUniv Pr 1972)

139

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Ma1or Topics in Visual Arts Director of Studies Mr A ] Flashtig

The D1sc1phne offers the follow1ng major sequence

16110 Visual Arts I V 1sual Arts II Visual Arts III

(12 unns) (12 units) (12 untts)

For cognates offered by the Disciphne see below ARTS

under COGNATE TOPICS IN VISUAL

For honours topics offered by the Dtsciphne see under the heading Honours Programmes in the School of Humanities Students may not enrol in a Visual Arts honours topic without the approval of the topic supervisor and the Duector of Studies or Head of Disc1phne

Visual Arts I See Topic 16110 below

Visual Arts II Students may offer ANY TWO of the topics listed below from 16202 to 16299 provided that they have sat1sfactonly completed 16110 Visual Arts I

Visual Arts Ill Students may offer ANY TWO of the topics hsted below from 16202 to 16299 provided that (1) they have sat1sfactonly completed Visual Arts II and (u) they have not already had credtted as components of Visual Arts II any topic that 1s to be offered as a component of Visual Arts III In add1t1on students may offer for Visual Arts III 16399 (wtth theconsentof the topic supervisor and the Duector of Studies or Head of Disc1phne) 16299 and 16399 are Special Topics neither of which may be offered more than once 1n a ma1or sequence 16299 1n parucular will only be made available under excepuonal cucumstances If a student wishes to offer more than two 6 urnt topics in any one academic year he or she may nominate to the Duector of Studies in wnt1ng prior to the meeting of the Examinations Board which of them is to be credned toward the Visual Arts II result and which to the Visual Arts III result in a major sequence In the absence of such nom1nat1on the Exam1nat1ons Board will make Its own determinatlons in what it Judges to be the students best interest Students will normally be requued to obtain a pass (C) or better in both topics tn Visual Arts II to proceed to Visual Arts III and tn both topics 1n Visual Arts III to be ehg1ble for the ordinary degree Aspects of the art and architecture of Europe Amen ca and Australia are studied as well as topics in aestheucs theory of art perception and p1ctonal representation and commun1catlon Where possible attenuon ts paid to onental and as1auc art and it is expected that topics tn the art of the Pacific region will be introduced as new staff appointments are made For enrolment in Visual Arts I no previous study of the sub1ect is assumed Wherever possible emphasis is given to the study of onginal works at first hand elther from the Visual Arts Study Collect1on the South Australian Art Gallery the South Australian Museum or further afield In parucular an excursion to the National Gallery of V1ctona or other sources of onginal art outside the State is obligatory for all students in Visual Arts I and w1lhngness to undertake this is a condition of enrolment The annual excursion normally takes place over one week during the May or August vacauon In addition to lectures seminars and other work students will be requued to attend a pracucal studio class This is not a professional studio class The purpose 1s to provide an adequate insight into the nature of the media and techniques that are mentioned and studied in the academic work devoted to the history and theory of art Professional studio topics are rorrently under discussion but not yet avatlable at undergraduate level The supervisors of thud year and honours rop1cs may also prescribe a specific studio content The present tendency 1n the disctphne b away from formal end of year wntten exam1nauons and towards the 1ncorporauon of assessmentconnnuously into the learning process Assessment is made of wrttten work sem1nar1 presentations and contributions visual appraisals special pro1ects fieldwork topics and other testable evidence of study and research The Degrees of MA and Ph D will normally be undertaken by thesis although course

140

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

work may be prescribed for preliminary studies or in 1nd1v1dual cases at the d1screuon of the D1sc1phne An M A by pracucal work and dissertation ts Jointly supervised by the Un1vers1ty and the South Australian School of Art in the Torrens CA E Candidates for this degree must show both profess1onal and academic competence and will be examined equally on their practical 'vork and on a dissertation based or related h1stoncal or theoretical studies

The follow1ng standard reference works on art and artists will he of value in mJny topics Art bibliograplues modern (American B1bhograph1cal Centre Cho 1971) Art index (New York 1933 -) Avery tndex to architectural per1od1cals 2nd ed (Hall 1973) Ben~7ll E Dictionnaire crztique et documentazre des pe1ntres sculpteurs dessinateurs et graveurs (Grund 1960) Encyclopedia of world art (McGraw Hill 1959 68) 1-Iarns J and Lever J Illustrated glossary of architecture 850 1130 (Faber 1966) Pelican history of art series (Penguin) Propylaen Kunstgeschichte (Propyl!ten Veilag 1967) Ryerson Library Index to art periodicals (Art Insutute of Chicago 1962)

Sources and documents in the history of art serzes (Prenuce Hall)• Thieme U and Becker F Allgemeines Lex1hon der bildenden Kunstlervon der Ant1he b:s zur Gegenwart (Seemann 1907 50) Walker John A Glossary of art architecture and design since 1945 (Prenuce Hall 1973)

16110 VISUAL ARTS I THE CONCEPT OF ART AND A SURVEY OF THE VISUAL ARTS

Mr A ] Flashtig and all members of staff

Units 12 Level First year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact 3 lectures and l seminar per 'veek A minimum of 18 hours studio per year Pre requ1sues None Co req u1sues None

The aim of Visual Arts I is to introduce the student to some of the leading ideas and pnnc1pal manifestauons of art There wtll be an excursion to Jn art centre outside the State dunng the May or August vacation and w1lhngness to undertake this is a cond1uon of enrolment About one third of the work is theoretical the remainder being art h1stoncal and devoted mainly to European art and archuecture although aspects of non European art will be introduced as opportun1ues anse and several guest lecturers (both artists and scholars) are normally 1nv1ted to contribute to the topic All members of the Visual Arts staff contribute to Visual Arts I Conunuous assessment 'v1ll be offered through essays visual tests seminarcontnbuuons studio classes and field,vork Preliminary reading Students should read according to then interests most of these books early 1n the academic year (and for maximum benefu before lectures commence especially 1£ thestudenthas no previous acquaintance 'vith the suh1ect) Arnason H II A history of modern art (Thames & Hudson 1969)• Ciulde V Gordon Whal happened in history" (Penguin 1969)• Clark K M C1vzlisat1on (BBC and John Murray 1969)• Elsen A E Purposes of art 3rd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1972)• Flcrntng W Arts and ideas 3rd cd (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1968)• Gombnch E II The slory of art 12th ed (Pha1don 1972) Rosk1ll M J.Yhat is art history? (Thames & Hudson 1975)•

Set books De la Croix H and Tansey R G Art through the ages 6th ed (1-Iarcourt Brace 1975) Abercrombie M L J The anatomy of Judgement (Penguin 1974)• Recom1nended books Students should become thoroughly f'lmil1ar \Vlth the contents of the follo,v1ng texts and should consider acqu1nng copies of theu own

141

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Davis D Art and the future (Thames & Hudson 1973) Holt, E G A documentary history of art vols 1 and 2 (Anchor 1957 66)• Janson H W A history of art 2nd ed (Thames & Hudson 1970) Pevsntr N An outline of European architecture 7Lh ed (Penguin 1964)"" Ro\vland B The art and architecture of lnd1a (Pelican II1story of Art 1970)•

The following topics may be offered as components of VISUAL ARTS II ma ma1or sequence

16202 ROMANTICISM IN FRANCE AND ENGLAND C 1730-C 1830 Mr A ] I'lashtzg

(Nol offered in 1978) Unns 6 Levd Second or tlurd year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact I leclure per \Veek 1 1u1onal per fortn1glu Pre requ1s1tes A s<tnsfactory s1anda1d 111 16110 Visual Arts I Co requ1s1tes None

Lectures describe the interacuonof pol1ucal social and cultural history 111 theevolut1on of early nineteenth century visual art Emphasis IS placed upon specific artists as leaders of 1nnovauon 1n pa1nt1ng print making and sculpture hut bu1ld1ng and land1)capt design arc studied also 111sofa1 as they embody the pnnc1ples of the n1a1n theo11es of drt 111 vogue dunng tins pcnod Spectd! reference IS made to the ong1ns and development of "ev1val styles "tnd to the influence of lneraturc and natur'll science on the artists of Bnta1n and \Vestern Europe

lJnits 6

16203 EUROPEAN ART 1830-1914 /lfr A ] Flasht1g

Level Second or tlurd year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact I lecture per week 1 tutonal per fortnight Pre rcqu1s1tes A satisfactory standard tn 16110 Visual Arts I Co req u1sltes None

fhe 1na1n theme of tlus section will ht pa1nung Its changes 111 style and social relevance but aspects of other arts \VIII be considered P11nc1pally lectures 1ntup1el the 1esponse of laler 19th century and early 20th century artists to an env1ron1nent profoundly chdnged by sc1cnct 'llld technology and to a society affected by acute pohL1cal disturbances for tht n1ost part the issues of a new art emanopated fron1 trad1t1onal notions of p1cton'"l.l representation 'v1ll be e"am1ned in the conte"t of the careers of crucial arusts 'vork1ng 111

Pans but attention will be given to the nseof s1gn1f1cantgroups in othtrarusuc centres of Europe

Prel11n1nary reading (to be completed before the start of first term) 1-Iauscr A Social history of art vol 4 Naturabsni unpress10111sn1 the fibn age (Routledge & Kegan P'lul 1962)•

Set bool!S Holt I: Documentary history of art vol 3 From the classicists lo the 1n1presston1sts (Anchor 1966)• Nochhn L ed Realts1n and tradition in art 1818 1900 (Prtnttce 11'111 1966)•

16205 TWENTIETH CENTURY ARCHITECTURE Mr D L Johnson

(Not offered in 1978) Unll~ 6 Level Second ) car Duration \Vholc academic year

142

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Chss Contact I lecture p<.r 'veck I seminar and/or field tnp per fortnight Pre rcqu1sttes A satisfactory standard 1n 16110 Visual Arts I Co rcqu1slles None

I ectures and seminars concentrate on developments fron1 c 1870 to the present Emph.is1s 1s on the theories and man1festat1ons of archaecturc urban form and l 1ndscapc archllecture in Europe North Amenca and where re'lsonable Australia

Units 6

16206 NINETEENTH CENTURY ARCHITECTURE Mr D L Johnson

Level Second year Du1 'lt1on \Vholc acade1n1c year C'l 1~s Contact I lecture per week 1 seminar .ind/or field tnp per fortnight Pre requ1sttes A satisfactory standard tn 16110 Visual Arts I Co requisites None

Lectures and seminars concentrate on developments from c 1770 to 1870 E1nphas1s ts on 'lrchuecture urban form and landscape desif:.11 theories tnd man1f<..stallon~ 'l'> related to c1-iss1c1sm romanttc1sm and r-\l1onahsm 111 Europe North Amenca 'lnd \vhere rc'lSOnable Australia

Set booll.S Collins P Changing :deals in modern architecture 1750 1950 (ri.ber 1963)• Hnchcock H R Architecture nineteenth and lwenlzeth centuries 3rd eel (Pelican 1971)' Holt L cd A documentary history of art vol 3 From the clasnczsts to the unpress1on15ls (Anchor 1957)•

Further reading Cl irk K The Gotluc revival (Penguin)• E11ner L ed Neo cla5s1c1sm and Romanticism 1750 1850, 2 vols (Prenttce JI lll 1970)• (' 1ed1on S Space time and arcJutecture Slh cd (Harvard 1967) 1-lauscr A Social Justory of art vol 3 Rococo Class1c1stn and Rornanl1c1s1n (Routledge 1969)' Honour I-I Neo classtcVim (Penguin 1968)• Sch'ltfer H Nineteenth century modern The functional tradition in Victorian design (Pr.i.cger 1970) ~u1nmerson J ~ununerson J

Arc}utecture in Bnta1n 1530 1880 5th cd (Penguin 1970)• Georg1an London rev ed (Pcngu1n 1962)•

~um1nerson J Victorian Architecture Four studies in evaluation (Columb1.i Univ Pr 1970) \Vtlley B The e1ghteet1th century background (Penguin 1940)•

16207 THREE DIMENSIONAL AND PROCESS ARTS OF THE TWENTIETH CENTURY

(Not offered 111 1978) Units 6 Lcv<.l Second or thlfd year Durauon \Vhole academic year

Professor D Brooh

Cl 1~s Contact 1 lecture per week I seminar per fortnight Pr<. requ1s1tes A satisfactory st'lnd'lrd tn 16110 Visual Arts I Co requ1s1tc~ None

I lus secnon rev1e\VS three d1mens1on'll ObJ<.Cl and process arts from Rodin to Body Art wuh some aucnuon paid to the 1deolog1cal context and especially to the rclauonsh1p of the visual 'lrts to science and technology

143

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

16208 THEORY OF ART AND CRITICISM Professor D Brook

(Not offered 1n 1978)

Unus 6 Level Second or thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact I lecture per week l seminar per fortnight Pre requ1s1tes A s1t1sfactory standard 1n 16110 Visual Arts I Co requ1s1tes None

This section will survey the main problems that have traditionally been regarded as aestheuc or as belonging to the plulosophy of art and sort them for discussion into

loi;ical types theones of and about art- beauty or aestfieuc goodness aesthetic perception and appraJSal and cnt1c1sm It will be mainly descriptive and analytic and 'v1ll nota1m to establish the correctness of any parucular view of art or cnuc1sm but rather to display the loi;1cal relations of the vanous problems and thcones

(Not offered in 1978)

Units 6

16?12 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS Mr D Sless

Level Second or third year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact 1 lecture per week I se1n1nar per fortnight Pre requ1sites A satisfactory standard 1n 16110 Visual Arts I Co requtsues None

Th ts section will examine the commun1cauon of visual 1nformat1on from the standpoint of the phtlosophy and psychology of pe1cept1on commun1cauon theory sem1ouc and des1i;n theory The course develops a fri.mework forcnt1cal understanding of a" 1de range of apphcat1ons of visual communication 1n contemporary society

lJntts 6

16213 POLITICS AND ART Professor B H Medlin

Level Second or third year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact I or 2 two hour meetings per week Pre requtsHes A sausfactory standard 111 16110 Visual Arts I and penn1ssion of the topic supervisor

For a dcscnpuon of the topic see under 14225 POLITICS AND ART

Units 6

16214 THE THEORY OF PICTORIAL REPRESENTATION Professor D Brook and Mr D Sless

Level Second or thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact 1 lecture per week I se1n1nar per fortnight Pre rcqu1sues A sausfactory standard 1n 16110 Visual Arts I Co requ1sues None

Some modern developments In lhe plulo~ophy and the psychology of visual perception will be examined 1n terms of their capaclly to thro'v light on the problems of representation 1n general and of pictorial representation 1n parucul<1r

Set books Ausun J L Sense and senszbil1a (Clarendon Pr 1965 (1962) )• Gibson J J The senses considered as perceptual systems (Allen & Un\vtn 1966) Gregory R L and Gombnch E H Illusion in nature and art (Duckworth 1973)•

144

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Recommended reading P1renne M I-I Optics painting and photography (Cambridge Univ Pr 1970) Gombnch EH Hochberg J andBlack M Art percept1onandreal1ty(JohnHopk1ns 1970) Gregory R L The intelligent eye (We1denfeld & Nicolson 1970) Warnock G J ed The philosophy of perception (0 UP 1967)•

Units 6

16215 THE PRACTICE OF PICTORIAL REPRESENTATION Mr D Sless and Professor D Brook

Level Second or third year Durauon \Vhole academic year Class Contact 3 hours sem1nar/pract1cal per week Pre requ1s1tes A sansfactory standard in 16110 Visual Arts I Co requ1sttes None

The commun1cat1on of 1nformauon by pictonal means will be studied Students will investn~.ite pracucally and experimentally the use of drawing for prcsenung informauon

Set booh Bowman Graphic communication (Wiley 1968)

Recommended reading Rawson P Drawing (0 U P 1969) McK1m R H Experience in visual thinking (Brooks/Cole 1973) Gregory R L and Gombnch E H Illusion in nature and art (Duck\vorth 1973)•

lJn1ts 6

16299 SPECIAL TOPIC IN VISUAL ARTS Mr A ] Flashtig and Academic Staff

Level Second or third year Dunttion To be determined Class Contact To be determined Pre requ1sttes A sansfactory standard in 16110 Visual Arts I and perm1ss1on of the topic supervisor and Director of Studies or Head of D1sc1phne Co requisites To be determined

The subject of the special topic will be determined by consultation

The following topics may be offered as components of VISUAL ARTS Ill in a ma1or sequence (subject to restncllons spelled out 1n the preamble above)

ANY TWO of 16202 16203 16205 16206 16207 16208 16212 16213 16214 16215 16299 (see above) and

16399 SPECIAL TOPIC Mr A f Flashtig and Academic Staff

(may be offered only once 1n a major sequence)

Untts 6 Level Third year Durauon To be determined Class Contact To be determined Pre requisites A sausfactory standard 1n Visual Arts II and the perm1ss1on of the topic supervisor and the Director of Studies or Head of Discipline Co requ1s1tes To be determined

The subject of the special topic will be determined by consultauon

COGNATE TOPICS IN VISUAL ARTS Any of the topics listed under the major sequences 10 Visual Arts may be offered as

145

SYLLABUSFS-HUMANITIES

cognates For topics 16212 16318 and 16398 however the normal pre requ1s1tes are waived provided that the studcnl has sausfaclonly completed 36 unlls to\vard a degree before enrolhn~ rn a second year cognale and 24 unlls al second year level before enrolhng in a third year coe;nate Permission of the supervisor ls also requued for these topics

Units 6

16212 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS Mr D Sless

Level Second or third year Dur1uon Whole academic year Class Contact 1 lecture per 'veek I seminar per fonn1ght Pre requisites Students will nolnormally be admitted to this cognate topic until they have completed 36 units to\V'lrd their degree and have the perm1s ... 1on of the topic supervisor Co requ1s1tes None

The. topic descnpt1on IS given 10 the Visual Arts II hsung for the major sequence

16318 FOUNDATIONS OF AMERICAN ARCHITECTURE 1770-1880 Mr D L Johnson

tJnus 6 Le. vel I'hird year Durauon \Vhole academic year Cl1ss Contact I lecture per week l seminar and/or field tnp per fortnight Pre requ1s1tes Consent f")f instructor Students will not normally be admitted to tlus topic unul they have completed 24 units of second year topics toward theH degree Co rcq u1sltes None

NOTE Students may not offer both 16206 and 16318 toward a degree

Lc.ctures and seminars emphasize arc'utecture urban form and landscape design theones 'tnd man1festauons as related to class1c1sm Romant1c1sm and rat1onahsm 1n North Amenca and as necessary Europe Developments cc.ntre on the penod from c 1770 to c 1880 or essentially from Jefferson to Richardson Assessment will be based on one essay one research pro1ect and the seminars/field tnps

Preliminary reading Fleming W Arts and ideas (Holt), chapt 16 19• Mornson H Early American architecture (Oxford) 1nclud1ng part three Pierson W The colonial and neo classical style (Amen can bu1ld1ngsand theirarchttects stnes) (Dover)•

NOTE Students who have not completed 16110 or 18240 will also attend the archuecture lectures of 16110 in first term

Set reading (To be determined on avallab1hty)

Further reading Burchard J and Bush Brown A The architecture of America a social and cultural }11story (Little Brown) not the bnef edu1on Clark K The Gothic revival (Penguin)• Condu C W American building (Chicago Univ Pr)* I:arly J Romanticism and American archtlecture (New York) Enner L ed Neoclassicism and romanticism 1750 1850 2 vols (Prenuce Hall)• Collins P Changing ideals in modern archzteclure 1750 1950 (Faber)• G1ed1on S Space time and architecture 5th ed (Harvard) Hamhn T Greek revival architecture in America (Dover)• Hitchcock H R Architecture 1uneteenth and twentieth centuries 3rd ed (Pelican) Holt E ed A documentary history of art vol 3 From the classicists to the 1mpress1on1sts (Anchor)• Honour H Neo classicism (Penguin)• Weimer A R eel City and country in America (Appleton Century C...rofts)llo Wh1£fen M American architecture since 1780 (MIT lY69)

146

SYLLABUSF.S-HUMANJTIE<:

Units 6

16398 SPECIAL COGNATE IN VISUAL ARTS Air A ] Flashtzg and Acadenuc Staff

Level Third year Dural1on To be determined Class ConL.'l.ct To be determined Pre requ1s1tes Complel1on of 24 unlls at second year level and permission of the lop1c supervisor Director of Studies or Head of D1sc1phne Co requ1s1tes To be determined

Subjects undtr lhe special cognate topic will be determined by consultanon

147

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Topics m Musicology Director of Studies Dr R H Il!Jng

Offerings in Musicology are intended for lhose whose interests are 10 early music (before 1800) and who wish to study music in a senous critical fashion The d1sc1phne does not in the normal course of events offer a ma1or sequence In special circumstances however students who have completed Cognates 17111 The History of Western Music to 1800 17112 The Foundanons of Musical Notations 17211 The Foundauons of Musical Analysis and 17212 Elementary Techniques of Musical ComposJt1on in the Renaissance and Baroque may be granted penn1ss1on to complete a maJor sequence wnh 17310 Advanced Criucal Studies

lJnas 12

17310 ADVANCED CRITICAL STUDIES Dr R H Illing

Level Third year Durauon First half year Class Contact To be determined Pre requ1s1te A satisfactory standard 1n 17111 The History of Western Music 17112 The Foundations of Musical Notations 17211 The Foundanons of Musical Analysis 17212 Elementary Techniques of Musical Compos1non 1n the Renaissance and Baroque Co requisHes None

Assessment On (1) essays and (11) tutorial d1scuss1on and a final 1nd1v1dual 1nterv1e\v -about equal weight

The syllabus will be arrived at 1n d1scuss1on wtth Dr R Ilhng 1n each 1nd1v1dual case ll

will deal wuh matters 1n the same fields of musicological study as are available in the Honours programme and will take Into account the students special Interests

148

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Cognates m the School of Humanities

NOTE Except where spec1f1cally provided lo the contrary any of the Topics hsted under Ma1or Sequences in the School of I-Iuman111es may be offered instead as a Cognate

10221 SECOND YEAR HALF COGNATE IN ENGLISH A PRACTICAL CRITICISM

Untts 6 Level Second year Durauon 12 weeks

Ms R Eason and Dr P Morton

Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requisite A satisfactory standard 1n 101 IO English I Co requisue 10210 English II The atm of the course 1s to allow students to develop their understanding of the pracuce and theory of literary cr1uc1sm in a context of close textual study The course will be built around \Vork being undertaken in English II but may include other texts for comparative purposes Assessment will be based on wntten work submated dunng the course

Unlls 6

10222 SECOND YEAR HALF COGNATE IN ENGLISH B May not be offered in 1978

Level Second year Durauon To be determined Class Contact To be determined Pre requisite A satisfactory standard 1n 10110 [nghsh I Co rcqu1sues 10210 Lnghsh II

This cognate IS intended to provide students taking studies in Shakespeare and the Nineteenth Century (English II) \Vllh opportun1ues to pursue more advanced and spec1ahzed studies in relevant literary fields Details of the opnons available may be obtained from the D1sc1phne of English

10320 THIRD YEAR COGNATE IN ENGLISH Units 12 Level Third year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Vanable usually 3 hours per week Pre rcqu1s1te A sausfactory standard 1n 10210 Lnghsh II Co rcqu1sue 10310 English III

This topic consists of any three secuons from the Enghsh 111 hst Students may not take secuons for this topic wluch they are offering for 10310 English III

Units 6

10321 THIRD YEAR HALF COGNATE IN ENGLISH A May not be offered in 1978

Level Thtrd year Dur'lUon To be determined Class Contact To be detemuned Pre requ1<;lle A satisfactory standard in 10210 English II Co requ1s1te 10310 English III

Units 6

10322 THIRD YEAR HALF COGNATE IN ENGLISH B May not be offe1ed in 1978

Level Thud year Durauon To be determined

149

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Class Contact To be determined Pre requ1slte A sallsfactory standard 1n 10210 Enghsh II Co 1equ1slte 10310 Enghsh III

Detdlb of the opuons available in these topics will be ava1lable fron1 the English Office They w1ll 1nclude the area of study covered in 10221 and 10222 Second Year ll.df Cognates 1n Enghsh

Units 6

11113 INTRODUCTORY FRENCH A Mr D A Askew

Level r1rst year Duratton Fust lrlif year Class Contact Six hours per \veek Pre rcqu1s1te Consent of the Director of Studies Co requisites None

This topic assumes no previous knowledge of rrench It 1ntroducci. ~ome of the basic structures of French and 1n1t1ates students Into the skills of reading wnt1ng spc1k1ng and I1sten111g to the language AB B C telev1s1on course wlth rrench parnc1pants presents to students the suuauons they are most hkcly to encounter 1n France as foreigners Language laboratory sessions are used to practise sttuctures studied 1n class Introductory French A 1s available either as a self contained topic or as part of a maJor sequence consisting of Introductory rrench A Introductory rrench B J<rench IIA 1'rench IllA

Set boo/cs Repondez. s ti vous plait 3 vols (BBC Pubhcanons) Pohtzcr R L Hagnvara M P and Carduncr J R L Echelle (Bl-usdell 1966)

Units 6 Level r1rst year

11114 INTRODUCTORY FRENCH B Professor I S Laurie

Duration Second half year Class Contact Stx hours per \veek Pre rcqu1s1te Consent of the Dtrector 0£ Studies Co rcqu1slles None

Thts topic assumes an elementary knowledge of rrench (equivalent to that provided in 11113 Introductory French A) and students wHh some previous kno,vledge of the language may prefer to enter French i.tud1es at this point rather than cnrol tn Introductory French A The topic completes the study of the baste structures 1n rrench begun tn Introductory French A and 1s intended to provide students with the baste ability to read .u1d wrue French and to speak and understand the language Teaclung 1s conducted in classes and 111 pracuce sessions u1 the Language Labor'ltory Extensive reading mate11al ts introduced in tins topic organised around short colour films of France with a rn n n commentary Introductory French B 1s available ellher as a self contained topic or part of a maJor sequence cons1sung of Introductory rrench B French IIA French IIIA and 6 further untts of French opllons to be taken 1t an appropnate ume after consultat1on w·uh the Dtrector of Studies

Set books Pohtzer R L Hagtwara M P and Carduner ] R L Echelle (Blaisdell 1966) Chronzques de Trance (Pans ADPF et CLE intern'lt1onal 1976) The following booklets will be set for 1978 Survol de la Provence La Garonne Toulouse No'l:I a Seguret Le Vin en France La Taptssene de Bayeux Aubusson capita le de la lap1sserte Chartres Le Rhzn

Units 6

11201 CONTEMPORARY FRENCH THEATRE Mr D A Askew

Level Second year

150

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Duration First half year Class Contacl 1 leclure per week 2 lutonals for lhe whole lop1c Pre requisite Leaving French Co requ1s1tes None Not av'1.1lable to students 'vho have taken french I Section B or french IIA Section B Students offer Secuons A and B

Section A CONTEMPORARY FRENCH THEATRE The syllabus 1s as for French I Secuon B

Secuon B SrrcIAL STUDY Lss'1.y on a special topic

Units 6

11202 SEVENTEENTH CENTURY FRANCE iWr D A Askew

Level Second year Durauon First or second half year Cl'1.ss Contact Ind1v1du.i.l tutonals as requ1red Pre requ1s11es None Co requ1~1tes None

Not available 10 students who have t'l.ken Secuon B of french II orSecuon B of french III 'itudents offer Secuons A and B

5tcuon A SFVENTEE'lTll CENTURY FRA'l'CE 1 he syllabus IS as for French II Section n Stcllon B SrFCIAI STUDY Lssay on a special topic

Unns 6

11203 CLASSICAL FRENCH LITERATURE Mr D A Askew

Level Second year Dur'1.l10n Second half year Clas~ Cont'lct 2 classes per week Pre requ1sttc i'vlalnculauon French Co rcqtuslles None

Not available to students who have taken Section C of french II or Secuon C of french III Students offer Sections A and B

Secuon A C1 ASSICAL FRE'l'Cll LITERATURE The syllabus 1s as for French II Sectton C

Secuon B SPECIAL STUDY l!.~say on a special topic

Units 6 I cve1 Second year Durauon Second h'llf year

11204 FRENCH CINEMA I Professor I S Laurie

Class Contact I lecture per \Veek 4 lutonals for the whole topic 2 hours screening per \veek Pre requ1sues None Co requ1s1tes None

Not available to students \Vho have taken Secuon C of French I Students offer Sections A and B

151

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Section A FRENCH CINEMA I The syllabus 1s- as for French I Secuon C

Secuon B SPECIAL STUDY Essay on a special topic

Not avai1able tn 1978

Unus 6 Level Second year Duration Second half year

11205 FRENCH CINEMA II Professor I S Laurze

11206 FRENCH POETRY Professor I S Laurie

Class Contact I lecture per \veek Pre requisite Matnculauon French Co requisites None Nol available to students who have taken Secuon r: of French II orSecuon E of French III Students offer Sections A and B

Secuon A FRENCH POETRY The syllabus is as for French II Secuon r. ~ecuon B SPECIAL STUDY Essay on a special topic

11207 HISTORICAL FRENCH LINGUISTICS Dr T G Fennell

Untts 6 Level Second year Duration F1rst half year Class Contact Secuon A I hour per week Secuon B I hour per week (average) Pre requ1s1le Matnculat1on French An elementary knowledge of Latin wtll be assumed Co requ1s1les None

Not available to students who have taken Secuon F of French II or Secuon r of French III Students of£er Sections A and B

Section A HISTORICAL FRENCH LINGUISTICS The syllabus 1s as for I rench II Secuon F

Section B SPECIAL STUDY Selected Old and Middle French texts

11208 LEXICOLOGY Dr£ A Close

Not available 10 1978

Units 6 Level Second year

11209 SPECIAL TOPIC IN FRENCH A All members of French staff

Duranon First OR Second half year Class Contact At instructors d1screuon Pre requ1sues At instructors discretion Co requ1s1tes None

A student may not offer a field of study already presented under Secuons H or I of French II or Secnons I I or I of French Ill or in Cognate 11219

Under this heading a topic Elementary Lattn has been offered 10 the past and may be available from ume to time

152

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Un1Ls 6

11214 FRENCH LITERATURE 1820-1860 Dr E A Close

Level Second year Durauon Second half year Class Contact One seminar per 'veek Pre requ1s1tes French I or Ma1nculat1on French plus Enghsh I Co requ1slles None

No1 available to studenls who have studied this held as part of French II french III or French IIIA Students offer Sections A and B

Secuon A FRENCH LITERATURE 1820 1860 The syllabus is as for French II Secuon G

Secuon B SPECJAL STUDY General essay on the period

Unus 6 Level Second year

11219 SPECIAL TOPIC IN FRENCH B All members of French staff

Duration First OR second half year Class Contact At instructors d1scret1on Pie requ1slles At instructors d1screuon Co requ1sues None A student may not offer a field of study already presented under Sections Hor I of French II or Secuons H or I of French III or in Cognate 11209

Unus 12 Level Tlurd year

11320 THIRD YEAR COGNATE IN FRENCH All members of French staff

Duration Whole academic year Class Contact To be determined Pre requisite A sausfactory standard in 11210 French II or 11220 French IIA or background deemed equivalent Co requ1s1tes None

Students offer ONE of the follow1ngOpt1ons and should consult the instructor concerned to de1enn1ne a detailed syllabus

Option A SPECIAL STUDY IN fRENCH LITLRATURE (Professor I S Laurie Mr D A Askew Dr E A Close)

Opuon B SPECIAL STUDY IN LANGUAGE OR LINGUISTICS (Dr EA Close Dr T G Fennell)

NOTE Students 'vho have taken this Cognate and \Vho subsequently enter an Honours programme may have their choice of Honours topics appropriately constrained

12320 THIRD YEAR COGNATE IN SPANISH OR PORTUGUESE Unlls 12 Level Tlurd year Duration \Vhole academic year Cl'lss Contact 2 or 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1te A satisfactory standard in 12210 Spanish II Co requisites None

Assessment will be made by written assignments and an examinauon Students sLudy EITHER Opuon A OR Opuon B -

Opuon A LATIN AMERlCAl\ LITER \TURE AND HISTORY IN THE NINETEENTH AND TWENTll TH CENTURIES (Dr E Gomez Soto)

153

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Opuon B PORTUGUESE AND BRAZILIAN STUDIES I (J\:lr w A R Rzchardson) An altern1uve field of study might be made available on request Students 1ntend1ng to study Third Year Cognate 12320 should contact the Director of Studies as early as possible for syllabus details Those who can satisfy Mr W Richardson that they have an adequate knowledge of Portuguese may be permitted to enrol for the Portuguese and Bru1han Studies Opllon earlier than their third year provided that 12110 Spanish IA t<; not t.tken simultaneously Pre requ1saes would be relaxed 10 such a case Students who have taken this Cognate and who subsequently cnte1 Honours will not be penn1tted to enrol for Honours topic 12413 if they have studied Opuon A or Honours topic 12416 1f 1hey have studied Optton B

13130

13260 13310 13350 13360 13370 13380

COGNATES IN DRAMA

lntroductton to Production and Performance Techniques (Drama Centre students only) Producuon and Performance Techniques I (Dram1. Centre students only) Producnon and Performance Techniques II (Drama Cerure student!. only) Theatre Dtrecnon (Drama Centre studenls only) Stage and Production Management (Drama Centre students only) Techniques of Film and Telev1s1on (Drama Centre students only) Movement with Modern Dance (Drama Centre students only)

All topics hsted \Vlthin the statement of ffi'lJOr sequences may be 1aken as Cog1rues provided the cond1t1ons of pre requ1s1tes and co requisites are met

13130 INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION & PERFORMANCE TECHNIQUES

Co ord1nat1ng Staff Members Professor W f Cherry and Mr G H Anderson

Units 12 Level Firsl year DuraL1on Whole academic year 1nclud1ng one week of vacation ume Class Contact Seminars - two hours \Veekly Practical classes- 7 hours \veekly No 'veek contains more than 9 contact hours except ,..,.hen add1t1onal rehearsals for pro1ects 'lre involved Pre rcqu1s1te Selection for Drama Centre entry by 1nterv1ew andaud1uon or prcsen1at1on of evidence of abthty C'o requisite 13110

Assessment \VIII be made on the basis of progress and contribuuon to class work tests and pr'lctical projects All students will be rcqutred to complete all the follo,vtnb secuons

A ACTING B MOVF\IENT C Vo1cF D STAG~ MANAGEMENT L FIL\! fELEVTSIO~ A~D RADIO PRODUCTIO~

Set books Lipton L Independent film n1ak1ng(Stra1ght Arrow 1973) Nl1.cRae D L Nlonty M R and Worhng D G Television productzorz an introduct1ori (l\llethuen 1973) Coquehn C The art of the actor (Allen & Unw1n 1951) Boleslavsky R Acting - the first szx lessons (Theatre Arts 1966) Stan1slavsk1 C My life in art (Theatre Arts)

154

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

13260 PRODUCTION AND PERFORMANCE TECHNIQUES I Co ord1naung staff members Mr G Brealey and Mr H Salter

(Not offered 1n 1978) Unus 12 Level Second year Durallon \\Thole academic year Class Contact Lectures - I hour weekly Demonstrauons - 1 hour weekly P1act1cdl classes - 8 hours \veekly No week contains more than IO contact hours except when add1uonal rehearsals for proJCCts are involvLd Pre rcqu1s1tes 13130 and 13110 at an average grading of C or better C'o requ1snes 13210 or 13220 or 13230 or 13250 or 13270

Assessment will be made on the basis of progress in and contnbut1on to class work tLsts and practical projects Students will be required to complete A and either B or C or D

A PROJECTS IN THEATRE FILt.1 TELEVISION OR RADIO

B ACTING MOVEl\.iFNT VOICE

C STAGE PRODUCTION

D FILM AND either TELEVISION or RADIO PRODUCTION

13340 PRODUCTION AND PERFORMANCE TECHNIQUES 11 Co ord1naung staH member~ Mr G Brealey and Mr Ii Salter

Unu~ 12 Level Thud year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Seminars - two hours \Veekly Practical classes - ten hours \Veck.ly No week contains more than 12 contact hours except when add1t1onol rehearsals for productions a1e involved Pre rcqu1slte 13260 Co requ1stte 13310 or 13320 or 13330 or 13390

Assessment \vill be made on the basis of progress 1n and contnbution to classwork practical projects and productions

A PROJECTS IN fHEATRE FILM TELEVISION AND R \DIO

B PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES

C PERFOR'\f \NCE

D WRITING FOR FILM TELEVISION or RADIO

h DIRECTIN(' FOR FILM AND either TELEVISION or RADIO

f DIRECTING roR THEATR1'.

G \VRITING FOR THEATRE

SLudents will be required to complete A and B and ezther C or D or E or F or G

Set books Lipton L Independent film making (Straight Arrow 1973) Boubhk V The art of make up for stage television & film (Pergammon 1968) Bretz R Techniques of television (McGraw Hill 1962)• Marsh K Independent video (Straight Arrow 1974) Nisbeu A The technique of the sound studio (Focal 1972) Reisz K and Millar G Technique of film editing 2nd ed (Focal 1968) Wheeler L J Principles of cinematography (Fountain 1969)

13350 THEATRE DIRECTION Co ordinaung staff member Professor W ] Cherry

Units 12 Level Thud year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Lectures- one hour weekly Demonstrations- one hour weekly Practical classes - ten hours weekly No week contains more than 12 contact hours except when involved 1n rehearsals for productions

155

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Pre requ1sae 13260 Co requisite 13310 or 13320 or 13330 or 13390

Assessment will be made on the basis of assignments and productions throughout the year and exam1nauon by scnpt analysis and productions

Secuons A PROJECT IN DIRECTION

Units 12

B ACTING (3 terms) c STAGING TECHNIQUES (3 terms) D PRODUCTIONS IN THEATRE

13360 STAGE AND PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

Level Third year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Lectures - one hour weekly Demonstrations - one hou1 weekly Practical classes - ten hours weekly No week contains more than 12 contact hours except when involved in preparations for producuons Pre requ1sue 13260 Co requ1s1te 13310 or 13320 or 13330 or 13390

Assessment 'v1ll be made on the basts of assignments productions and all'lchmenls to outside organ1sat1ons throughout the year and exam1nauon by written and pracucal tests and productions

Secuons A MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES B STAGING TECHNIQUES C PRODUCTIONS IN THEATRE FILM TELEVISION AND RADIO D ATIACHMENT TO PRODUCTION ORGANISATIONS

Set books Secuon A Sweeung E J Theatre admznzstration (Pnman 1969)

Secuon B Bentham r The art of stage lighting (Pitman 1968) Parker W 0 and Smith H K Scene design and stage lighting (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1968) Southern R Proscenium and s1ghll1nes (Faber 1964)

13380 MOVEMENT WITH MODERN DANCE

(Co ord1nat1ng staff member Mr M Kedem) Units 12 Level Thud year Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact Lectures - one hour weekly Demonstrauons - one hour weekly Pracucal classes- IO hours weekly No week contains more than 12 contact hours except when involved tn add1uonal rehearsals and productions Pre requisite 13260 Co requisite 13310 or 13320 or 13330 or 13390

Assessment will be made on the basis of A pracocal work throughout the year B pracucal assignments 1n movement compos1uon C a paper treating one aspect of the dance each term (See relevant secuons below) The course will survey tn theory and pracuce techniques and styles 1n modern dance from us beg1nn1ng to the present and relate those to their ethnic roots The course \v1ll be supplemented by representauve films Students must complete the following sections

A Technique rhythm and co ord1nat1on B Elements of Composn1on and Improv1sauon C A paper treaung one aspect of the dance

156

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

COGNATES IN PHILOSOPHY

FIRST YEAR COGNATES The disciphne of Philosophy offers three first year cognates of six unus each but these topics are not open to students in the School of Humanities or the School of Social Soences

14111 SPECIAL INTRODUCTORY TOPIC IN PHILOSOPHY A

Units 6 Level Any year Durauon Second half year Class Contact One hour lecture and one hour tutonal per week Pre requ1sues None Co requ1snes None

The syllabus1s as for 14110 Philosophy I Secuon A plus additional work to be determined by the Disciphne of Phtlosophy This topic ts available for students from schools ocher than Humanities and Social Sciences who are able to offer only a hmited number of unus from topics In Humantties towards a degree Students of Schools other than Human1t1es and Social Soences may not offer both this cognate and Secuon A 14110 Philosophy I towards the degree

14112 SPECIAL INTRODUCTORY TOPIC IN PHILOSOPHY B

Units 6 Level Any year Duration Second half year Class Contact One hour lecture and one hour tutonal per week Pre-requ1s1tes None Co requ1s1tes None

The syllabus ts as for 141 lOPhilosophyl Secuon B plus additional work to be determined by the D1sciphne of Philosophy This topic is available for students from schools other than Humanities or Social Sciences who are able to offer only a hm1ted number of units from topics In Human1t1es towards thedegree Students of Schools other than Humanittes and Social Sciences may not offer both this cognate and Secuon B 14110 Philosophy I towards the degree

14113 SPECIAL INTRODUCTORY TOPIC IN PHILOSOPHY C

Units 6 Level Any year Durauon Flfst half year Class Contact One hour lecture and one hour tutonal per week Pre requ1snes None Co requ1s1tes None

The syllabus is as for 14110 Philosophy I Common Course with some work deleted by arrangement with the D1sciphne of Phtlosophy This topic t'i available for students from schools other than Humanities and Social Sciences who are able to offer only a hmued number of unus from topics in Human1ues towards the degree Students of Schools other than Human1ues and Social Sciences may not offer both this cognate and SecuonC 14110 Phtlosophy I towards the degree

SECOND AND THIRD YEAR COGNATES Students w1sh1ng to offer a Philosophy Cognate topic (or topics) toward the degree may enrol in any of topics 14201 14209 14211 14219 14221 14226 and 39202 provided that (a) not more than 24 untts are offered as cognate topics (b) normally 36 unns have been completed toward the degree and (c) spec1f1c pre requ1sues or co requ1s1tes for lhe topics have been sausfted Top1cswh1chcan be taken as Phtlosophy Cognates are listed below Course descnpuons of these topics (except 39202) can be found under the entry Ma1or Topics 1n Philosophy the tourse descr1pt1on of 39202 Imper1ahsm follows the hst of cognate topics

157

SYLLABVS&S-HVMANITIES

14201 14202 14203 14204 14205 14207 14208 14209 14211 14214 14215 14216 14217 14218 14219 14221 14222 14223 14224 14221 14228

Unus 9

Second and Third year Cognates in Philosophy Epistemology and Philosophy of Science (not offered in 1978) Epistemology and Metaphysics (not offered in 1978) Moral Philosophy Logic II Logic III Social Phtlosophy Philosophy of History and Social Science Marxism Len1n1sm I (not offered in 1978) Marxism Len1n1sm II Special Studies 1n Pohucal Philosophy I (not offered 1n 1978) Special Studies in Pohttcal Philosophy II Ancient and Mediaeval Philosophy Modem Philosophy Philosophy of Mathematics Special topic 1n Philosophy Onental Philosophy Phllosoph1cal Problems of Economic Theory Womens Studies Feminism (not offered 1n 1978) Poht1cs and Art Impenahsm

15299 SPECIAL TOPIC IN ITALIAN I (9)

Professor G A A Com1n

Level Second year for students in the School of Human1ues any level for students in other Schools Duration Whole academic year Class Contact Bet,veen 4 and 5 hours per week throughout the year Pre requ1snes Matnculauon standard in Italian or an equivalent kno,vledge of the language Co requisites None

Not available to students who have completed 15110 Italian I The content of this course which \Vtll consist pnnc1pally of elements of 15110 Itahan I should be arranged by the student 1n consultauon with the D1sc1phne

15213 SPECIAL TOPIC IN ITALIAN I (6)

Professor G A A Comin Units 6 Level Second year for students tn the School of Human1ues any level for students in other Schools Duration Whole academic year Class Contact Between 2 and 3 hours per week throughout the year Pre requ1snes Matnculauon standard in Italian or an equivalent knowledge of the language Co requ1sttes None

Not avat1able to students who have completed 15110 Italian I The content of this l.Ourse which will consist pnnc1pally of elements of 15110 Italian I should be arranged by the student 1n consultauon with the D1sc1pltne

158

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

15230 ITALIAN LANGUAGE

Mtss M A Baker and Mr D J 0 Connor

Units 12 Level Second year for students 1n the School of Human1t1es any level for students 1n other Schools Duration Whole academic year Class Contact 5 hours per week 1nclud1ng lectures tutorials conversauon classes and language laboratory sessions Pre requ1saes None but students are required to consult with the D1sc1phne Co requ1s1tes None

Not available to students who have completed 15110 Italian I or 15130 Italian IB or 15120 Italian IZ A one year topic designed for students wuh little or no previous kno\vledge of the language It aims at providing a basic knowledge of spoken and written Italian The syllabus of this 1op1c is idenucal to that of 15120 Italian IZ Students are advised that 15230 ltahan Language will be accepted 10 place of 15120 Itahan IZ as the first par1 of a ma1or sequence under the cond1uons applicable to that topic

Set books As for 15120 Itahan IZ

15298 ITALIAN LANGUAGE (9)

Miss M A Baker and Mr D J 0 Connor

Unlts 9 Level Second year for students in theS<.hool of Human111es any level for students 1n other Schools Durauon Whole academic year Class Contact 6 hours per week in the hrst half year 4 in the second Pre requ1s1tes None but students are requued to consult w·1th the D1sc1phne Co requ1s1tes None

Not avatlable to students who have completed 15110 Italian I or 15130 ltahan IB or 15120 Italian IZ A one year topic designed for students with httle or no previous kno\'vledge of the language It aims at providing a basic knowledge of spoken and written Italian The syllabus of this topic consists of Language (as per 15130 ltahan IB Section A( An Introduction to Italy as per 15110 Itahan I Section C

Set books For details refer to the sections quoted above

15232 ITALIAN LANGUAGE (6)

Miss M A Baker and Mr D ] 0 Connor

Unus 6 Level Second year for students 10 the School of Human1t1es any level for students in other Schools Duration Terms I and II Class Contact 5 hours per week 10 the first half year 4 hours per week in the remainder of Term II Pre requisites None but students are requued to consult lvith the D1sc1phne Co requ1sues None

Not available to students who have completed 15110 Italian I or 15130 Itahan IB or 15120 Italian IZ A topic over two terms designed for students with lutle or no previous knowledge o( the language It aims at providing a baste knowledge of spoken and wntten Italian The syllabus of this topic consists of the hrst two terms of 15130 Italian IB Sa..uon A

Set books For details refer to the section quoted above

159

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

15221 SECOND-YEAR HALF-COGNATE IN ITALIAN

Professor G A A Comin

Untt.s 6 Level Second year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact To be determined Pre requ1.stte A satisfactory standard 1n 15110 ltahan I or in 15120 Italian IZ Co requisites None

Course detatls avatlable from the d1sc1phne of Itahan Normally only students proceeding to second year level from 15120 Italian IZ may offer both this half cognate and 15210 Itahan II tolvards a degree

15320 THIRD YEAR COGNATE IN ITALIAN

Units 12 Level Thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact To be determined

Mr D ] 0 Connor

Pre requ1s1tes A sausfactory standard 1n 15210 ltahan II Co requ1s1tes None

Details of the options avatlable may be obtained from the d1sc1pl111e of ltahan Students may not offer both this cognate and Cognate 15321 towards a degree Students enrolled in 15310 Itahan III may also enrol for this cognate

15321 THIRD-YEAR HALF-COGNATE IN ITALIAN

Units 6 Level Thnd year Duration To be determined Class Contact To be determined

Mr D ] 0 Connor

Pre requisite A satisfactory standard 1n 15210 ltahan II Co requisite None

Details of the options available may be obtained from the d1sc1phne of Italian Students may not offer both this cognate and Cognate 15320 towards a degree Students enrolled for 15310 Italian III may also enrol for this cognate

COGNATE TOPICS IN VISUAL ARTS Any of the topics hsted under the maJor sequences in Visual Arts may be offered as cognates ror topics 16212 16318 and 16398 however the normal pre requ1s1tes are waived provided that the student has sausfactonly completed 36 units toward a degree before enrolling in a second year cognate and 24 units at second year level before enrolling in a tlurd year cognate Permission of the supervisor rs also required for these topics

Units 6

16212 VISUAL COMMUNICATION Mr David Sless

Level Second or thud year Duration Whole year Class Contact One lecture per week one seminar per fortnight Pre requisnes Students will not normally be admitted to this cognate topic until they have completed 36 units toward thetr degree and have the perm1ss1on of the topic supervisor Co rcqu1s1tes None

The topic descnption is given 1n the Visual Arts II hsting (16212) for the ma1or sequence

160

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

16318 FOUNDATIONS OF AMERICAN ARCHITECTURE 1770-1880 Mr D L Johnson

Unus 6 Level Thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact I lecture per week 1 seminar and/or held trip per fortnight Pre requisites Consent of instructor Students will not normally be admitted to thts topic unul they have completed 24 units of second year topics toward their degree Co requ1s1tes None

NOTE Students are not permuted to offer more than one of topics 16206 16306 or 16318 towards a degree

Lectures and seminars emphasize archttecture urban form and landscape design theories and man1festat1ons as related to class1c1sm Romanuc1sm and ratlonahsm 1n North America and of necessity Europe Developments centre on the penod from c 1770 to c 1880 or essenually from Jefferson to Richardson Assessment will be based on one essay one research pro1ect and the seminars/held trips

NOTE Students are not permitted to offer more than one of topics 16206and16318 towards a degree

Preliminary reading Fleming W Arts and ideas (Holt) chapt 16 19• Morrison H Early American arch1tecture (Oxford) 1nclud1ng part three Pierson W The colon1al and neo classical style (American bu1ldingsand theirarch1tects series) (Dover)•

NOTE Students who have not completed 16110 or 18240 will also attend the architecture lectures of 16110 1n ftrst term

Set reading (To be detemnned on avatlab1hty)

Reference books Burchard J and Bush Brown A The architecture of America a social and cultural history (Little Brown) not the bnef ed1t1on Clark K The Gothic revival (Penguin)• Condit C W American building (Chicago Univ Pr)• Early J Romanticism and Amerzcan architecture (New York) Ettner L ed Neoclassicism and romanhc1sm 1750 1850, 2 vols (Prennce Hall)• Collins P Changing ideals 1n modern architecture 1750 1950 (Faber)• G1ed1on S Space time and architecture 5lh ed (Harvard) Hamlyn T Greek revzval architecture 1n Amenca (Dover)• Hnchcock H R Architecture nineteenth and twentieth centuries 3rd ed (Pehcan) Holt E ed A documentary history of art vol 3 From the classicists to the impressionists (Anchor)• Honour H Neo classicism (Penguin)• Weimer A R ed City and country in America (Appleton Cenrury Crofts)• Wh1ffen M Amerzcan architecture since 1780 (MIT)

Unus 6

16398 SPECIAL COGNATE IN VISUAL ARTS Mr A ] Flasht1g and Academ1c Staff

Level Third year Duration To be determined Class Contact To be determined Pre requisites Compleuon of 24 units at second year level and perm1ss1on of the topic supervisor Director of Studies or Head of D1sc1phne Co requtsttes To be determined

Subjects under the special cognate topic will be determined by consultauon

161

SYLLABUSFS-HUMANITIES

Unus 6

17111 THE HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC TO 1800 Dr R H Illing

Level Fust year Duration First half year Class Contact Lectures and discussions 2 hours per week auend.ince 'l.l de1nonstrauons 'l.nd recitals 2 hours per week private hsten1ng 2 hours per \Veek should suffice Pre requisite This cognate assumes instrumental or vocal co1npetence and sotnc historical or technical knowledge of musical mauers and any stud) of malhemaucs or physics or of history or languages \VIII be an advantage Co requisites None

Assessment On (1) wntten exerctsts and a formal hsten1ng test and (n) tuton<1.l d1scuss1on and a final 1nd1v1dual interview - about equal weight Although the fonnal teadung for this course \Vtll be completed dunng the first half year students \Viii have the remainder of the second term and the third tenn to complete their ass1gnme11LS wuh such guidance as 1s necessary and to study the listening schedule which will be tested 1n sections at half term intervals

Tlus cognate will cons1st of nvo elements (1) a study of the broad outhnt of western music fro1n the earliest times up to that of Haydn and Mozart from lectures and rec1talsgu1ded by exercises and discussion and (n) fam1hanzauon with a substantial representauve selccuon of \vestern music up to the rococo by attendanct <1.l den1onstrat1ons and recttals <1.nd from pnvate hsten1ng to recordings Students should dtscuss their choice of reference books \Vtlh Dr llhng\vell before the topic begins as several alternatives 'I.TC possible some suuable others not Students \Vtll also need to have then own copies of the music \Vllh \Vhtch they are expected to becon1e fam1har The set hst of 'vorks for 1978 will be available 111 the Music Studio in 1978 The set list of works for any year will follow clo.!iely that for the previous year and the choice \VIII be influenced by whdl live performances lt will be possible to arrange The choice of reference books wtll 1nclude a d1cuonary such as Everyman s by I:nc Blom 1.nd a ~eneral history such as Grouts History of Western Music

Unus 6

17112 THE FOUNDATIONS OF MUSICAL NOTATIONS Dr R H Illzn1:,

Level FITst year Durauon First half year Class Contact Theoretical classes 2 hours per \vcck demonstrations and recHals 2 hours per week (average) Pre requ1sue or Co requisite A S'l.llsfactory standard 111 17111 The History of Wcsttrn Music to 1800 or a sausf,ctory stand.ird 1n some other appropnate cour.!ie o;uch as Music I 111 the Untversuy of Adelaide

Assess1nent On (1) exercises and essays and (11) tu tonal d1scuss1on - .tbout equal weight Although the formal teaching for this course will be completed dunn£; the first half year students \v1ll have the remainder of the second tenn and the third term to complete their •ss1gnments wllh such guidance as ts necessary

Tlus cognate will consist of a study of the musical notations of wtslcrn music from the 1n1ddle ages to the rococo The set works will be chosen from those studied in Cognate 17111 The notations will be studied 111 theory from pnnted texts and from photographs of manuscnpts and ong1nal edit1ons and 1n practice 1n demonstrauons and recuals

17113 THE HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC FROM 1800 TO 1950 Dr R H llling

Unns 6 Level Fust year Durauon Fust half year Class Cont<1.ct Lectures and discussions 2 hours per wee!.. attendance at demonstrations and recitals 2 hours per week pnvate hsten1ng 2 hours per \veek should suffice

162

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Pre requ1slle This cognate assumes musical literacy such as 1s required formalnculauon music and some knowledge of h1sLory or languages will be an advantage Co requisite 17111 The History of Western Music to 1800 to which this cognate is a complement Assessment On (1) written exeroses and hsten1ng tests and (u) tutonal d1scuss1on and a final 1nd1v1dual interview - about equal 'veight

Tins cognate will consist of two elements (1) a study of the broad outhne of western music from the ttme of Beethoven and Schubert up to that of Bartek and Stravinsky from lectures and recuals guided by exercises and d1scuss1ons and (n) famihanzauon with .i substanual representauve selection of 'vestern music of the period by attendance at demonstrations and recitals and from private listening to recordings Students should discuss theucho1ce of reference books with Dr Ill1ng well before the topic begins as several altemauves are possible some suuable others not Students \Vtll also need to have theu own copies of the music with which they are expected to become familiar The set hst of works for 1978 wtll be available in the Music Studio early 1n 1978 The choice of reference books will 1nclude a d1cuonary such as Everyman s by Eric Blom and a general history such as Grouts History of Western Music which are equally appropriate for 17111 As for course 17111 the set hst of works for any year will follow closely that for the previous year and the choice will be influenced by what hve performances it will be possible to arrange Thts course with its co requisite 171 l l 'I he History of Western Music to 1800 will provide a 12 unit study in musical history for those n1 1sh1ng to undertake such a study during then hrst year wuhout commllung themselves to morespec1ahzed or extended mus1colog1cal studies It will also provide an appropriatc6 unu cognate for students compleung a major sequence 1n musicology It 1s not however part of the musicology sequence which 1s concerned only wuh music before 1800 The formal teaching for both the History courses "nll be completed dunng the fust half year Students will have the rest of the second term and the thlfd term to complete thelf assignments with such guidance as is necessary and to study the hsten1ngschedulewhich will be tested 1n secuons at half term intervals

17211 THE FOUNDATIONS OF MUSICAL ANALYSIS Dr R H llling

Not offered 1n 1978

Units 6 Level Second year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact Theorencal Classes 2 hours per week demonstrauons and recitals 2 hours per week (average) Normal Pre requ1s1te 17112 The Foundauons of Musical Notauons

Assessment On (1) essays and (11) tu tonal d1scuss1on - about equal \ve1ght Tluscognate \VIII consist of 'l study of methods of musical analysis appropnate to western music from the 1n1ddle ages to the rococo The set worksw1ll be chosen from those studied 1n 17111 The History of Western Music to 1800 and will be largely the same as those studied 1n 17112 The Foundanons of Musical Notations They will be studied from ong1nal manuscnpts early edtt1ons or texts which have been tested for reahab1hty 10 17112 The foundauons of Musical Notauons

17212 ELEMENTARY TECHNIQUES OF MUSICAL COMPOSITION IN THE RENAISSANCE AND BAROQUE

Not offered tn 1978

Units 6 Level Second year Duration Fust half year

Dr R H Ilhng

Class Contact Theoretical Classes 2 hours per \veek demonstrauons and recttals 2 hours per week (average) Norm.ii Pre requislle or C.O requisite 17211 The Foundauons of Musical Analysis

163

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Assessment On (1) wnuen exercises and (11) tutonal discussion - about equal lve1ght This cognate will consist of a study of the techniques of the simpler styles bet,veen 1550 and 1750 in particular of early 4 part vocal harmony and of the keyboard cont1nuo taking as examples works chosen from those studied in 17111 The History of Western Music to 1800 The attention of students 1s dra\vn to the poss1b1hty of entering an Honours programme ,.,holly or partly 1n Musicology or of compleung a ma1or in Musicology for the Ordinary Degree upon satisfactory completion of this cognate

Units 6

18201 INTRODUCTION TO CHILDREN S LITERATURE Ms F A flughes

Level Second year Duration First half year Class Contact 2 hours per week (lectures seminars tutorials) Pre requisite None but students will not normally be admitted to this cognate until they have completed 36 unus towards a degree Co requisites None

Assessment By ncgot1at1on early 1n the course Assignments consist of one preltm1nary essay of 2 000 'vords one ma1or essay of 3 000 5 000 \VOrds or an equivalent project and regular tutorial part1c1pat1on

Preliminary work Students enrolhng 1n this cognate are required to write a paper of about 2 000 lvords summarising what they can recollect of their own childhood reading and the effect n had on their hfe

Set books No books are set Students will be expected to read widely in children s ltterature throughout the course - say at the rate of one book each week - and may \v1sh to buy books relaung to then main interest as It emerges A hst of recommended reading \VIII be •hstributed before the course commences

Unus 6

34301 LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN AMERICA Dr L M Baird

Level Second year Durauon First half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None but students will not normally be admitted to tluscognate unul they have completed 36 unns towards their degree Co requ1sues None

NOTE This cognate also constitutes Topic 34301 1n American Studies and the ftrst half of Cognate 18210 American Ltterature Students are therefore not permuted to offer more than one of 18210 and 34301 tO\Vards a degree

Students will be expected to study Sections I IV and one other of the following Sections, which have been chosen to illusttate some of the ma1or concerns of Amencan literature The emphasis 1s chiefly but not entnely on twenueth century developments

Assessment w11l be based on one tutorial paper and one 3 000 word essay

I FROM REALISM TO THE DEPRESSION Twain M The adventures of Huckleberry Finn (Penguin) Dreiser T Sister Carne (0 U P ) Wharton E The age of innocence (Penguin) Lewis S Babbitt (Signet) 5te1nbeck J The grapes of wrath (Pan)

II TUE WAR THEME

Crane S The red badge of courage (Signet) Hemingway E For whom the bell tolls (Panther)

164

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Vonnegut K Slaughterhouse five (Panther) Matier N The armies of the night (Penguin)

III DRAMA AND SOCIAL CRITICISM 0 Neill E The iceman cometh (Jonathan Cape) Miller A The crucible (Penguin) Wtlhams T Orpheus descending (Penguin)

IV SYMBOLISM AND SOCIAL CRITICISM

Melv1Ile 1-1 Moby Dick (Penguin) Ha,vthorne N The Blzthedale romance (Dell) Lll1son R Invisible man (Modern Library) 0 Connor F Everything that rises must converge (Penguin) Bellow S Humboldt s gift (Penguin)

Units 6

18202 NATIVE AMERICAN THEMES AND STYLES Dr L M Baird

Level Second year Duration Second half year Class Contact I lecture and I tutorial per week Pre requisites None but students will not normally be adm1ucd to this cognate unul they have completed 36 units towards theu degree Co requisites None

NOTE This cognatealsoconsututes I.he second half of Cognate 18210 Amencan Literature and therefore students are not permitted to offer more than one of 18210 and 18202 towards a degree Poets and novchsts from the nineteenth and twentieth centuncs are chosen to represent the development of pecuharly Amencan charactensucs of language structure and meaning Consequent issues w1U 1nclude the search for a poeuc line to sun Amencan speech 1d1om and rhythm the relauon bet\vecn poeuc and non poeuc truth the use of American history and locality nature as a source of symbol symbolism as an American mode the advent of the recognisable American in ficuon the relation between f1ct1on and realuy

Assessment \Vlll be based on one analyucal poetry exercise and one 3 000 word essay

I POETICS Set books Whitman W Leaves of grass and selected prose (Rinehart) D1ck1nson [. Selected poems and letters (Anchor) Stevens W Selected poems (Faber) Williams W C Selected poems (Ne\v D1recuons) Lo\vell R Selected Poems (Faber) Lo,vell R Life studies (Faber) Levertov D The Jacobs ladder (Jonalhan C.ape)

II THE NOVEL

Set books Poe [. A Selected prose & poetry (Rinehart) James H The American (Laurel) Twain M The mysterious stranger (Signet) Faulkner W As I lay dying (Penguin) West N Miss Lonelyhearts (New Direcuons) Donleavy J P The ginger man (Penguin) Percy W The moviegoer (Noonday)

Units 6

18203 HALF-COGNATE IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES I Mr A S Bear and Mr D Sless

Level Second year Durauon Terms I and II Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutonal per \Veek

165

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Pr<. rcqu1s1te None cxcepl thctl students will not normctll) be ctdm1utd 10 1l11'i cohn llt. unul thty h'lve obtained 36 unlls tO\v nds then degrtt ( o rtqu1slle None

I op1cs I .ind 2 18220 Commun1catlon Studies

18204 HALF-COGNATE IN COMMUNICATION STUDIES II Mr A S Bear and Mr D Sle~s

llnll'i 6 I 'V{ I ~econd ) ear Du1 tllon I'erms II .:1.nd III (I 1ss lontac1 2 lectures .ind I tutorial per week PH Hqu1s11es None except 1ha1 students will not nonn ill) b{ 1dm1tted 10th!'> <.Ol,11 ue unul 1hey h tve obtained 36 u1uts towards then de~iet ( o nqu1'it1es None

I op1<s 2 ind 3 18220 Cornrnun1cauon Studies

Unlls 6

18205 STUDIES IN CHILDREN'S LITERATURE /I.ls F A Hughes

Level Second year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 hours per week (lectures tutorials) Pre requisite 18201 and I 0110 ( 18201 taken pnor to 1977 will not count as a pre requ1s1tt Co requtslles None

Assessment By negouauon early in the course Assignments consist of one ess.iy of l 000 w-ords .ind one of 4 000 ,vords ind rtgular tutorial pan1c1pauon

Set books Aiken J M1dn1ghl 1s a place (Cape) Arundel H The terrible temptation (Hamilton) Boston L The chzldren of Green Knowe (Faber)• A stranger at Green Knowe (F1ber) Fairfax Lucy B and Pearce P The children of the hou!Je (Penguin)• Gardam J A long way from Verona (Hamilton)• Garfield L Smith (Longman)• Garner A The owl service (Collins)• Red sh1/l (Collins)• Greene B Summer of my German soldier Hoh<1n R The mouse and his child (Faber)• Jansson T The Fznn famzly ilJoomzntroll (Penguin)• Jordan J His own ivhere• Mayne \V No more school (Penguin)• A game of dark (Penisu1n) The ]er~ey shore (Hamilton) Norton M The borrowers (Penguin)• Pearce P Toms midnight garden (0 UP)• Southall I Bread and honey (Anbus & Robertson)• josh (Anisus & Robcrt~on)• Tolkien J The hobbit (Penguin)• Wnght~on P I own the racecourse' (Hutchinson) The Nargun and the stars (Hutchinson)

Unns 12 Level Second year

18210 AMERICAN LITERATURE Dr L M Bazrd

Dur.it1on Whole academic ytar Cl.iss Contact First half year 2 lectures and I tu tonal per week Second half ye tr I lecturc and 1 tutorial per week

166

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITJF<:

Pre requisites None bul sludents \'/Ill nol normally beadm1ued lo lh1sco~n'lle unl1l lhey have completed 36 unlls lowards Lhe1r degree Co rcqu1slles None

This cognate uualls representative readings of American Llleratu1e from the nineteenth and l\\enuedi centunes

Assessment will be based upon one tu tonal paper one analyucal poetry exercise and l\\l'O

3 000 word essays Students offer 'iecttons A and B

Secuon A LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN AMERICA (First half year) The syll.:1.bus 1s as for l-ldlf Co~nate 34301 Literature and Society 1n Americ.i

Secuon B NATIVE AMERICAN THEMES AND STYI ES (Second half year) The syllabu.!. 1s as for Half Cogndte 18202 Nauve American Themes and Slyles

Unns 12 Level Second year

18220 COMMUNICATION STUDIES Mr A S Bear and Mr D Sless

Dur1.l1on Whole academic year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutorial per week Pre rcqu1slle None except thal students \V'1ll not normally be admitted to this cogn'lle until they have obtained 36 units towards their degree Co requ1sue~ None

The sub1ect mauer to be covered has been d1v1ded Into three broad areas one of which will be presented 111 each of lhe three lerms These are (I) fhe concepts of culture popular culture and communication Aspects of the history research problems and methods pohctes and controvers1e~ relauni., to mass commun1cat1on (2) Mass communtcauon 111 modern society \\llh parucular reference to Australia (broddcasunt, adverusn1g and the press) (3) Special studies 111 commun1catton and popular art Topics will be 1nnoduccd 1n lectures and followed up 111 seminars ll1s1ntendcd that class work shall form a shared background of ideas and reading from ,.,,.h1ch students wtll develop thelf own studies 111 more deLail A hst of essay and study lop1cs" uh .i.ppropnate references and guides LO source ffidtcnal will be d1stnbuted at the beg111111ng of the year Opportun1ues \V'tll be provided for sludents to undertake group projects under the general superv1s1on of the tutors

Assess1nenl Based on seminar work two essays of about 3 000 words (or thelfcqutvalent 111

shorter papers) and one three hour cxamu1dt10n paper OR one d1sscrtaoon o[ 'lhout 7 000 words

Prelzm1nary reading McQua1l D Communication (Longman 1975) \V1lhams R Communical1ons (Pene;u.111 1968)

Sel books Australia Postal and Telecommun1cauons Department Australian Broadcasting (The Creln Report) (Australian Government Pubhshini:;- Service 1976) Bdrr T Reflections of reality lhe media in Australia (R1~by 1977) Curran J Gurevnch M and \Voollacott J eds tvlass communtcat1011 and society (Arnold 1977) McQua1l D ed Sociology of mass comrnunzcations (Penguin 1972)

Not offered 1n 1978 Units 12

18240 ART & SOCIETY /'.Ir R ?V Smith

Levd Second or tl11rd ytar Durauon \Vhole acadC1n1c year Cl.i.ss Contact 3 lectures tach week and ont seminar or local f 1eld tnp each fortnight Six

167

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

studio sessions each of 3 hours in the year A held tnp to the N auonal Gallery of V 1ctona in the August vacation is a necessary part of tlns course W1lhngness to undertake the trip ts a cond1non of enrolment Pre requisites None Co requ1slles None

A treaunent of art as a human activity with speaal emphasis on us relaUon to social poht1cal and economic phenomena The course will deal with three man1festat1ons of art 1n history relating each to its h1stoncal context and to the wider context of art history (I) The art of ancient Greece 1ndud1ng reference to its antecedents in the eastern Mednerranean area (growth and decline of the classical ideal the art of absolutist and ohgarch1c regimes) (2) The art of Italy 10 the fifteenth century (artists and patronage 1n the mercantile clty states and the papacy) (3) The art of France 10 the nineteenth century and the alternative trad1t1on (from Revoluuon to Commune)

Particular attenuon will be given lo h1stoncal causality (as cond1uooed by factors such as media techniques and the social functton of art) as a basts for the reconstrucuon of meanings embodied in parucular art modes and monuments and for the study of changes in art

Preliminary reading The works of Gombnch and Carpenter should be read before classes begin the other works as prehm1nanes to the relevant parts of the course

Carpenter R The aesthetic basis of Greek art (Indiana Univ Pr 1959)• Gombnch E H The story of art 12th ed (Phaidon 1972)• Hay D The Italian Renaissance in its historical background (Cambndge Univ Pr 1966)0

Wind E Art and anarchy (Faber 1963)

Set books Baxandall M Painting and experience 1n fifteenth century Italy (Oxford Clarendon 1972) Richter G A handbook of Greek art, 6th ed (Pha1don 1969)• Janson H W A history of art 2nd ed (Thames & Hudson 1970)

Recommended reading Further hsts of references will be made available dunng the course Chambers D S Patrons and artists 1n the Italian Renaissance (Maan1llan 1970)• Clark T J The absolute bourgeois artists and politics in France 1848 1851 (Thames & Hudson 1973) Ellner L ed Neoclassicism and romanticism 1750 1850 2 vols (Prenl1ce Hall 1970)• Hall J Dictionary of sub1ects and symbols in art (Murray 1974) Hartt f History of Italian Renaissance art (Prentice Hall 1970) Hauser A The social history of art 4 vols (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1962)• Holt I: G A documentary history of art vol 2 (Anchor 1958)• Levey M Early Renaissance (Pehcan 1967)• Lindsay J The ancient world manners and morals (We1dcnfeld & Nicolson 1968) - Death of the hero (Studio 1960) Murray P and L A dictionary of art and artists rev ed (Penguin 1968)• Nochhn L ed Realism (Pehcan 1971)• - Realism and tradition in art 1848 1900 (Prenuce Hall 1966)"" Novotny F Painting and sculpture in Europe 1780 1880 (Penguin 1960 1970) Polhtt J J ed The art of Greece 1400 31 BC (Prenuce Hall 1965)• Rewald J The history of Impressionism (Museum of Modern Art 1961) Roger Marx C Graphzc art of the 19th century (Thames & Hudson 1962)"" Talman J L Romanticism and revolt Europe 1815 1848 (Thames & Hudson 1967)• Wittko,ver R and M Born under Saturn (Norton 1963) Assessment One seminar paper in each term (aggregate 503) Two final exam1nauon papers (aggregate 503) Seminars and studio work are necessary components of the course and final assessment \VIII depend on sausfactory parucipauon in both acuviues

168

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

18250 PRINTS AND PRINTMAKERS Units 12 Mr R W Smith Level Second or thud year Duration Whole academic year Class Contacl 3 lectures each week and 1 seminar or local held tnp each fortnight 6 studio sessions each of 3 hours 1n the year A field trip to the National Gallery of Viclona 1n the August vacation is a necessary part of this course Willingness lo undertake the tnp is a condiuon of enrolment Pre requisites None Co requisites None A study of the origins and development of pnnt making wtth attention to some ma1or schools and practitioners tn Europe and elsewhere Special emphasis wtll be given to the pnnt as a means of cultural diffusion and interchange as a popular art form and as a vehicle for conveying ideas ideals and social pohuca1 and personal atutudes Studio sessions will give first hand knowledge of vanous pnnt media lheir techniques problems and expressive potenl1al Students will also be required to work directly wtth ong1nal pnnts and s1m1lar pnmary matenal Preliminary reading Ivins W Jr How prints look Mayor A H Prints & people a social history of printed pictures Vanous authors Engravings and other pnnt media Encyclopaedia of world art Vol IV cols 748 785 Reference works (Further hsts of references particularly those dealing with 1nd1v1dual arttsts will be made available dunng the course ) Hind A M A history of engraving and etching Hind A M An introduction to a history of woodcut 2 vols Hind A M Early Italian engraving 7 vols Delte1l L Le peintre graveur illustre 32 vols Weber W A history of lithography George M D Hogarth to Cruikshank social change in graphic satire Hollste1n F W H German engravings etchings and woodcuts ca 1400 1700 Hollstetn r W H Dutch and Flemish etchings engravings and woodcuts ca 1450 1700 Roger Marx C Graphic art of the 19th century Barn1coat J A concise history of posters Simon H 500 years of art in illustration Adh~mar J Twentieth century graphics Adhemar J Graphic art of the 18th century Man F H (pseud ) Artists lithographs A world history from Senefelder to the present day Strauss W L Chiaroscuro The clair obscurwoodcuts by the German and Netherlandzsh masters of the XV/th and XVI/th centuries Wechsler H J Great prints and printmakers von Bartsch A Le peintre graveur von Bartsch A Le peinlre graveur illustr! Illustrations to Adam Bartsch s Le peintre graveur Churchill, W A Watermarks in paper in Holland England France etc in the XVII and XVIII centuries and their interconnection Lugt F Les marques de collections de dessins et d eslampes 2 vols Passavant ] D Le peintre graveur Lehrs M Geschichte und knttscher Katalog des deutschen niederlhndzschen und franzosischen Kupferstichs im IV Jahrhundert Lehrs M Late Gothic engravings of Germany and the Netherlands Ge1sberg M The German single leaf woodcut 1500 1550 Lane R Masters of the Japanese print Michener ] Japanese prints from the early masters to the modern Nouvelles de l estampe 1963 -Print collectors quarterly 1911 1951 Assessment One seminar paper tn each term (aggregate 503) Two hnal exam1nauon papers (aggregate 503) Seminars and studio work are necessary components of the course and hnal assessment will depend on sausfactory part1c1pauon in both acttvlt1es

169

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Honours Programmes in the School of Humanities

'itudents whose performance in the Second or Third Year of the Ordinary degree of BJ.chelor of Arts ts of a sufficiently hu~h standard may proceed to the Honours degree 'itudt nts enrolling for the Honours degree after completing two years of th{. Ordinary chh1ee (24 units 1n each of two major sequences and 24 unlls of Cognates) Jre required to tJke a total of e1e;htHonours topics each representing 9 units over their Third Jnd Fourth YeJrs 'itudents enrolhng for the Honours degree after completing the Ordinary dee;reeare required to take four Honours topics (each representing 9 units) in their fourth Year lTnJe,,s specified to the contrary by particular d1sciphnes Honours topics a1e not specifically tied to either Third or Fourth Year 'iome d1sc1phnes also offer half topics in their Honours programme Half topics represent 4~ units and may be freely combined into the Honours degree on the p11nc1ple thdt two h<1lf toptcs equal one full topic 'i tudents who enrol for the Honours Degree after complet1ne; two years of the Ordinary De,e;ree are assessed on theu results 1n the eight Honours topics Jnd Jre normally penn1tted to choose whether to be examined or assessed 1n each topic at the end of their fhird Year or at the end of theu Fourth Year provided thdt no studf'nt 1s re examined or rt 1ssessed on the basis of further work completed in any topic 1 he results of students examined or assessed at the end of their Tl11rd Year 1n one or more topics are preslnted to tht Exam1nat1ons Board of the School in December of the same year but these results Jre not class1f1ed or published until the results of all topics are considered tht v may however be communicated informally to the students concerned In special circumstances the School Board on the recommendauon of the dtl.ctphne may <1pprove the wa1v1ng of these prov1s1ons 1n respect of cert.un topics and require that <;tudents normally be assessed in these topics at the end of the Thud Year 'itudents who enrol for the Honours degree after completing; th<' Ordinary degree Jre dl>sessed on theu results 1n the four Honours topics taken 1n their Fourth Year An essay 'Ind an oral exam1nauon plus associated seminars form pdrt of the final a5se5s1nent of students taking six or more Enghsh topics in a two year Honours programme or three or four l!.nghsh topics 1n a one year Honours progrJmme In so1ne topics th<' assessment may take a form other than that of a three hour wnllen exam1nJt1on 'io1ne topics 1n Drama are available only to students enrolled 1n the Drama ( entre ( tndtdates who wish to offer four or more topics in foreign l<1nguages should consult the Professor concerned about practical langu.tge requirements The Special fop1c in J<rench 1n 1y tt the discretion of the Professor of French take the form of d d1s5ertat1on ten to fifteen thousand words in leni;th (1nclus1ve of notes) The d1ssertdt1on 1nust re uh tht <X un1ners dt least four weeks before the hnal fourth Year ex<1n11nauons betpn At the d1~cret1on of the Professor of Spanish a d1ssertauon 1nay be subtnllted 1n placC'of out topic 111 J<ourth Year Candidates readin~ Span1l>h JS part of an Honour" pro~r.i.mme .tie rcqu1r<d to offer fop1c 12401 or fopu.. 12402 Jnd at least one othtr 1-Ionours I op1c

flH ".iptodl f opic in Visual Arts 1n ty ll the d1,,cret1011 of th< Profel.sor of V1l>uJI Ans to.kt tht forn1 of a dtssertJtton

A '><'lccuon of the follow1ne; full fop1cs (9 units) and H.tlf toµ)('> (1 1i unlfl>) will be IV llldbtt Ill 1978

10101 Old E.nghsh A (9 unit<,) 10102 Old l!.ne;hsh B (9 units) I 0101 Middle Enghsh A (9 units) I 0101 Middle E.nghsh B (9 units) 1010? Old Icelandic (9 units) 10106 Mediaeval LHerJtun (9 unus) 10107 'ihakespeare 'itud1es (9 units) 10108 1' ngl1<ih L1teraturt of the 'leventeenth Jnd l!.1e;htt enth ( tnt11r1(., (9 unit'>) 10109 E.ne;hsh 1 Iterature of the 'i1xteenth Jnd Seventeenth ( tntun<l> (9 unit'>) 10111 1'ne;hsh L1te1ature of the V1ctonan Penod (9 units) l(Hl2 E.Pe;l1sh 1 uerJture of the Romanttc Penod (9 units) J() 111 }< IU.,Jil>h l 1terdtllft' of thl h1e;hteenth ( <ntury (9 Ullltl>) 10111 'ipeuJl Author 111 E.nghsh (I) (9 units) 1011':1 ".ip«ldi Author 1n hnghsh {2) (9 u111ts) 10116 'lpec1al Author 111 E.ne;ltsh (3) (9 units)

170

SYLLABUSE.5-HUMANITIES

10417 5pec1Jl Author in E.nghsh (4) (9 unus) 10418 5C'letted Modern Authors (l) (9 Utuls) 10419 5clccted Modern Authors (2) (9 units) 10421 ~elected Modern Authors (3) (9 unus) 10422 5elected Modern Authors (4) (9 units) 10423 5pec1al Genre 1n English (I) (9 unns) 10421 5pectJl Genre 1n [nghsh (2) (9 unn~) 10121j 5pcc1al Genre 111 Enghsh (3) (9 units) 10126 f.ipcc1al Genre 111 [nghsh (4) (9 units) 10427 American L1terJture (l) (9 unns) 10428 Amencan Lllerature (2) (9 unus) 1042() Amencan LtterJture (3) (9 units) 10131 American Luerature (4) (9 unlts) 10412 Commonwealth Literature (1) (9 unHs) 10433 Co1nmonwealth Luerature (2) (9 unns) 10131 C.01nmonwe1lth L1terJture (3) (9 units) 104115 Commonwealth Lnerature (4) (9 unns) 10436 Vanet1es of 1'..nghsh (1) (9 unns) 10437 V'lnet1es of English (2) (9 unns) 10138 Austrahan Luerature (l) (9 unus) 10439 Australian Literature (2) (9 unlls) 10141 Australian L1tlrature (3) (9 units) 10412 Australian LnerJture (4) (9 units) 101119 Special Topic 1n Enghsh h) thesis (I) (7) (9 units) l041jl 5elected Studies 1n English (I) (9) (9 unlls eJch) 10161 Selected Studies 1n English (IO) (9 units) 10991 9 5pec1al Half Topic 111 English (I) (9) (4~ unus)

11101 l<rench Language Wntten and Spoken (C} unns) 11102 E~sJy tn French (9 units) 11103 l<rench Liter tture before 1300 (9 units) 11101 French Literature 111 the Fourteenth and Fifteenth ( llltunes (9 unui.) 1110? 1-rench Lneraturc 1n the Sixteenth Century (9 u111ls) 11106 French Literature 1n the Seventeenth Century (9 un1ti.) 11107 J<rench Lnerature 1n the Eighteenth Century (9 units) 11108 frlnch Literature 111 the Nineteenth Century (9 unlli.) 11908 }< rench L1ter'lture 1n the N 1netlenth Century ( l~ units) 11109 J<rench Luerature 1n the Twenueth Century (9 unus) 11 111 J.hstoncJ! French L1ngu1sucs (9 unus) 11112 <ipec1al Topic 111 French (9 units) 11912 5pec1al Half [op1c tn French (4!-2 unus) 11 111 Monta1~ne and Pascal (9 units) 11911 rrench C1nerna (4~ units) 1111 r; Rutnan1'ln Language and LnerJturc (9 unlls) 11116 5pec1al rop1c Ill L1n~u1sucs (9 units) 11916 5pec1al Hal£ Topic 1n L1n~u1~ucs (4!2 unus) 11117 Romance L1ngu1sttcs (9 units) 11118 ( eneral L1n~1i.t1cs (9 untts) J JC)l8 ( eneral Lingu1st1cs (4~ unas) 11 lllJ I .ttvtan An lntroduct1011 to L1ngu1i.tK Resl 1rch Mnhod (9 unll') 11121 Provenc;al Lttcr.tturc 111 the Middle A~e~ (9 unit~) 11122 i\-Ied1aeval Ldllll I 1tcrature (9 u111ts) 1112{ 5pectal Topic 111 Rumanian (9 u111ti.)

12101 <ip tntsh LJngu'lgc (9 unus) 12102 E.~sJy 1n Spanish (9 unus) 12 HH l·hstory o( thl Sp tnish LanguJgt (9 unlls) 12101 C,p1n1sh L1teruure and Dram.t 1492 1700 (9 untt~) 121or; C,p1n1~h H1i.tory Jnd C1\1hz.it1on 1192 1700 (C} unit<.) 12106 I 1(ele~t1na1nd its Imu.i.uoni. 1n (olden A~t L1te1 uun (9 u111t') 12107 rht RomJll(.('rO ind HS Effect .. upon \oldu1 Agt l lllfdtUn (9 Ullll .. )

12108 fhe Religious Literatun· and Dr.trod of tlu. ('oldtn Ag< (9 unll') 12109 '>pan1sh Drama hLfore Lope de Veg1 (9 unns)

171

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

12411 12412 12413

12414 12415 12416 12417 12418 12419 12420

13401 13406 13422 13427 13434 13435 13436 13437 13438 13439 13441 13442 13443 13444 13450 13451

13452 13453 13454 13456 13457

15458

13459 13460 13461 13463

13464

13465 13466 13467 13903 13934

14401 14402 14404 14405 14406 14407 14408 14409 14411 11413 14414 14115

172

Mediaeval Spanish Literature and History (9 units) Spanish Literature and History in the Nineteenth Century (9 unus) Latin Amencan Literature and History in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centunes (9 unus) Special Topic 10 Spanish (9 units) Spanish Philology and Mediaeval Studies• (9 units) Portuguese and Brazilian Studies I (9 unus) Portuguese and Brazthan Studies II (9 units) Nineteenth Century Spanish Novel (9 units) Mexico under Cardenas 1934 19402 (9 unus) Archllecture of Latin Amenca and the Philippines

Comedy (9 units) (not offered in 1978) Tragedy (9 units) (not offered in 1978) Movement with MtmeA• or Movement with Modern Dance A• 3rd year(9 units) Modern Theatre (9 unus) Special Topic tn Drama (9 unus) Performance A• (3rd year) (9 untts) Performance B• (3rd year) (9 un1ts) Performance C• (4th year) (9 units) Performance D• (4th year) (9 untts) Directing for Theatre• (3rd year) (9 units) Stage and Production Management A• (3rd year) (9 units) Stage and Producuon Management B• (3rd year) (9 units) Stage and Production Management c• (4th year) (9 units) Scage and Producuon Management D• (4th year) (9 units) Project 1n Radio Production• (9 units) Pro1ect 1n Telev1s1on Producuon• (9 unlls) This topic must be taken 1n con1uncuon with another practical topic 1n him or TV Movement with Mime B• or Movement and Modem Dance B• (9 unus) Movement with Modern Dance C• (4th year) (9 un11s) (not offered in 1978) Movement wuh Modern Dance D• (4th year) (9 units) (not offered in 1978) Bertolt Brecht (9 unus) Wnt1ng for Ftim or Television• (3rd year) (9 units) This topic must be taken 1n COOjUnCUOO with 13458 Directing for Film or Telev1s1on• (3rd year) (9 units) This topic must be taken 1n COiljUOCtton wtth 13457 Practice of Radio• (3rd year) (9 units) Wnung for Theatre• Project 1n Theatre Dtrecuon• (4th year) (9 un11s) Project in Documentary Film Producuon• (4th year) (9 units) This topic must be taken 1n conjuncuon with another pracucal topic in ftlm or TV Pro1ect 10 F1ct1on Film Producuon• (4th year) (9 units) This topic must be taken in conJuncuon with another pracucal topic 1n him or TV Special Genre in Film (9 Untts) Nineteenth Century Drama (9 units) Tv .. enueth Century Drama (9 units) National Cinema Studies (4H units) Special half topic 1n Drama (4\f units) • Drama Centre topics Epistemology (9 units) Philosophy of Language (9 unlls) Advanced Logic (9 units) Formal Semantics and Truth Theory (9 units) Theory of Computabthty and Recursive Functions (9 units) Non standard Logics I (9 units) Metaphysics (9 unlls) Philosophy of Mind (9 units) Moral Philosophy (9 units) Aestheucs (9 units) Special Topic 1n Philosophy (1) (9 units) Marxism Leninism (9 units)

14416 14417 14418 14424 14425 14426 14427 14428 14429 14431 14432 14433 14434 14901

15401 15901 15404 15904 15416 15916 1'5417 15917 15420 15920 15421 15921 15422 15922 15423 15923 15424 15924 15425 15925 15426 15926 15427 15927 15428

15928

16401 16402 16403 16404 16405 16406 16407 16408 16409 16411 16412 16413 16414

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

Phtlosophy of History and Social Science (9 units) Non standard Logics II (9 units) Type theory and the Anunom1es (9 unus) History of Philosophy (9 units) Philosophy of Mathematics (9 units) Social Philosophy (9 units) Oriental Phtlosophy (9 units) Philosophy of Science (9 units) Pohucs and Art Womens Studies (9 units) Ph1losoph1cal Problems of Economic Theory (9 unus) Special Topic in Philosophy (2) (9 unns) Special Topic in Philosophy (3) (9 units) Special Half Topic 1n Philosophy (4!4 unlls)

Advanced Italian Language (9 unus) Advanced Italian Language (4!4 units) ltahan D1alectology (9 units) ltahan D1alectology (4!4 units) Special Topic 1n Itahan (9 units) Special Topic in ltahan (4% units) Special Author tn Italian (9 untts) Special Author 1n Italtan (4!f units) ltahan Philology I (9 unus) ltahan Philology I (4~ units) Italian Philology II (9 units) Itahan Philology II (4!f unus) Italian Philology III (9 units) ltahan Philology III (4~ units) ltahan Literature I (9 unns) ltahan Literature I (4\i units) ltahan Literature II (9 units) Italian L'J.terature II (4% units) Italian Ltterature III (9 unus) Italian Literature III (4\i unus) Italian Literature IV (9 unus) Itahan Ltterature JV (4\i units) Itahan Literature V (9 units) Italian Literature V (4Y.i units) Special Topic by dissertauon in Itahan Luerature Philology D1alectology or Language (9 units) Special Half Topic by dissertation in Italtan Literature Phxlology, D1alectology or Language (4\i untts)

European Graphic Art Theatre Design (9 units) Topics 1n Australian Architecture (9 untts) Literature of the Visual Arts (9 un11s) Special topic in Visual Arts (subject to d1scuss1on) (9 units) Special Topic in Architecture (subject to discussion) (9 unns) Problems of Sixteenth Century Art (9 untts) Special Artist (subject to discussion) (9 unlls) Special Genre in Visual Arts (subject to discussion) (9 units) Late Mediaeval Pa1nung in Northern Europe (9 unus) The Art Science Technology Relallonshtp (9 units) Theones of Twentieth Century Art (9 untts) Special Topic in Art History (9 untts)

173

SYLLABUSES-HUMANITIES

17401 17402 17403 17404 17405 17406 17407 17408 17409

18401 18402 18403 18404 18405

FJolno!e5

Musical Notations (9 unas) Mediaeval Plainsong for the Roman R1 y of the Church (9 untts) Congregational and Domestic Rehg1ous Music in the Reformation (9 untts) The Art of the Conttnuo Player (9 units) The Baroque Concerto (9 units) The Baroque Cantata (9 untts) The Oratonos of Bach and Handel (9 unns) Early Eighteenth Century Keyboard Music (9 unns) Special Topic in Music (9 units)

Communication Studies (9 units) Special Topic 1n Commun1cauon Studies (9 units) Children s Literature (9 units) Art Museum Studtes 4 (9 unus) Satue 1n Art (9 units)

/?./15 'lpa111sh Plulologyand MediaeualStudws 1sa combmalwn of 1210) H15/ury of the 'lpam1hl anl{uageand /2./11 \ledwe 'Ill 'lpam1h Lzleralure and History and may not be lal1en with either uf them

There 11 a quota or1 this topic and preference will be i;wen to s!uden/1lakuii:1t a5 part of lh1tory !JI Thne 1op1cs will be auariable only lo students e11rol/ed m the Drama Centre 15 part of the topic 16115 Afuseum Studies students will be required to work znte rnuelyon the U1111enity coilectwn

11 1d 1 1 c/01e con/act with the Art Galle y of South Auslralw

GENERAL NOTES 1 Any of the following topics may at the discretion of the Professor of Visual Arts take the form of a dtssertatzon 16405 Special Topic in Visual Arts 16406 Special Topic zn Architecture 16408 Special Artist 16409 Special Genre in Visual Arts

2 Subject to the approval of the Board of the School of Humanities a student may take other courses and/or topics offered by other Schools of the University or by the University of Adelaide prov ded that the head of the appropriate discipline or hzs nominee and/or the University of Adelaide agree

174

SCHOOL OF SOCIAL SCIENCES The req uuements for degrees and diplomas offered tn the School of Social Sciences are set out 1n Statute 10 I Persons requ1nng any add1nonal 1nformanon about degree requirements should contact the School of Social Sciences Adm1n1strauve Officer or Secretary of the School Board 10 the Academic Secuon of the Registry Syllabuses for topics taught 10 the School of Social Sciences are set out on the follow1ng pages Persons requ1nng add1uonal 1nformauon about any particular topic should contact the Topic Convenor whose name ls included at the top of the topic syllabus Persons requ1nng add1t1onal 1nformauon about the studies of a d1sc1phne 10 general should contact the Director of Studies of that d1sc1phne Topics are listed under each discipline in numencal order The first two d1gus of a topic number indicates the d1sc1phne in which ll ls offered the next number gives an ind1cauon of Its level and the last two digits d1fferenuate 1t from other topics 1n 1hatd1sc1phne at that level Thus topic 30204 is an Economics topic at second year level and the fourth such topic given a number The following codes arc used for the vanous d1sc1phnes w1th1n the School

30-31-32-33-34-35-

Economics Economic History Geography History American Studies Politics

36-37-38-39-50-

Psychology Asian Studies Sociology Mulud1sc1phnary topics Social Adm1n1st1auon

Students are e.xpected to procure the prescnbed ed1non of all set text books Those books indicated by an asterisk (•) are available in student ed1uons Unless otherwise stated pre requ1s1tes for all Social Sciences topics are required at C grade or better

Set books and Text books are rtquned read mg on wh1Ch students may be tested Smdems are expected to ha1 e Lhurown cop1e\ of -i.11 books hslcd as Set books orTex1 books mulupk c:opiesof lhrse books will not be ava1lable in Lhe Library Prehmmary read mg 1s rt 1dm;, which tht student ls expLcted to have complctld before t11e commencement ol teachmg and on which he may at any ume be tested Further read mg and Recommcndt-d read mg where not mherw1se splCiflcd md1ca1e read mg which the student 1s expected to do m the c:ourseof study mg Lhe Set books Rderence books ore books which the student wdl hnd u~dul m the course of studymg the topics for wluch 1hq are sp1:c1f1ed

201

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCJl;NCES

Topics in Economics

GENERAL INFORMATION

Topics Available

At first year level 30110 Economics I is taught throughout the yt:ar

The fo1Iow1ng second year topics are offered 30201 Macro economics 30202 Micro economics 30203 Economic Stausucs A 30204 Economic Stausucs B

The followmg thud year topics will be available 30301 Intemauonal Economics 30302 Economic Development 30303 The Economics of Labour 30304 Industnal Organisation 30305 Pubhc Finance 30307 Money and Finance

'

30308 Comparauve Economic Systems 30309 Econometncs 30311 Mathematical Economics 30312 Alternative Approaches 1n Economics

(unlikely to be of!ered rn 1978)

Honours Programme The Economics Honours programme consists of the following (a) All of the follow1ng topics

30401 Advanced Macro economics 30402 Advanced Micro economics 30406 Honours Economics Special Topics 30409 Reading Seminar

(b) One topic from among thud year topics which

6 units 6 unus 6 units 6 units

6 units 6 units 6 units 6 units 6 units 6 units 6 units 6 units 6 unus 6 units

4 unns 4 untts 4 units 4 units

have not already been completed 6 units (c) 30430 Thesis of not more than 15 000 words 14 units The thesis toptc should be defined early in January and work on the thesis should commence by the beginning of February

Units 12 Level Fust year Durauon Full year

First Year Topic 30110 ECONOMICS I Professor K ] Hancock

Class Contact 3 lectures 1 tutonal and 1 workshop per week Pre requisites None

This topic ts designed for students taking Economics as a basic d1sciphne in either the Arts or "Econom1cs deg'Tee or takmg Economic Htstory as a basic d1sc1plme in the Arts degree It is designed also to be suitable as a cognate topic forotherd1sctphnes and as an elecuve topic One secuon of the topic ts a study of the contemporary cap1taltst economy through an analysts of modem theones of pnce and income determ1nanon In a second secuon capuahsm is considered tn a broader historical context through an exam1nauon of contemporary percepuons of the economy since the late eighteenth century 1n the hght of economic history The classical poht1cal economists model of the economy 1s considered against the background of the Industrial Revolution and later shifts 1n emphasis in economic thought are placed in a context of economtc change Previous study of Economics is not assumed Students are not assumed to have aclueved

202

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

any parucular level of mathemaucal competence but are expected to master elementary mathemaucal concepts and techniques introduced and explained in the topic The attention of students contemplating a progression of Economics topics 1sdrawn to the fact that mathematical and quanutauve methods are developed further in the four second level topics 30201 30204

Text books Samuelson PA Hancock K and Wallace R Econom1cs,2ndAustrahaned (McGraw Hill 1975)" Reference books Dorfman R Prices and markets 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1972) Freedman R ed Marx on economics (McGraw Hill 1968)• Fnedman M Capitalism and freedom (Phoenix 1962)• Hancock K Hughes B and Wallace R Applied economics readings for Australian students (McGraw Hill 1971)• Lipsey R G An introduction to positive economics 3rd ed (We1denfeld & Nicolson 1971) Malthus T R Essay on the principles of population 2 vols (Everyman 1967) Malthus T R Population the first essay (M1ch1gan Univ Pr 1959) Marshall A The principles of economics (Macmillan 1966)• Mathias P The first industrial nation (Methuen 1969) Mundell R A Man and economics (McGraw Hill 1968)• Ricardo D The principles of political economy and taxation (Everyman 1965) Robinson R Hughes B and Hayles J W Study guide to accompany Samuelson Hanc;ock and Wallace Economics, 2nd Austrahan ed (McGraw Hill 1975)• Schumpeter J A Capitalism socialism and democracy 4th ed (Harper 1966)• Smtth A The wealth of nations 2 vols (Methuen 1961)• Stewart M Keynes and after 2nd ed (Pehcan 1972)• Suas D B Principles of economics (Harper & Row 1970) Tawney R H The acquisitive society (Fontana 1961)• Tisdell C A Economics of markets (Wiley 1974) Wngley E A Population and history (World Univ Library 1969)

Units 6 Level Second year Duration Full year

Second Year Topics

30201 MACRO-ECONOMICS Mr 0 E Covick

Class Contact 1 lecture per week and l tutonal per fortnight In add1uon students must take 9 lectures 1n elementary calculus in Term 1 Pre requisites 30110 Economics I with a grade of C or better

The purpose of the topic ts to provide an introduction to the theory of the determ1nat1on of the level of employment and producuon and the level and rate of change of pnces The basic Keynesian model 1s developed and cnucally examined with reference to both Keynj5 own wnung and modern Post keynes1an work

Prehmznary reading Samuelson P A Hancock K J and Wallace R H Economics 2nd Austrahan ed (McGraw Hill 1975)•

Text books Demburg T F and McDougall D M Macroeconomics 5th ed (McGraw Hill 1976)• Keynes J M The general theory of employment interest and money (Papermac 1974)• Shapuo E Macroeconomic analysis 3rd ed (Harcourt Brace and World 1974)

Reference books Archibald G C and Lipsey R G A mathematical treatment of economics 2nd ed. (We1denfeld & Nicolson 1973)•

203

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Harcourt G C Karmel P H and Wallace R H Economicacl1v1ty (Cambndge Univ Pr 1967)• Hust R R and Wallace R H eds The Australian capital market 2nd ed (Cheshue 1974)0

Johnson M Household behaviour (Penguin 19il)• Junankar P N Investment theories and evidence (Macmillan 1972) Laidler D E The demand for money (lnternauonal 1969)• Le11onhufvud A On Keynesian economics and the economics of Keynes(O UP 1968) Lindauer J Macroeconomics 2nd ed (Wiley 1971) Mueller M G Readings 1n macroeconomics 2nd ed (Holt 1971)• Rowan D C Output inflation and growth 2nd Australian ed (Macmillan 1975)

Unus 6 Level Second year Duration Full year

30202 MICROECONOMICS Mr A E Woodfield

Class Contact l lecture per week and l tutonal every foruught In addition all students not talong 30201 Macroeconomics are required to take 9 lectures 1n elementary calculus in Term I Pre requisites 30110 Economics I with a grade of C or better

This topic builds on the elementary m1croeconom1cs studies in Economics I Subjects covered include demand theory producuon theory the effects of uncertainty and forms of market behaviour other than perfect compet1t1on These subjects are integrated in a general equ1hbnum system which 1s used to discuss welfare aspects of a market economy Wherever possible the theory \Vlll be illustrated by analysing some current microeconomic issues

Preliminary reading Samuelson P A Hancock K J and Wallace R H Economics 2nd Australian ed (McGraw Hill 1975)• Text books N1cholson W Microeconomtc theory basic principles and extensions (Dryden 1972) or Hushle1fer J Price theory and appl1cat1ons (Prentice Hall 1976) Reference books Amencan Economic Assoc1auon Readings 1n price theory (Allen &= Unwin 1953) Archibald G C and Lipsey R G A mathematical treatment of economics, 2nd ed (Weidenfeld &=Nicolson 1973)• Becker G S Economic theory (Knopf 1971) Bilas R A Microeconomic theory 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1971)• Braff A J Microeconomic analysts (Wiley 1969)• Breit \V and Hochman H M Readings in m1croeconomics(Holt Rinehart&= Winston 1971)0

Cole C L M1croeconom1cs (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1973)• Friedman M Price theory 2nd ed (Ald1ne 1972)• Laidler D M1croeconom1cs (Harper&= Row 1977) Mansfield E M1croeconom1cs 2nd ed (Norton 1975)• Mansfield E eel Microeconomics selected readings (Norton 1971)• Haeussler E F and Paul R S Introductory mathematical analysis for students of business and economics (Reston 1973) Sugler G J The theory of price 3rd ed (Cother Macm1llan 1966) Tisdell C A M1croeconom1cs the theory of economic allocation (Wiley 1972)

204

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Unus 6

30203 ECONOMIC STATISTICS A Dr NI Polasek

Level Second year Duration Firsl half year Class Contacl 2 lectures and 1 lutonal per \Veck Pre requisites 30110 Econo1n1cs I wllh a grade of C or better

The purpose of this topic 1s to provide an 1ntroductton to the use of quanntatlve data 1n economics The aspects covered include the sources of quantitative clan. and their rehab1hty measures of central tendency and d1spers1on elementary prob"l.b1hty and d1stnbuuons the 1nterpretauon of sample data sample survey techniques umesenes and the construcuon and use of index numbers

Preliminary reading Huff D How to take a chance (Pehcan 1967)

Text book Karmel P H and Polasek M Applied stat1st1cs for eco11om1sls 3rd ed (Pltman 1970)

Reference books Chao L L Statistics methods and analyses (McGra'v Hill 1969) Mernll W C and Fox K A Introduction to economic staltstics (Wiley 1970) Wonnacott T H and Wonnacott R J Introductory statistics 2nd ed (Wiley 1972)

Unus 6

30204 ECONOMIC STATISTICS B Dr J A1cDonald

Level Second year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutorial per \veek Pre requ1s1tes 30110 Econo1n1cs I \Vttl;i a grade of C or better 30203 Economic Stat1sttcs A must hr taken pnor to this topic

The purpose of this topic is to provide an elementary 1ntroduct1on to cconometncs The aspects covered include the elements of matnx algebra ind regression analysts 'lnd an introducuon to econometnc problems

Reference books Aigner D J Baste econometrics (Prenuce Hall 1_971) Common M S Basic eco11ometncs (Longman 1976) Kmenta J Elements of econometrics (M'lcmlllan 1971) Theil H Principles of econometrics (North Holland 1971) Wonnacott R J and Wonnacott T H Econometrics (Wiley 1970) Wonnacott T H and Wonnacott R J Introductory statistics for business and economics (Wiley 1972)

Third Year Topics

30301 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Dr /H Polasek

Unas 6 Level Third year Duration First half year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tulonal per week Pre requ1sues 30201 Macroeconomics an<l 30202 M1croeconom1cs wah a grade of C or helter 111 each

Tlus Lopic introduces students to b"l.stc concepts and 'lnalyucal tools used 1n the study of mterna11onal economic rclauons Subjects to be discussed include the b 1lance of

205

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

payments foreign exchanges the interaction of different economies through trade and investment commercial poltcy the funcuoning of the post war world monetary system and the role of tntemauonal insutuuons such as the lntemauonal Monetary Fund and the World Bank Preliminary reading Pen J A primer on 1ntemat1onal trade (Random House 1967)•

Text books Grubel H G The 1ntemat1onal monetary .system (Penguin Modern Economics 1969)• Young D International economics (lntertex.t 1970)

Reference books Caves R E and Jones R W World trade and payments 2nd ed. (Little Brown 1977) Cohen B J Balance of payments policy (Penguin Modern Economics 1969)• Cooper R N ed. International finance (Penguin Modern Economics 1969)• Ellsworth PT and Leith JC Theinternallonaleconomy 5thed (Maon1llan 1975) Findlay R Trade and special1zat1on (Penguin 1970) Grubel H G Internahonal economics (Irwin 1977) Heller H R International trade theory and empirical evidence 2nd ed. (Prenuce Hall 1973) Heller H R International monetary economics (Prenuce Hall 1974) K1ndleberger C P International economics 4th ed. (Irwin 1968)• Leighton R I Economics of 1ntemat1onal trade (McGraw Hill 1970) Meade J E Theory of international economic policy vol I The balance of payments (0 up 1960) Sodersten B International economics (Macmillan 1970)• Tew J H B International monetary co operation 1945 70 10th rev ed. (Hutchinson 1970)0

Yeager L B The international monetary mechanism (Holt Rinehart 8c Winston 1968)•

Unus 6

30302 ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mr GK C Tan

Level Thud year Durauon Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutorial per week Pre requisue .30201 Macro economics wnh a grade of C or better The emphasis of tlus topic is on the apphcat1on of economic theory to the problem of economic growth of the low income countries Students will be introduced to the ma1or development models but will consider broader issues of under development 1nclud1ng the influence of social demographic and poht1cal impediments to development. The topic will mclude some case studies in economic development

Preliminary reading Elkan W Introduction to development economics (Penguin 197.3)• Donaldson P Worlds apart the economic gulf between nations (Penguin 197.3)•

Reference books Barroch P The development of the Third World since 1900 (Methuen 1975) Bernstein H ed. Underdevelopment and development the Third World Today (Pengum 1973) Ca1mcross A and Puri M Employment incomedtslnbutzonanddevelopmentstrategy (Macmillan 1976) Hagen E The economics of development (Irwin 1975) Helleiner G K A world divided the LDCs in the international economy (Cambridge Univ Pr 1976) Jolly R et al, Third World employment (Penguin 1973) K1ndleberger C and Herrick B Economic development (McGraw Hill 1977) Singer H W and Ansan J Rich and poor countries (Allen & Unw1n 1977)

206

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Units 6 Level Thud year Durauon Full year

30303 THE ECONOMICS OF LABOUR Professor K ] Hancock

Class Contact l lecture per week and l tutorial per fortnight Pre requisites 30201 Macro economics and 30202 Micro economics (with a grade of Dor better in each)

This topic is essenually a study of the interaction of economic and insutuuonal factors in the labour market The matters studied will include processes of wage determinauon factors influencing the relative wage structure 1ndustnal relauons systems unemployment and the labour force basic theones o{ inflauon and wages and incomes policies

Text books Rees A The economics of work and pay (Harper & Row 1973)

Reference books Ball R J and Doyle P Inflation (Penguin 1969)• Burton J Wage tnflalzon (Macmillan 1972)• Clegg H The system of industrial relations 1n Great Britain 2nd ed (Blackwell 1972) Dunlop J T Wage determ1natzon under trade unions (Kelley 1966) Fleisher B M Labor economics theory and evidence (Prenuce Hall 1970) Ford G W ed Redundancy (Wiley 1973)• Hicks J R The theory of wages 2nd ed (Macmillan 1963)• Hom R V Australian labour market economics (Cheshire 1975) Intemat1onal Labour 0££1ce ]ob evaluation (IL 0 Studies and Reports NS 56)• Isaac J E and Ford G W Australian labour relations readings 2nd ed (Sun Books 1971)• Jacques E Equitable payment (Pelican 1967)• Jones A The new inflation (Penguin 1973)• McCormick B J and Smtth E 0 The labour market (Penguin 1968)• Mincer J Schooling experience and earnings (Nauonal Bureau of Economic Research 1974) MacKay D and others Labour markets under different employment cond1t1ons(Allen & Unwin 1971) Niland J R and Isaac J L Australian labor econom1c.'I readings 2nd ed (Sun Books 1975)• 0 Dea R lndustrzal relations in Australia 2nd ed (West 1970) Portus J H Australian compulsory arb1trat1on 1900 1970 (Hicks Smllh 1971) Wootton B The social foundations of wage policy 2nd ed (Allen & Unw1n 1962)•

Units 6

30304 INDUSTRIAL ORGANISATION Mr J W Hayles

Level Thud year Durauon Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisite 30202 Micro economics with a grade of D or better

In tlus topic attention 1s focussed on how the performance of markets is affected by the structure of industry the behaviour of 1ndustnal leaders and the policies of governments mainly against a background o( hrms that are seeking to grow Aspects to be studied include concentration s12e of firms growth of fums compeuuon policy internal and external entry managerial enterpnse mergers and take overs mulunauonal corporations trade practices legislation tan(fs and prices 1ustihcahon

Preliminary reading Shaw R W and Sutton G J Industry and competition (Maan11lan 1976)• Wildsmith J R Managerial theories of the firm (Marun Robertson 1973)•

207

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Text books N1euwenhuysen J P and Norman N R Australian competition and prices policy (Croom Helm 1976)

Reference books Archibald G C ed The theory of the /:rm (Penguin 1971)• Davidson F G and Stewardson B R Economics and Australian industry (Longman 1974)• George K D Industrial organization 2nd ed (Allen & Utnvtn 1974)• Hunter A ed The economics of Australian industry (Melbourne Univ Pr 1963) Karmel P H and Brunt J\.rl The structure of the Australzan economy (Cheshire 1966) Lamberton D M ed Industrial economics (Pelican 1971)• N1euwenhuysen J P ed Australian trade practices readings (Cambridge Univ Pr 1976) Scherer F M Industrial market structure and economic pc1forn1ance (Rand McNally 1970) Sheridan K The firm in Australia (Nelson 1974)

Unus 6 Level Third year Duration Full year

30305 PUBLIC FINANCE Mr R H Wallace

Class Contact 1 lecture per week and I tutorial per fortnight Pre requisites 30201 Macro economics and 30202 l\lhcro economics wuh a grade C or better 1n each This topic 1s concen1ed \'I/1th the theory and pracuceof public f 1nance\v1th emphas1son 1ts apphcat1on 10 the Australian economy The publ1csectorlv111 be discussed 1111Ls role as an allocating d1stnbuung and regulating body The maJor sections "111 therefore co\ er taxauon pubhc goods cost benefit analysis federal state fiscal rel1uons and the theory and operation of economic pohcy \Vllh spec11l reference to fiscal pohcy

Preltn11nary reading Eckstein 0 Public fniance 3rd ed (Prennce 1-Iall 1973) Friedman M Capitallsni and freedorn (Chicago Univ Pr 1962)

Text books Musgrave R and P B Public ftnat1ce 111 theory and practice (l\tfcGra\\ Hill 1973) Nevile J Fiscal polzcy in Australia (Cheshire 1970)

Reference books Burkhead J and Miner J Public et:f)endtlure (Macmillan 1971) Drxon J ed The publzc sector (Penguin 1972) Mathe"s R L and Jay \\I R C Federal finance (Nelson 1973) Treasury Taxanon Papers 1 14 (AGPS Septe1nber 1974 July 1975) Taxation Review Committee Full Report (AGPS January 1975)

Unns 6 Level Tlurd year Dur'l.t1011 First half year

30307 MONEY AND FINANCE Mr G McL Scoll

Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutorial per week Pre requ1snes 30201 l\llacro economics .u1d 30202 l\lhcro economics \V1lh a grade of C or better 1n each

This topic Is concerned wllh more ad' anced issues 1n monetaf) th COT) and policy and finance The simple analysis 1ntroduc..ed 111 Topic 30201 w·11I be extended to consider 1n more detail the special nature of a mont-y using econom) and the role of finance In such an economy Parttcula1 attenuon \Vtll be p·ud to the ftnanc1al pohc1es of firms financial

208

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

1nsututions and households and the impact of the monetary authorities on these pol1c1es Subsequent topics w11l 1nclude current controversies 1n this field Australian bnanaal instnuuons will be used to illustrate relevant sccuons of the course Preliminary reading Ritter L S and Silber W L Money (Basic Books 1970)• Tew J H B Monetary theory (Sage 1969)•

Reference books Boorman J T and Havnlesky T M Money supply money demand and macro economic models (Allyn & Bacon 1972)•

Carson D eel Money and finance (W lley 1972)• Chick V The theory of monetary policy (Gray Mills 1973)• Clower R eel Monetary theory (Penguin 1969)• Cramp A B Monetary management (Allen & Unw1n 1971)• Croome D R and Johnson H G eds Money in Brztain 1959 1969 (OU P 1970)• Fisher D Money and banking (Inv1n 1971) Hicks J R Cnt1cal essays in monetary theory (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1967)• Hirst R R and Wallace R H The Australian capital market 2nd ed (Cheshire 1974)• Johnson H G Readings 1n Bntzsh monetary economics (0 UP 1972)• Keynes J M The general theory of employment interest and money (Macmillan 1936)• Laidler D E The demand for money (Intenext 1969)• Lel]onhufvud A On Keynesian economics and the economics of Keynes (0 UP 1968) Moore B J An 1ntroduct1on to the theory of finance (rree Pr 1968)• Newlyn W T Theory of money 2nd ed (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1970) Paunk1n D Money interest and prices 2nd ed (Harper & Row, 1965) Ruter L S The flow of funds accounts (NY University Graduate School of Business Adm1n1slrauon 1968)• Rose P J Australian securities markets (Cheshlte 1969) Rousseas S Monetary theory (Knopf 1972) Smuh P r The economics of financzal 1nstitut1ons and markets (Inv1n 1971) Smuh W L and Teigen R L eds Readings in money national income and stab1lizat1on polzcy 3rd ed (lnv1n 1974)• Solomon E The theory of fznanczal management (Columbia Univ Pr 1974) Visser H The quantity of money (Robertson 1974)• Wnghtsman 0 An introduction to monetary theory and policy 2nd ed (Free Pr 1976)•

Units 6

30308 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS Mr R H Wallace

Level Thltd year Duration Full year Class Contact I leclure per week and I lutonal per fortnight Pre requ1sue 30202 Micro economics with a grade of C or beuer or 30110 Economics I with a grade of B or better

The topic begins \Vlth a study of the nature of economic systems and the reasons for the class1ftcat1on of systems The ma1or types of non capuahsl economic systems are then considered according to lhetr htstoncal sequtnce Sov1tt Russia the Fascist countries the £.astern European Soc1ahst countnes and Chinese Communism Some attention 1s given to market onented non socialist industnal countnes such as the Untled Kingdom and France Each class member 1s requtrcd to submit a substanual case study and these are used for class d1scuss1ons The topic involves reading from an extensive reading hst No parncular text book ts used but considerable use 1s m'lde of the first seven books listed below

Preliminary reading Grossman G Economic systems 2nd ed (Prentice 1-Iall 1974)

Reference books Bornstein M ed Comparative economzc systems n1odels and cases 3rded (ln\1n 1970)

209

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Brus W Sodalist ownership and pol1t1cal systems (Roulledge & Kegan Paul 1975) Carson R L Comparative economic systenis (Macmillan 1973) Eckstein A Comparisons of economic systems theoretical and methodological approaches (Cahfornia Univ Pr 1971) Lavigne M The soc1al1sl economies of the Soviet Union and Europe (Robertson 1974) Nove A and Nut1 D M eds Socialist economics selected readings (Penguin 1972) Prybyla J S ed Comparative economic systems (Appleton Cenrury Crofts 1969) Bergson A The economics of Soviet planning (Yale Univ Pr 1964) Campbell R W Soviet economic power (Macmillan 1967) Donn1thome A Chinas economic system (Allen & Unw1n 1967) Goldman M The Soviet economy (Prentice Hall 1968) He1Ibroner R L Between capitalism and socialism (Random House 1970) Klein P The management of market oriented economies (Wadsworth 1973) Lange 0 and Taylor F M On the economic theory of socialism (McGraw Hill 1964) Lutz V Central planning for the market economy an analysis of the French theory and practice (Longman 1969) Wheelwnght E and McFarlane B The Clunese road to socialism (Monthly Review 1970) W1lczynsk1 J The economics of soczalzsm {Allen & Unw1n 1970) Zan1nov1ch M The development of socialist Yugoslavia (johns Hopkins 1968)

Units 6 Level Third year Duration Full year

30309 ECONOMETRICS Dr ] McDonald

Class Contact I lecture and I tutorial per \veek Pre requisite 30204 Economic Stausucs B wah a grade of C or better except with the perm1ss1on of the Head of the Dtsctphne of Economics

This topic 1s concerned with quanUtaL1ve Lcchn1ques for the emp1nca1 analysis of economic phenomena and is designed as a programme 1n research methods

Preliminary reading Freund J E Mathematical statistics 2nd ed (Prenuce Hall 1971) Mernll W C and Fox K A lntroduclJon to economic statzst1cs (Wiley 1970)

Text book Theil H Principles of econometrics (North Holland 1971)

Reference books Aigner D J Basic econometrics (Prentice Hall 1971) Bo"< G andjenk1ns G Tzmesenesanalysts jorecastingandcontrol(Holden Day 1970) Bndge J L Applied econometrics (North Holland 1971) Chnst C F Econometric models and methods (Wi1ey 1966) Dhrymes P Econometrics statistical foundations and appl1cat1ons (Harper & Row 1970) Goldberger A S Econometric theory {Wiley 1964) Johnston J Econometric methods 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1971) Kmenta J Elements of econometrzcs (Macmillan 1971) Mahnvaud E Statistical methods of econometrics 2nd ed (North Hol1and 1970) Wonnacott R J and \Vonnacou T H Econometncs (Wiley 1970)

Units 6 Level Thud year Duration Full year

30311 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS Mr 0 E Covick

Class Contact l lecture and l Lu tonal per week

210

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Pre requisues 30201 Macro economics and 30202 Micro economics wuh a grade of C or better except wnh the permission of the Head of the D1sciphne of Economics

This topic ts concerned wtth the apphcauons of certain mathematical techniques 1n Economic Theory The techniques are taughts1de by sidewtth the applications so that the only mathematical pre requisite is a knowledge of elementary calculus

Text books Chiang CI Fundamentalmethodsofmathematicaleconomics 2nded (McGraw Hill 1974) Henderson J M and Quandt R E Microeconomic theory a mathematical treatment 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1971)

Reference books ArrO\V K J and Hahn F H General competitive analysis (Oliver 8c Boyd 1971) Green H A J Consumer theory rev ed (Macmillan 1976) Haeussler E F and Paul R S Introductory mathematical analysis (Reston 1973) Hicks J R Value and capital 2nd ed (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1962) Hockey S W Introduction to calculus (Pergamon 1969) Intt1hgator M D Mathematical opt1m1znhon and economic theory (Prenuce Hall 1971) Junankar P N Investment theories and evidence (Macmillan 1972) Klein E Mathematical methods in theoretical economics (Academic 1973) Lancaster K Mathematical economics (Maanillan 1968) Quuk J and Saposnik R Introduction to general equilibrium theory and welfare economics (McGraw Hill 1968) Samuel<;on P A Foundations of economic analysis (1-Iarvard Univ Pr 1963) Shone R Micro economics a modern treatment (Macmillan 1975) Takayama A Mathematical economics (Dryden Pr 1974) Yamane T Mathematics for economist 2nd ed (Prenuce Hall 1968)

30312 ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES IN ECONOMICS MARXIAN, RADICAL NEW LEFT AND OTHER

Professor R ] Blandy and Professor K ] Hancock (This course 1s unhkely to be offered in 1978)

Unns 6 Level Thud year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tu tonal per week Pre requisite 30201 Macro economics and 30202 Micro economics with grades of C or better in each Co requisite Enrolment to complete a ma1or sequence 1n Ecomon1cs

This topic ts devoted to an examrnauonof alternative approaches to the study of economic affatrs Approximately one thud of the topic will be spent d1scuss1ng the Marxian model of capitahsm The remaining ume \Vtll be spent discussing some modern neo Marxian and other models developed by radical economists and other approaches selected from schools of thought such as the Scholastic Mercant1ltst Classical Instlluuonaltst Utopian Pareuan and Mathematical Econometric schools

Reference books Baran P A and s,veezy P M Monopoly capital (Penguin 1966)• Baran P A The pol1l1cal economy of growth (Monthly Review 1969) Blaug M Economic theory in retrospect 2nd ed (Heinemann 1968) Boulding K E Economics as a science (McGraw Hill 1970) Desai M Marxian economic theory (Gray Mills 1974)• Edwards R C Retch M and Weisskopf T E The capitalist system (Prenuce Hall 1972)' He1lbroner R L and Ford A M Is economics relevant' (Goody<:.. 1971 )• Hunt E K and Schwartz Jesse G eds A critique of economic theory (Penguin Modern Economic Readings 1972)• Jordan Z A Karl Marx (Nelson 1971)•

21!

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Mandel E An introduction lo i\Jarx1st economic theory 2nd ed (PaLhflndcr 1973) Mermelstein 0 Economics mainstream readings and radical cnt1ques 2nd ed (Random House 1973)• Popper Karl R The open society and Ifs enemies vol II 15th ed (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1966)• Suh~ell F ] B Normative economics (Pergamon 1975)• Wheelwnght r. L and Slllwell F ] B Readings in political economy vols I and II (ANZ 1976)

212

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Topics in Economic History

GENERAL INFORMATION

Topics Available

Second and lh1rd year top1cs

31202 The Ong1ns of Economic Developmenl the Bnush Case -Firsl half year

31201 The Development Enigma Japan and South America -Second half year

31302 31301

Amencan Economic Development - Fust half year Australian Economic Development - Second half year

Honours topics 31401 Economic Gro\\ th 10 Western f.urope - Second half year 31402 Micro economic l-I1stoq -Second half year 31404 Labour Theory and History - Second half year

6 unas

6 units

6 units 6 unlls

Economic History can be done as a major sequence by taking 30110 Economics I tn first year and selecttng from the topics listed above 1n later years If students intend lo do tlus there is much to be said for 1nclud1ng a History I topic 1n their first year topics There 1s also considerable scope for comb1n1ng some Economic History \VIth other interests 31202 The Ongtns of Economic Development the Bnt1sh Case can be taken as part of a major sequence 111 History dnd this and all other Econo1n1c History topics can be chosen as opttons 111 con1unct1on "1tl1 any major sequence 10 the School of Social Sciences One hm1tat1on IS tl1at with the excepuon of 31202 The Ongtns of Economic Developn1ent the Bnush Case ll ts preferable for students taking Econonnc History topics to have done Economics I Students" 1sh1ng to take an Economic History topic other than 31202 The Ong1ns of Economic Development the Bnllsh Case and who have not taken I:conomtcs I should consult tl1t head of the d1sc1phne of Economic History f.conom1c 1-Iistory ts particularly suited for 1nclus1on in courses for the degree of Bachelor of Economics All Economic History topics have 10 common the theme of the histoncal treat1nent or economic development The topics are defined on a regional basis tl1e choice or region being bdsed on aspects of economic development peculiar to each J<ourth year work tO\\'lrds an honours degree both B A and B Ee maybe done 111 Economic History One or two of tilt fourth year topics set out below and an honour~ thesis may be done wnh1n the d1sc1phne of Economic History 111 comb1nauon \Vllh work 10 another d1sc1phne

Unas 6

Second Year and Third Year Topics

31202 THE ORIGINS OF ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT THE BRITISH CASE

Dr ll' Vantplew

Level Second year Duration Fust half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tu tonal per week Pre requisites None

Altl1ough 1ndustnal1sauon 1s often seen 'lS a possible solution to the problems of the Third World tn the case of tlte Bnush Industrial Rtvolullon the first exdmple of successful 1ndusrr1ahsauon op1n1on 1s divided as to \Vhethcr the beneflls out,ve1ghed the costs Tlus 1ssue\v1ll be examined ln the context of economic development 111 a free market economy Major topics considered include the qu'lhty and quanuty of p1oductive factors the operauon of the rnarkets for goods labour 'lnd capital tl1e relauonsl11ps betwt.en economic sectors and the economic eff1c1ency and welfare consequences of

213

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

1ndustr1ahsat1on upon pnvate enterprise Emphasis will be pldced upon possible lessons which developing and underdeveloped countries might learn from the Bnt1sh expcnence Students presenting topic number 33217 Bnush Industnal Revoiuuon for their degree may not enrol 10 tlus topic

Text books Deane P The first industrial revolution (Cambndge Untv Pr 1965) Mathias P The first industrial nation (Methuen 1969)•

Reference books Ashton T S The industrial revolution 2nd ed (0 UP 1970)• Crouzet F ed Capital formation in the industrial revolution (Methuen 1972)• Deane P and Cole WA BnttsheconomJcgrowth16881959 2ndcd (CambndgeUniv Pr 1969)0

Fhnn M W The origins of the industrial revolution (Longman 1966)• Hartwell R M The causes of the industrzal revolution in England (Methuen 1968)• Hartwell R M The industrial revolution and economic growth (Methuen 1971)• Hobsbawm E J Industry and empire (Wetdenfeld & Nicolson 1968)• Holderness B A Pre industrial England (Dent 1976) Jones E L Agriculture and economic growth in England 16501815 (Methuen 1967)• Taylor A J The standard of living in Bntain in the industrial revolution (Methuen 1975)0

31204 THE DEVELOPMENT ENIGMA JAPAN AND SOUTH AMERICA Professor W A Sinclair

Units 6 Level Second and thud year Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisites 30110 I:conomtcs I with a grade of C or better except with the special perm1ss1on of the head of the d1sc1pltne of Economic History

The tntentton of thts topic ts to take a h1stoncal approach to the p1oblem o( economic development by comparing post 1800 Japan and South America Japan s experience appears to have been a case of exceptionally smooth transu1on to an 1ndustr1ahzed society and so suggests a contrast with the d1ff1culues encountered in South America in grafting a manufactunng base on to a process of economic grovvth anstng from the exploitauon of natural resources The section on Japan \vill concentrate attention on the period from about 1800 to 1914 It will consider the ong1ns of 1ndustnal1zauon 10 the years before the Metjt Restorauon of 1868 and the process of industr1altzauon after 1868 In the case of South Amenca the nature of economic development after poltucal independence in the nineteenth century will be examined followed by a consideratton of the barriers to subsequent 1ndustr1alizat1on

Text book Allen G C Ashorteconomichistoryofmodem]apan 3rdrev ed (Allen&Unw1n 1972)

Reference books Diaz Alejandro C F Essays on the economic history of the Argentine Republic (Yale Untv Pr 1970) Ferrer A The Argentine economy (Univ of California Pr 1967) Furtado C The economic growth of Brazil (Univ of Cahforn1a Pr 1963) Furtado C Economic development of Latin America 2nd ed (Cambndge Univ Pr 1976)' Kuznets S ed Economic growth Brazil India japan (Duke Univ Pr 1955) Lewis W A Tropical development 1880 1913 (Allen & Unw1n 1970) Nakamura J Agncultural production and the economic development of japan (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1966) Klein L J and Ohkawa K eds Eco1iom1c growth the Japanese experience since the Me111 era (lnvtn 1968) Stein S J and B The colonial heritage of Latin America (0 UP 1970)•

214

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Unns 6

31301 AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Dr G D Snooks

Level Third year Duranon Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes Economics I with a grade of C or better except with the permission of the d1sc1phne of Economic History

This topic 1s concerned with the economic development of Australia dunng the penod 1850 to 1970 In lectures consideratton will be given to the causes and consequences of growth and fluctuauons in economic act1v1ty at both the macro and micro levels Parucular emphasis will be placed upon the regional diversity of this acuvlly Tutorials will be used to examine a number of current issues 1n h1stoncal perspective Students will be able to nominate the issues to be examined which include topics such as poverty urban1zauon 1mm1grat1on foreign capital and tanffs

Text books Buthn NG InvestmentinAustralraneconomicdevelopment 18611900(A NU 1972)• S1ncla1r W A The process of economic development in Australia (Cheslure 1976)• Reference books Boehm E A Prosperity and depression in Australia 1887 1897 (0 UP 1971)• Buthn N G Australian domestic product investment and foreign borrowing 1861 193811939 (Cambridge Univ Pr 1962) Coghlan T A Labour and industry in Australia 4 vols (Macmil1an 1969)• Fitzpatrick B The Brzl1sh empire zn Australia 1834 1939 (Macm1l1an 1969)• Forster C ed Australian economic development in the twentieth century (Australian Pubhsh1ng Co 1970)• Schedv1n C B Australia and the great depression (Sydney Univ Pr 1970) Shann E 0 G An economic history of Australia (Georgian House 1963)• S1nclan W A Economic recovery 1n Victoria 1894 1899 (AN U 1956)• Snooks G D Depression and recovery in Western Australia 1928/291938139(Un1v of WA Pr 1974)' \Vaterman A M C Economic fluctuations 1n Australia 1948 to 1964 (AN U 1973)

Units 6

31302 AMERICAN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT Mr R Shlomowtlz.

Level Thud year Durauon F1rst h·llf year Class Con tact 3 hours per week Pre requ1sue 30110 Economics I wnh a grade of Car better except \Vllh the perm1ss1on of the head of the dtsctphne of Economic History

This topic will overview the enure span of Amencan economic history starling ,.,.1th the economies of pre Columbian Indians and ending with a d1scuss1on of modern economic developments after World War II Text book Gunderson G A new economic history of America (McGraw Hill 1976)

Reference books Davis L E and others American economic growth an economists history of the United States (Harper &: Row 1972) Fogel R W and Engerman S L The reinlerpretat1on of American economic Justory (Harper&: Row 1971)

215

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Honours Topics

31401 ECONOMIC GROWTH IN WESTERN EUROPE Professor W A Sinclair

Level Honours Duration Second half year Class Contact I two hour seminar per week Pre requ1snes Honours standing

This topic is concerned with certain aspects o( the p1ocess of long term economic ch lnge 1n \Vestem Europe The main areas to which altenllon \VIII be drawn are as follows the emer~ence of the market system in Europe the apphcab1lny of the concept of proto 1ndustnahzauon the analysts of differences 1n the course of economic ~ro\vth 1n France Germany and Bntain benveen 1.bout 1800 and 1914 and since 1945

Reference books Aldcroft D H and Richardson H W The British economy 1870 1929 (Macmillan 1969) Clapham J H The economic development of France and Germa1iy 1815 1914 4th ed (Ca1nbndge Univ Pr 1969) Denison E F Why growth rates dz/fer (Brookings Institute 1967) K1ndleberger C P Economzc growth 1n France and Britain 1851 1950 (Harvard Univ Pr 1961) Landes D The unbound Prometheus (Cambndge Univ Pr 1969) Maddison A Economic growth in the west (Twentieth Century Fund 1964) Milward A and Saul SB TheeconomzcdevelopmenlofconlinentalEurope 17801870 (Allen & Unw1n 1973) North D C and Thomas R P The rzse of the western world (Cambndge Univ Pr 1974)

Level Honours

31402 MICRO-ECONOMIC HISTORY Dr G D Snooks

Durdt1on Second half year Class Contact I two hour seminar per week Pre requisites Honours standing

Tlus topic is concerned with lnstoncal ~tud1es at the industry and firm levels Cons1derat1on will be given to the history of tlus approach (1 e the de\clopment of a literature 1n business history entreprencunal lustory and applied micro economics) the vanous methods and models which have been employed and the contnbut1on 'vh1ch has been made 1n this held to our wider knowledge of econo1n1c history and to our theoreucal understanding of the firm To achieve this a detailed cnucal examrnauon \VIII be m1.de of industry and firm studies from the U S A U K and Austraha A detailed reading hst will be supplied at the commencement of tlus topic

31404 LABOUR THEORY AND HISTORY Jl,fr R Shlontowitz.

Level 1-Ionours Durauon Second term Class Contact I nvo hour seminar per week Pre requ1sues I.Jonours standing

216

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

This topic \•11l11nvolvc the apphcal1on of econom1canalys1s loa set of issues inAustrahan labour lustory Cons1derauon will be paid to such qucsllons as the economics of convict labour in the early settlement the economics of indentured Mel.i.ncs1an labour 1n Queensland the effect of the Wakefield 1nsp1rcdgovemment land poltc1es on the pos1uon of labour the economics of various 1ncenuvc schemes in team l'.ork acU\.1tles such as seahng 'vhahng and sugar cane cu tung and the labour part1c1pauon rate of \vomen in Austrahan c1ues

217

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCF.S

Topics in Geography

GENERAL INFORMATION

Topics available

The first year toptc 32110 Geography I Man and Envuonment ts taught throughout the year The follow1ng second or thud year topics will be avatlable First half year 32206 Geography of B1ouc Resources 32207 Geography of Economic Act1vtty 32211 Historical Geography of the United States Second half year 32204 Physical Geography Geomorphology 32212 Southeast Asta

First and second terms 32208 Techniques in Geography

Full Year 32205 The Geography of Austraha 32209 Food and Agricultural Development

Full Year 32205 The Geography of Australia 32208 Techniques in Geography 32209 Food and Agricultural Development The following third year topics will be ava1lable

32302 Urban Geography - First half year 32303 Envnonmental Percepuon and Behaviour - Second half year 32304 Geography and Pubhc Pohcy - Full year Honours programme An Honours programme m Geography consists of the following (a) 2 topics from among the followmg

32401 32402

82403 32405 32409 32411

32412 32413

Location Theory and Regional Economics (Dr J G Browett) Envuonmental Percepuon (Dr R L Heathcote) (not offered m 1978) Historical Geography (Professor M McCaskill) Urban Social Geography (Dr C A Forster) Special Topic Urbanuat1on and Development in South East Asta (Dr A M Maude and Dr G J Hugo) Welfare Geography (Mr R J Stimson) Advanced Physical Geography (Mr K L Bardsley and Mr A S Fraser)

By special arrangement a topic from another d1sc1phne or School

6 units

6 units 6 units 6 units 6 units

6 unns 6 units

6 units 6 units

(b) 32422 Modem Geographic Thought - Staff 6 units (c} 32440 TheSis and Literature Review 18 unus

A thesis of 10 000 to 15 000 words to be written under the superv1s1onof a member of the staff The thesis is to give evidence of the students abihues in collecung and evaluaung 1nformat1on constructing testmg and defending an argument and cnucally examining theories in the area of enquuy A hterauve review of work m the general area of the thesis 1nvest1gauon xs to be submitted by the end of first term Diploma 1n Social Sciences Geography

A general descnpuon of the Diploma In Social Sciences ts set out in Statute 10 1 Schedule 16 The Diploma in Sooal Soences

218

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The course of study for the Diploma in Social Sciences Geography consists of 36 un1ls of work chosen according to the following

(a) Work 1n Honours level topics chosen from those hsted above (up to 36 units) (b) An Honours topic not exceeding 6 units from another d1sc1phne 1n the School deemed by the head of disc1phne of Geography to be relevant to the advanced study of Geography (c) Up to a maximum of 12 unlls chosen from the following topics

32207 32302 32204 32206 32208 32303 32304

Geography of Economic Acuv1ty Urban Geography Physical Geography Geomorphology The Geography of Biouc Resources Techniques 1n Geography Environmental Perception and Behaviour Geography and Pubhc Polley

6 units 6 units 6 unas 6 units 6 units 6 UtlltS 6 units

Topics from another d1sciphne or school deemed by the head of the Geography d1sc1phne to be cognate to the advanced study of Geography may also be taken

Fzrst Year Topic

32110 GEOGRAPHY I MAN AND ENVIRONMENT Mr K L Bardsley (Con~1enor) and Geography staff

Unus 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 3 lectures per week 2 hours small group teaching per week (alternately practical work and tutonals) There will be several half day and/or full day field e.xcurs1ons Pre requ1sues None

The topic is concerned wnh the structure and 1nteracuon of two maJor systems on the earth s surface - the ecological system thal links man and his envuonmentand the spaual system that hnks places and regions with each other in flow·sof matenalsand services The areas treated compnse the geographic effects of population growth and technological change 1nclud1ng the agricultural urban mant1me and tndustnal revolutions locauonal patterns of economic act1v1ty rural and urban settlement structure and functions populauon and resources processes and patterns 10 the physical envuonment - almosphere land surface and b1ouc cover The topic will include a number of case studies of the geographic 1mpltcat1ons of publ1cpohc1esconcern1ng regional 1nequal1l1es and environmental management with particular reference to South Austraha No previous study of geography ts assumed Wntten preparation is normally requued for the fortnightly tutonal Assessment 1s based on a senes of grades awarded for tutonal and pracucal work two major essays end of tenn tests and a final exam1nauon

Text books Bilhngs W D Plants man and the ecosystem 2nd ed (Macmillan 1972)• Bloom A L The surface of the earth (Prenuce Hall 1969)•

Reference books Chisholm M Rural settlement and land use 2nd ed. (Hutchinson 1972)• Haggett P Geography a modern synthesis 2nd ed. (Harper & Row 1975)• Johnson J H Urban geography an introductory analysis 2nd ed (Pergamon 1972)• Johnston R J Spatial structures (Methuen 1973)• Kolars J F and Nystuen J D Human geography spatial design zn world society (McGraw Hill 1974) Kolenkow R J Physical geography today (CR M 1974) Kormondy E J Concepts of ecology (Prenuce Hall 1969) Spencer J E and Thomas W L Cultural geography (Wiley 1969)• Smith R L ed. The ecology of man an ecosystem approach (Harper & Row 1972) Tre\vartha G T A geography of population world patterns (Wiley 1969)•

219

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Unlls 6 Level Second or third year

Second Year Topics

32202 THE ARID LANDS Dr R L Heathcote

Pre requisites None A knowledge of Geography al Matnculauon level will be assumed

Comparative studies of environment settlement and resource use 1n the Old and New \Vorld dry lands an examtnauon of the ecolog1cal implications of and1ty plant and animal adaptauons and the patterns of human acnvuy

Note This topic will not be offered 1n 1978 but will be offered 1n 1979

Units 6

32203 DEVELOPMENT GEOGRAPHY Dr A M Maude

Level Second or thud year Pre requ1sHe None

Studies of envuonmental potential agncultural systems population problems and spatial patterns of development and change 1n low income countries wuh parucular reference to Southeast Asia and New Guinea

Note This topic will not be offered 1n 1978 but part of the matenalpreviously offered lv1ll be included 1n Topic 32212 Southeast Asia and Topic 32209 Food and Agncultural Development

Units 6

32204 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY GEOMORPHOLOGY Mr K L Bardsley

Level Second or thud year Durauon Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures per week pracucal work 1n laboratory and field to be arranged and a four day excursion Pre requ1sues Geography I Earth Sciences I or Biology I each at C grade or beuer

Studies of earth structure surface processes and ume as factorscontroll1ng the form of the land surface and its evoluuon Regional geomorpholog1cal studies lVUh special reference to Australia

Reference books Cooke R U and Doornkamp J C Geomorphology in environ1nental management -an inlroductzon (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1974)• Davies J L Geographical variation 1n coastal development (Hafner 1972) Jennings J N and Mabbuu J A Landform studies from Australia and New Guinea (AN U 1967)• Olher C Weathering (Oliver and Boyd 1969) P1tty A F Introduction to getJmorphology (Methuen 1971)• Small R J The study of landforrns (Cambridge Univ Pr 1972)•

32205 THE GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA Dr R L Heathcote Mr K L Bardsley and Professor fvl McCaskzll

Unns 6 Level Second or thud year Duration Full year

220

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Class Contact l lecture per week and 2 nttonals per term Pre requ1s1tes None A knowledge of geography at matnculat1on level 1s assumed

The topic will be taught in three sect1onsw1th selected regional case studies appropnate to each theme (a) Australian natural resources - d1str1button and uuhzanon conflicts and policy issues in their development (b) H1stoncal geography - the spread of settlement and the process of landscape change from 18th to early 20th centuries the emergence of regional econom1es settlement nodes and commun1cat1ons networks (c) Populauon geography - the growth d1stnbuuon and compos1t1on of Australia s populauon wuh special attenuon being focussed on spaual patterns 1n the post World War II penod

Reference books Australia CS IR 0 Australian environment 4th ed (Melbourne Univ Pr 1970) Heathcote R L Australia (Longman 1976)• Jeans D N L An historical geography of New South Wales (Reed 1972) Lovett J V ed The environmental econom1candsoc1al significance of drought (Angus & Robertson 1973 )• Me1n1g D W On the margins of the good earth (Rigby 1970)• Moore R M ed Australzan grasslands (A N U 1970) Nanonal Population Inquiry Population and Australia vol I (AG PS 1975) Rapoport A ed Australia as human setting (Angus &: Robertson 1972)• or Sinden J A ed The natural resources of Australia (ANZAAS 1972) W1lhams M The making of the South Australian landscape (Academic 1974)

32206 THE GEOGRAPHY OF BIOTIC RESOURCES

Units 6 Level Second or third year Duration Ftrst half year

Mr A S Fraser

Class Contact 2 lectures per lvcck and l tutonal or labordtory class per fortnight together wuh \Veekend or vacauon held studies Pre requisnes 32110 Geography I or 86100 Biology I or 86110 Perspectives in Biology each at C Grade 01 better

Studies of the d1str1button evaluatton and u ti11zat1on of b1ot1c resources with emphasis on vegetatton and soils The ecological relauonsh1ps between plants cltmate and soils soil forming factors the class1£1cauon and mapping of vegetation and soils pnnciples of b1ouc resource management

Preliminary reading Kellman M C Plant geography (Methuen 1975)• Kormondy E J Concepts of ecology (Prenuce Hall 1969)• or Odum E P Ecology 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & '\V1nston 1975)•

Text books Any one of the following Cnnckshank J Soil geography (David & Charles 1972) • either Seddon B lntroductzon to bzogeography (Duckworth 1971)• or Simmons I G The ecology of natural re~ources (Arnold 1974)4

or Watts D Principles of b1ogeography (McGra\v Hill 1971) or Watts K E F Principles of environmental science (McGraw Hill 1974) or Whittaker R H Commun1t1es and ecosystems 2nd cd (Macmtlb.n 1975)•

221

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Reference books Dansereau P Biogeography (Ronald 1957) Detwyler T R ed Mans impact on environment (McGraw Hill 1971)• Foth H D and Turk L M Fundamentals of soil science 5th ed (Wiley 1973)• Good R D The geography of the flowering plants 3rd ed (Longman 1964) Russ,vurm L H and Sommerville E eds Mans natural environment a systems approach (Duxburg 1974)• Sh1mwe1l D W Descr:ptzon and classzfzcatzon ofvegetat1on(Sidgw1ck &]'1ckson 1972)•

32207 GEOGRAPHY OF ECONOMIC ACTIVITY Dr ] G Browett

Untts 6 Level Second or thud year Duration Fust half year Class Contact 2 lectures per week and fortnightly tutonals Pre requisites 30110 Economics I at C grade or better or 32110 Geography I at C grade or better

The ob1ecuve of the course 1s to appreciate the existence of 'lnd to analyse the reasons for spaual vanations 1n economic and social prosperity between nauons and regions and to examine pohcies and strategies whtch have been instituted to reduce the imbalance The emphasis will be on econom1cally advanced 1ndustnahsed soc1eues Spec1f1c treatment will be given to the follovnng

World pauems of unequal development Theories of unequal development National patterns of unequal development 1n developed countnes Theones of unequal spatial growth and development in nauonal economies Pohcy responses to spaual inequahty Case studies

Reference books A hst will be available on request

Untts 6

32208 TECHNIQUES JN GEOGRAPHY Mr H C Weznand

Level Second or thud year Duration Fust and second terms Class Contact l lecture and 2 hours workshop per week four days fieldwork in a Term vacation

Stausucal techniques and quantllauve studies tn human geography the design apphcauon and analysis of quest1onnaues the use of map analysis and of aenal photo 1nterpretat1on 10 geographical held studies

Note Students proposing to take Geography as a ma1or sequence are strongly advised to take this topic It 1s pre requisite for entry into the honours work tn Geography

Text book Hammond R and McCullagh P S Quantitative techniques in geography an zntroducuon (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1974)

Reference books Abler R Adams J S Gould P Spatial organiuztion (Prentice Hall 1971)• Barrett E C and Curtis L F Environmental remote sensing applications and achievements (Arno1d 1974) Moser CA andKalton G Surveymethodsinsoc1alinvest1gat1on 2nded (Heinemann 1971)"

222

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Rudd R 0 Remote sensing a better view (Duxburg 1974) Smith D M Patterns in human geography an introduction to numerical methods (David & Charles 1975) Yeates M An introduction to quantitative analysis in human geography (McGraw Hill 1974)

32209 FOOD AND AGRICULTURAL DEVELOPMENT

Units 6 Level Second or thud year Duration Full year

Mr R M Steele

Class Contact 1 lecture per week and 1 tutonal or workshop per fortnight Pre requisites Geography I or Economics I or first year topics in Biology each at C grade or better

This topic will eicam1ne agncultural systems 1n different environments with emphasis on the contrastJO!'.{ food supply s1tuauon 111 the developed .ind less developed countnes Agncultural development programmes and policies will be evaluated in terms of their success 10 improving food d1stribut1on and tncreastng food production 10 relauon to population growth Ma1or themes will include (a) The evolution of some of the world s maJOr agncultural systems (b) Compansons between high energy 1nputcap1tal 1ntens1ve agncultural systems and low ener~y input labour intensive systems 10 the less developed countnes (c) Agricultural productlvtty and populallon growth 10 selected countnes (d) The nature of recent world food cnses and an evaluation of the role of the Green Revolution 10 combaung malnutnuon tn the less developed countries

Text books Abelson P H ed Food politics economics nutrition and research (Amer Assoc Adv Set 1975)"" Gn~~ 0 B The agricultural systems of the world an evolutionary approach (Cambnd~e Univ Pr 1974)""

Reference books F A 0 Population food supply and agricultural development (1975) F A 0 The state of food and agriculture (annual reviews) Gnfftn K The political economy of agrarian chanf{e an essay on the Green Revolution (Macmillan 1974) C..11gg D The harsh lands a study in agricultural development {M<1cm11lan 1970) I-le1ser C B Seed to c1vzl1zat1on the 5lory of mans food (Freemdn 1973)"" Shand R f ed Technical change in Asian af?:nculture (ANU 1973)

32211 HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE UNITED STATES

Units 6 Level Second or third yedr Durauon First half year

Emeritus Professor L fl ewes

Cldss Contact Two lectu1es per week <1n<l tutorials or workshops to be arranged Pre requisites Geo~raphy I or History I edch <1t (' ~r<1<le or bcner

The topic focu!>e:. on the shaping of the Amencdn culturi.l ldndsc 1pes wllh '1.llent1on to occupdnce pdllern!> of the past IL 1s concerned with how different peoples with unltke cultures perceived the hm1tat1ons and poss1b1ht1e!> of the env1ron1nent Man !.ind reldt1ons <1re viewed 10 term:. of the diffusion of ideas and adaptation to natural sett1n~ Includes the use and abuse of the l'lnd Because of thecont1nent<1l scope the tre<1tment 1s lar~ely re~1onal

Text book Brown R 1-1 I hsloncal {{fO!{raphy of the United Stales (Hlrcourt Br<1ce 1948)

223

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Reference books Barrows H H Lectures on the historical geography of the United States1 ed Wilham A Koelsch (University of Chicago Department of Geography Research Paper No 77 1962) Ward D Cities and immigrants a geography of change in nineteenth century America (0 up 1971)• Brown R H Mirror for Americans (Amencan Geographical Society Special Publ1cauon No 27 1943) Me1n1g D W Southwest three peoples in geographical change 1600 1970 (0 UP 1971)•

Units 6 Level Second or thud year Durauon Second half year

32212 SOUTHEAST ASIA Dr A M Maude

Class Contact 2 3 hours of lectures or tutonals per week Pre requisites None

A geographical study of environment agnculture population and spaual patterns of development and change In Southeast Asia with particular emphasis on Indonesia Malaysia and the Phihppines A ma1or theme in the topic will be the study of the changing human geography of the region over the penod from about 1850 to the present 1nclud1ng changes in agncultural systems populauon regional economies and urban1zat1on As this topic ts also offered as part of 37201 Rural and Urban Change in Southeast Asta it may not be counted towards a degree 1n addttton to that topic Topic 32209 may not be counted towards a degree 10 add1uon to 32203 Development Geography 1£ Topic 32203 was completed in 1976 or earher

Reference books Buchanan K The Southeast Asian world (Bell 1967) M1ssen G J Viewpoint on Indonesia (Nelson 1972) Yeung Y M and Lo C P Changing Southeast Asian cities readin?;s on urbanization (0 up 1976) 001 J B Peninsular Malaysia {Longman 1976)

Units 6 Level Thud year Duration Fust half year

Third Year Topics

32302 URBAN GEOGRAPHY Dr C A Forster

Pre requisites 12 untts of Geography or other approved Social Science disciplines at second year level each at C grade or better Class Contact 3 hours per week (lectures seminars and tutonals) and a week of field study m Melbourne dunng the May vacation

The area of study concentrates on the social geography of the western city Topics will include the process of urbanuauon the nature of the modern city as a spaual system processes of segregation and differenuation models of spatial interaction urb.in pol1t1c.il geography techniques of measurement and analysts 1n urban social geography and an e'<amination of the geographers contnbuuon to the analysis of contemporary urban problems

Text books Stewart M ed The city problems of planning (Pene;uin 1972)• Robson B T Urban social areas (OU P 1975)•

224

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Reference books Harvey D Social justice and the city (Arnold 1973)• Neutze M Urban development in Australia (Allen & Unw1n 1977)• Pahl R E Whose city1 (Penguin 1975)• Stretton H Ideas for Australian cities 2nd ed (Georgian House 1975)•

Units 6

32303 ENVIRONMENTAL PERCEPTION AND BEHAVIOUR Mr R ] Stimson and Dr R L Heathcote

Level Thud year Duration Second half year Class Con tact 3 lectures per week and six tu tonals Pre requ1s1tes 12 units of Geography at second year level or 12 unus at the sec:ond year level 1napprovedd1sc1phnesw1th1n the School of Soc1alSc1ences each at C grade or better

The topic will consider the phtlosoph1cal basis and methods of analysis in the study of environmental perception and spaual behaviour of man Thesewill 1nclude the evolution of knowledge and attitudes to the global environment concepts of the cultural evaluation of natural resources man nature relattonsh1ps and human ad1ustment to environmental stress spatial choice and spatial behaviour in res1dent1aI Iocauon retail shopping and recreauon act1v1t1es cognitive mapping acuvuy time space analysis behavioural bases to the Iocauon dec1s1ons of fums

Text books Jack.le J A Brunn S and Roseman C C Human spatial behavior (Duxbury 1976) Tuan Y1 Fu Topoph1l1a a study of environmental perception attitudes and values (Prenuce Hall 1974)•

Reference books Carlste1n T Parkes D N and Thnft N ] eds Timing space and spacing time vol 2, human activity and time geography (Arnold 1977) Downs RM andStea D eds lmageandenvironment cogn1tivemapptngandspat1al behaviour (Arnold 1973) Glacken C J Traces on the Rhod1an shore nature and culture in western thought from ancient times to the end of the eighteenth century (Cahforn1a Pr 1967) Golledge R G and Rushton R eds Spatial choice and spatial behavior (Ohta State Univ Press 1976) Hurst M E E A geography of economic behaviour (Duxbury 1972)• Lynch K The image of the city (MIT 1960)• Moore G T and Golledge R G eds Environmental knowing theories research and method (Dowden Hutchinson & Ross Communtty Development Senes No 23 1976) Saannen T F Environmental plannin~ perception and behaviour (Houghton Mifflin 1976)•

Units 6

32304 GEOGRAPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY Professor M McCaskill and staff

Level Thud year Durauon Full year Class Contact 2 lectures or seminars per week Pre requisites 12 units of Geoe;raphy at second year level at C ~Tade or better or C'eography I (Topic 32110) at C grade or better plus a C ~Tade or better or concurrent enrolment 1n Top IC 35302 Austrahan Public Policy and Adm1n1strauon

Geoe;raphical aspects of public pol1c1es at nauonal regional <Ind urban scales 1n advanced countnes with particular reference to Austrahaand the United Kingdom Theevoluuon of philosophies of plann1ne; and envtronmental manae;ement The techniques and consequences of public 1ntervent1on 1n locat1onal dec1s1ons spaual structures land use and envtronmental management

225

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL ~CIENCE'i

Text books Hall P Urban and regional plannzng (Pelican 1974)• Stewart M ed The city problems of planning (Penguin 1972)

Reference books Bourne L S Urban systems strategies for regulation (Oxford Clarendon 1975)• Bruton M J ed The spirit and purpose of planning (Hutchinson 1974)• L1nge G J R and Rimmer P J eds Government influence and the location of economic activity (A N U 1971) McLoughhn J B Urban and regional planning a systems approach (Faber 1969)• Smden J A ed The natural resources for Australia prospects and problems for development (ANZAAS 1972)•

226

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Top1cs in History

GENERAL INFORMATION General questions of course des1gn permission to undertake special comb1nat1ons or broad problems about the study of the sub1ecl should be addressed to the Director of Studies Dr D H Close Adm1n1stratlve aspects of the topics offered '1t each level .ire co ordtn'1ted by a Convenor whose name IS sho\vn below wllh the relevant topic or group of topics

First Year Topics

The four topics available for study at fast ye'1r level assume noprev1ous h1stoncal studies Any one of the four topICs completed at C grade level or better permlls a student to proceed to any second year topics 10 history All topics are designed through the study of '1 substantial body of lustoncal literature to introduce students to such fundamental h1stoncal issues as the nature and evaluation of evidence the construction of h1stoncal narratives the assessment of the wnt1ne;s of other h1stonans and the analysis of such h1stoncal problems as the nature of cause and the impact of 1nd1v1duals on the course of history Each topic reflects a ma1or interest of a group of h1stonans "1th1n the d1sc1phne -broadly Austrahan Luropean Asian and American history (the last 10 con1uncuon \Vllh the d1sc1pl1neof American Studies) These 1nterests are normally representtd at all levels of the d1sc1pltne s teaching programme Thertfore each of these hrst year topics m'1y be considered as the commencement of a sequence of historical studies 1n a spec1hc area It must be emphasised however that such an arrangement 1s not compulsory for some students will prefer to pursue a wtde variety of interests It must also be emphasised that some later year topics are not represented 10 '1ny substantive way by the hrst year topics currently hsted See the table which follows to illustrate these vanous poss1b1ht1es The proposed methods of assessment for all Lhese first year topics will be broadly Lhe same and based on the follo\v1ng

(a) a vanety of wnuen assignments completeddunngtheyear 1n total notexceechng8 000 words No "ritten work w1ll be received after the last day of thud term (b) an exam1nation at the end of the year .ill or part of which will be concerned with documents studied during the year (c) thewe1ghung for (a) and (b) will be 603 403 That part 10 'vh1ch thcstudenLperfonns the heller will be given the greater wetghnng

227

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

TABLE TO ILLUSTRATE POSSIBLE PATTERNS OF HISTORY COURSES N B Topics asterisked not available in 1978

v~, Austraha Asia America Europe Other

I 33120 The 33140 Con tin 33130 The 33150 Three (all Foundation of uuy and Change Colonial Europe.an Rev 12 Ausuaha and 1n Pre Modern Amencas oluuons unu) New 7ealand Asia 1492 1825

1770 1870

2 33204 Con 33208 Nauon 33201 Nine 33211 Water (all sensus and ahsm and teenth 111d loo 10 Lune 6 D1v1s1on 111 Communal1sm Twentieth burg lleath unu) 20th Century 1n Soulh Asia Century Laun-

33212 Scan Australia 1858 1971 Amen ca d1nav1an History

33218 Bnta1n 33213 lmerg 33217 Bnush and ~nd1a ence of Modern

1757 1947 Amen ca I 880 Indu~tnal Rev

to the Present oluuon

33219 History 33221 The of Modem Note Sec also

China 1840 entncs for Rise J.nd Fall

1949• American of Furopean

Note See •lso Studies Impenal1sm

entnes for J.3222 Popular Asian Studies Protest and Bn

ush Society 1780 1860

33223 Nan

' 33316 Aus 33302 The 33304 i\-Jex1co Germany

33315 Vtctor (all tr.than Ex Paruuon of under 33306 Man 1ans 1n South 6 penence tn India 1935 47 Cardenas and the "itate cm Afnca unit) Two World 33314 Mex1 European Pol 1833 1902

\Vars can Indepen 1uc.1I Thou~ht dence 1763 Rousseau 10

1830 Lenm

33319 Region 33307 llhter

ahsm 111 Amer and lrd.tnd•

ican H1~tory 33317 Re.form auon 'it"lte .ind Society 1n 16th ( tnuny Engl md

33318 Ir m~ forma11011 of Br111~h Pol111C"~ 1900 1911

33120 HISTORY IB - THE FOUNDATION OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND, 1770-1870

( onvenor Dr P A Howell with /)r B K Dickey Dr D I H1llmrd ft.fr J ft.I A.Jain and ProfesJor E ~ Richards

llnt13 12 Level } 1rM y('.tl

Dur.tllon I ull )t'dl (lass Cont.1ct 2 lectuH'io dnd I tu ton ll ptr wtd, Pre H"CjUl'iollC3 NonC'

228

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The aim of tlus topic is to explain the estabhshment of Bnttsh colonies in Australasia to c 1870 Attentton will be devoted first to the reasons why Abongines then Europeans moved into Australasia The establtshment and growth of the colonies of Ne'" South Wales New Zealand and South Australia will then be 1nvesugated successively Cons1derat1on wtll be given to the nature and importance of the empire thereby created A collectton of documents will be distributed to all students for study dunng the topic

Preliminary reading Bla1ney G The tyranny of distance (Sun 1966)• Crawford R M Australia 3rd ed (Hutchinson 1970)• Crowley F K ed The new history of Australia (Heinemann 1974)• Fletcher B Colonial Australia before 1850 (Nelson 1976)• Ward J M Empire in the Antipodes (Arnold 1966)• S1ncla1r K A history of New Zealand (Penguin 1969)•

33130 HISTORY IC-THE COLONIAL AMERICAS 1492-1826 Convenor Dr G M Tobin (American Studies) with Professor P F Bourke

and Dr F ] Brooks

Unns 12 Level Fust year Duratlon Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tu tonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None

The subject of the topic is the discovery conquest and colon1zauon of the Amencas by the peoples of Western Europe from 1492 until the emergence of independent nations 1776 1826 fhe mauves of the Europeans and then nvalnes will provide a backcloth for the pnnc1pal focus of the topic which is the nature of colonial Amencan society Companson of the Spanish Portuguese Dutch Enghsh and French colonies and of their relat1onsh1ps with each other and with the 1nd1genes is intended to ht~hh~ht important facets of colonial hfe Documents for study will be prescribed Students are asked to consult the convenor of the topic

Introductory reading Gibson C Spain in America (Harper & Row 1966)• Te Paske J ed Three American empires (Harper & Row 1967)• Henretta J A The evolution of American society 1700 1815 (Heath 1973)•

lJnits 12

33140 HISTORY ID-CONTINUITY AND CHANGE IN PRE-MODERN ASIA

Convenor Dr L Brennan with Dr C F Yoni;:-

Level First year Duratton Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutorial per week Pre requ1sues None

This topic ts pnmanly concerned with the evolutton of the sonelles and culture of pre modern China India and S E Asia It examines chan({e and conunuity in economic ltfe culture and religion social structure and poht1cal thou({ht and practice The analysts of Chinese society will be made pnmanly against a back~round of events of the Ming and Ching dynaslles up to 1840 while Indian sooety will be observed <1ga1nst the wider canvas of thepenod 1000 AD to 1857 In the latter <1ttenuon \\ 111 be focused on the chan~es brought about by the 1ntrus1on of Mushm culture 1n North India <1nd on the conttnued development of a Hindu dominated polity and culture in South India to the dose of the V11ayana({ar Empue The analvs1~ of ma1nl'lnd <tnd 1~l,u1rl ".' E A'itd \ 111 focus

229

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

on the process by which Chinese Indian and Spanish Catholic influences were absorbed and transformed by the indigenous cultures A collecuon of documents will be d1stnbuted to all students for study dunng the topic

Set books Fairbank J K The United States and China 3rd ed (Harvard Univ Pr 1971)• Steinberg D ed In search of Southeast Asia (Prae~er 1971)• Basham A L -ed A cultural history of India (Oxford Clarendon 1975)

Preliminary reading Schurmann F and Schell 0 eds China readings I imperial China (Penguin 1967)• Cohn B S India the social anthropology of a ctviltzation (Prentice Hall 1971)~

Harrison B Southeast Asta a short history (Macmillan 1968)

33150 HISTORY IE-THREE EUROPEAN REVOLUTIONS Convenor Mr P A Lockwood with Mr ] M Matn

Units 12 Level Ftrst year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutorn.l per week Pre requ1s1tes None

The three revolutions to be studied are as follows I En~hsh Revolution 1640 1660 2 French Revolu tton 1789 179'5 3 Russian Revol u uon 1905 1924 Constant comparisons between man and events 1n each revoluuon will he encoura~ed as will companson between each revoluuon though there\v1ll be no formal o.tten1pt toarnve at an abstract model of a revolution A collecuon of documents will be d1stnbuted to all <;tudents for a study dunn~ the topic This topic I<; not available to students who have completed topIC !)3110 Re\.oluuons of Modern Times

Introductory reading Aylmer G E The struggle for the con5tttution (Blandford 1968) Cobban A History of modern Trance vol I (Pen~uin 1961))• Kochan L The makzn'?: of modern Hu~sza (Pengtun 1967)•

'5econd Year Topu5

FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN HISTORY rhe top!C<; available for ~llllh d( \{'(Ond V( ff iC'vtJ p1ov1de 'itill'il lllll ti 'illrVt y<; of broad 11nportant ana'> of modern h1qor\. 1 IVl11le the norrnal prF rFqunllf' for St'(ond Vt'ar lf'i Fl topu \ 111 l-IHlorv 1111978H12 units of any fJTst yFar lltstory lopu at a gradt' of (or bt'llf'r studn11\ who hail(' cornpleled 72 units towards a degref' mav lakr rip to 12 1011!1 of H UHtd Vf'ar lr>i rl I IHton a1 coe;11ate1 or Flell111es without f1nt /)aH/llf!; a first vear lnwl flnlorv topu I IH follo\\Ill~ topu\ \\Ill bt offtnd 111 1978 {\hort lltit'> on!\)

3~208

j 1212 ~~213

JW7 H221

230

( on1n1e11ung- Alarch

"outh A'i11

"' llHhll l\ I l ti .;, A \llH t 1880 Indu'itn ii Rt \olut1011 }< lllOpt Ill ftnpt l l liJ'itTl

JJ201 H201 H218 {{222

( O/ll/IUfUlll!., fll/\

l 1t1n A1nt n< 1 Au'>tt 1h 1

Bnt 1111 111d Ind1 1 Popul 11 P10H ~t 111 Bi 1t 1111

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

33201 NINETEENTH AND TWENTIETH CENTURY LATIN AMERICA

Units 6 Level Second year Durauon Second half year

Mr ] Mallon

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tu tonal per week Pre requ1sues 12 unlls of first year History with a grade of C or better t While the topic w·11l emphasise economic social and poht1cal factors which have shaped Laun Amenca as a lvhole attention will be given to the parucular charactensucs of individual republics Among aspects to be studied the ong1ns and nature of the Independence movement and the emergence of nat1onahsm elements governing pohucal development e g d1ctatorsh1p m1htansm the Church poht1cal parues revoluuon1.ry movements the pnnc1ples of economic organ1sat1on with special reference to foreign control the problems of social organ1sat1on e g the roles of ethnic groups the culture of poverty the effects of population gro\vth 1ndustnaltsauon urbanisauon rcvolut1on and social change e g Me.x1co and Cuba U S pohcy and Latin Amenca

Prelim1nary reading Frank A G Capitalism and underdevelopment 1n Lalin America (Pehcan 1972)• Gerass1 J The great fear in Lalin Amenca (Colher 1969)• Horowitz I L Castro J and Gerass1 J eds Lat1n American radicalism (Cape 1969)• Pike F B eel LatznAmencan lustory selectproblems(Harcourt Brace&World 1969)• Stein S J and Stein B H The colonial herztage of Lalin Amerzca (0 VP 1970)• Vehz C ed Obstacles lo change tn Latin America (0 UP 1968)•

33204 CONSENSUS AND DIVISION IN TWENTIETH CENTURY AUSTRALIA

Untts 6 Level Second year Duration Second half year

Dr B K Dickey

Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutonal per week Pre requisttes 12 untts of fust year History wllh a grade of C or bcuer t Organised around the general theme of consensus andd1v1s1on 1n Australia since 1901 this topic lvtll examine such areas as the search for national pol1c1es up to 1914 lvarand society (twice) the Great Depression Australia s 1nternauonal idenuty democratic socialism the Age o( Mcnncs defence and foreign pohcy tn the 1960s the search for the new social policies and attitudes a new consensus?

Preliminary reading Clark C M H A short history of Australia (Mentor 1963)* Davies A F and Ence! S eds Australian society 2nd ed (Cheshire 1970)• Cro,vley F K eel A new history of Australia (Heinemann 1974)* Crowley F K eel Modem Australia in documents 2 vols (\Vren 1973)•

t Refl!r to note. 11 commencement of Second year Topics

231

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

33208 NATIONALISM AND COMMUNALISM IN SOUTH ASIA, 1858-1971

Units 6 Level Second year Duratton Fust half year

Dr L Brennan

Class Contact l lecture I workshop and 1 tutorial per week Pre requisites 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or better t This topic will focus on the interacuon of the rehg1ous agr'lnan and social developments \vh1ch fostered the nauonal and communal movements 1n South Asia from the Muuny of 1857 8 to the creauon of Bangladesh 1n 1971

Text ~oohs Masselos J Natzonal1sm on the Indian subcontinent (Nelson 1972)• Hardy P The Muslims of British India (Cambndge Univ Pr 1972)•

Preliminary reading Cohn B S India the social anthropology of a c1vilizat1on (Prentice Hall 1971)•

Students are asked to read the following novels which form part of the topic They areal so recommended as prehm1nary reading Premchand Godan (Ja1co 1963)• Singh K Train to Pakistan (India Book House 1975)•

33211 WATERLOO TO LUNEBURG HEATH EUROPEAN WAR FROM JUNE 1815 TO MAY 1945

Dr J M Ph1lt.ps

(Not offered m 1978)

33212 SCANDINAVIAN HISTORY Dr A R G Griffiths

Units 6 Level Second year Durauon First half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tu tonal per \Veek Pre requisites 12 unus of first year History \Vllh a grade of C or heller t \Vhile the topic will look at economic and pol1t1cal factors that have shaped Sc•nd1nav1a •s a whole attention \VIll be given to the particular charactensuc of 1nd1v1dual states Sweden Finland Nonvay Denmark Iceland The topic will concentrate on Scand1nav1a since 1890 \Vtth special emphasis on World War I the nse of parltamentary government social democracy \Vorld War II foreign policy trends since 1945 and social and cultural ch•nge

Preliminary reading Poppenvell R G Norway (Benn 1972) Scobb1e I Sweden (Benn 1972) Glyn Jones W Denmark (Benn 1970) Mead \V R and Hall 'V Scandinavia (Thames 8: Hudson 1972) Jut1kkala E and Pinneo K A Justory of Finland rev ed (Prae~er 1964)

t Rdcr to note at commcntcmcnt of 'itcond year Topics

232

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Unns 6

33213 (34204) THE EMERGENCE OF MODERN AMERICA Professor P F Bourke and Dr G M Tobin

Level Second year Durauon First half year Class Contact 2 leclures and l two hour seminar per week Pre requisites 12 units of first year Htslory wuh a gradL of C or better t See descnpuon under Topic 34204

Unus 6

33217 BRITISH INDUSTRIAL REVOLUTION Dr W Vamplew

Level Second year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tu tonal per week Pre requisites 12 unus of first year History \Vith a grade of C or better t This topic \vi11 suggest reasons \vhy Bntatn 'vas the fir::.t nauon to indusuiahse and analyse the nature of the industnahsauon process by a consideration of factors such as the population explosion the educauon and d1sc1phne of the labour force the accumulauon and mob1l1ty of investment funds technolog1cal 1nvent1on and 1nnovauon home and overseas markets and the role of agricultural and transpon improvements The welfare consequences of the Industrial Revoluuon \Vtll be assessed by a study of economic pohcy class relationships and the standard of hv1ng Emphasis will be placed upon the v'lhday of current lustoncal op1n1011 data sources and possible lessons which theT!urd World might draw from Bnta1n s expenence Students present111g topic 31202 The Ong1ns of Economic Development the Bnush Case for their degree may not enrol to tlus topic

Text books Deane P The first industrial revolution (Cambndge Univ Pr 1965) Matluas P The first 1ndustnal nation (Methuen 1969)•

Reference books Ashton T S The industrial revolution 2nd ed (0 UP 1970)• Crouzet F Capital formation in the zndustrzal revolution (Methuen 1972)• Deane P andCole WA Bnt1sheconom1cgrowth 16881959 2nded (C'lmbndgeUn1v Pr 1969)• Fhnn M 'V The origins of the 1ndustrzal revolution (Longman 1966)• Hartwell R M The causes of the 1ndustrzal revolution (Methuen 1969)• Hartwell R M The industrial revolution and economic growth (Methuen 1971)• Hobsba,vm E J Industry and empire (Penguin 1969)• Holderness B A Pre industrial England (Dent 1976)* Jones r: L Agriculture and economic growth in England 16501815 (Methuen 1967)• Taylor A J The sta,idard of living 1n Britain in the industrial revolution (Methuen 1975)•

Units 6

33218 BRITAIN AND INDIA, 1757-1947 Professor R ] Jl.,foore

Level Second year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tu tonal per week Pre rcqu1sttes 12 units of first year History \Vllh a grade of C or better t

t Rdu to note at commencement of Second year Toptcs

233

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Bnush rule 1n India began with the plunder of a handful of traders It became a comprehensive system of dominance over the whole subcontinent It ended with the transfer by the Bnush of insutut1ons essenually th.err O\vn to people they considered essentially alien The topic w1ll 1nvest1gate Bnush responses social psychological and intellectual as 'vell as pohucal and adm1n1strat1ve to the challenge of governing India Preliminary reading Any of the following books may be usefully consulted Allen C ed Plain tales from the RaJ images of British India zn the twentieth century (Deutsch 1975) Edwardes M Bound to exile the Victorians in India (Sidgw1ck & Jackson 1969) Greenberger A J The British image of India (0 U P 1969) Hutduns F G The illusion of permanence British imperialism in India (Princeton Univ Pr 1967) Lewis M D ed The British in India impenaltsm or trusteesJup'I (Heath 1962)• Marshall P J Problems of empire Britain and lnd:a 1757 1813 (Allen & Un,v1n 1968) Spear P A history of India vol 2 (Penguin 1965)• Z1nkin M and T Britain and I11d1a requiem for empire (Chatto &: Windus 1964)

33219 HISTORY OF MODERN CHINA 1840-1949 Dr C F Yong

(Not offered 111 1978)

Unus 6

33221 THE RISE AND FALL OF EUROPEAN IMPERIALISM Professor R ] Moore

Level Second year Durauon flrst half year

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes 12 units of first year History \VIth a grade of C or better t The topic will consider the emergence nature and dechne of modem European empues At Its broadest n will extend from about the mid eighteenth century to the mid twentieth century but special attention will be given to the controversies over the new 1mpenahsm from about 1880

Preliminary reading Wnght H M The new 1mpenahsm (Heath 1966)• Lenin V I Impenahsm the highest stage of capitalism Collected works XXII (Moscow 1964) Gallagher J A and Robinson R The 1mpenahsm of free trade Economic History Review senes 2 vol VI (1953) Streuon H The political sciences (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1969)• ch 4

33222 POPULAR PROTEST AND BRITISH SOCIETY, 1760-1860 Dr D H Close and Mr ] M Main

Unas 6 Level Second year Durauon Second half year Class Contact I t\VO hour seminar per 'veek Pre requ1s1tes 12 units of first year History with a grade of C or better i

t Refer m nol(. at commencement of Second year Topics

234

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The topic offers a survey of changes in social stnicture with special reference to popular protest against pohucal authonty e g the campaigns against franchise restnct1ons rehg1ous discr1m1nat1on slave trade grain tanffs and workhouses and such phenomena as food nots ludd1sm and the radical press The topic will give attention to the social context of the~e movemenlS d1scuss1ng especially the concept of class forms of governmental responses to them repressive and conciliatory and literary comment on them e g by poets 1n 1790 1820 and social novelists 1n 1830 1860

Preliminary reading Best G Mid Victorian Britain 1851 1875 (We1denfeld & Nicolson 1971)• Bnggs A Chartist studies (Macmillan 1963)• H~rnson J F C The early Victorians 1832 1851 (Panther 1973)• Hobsbawm E J and Rude G Captain Sw1n~ (Penguin 1973)• Perkin H The origins of modern English society 1780 1880 (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972)' Read D Peterloo The massacre and its background (Manchester Univ Pr 1958) Thompson E P The making of the English working class (Penguin 1968)• Ward J T ed Popular movements c 1830 1850 (Macm1llan 1970)•

33223 NAZI GERMANY ITS ORIGINS AND NATURE 1870-1945 Dr ] M Phillips

(Not offered in 1978)

Thzrd Year Topics

PROBLEMS IN MODERN HISTORY The topics available for study at thud year level are 1nvest1gauons 1n depth of ma1or h1stoncal problems emphas1s1ng the use of contemporary source materials such as pamphlets novels parliamentary debates newspapers and collection of manuscripts Students proposing to enrol in a subsequent year 1na History Honours programme should 1£ al all possible study Topic 39207 Social Change 1n Europe and Asta as one of the mulud1sc1phn'lry topics 1n their undergraduate programme This topic IS unportantasan 1ntroducuon to t11e concepts now widely employed for the study of social change

The following topics will be offered 1n 1978 (short titles only)

33304 33306 33315 33316

Commencing March

Mexico under Cardenas European Pohucal Thought Vtctonans in Southern Afnca Australia 10 Two World Wars

Commencing July Parut1on of India Mexican Independence Enghsh Reformauon Bnnsh Pohucs

33302 33314 33317 33318 33319 Regionalism 1n Amencan History

Units 6

33302 THE PARTITION OF INDIA, 1935-47 Professor R ] Moore

Level Thlfd year Duranon ~econd half year Class Contact 2 lectures per \veek for 6 weeks and l tu tonal per \Veek Pre requisites 12 units of E-hstory at second year level with a grade of C or better

The topic will be concerned with dtscovenng the reasons for the Partition of India pnmanly through an analysis of the conte1nporary source matenals

235

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Preliminary reading Phillps C H The partition of India 1947 (Monlagu Burton Lecture Leeds Univ Pr 1967) Scott P The Jewel in the crown (Heinemann 1966) Moore R J The crisis of Indian unity 1917 40 (Oxford Clarendon 1973)

Untts 6

33304 MEXICO UNDER CARDENAS, 1934-1940 Mr f Mallon

Level Third year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 6 weeks and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1slles 12 unas of History at second year level '"Ith 'l grade of C or better

Thts topic based on the use of primary sources evaluates the Cardenas adm1n1strat1on 1n the context of the Mexican Revolution and cx'lmtnes those forces both national and internauonal which have shaped contempora1y Mexican society

Preliminary reading Cline H F Mexico revolution to evolution 1940 1960 (0 UP 1966)• Cumberland C C Mexico the struggle for modernity (0 UP 1968)* K1rk B Covering the Mexican front (Oklahoma Univ Pr 1942) Ross S R Is the Mexican revolution dead'I (Borzoi 1966)• To,vnsend W C Lazaro Cardenas (Wahr 1952) Wilkie J W and Michaels A L Revolution in klextco (Borzoi 1969)•

33306 EUROPEAN POLITICAL THOUGHT ROUSSEAU TO LENIN Dr P A Howell

Units 6 Level Thud year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact 2 lectures per ,.,eek for 5 weeks and I tutorial per week Pre requisites 12 untts of History at second year level ,.,tth a i;rade of C or better

This topic will consist of a study of selected modern pohttcal theories wuh the emphasis on the follow1ng thedcmocrat1crevoluuon theconservat1ve reaction the hberal reaction uuhtananism utopian soc1ahsm Marxism Bolshevism

Preliminary reading Fnednch C J An introduction to political theory (Harper & Row 1967) or Thomson D ed Polzlzcal ideas (Pehcan 1969)•

The principal texts for study are Rousseau J J The social contract trans M Cranston (Penguin 1968)* Burke E Reflections on the revolution in France eel C C 0 Bnen (Penguin 1969)• Bentham J A fragment on government and An introduction to the principles of morals and legislatzon ed W Harnson (Blackwell 1960) Hegel G W F Lecturesontheplulosophyofhistory trans J S1bree(Dover Constable)* Hegel G \V F The philosophy of right trans T M Knox (0 UP 1953)* Proudhon P J Selected writings trans E Fraser ed L S Ld\vards (Anchor Doubleday 1969)• Mtll J S Utilitananism on liberty and representative government ed H B Acton (Everyman Dent)• MaT'< K The economic and plulosophic manuscripts of 1844 trans M M1lhgan (lnternauonal Publishers 1964)* Marx K and Engels F Selected works vol I (Progress 1969) Lenin V I The stale and revolution (Central Books)• Lenin V I Impenalzsm the highest stage of capitalism (International)•

236

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

33307 ULSTER AND IRELAND Dr A R G Griffiths

(Nol offered in 1978)

Units 6

33314 MEXICAN INDEPENDENCE, 1763-1830 Dr F I Brooks

Level Thud year Durauon Second half year Class Contact l lecture and l tu tonal per week Pre requisites 12 unHs of History at second year level l\l'lth a grade of C or beuer

This topic examines those aspects of 1nternal1onal nvalry and Spanish colonial re organization 'vh1ch shaped the struggle for independence 1n New Spain and which condtt1oned developments dunng the early years of the Me>..1can Repubhc

Preliminary reading Brading D A Miners and merchanls zn Bourbon Mexico (Cambndge Univ Pr 1971) Cumberland C C ~lexzco the struggle for modernity (0 UP 1968)• Floyd Troy S The Bourbon reformers and Spanish c1v1l1zat1on builders or destroyers (Heath 1966)' Hamill H The Hidalgo revolt (flonda Univ Pr 1966) Humboldt Alexander van Political essay on the kingdom of New Spain (Knopt 1972)•

Units 6

33315 VICTORIANS IN SOUTHERN AFRICA, 1833-1902 Dr f M Plullzps

Level Thud year Dural1on Fust half year Class Contact 12 lectures and 12 tutonals Pre rcquislles 12 units of History at second ye1r level wah a grade of C or better

This topic will be pnmanly concerned with the ideas and attitudes w1lh wluch Victonans came to southern Afnca a study of how far and why theuv1ews changed as a resullof their different expenences 'vhether as travellers seulcrs m1ss1onanes government servants or soldiers the development of Bnush governmen l pohcy and pracucc and the impact of the Kaffir Wars and the Boer Wars on race relations - Boer and Bnush as well as black and while

Preliminary reading Moorhouse G The missionaries (Lyre Methuen 1974) Pauerson S The last treh a study of the Boer people and the Afnhanernation (Routledge 1957) Ransford 0 The great trek (John J\.lurray 1972) Statham F R Blacks Boers and British a three cornered problem (l\.lacmillan 1881) Streak M The Afrikaner as viewed by the English 1795 1854 (Slru1k 1974) Ward H Five years in Kaffirland 2 vols (Colburn 1848)

Unns 6

33316 AUSTRALIAN EXPERIENCE IN TWO WORLD WARS Afr J M Main

Level Third year Duration Fust half year Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes 12 units of History at second year level with a grade of C or better

237

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The topic will be mainly concerned with the domestic history of Austraha 1n 'var lime and lVhere appropriate compansons will be made between the impact 0£ the first and second world wars on Australian society and government

Preliminary reading Gammage B Tile broken years (Penguin 1975)• Hasluck P M C The government and the people 1939 451 vols I & II of Australia in the war of 1939 45 (Austrahan War Memonal Senes 4 c1v1l 1956 and 1970) Robson L L The first A IF (Melbourne Univ Pr 1970) Scott E Australia during the war vol XI of the Offic1al history of Australia 1n the,varof 1914 18 (Angus & Robertson 1943)

33317 REFORMATION, STATE AND SOCIETY IN SIXTEENTH-CENTURY ENGLAND

Units 6 Level Thrrd year Durauon Second half year

Dr D L Hilliard

Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 4 weeks and I tutonal per week Pre-requ1sues 12 units of History at second year level with a grade of C or better

This topic will examine with reference to ong1nal sources and changing lustoncal 1nterpretallons a period of special s1gn1hcance 1n the evoluuon of modern England the years from 1509 to 1558 It will focus on three themes the Enghsh Rcfonnat1on 1n its 1ntellec1ual consutuuonal and economic as well as us rehg1ous aspects the changing structure of soCiety and government especially the admin1strat1ve reforms (the Tudor Revolution in Government ) associated with the person of Thon1as Cromwell and the vanous movements of opposition to the pohucal and religious au thorny of the Tudor state

Preliminary reading Cross C Church and people 1450 1660 (Fontana 1976)• Dickens A G The English reformation (Fontana 1967)• Loades D M Politics and the nation 1450 1660 (Fontana 1974)• Scar1sbnck J J Henry VIII (Penguin 1971)•

Documents Dickens A G and Carr D eds The reformation in England to the accession of Elizabeth I (Arnold 1967)•

33318 THE TRANSFORMATION OF BRITISH POLITICS, 1910-1931 Dr D H Close

Units 6 Level Thud year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I seminar per week Pre-requ1s1tes 12 units of History at second year level with a grade of C or better

The central theme will be the advent of modern Bnush politics a process including the Liberal party s collapse and the Labour party s nse the replacement of communtty by class 1n determining party loyalties the shift of attention from rehg1ous and consutut1onal to social and economic issues Also to be studied are the role - in shaping parties and issues - of 'var post war depression the democrauc franchise and personalities ltke Lloyd George the pohucs of force - suffragettes Ulster and the general stnke

Preliminary reading Blewett N The peers the parties and the people the British general elections of 1910 (Macmillan 1971) Clarke P F Lancashire and the new l1beral1sm (Cambridge Univ Pr 1971)

238

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Cowling M The impact of labour (Cambridge Univ Pr 1971) Erny H V Liberals radicals and social Politics 1892 1914 (Cambndge Univ Pr 1973) McK1bb1n R The evolution of the Labour party 1910 1924 (0 UP 1975) Morgan K 0 The age of Lloyd George (Allen & Unw1n 1971)"" Read D Edwardian England soctety and politics 190115 (Harrap 1972)"" Taylor A J P English history 1914 45 (Penguin 1970)"" Wilson T The downfall of the Liberal party (Collins 1966)

Units 6

33319 REGIONALISM IN AMERICAN HISTORY Dr G NI Tobin Dr D A DeBats and Professor P F Bourke

Level Third year Duration Second half year Class Contact Three hours per week Pre requisites 12 units of History al second year w1lh a grade of C or helter

A study of the usefulness of 1he concept of regional 1dent1hcat1on to an unders1a.nd1ng of aspects of American history The idea d1at American soc1e1y has developed w1th1n It some ma1or regional idenuhcanons which shape pohl1cal cultural and social relations has a long history Its ma1or exponent within historical wnnng was rredenck Jackson Turner \vorktng tn the la1e n1ne1eenth and early twenueth centunes and a subs1anual htcralure has grown up w1th1n history and sociology denv1ng from Turners baste ideas The lop1c will begin with an explorauon of that gener'll l1terature and proceed to an exam1nat1on of the apphcat1on of that approach tn s1udy1ng the regions of New England the South and the Trans M1ss1ss1ppi \Vest I'he case studies lvtll require detailed work 1n pnmary sources and will be drawn substantially from the nineteenth century

Preliminary reading Turner F J Frontier and section ed R B1lhngton (Spectrum 1961) Jensen M ed Regionalism in Amerzca (Univ of W1scons1n Pr 1974) Woodward C V The burden of southern history (New Amencan Library 1974) Webb W P The great plains (Grosset & Dunlap 1974)

Honours Programme Convenor Mr J M Main

Honours students tn History will be required 10 undertake the follo,ving programme

(a) Topic 33430 Thests A work of not more than 15 000 words to be written under the superv1s1on of a member of the History staff due on I st October A senes of work tn progress seminars will be conducted dunng first and second terms The thesis lvtll count for 12 units (b) Honours Topics Two topics selected from lhose hsted as Honours topics Lach toptc counts for 12 units Assessment for each Honours topic will be based on essays and on exams 1n enher August or November Students may alternatively enrol for JOint Honours comb1n1ng History with any other d1sc1phne 1n the School of Social Sciences provided the student enrols for at least 12 units 10 each d1sc1phne The programmes of all students enrolhng 1n any part of History Honours must be approved by the Professor of History (or his delegate) and by the heads of such other disc1phnes as may be concerned

239

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The Honours topics available in 1978 wtll be (short lttles only)

Full year

.i3402 Australia 1n Two World Wars 33407 European Political Thought 33409 The Struggle for India 33422 New Ways 1n Social History

First half year Second half year

33415 Studies in Amencan Social Cnuc1i.m

33419 Mexico under Cardenas

33416 13417

Enghsh Reformanon Bnush Politics

DIPLOMA IN SOCIAL SCIENCES HISTORY Convenor Mr ] M Main

The programme of studies in History for tlus diploma 2sdes1gned to permn holders o£pass degrees \Vt th History as a bas1cd1sc1phne and others 'vhosequal1f1cat1onsare1udged to be suff1c1ently s1m1Iar to proceed to further studies in History These further studies may by intended to permit access to areas of history not previously studied perh'l.ps as a form of retra1n1ng or further educauon The d1sc1phne s teaching emphases can for this purpose be broadly grouped into Australian Asian European and Amencan History The last includes both Laun Amenca and the courses cross hsted from 1hedisc1pl1ne of Amencan Studies Grouping of topics w1th1n any one of these areas can usually be attained and 1s \Vell worth considenng The d1sc1phne further recognises that the Diploma may represent the way foIWard for students anxious to proceed to higher degree studies Prov1s1on therefore exists for the presentauon of a substantial research pro1ect as parttal fulhlment of the requuements of the Diploma This opuon requues specific and detailed discussion and approval Successful compleuon of the Diploma at IIA standard or better will qualify a student for adm1ss1on to MA studies in History Since Diploma studies may \Vell be undertaken on a pan ume basis at least some topics will be timetabled from 1 6 pm wlnle arrangements can readily be made for the conunuauon of studies over the long vacation to permit the compleuon of reading and \Vrltten work Students are urged to discuss specthc poss1b1hues wuh the Convenor at an early date Apphcauons are also welcome from students who wish to move from another basic dtsciphne into History In this case evidence of at least some work tn History already completed at tertiary level will be required 1n addition to the fulfilment of the formal requltements laid down 1n the Schedule Formal pre requisites are set out in Statute IO 1 Schedule 16 The Diploma 1n Social Sciences The topics offered are those taught to undergraduates at third year and honours level Diploma students lVtll therefore conform to thespec1flcrequirementsof those topics as laid out tn the syllabus entnes in subsequent pages Potential students should in the first instance consult the Convenor (Mr ] M Main) whose approval to enrol in the History component of the Diploma 1s required pnor to any formal agreement by the School of Social Sciences

33402 AUSTRALIAN EXPERIENCE IN TWO WORLD WARS Mr f M Main

Units 12 Level Honours Durauon Full year Class Contact I seminar per fortnight Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing

240

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

This topic is concerned \Vlth the repercussions of war on Australian society in the t'vent1eth century It is not available to students who have completed topic 33316 Austrahan Experience in Tv.ro World Wars

Preliminary reading Scott E Australia during the war vol XI of the Official history of Australia in the war 1914 18 (Angus&: Robertson 1943) Hasluck PM G Tlzegovernmentandthepeople 1939 45 vols landllofAustrahain the war of 1939 45 (Australian \Var Memorial 1956 and 1970)

33407 EUROPEAN POLITICAL THOUGHT ROUSSEAU TO LENIN Dr P A Howell

Units 12 Level Honours Duration Full year Class Contact l seminar per ,..,eek and 3 lectures per week for 5 \Veeks Pre requisites Honours standing

This topic will consist of an exam1nauon of selected modem poltt1cal theories \Vllh emphasis on the follo,v1ng the democrallc revoluuon the conservative reacuon the hberal reacuon uuhtananism utopian socialism anarchism revoluuonary soc1ahsm The writers to be studted will include Rousseau Hume Burke Bentham Hegel Tocqueville Saint Simon Robert Owen Proudhon Mill Bakunin F1tz1ames Stephen Marx and Lenin

Preliminary reading Friednch C T An 1ntroduct1on to political theory (Harper &: Row 1967) or Thompson D ed. Political ideas (Pehcan 1969)

33409 THE STRUGGLE FOR INDIA, 1917-1939

Untts 12 Level Honours Duration Full year

Dr L Brennan

Class Contact l seminar per fortnight Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing The topic will consider internal tensions and conflict 1n India against the background of const1tut1onal development and nationalist aguauon Auenuon will be focused on the non Brahm1n movements of South and \Vest lnd1a agrarian oon£hct in the United Provinces Hindu and Muslim communahsm 1n Bengal and the Un1ted Provmces Sikh revivalism and movements for the uphfl of untouchables

Preliminary reading Broomfield J Elite conflict in a plural society (Cahfom1a Univ Pr 1968) Harrison S India the most dangerous decades (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1964) Irsch1ck E F Politics and social conflict in Soutlz India the non Brahman movement and Tamil separatism (Cahfomta Univ Pr 1969) Moore R J The crisis of Indian unity 1917 10 (Oxford Clarendon 1974)

Students \\'ill also be able to consult primary material illustraung theseconfltcts and their relauonsh1p with const1tut1onal development and the nationalist movement

241

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

33415 STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL CRITICISM Professor P F Bourke, Dr D A DeBats and Dr G M Tobin

Units 12 Level Honours Duration Terms I and II Class Contact l two hour seminar per \'leek Pre-requ1s1tes Honours standing

See descnpuon under topic 34401

33416 REFORMATION, STATE AND SOCIETY IN SIXTEENTH-CENTURY ENGLAND

Dr D L Hilliard

Untts 12 Level Honours Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures per week £or 4 \'leeks and l seminar per fortnight Pre requisites Honours standmg

This topic will examine the Enghsh Reformauon the changing srructure of society and government under Henry VIII and Ehzabeth I and the vanous movements of oppos1uon to the pohucal and rehgzous authonty of the Tudor state This topic 1s not available to student.s\'/ho have completed top1c333l7 Reformation State and Society in Srxteenth Century England

Preliminary reading Dickens A G The English reformation (Fontana 1967)• Loades D M Politics and the natron 1150 1660 (Fontana 1974)•

33417 THE TRANSFORMATION OF BRITISH POLITICS, 1910-1931 Dr D H Close

Units 12 Level Honours Durauon Second half year Class Con tact 2 lectures and l seminar per week Pre requisites Honours standing The central theme will be lhe advent of modem Bnt1sh pohtics a process 1nclud1ng the Liberal party s collapse and the Labour party s rise the replacement of community by class 1n determ1n1ngparty loyalues theshtftof attennon from rel1g1ous and const1tunonal to social and economic issues Also to be studied are the role - 1n shaping parues and issues - of war post war depression the democrauc fnncluse and personahues hkc Lloyd George the poht1cs of force - suffragettes Ulster and the general stnke This topic 1s not avadable to students who have completed topic 33318 The Transformauon of Bnnsh Poht1cs 1910 1931

Preliminary reading Blewett N The peers the parties and the people the Bntish general elections of 1910 (Macmillan 1972) Clarke P F Lancaslure and the new liberalism (Cambridge Univ Pr 1971) Cowhng IV The impact of labour (Cambridge Univ Pr 1971) Erny H V Liberals radicals and social politics, 1892 1914 (Cambndge Univ Pr 1973)

Text books McK1bb1n R The evolution of the labour party 1910 1921 (0 UP 1975) Morgan K 0 The age of Lloyd George (Allen &: Unw1n 1971)• Read D Edward1at1 England 1901 1915 society and polrt1cs (Harrap 1972)• Taylor A J P English history 1914 1915 (Penguin 1970)• \V1Ison T The downfall of the liberal party (Collins 1966)

242

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Units 12

33419 MEXICO UNDER CARDENAS, 1934-1940 Mr ] Mallon

Level Honours Durauon First half year Class Contact 2 lectures per week for 6 weeks and one seminar per week Pre requisites Honours standing

This topic evaluates the Cardenas administratton in the context of the Mexican Revolution and examines the forces both national and 1nternat1onal which have shaped contemporary Mexican society This topic is not available to students "ho have completed topic 33304 Mexico under Cardenas

Preliminary reading Cline H F Mexico revolution to evolution 1940 1960 (0 UP 1966)• Cumberland C C Mexico the struggle for modernity (0 UP 1968)• Kirk B Covering the Mexican front (Oklahoma Univ Pr 1941) Ross S R ls the Mexican revolution dead' (Borzoi 1966)• Townsend W C Lazaro Cardenas (Wahr 1952) Wilkie J W and M1chaels A L Revolution zn Mexico (Bono1 1969)•

33421 ULSTER AND IRELAND Dr A R G Griffiths

(Not offered 1n 1978)

Untts 12 Level Honours Duranon Full year

33422 NEW WAYS IN SOCIAL HISTORY Professor E Richards

Class Con tact 1 seminar per week Pre requisites Honours standing

This topic will explore some recent developments 1n the lnerature of social history Wllh

parucular regard to research methodology Its aim is to bnng to the attention of Honours students some important h1stoncal work for example that of John Foster Ferdnand Braudel Charles Tilly Michael Anderson Alan Armstrong In addttton to this the topic \Vtll consider some of the problems associated with special approaches to h1stoncal study for example oral history women s lustory m1nor1ty htstones history from below psycho history and the claims made on beh·llf of social history as an 1ntegranng h1stoncal d1sc1phne The general theme of the course will be the use of social sciences methods in his Lory

243

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Topics tn American Studtes

GENERAL INFORMATION American Studies ts an tnterd1scipltnary programme designed to allow second and ll11rd year students to develop a concentration of study on the Unned States Baste ma1or sequence requirements are described 1n Appendix A of Statute 10 1 Schedule 2 Students who do not wish to take these topics as a basic ma1or sequence In American Studies may take them as part of a major sequence 1n other d1sc1phnes e g top1c34204 may be taken as topic 33213 In History topic 34202 may be taken as top1c352061n Pohucs 34301 may be taken as the first half of Cognate 18210 In Enghsh 34302 may be taken as topic 38313 tn Sociology American Studies topics may also be taken as electives and where approved as cognates Where possible parucular prov1s1on 1s made for part ume students and in 1978 1f part ume enrolments 1n American Studies topics warrant It cons1derauon \v11l be given to repeaung certain classes and/or to prov1d1ng concentrated blocks of classes at times sunable for part time students

Second year topics The following second year topics are available

34204 The I:mergence of Modem America Fust half year 34202 Approaches to the Study of American Poht1cs - Second half year 34240 American Studies - Second year seminar

The second year topics are intended to introduce students to the study of American society and pohucs The fust topic explores the development of modem American society from mtd nineteenth century to the present the second topic builds on that histoncal basis in studying the 1nstttuttons and practices of American poht1cs For students taking both topics as part of an Amencan Studies basic d1sc1phne sequence there is a seminar hoking both areas of study The seminar explores aspects of Amencan social structure 1n the nineteenth century Work 1n the seminar exempts students from an equivalent work load m 34202

Tlurd year topics The follow1ng third year topics are available

34301 Literature and Society in Amenca - First half year 34302 (38313) Contemporary American Society - Second half year 34340 Amencan Studies -Thud Year Seminar

The thud year topics are concerned wnh the study of recent Amencan hterature .ind Amencan society The fust topic 1denuftes a number of themes and sources in modern Amencan wnt1ng and students are encouraged to focus thetr reading around one of these areas The second topic is a research course in which students are encouraged to identify areas of contemporary Amencan society for 1nvest1gat1on from the vantage point of soc1ology For students taking both topics as part of an Amencan Studies bas1cd1scipltne there ts a seminar hnk1ng both areas of study The seminar explores the relauons b~t,veen literature and the society Work 1n the seminar exempts students from an equivalent work load 10 34301

Honours program1ne Students may enter fourth year Amencan Studies after sausfactory performance in either third year Amencan Studies or (\vlth the penn1ss1on of the Professor of Amencan Stud1ec;) 1n one of the second or thud year Amencan Studies topics The Honours programme 1s specified in Appendix C of Statute IO 1 Schedule 2 Topic 34401 Studies in Amencan Social Cnt1c1sm is also available as Pohucs Honours topic 35408 or as a single topic 10

History Honours 33415

244

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Diploma in Social Sciences American Studies

The programme for students taking the Diploma in Social Sciences in the Amencan Studies D1sc1pltne is as follows

(a) The following thud year topics 34301 Luerature and Society in Amenca 34302 Contemporary Amencan Society (b) The £ollow1ng Honours topics 34401 Studies in Amencan Social Cnt1cism (c) A thesis of approximately 15 000 words to be 'vrHten under the superv1s1on of a member of the Amencan Studies staff

Related Studies

6 units 6 units

12 units

12 units

In 'ldd1uon 10 those topics approved as Cognates for Amencan Studies \Vhtch are hsted 1n the J:nrolmcnt Handbook attention is drawn to the follo\v1ng topics taught in other d1sc1phnes which are of interest to students in Amencan Studies These topics do not form part of the basic degree requuements for Amencan Studies but may be considered subject to any prerequ1sucs in the respective d1sc1phnes as relevant elecnves for students seeking further work on Amencan matenals 16318 roundations of American Architecture (see hsung for Visual Ans) 18202 Nauve Themes and Styles (see ltsung for l!.nghsh) 3221 l H1stoncal Geography of the Unued States (sec listing for Geography) 31302 Amencan Economic Development (see hst1ng for Ecortomic History)

Second Year Topics

34204 (33213) THE EMERGENCE OF MODERN AMERICA Profes~or P F Bourke and Dr G fly[ Tobtn

Units 6 Level Second year Durauon r1rst half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l t\vo hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes None

A study of the impact on Amencan society of 1ndustnal change from mid nineteenth century to the present and of the subsequent extension of American polver and influence on a global scale Emphasis \VIll be placed on the extent to \Vh1ch the move a'vay from a rural economy and rural values brought aboul unexpected shifts 1n social structure and gave a new dimension to the long standing debate concerning the nature of Amencan society and the place of the ind1v1dual \V1th1n that soetety Areas discussed \v11l 1nclude race ethn1c1ty urbanisation and foreign policy

Reference books Bernstein B J ed Towards a new past dissenting essays tn American history (Pantheon 1968) Bernstein B J and Matusow A J eds Twentieth century America recent interpretations 2nd ed (Harcourt Brace and World 1972) Burner D ed The diversity of modern America (Appleton Century Crofts 1970) D1nncrstein L andjaher F C ed Thealtens ahistoryofethntcminont1es1nAmenca (Appleton Century Crofts 1970) Hays S The response to industrialism (Chic'lgo Univ Pr 1967) Kolko G The triumph of conservatism (Quadrangle 1967) Kradttor A S ed Up fro1n the pedestal selected writings in the history of American fe1n1ntsm (Quadrangle 1968) Lasch C The new radicalism in A1nenca (Vintage 1967) Leuchtenbcrg 'V E The penis of prosperity 1914 1932 (Chicago Univ Pr 1958) Wiebe R The search for order 1877 1920 (Hill and Wang 1967) W1lhams W A The tragedy of American diplomacy 2nd ed (Delta 1972)

245

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

34202 (35206) APPROACHES TO THE STUDY OF AMERICAN POLITICS

Units 6 Level Second year Durauon Second half year

Dr D A DeBats

Clas~ Contacl 2 leclures and I tu tonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None

A basically contemporary topic on selected aspects of Amcncan pohucs 1n theory and 1n pracuce The lectures are structured about the following themes (1) theAmencan pol1t1cal culture racial ethnic and economic aspects of Amencan politics (2) A1nencan pohucal 1nsu1uuons a cnucal assessment (3) the nature of Amencan ideology spec1f1cally liberal leftist and nghust 1deolog1es black poht1cs and black power (4) models useful in understanding US foreign pohcy and confhcts within Amencan society Th<." follo,ving books a.re especially useful for the purpose of llus topic

Set book Lcv1nL E L and Cornwell E r: An introduction to Aniencan government (Macmillan 1975)

Reference books Ba1lyn B The origins of Ainencan politics (Knopf 1970) Bell D ed The radical right (Anchor 1964) Burnham \V D Critical elections and the mainsprings of A1nencan politics (Norton 1970) Connolly 'V E The bias of pluralis1n (Atherton 1969) Crockett N ed The power elite HI America (I-Ie'lth 1970) Cruse H The crisis of the negro intellectual (Morrow 1969) Dahl R Pluraltst democracy in the US conflict and consent (R'lnd McNally 1967) Domhoff G W Who rules A1nerica' (Prentice Hall 1967) r1sher S Power and the black comn2unity (Random I-louse 1970) Lasch C The agony of the American left (Deutsch 1970) McConnell G Private power and A1nerzcan de1nocracy (Knopf 1967) l'vlagdoff H The age of 11npenalzs1n the econo1nics of US foreign policy (Monthly Rcv1e\v 1969) Mills C W The power elite (0 UP 1963) Neustadt R Preszdent1al power the polllzcs of leadership (Wiley 1960) Vile !VI J C Politics in the US A (Allen Lane 1970) 'Ve1nste1n J and Eakins D W eds For a new A1nenca essays in history and jJolitics from Studies on the Left 1959 1967 (Vintage 1970) \V1Iha.ms \V A The tragedy of American diplomacy 2nd ed (Della 1972)

34240 AMERICAN STUDIES SECOND YEAR SEMINAR Units None Le' el Second year Durauon Second half year Chss Contact I two hour sen11nar per week subsututed for seminars in 34202 Pre requ1s1tes Adm1~s1on to ma1or sequence tn Amenc'ln Studies or approval of He'ld of D1sc1phnc for students not taking Amencan Studies 'ls '1 1na1or sequence

A research seminar based on m'lnuscnpt census schedules of the U S and other pnmary sources Students are engaged 111 ong1nal pro1ccts on the social history of 19th century commun1t1es in the US Among the areas for research arc these r'lceandethn1c1ty public and pnvate 1nsutuuons family structure thepos1t1on of women patterns of employment the rn1grat1ons of people Work in this seminar exempts students from an equivalent work load 1n 34202

446

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Tlurd Year Topics

34301 LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN AMERICA Dr L M Bazrd

Unus G Level Thud year Durauon rust half year Class Contact 2 lectures .tnd l tutonal per week Pre requ1sues Compleuon of 24 unlls of work 1n second year topics

Students will be expected to study Sections I IV and one other of the followzrig Sections wluch have been chosen to illustrate some of the ma1or concerns of Amencan lllerature The emphasis 1s chiefly buL not enurely on twenueth century de,elopments

I Fro1n Realis1n to the Depression Tw'lin M The adventures of fluckleberry Finn (Penguin) Dreiser T Sister Carne (0 U P ) \Vh'lrton E The age of innocence (Penguin) Lewis S Babbitt (Signet) Steinbeck J The grapes of wrath (Pan)

II The War The1ne Crane S The red badge of courage (Signet) Hemingway r. For who1n the bell tolls (Panther) Vonnegut K Slaughterhouse five (P'lnther) Mailer N The annzes of the night (Penguin)

III Dra1na and Social Cnticzsm 0 Neill E The zceman co1neth (Jonathan Cape) M1llcr A The crucible (Penguin) Williams T Orpheus descending (Penguin)

IV Symbolzs1n and Social Cntzc1sm Melville H Moby Dick (Penguin) Hawthorne N The Blzthedale romance (Dell) Ellison R Invisible 1nan (Modern Library) 0 Connor F Everytlung that nses 1nust converge (Penguin) Bellow· S Hu1nboldt s gift (Penguin)

34340 AMERICAN STUDIES THIRD YEAR SEMINAR Unus None Ltvel Thud year Durauon Fust h'll£ year Class Contacl I two hour seminar per \veek substltuled for seminars in 34301 Pre requtsttes Admission lo tlurd year 0£ a major sequence in Amencan Studies or approval of I-lead of Discipline for students not taking Amencan Studies as a major sequence

A sem1nar\vh1ch explores f1ct1011al and non £1cuonal wnt1ng on certain themes class and status race pohtics region urban hfe The seminar proceeds by taking in successive weeks a work of fiction and an lustoncal or soc1olog1cal work on the chosen theme Members of the seminar explore 1n add1uon some theoretical wnungon the relauonsh1ps between lHerature and social analysis Work in this seminar cxempls students from an equivalent work load 1n 34301

Units 6

34302 (38313) CONTEMPORARY AMERICAN SOCIETY Dr R A lVitton

Level Third year Durauon Second half year Class Contact 1 l\VO hour seminar a week

247

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Pre requisites Completion of 24 units of second year l0p1cs

This lop1c is designed to stimulate students to carry our research projects from a sociolog1cal perspective on aspects of contemporary American society IL will bea ~emtndr course co ord1naung the research interests of participaung studenls and 1s designed to encourage students to draw their data from a vanely of contemporary mecha 1nclud1ng films and music Prehm1nary reading hsts 'v1II be available from thecom1nencementof the course

Reference books Fabnz10 R The rhetoric of no (Holt Rinehart 8c Winston 1970) Goodman M ed The movement loward a new Anienca (Pilgrim 1970) L1ndenfeld F ed Radical perspectives on social problems 2nd e<l (Macmillan 1973) Lumsden I Close the 49ih parallel lhe A1nencan1sation of Canada (Toronto Univ Pr 1970) McGregor C Up against the wall Amenca (Angus 8c Robertson 1973)• Roszak T The 1nak1ng of a counler culture (Faber 1971) Zellhn M American sociely (Markham 1970)

Honours Topic

34401 (35408, 33415) STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL CRITICISM

Professor P F Bourke Dr D A DeBats Dr G M Tobui Unns 12 (or 6) Level Honours Duration Terms I II Class Contact I weekly two hour lecture/seminar tn Term I penod1c se1n1nars 'lS

arranged and 1nd1v1dual superv1s1on 111 Term II Pre requisites Honours standing

The first half of the topic which may be taken as a 6 unit topic or as the fnst part of a 12 unit topic proceeds by way of a weekly lecture/seminar on major authors and groups of authors 111 the development of modem Amencan social cnuc1sm Wntersconsidcred vary from year to year but have generally included from the penod 1910 to the present a range of hberal conservative and radical ideologies The second half of the topic wluch may be taken 1.S a 6 unlt topic or as the second part of a 12 unit topic 1s a research seminar based on a substanual collection of penod1cals of social cr1t1c1sm pubhshed bel\veen 1880 and the present Students choose one of these penod1cals or part of the sequence of a penodical for concentrated study and work towards the presentation of a research report on the context history and content of the penod1cal Penod1cals available include maJor 'veekly fortnightly monthly and quarterly pubhcauons 111 the t\venueth century ranging from anardust to conservative cnuc1sm

248

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Topics in Politics

GENERAL INFORMATION Ordniary Degree Basic J\.JaJor Sequence Requirement 1n Pohucs-36 unas comprising Politics I (12 unns) 1nd 24 units from upper ye1r levels It is not necessary for 12 units to be ta.ken from each of second 1nd tlurd year levels-for instance 6 might be taken from topics at second year level and 18 from topics at thud year level or vice versa Students should note however that thud year level topics may be at higher level of d1fhculty than those offered at second year level and that tt is 1n general advisable to have taken rel1tcd second year level topics before taking those offered at thud year level

First year level 35110 Poht1csl The following second year level topics are available

First half year

35203

35204 35205

35201 35206 35207 35209

The Government and Pohucs of the Peoples Republic of Ch111a International Poht1cs Peace and War Pohucal Theory Radical Political Thought

Second half year

Party Party System and Society 10 Australia Approaches to the Study of American Politics The Pohucs of Developing Areas The African Case Power Pohllcs and Society An Introduction to Poht1cal Sociology

The following thud year level topics are available

First half year

35301 35306 35312

35316

35304 35313 35315

Polu1cal Change 1n T\venueth Century China Southeast Asian Pol1ttcal Development People and Politics A Cross Cultural Study of Australia the United States and Canada Government and Pohttcs of European Society

Second half year

International Pohucs Austrahan Foreign Pohcy Comparauve Strategics for Development Internattonal Pohucs fhe Poht1cs of L1mtted War

Honours Degree

An l-lonours programme 1n Pohucs consists of the followtng

(a) Three topics chosen from among these topics offered 1n 1978 35403 The Chinese Cultural Revolutton 35405 lnternauonal Pohtics The Cold \Var 35408 Studies 10 American Social Crit1c1sm 35409 Poht1cal Philosophy 35416 Ehtcs 1n Southeast Asia 35418 The Soaahst Idea 35426 The Wh1tlam Governments 1972 75 35427 Stab1hty and Change 111 Contemporary France 35428 The Middle East Confltct

12 units

6 unlls 6 units 6 units

6 units 6 unlls 6 units

6 units

6 units 6 units

6 units 6 units

6 units 6 units 6 units

6 units 6 untts 6 units 6 untts 6 units 6 units 6 untts 6 units 6 units

By special arrangement 111 Honours topic from another d1sc1phne in the School or from the Poht1cs Department at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide 6 unus

(b) 35421 Reading Course (by examrnauon) 6 untts (c) 35130 Honours Thesis 12 units

Diploma 1n Social Sciences Politics Pre requ1s1tes for adm1ss1on to the Diploma 1n Social Sciences are set out in Statute 10 I

249

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Schedule 16 A hst of topics available to Pohucs diploma students 1s contained in Appendix A to that Schedule The course of study for the Diploma 10 Social Sciences Pohucs which may extend for a maximum of three consecuuve years compnses 36 units as follows (a) 35421 General Paper and Reading Course (b) 35425 B1bhograph1c Studies in Pohucs (c) one further Honours level topic

6 units 12 units 6 units

(d) two thud year level Pohncs topics ea 6 units Further enqu1nes should be made to staff members or to the Pollltcs d1sc1phne office

First Year Topic

35110 POLITICS I Convenor Dr D H jaensch Also Dr j Anglzm Mr A Mack

and other members of staff Untts 12 Level First year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutonal per week Pre requisites None

Each term centres on one of three areas 1n which the d1sc1phne offers upper level topics viz pohucal theory Australian politics and 1n1emauonal pohucs The first term examines Australian pohucs under such themes as formal 1nsutut1ons party pol1t1cs and the structure of power The second term is concerned wtth 1ntemat1onal pohucs 1n particular with relauonsh1ps between nch and poor countnes the problem~ of underdevelopment and the global confrontauons between capitalism and communism The third term examines 1deolog1es for example hberahsm conservatism marx1sm democratic soc1ahsm and the concept of ideology

Prehnunary reading Thomson D cd Political ideas (Penguin 1969)• Solomon D Australia s govern1nent and parliament (Nelson 1975)• Donaldson P Worlds apart (Pelican 1971)•

Text books Term I Erny II V The politics of Australian democracy 2nd ed (Macm1llan 1977)• Term II Mack A and Plant D East West North South intervention development and imperialism (Fhnders Univ 1977)• Term III

' Arblaster A and Lukes S The good society (Methuen 1972)•

Second Year Topics

35201 PARTY, PARTY SYSTEM AND SOCIETY IN AUSTRALIA Dr D H ]aensch Mr A Parlun and Mr D Woodward

Unlls 6 Level Second year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutorial per week Pre-requ1s1tes None

The topic will focus on the role of party tn Australian poht1csand on theAustrahan party system It ,vill involve a study of party history function ideology organ1sat1on and electoral compet1t1on One ma1or emphasis will be the apphcauon of contemporary

250

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

theoreucal analyses of parties and party systems to the Australian snuauon a second an exam1nat1on of the environmental and social supports of Australian parties and the Austrahan party system

Reference books Rose R Electoral behaviour (Free Pr 1974) Duverger M Party, politics and pressure groups a comparative introduction (Crowell 1972) Epstein L D Political parties in western democracies (Pall Mall 1967) L1pset S M and Rokkan S Party systems and voter alignments (Free Pr 1967) McDonald N A The study of pol1tzcal parties (Random House 1967) La Palombara J and Weiner M Political parties and political development (Princeton Univ Pr 1966) Alford R R Party and society (Rand McNally 1964) Jupp J Australian party politics (Melbourne Univ Pr 1968) -..1

Overacker L Australian parties 1n a changing society (Cheshire 1968) Mayer H Australian politics a third reader (Cheshne 1973) Erny H V The politics of Australian democracy (Macmillan 1974) Sarton G Parties and party systems (Cambndge Univ Pr 1976) A1tk1n D Stability and change 1n Australian politics (AN U 1977)

Units 6

35203 THE GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS OF THE CHINESE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC

Dr W Brugger Mr G Young and Mr D Woodward

Level Second year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutorial per \Veek Pre requ1snes None A bnef 1ntroduct1on to the history of Twentieth Century China followed by a detailed exam1nauon of the Yen an and Soviet models of development and the mod1flcauon of these models dunng the 1950s and 1960s Areas examined will include rural pohcy urban policy the development of thf'• Chinese Communist Party industnal management educauon the role of the Army and the concept of Peoples War The top1cw1ll conclude with a study of the Cultural Revoluuon and its aftermath

Reference books Brugger B Contemporary China an introductory history (Croom Helm 1977) Schurmann H F Ideology and organization 1n communist China rev ed (Cahfomta Univ Pr 1971) Selden M The Yenan way in revolutionary China (Harvard 1971) Vogel E F Canton under communism (Harper 1971) Mao Tse tung Selected readings (Foreign Language Pr 1971) Schram S ed Mao Tse tung unrehearsed (Pehcan 1974) Schram S eel Mao Tse tung (Pehcan 1966)

A hst of prehm1nary reading 1s available from the Pohucs Ofhce

Units 6

35204 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS PEACE AND WAR Dr ] D E Plant and Mr A ] R Mack

Level Second year Duration F1rst half year Class Contact l lecture and l two hour tu tonal per week Pre requisites None

251

~\

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

An exam1nat1on against a background of 1nternauonal history since the Second World War of some maJOf determinant features of contemporary 1nternat1onal relations Particular attention 1s given to the roles of nuclear weapons 1mpenahsm the Untted Nauons limned conventional war guernlla \Varfare and covert 1ntervent1on These aspects of 1ntemat1onal poht1cs are examined tn a senes of case studies lvh1ch include the ong1ns of the Cold War the Korean War rhe coup 10Guatemala1954 theSue-t Cnsts the Cuban M1ss1le Cns1s Portuguese African Wars and recent conflict in the Middle East

Preliminary reading Ambrose S E Rise to globalism (Pehcan 1971)• La Feher W America Russia and the cold war, 1945 1975 (Wiley 1976)* Thomas H The Suez affair (Pehcan 1967)• Davis U Mack A and Yuval Davis N eds Israel and the Palestinians (llhaca 1975)• Taber R The war of the flea (Paladin 1972)• Rosen S and Jones W The logic of international relations (Winthrop 1977)• Young E A farewell to arms control' (Pelican 1972)• Slovo ] W1lk1nson J and Davidson B Southern Africa the new politics of revolu.t1on (Penguin 1976)•

Reference books Owen R and Sutchffe B eds Studies in the theory of imperialism (Longman 1972)• Rosen S and Kurth J eds Testing theories of economic imperialism (D C Heath 1974) Quester G Power action and interaction readings on international politics (Little Brown 1971)• Gray C The Soviet American arms race (Heath 1976) York H F comp Arms control (Freeman 1973)• Laqueur W The Israel Arab reader (Pehcan 1970)• Nicholas H G The United Nations as a political institution 4th ed (0 UP 1971)• D1v1ne R A ed The Cuban missile crisis (Quadrangle 1971)• Kalka J and Kolko G The limits of power the World and United States foreign polury 1945 54 (Harper &: Row 1972)• Spanier ] W American foreign policy since World War II 4th ed (Nelson 1972)• Schurmann H F The logic of world power (Pantheon 1974)•

35205 POLITICAL THEORY RADICAL POLITICAL THOUGHT Mr N Wzntrop

Untts 6 Level Second year Duration First half year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week Pre requ1s1tes None

This topic 1s concerned wtth t1le cnt1cal study of the pohucal theory of the radical left It will examine the pohucal thought of Marx and subsequent Marxists Lenin and the Len1n1sts nv'll vaneues of soctahsm the anarchists and the New Left

Prel11n1nary reading Cranston M W ed The new left six critical essays (Bodley Head 1970) Deutscher I ed The unfinished revolution Russia 1917 1967 (0 UP 1967) Foot P Why you should be a socialist (Pluto 1977) Fned A and Sanders R Socialist thought a documentary history (Anchor 1964)• Gomb1n R The origins of modern leftism (Penguin 1975) Ho,vard D and Klare K E ed The unknown dimension European Marxism since Lenin (Basic 1972) Howe I ed Essential works of socialism (Yale Univ Pr 1976) McLellan D The thought of Karl Marx (Macmillan 1971) Page S W ed Lenin dedicated Marxist or revolutionary prag1natist (Heath 1970) Woodcock G ed The anarchist reader (Fontana 1977)•

252

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

35206 (34202) APPROACHES TO THE STUDY OF AMERICAN POLITICS

Unns 6 Level Second year Durauon Second half year

Dr D A DeBats

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requisites None

See dcscnpuon under topic 34202

35207 THE POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS THE AFRICAN CASE

Unas 6 Level Second year Duration Second half year

Dr C Gertzel

Class Contact 2 lectures and l tu tonal per "eek Pre rcqu1sues None

The topic ts designed to introduce students to the study of pol1ucs and dtvclopment in lhe 1ndtpcndenl Afnc'l.n states It ts concerned pnmanly \Vllh pohucs at the 1nacro level A

bncf introductory survey of the contemporary Afncan scene will lead on to an an>ly~rs of social and economic change 10 colonial and post colonial Afnca and nat1onahsm and the n•ll01tJl1st struggle for independence This will be followed by an anal}sts of some of the ma1or issues of contemporary pohucs etchn1c1ty and class party rule and one party1sm ideology and development the role of the m1htary 1nst1tut1onal change cleavages 111 society and the allocation of resources The topic will conclude with a bnef cons1derat1on of interstate relations 1n Africa

Reference books Lloyd P C Africa zn social change (Penguin 1966) or Lloyd P C Classes crises and coups (Pal1d1n 1973) Markovitz 1 L ed Afrzcatz politics and society (Free Pr 1970) '\lelcl1 C eel Poltttcal modernizat1on <'VadS\\Orth 1967) Doro M E and Stultz N M eds Gouenung tn black Afrzca (Prentice Hall 1970) Lofch1e M ed The state of the nations (Cal1forn1a Univ P1 1971) FJT~l R The barrel of a gun (Ptngu1n 1970) Post K The new states of West Africa (Pengtun 1964) Zolberg A Creatzng political order (Rand McNally 1966) Bretl L A Colonialts1n and u.nderdevelop1ne11t 111 East Africa (Heinemann 1973) Cliffe I and Saul J eds Soczal1s1n in Tanzarua vols I and II (Last Afncan Publishing I-louse 1972) E1nploy1nent u1co1nes and equaltly a slralegy for 1ncrea~1ng prod1~ct1ve eniplo) nienl uz Kenya (lnternauon•I Labour Office 1972)

35208 POLITICAL THEORY PROBLEMS OF DEMOCRATIC THEORY Mr N H'1ntrop

(Nol available 10 1978)

253

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

35209 POWER, POLITICS AND SOCIETY AN INTRODUCTION TO POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY

Unus 6 Level Second year Durauon Second half year

Mr R DeAngelis

Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutonal per week Pre requisites None

This topic is an overvie'v of the broad field of pohucal sociology tts main theoreucal concerns concepts and emp1ncal findings about the relanonsh1ps between power pohttcs and society The course deals with the follow1ng kinds of problems I) the extent to which power and pohucal relanonsh1ps are necessary characterisucs of certain kinds of social arrangements 2) the ways tn 'vh1ch different kinds of political processes 1nst1tut1ons and regimes come into being and interact wnh society 3) the ways social and pohucal changes can be classified and explained and 4) the social bases of ind1v1dual poht1cal behaviour Spec1£1c topics to be covered include 1) a companson of change/conflict and order/consensus views of social organisation 2) an analysis of the men ts of pluralist ehust and class theones of po,ver arrangements tn 1ndustr1al soc1et1es 3) an 1nvest1gauon of the social bases of different kinds of poht1cal development and regimes (e g fascism socialism hberal polyarch1es) and 4) an examinanon of role 1n society played by such poht1cal phenomena as parues voluntary associauons voting ideology polll1cal culture pohucal soc1ahsat1on and pohucal paruc1pat1on

Assessment will be based upon three two thousand word essays

Text book Dowse R and Hughes J Political sociology (Wiley 1973)•

Related reading Connell R Ruling class ruling culture (Cambridge Univ Pr 1977)• Dahl R Polyarchy (Yale Univ Pr 1972)• Encel S Equality and authority a study of class status and power in Australia (Cheshire 1970)' Greenstein F and Polsby N eds Non governmental polztics (Addison Wesley 1975) Fned M The evolution of political society (Random House 1968)• Davies A F Essays in political sociology (Cheshire 1972)• Dahrendorf R Class and class conflict in industrial society (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972)' Lane R Politzcal ideology (Free Pr 1967)• L1pset S M Political man (Heinemann 1963)• Marx K The 18th Brumaire of Louis Bonaparte (lnternat1onal Pub 1963)• Olson M Jr The logic of collecllve action (Harvard Univ Pr 1965)• Hamilton R Class and politics in the US (Wiley 1975)• Moore B Jr The social origins of dictators/up and democracy (Beacon 1966)"' Runc1man W G Relative deprivation and social JUSltce (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1966)' Verba S and N1e N Political participation in America (H·uper & Row· 1976)•

Third Year Level Topics

35301 POLITICAL CHANGE IN TWENTIETH CENTURY CHINA Dr W Brugger and Mr G Young

Units 6 Level Third year Durauon First half year Class Contact 1 seminar and I tu tonal per week

254

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Pre requisites 35203 The Government and Pohucs of the Chinese Peoples Republic at C grade or beuer

Students choose their O\Vn areas of interest for detailed study and these define the nature of the course of seminars Possible areas include educauon the Chinese Communist Party the role of art and literature the changing role of law the Anny the pohc1es concerning national m1nont1es Marxism and China and women 1n China Attempts to examine Chinese problems 1n a comparauve context are encouraged Reading lists will be tailored to md1vidual study assignments

35302 AUSTRALIAN PUBLIC POLICY AND ADMINISTRATION

(Not available tn 1978)

35304 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS AUSTRALIAN FOREIGN POLICY

Units 6 Level Third year Durauon Second half year

Dr ] D E Plant

Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week and occasional lectures Pre requ1sues None

Australian government and oppos1uon foreign po hey since the advent of the Curtin Labor Government tn 1941 Emphasis 1n this topic will be on the relauonsh1p of national and 1nternauonal factors 1n the development and 1mplementauonof a nauonal foreign pohcy Students are expected to wnte a research essay of 5 6 000 words

Preliminary reading Cam1llen J A An introduction to Australian foreign policy (Jacaranda 1976)• Hudson W J Australian diplomacy (Macm1llan 1970)• Alb1nsk1 H S Australian external policy under Labor (Queensland Univ Pr 1977)

There are no prescribed texts The following are among books referred to 1n the topic which will necessarily make extensive use of Hansard newspapers penochcals and theses

Greenwood G and Bray P Approaches to Asia Australian post war policies and attitudes (McGraw Hill 1974) Alb1nsk1 H S Politics and foreign policy in Australia the impact of Vietnam and conscription (Duke Univ Pr 1970) A1b1nsk1 H S Australian policies and attitudes towards China (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1965) Cairns ] F The eagle and the lotus 2nd ed (Lansdowne 1971)• Clark C ed Australian foreign policy towards a reassessment (Cassell 1973)• Clark G J In fear of China (Lansdowne 1967)• Evatt H V Foreign policy of Australia (Angus & Robertson 1945) McQueen H A new Britannia (Penguin 1970)• Mansergh N Survey of British Commonwealth affairs problems of wartime co operation and Post war change 1939 1952 (0 UP 1958) Millar T B Australia s forezgn policy (Angus & Robertson 1968) Playford J and K1rsner D Australian capitalism towardsasoc1alistcnt1que(Pengu1n 1971)' Reese T R Australia New Zealand and the United States a survey of international relations 1941 1968 (0 UP 1969) Teichmann M E eel New dtrecttons 1n Australian foreign policy (Penguin 1969)• Watt A The evolution of Australian foreign polzcy 1938 1965 (Cambndge Urnv Pr 1967)'

255

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

35306 SOUTHEAST ASIAN POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT Dr HS Leng

Units 6 Level Thud year Duration Fust half year Class Contact l lecture and l two hour seminar per week Pre requisites None

A comparative study of political change 1n Southeast Asia Particul'lr attention will be paid to the following topics coloniahsm nauonahsm and the crcauon of nauon states problems of nauonal 1dent1ty and integration types of regnnes and then leg1umauon poht1cal compet1uon and conflict as expressed 1n pohucal parties and clcct1ons nots revolts and proxy wars competing elites and the struggle for authority and effecuveness changes 1n polu1cal awareness and theeffecton the type and intcnsuy of poltucal demands and on governmental and pohtical response regionalism and foreign involvement One essay and one research paper are requHed This topic may not be counted towards a degree in add1uon to topic 37302 Pohucal and Economtc Development 10 Southeast Asia

Preliminary reading Pye L W Southeast Asia s pol1ttcal systems 2nd ed (Prenuce Hall 1974) Steinberg D J ed In search of Southeast Asta a modern history (Pall Mall 1971) Shaplen R Time out of hand revolution and reaction in Southeast Asia (Deutsch 1969)

Reference books Bellows T J The peoples acllon party of Singapore emergence of a dominant party system (Yale Univ Pr 1970) Corpuz 0 D The Philippines (Prcnuce Hall 1965) Dahm B Sukarno and the struggle for Indonesian independence (Cornell Univ Pr 1969) Feith H The decline of constitutional democracy in Indonesia (Cornell Univ Pr 1962) Feith H and Castles L eds Indonesian political thinking 1945 1965 (Cornell Univ Pr 1970) Grossholtz J Politics in the Philippines (Little Bro\vn 1964) Ht1n Aung M A history of Burma (Columbia Univ Pr 1967) Insor D Thailand a political social and economic analysis (Allen & Unwin 1963) McAhster J T cd Southeast Asia the politics of national integration (Random Houst 1973) McAhster J T Vietnam the origins of revolution (Knopf 1969) McVey R T eel Indonesia (Yale Univ Pr 1963) Means G P Malaysian politics (London Univ Pr 1970) Morttmer R ed Showcase state the illusion of Indonesia s accelerated modernization (Angus & Robertson 1973) Mor tmer R Indonesian communism under Sukarno (Cornell Univ Pr 1974) Riggs F W Thailand the modernization of a bureaucratic pohty (J:ast West 1966) Tilman R 0 ed Man state and society in contemporary Southeast Asia (Pall Mall 1969)

35308 AN AMERICAN GOVERNING CLASS? STUDIES IN THE HISTORICAL DISTRIBUTION OF POWER IN AMERICA

Not available 1n 1978

35309 SOCIAL CONTRACT Not available in 1978

256

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

35312 PEOPLE AND POLITICS A CROSS NATIONAL STUDY OF AUSTRALIA, THE UNITED STATES AND CANADA

Dr D H ]aensch Dr D A DeBats and Professor D C Corbett

Units 6 Level Third year Duration First half year Class Contact 2 lectures I two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes None

The topic 1s designed Lo explore the uuhty of comparauveanalys1s in the understanding of Australia the Untted States and Canada Methodologies of comparative analysis as defined in pohucal science literature will form the first section of the course in the second secuon attenuon will be focussed on the basic h1stoncal soc1olog1cal and 1nsutuuonal differences and s1milar1ues among the three societies e g social ong1ns of populauon pollucal geography the defin1uon and 1nsutut1onahsat1on of pohucs and the role of pohttcal parties tn determ1n1ng the hnkage between social and pohucal tension The final secuon of the topic \VIII attempt to define the convergent and divergent developmental trends \Vhtch have shaped the contemporary pohucs of eadi society Among the developmental trends considered will be changing structures of power determinants of poht1cal behaviour and funcuons of pohucal parues The conclusion of the topic w1ll focus quite spec1f1callyon the question of whether\vecan speak of d1suncuve pol1t1es tn the modem world Students may opt for this topic at euher the second or third year level although they may find courses in Australian and/or American pohttcs valuable 1ntroducuons

Reference books Alb1nsk1 H S Canadian and Australian politics 1n comparative perspective (0 UP 1973) Alford R R Party and society the Anglo American democracies (Rand McNally 1963) Bernstein B ed Towards a new past dissenting essays in Amencan history (Vintage 1969) Bhshen BR andothers Canadiansoczely sociolog1calperspectives 3rded (Macmillan 1968) Burnham W Critical elections and mainspring of American politics (Norton 1970) Crowley F eel A new history of Australia (Heinemann 1974) Edgar D Social change 1n Australia (Cheshire 1974) Encel S Equality and authority a study of class status and power in Australia (Cheshue 1970) Hartz L The founding of new societies studies 1n the history of the Unzted States Latin Amerzca South Africa Canada and Australia (Harcourt Brace & \Vorld 1961) Holl R and Turner J eds The methodology of comparative.research (Free Pr 1970) Hughes C A ed Readings zn Australian government (Queensland Univ Pr 1968) Hunt F ] Soc1al1zat1on 1n Australia (Angus & Robertson 1972) Marnn A and Parker R eds The development of the Australian party system (AN U 1976) Pierce J C and Pnde R A Cross national micro analysis procedures and problerns (Sage 1972) Prescott ] R V Polittcal geography (Methuen 1972) Ro.!>e R Electoral behavior a comparative handbook (Free Pr 1974) Vaughan F and other<; Contemporary issues in Canadian politics (Prenuce Hall 1970) Wanv1ck D and Osherson S eds Comparative research methods (Prentice Hall 1973)

Unus 6

35313 COMPARATIVE STRATEGIES FOR DEVELOPMENT Dr C Gertzel

Level Third year Duranon Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutorial per week

257

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Pre requ1sues None This topic will cr1t1cally examine the strategies of development followed in Kenya Tanzania and Zambia in relauon to contemporary theories of developmenl and underdevelopment using a case study approach

Reference books Brett E A Colonialism and underdevelopment in East Africa (Heinemann 1973) Chffe L and Saul S eds Soc1alisminTanzan1a1 2vols (EastAfncanPub House 1972) Elhott C ed Constraints on the economic development of Zambia (0 UP 1971) Employment incomes and equality (I L 0 1972) Leys C ed Politics and change in developing countries (Cambndge Univ Pr) Leys C Underdevelopment in Kenya (Heinemann 1975) Nyerere J Freedom and development (0 UP 1973) Nyerere J Freedom and socialism (0 UP 1968) Torcloff W Politics in Zambia (Manchester Univ Pr 1974)

35314 SOCIAL THEORY FROM MARX TO FREUD FROM POLITICS TO SOCIAL SCIENCE

(Not available 10 1978)

Units 6

35315 THE POLITICS OF LIMITED WAR Mr A Mack

Level Third year Duration Second half year Class Conlact l lecture and l two hour tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None

Thts topic addresses Itself to a key problem in 1ntemattonal poht1cs - how m1htanly strong nations may be defeated by them1htanlyweak Examples-which v;tll be included as case studies - a;re the Vietnam Algenan and Portuguese Afncan wars Different approaches to studying such conflicts e g countennsurgency and 1nternauonal relations theory will be analysed and their inadequacies examined Guenl1a warfare tn different strategic contexts e g the Middle East will also be studied as will the theoretical wnungs of the maJor guerilla strategists One purpose of the topic is to demonstrate that the academic dichotomy between foreign and domesuc politics often serves to obscure rather than promote understanding

Reference books Taber R The war of the flea (Citadel 1972) Schurmann F The logic of world power Pantheon 1974) Halberstam D The best and the brightest (Barrie & Jenkins 1972) The Pentagon papers New York Times ed1uon (Bantam 1972) Fitzgerald F Fire on the lake (Little Brown 1972) Minter W Portuguese Africa and the west (Penguin 1972) Sunday Times Insight on Portugal fifty years of dictators/up (Deutsch 1976) Grundy K W Guerrilla struggle in Africa (Grossman 1971) Slovo J W1lk1nson ] and Davidson B Southern Africa the new politics of revolution (Penguin 1976) Pickles D Algeria and France (Methuen 1965) Andrews W G French politics and Algeria (Appleton Century Crofts 1962) Davis U Mack A and Yuval Davis N Israel and the Palestinians (Ithaca Pr 1975) Quandt W B Jabber F and Lesch A M The pol1t1cs of Palestinian nationalism (Cahfom1a Univ Pr 1973)

258

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

35316 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS IN WEST EUROPEAN SOCIETY Mr R DeAngelis

Units 6 Level Third year Duration First half year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None

This topic looks at governmental structures and pohucal processes within the context of European society culture and h1stoncal development Using examples from France Germany Sweden and Italy - countries with very different h1stones and cultures the topic explores both s1milant1es and differences 1n the manner by which these countries have responded to 1ndustr1ahsauon and increased mass pohucal partic1pat1on how pohucal and socio economic changes have 1n teracted over time how trad1uonal structures and values continue to influence contemporary poltt1cs and how modern industrial societies in Europe are governed by whom and for whom Some attention will also be paid bnefly to the Common Market and to the 1nterrelat1onships of foreign and domestic pohc1es

Assessment will be based either on a short exam a two thousand word book review and a three thousand word research paper or on three two thousand word essays

Text books Ehrmann H Politics in France 3rd ed (Ltttle Brown 1976)• Hancock M D Sweden the politics of post industrial change (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973)• He1denhe1mer A The governments of Germany 4th ed (Crowell 1976) Zar1sk1 R Italy the politics of uneven development (Dryden 1972)

Related reading Banfield E The moral basis of a backward society (Free Pr 1958)• Buchan A Europe s futures Europe s choices (Columbia Univ Pr 1969)• Calleo D Europe s future (Norton 1967)• Dahrendorf R Society and democracy in Germany (Anchor 1969)• Dogan M and Rose R European politics a reader (Macmillan 1971)• M1hband R The state in capitalist society (Quartet 1973) Rothman S European society and politics (West 1976)• Tomasson R Sweden prototype of modern society (Ph1ladelph1a 1970) Wylie L Village in the Vaucluse 3rd ed (Harvard Univ Pr 1972)

Honours Topics

35403 THE CHINESE CULTURAL REVOLUTION

Units 6 Level Honours Duration Term 3

Dr W Brugger and Mr G Young

Class Contact 10 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing and 12 units of Pohucs at thud year level at C grade or better

An advanced topic for students who have already taken Pohucs or equivalent work on China

Unlls 6

35405 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS THE COLD WAR Dr] D E Plant

Level Honours Durauon Term 3

259

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Class Contact 10 two hour seminars Pre requisites Honours standing An advanced topic for students who have already taken International Politics

35408 STUDIES IN AMERICAN SOCIAL CRITICISM Dr D A DeBats

Units 6 Level Honours Durauon Terms l and 2 Class Contact 10 two hour seminars Pre requ1sttes Honours standing

For topic descnpt1on refer to topic 34401 Studies in American Ideology

Units 6 Level Honours Durauon Term 3

35409 POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY Mr I Angltm

Class Contact IO two hour seminars Pre requ1sues Honours standing

An exam1natlon of some of the themes concepts and problems in the work of nineteenth - and twentieth - century pohucal philosophers

35416 (37403) ELITES IN SOUTHEAST ASIA Dr HS Leng

Units 6 Level Honours Duration Term 3 Class Contact 10 two hour seminais Pre requisites Honours standing

A soc10/poht1cal analysis of Southeast Asian elues (with particular attention paid to nationahst leaders) their origins social backgrounds recnutmenL patterns power bases ideologies and actions Only the ASEAN countries are to be covered

Units 6 Level Honours Durauon Term l

35418 THE SOCIALIST IDEA Mr N Wtntrop

Class Contact 10 two hour sem1n'lrs Pre requisites Honours standing

An examination of the idea of soc1al1sm and its relevance dOd nrelevance to con temporary social and pohucal concerns in the hghtof the twentieth century democrauc soc1'1.ltst and communist experiences

260

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Unns 6

35421 GENERAL PAPER AND READING COURSE (by examination)

Politzcs staff

Level Honours Dural1on Term 2

35424 DEPENDENCY AND DEVELOPMENT Dr C Gertzel

(Nol available tn 1978)

35425 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL STUDIES IN POLITICS (DIPLOMA TOPIC) Politics Staff

Unns 12 Level Diploma of Social Sciences Durauon Full year Pre requ1s1tes Diploma of Social Science standing

Prep'lrauon by students of a cnucal btbhographtcal ess'lyon a contemporary controversy in pol1t1c'1l studies and the p1epar'1tion of a crtllcal general survey of the recent l1ter'1turc 111 one field of poltl1c'1l slud1es

Units 6

35426 THE WHITLAM GOVERNMENTS, 1972-75

Dr D H ] aensch

Level Honours Durauon Term l Class Contact 10 t\\O hour seminars Pre requ1sues Honours standing

W1tl11n the general theme seminar topics will be determined by the p'lrucular research interests of the students paruc1pat1ng in the course Assessment wtll be based on a b1bltogr'lph1c essay 'lnd 'l research paper

35427 STABILITY AND CHANGE IN CONTEMPORARY FRANCE Mr R DeAngelis

Unus 6 Level 1-lonours Duration Term l Class Contact IO two hour seminars Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing or perm1s~1on of the instructor

An 1nvest1gauon of the sources of and potent1aht1es for n1aJor socio poht1c'll ch'lnge 1n contemporary France as well as of the obstacles to such change Topics to be covered include the role of the state lvorking class attitudes and behaviour the parties of the united Left patterns of change and revolt as in Ivlay 1968 and the French style of

au thorny

261

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Units 6 Level Honours Duration Term III

35428 THE MIDDLE EAST CONFLICT Mr A ] R Mack

Class Contact IO two hour seminars Pre requ1slles Honours s1and1ng

An analysis of the ong1ns and evolution of the conflict 1n the Middle East

35430 HONOURS THESIS Unlts 12

An essay of 10 000 to 15 000 words to be wntten under the superv1s1on of a member of the staff of Politics The thesis 1s 10 give evidence of the students ab1hues 1n collect1ng and evaluaung information construcung 1est1ng and defending an argumenl or thesis 1.nd cr1ucally exam1n1ng the dominant theones 1n his area of enquiry Work 1n progress seminars are held in fust term Students should choose a thesis topic and ob1a1n the agreement of a member of staff lo act as supervisor before the end of the previous December The thesis deadhne 1s 18th September 1978 In 1978 superv1ston will be offered 1n the followmg subjec1 areas Australian Government and Pol1ucs International Poltncs PohucsofCh1na Australian Foreign Policy The Pohucs and Government of Ne\v Nations Amencan Politics Selected Topics 1n Comparanve Pohucs and Government Poht1cal Theory

262

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Topics in Psychology

GENERAL INFORMATION

Topics available

The first year topic 36110PsychologyI1s taught throughout the year Each of the second year level topics in Psychology requires at least 18 hours of lectures and 12 hours of associated practical work In each topic half of the practical work will consist of laboratory or field exercises and the other half on a more general exam1nat1on of stat1sucal methods 1n Psychology Students electing to take less than three Psychology topics 10 the second year of their degrees and who do not wish to proceed to a ma1or sequence 10 Psychologywtll be exempted from the statistics secuon of thepracucal work provided that Stat1sucal Methods 1s not hsted as a co requisite for the topics they have selected Students should note that some thrrd year level topics hst Stausucal Methods as a pre requ1stte All second year level topics have Psychology I as a pre requisite Pre requ1s1tes for thud year level top1cs are hsted separately for each topic All pre requ1sues must be completed with a grade of C or better Second year level topics available

36201 Stat1sucal Methods in Psychology no unus (Students undertaking a ma1or sequence in Psychology must complete 3 second year level topics 1ncludmg at least one topic from each of the follow1ng 2 groups )

Group I 36204 Learning and Mot1vauon 36206 Phys1olog1cal Psychology 36207 Percepuon and Informat1on Processing 36208 Human Development

Group II 36202 Attuude Theory and Atutude Change 36203 Personality 36205 Human Abthttes 36212 Social Interaction and the Self

4 units 4 units 4 unus 4 unlls

4 unus 4 units 4 unus 4 un11s

The nature of pracucal work in thud year topics may vary from topic to topic and may involve laboratory work group pro1ects demonstrauons and v1slls to 1nst1tut1ons

Thud year level topics available 36301 Research Methods 36302 Organ1zauonal Psychology I 36303 Social Mouvauon 36304 Psychopathology and Deviant Behaviour 36305 Skills and Human Performance 36306 Cognition 36309 Collecuve Behaviour 36312 Models and Theories in Psychology 36314 Psychophys1ology of States of Awareness 36315 Envuonmental Psychology 36316 Leaming and Cond1llon1ng

Honours Programme

6 unlls 4 un11s 4 unILs 4 units 4 units 4 units 4 units 4 units 4 units 4 units 4 untts

Students 'vho aim to do Honours in Psychology should have taken the equivalent of 42 unus 1n Psychology including 36301 Research Methods and should have qualified in terms of the School requirements Students who have not met theserequuements but who wish to do Honours 10 Psychology should make special apphcauon to the Head of the D1sc1phne The honours programme aims to provide a grounding for students who will enter eaher the academic or professional fields of psychology Compleuon of four years of study consutute the basic academic requtrements for membership of the professional body the Austrahan Psychological Society Students are requued to undertake the follow1ng programme

263

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

(a) Topic 36130 Psychology Honours Thesis of not more than 15 000 words (b) Honours Topics

Students \Vill take the topics 36401 Conceptual Foundations of Psychology 36407 Design and Measurement

36402 36405 36406 36419 36421 36427

~lus a further two topics selected from Human Leaming Organ1zauonal Psychology II Percepuon and Skill Psychobiology Cross cultural Psychology Current Issues 10 Social Psychology

Further topics may be added to this list from year to year

Diploma tn Applied Psychology (Dr L Kapelts)

16 units

6 units 6 UtlllS

4 units 4 units 1 units 4 UnltS 4 units 4 units

A general descnpuon of the Diploma 10 Apphed Psychology is set out 111 Statute 10 1 Schedule 19 The Diploma 111 Applted Psychology The Diploma provides a fourth ye,rof studywnh an applied emphasis It consists of course,vork wnh no thesis requ1rement The Diploma provides pracucal and theoreucal content designed to prepare students lor psychological pracuce while also allowing for some overlap with the 1-Ionours programme Candidates are assessed at the same level as Honours students but the Diploma JS not awarded in classes Candidates whose performance 1s of suCf1c1ently !ugh standard (1 e Honours IIA equivalent) quahfy for entry to the M Psych programme even 1f they have not \Vntten a d1ssertauon 111 the Diploma programme The course of study for the Diploma 111 Applied Psychology consists of 36 units 'vuh no less than 26 unus being Diploma or other available fourth year level psychology topics In add1t1on one 4 unlt tlurd year level psychology topic may be included and up to 6 unlls from another d1sc1phne or School deemed by the head of the d1sc1phneof psychology to bt. relevant to the study of apphed psychology

Topics available include 36407 Design and i\ileasurement 36411 Introducuon to Counselling 36412 Professional Onentauon 36413 Practice 111 Psycholog1cal Assessment 36414 Group Counsclhng 36415 Supervised Research Project 36417 Psycho educational Assessment 36422 Introducuon to Behaviour Mod1ftcat1on 36424 lntroducuon to Communlly Psychology 36426 Clinical Apphcauons of Behavioural Therapies

Other Honours topics subject to pre requ1sltes

Further topics may be added to this hst from year to year

/'.laster of Psychology Programme (Dr ] H Court and Dr L Kapelzs)

6 UnllS 4 units 4 units 4 units 4 units 6 units 6 UllltS 1 units 4 units 4 un!ls

This course of study ls offered on a two year full time basis Half of the academic year'\ ill be de\ oted to course \Vork and the conduct of an ong1nal research pro1cct The ren1a1n1ng ume \VIII be spent 111 supervised work at approved 1nsutut1ons to develop clinical skills Lxpenence in more than one sctung will be arranged The course content will seek LO

prepare clinical psychologists to function \V1th1n presently ex1sung settings wlule emphasising the growing edge of professional development In add1L1on to psychometnc techniques tra1n1ng 111 behavioural and other forms of therap) 1nclud1ng groups \V1ll be available Teaching and practical work 'v1ll de\ elop sJ...ills 'v1th adults and children It 'v1ll be possible to enter the course at the beg1nn1ng of enher year Students \Vllh an Honours Degree in Psychology (or equivalent) will be considered for acceptance A restncted number of places 1s ava1lable each year

Topics are 36501 Field Oncntauon• 36502 Quid De,elopment• 36504 Social and Group Processes• 36507 Research Design and Stausucs•

264

36511 D1ssenauon 36518 Psychopathology• 36519 Psychod1agnosucs 36521 Couni.elhng theones and pracllce•

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

36508 Educanonal Psychology 36512 Instrumentation 36513 Professional Ethics•

36522 Behaviour Mod1hcauon 36523 Pracncum 36524 Pracucum

All students are required to take topics 36514 36518 36519 36521 36522 and 36523/36524 TI1ose who have nol completed 36412 take 36?01 and 36523 those who have completed 36412 take 36524 In order to complete a total of 72 units over the two years topics mJ.y be selected from among those rema1n1ng above as offered 'vh1ch will generally be every other )Car Those to be offered 1n 1978 are marked 'v1th an astensk ("")above Sausfactory compleuon of the course (72 units) requires, C grade or beuer 111 (1) practical work (36501 36523 36524) (11) d1ssenauon (36514) and (in) course work topics (48 un11s)

Unns 12 Level First year Duration Full year

First Year Topic

36110 PSYCHOLOGY I Dr L Lack

Class Contact 3 lectures and a one hour tutorial/laboratory session per week Pre requ1s1tes None However elementary anthmeuc skills will be assumed in the stat1sucs component associated with the topic

Tlus topic 1s designed for students taking psychology as a ha<;1c d2sc1phne as 'vell aii for those who have a general interest 1n psychology but who do not plan to pursuettas a m'lJOr held of study Psychology 1s the sc1enuf1c study 0£ behaviour espec1,lly human behaviour The study of psychology concerns the development of a thorough and systemauc body of knowledge that 1s relevant to the understanding of the 1nd1v1dual as well 'ls to human behaviour in a social context To this end the course focusses upon the b1olog1cal background of psychology and the appltcatton of sc1enufic procedures to such basic psycholog1cal processes as learning monvation percepuon tl11nk1ng and informatton processing At the same ume an effort is made to integrate this basic knowledge with the study of human behaviour in a social contexl through such areas as pcrsonahly and soc1'll lnd organ1sauonal psychology Students may be required to spend periods not exceeding a total of hve hours as paruc1pants tn osycholog1cal expenments The outcome or rauonale of any such ex pen men ts will be explained to students after data collection or at the conclusion of the experiment There will be a staust1cs component associated with this topic Stausucs workshops are provided

Preliminary reading Readings in psychology today (CRM 1969) Miller G A and Buckhout R Psychology the science of mental life (Harper 1973)*

Set books Psychology today, 3rd ed (Random House 1975) Mann L Social psycho logy (W Iley 1969)• Miller S Experimental design and statistics (Methuen 1975) Warr P and Wall T Work and well beine; (Penguin 1975) Rachlln H Introduction to modem behaviorism (Freeman 1970)• Reference books Atkinson R C ed Contemporary psychology (Freeman 1971) Butler C M Neuropsychology the study of brau-i and behavior (Brooks/Cole 1968) Ge1wllz P Non Freudian personality theories (Brooks/Cole 1969) Gregory R L Eye and brain 2nd ed (We1denfeld & Nicolson 1972)

265

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

H1lgard E R and Marquis D G Condit1on1ng and learning 2nd ed rev by G A Kimble (Appleton Century Crofts 1961) Korman A K Organizational behavior (Prentice Hall 1977) Lindgren H C An 1ntroduct1on to social psychology 2nd ed (Wiley 1973) McClelland D C Mot1vat1onal trends tn society (General Leaming 1971) Posner M I Cognition an 1ntroduclton (Scou Foresman 1973) Selected paperbacks mainly from the Brooks/C.Ole and Prenuce Hall senes as prescribed by the lecturers concerned wuh specific areas

Second Year Topics

36201 STATISTICAL METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY This is an opnonal secnon of the pracucal \VOrk in Second Year topics dt.pendtng on whether or not Psychology is taken as a major sequence (see General Informauon)

36202 ATTITUDE THEORY AND ATTITUDE CHANGE Dr S ] Morse

Units 4 Level Second year Durauon Term 3 Class Contact 9 lectures plus 12 hours of practical work Pre requ1s1te 36110 Psychology I at C grade or helter

This topic \VIII be concerned \v1th the concept of atL1tude important influences 10 aunudc formatton the measurement of atutudes and 1.llltude consistency Amonb other topics the relauonsh1p between attitudes and behaviour theones of anttude change and the effects of persuasive commun1cat1on!. will also he discussed Some auent1on will also be devoted to such c;pec1al topics as stereotypes and fa1..tors involved in racism

Set book Tnand1s H T Attitude and attitude change (Wiley 1971)

Reference books Bern D Beliefs attitudes and human affairs (Brooks/Cole 1970) F1shbe1n M ed Readings in attitude theory and measurement (Wiley 1967) K1esler C A Collins B E and Miller N Attitude change (Wiiey 1969) Ztmbardo P Ebbesen E B and Maslach C Influencing altitudes and changing behaviour 2nd ed (Addison Wesley 1977)

Untts 4 Level Second year Durauon Term I

36203 PERSONALITY Dr ] H Court

Class Contact 2 lectures per week tutorials as arranged Pre requ1s11e 36110 Psychology I c1.t C grade or better

This topic \Vtll place emphasis on two ma1or arec1.s (a) Personality theones - a discussion and cotnpanson of the ma1or theones of personahty structure and dynamics the emphasis being on issues and how effecuvely they are handlt.d by the vanous theones (b) Personaltty in culture - an exam1nc1.uon of the relat1onsh1p between the personality characten~t1cs of 1nd1v1duals and groups and the cultural organtzauon

266

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Text book Liebert R M and Spiegler M D Personality strategies for the study of man rev ed (Dorsey 1974)

Reference books Barnouw V Culture and personality 2nd ed (Dorsey 1973) Hall C S and L1ndzey G Theories of personality 2nd cd (Wiley 1970) Maddi S R Personality theories rev ed (Dorsey 1972) Bischof L J Interpreting personality theories 2nd ed (Harper & Row 1970) Smelser N J and Smelser W T eds Personality and social systems 2nd ed (Wiley 1970) Wallace A F C Culture and personality 2nd ed (Random House 1970)

Unlts 4 Level Second year Duration Term 2

36204 LEARNING AND MOTIVATION Mr E A Cleland

Class Contact 18 lectures and 12 hours pracucal work Pre requisites Psychology I at C grade or better or equivalent

Vanous explanauons of learning and mot1vauonal phenomena will be discussed and cnt1cally evaluated Parttcular attenuon will be given to explanauons 1n behavioural rather than mentahsuc terms

Set book C-hll W F Learning rev ed (Methuen 1971)

Reference books Cofer C N and Appley M H Motivation theory and research (Wiley 1964) Hergenhahn B R An introduction to theories of learning (Prentice Hall 1976)

Unus 4 Level Second year Duration Term 3

36205 HUMAN ABILITIES Mr ] R Crowley

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 two hour practical session per week Pre requtsltes 36110 Psychology I at C grade or better

This topic considers intellectual capabihues from the point of view of theu conrr1buuon to real world achievements e g success in school or employment The study entails (a) The ident1hcauon of important types of abihty and the 1nvesttgat1on of relations among these abihues e g the d1st1nction between 1ntelhgence and creauvny (b) The descnpllon of stages 1n the development of ab1ht1es with attention e;1ven to work of Piaget on conceptual act1vlly (c) The 1nvesugallon of poss1bledetenn1nants of intellectual standing e e; social class and cultural influences parent child 1nteracuon and schoohng

Set book Butcher H J Human intelligence (Methuen 1968)•

Reference books Cronbach L J Essentials of psychological testing 3rd ed (Harper & Row 1970) Hunt J M Intelligence and experience (Ronald 1961) Piaget J and Inhelder B The psychology of the child (Routlede;e & Kee;an Paul 1969) Tyler L The psychology of human difference 3rd ed (Appleton Century Crofts 1965) Vernon P E Intelligence and cultural environment (Methuen 1970

267

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

36206 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY Dr M M Wood Dr L C Lack Dr D ] Glencross

and Dr D H Overstreet

Units 4 Level Second year Duration Term I Class Contact 2 lectures per week and I two hour laboratory/tutonal per fortnight Pie requisite 36110 Psychology I at C grade or better or equivalent

Tins top1cw11l bean 1ntroducuon to the basic biology and physiology relevant to the study of beh1v1our IL will include an 1ntroducuon to sensory and motor systems neuro chemical mechanisms neural 1ntegrauon and brain funcuon The topic is des1~ned as a basis for the phys1olog1cal understanding of perception motor performance mot1vat1on learning memory emouon and states of awareness

Set books Butter C M Neuropsychology the study of brain and behavior (Brooks/Cole 1968) Thotnpson R F lntroduct1on to physiological psychology (Harper & Row 1975)

Reference books Thompson R r Foundations of phys1ologzcal psychology (Harper & Row 1967) Isaacson R L and others A primer of physiological psychology (Harper & Row 1971) Calder N The mind of man (BBC 1970) Grossman S P A textbook of physzological psychology (Wiley 1967) Pnbram K H Languages of the brain experimental paradoxes and prinnples in neuropsychology (Prentice Hall 1971)

36207 PERCEPTION AND INFORMATION PROCESSING Dr D ] Glencross

Units 4 Level Second year Durauon Term I Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 two hour laboratory/tutonal per week Pre requ1slle 36110 Psychology I at C grade or heller Co requ1s11e 36201 Stausncal Methods 1n Psychology

ThIS topic will concentrate 1n1t1ally on the introduction of the basic conceptual tools of information processing commun1cat1on and signal detecuon theory These concepts will then be apphed to more specific phenomena such as coding pattern recognition visual scanning reading perceptual constancies movement perception selective attention capacity and memory

Set books Edwards E Information transmission (Chapman & Ha1l 1969) McN1col D A primer of signal detection theory (Allen & Unw1n 1972) Ne1sser U Cognition & reality (rreeman 1977)

Reference books Lindsay P H and Norman D A Human information processing an introduction to psychology (Academic 1972) Welford A T Skilled performance perceptual and motor skills(Scott roresman 1976)

Units 4 Level Second year Duration Term I

36208 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT Dr G M Geffen

Class Contact 2 lectures per week 1 tutonal or practical per \Veek Pre requ1s1tes 36110 Psychology I at C grade or better

268

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

This topic deals with b1olog1cal changes in infancy perceptual language and cognlttve development from infancy to puberty and developmental changes in information processing

Set book Mussen P H Conger J J and Kagan J Child development and personality 4th ed (Harper & Row 1974)

Reference books Br}1ant P E Perception and understanding in young children (Methuen 1974) Developmental psychology today 1st ed (CRM 1971) Developmental psychology today 2nd ed (CRM 1975) Flavell J H Cognzttve development (Prentice Hall 1977)

Units 4

36212 SOCIAL INTERACTION AND THE SELF Dr S ] Morse

Level Second year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact 18 lectures and 12 hours of tu tonal Pre requ1sttes 36110 Psychology I at C grade or better Co requ1sue 36201 Statistical Methods in Psychology

This topic will examine several key issues in social interaction for example fnendshtp formation love relat1onsl11ps and non verbal communication It will also examine the

self as both a product of social tnteracuon and a determinant of how people interact w·ith others These and other issues will be investigated witlun a perspective wluch views social tnteractton 1n terms of behaviour exchange and one which regards 1tas symbolic interacuon

Set books Goffman E The presentation of self in everyday life (Penguin 1972) Rubin Z Ltking and loving an 1nv1tatzon to social psychology (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973) Peele S Love and addiction (Sphere 1977) Reference books Argyle M The psychology of interpersonal behaviour (Penguin 1972) Berscheid E and Waister E Interpersonal attraction (Addison Wesley 1969) Gergen K ] The psychology of behavior exchange (Addison Wesley 1969) Hastorf AH Schneider DJ andPolefka J Personpercept1on(Addison Wesley 1970) Rosenberg M Society and the adolescent self image (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1965)

Unlls 6 Level Thud year Durauon Full year

Thzrd Year Topics

36301 RESEARCH METHODS Dr S ] Morse

Class Contact l hour per week plus 12 hours of practical work Pre requtslles 36110 Psychology land 36201 Stausttcal Methods and 12 second year untts each at C grade or better

lnlended as an 1ntroduct1on for students cons1denng Honours work 1n Psychology this topic is designed to provide studenls with the basic skills needed to carry out research 1n Psychology Students will gain expenence in formulating problems for research

269

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

generaung hypotheses designing expenments quesuonnaues and interview schedules and analyzing and 1nterpreung data As part of the course work students will be expected to submu a paper consisting of a hterature review and research proposal 1n some area of interest 1n Psychology

Set books Anderson B F The psychology experiment 2nd ed (Brooks/Cole 1971) Klecka, W R Nie N H and Hull C H SPSS primer (McGraw Hill 1975) Warwick D P and Lininger C A The sample survey theory and practice (McGraw Hill 1975)

Unus 4 Level Thtrd year Duration Term I

36302 ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY I Dr GE OBnen

Class Contact 2 lectures per week (2 hour lecture) Pre requisites 36110 Psychology I and 12 second year units each at C grade or better Tlus topic will be concerned with selected areas concerned with the effects of organ1zat1onal structure upon 1nd1vidual performance The areas considered are (a) Aims of organtzauonal psychology h1stoncal background and fundamental problems (b) Deftn1t1on of organ1zat1onal structure matrix representauons (c) Determinants of Job sausfact1on ahenauon and group cohesiveness JOb ennchment and enlargement soaotechn1cal systems (d) Group dec1s1on making eff1c1ency of worker part1c1pauon 1n managenal dec1s1on processes (e) Structural determinants of group productivtty commun1cauon authonty and task structures

Set book Korman A Organizational behaviour (Prenuce Hall 1977)

Reading hsts will be issued at the beginning of the course

Units 4 Level Third year Durauon Term I

36303 SOCIAL MOTIVATION Professor N T Feather

Class Contact 2 hours per week plus 12 hours of practical work Pre requisites 36110 Psychology I and36201 Stausucal Methods and 12 second year units each at grade C or better An analysis of baste social motives (e g achievement affahauon approval power) then development and then influence on behaviour

Set book Weiner B Theories of motivation from mechanism to cognition (Rand McNally 1973)

Reference books Atkinson J W and Feather N T A theory of ac)uevement motivation (Wiley 1966) Atkinson J W and Raynor J 0 Motivation and achievement (Wtley 1974) Brown R Social psychology (Free Pr 1965) Feather N T Values in education and society (Free Pr 1975) Korman A K The psychology of motivation (Prentu:e Hall 1974) Maccoby E E and Jacklm C N The psychology of sex di/feren~es (0 UP 1975) McClelland D C Assessing human motiwtton (Genetal Lean:ung 1971) McClelland D C Mottvat1onal trends ui society (General Leammg 1971)

270

SYLLABUSES-SOCll\L SCIENCES

Unus 4

36304 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY AND DEVIANT BEHAVIOUR Dr MM Wood

Level Third year Duration Term II Class Contact 2 lee lures per Wt'<'k plus a 11'2 hr sen11nar per week 1n a Psych1atnc l-losp1tal Pre requ1sues 36110 Psychology I and 36203 Personal Hy both at C grade or bt:uer and 8 other second year units each al C grade or better

This topic will involve cons1derauon of the concepts of normahty and abnormality class1hcatory concepts and the nature of mental disorder It \VIII deal \vtth thrones of aetiology structure treatments and prognosis of mental disorder and other forms of deviance raking account of b1olog1cal psycholog1cal and soc1olog1cal data

Set books Davison G C and Neale J M Abnormal psychology an experimental clinical approach (\Viley 1974) Ullmann L P and Krasner L A psychological approach to abnormal behavior 2nd ed (Prenuce Hall 1975)

Reference book Page J D Psychopathology (Ald1ne Atherton 1971)

Unns 4

36305 SKILLS AND HUMAN PERFORMANCE Dr D I Glencross

Level Thud year Durauon Term II Class Contact 12 one hour seminars and 18 one hour laboratory sessions Pre requ1sttes 36110 Psychology I or equivalent 36207 Percepuon and Informauon Processing and 36201 Stat1st1cal Methods and 8 other second year unus each at C grade or better or penn1ss1on from the instructor

This topic \Vtll introduce the student to such concepts as short and long term memory latency and reacllon ttme feedback attention and moven1entcontrol Skill and cyherneuc models of behaviour \Vtll be discussed An attempt \Vtll be made to relate the concepts to pracucal issues of the training and learning of a wide variety of skills

Sel book Welford A T Skilled performance perceptual and motor skill (Scott Foresman 1976)

Reference boohs Annetl J and others Human information processing 2 vols (Open Univ 1974) Fitts P M and Posner M I Human performance (Brooks/Cole 1967) Keele S W Attention and human performance (Goodyear 1973) Manen1uk R G Information processing in motor sk1ll(Holt Rinehart& Winslon 1976)

Unns 4 Level Second or thud year Durauon Term II

36306 COGNITION Mr I Crowley and Dr G M Ge/fen

Class Contact 2 lectures per 'veek and six 2 hour pracucal sessions Pre requisites 12 unlts of Psychology at second year level or 36207 Percepnon and Informauon Processing at C grade or helter

This topic covers visual and aud1lory information processing the effects of attention and its determinants on the encoding storage and relneval of 1nformauon the organization of memory reasoning and productive th1nk1ng

271

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Riference books Anderson B I Cognll1ve psychology (Academic 1975) Ilcrnot P Attributes of rncmory (Mclhucn 1975) Johnson D ivl A systematic 111troduct1011 to the psychology of thin lane; (I-I 1rpcr &. Row 1972) K 1hnunan D A Ucnt1on and effort (P1 enucc l-11.ll 1973) K 1ntO\\JlL B l-1 c<l Hunian 1nformal1on processing tutonafr 1n performance and cogn1l1on (\V1lty 1974) Knusch 'V Learning meniory and conceplrlal /Jrocesscs ('\'ilcy 1970) l\tI 1'>'>1.IO D \V E\perunental /Jsycholo1:,y and 1nformat1on proct'Htnc; (Rand l'vlcN1.lly 1975) Nc1sser U Cogn1t1on and reality (freeman 1977) Rumelhart D l !11troduct1on to hllman 1nforn1at1011 proces.nnr; (\V1ley 1977)

Unlls 4 l eve! fhnd yt 1r Dura11on I'enn III

36309 COLLECTIVE BEHAVIOUR Professor L 1itann and Dr S J 1\1orse

C'l 1ss CoiltJct 2 lee turcs per wtck an<l 12 hours practical \\Ork Pre requ1s1tcs 3611 O Psychology I and 36201 Stat1st1cal 1ned1ods each al C ~rade 01 better

Tlus topic 1~ concerned with selected issues in the study of collecU\ e bch 1v1our Are"l.s to be covered include thco11es of collerl!ve beh'1v1ou1 behaviour 1n dis lStc1s 'Ind undertxtrune cond1t1ons nunour 1.nd panic demonstr1t1ons prolci.t rallies 1.nd nols <l1mens1on'i of crowd conduct soc1c1l 1nfluence 111 crowd'> the. concept of aider tn collectne bch.i\ 1our collecuve beh'1.v1our public op1n1on and soc11.I rnovernents

Set book Ev ins R R ed Headings 111 collective behavlour 2nd ed (R1.n<l iVItN"l.lly 1974)

Reference book~ ~1nt_ls(.r N Theory of collectzve behavtour (free Pr 1963) Turner R 'Ind K1ll1an L Collect1ve behavtor 2nd eel (Prentice 1-Iall 1973)

36312 MODELS AND THEORIES IN PSYCHOLOGY Dr E R Peay

(Not offered 1n 1978)

36314 PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY OF STATES OF AWARENESS Dr L C Lack

Un11s 4 Level Third year Duration Second half year Class Contact 20 lectures and 12 hours pracncal and seminar work Pre requ1sues 36206 Phys1olog1cal Psychology or 87275 Introducnon to Beh'lv1oural Biology at C grade or better or special perm1ss1on of the instructor

Tlus Lop1c \VIII discuss the psychophys1olog1cal measures and the underlying phys1olog1cal mechanisms assoa"l.ted \Vllh all levels of 1.rousal '1.nd consciousness with a concentration on the phenomena of sleep and dreaming Other spec1f1c topics to be discussed \Vtll include the physiology of arousal and auent1on Recent developments 1n

272

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

biofeedback and internal control will be elaborated and related to the phenomena of meditauon hypnosis stress reactions and psychosomanc disorders

Text books Dement W C Some must watch while some must sleep (Freeman 1974) Webb W B and Agne'" H W Sleep and dreatns (Bro\' .. n 1973) Webb W B Sleep the gentle tyrant (Prennce Hall 1975)

Reference boohs Greenfield N S and Stembach R A eds Handbook of psychophyszology (Holl Rinehart & Winston 1972) Kamiya J and others eds Bio feedback and self control an Ald1ne reader on the regulation of bodily processes and consciousness (Ald1ne Atherton 1971) Webb W B Sleep an experimental approach (Macmtllan 1968) Luce G G B1olog1cal rhythms in humari and animal physiology (Dover 1971) Freemon F R Sleep research a cntzcal review (Thomas 1972) Hartman E L The functions of sleep (Yale Univ Pr 1973) Kanellakos D P and Lukas J S The psychobiology of transcendental tned1tat1on a literature review (Ben1am1n 1974) Ornstein R E ed The nature of human consciousness (freeman 1973) Tart C T Altered states of consciousness (\V1ley 1969) Cart\Vr1ght R D Night lzfe explorations 1n dreamuig (Prenuce H'1.ll 1977) Bo,vers K S Hypnosis for the senously cu.nous (Brooks/Cole 1976)

36315 ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY

Unas 4 Level Third year Duration Term III

Dr P Cairney

Class Contact 18 hours of lecture and 12 hours of pracncal/tutonal sessions Pre requisues 12 units of second year level Psychology untts at C grade or better

The topic will be concerned \Vllh the impact of the envnonmenl on the ind1v1dual parllcularly lhe built environment man crea1es for himself Cons1derat1on lVIll be given to environmental percepuon and cogn1uon the assessment of environmental quality and stress the effects of cro\vd1ng psychological factors in envuonmental input statements the evaluauon of communlly preferences and the need to develop a un1fy1ng theory of man envuonment relauonsh1ps Pracucal 1mphcauons for environmental dest~n \Vlll be emphasised throughout Studcn1s \Vlll be encouraged to paruc1pate 111 a group proJCCl as parl of their assessment

Reference books Proshansky H M Ittelson W H R1vhn L G eds Environmenlal psycholoffY tnan and his physical selling 2nd eel (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1976) Ittelson \V H and others eds An zntroductlon to environmental psychology (l-Iolt Rinehart & \V1nston 1974) Mercer C Living in cities (Pehcan 1975)• Lee T Psychology and the environment (Methuen 1976)

Unlls 4 Level Third year Durauon Term I

36316 LEARNING AND CONDITIONING

Dr Charles L Zimmer Ii art

Clas!> Contact 18 lecture hours and 12 practical hours Pre requ1snes Psychology I at C grade or better

273

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The goal of research in learning and condu1on1ng 1s a general explanation of learning that will apply to all animals including man In this top1csome of the techniques theones and challenges to a general explanatton will be examined Frrst the class will look at data from studies of learning 1nclud1ng au1oshap1ng condtt1oned 1nh1b1uon correlauon learning supersnuon and avoidance Then students will see ho\V some of the recent theories lry to account for these results Among them \V1ll be the Rescorla Wagner model of Pavlovian cond1uoning Sheffield s as well as Premack s 1heory of reinforcement and Estes theory of stimulus control Finally consideration will be given to some of the challenges to these accounts parucularly from the held of ethology These \VIII include 1nst1nct1ve drift long delay cond1uon1ng stimulus reinforcer spec1hc1ty and so called template learning in bnds These problems have spurred ne'v research and new ideas 1n learning Although at present there 1s no single explanation for all the data there ts a good understanding of some forms of learning In the latter part of the term each student will be able to conduct an expenmentof htsown design The results will be presented 1n a Journal article style report at the end of the lenn

Set book To be announced

Reference books Htlgard E R Conditioning and learning 2nd ed (Apple1on Century Crofts 1966) Honig W K Operant behaviour areas of research and application (Appleton Century Crofts 1966) Htlgard ER and Bower G H Theoriesoflearning 4thed (Appleton Century Crofts 1975) Hinde R A and Stevenson Hinde J Constraints on learning limitations and predispositions (Academic 1973) Mackintosh N J The psychology of animal learning (Appleton Century Crofts 1974)

Topics for Honours and Diploma in Applied Psychology

36401 CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATIONS OF PSYCHOLOGY

Mr ] R Crowley and Professor L Mann

Units 6 Level Honours Duration Two terms Class Contact 18 two hour serrunars Pre requisites Honours year student Not avatlable to Diploma in Applied Psychology students This topic will consider some of the general proposiuons about the conduct of scienufic 1nqurry wllh maJor emphasis given to the deductive paradigm o{ explanation Ma1or systems in Psychology behaviounsm funct1onahsm psychoanalysis and human1st1c psychology will be examined so as to estabhsh the type of explanauon they entail

Reference books Brodbeck M ed Readings 1n the philosophy of the social sciences (Macmillan 1968) Hook S ed Psychoanalysis scientific method and philosophy (New York Univ Pr 1959) Kaplan A The conduct of inquiry (Chandler 1964) Kuhn T S The structure of scientific revolutions 2nd ed (Chicago Univ Pr 1970) Turner M B Philosophy and the science of behavior (Appleton Century Crofts 1967)

Units 4 Level Honours Durauon One half year

274

36402 HUMAN LEARNING

Dr Charles L Zimmer Hart

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Class Contact 18 two hour seminars Pre requisite 36316 Learning and Cond1t1oning at grade C or better Honours year student Not available to Diploma 1n Applied Psychology students

A topic designed to follow from studies of animal learning and show how s1m1lar pnnciples apply in educational andchn1cal settings It will explore ways in which human learning occurs as well as ways in which It may be facilitated Study will be directed towards external vanables (e g S R links feedback teaching machines) and internal vanables (e g anxiety personality vanables)

Set book To be announced

Reference books Bandura A Principles of behavior modification (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969) Kanfer F H and Phillips ] S Learning foundations of behavior therapy (Wtley 1970) Lundin R W Personality a behavioural analysis 2nd ed (Macmillan 1974) Melton A W Categories of human learning (Academic 1964)

Unus 4 Level Honours

36405 ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY II

Dr G E 0 Brien

Durauon One term Clas<; Contact 18 two hour serrunars Pre requisite Honours year student Not available to Diploma 1n Apphed Psychology students unless with permission of instructor

This topic considers recent theories of JOb sausfacuon influence processes in work organ1zauon and leadership No set references or texts

36406 PERCEPTION AND SKILL

Dr D ] Glencross Dr G Ge/fen Dr L Lack

Units 4 Level Honours Durauon One term Class Contact 18 two hour seminars Pre requisites Honours year student and compleuon of one of the following topics 36207 36305 36306 36314 at C grade or better Or by special perm1ss1on of the instructors

This unit wdl cover a number of speciahzed but related areas including selectiveattenuon in vision and hearing hmits on the capacity to process tnformauon and models of sktll feedback control mechanisms and reading and speech

Reference books Broadbent D E Decision and stress (Academic 1971) Kahneman D Attention and effort (Prentice Hall 1973) Kantow1tz B H ed Human information processing (Wtley 1974) Stelmach G E ed Motor control (Academic 1976) Taylor I Introduction to psycholinguistics (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1976)

Units 6

36407 DESIGN AND MEASUREMENT

Mr ] R Crowley

Level Honours and Diploma Duration One term Class Con tact 18 two hour seminars

275

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Pre requisites Honours or diploma standing

Th ts top1cw1U treat some of the common strategies used 10 expenmental and correlauonal research The ma1or components 10 this treatment will be

Basic designs and methods of analysis for expenmental research The constructlon and evaluation of psychological tests Muluvanate research methods

Reference books Campbell D T and Stanley J C Experzmental and quasi experzmental designs for research (Rand McNally 1963) Kerhnger F N Foundat1onsofbehav1ouralresearch 2nded (Holt R1nehart&Winston 1973) Nunnally J C Psychometrzc theory (McGraw Hill 1967)

36408 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY

(Not offered 1n 1978)

Units 6 Level Honours

36411 INTRODUCTION TO COUNSELLING

Units 4 Level Diploma Duration One term

Dr L Kapelis

Class Con tact 2 two hour seminars per 'veek Pre requ1s1tes Diploma Standing

The top1cw11l covercounsell1ngmodels for systemauc helping and interpersonal relating Role playing and counsell1ng expenences will involve the use of audio and video recorcbngs

Reference books Carkhuff R R Helping and human relations 2 vols (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969) Egan G The skilled helper (Brooks/Cole 1975) Corsini R ed Current psychotherapies (Peacock 1973)

36412 PROFESSIONAL ORIENTATION

Units 4 Level Diploma Durauon Term I Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Diploma standing

Dr ] H Court

This topic will involve a senes of half day v1s1ts to settings \vherc psychologists are currently working The aim will be to provide an insight into the work psychologists do and relat1onsh1ps that exist bet,veen agencies 10 the community I:ducauonal vocational and clinical settings will be included with opportun1ucs to understand the type of wo1k earned out 1n each Readings will be set to extend the understanding of the chosen locations within the wider context of psychological practice

276

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Reference book Wechsler H Solomon L andKramer BL Soczalpsychologyandmentalhealth(Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970)

Recommended reading Goffman E Asylums (Penguin 1968) Brag1nsky B M and others Methods of madness (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969) Sommer R Personal space (Prenttce Hall 1969)

36413 PRACTICE IN PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT

Units 4 Level Diploma Duration One term

Dr I H Court

Class Contact 2 hours twice a 'veek Pre requisites Diploma st'lnding and 36407 Design and Measurement at C grade or better

Tius topic is offered as a complement to 36407 Design and Measurement 36409 Psycho Educational Assessment Its purpose is to fam1hanse students 'v1th the practical adm1n1strat1on of a representative group of tests Interpretation of results will be cnt1cally evaluated Ind1v1dual and group tesung of 1ntelltgence personality psychopathology and vocational guidance will be included Objective self report and pro1ect1ve measures 'v1ll receive attention

Reference books Cronbach L J Essenttals of psychological testing 3rd ed (Harper & Row 1970) QC

Anastasi A Psychological te~ting 4th ed (Collier Macmillan 1976) M1tller P The psychological assessment of mental and physical handicaps (Methuen 1970)

Units 4 Level Diploma Durauon One term

36414 GROUP COUNSELLING

Class Contact 2 two hour seminars Pre requisites Diploma standing

The topic will cover the theoreucal background and provide laboratory expenence 1n group processes Students will parucipate as members of small groups as well as observe and analyze group 1nteracuon on video tape

Reference book Kemp C G Foundations of group counselling (McGraw Hill 1970)

36415 SUPERVISED RESEARCH PROJECT

Units 6 Level Diploma Pre requ1sites Diploma standing

Students will design and carry out a small independent emp1ncal tnvesugat1on The scope and stze of the project should reflect approximately the umeand effort ord1nanly expected

277

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

in a 6 unn fourth year topic The pro1ect report not more than 6 000 words in length should follow the format of a Journal arucle The proJect may involve a laboratory expenment a held study analysis of archival data a case study or any other suitable research method and may take the form of a parual or strategic replication of a previous study or an onginal piece of research Students intending to do the pro1ect should by the end of March discuss then topic and proposed design with the staff member who will act as supervisor

36417 PSYCHO-EDUCATIONAL ASSESSMENT Dr L Kapelis

Units 6 Level Diploma Duration One half year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisites Diploma standing and 36413 Pracuce in Psychological Assessment each at C grade or better The topic wtll cover methods of obta1n1ng using and interpreting test and educational data in psychological assessment of children with learning and behavioural handicaps The following aspects of the d1agnosuc process w11I be examined (a) Formal and informal methods of ident1hcat1on (b) Differential chagnos1s 1nclud1ng the establishing of expectancy levels evaluation of areas of learning failure and integnt1es for learning (c) The setting of goals and planning learning expenences (d) Report wnt1ng

Reference books

Johnson D J and Myklebust H R Learning disabilities educational principles and practices (Grune & Stratton 1967) Lerner J W Children with learning disabilities 2nd ed (Houghton Mtffltn 1975) Sattler J M Assessment of children s intelligence (Saunders 1974)

Units 4 Level Honours Duration Term I

36419 PSYCHOBIOLOGY Professor R W Russell and Dr D H Overstreet

Class Contact 18 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours or Diploma standing and 12 units of thud year level Biology at C grade or better Thts topic will consider new developments in the b1olog1cal bases of selected behaviours 1nclud1ng learning and memory drug tolerance and dependence and human psychopatholog1cal syndromes

36421 CROSS-CULTURAL PSYCHOLOGY

(Not offered in 1978)

36422 INTRODUCTION TO BEHAVIOUR MODIFICATION Dr Charles Zimmer Hart

Units 4 Level Diploma Class Contact 2 one and a half hour meetings per week Pre requ1sne 36316 Learning and Condiuon1ng at grade C or better plus Diploma Standing

278

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The problem in teaching behaviour modification techniques is that of teaching problem solving Apphed psychology involves attempts to use general pnnc1ples usually developed in the laboratory in real world settings Thed1ff1culty comes in selecung which of the general pr1nc1ples to try This 10p1c will attempt to teach how to select to apply and to evaluate the use of laboratory prmc1ples in the treatment of behavioural problems in chn1cs schools and homes It will cover many of the non verbal treatments usually called contingency management or applied behaviour analysis

Text book To be announced

Reference books Bandura A Social learning theory (Prenltce Hall 1977) Kanfer F H and Phtlhps J S Leaming foundations of behavior therapy (Wiley 1970) Ramp E and Semb G, Behavior analysis areas of research and application (Prenltce Hall 1975)

Units 4

36424 INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY Mr E A Cleland

Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 18 two hour seminars Pre requisite Diploma standing

Community psychology employs the techniques and findings of several social science d1scipltnes in an attempt to find altemauves to the trad1uonal one to one chn1cal situauon It is an actton oriented chsciplme with an emphasis on prevenuon rather than on the cure of mental illness This introductory course explores the fteld of community psychology through a senes of seminars and practical exercises Students are expected to become involved in communuy pro1ects and it is these pro1ects which form the basis of the seminar programme

Preliminary reading Bender M P Community psychology (Methuen 1976)

Reference books American Psychological Assoc1at1on Task Force on Communny Mental Health Issues in community psychology (Behavioral Pubhcat1on 1971) Cook P E ed Community psychology and community mental health a book of readings (Holden Day 1970) Sarason S B The psychological sense of community Prospects for a community psycholo~ (Jossey Bass 1974) Zax M Specter G A An introduction to community psychology (Wtley 1974)

36426 CLINICAL APPLICATIONS OF BEHAVIOURAL THERAPIES Dr MM Wood

Unas 4 Level Diploma Duratton One term Class Contact I three hour meeung per week Pre requtsue Diploma standing and topic 36422 Behavioural Techn1ques have been apphed to several common problems presented by people, mostly aduh both in a hospital and a community setting with varying success The course is aimed at examining these methods their underlying assumpuons and developing a cr1ucal approach 1n che evaluation o[ treatment outcome

279

'

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Among the problems to be considered will be phobias obsessional disorders persistent habus e g tics thumb sucking sexual inadequacy the application of self control procedures to health problems e g obesity and smoking and techniques for obta1n1ng comphance

Set book to be announced

Reference books Beech H R Obsessional states (Methuen 1974) 0 Leary K D and Wiison GT Behavzourtherapy applicationandoutcome(Prenuce Hall 1975) Wolpe J The practice of behaviour therapy 2nd ed (Pergamon 1973)

36427 CURRENT ISSUES IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY Professor L Mann and Professor N T Feather

lJntts 4 Level Honours Class Contact 18 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1te Honours standing

Tlus topic gives an advanced treatment of selected questions raised by current work 111 the held of social psychology and related areas In 1978 the seminar will examine questions relating to biological versus social evoluuon and lhe genetic basis of social behaviour cultural influences on social behaviour the consequences of decisional confhct curtailed personal choice value - mismatch and learned helplessness

Reference books Feather N T Values in education and society (Free Pr 1975) Janis I and Mann L Decision making a psychological analysts of conflict choice and commitment (Free Pr 1977) Seligman M E P Helplessness (Freemdn 1975) Wilson r: 0 Sociobiology (Harvard Univ Pr 1975)

36430 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS THESIS Units 16

Students 'v1ll design and carryout an independent em pineal 1nvesttgauon and report their findings in a thesis not more than 15 000 words 1n length The development of research design should begin early in February so that a proposal g1v1ng detatls of hypotheses procedures and methods of analysis can be presented for consideration by a committee of staff early tn March The completed thesis 1s submitted at the end of thud term

Units 4 Level Post graduate Durauon One term

Master of Psychology Topics

First Year Topics

36501 FIELD ORIENTATION Dr] H Court

Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite Graduate status

280

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

This topic will consist of a senes of half day v1s1ts lasung through first term to centres where chn1cal psychologists funcuon The purpose of the topic will be to provide an insight into the work of psychologists and the vaned insutuuons where they work Specific areas of enquiry will be selected to ensure that the problems and poss1b1hlles of such settings are studied This topic will be taken only by those students who have not previously taken top1c36412 Professional Onentat1on

Units 4 Level Post graduate Duration One term

36502 CHILD DEVELOPMENT

Dr L Kapelzs

Class Contact 1 three hour seminar per week Pre requisite Graduate status

In this topic there will be an examinauon of the cogn1t1ve emouonal and social aspects of the cluld s behaviour including its intellectual skills (perceiving learning and thinking) language and commun1catton attachment and dependency aggression and moral judgement The inquiry ts concerned with estabhsh1ng thenatureof changes that occur in these behaviours as the child grows up with special attention being given to failures to achieve normal development Then there will be an 1nvesuganon of factors which may influence these developments viz genetic character early experiences parental attttudes social class and cultural norms

Reference books Carmichael L Manual of child psychology 3rd ed 2 vols (Wiley 1970) Mussen P H Conger J J and Kagan J Child development and personality 4th ed (Harper & Row 1974)

Unas 6 Level Post graduate Durauon One half year

36518 PSYCHOPATHOLOGY Dr MM Wood

Class Con tact 3 hours per week Pre requ1sues Graduate status

This topic will be directed towards a study of the development organization and dynamics of behaviour disorders 1n the ma1or class1flcauons of psychosis neurosis and character disorder The approach wtll assume a knowledge of basic theory from third year level psychology and will have a research apphed onentauon The topic will place emphasis on specific disorders of personality most frequently presented tn chn1cal pracnce

Set book Page J D Psychopathology 2nd ed (Ald1ne 1975)

Reference books Costello C G Symptoms of psychopathology (Wiley 1970) Eysenck H J Handbook of abnormal psychology 2nd ed (Pitman 1973)

Units 4

36504 SOCIAL AND GROUP PROCESSES Dr J H Court

Level Post graduate Durauon One term

281

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Class Con tact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Graduate status

The chent wtll be related to hts social context The importance of social tnteractton in the understandmg of behaviour disorder will be stressed including community resources and pressures with group therapeuuc techniques and group pressures An interactionist approach to physical illness will focus on psychosomauc disorders

Units 6 Level Post graduate Duration One half year

36519 PSYCHODIAGNOSTICS Dr/ H Court

Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisite Graduate status

A senes of seminars and demonstrations covenng the main areas of investigation of abnormal psychological states The chief types of psychological deficit will be outlined and followed by coverage of the techniques available for then assessment 1n chn1cal and expenmental settmgs Subject matter will include disorders of affect th1nk1ng memory intelhgence language personahty and the evaluation of psychotherapy Standardised tests psychomotor and psychophys1olog1cal measures and gnd techniques will be considered as tools

Set books Mtttler P The psychological assessment of mental and physical handicaps (Methuen 1970) Luna A R The working brain (Penguin 1973) Wtlhams M Mental testing in clinical practice (Pergamon 1965) Zimmerman I L and Woo Sam, J M Clinical interpretation of the Wechsler adult intelligence scale (Grune & Stratton 1973)

Recommended reading Meehl P Clinical vs statistical prediction (Minnesota Univ Pr 1963) Gathercole C E Assessment in clinical psychology (Penguin 1968) Williams M Brain damage and the mind (Penguin 1970)

Units 6

36521 COUNSELLING - THEORIES AND PRACTICE

Dr L Kapehs

Level Post graduate Durauon One half year Class Contact 1 three hour seminar per week Pre requisite Graduate status

By means of d1scuss1on him and demonstrauon the techniques of counselling of vanous types will be covered In parucular sessions will deal with the 1nterv1ew aspects of non verbal communication marriage counselhng and vocanonal counselling as well as the non dtrecuve approach to personal counselling in a therapeuuc context The emphasis will be on the one to one relattonsh1p group techniques will be covered in a separate unit

Set books Bordin E S Psychological counselling 2nd ed (Appleton Century Crofts 1968) Carkhuff R R Helping and human relations 2 vols (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969)

282

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Units 4

36507 RESEARCH DESIGN AND STATISTICS Mr E A Cleland

Level Post graduate Durauon One term Class Con tact 3 hours per week Pre requisite Graduate status

The purpose of thts topic is to fam1hanse students with research methods and stat1sucal techniques that are relevant for research in both chntcal and communlly setungs Insu-ucuon is given 10 the use of computerized staust1cal packages and students analyse data typically collected dunng placements using one of these packages

Set book Nie N H Bent D H and Hull C H SPSS statistical package for the social sciences, 2nd cd (McGraw Hill 1975)

Units 4 Level Post graduate Duranon One term

36508 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY Dr L Kapebs

Class Contact I three hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Graduate status

This topic will seek to fam1hanse students with the kind of work earned out by educational psychologists so that a commun1cat1on bndge can be built to equip students for the demand in chn1cal work for guidance and assessment of disturbed chlldren and to 1denttfy community resources available for the care of handicapped and disturbed children

Set books Anderson R C and Faust G W Educational psychology (Dodd Mead 1973)

Units 6

36522 BEHAVIOUR MODIFICATION Dr] H Court

Level Post graduate Durauon One half year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre-requisite Graduate status

The main techniques of behaviour mod1hcauon will be considered against their theoretical framework Desens1usatton aversive techniques and the uses of reinforcement will be covered In parallel with theoreucal teaching opportun1t1es for use of the techniques will be made 1n the pracucum placements

Set books Yates A Behaviour therapy (Wiley 1970) Kanfer F H and Phtlhps J S Leaming foundations of behavior therapy (Wiley 1970) Schaefer H H and Martin P L Behavioural therapy (McGraw Hill 1969) Rickard H C Behavioral 1ntervent1on in human problems (Pergamon 1971) Rimm D C and Masters J C Behaviour therapy (Academic 1974) Watson L S Chzld behavior mod1f1catzon (Pergamon 1973) Thoresen C E and Mahoney M J Behavioral self control (Holt Rinehart&: Winston 1974)

283

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

36512 INSTRUMENTATION Dr Charles L Zimmer Hart

Offered m altematr years Av·111able 1n 1979

Units 4 Level Post graduate Durauon One term

36513 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS Dr L Kapelis

Class Contact l three hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1te Graduate status

\Vorkrng largely from example but also from theorcucal papers etlucal issues '"111 be examined \VIth relation to the pract1s1ng psychologist and (a) his chent or patient (b) other psychologists (c) other professional colleagues (d) the 1nstllut1on or practtce (e) the law (f) the society

Coverage \VIII include reference to profess1onal conduct the rights of the paucnt conhdenuahty of informauon content of reports charging of fees

36514 DISSERTATION

Untts 8 Level Post graduate Duration Fust and second year

An original piece of work conducted 1n an apphed cl1n1cal selling Thts should be 'l

modest and cucumscnbed study derived from experience 1n one of the p1acucum placements A topic area should be 1dent1fred 10 first year second term method 'tnd background prep'tred 10 thud term ready for data collection in the long vacation The completed work should be submitted by the end of second term second year follo,v1ng the principles spec1£1cd in the Statute

Untts See below Level Post graduate Duratton See belo\v

36523 PRACTICUM (12 umts) 36524 PRACTICUM (16 units)

Class Con tact 5 sessions per week

Students \viii w·ork 43 \Veeks 10 held setungs under supetviston throuhh theacadem1cye'tr and part of the long vacauon 1 e excluding exam1nauon '"eeks and the '"eeks either side 0£ exam1nat1ons Placements \Vtll generally be for half theacademicycar with four places tn all but 111 some cases a full years pl'tcement will be undertaken

Students taking 36501 enrol for 36523 Others enrol for 36521

As part of the pracUc'll experience workshops '"ti! be convened three times d year for more 1ntens1ve experience 1n selected areas In addiuon regular group teaclung on pr tcllc'tl topics '"Ill be offered throughout each term by Lhe MenLal Health Setv1ces of South Australia

284

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Topics in Asian Studies

GENERAL INFORMATION Asian Slud1es 1s an 1nterd1sc1pltnary programme presently concentrating on the study of development and change in Soul.beast Asia Bas1cd1sc1phne requnements 1redescnbed tn Appendix A of Smtule 10 I Schedule 2 After sausfactory performance at the fusl yc<tr level as spcc1hed in Appendix A student~ intending to offer Asian Studies as a ma1or d1sc1phne shall take Topic 37201 Rurdl and Urban Change 111 SouthedstAs1a at the second year level and Topic 37302 Pol1t1cal and Economic Development 10 Southeast Asia at the third year level Each of these topics 1s 'vorth 12 units Topics 10 Chinese and Japanese languages offered by the Un1vers1tyof Adelaide as well as 37150 Indonesian I 37250 Indonesian II and all other Asian Studies topics may be taken as cognates or electives 1f the pre requisites are sattshed 10 each instance (Note 37150 Indonest'ln I may be taken as the first year of a basic sequence 1n Asian Studies) Students 1ntend1ng to take As tan Studies topics are advised to consult the Director of As tan Studies Dr 1"1 S Leng or the Duector of Studies for As tan Studies Mr S Sastro,vardOJO

Honours Programme An Honours programme in Asian Studies consists of the £01low1ng

(a) Four of the follov.l'lng topics 37403 Elites 111 Southeast Asta 37405 Urban1sauon and Development ni Southeast Asta 37406 Srruggle for India 1917 1q39 37407 The Chinese Cultural Revolutions 37408 Sociology of the Thud World (Honours)

(b) An Honours thesis of not more than 15 000 words A Joint Honours programme ts avatlable wtth another d1sc1phne

Untts 12 Level Ftrsl year ..Jurat1on Full year

First Year Topic

37150 INDONESIAN I \h I I 1 l.,t./ 1111d \Ir "i11ba~10 "itl\lrou n1do10

6 units 6 UtlllS

6 Units 6 unlls 6 UllltS

12 units

Class Contact Language classes and laboratory 5 hours per week Lectu1es/tutondls on social and cultural background l hour per week Pre requisites None

The purpose of thts topic ts to give students a basic knowledge of spoken and \\rttten Indonesian and to provide an introducnon to Indonesian society and culture The topic assumes no previous knolvledge o( Indonesian but spect'll 'lrrangements are 1nade for students with such kno\vledge Audio lingual class room and language labor ttor) sessions are held as well as reading and conversanon classes Lectures and tutonals sun ey aspects of Indones1an culture and society espectally 1n the mode1n penod to provide an understanding of the cultural environment in which the l'lnguage ts used This topic will not be part of a ma1or sequence in Indooes1an but 1nay be taken as the l1rst year of a ma1or sequence 10 Asian Studies Social Science students offenng this topic"' 111 however still be requued tocompletc24 units of first year Social Science topics 111 add1t1on to Indones1'ln I

Assessment will be based on exercises tests tutonal preparanon and class parllc1p \l1on throughout the year

Language Set book Johns Y Bahasa Indonesia Langkah Baru (ANU 1975)

For reference Sarumpaet J P (Melbourne Univ

and Mackie ] A C Pr 1967)

Introduction lo Bahasa Indonesia rev cd

285

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

and either Echols ] M and Shadily H An Indonesian English Dictionary 2nd eel (Cornell Univ Pr 1963) Echols J M and Shadtly H An English Indonesian D1ctzonary (Cornell Univ Pr 1975) or Wojowasito S and Poerwadarm1nta W J S Kamus Lengkap lnggeris Indonesia Indonesia lnggens (Hasta 1974)

Culture Background reading Avehng H eel From Surabaya to Armageddon Indonesian short stones (Heinemann 1976) McVey R T eel Indonesia (HRAF Pr 1967) Pramoedya Ananta Toer A heap of ashes (Univ of Queensland Pr 1975) Wertheim W F Indonesian society 1n transition (Van Hoeve 1964)

Units 12 Level Second year Duration Full year

Second Year Topics

37250 INDONESIAN II Mr Subagio Sastrowardo10

Class Contact 5 hours per week Pre requisite 37150 Indonesian I at C grade or better Co requisites None

Section A Language (4 hours per week) The area of study will include advanced grammar study reinforced by language laboratory pracuce and will emphasize acuve use of the language in d1scuss1on reading and advanced 'vrltten compostt1on Reading matenals lvlll be taken from a vanety of sources (nelvspapers current affairs magazines cultural Journals soCial science pubhcations novels and short stones) The aim of such reading will be both to develop language skills and to provide a means for research into areas of concern to social scientists

Section B Social and Cultural Background (I hour per week) A senes of lectures and tu tonals dealing with the main 1deolog1cal trends cultural patterns and lifestyles underlying social economic and pohucal developments 1n contemporary Indonesia Indonesian hterary works which reflect this social and cultural background will be discussed as well as wnungs m nelvspapers magannes and social saence Journals both 1n Indonesian and tn English

Assessment will be based on assignments tests and class paruc1pauon throughout the yeat

Set books Johns Y Bahasa Indonesia Langkah Baru 2nd ed (ANU 1976) McGarry J D and Soemaryono Learn Indoneszan Book 3 (Modem Indonesian Pubhcauons 1973) Either Echols] andShad1ly H Anlndonesian English Dictionary 2nded (Comel1Un1v Pr 1963) Echols J and Shadily H An English Indonesian Dictionary (Cornell Univ Pr 1975) or Wo1owastto S and Poerwadanntnta W J S Kamus Lengkap lnggens Indonesia Indonesia lnggerzs (Hasta 1974) Stencilled I'ead1ng matenal will be provided throughoul the year

Background reading McVey R eel Indonesia (Yale Univ Pr 1967) Oey Hong Lee ed Indonesia after the I97I elections (0 UP 1974)

286

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Ahs1ahbana S T Indonesia social and cultural revolullon (0 UP 1966) Holt C ed Culture and politics in Indonesia (Cornell Univ Pr 1972) Achdiat Karta Mihard1a Athets (Queensland Univ Pr 1972) Mochtar Lubis Twdzght 1n Jakarta (Vanguard 1963) Jassin H B ed Angkatan 66 prosa dan pu1si (Gunung Agung 1968) Teeuw A Modem Indonesian literature (M N1Jhoff 1967)

37201 RURAL AND URBAN CHANGE IN SOUTHEAST ASIA

Dr A M Maude and Dr C F Yong

Units 12 Level Second year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutorial or seminar a week Pre requ1sues Euber Economics I Geography I History I Psychology I Pohucs I or Indonesian I each at C grade or better

The aim of the top1c1s to examine the changes 1n rural and urban society tn Southeast Asta in the 19th and especially 20th centunes which resulted from colon1ahsm the economic impact of the West and the ga1n1ng of pohtical independence The d1sc1phnary perspectives used will be predominantly but not exclusively those of history and geography and v .. htle the topic will range over thew hole of SoutheastAsia the main forus will be on Malaysia Singapore Indonesia and the Philippines The topic will be divided into three main sections One on rural change 1n SoutheastA!.ia will tnclude the follow1ng topics environmental and rultural vanauon in Southeast Asia economic and social change 1n rural Southeast Asia wet nee cultivators smallholders plantations demographic change peasant upnsings and land reform Another on urban change will include a study of colonial c1ues the urban1zauon process social change 1n the Southeast Asian city urban ehtes the urban Chinese and non poht1cal elites The third section will focus on colon1ahsm nauonahsm communism and modem1zat1on

As half of this topic 1s offered as 32212 Southeast Asia it may not be counted to,vards a degree in add1uon to that topic Top1c3720l may also not be counted towards a degree 10

addtt1on to 32203 Development Geography 1£ Topic 32203 was completed 1n 1976 or earher and/or 33206 Modem History of Island Southeast A!.ia

Text book Steinberg D J ed In search of Southeast Asia (Pall Mall 1971)

Reference books McGee T G The Southeast Asian city (Bell 1967) M1ssen G J Viewpoint on Indonesia (Nelson 1972)

Third Year Topic

37302 POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT IN SOUTHEAST ASIA

Units 12 Level Third year Duration Full year

Dr HS Leng and Mr GK C Tan

Class Contact Terms I and II 2 lectures and l tutonal per week Term Ill l seminar per 'veek Pre requisites 37201 Rural and urban change tn Southeast Asta at C grade or better or 72 units 1n other topics at C grade or better

287

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

This topic consists of two parts of lectures and tutorials and a senes of 1nterd1sc1phnary seminars designed to hnk vanous aspects of political and economic development in Southeast Asia The hrst part of the topic is a comparauve study of pohucal change in Southeast Asia Parncular attention will be paid to the following areas colon1ahsm nationahsm and creauon of nation states problems of nat1onal 1dent1ty and 1ntegrauon types of regimes and their legiumatton pohucal competn1on and conflict as expressed in pohtlcal parties and elections nots revolts and proxy wars competing elites and the struggle for authonty and effecuveness changes 1n pohucal demands and 1n governmental and political response reg1onahsm and foreign involvement The second part of the topic will deal \vith economic development Areas to be covered include general charactenst1cs of Southeast Asian economies problems of agncultural development 1ndustnal development trade private foreign investment populauon growth and population pohcy and regional 1ntegrat1on in Southeast Asia The 1nterd1sc1phnary seminars to be organised 1n the thud term of the course will focus on areas such as the pohttcal and economic consequences of plural societies pohc1es on 1ndustnahsauon and urban growth foreign aid government pohcy towards mulunauonal corporauons and pnvate foreign investment populauon policy and prospects for regional pohucal and economic 1ntegrat1on This topic may not be counted towards a degree 1n addiuon to Topic 35306 Southeast Asian Pohucal Development

Preliminary reading Pye L W Southeast Asia s political systems 2nd eel (Prenuce Hall 1974) Shaplen R Time out of hand revolution and reaction 1n Southeast Asta (Deutsch 1969) Steinberg D J ed In search of Southeast Asia (Pall Mall 1971)

Reference books Asian Development Bank Southeast Asia s economy 1n the 1970 s (Longman 1971) Cowan C D Economic development of Southeast Asia (Allen & Unw1n 1964) Feith H and Castles L eds Indonesian political thinking 1945 1965 (Cornell Univ Pr 1970) Fryer D W Emerging Southeast Asta (Ph1hp 1970) Glassburner B The economy of Indonesia (Cornell Univ Pr 1971) Grossholtz J Politics in the Philippines (Little Bro\vn 1964) Hicks G L Trade and growth in the Philippines (Cornell Univ Pr 1971) Holt R T and Turner J E The political basis of economic development (v.tn Nostrand 1966) Kennedy J Asian nat:onaltsm in the twentieth century (Macmillan 1968) Lim D Economic growth and development In lVest Malaysia (0 UP 1973) McAhster J T ed Southeast Asia the politics of national integration (Random House 1973) McVey R ed Indonesia (Southeasl Asia Studies Yale Univ Pr 1970) Morgan T and Spolestra N Economic interdependence in Southeast Asia (W1scons1n Univ Pr 1967) Muscat R J Development strategy in Thailand (Praeger 1966) Tilman R 0 ed Man state and society 1n contemporary Southeast Asia (Pall Mall 1969) Wightman D Toward economic co operation in Asia (Yale Univ Pr 1963) You P S and Lim C Y The Singapore economy (Eastern Univ Pr 1971) Von Vorys D K Democracy without consensus (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1975)

Unus 6

Honours Topics

37403 (35416) ELITES IN SOUTHEAST ASIA Dr HS Leng

Level Fourth year Duration Term III

288

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes 36 units in Pohucs or Asian Studies II and III each at C grade or better

A soc10/pohucal analysts of Southeast Asian ehtes (with parucular attention paid to nauonahst leaders) thelt ongins social backgrounds recrultment patterns power bases ideologies and acuons It ts proposed that only the ASEAN countnes are to be covered

37405 (32411) URBANISATION AND DEVELOPMENT IN SOUTHEAST ASIA

Units 6 Level Fourth year Duration Full year

Dr A M Maude and Dr G ] Hugo

Class Contact l seminar per fortnight Pre requtslles 36 units in Geography or Asian Studies topics 37201 and 37302 each 1.t C grade or better

A study of m1grat1on urb1.nisauon and regional planning pohc1cs 1n Southeast Asia in the context of theones of economic development and social change

Unlls 6 Level Honours Duratton Full year

37406 STRUGGLE FOR INDIA 1917-1939 Dr L Brennan

Class Contact l seminar per fortnight Pre requ1s1tes 36 units in History or Asian Studies top1cs3720I and 37302 each at C grade or better

The topic will consider internal tensions and conflict in India against the background of constttuuonal development and nat1onahst agllat1on Attention \Vtll be focussed on the non Br.ihmin movements of South and West India the regional n1ovement Ill Andhra agranan confhct in B1har and the Unued Provinces Hindu and Muslim communahsm in Bengal and the United Province<> and Sikh rev1valtsm

Preliminary reading Broomfield J Elite conflict in a plural society (Caltforn1a Univ Pr 1968) Harnson S India the most dangerous decades (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1961) Irsch1ck E F Polit1csandsoc1al confltct tn South India the non Brahmin movement and Tamil separation (Cahfornta Univ Pr 1969) Moore R J The crzsis of Indian unity 1917 40 (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1974)

Unns 6

37407 (35403) THE CHINESE CULTURAL REVOLUTIONS

Dr W Brugger and G Young

Level Honours Duration Term III Class Contact 10 two hour seminars Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing and 12 units of Po hues at third year level "It C ~Tade or better

An advanced topic for students lvho have already taken Pohucs or equivalent work on Cluna

289

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

37408 (38413) SOCIOLOGY OF THE THIRD WORLD (Honours)

Dr R Hassan Unus 6 Level Honours Class Contact Two hours per week Pre requisites Honours standing

An advanced level seminar linked to topic 38305 Sociology of the Thud World

290

I

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Topics in Sociology

GENERAL INFORMATION

General questions of course design permission to take special comb1nauons or broad questions about the study of Sociology at Flinders should be addressed either to the Head of D1sc1pllne Ivan Szelenyi or to the Director of Studies Dr R1az Hassan Ordinary Degree A basic maJor sequence 1n Sociology requues thirty six unus of work done wnh1n the d1sc1phne This should be made up of twelveun1ts fromSoc1ology I (Soaology 38110) and twenty four units from topics 1n Sociology offered at second and thud year levels However it should be noted that smce Sociology I is being introduced for the first lime in 1978 students who have twelve units of a first year Social Sciences topic (other than Soaology) taken pnor to 1978 may offer that topic 1n place of 38110

There are three broad categones of Sociology topics at second and thud year levels

Category I Topics which extend for the whole academic year and which concentrate on ma] or theoretical and methodological issues in Sociology

Category II Soc1ologyTeam Research Projects whtch extend for the whole academic year The Research Pro1ects are intended to provide students wnh the opportunny to get involved 1n problem onented research and to do sociological held work 1n a co operative team suuauon Emphasis is also placed on using the widest possible vanetyof methods of data collecuon and analysts (surveys other forms of 1nterview1ng paruc1pantobservat1on documentary analysis video taping etc) Students are encouraged to formulate a project of then own choice which offers them a chance to relate then theoreucal interest and methodological skills to theu own hfe experiences

Category III Topics which usually extend over a half academic year (one semester) and which concentrate on substanuve areas of sociological theory and research

Students intending to take an Honours degree in Sociology are advised lo choose two topics from Category I and one topic from Category II in their second and third year

The followtng topics are avatlable tn Sociology at second and thud year level

(NB Starred topics(•) will NOT be offered tn 1978)

Category I 38208 Soc1olog1cal Theory (Mr A Patience) 38209 Introducuon to Social Structure (Prof I Szelenyz

Ms G Huilgol) 38307 Theones and Methods of Soc1olog1cal Enquuy

(Dr R Hassan Mr A Patience)

Category II 38301 Sociology Team Research Soc1ology of Knowledge Project

(Dr R Wilton) 38308 Sociology Team Research Social Problems Pro1ect

(Prof I Szelenyi)

Category III 38212 Urban Sociology (Prof I Szelenyi Dr R Hassan) 38213 Famtly and K1nsh1p (Ms A Yeatman) 38214 Posiuon of Women in Modern Society (Ms A Yeatman) 38305 Soc1ology of the Thud World (Ms G Huilgol

Dr R Hassan) 38306 Pohucal Sociology Class Analysts and the State

(Mr A Patience)• 38311 38312 38313

Contemporary Soctahst Societies {Prof I Szeleny1)• Social Inequality (Dr R Hassan Ms G Huilgol) (34302) Contemporary Amencan Society (Dr R Witton)

6 units

6 unlls

6 untts

6 units

6 untts

6 units 6 unas 6 untts

6 untts

6 units 6 unlts 6 untts 6 unlts

291

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

First Year Topic

38110 SOCIOLOGY I ECONOMY AND SOCIETY -AN INTRODUCTION TO MACROSOCIOLOGY

Dr R Hassan Ms G Huilgol Prof I Szeleny1 (Convenor) Dr R W1tton

Units 12 Level Frrst year Duration Full year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tu tonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None

This topic introduces students to the basic concepts of sociology by analysing the emergence and development of modern Western society The course begins wllh the analysis of h1stoncal pre cond1uons for the emergence of a capttahst society leading to a d1scuss1on of whether colonial Austraha can be regarded 1.S cap1tahst at all Nineteenth century soc1olog1cal theones wrll be discussed as interpretations of basic socio economic processes ltke industnaltzat1on urbanization and bureaucratIZation The main focus of the course 1s on changes currently occurring in our socreties and more specifically rn Australta today Theones which suggest that we are in the age of post cap1t1.hst industnal socrety will be contrasted with modern Marxist theones of contemporary capttah~m Are Western soc1eues becoming more egalitarian? Are sooal rnequahues rn contemporary Austraha increasing or decreasing? Are there still classes 1n Australia today?The role of the State and the nature of increased State 1nteJVent1on \VIII be discussed wrth reference to the present hnanc1al crises and to the poss1b1l1t1e~ and hmttauons of red1stribut1on of real income Finally convergence theones suggesting that Western industn ii societies communist soc1eues and thud world countries will necessanly become more similar tn sacral structure will be presented and cnucally examined

Reference books Bell D The coming of the post indu~trial society (Penguin 1976)• Connell R W Ruling class ruling culture (Cambndge Univ Pr 1977) Durkheim E The division of labour tn society (Free Pr 1964) Engels r The condition of the working class in England (Panther 1969 Blackwdl 1971)' Giddens A Capitalism and modern social theory (Cambndge Univ Pr 1971) Goldthorpe J The affluent worker (Cambnd~e Univ Pr 1968) Poulantzas N Classes in contemporary capitalism (Ne\v Left 1975) Thompson E P The making of the English working class (Penguin)• Tonn1es F Community and society (llarper 1963) 'Veber M The Protestant ethic and the spirit of capitalism (Scnbner s 1958)

Second and Third Year Topics

38208 SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY Mr A Patience or Ms A Yeatman

Unus 6 Level Second or third year Duration Full year Class Con tact 1 lecture and 1 tu tonal per week Pre requ1s1tes 12 untts of any first year level Social Sciences topic at C grade or better

Students are advised that as horn 1979 topic 38110 Sociology I may be a pre requ1s1te for this topic for students 1ntend1ng to read for a basic ma1or 1n Sociology

NoTE Students at second year level who intend to read for a basic ma1or in Sociology are advised that topic 38209 Introduction to Social Structure closely complements this topic

This topic 1s an analytical history of sociological theory beginning with the precursors of soc1ology and g1v1ng special attention to the works of Marx Durkheim and Weber

292

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Assessment will be based on wnuen work

Preliminary reading Giddens A Capitalism and modem social theory (Cambridge Univ Pr 1971)

Reference books Aron Raymond Main currents in sociological thought 2 vols (Penguin)• Bottomore T Marxist sociology (Macmillan 1976) Bnnton C The shaping of modern thought (Prenuce Hall 1963) Fletcher Ronald The making of Sociology 2 vols (Nelson 1972) Hawthorn G Enlightenment and despair a history of sociology (Cambridge Univ Pr 1976) Hughes H S Consciousness and society (MacG1bbon & Kee 1967) Lukes S Essays in social theory (Macmillan 1977) N1sbe1 R The sociologzcal tradition (Heinemann 1970)

Unns 6

38209 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL STRUCTURE

Professor I Szelenyi Ms G Huilgol

Level Second and thud year Duration Full year Class Conlact 2 3 hours per week Pre-requ1s1tes 12 units of any first year level Social Sciences topic or of an approved topic 1n another School each at C grade or beuer

On the one hand this topic will involve an exam1natton of basic macro soc1ological concepts wtth particular attention given to analysing confhcttng theories (denved from Marx and Weber) concerning the economic foundauons of the society the ong1n and nature of social inequahues strat1£1cauon social class and power 1n modern socteues On the other hand it will be possible for students to focus spec1hcally on the question of the relauon of social structure to personaltty 1n both modern and pre modern soC1et1es

Assessment will be based on essays and a report on readings

Reference books Berger P and Luckmann T The social construction of reality (Doubleday 1966) Bete11le A ed Social inequality (Penguin 1969) Encel S Equality and authority a study of class status and power in Australia (Cheshue 1970) Giddens A The class structure of advanced societies (Hutchinson 1973) Le Vine R Culture and personality (Ald1ne 1974) Le Vine R Culture behaviour and personality (Aldine 1973) Marx K and Engels F The German ideology (Laurence & Wishart 1965) Parkin F Class inequality and political order (Paladin 1972) Parsons T Social structure and personality (Colher Macmillan 1964) Playford J and Kusner D eds Australian capitalism towards a socialist cntique (Penguin 1972) Tonn1es F Community and society (Harper 1963) Wallace A Culture and personality, 2nd ed (Random House 1970) Weber M The Protestant ethic and the sp111t of capitalism (Allen & Unw1n 1965) We1nste1n F and Platt G M Psychoanalytic sociology (John Hopkins Univ Pr 1973) Wild R A Bradstow (Angus & Robertson 1974)

38212 URBAN SOCIOLOGY Professor I Szelenyi Dr R Hassan

Units 6 Level Second and thud year Duration Fust half year

293

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 tutorial per week Pre-requisites None

A summary of the work done by urban soc1olog1sts in this century including an analysis of the Chicago School Amencan Community Studies the New Urban Sociology and recent French attempts to develop a Marxist urban sociology The course will offer a short survey of Austrahan urban problems

Assessment by essays and book reviews

Text books Gtsl N P and Fava S Urban society 5th ed (Crowell 1964) Pahl R ed Readings in urban sociology (Pergamon 1968) Reference books Castells M La question urbaine (Maspero 1973) Fava S Urbanism in world perspectives (Crowell 1968) Gans H People and plans (Baste 1968) Harloe M ed Captive cities (Wiley 1977) Harvey D Social 7ust1ce and the clly (Arnold 1973) Pickvance C G Urban sociology - critical essays (Tavistock 1976) Stein M R The eclipse of community (Princeton Univ Pr 1960) Stretton H Ideas for Australian cities (Georgian House 1975)

38213 FAMILY AND KINSHIP

Unns 6 Level Second and thud year Durauon Fust half year Class Contact Lecture and tutonal Assessment Wrnten work

Ms A Yeatman

Pre requ1s1tes Sociology I or 12 units of a hrst year subject each at grade C or better (From 1979 Soc10Iogy I only will be the pre requ1stte for this topic unless exempnon ts gained by perm1ss1on of the instructor)

This topic 1s an analytical 1ntroducuon to the area which will attempt to investigate the speciftc role and nature of the family 1n society Spec1ftc attenuon will be given to the sociology of the modern family and to how that sociology influences and ts influenced by recent work in the history of the modern family

Reading list Coser R L ed The family its structure and functions 2nd ed (St Marun s Pr 1974) Laslett P The world we have lost (Un1vers1ty Publications) Parsons T and Bales R F Family socialization and interaction process (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1956) Radchffe Brown A R and Forde D African systems of kinship and marriage

lntroducuon (0 UP 1950) Rosaldo M and Lamphere L eds Woman culture and society (Stanford Univ Pr 1975) Shorter E The making of the modem family (Collins 1976) Zaretsky E Capitalism the family and personal life (Pluto Pr)

38214 THE POSITION OF WOMEN IN MODERN SOCIETY

Units 6 Level Second and third year Durauon Second half year Class Contact Lecture and tutorial Assessment Wntten work

294

Ms A Yeatman

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Pre requ1s1tes Sociology I or 12 unlls of a first year sub1ect each at grade C or better (From 1979 Sociology I only will be the pre requisite for this topic unless exemption is gained by permission of the instructor) Students are advised that 38213 provides a very useful background for tlus topic

The theme of this topic will be the con tradict1on between fem1n1n1ty and 1ndiv1duauon for women 1n the history of modern society Exam1nat1on of this contrad1ct1on entails analysis of the changing character of the sexual division of labour and of women s role in producttve labour in relation to the development of capttahsm especially capitahst 1ndustr1ahzauon In this context special attention will be paid to recentchaoges in rates of part1c1pauoo of women in the labour force and to the relat1onsh1ps of women Lo education (especially higher education) Reference to the nineteenth century and contemporary expressions of the women s movement and to studies of workingwomen s self concepts will be made wtth a view to ra1s1ng quesuons as to the expression of the contrad1cuon between fem1n1ntty and 1nd1v1duat1on in women s consciousness

Reading list Barker D L and Allen S Dependence and exploitation in work and marriage (Longman 1976) Branca P Silent sisterhood Middle class women in the Victorian home (Croom Helm 1975) Bndenthal R and Koonz C eds Becoming visible women in European history (Houghton Mifflin 1976) Cott N F Root of bitterness Documents of the social history of American women (Dutton 1972) Encel S Mackenzie N and Tebbutt M Women and society An Australian study (Cheshire 1974) Gordon L Womans body woman s right a social history of birth control (Grossman Pubhshers 1976) Kradttor A S ed Up from the pedestal (Quadrangle 1968) Mitchell J and Oakley A The rights and wrongs of women (Penguin 1976) Tanner L B Voices from womens liberation (Mentor 1970) Wollstonecraft M A vindication of the rights of worn.en (Penguin)

38301 SOCIOLOGY TEAM RESEARCH SOCIOLOGY OF KNOWLEDGE PROJECT

Unus 6 Level Second or thud year Durauon Fust half year

Dr R A Wilton

Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1slles 12 units of any hrst year level Social Sciences topic at C grade or better

This topic draws on the sociology of know ledge 10 order to study soc1eues through the way that they organize education and pursue knowledge Spec1hcally cnt1ques made of certain areas of research wt11 be examined io order to delermtnewhether such cnuques can lead to a more comprehensive study of society and its intellectual pursuits

Preliminary reading D Urso S ed Counterpoints critical writings on Australian education (Wiley 1971) Farberow N L ed Taboo topics (Atherton 1966) Fry P and Long M Beyond the mechanical mind (Sydney ABC 1977) Kuhn T S The structure of scientific revolutions (Chicago Univ Pr 1962) Mitchell A_ Friday s~a1lflJFutura 1975) - -0 Neill D Up the right channels (Queensland Univ Pr 1970) Roszak T ed The dissenting academy (Pelican 1969) Roszak T The making of a counter culture (Faber 1971)

Students are also encouraged to read the Xeroxed matenals that will be placed on Reserve in the Library before the course begins

295

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Units 6

38305 SOCIOLOGY OF THE THIRD WORLD Dr R Hassan Ms G Huilgol

Level Second and third year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I tu tonal per week Pre requ1sues None however students are advised that the theoretical analysis in this topic related to some of the central concerns of topic 38306 Pohucal Sociology

The nature of the emerging international stratification system will be examined and students will be introduced to the determinants of the social structure of Third World societies Special attention will be paid to the social structures of developing Asian soc1eues and to the processes of social change 111 these societies An explorauon of the social structure of fhird World soc1eues from the viewpoint of dependency theory Parucular attenuon will be paid to Papua New Guinea

Assessment will be based on wntten work and an optional examination

Reference books Alatas S H The myth of the lazy native (Frank Cass 1977) Bernstein H ed Underdevelopment and development (Penguin 1973) Boserup E Women s role in economic development (Allen & Untv1n 1970) Camilleri J A C1vzl1zat1on in crisis (Cambndge Univ Pr 1976) Cockroft ] D Frank A G and Johnson D L Dependence and underdevelopment (Anchor 1972) DeKadt E and W1lhams G eds Sociology and development (Harper & Row 1974) Frank A G Capitalism and underdevelopment in Latin America (Monthly Review Pr 1967) Goldthorpe J The sociology of the Third World (Cambndge Univ Pr 1975) Gough K and Sharma H Imperialism and revolution in South Asia (Monthly Review Pr 1973) Hassan R ed Singapore society tn transition (Oxford 1976) Myrdal G Asian drama (abndged ed) (Penguin 1971) Roberts J P The Mapoon books (Internauonal Development Action vols I 3) Stavenhagen R Social classes tn agrarian societies (Anchor 1975) Wertheim W F Indonesian society in transition (W van Hoeve 1969) Worsley P The third world 2nd ed (We1denfeld & Nicolson 1973)

38306 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY CLASS ANALYSIS AND THE STATE• Mr A Patience

(This topic will not be offered in 1978)

Units 6 Level Second and thud year Duration First half year Class Contact Two lectures and one tutonal per week Pie requisites None however students may find a background in either 38208 Soc1olog1cal Theory or 38209 Introducuon to Social Structure useful

An exploration of the sociology of the state in Western 1ndustr1al societies The topic will examine the relattonship of class analysis to the study of political power Theextentof the state will be explored and there will be some discussion of theones of state intervent1on1sm and social change in capnahst soc1eues

Assessment will be based on wntten work and an optional examination

Reference books Bottomore T B Classes in modern society (Allen & Untvin 1965) Giddens A The class structure of the advanced societies (Hutchinson 1973) Lukes S Power a radical view (Macmillan 1974)

296

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Mihband R The state in capitalist society (Quartet 1973) Parkin F Class inequality and political order (Paladin 1972) Parry G Political elites (Allen & Unw1n 1969) Poulantzas N A Political power and social cla~ses (New Left 1973) Poulantzas N A Classes in contemporary capitalism (New Left 1975) Wedderburn D ed Poverty inequality and class structure (Cambndge Univ Pr 1974) Westergaard J and Resler H Class in a capitalist society (Heinemann 1975)

38307 THEORIES AND METHODS OF SOCIOLOGICAL ENQUIRY Dr R Ilassan and Mr A Patience

Unas 6 Level Third year Duration Full year Class Contact Arrangement of two hours per week throughout the year Pre requisites 12 units of Sociology at C grade or better In additton 67112 Computing II and 65204 Introductory Stausttcs could be an advantage

This topic 1s concerned wt th the methods and techniques of collecting data about society and processing and tnterpreung those data and the philosophy norms and soc1olog1cal theory which underlte and are embedded 1n these methods and techniques

Reference books C1courel A V Method and measurement in sociology (Free Pr 1964) Goode W J and Hatt P K Methods in social research (McGraw Hill 1952) Hindes B The use of official statistics in sociology (Macmillan 1973) Kuhn T S The structure of scienlific revolutions (Chicago Univ Pr 1970) Lazansfeld P Pasanella A K and Rosenberg M Contznuittes in the language of social research (Free Pr 1972) Mayntz R Holm K and Hoebner P Introduction to empirical sociology (Penguin 1976) Moser C A Survey methods in social 1nvest1gat1on (Heinemann 1958) Nachmias D and Nachmias C Research methods in thesoczalsczences(Arnold 1976) Popper K The Poverty of h1stonc1sm (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1961) Selhtz C Jahoda M Deutsch M and Cook S Research methods in social relations (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1964) Stretton H The political sciences (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1969)

38308 SOCIOLOGY TEAM RESEARCH SOCIAL PROBLEMS PROJECT

Untts 6 Level Third year Duration Full year

Professor I Szelenyi

Class Contact One seminar per week Pre requ1sues None but students are advised that a background in either 38208 Sociological Theory or 38209 Introducuon to Social Structure may be useful

Students wlll be organised into small teams to conduct problem onented research This will involve field work in Adelaide and/or its environs on problems such as poverty housing the aged different under pnvileged groups etc

Assessment by research report

Preliminary reading Becker H ed Social problems (Wiley 1966) Miller S and Roby P The future of inequality (Baste 1970) Gans H More equality (Pantheon 1973)

297

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Henderson R F Harcourt A and Harper R J People zn poverty - a Melbourne survey (Cheshire 1970) Jones M A Housing; and poverty in Australia (Melbourne Univ Pr 1972) Australian Commission of inquiry tnto poverty Poverty in Australia Chauman R F Henderson (AG PS 1975)

38311 CONTEMPORARY SOCIALIST SOCIETIES Professor I Szelenyi

(This topic will not be offered 1n 1978)

Units 6 Level Third year Durauon Second half year Class Contact One lecture and one tutorial per week Pre requ1saes None but students are advised that a background in 38209 Introduction to Social Structure may be useful

An analysts of the economic growth sttateg1es social structure and nature of power in contemporary sociahst societies The course will rely heavtly on East European material but sociological problems of alternative socialist formations (China and Cuba) will be broadly discussed

Assessment by essays and book reviews

Reference books Lane D The end of inequality stratification under state socialism (Penguin 1971) Dtlas M The new class (Allen & Unwin 1966) Nave A An economic history of the USSR (Penguin 1966) Trotsky L The revolution betrayed (Pathfinder Pr 1972) Ossowski S Class structure in the social consciousness (Routledge& Kegan Paul 1965)

Units 6

38312 SOCIAL INEQUALITY Dr R Hassan and Ms G Huilgol

Level Second or thud year Duration Fust half year Class Contact 2 seminars per week (1!1: 2 hours) Pre requisites None

This topic will explore selected aspects of hierarchical and social relationsh lJy comparing tn parucular social 1nequal1t1es predicated on the supposed attnbutcsof r ... ~ sex caste and age The functions of ideology in system maintenance the mechanics of power and the dynamics of hberat1on movements will be among the special areas to be considered The course is set up as a structured seminar senes A detailed reading guide will be available at the beg1nn1ng of cheyear In add1uon some reading beyond the guide in afew selected areas will be necessary Assessment will be based on parttc1pat1on in the seminars and two ma1or class papers General reading Any of the following books would be useful to have read prior to the commencement of the course Bete11le A Inequality among men (Blackwell 1977) Gerth H and Mills C W Character and social structure (Harcourt Brace 1953) Goffmann E Stigma (Prentice Hall 1963) Goffmann E Asylums (Ancnor 1961) Lukes S Power a radical vzew (Macmillan 1974) Memmt A Dominated man (Beacon Pr 1968) Tallman I Passion action and politics (Freeman 1975) Wolff K H (trans anded) The sociology of George Simmel (Free Pr 1950)

298

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

38313 (34302) CONTEMPORARY AMERICAN SOCIETY See top1c descnpt1on under Amencan Studies

Fourth Year Soczology, Honours Degree

The Honours programme in Sociology consists of

Three coursew'Ork topics in Sociology (6 unus each) 38440 Sociology Honours Thesis

18 units 18 units

Students may with the perm1ss1on of theStand1ngComm1ttee choose to take at Honours level topics from theM A courseworkprogramme1nSoc1ology Students may also choose to take up to six units from another D1sc1phne wllh the perm1ss1on of the Head of the Sociology D1sc1phne and of the D1sc1phne concerned

Unns 6 Level Honours

38412 POLITICAL SOCIOLOGY CLASS ANALYSIS AND THE STATE

(Honours) Mr A PatJence

Class Contact A weekly senunar in fust term and 1nd1v1dually arranged sessions thereafter Pre requ1s1tes 38306 Pohtical Sociology Class Analysis and the State 38307Theones and Methods of Sociological Enquiry or the permission of the lecturer 1n charge

The aim of this topic is to 1nvesugate the poss1b1hues of developing a soc1olog1cal account of the Australian State It will proceed towards tlus through a cnucal evaluation of some well known analyses of Australian pohucs Attempts will be made to evaluate the picture of the State and1tsrelauonsh1p to the wider social structures which lies behind each of the analyses under review

38413 SOCIOLOGY OF THE THIRD WORLD (Honours)

Unns 6 Level Honours Class Contact Two hours per week Pre requisites Honours standing An advanced level seminar hnked to topic 38305 Soc1ology of the Thud World

38414 URBAN SOCIOLOGY (Honours)•

(This topic will not be offered in 1978)

Units 6 Level Honours Class Contact Tlvo hours per week Pre requisites Honours standmg An advanced level seminar hoked to topic 38212 Urban Soc1ology

299

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

38415 CONTEMPORARY SOCIALIST SOCIETIES (Honours) Units 6 Level Honours Class Contact Two hours per \Veek Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing

An advanced level seminar hoked to topic 38311 Contemporary Soc1ahst Soc1eues

38416 SOCIOLOGY HONOURS READING SEMINAR All Staff

Units 6 Level Honours Durauon Whole academic year Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing

A supervised 1nd1v1dual reading programme for Honours students designed to complement their thesis research and broaden their experience of some outstanding soc1olog1cal literature There will be occasional meeungsof the seminar to enable staff and students to discuss the vanous reading programmes being pursued

Unus 6 Level Honours Duration Fust half year

38418 THEORY OF SOCIETY (Honours)

Ms A Yeatman

Class Contact Weekly (2 hour) seminar Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing Assessment Based on seminar contnbutions and 'l. term paper

A close reading of central works by Durkheim which 1s structured round his responses to certain key issues/problems involved 1n the development of a theory of society as 1ninally raised tn Plato s Republic Rousseau s Soczal Contract and Parsons Structure of Social Actzon T,vo central themes here will be (a) the 1dent1hcation of society with reason and (b) what Parsons has called The Ut1htarian Dilemma or Lukacs the anunomy between the 1nd1v1dual and society Emphasis will be placed on d1sc1phned reading of the pnmary texts we shall not be concerned with the secondary hterature although select reference will be made where the secondary literature elucidates the primary text

38440 SOCIOLOGY HONOURS THESIS Unus 18 Level Honours Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing

An essay of not more than 15 000 \Vords to be\vntten under the supervision of amemberof the Sociology staff The thesis should demonstrate the students ab1ht1es to collect and evaluate 1nformauon construct test and defend an argument or thesis and cnucally examine the dominant theones of h1s/her area of enqutry Work tn progress seminars are held 1n first term Students should choose a thesis topic and obtain the agreement of a member of staff to act as supervisor before the end of December of the year 1mmechately pnor to thetr enrolhng 10 the Honours programme The thesis should nonnally be submitted at the beginning of October in the year 10 which the student 1s completing his/her Honours programme

300

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The Diploma in Social Sciences tn Sociology Thts Dtploma is 1n[ended to enable holders of pass degrees 1n Sociology and other people whose Quahhcations are sufficiently similar Lo proceed to further studies in Sociology The purpose of thts Diploma programme 1s Lo allow continuing students or students returning to the University who do not 'vish to pursue studies for research degrees to acquire skills in apphed soc1olog1cal research which will be useful 1n areas like social planning public dec1s1on making etc The Diploma in Social Sciences In Soc1ologyw1ll be composed of 36 units which docs not include a thesis This programme is not available in 1978

MA zn Sociology Students with an Honours degree In Sociology or Its equivalent may apply to undertake research and/or courselvork to,vards the MA degree In Sociology The follow1ng course\'/ork topics are available for students who wish to include a coursework component in thetr MA studies Further topics wtll become available upon the appointment of new staff

38501 STATE INTERVENTION AND SOCIAL CHANGE IN THE EAST EUROPEAN SOCIALIST SOCIETIES

Level Graduate Durauon Fust haU year

Professor I Szelenyi

Class Contact One semmar meeting fortnightly

An analysis of the nature of the state in contemporary soc1et1es and a cnt1cal exam1nanon of the ex1st1ng theones on the soc1ahst state Special emphasis will beg1vcn to the study of the h1stoncal ong1ns of East Luropean state 1ntervent1on1sm An attempt will be made to develop a comparative analysts of state 1ntervention1sm tn contemporary capttahsm and socialism

Assessment will be based on one ma1or paper

Preliminary reading Anderson P Lineages of the absolutist state (New Left 1974) Lenin V I State and revolution (Progress 1972) M1hband R The state zn capitalist society (Quartet 1973) Moore B The social origins of dictatorship and democracy (Lane 1969) 0 Connor J The fiscal crisis of the state (St Marun 1973) Trotsky L The revolution betrayed (Pathfuider Pr 1972)

38502 INTELLIGENTSIA AND PLANNERS IN ADVANCED SOCIETIES Professor I Szeleny1

Level Graduate Durauon Second half year Class Contact One seminar meellng fortnightly

A cnncal exam1nauon of theones concerning the social position of intellectuals and parucularly of planners both 1n capnahstand soc1ahstsoc1elles D1fferentph1losoph1esof planning ,..,111 be analysed from a sociology of knowledge point of v1e\v

Preliminary readzng Broady M Planning for people (Nauonal Council of Social Service 1972) Davis J G The evangelistic bureaucrat (Tavistock 1972)

301

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Dennis N People and planning (Faber 1970) Eversley D E C The planner 1n society (Faber 1973) Johnson T J Professions and power (Macmillan 1972) Mannheim K Ideology and Utopia (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1954) Marcuse H One dimensional man (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1964) Merton R K Social Theory and social structure (Free Pr 1958) Popper K The open society and its enemies (Routledge&: Kegan Paul 1966) Young M The nse of the meritocracy (Penguin 1968)

38503 STATE INTERVENTION AND SOCIAL CHANGE IN AUSTRALIA Mr A Patience

(Thts topic will not be offered 1n 1978)

Level Graduate Durauon Second half year Class Contact One seminar meeting per fortnight

A theoreucal and emp1ncal explorauon of the role of the state 1n conserving and reforming the Australian social structure

Assessment will be based on one ma1or paper

Reference books Ence! S Equality and authority (Cheshue 1970) McQueen H The new Britannia (Penguin 1970) M1hband R The state :n capztal1.st society (Quartet 1973) Osmond W The dilemma of an Australian sociology (Arena 1972) Playford J D Neo cap1tal1sm 1n Australia (Arena 1969) Playford J D and Kusner D eds Australian capitalism (Penguin 1970) Poulantzas N A Political power and social classes (New Left 1973) Sulwell F Australian urban and regional development (A NZ 1974) Tumuss R Income distribution and social change (Allen & Unw1n 1965) Wheelwnght E L and Buckley K eds Es.says in the political economy of Australian capitalism (ANZ 1975)

38504 MARXISM IN CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THOUGHT Mr A Patience

(This topic will not be offered in 1978)

Level Graduate Duration Second half year Class Contact One seminar meeting per fortnight

A cr1ncal exam1nauon of the relevance of Mannst structurahsm to contemporary sooology

Assessment will be based on one maJor paper Reference books Althusser L For Marx (Allen Lane 1969) Althusser L Lenin and philosophy (New Left 1971) Althusser L Politics and hi.story (New Left 1972) Althusser L and Bahbar E Reading capital (New Left 1975) Duncan G Marx and Mill Two views of social conflict and social harmony (Cambndge Univ Pr 1973) Glucksmann M Structuralist analysis 1n modern social thought (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1974) Levi Strauss C Structural anthropology (Allen Lane 1969) Poulantzas N A Political power and social classes (New Left 1973) Poulantzas N A Classes in contemporary capitalism (New Left 1975) Runoman W G Sociology 1n its place (Cambndge Univ Pr 1970)

302

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

38505 DECOLONISATION Mr A Patience

(This topic w11l not be offered in 1978)

Level Graduate Durauon First hal£ year Class Contact One seminar meeung per fortnight An examinauon of the pohucal sociology of nationahsm and independence movements in the Third World societies Case studies w1ll be drawn from East and West Afnca Indochina Laun America and Melanesia

Assessment will be based on one ma1or paper

Reference books Amin S Accumulation on a world scale, 2 vols (Monthly Review Pr 1974) Amin S Neo colonialism in West Africa (Penguin 1973) Brett E Colon1alzsm and underdevelopment 1n East Africa (Heinemann 1973) Brookfield H Colonialism development and independence the case of the Melanesian Islands in the South Pacific (Cambndge Univ Pr 1972) Frank A Latin America underdevelopment or revolution (Monthly Review Pr 1970) Lloyd P Africa in social change (Pengum 1966) Osborn M Region of revolt (Pelican 1971) Oxaal I Barnett T and Booth D eds Beyondthesoc1ologyofdevelopment economy and society 1n Latin America and Africa (Routledge&: Kegan Paul 1975) Petras J Pol1t1cal and social structure in Latin America (Monthly Review Pr 1970) Worsley P The trumpet shall sound 2nd ed. (Paladin 1970)

303

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Multidisciplinary Topics

GENERAL INFORMATION Students taking a BA degree in the School of Social Sciences are required to take 12 unus 1n multidisciplinary topics In 1978 the following offerings are available In the School s pool of such muludisc1phnary topics These topics may not be presented as part of a ma1or sequence In any d1sc1phne nor as a topic fulftlhng the cognate requirement They may ho\'t'ever be taken as electives

39204 39209 39214

39206 39207 39208 39211 39212

39205

First half year

Abong1nes and Ausrrahan Society Leisure and Recrea uon Research Techniques and Their Appl1cauons

Second half year

Revoluuon Social Change in Europe and Asia Urban1zauon Demography Pubhc Dec1s1011 making

First and Second terms The Ecology of Man and ~oc1ety

39204 ABORIGINES AND AUSTRALIAN SOCIETY Mr J Summers (Politics) Convenor with assistance from

Dr L Brennan (History) Mr ] M Main (Hi.story) Mr A S Bear (English) and Mr B E Mathews (English)

Unns 6 Level Second or third year Durauon Ftrst half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutonal per week Pre-requ1s1tes None

6 units 6 units

6 units

6 unns 6 unus 6 units 6 units 6 unus

6 unlls

This topic will be a study of the relattonsh1ps benveen the whue Australian community and Aboriginal Australians and the response of wh1temen to Black Australians Topics to be covered include Abongtnal society before 1788 Abong1nal settler contact Abong1nal resistance to settlement Abong1nes 1n the economy urban Aborigines Abong1nes and the lalv government pohcies etc An important part of the course wdl be to examine the image of Abong1nes presented by groups or ind1v1duals who have been 1nfluent1al in the formation and 1mplementat1on of government pohcy and 1n presenting a picture of Abong1nes to the whole society - e g Explorers M1ss1onanes Anthropolog1sts Wnters and Poets NC\vspapers etc

Preliminary reading Rowley C D The destruction of Aboriginal society (Penguin 1972)• Reynolds H Aborigines and settlers (Cassell 1973)• Stevens F ed Racism the Australian experience vol II Black vs white (ANZ 1972)

Untts 6

39205 THE ECOLOGY OF MAN AND SOCIETY Mr A S Fraser (Convenor) (Geography) Dr C M Bull (Biology)

and Mr A E Woodfield (Economics)

Level Second and third year Duration Fust and second terms

304

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Class Contact 2 lectures or seminars per week 3 lutonals spread over first and second terms Pre requisites 86100 Biology I or 30110 Economics I or 81100 Earth Sciences or 32110 Geography I each at C grade or better

Assessment Three tutorial papers and one seminar pro1ecl Altemanvely a final exam1nat1on will be available to those \'/ho wish to take lt counting for 503 of lhe hnal grade The years work would then make up the rema1n1ng 503

The topic is intended as an analysts of the physical and cultural factors which affect the relauonshtp bet\veen man and his envnonment Inaoductory lectures \Vtll provtdea h'lstc background to the topic in the pnnctples of Biology Earth Sciences Economics and Geography Themes which will be developed on tlns foundanon may include general pnnc1ples of ecology and interactions within ecosysten1s the cultural evolutton of man history of man s concern for the environment population growth and dynamics resource ava1lab1hty and control \Vaste disposal relauonshtp between economic system and envuonmental problems pohucal causes of current and 1mpend1ng eco cr1s1s the ecological constructions inherent tn state and corporate capuahsm poht1cal consequences of the range of proposed solutions lhe long term effcclsof economic growth on consumpuon of natural resources the imphcat1ons of a stauonary state on economic organtzauon The pre requisite for the topic 1s 86100 Biology I or 30110 Economics I or 81100 Earth Sciences I or 32110 Geography I The dtsctphnes teaching each of the above courses wtll also provide prehm1nary reading hsts for students who have not taken that course and who wish to develop an adequate background for theenurecourse Apphcauons for enrolment from students \Vtthout the necessary pre requisites but who are strongly monvated towards these studies \Vlll be considered

Reference books Crocker T D and Rogers A J Environmental economics (Dryden 1971) Dasmann R F The conservation alternative (Wtley 1975) Detwyler T R ed Mans impact on environment (McGraw Hill 1971) Dorfman R and Dorfman N S eds Economics of the envzronmenl (Norton 1972) Fo1n T C Jr Ecological systems and the environment (Houghton M1ffhn 1976) Hardin G ed Population evolution and birth control 2nd ed (Freeman 1969) Johnson W A and Hardesty J Economic growth versus the environment (Wadsworth 1971) Kneese A K Economics and the environment (Penguin 1977) Meadows 0 and others The limits to growth (Universe 1972) Miller G T Jr Living in the environment (\Vadsworth 1975) Murdoch W W ed Environment (S1n'lt1er 1971) Sc1ent1fic American Man and the ecosphere (Freeman 1971) Sc1ent1hc Amencan The biosphere (Freeman 1970) Smith R L ed The ecology of man an ecosystem approach (Harper&: Row· 1972) Thomas Wm L Jnr ed i\-lan sroleinchang1ngthefaceoftheearth(Clucag0Un1v Pr 1956) Wagner R H Environment and man (Norton 1971) \Vatt K E F Principles of environmental science (McGra'v Hill 1973) \Ve1sberg B Beyond repair the ecology of capitalism (Beacon 1971)

39206 REVOLUTION Dr P A Howell Convenor (Hntory) Dr ] G Angltm (Polttics)

Dr W Brugger (Politics) Dr C Gertz.el (Politics)

Unus 6 Level Second or 1h1rd year Duration Second half year

Mr N W1ntrop (Polillcs)

Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutonal per week Pre requ1s1tes None

305

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

The topic exammes both philosophical and sociological theones of revoluuon under such topics as resistance to tyranny JUst wars the causes structure and consequences of revolution and revoluuon and development

Introductory reading Hagopian M The phenomenon of revolution (Dodd Mead 1974) Calvert P Revolution (Macmillan 1970) Dunn J Modem revolutions (Cambndge Univ Pr 1973)

Reference books Tocqueville A de The old reg1me and the French revolution (Anchor 1955) Moore B The social origins of dictatorship and democracy (Beacon 1965) Debray R Revolution in the revolution (Fontana 1970) Gurr T Why men rebel (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1970) Fischer E Marx in his own words (Allen Lane 1970) Deutscher I The unfinished revolution (0 UP 1967) Mao T Selected readings (Peking 1971) Johnson C Revolutionary change (London Univ Pr 1966) Hunungton S Political order in changing soc1et1es (Yale 1970) Grundy K Guenlla struggle 1n Africa (Grossman 1971)

Untts 6

39207 SOCIAL CHANGE IN EUROPE AND ASIA Dr L Brennan (History) Convenor Professor E Richards (History),

Mr I Main (History) Dr D Hilliard (History) Mr D Shoesm1th (History) Mr A Patience (Sociology)

Dr A Maude (Geography)

Level Second and thud year Durauon Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutonal per week Pre-requisites None

The topic will commence wt th a discussion of the concept of social change followed by an examination of the ideas of some of the most influential theorists of social change Marx Weber Pareto Durkheim and Boserup The ma1or poruon of the top1cwlll be devoted to the cons1derauon of these thrones 1n the study of the following h1stoncal problems (a) The influence of rehgious ideas on economic forms Protestantism and the rise of Capitahsm Hinduism and POOnom1c stagnauon (b) The development of tolk religious movements tn the Ph1ltpp1nes in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries and their relauonship with agrarian unrest (c) The relauonships between population growth and economic and social change an exam1nat1on of the wriungs of Boserup (an economist) Geertz (an anthropologist) and Brookfield (a geographer) and thetr apphcauon to societies 1n S E Asta and the Pacific (d) Socio-economic and pohucal responses of traditional society 1n India to contact with the Bnush colonial empne ehte development modem1zatton and the growth of the nationahst movement ( e) Class structure in eighteenth century France and Its pohucal expression Prelzmznary read1n(! Nisbet R eel Social change (Blackwell 1972)• Fischer E Marx in his own words (Penguin 1973)• Aron R Main currents in sociological thought vol 2 Durkheim Pareto Weber (Penguin 1970)• Bottomore T Elites and society (Penguin 1967)• Wallerstetn I eel Social change lhe colonial s1tuat1on (Wiley 1966) Green R W eel Protestantism capitalism and social science the Weber thesis controversy 2nd ed (Heath 1973)• Boserup E The conditions of agncultural growth (Allen & Unw1n 1965) Sturtevant D R Agrar1an unrest in the Philippines (Ohio Univ Pr 1969) Lefebvre G The coming of the French revolution (Vintage 1960)•

306

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

39208 URBANIZATION Professor W A Sinclair (Economic History) (Convenor)

Professor M McCaskill (Geography)

Units 6 Level Second and third years Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutorial per week Pre-requtsttes None

This topic will be concerned with urbanIZatlon in Austraha as a process occumng over ume and having important spatial charactensucs It is intended to set urban growth in Austraha In the context of the more general forces making for the growth of cities In history and to make particular reference to the experience of regions of recent whtte settlement One maJOr sub topic will be the 1nterrelationsh1p between urban growth and the economic development of Australia and a second 'v11l 1nvolveanalys1sof such internal urban processes as trends 1n the d1str1bution of the urban work force u.rban capttal formation and changes in spa ual organ1zat1on An opportunity will be gtven to discuss the costs and benefits of urban1zauon in Australia The teaching of the topic will be shared largely between members of the d1sc1pltnes of Economic History and Geography

Reference books General sources Brown D M Introduction to urban economics (Academic 1974) Davis K ed Cities their origin growth and human impact (Freeman 1973) Johnson J H Urban geography introductory analysis, 2nd eel {OU P 1972) Johnston R J Spatial structures {Methuen 1973) Pred A R The spatial dynamics of US urban industrial growth, I800 1914 theoretical essays (MIT 1966) Vance J E The merchants world the geography of wholesaling (Prenuce Hall 1970) Ward D Cities and 1mm1grants (0 UP 1971)

Australian sources Barrett B The inner suburbs the evolution of an industrial area (Melbourne Univ Pr 1971) Burnley I H ed Urbanization 1n Australia the post war experience (Cambndge Univ Pr 1974) Buthn N G Investment 1n Au~tralian economic development (Cambndge Univ Pr 1964) Freeland J M Architecture in Australia (Penguin 1972) Glynn S Urbanisation 1n Australian history, 1788 1900 2nd eel (Nelson 1975) Hirst J B Adelaide and the country 1870 1917 (Melbourne Univ Pr 1973) Jones F L Dimensions of urban social structure (AN U 1969) Neutze G M Urban development in Australia (Allen & Unw1n 1977) Schedv1n C B and Mc.Carty J W eds Urbanization in Australia (Sydney Univ Pr 1974) Sulwell F J B Australian urban and regional development (A NZ 1974) Stretton H Ideas for Australian cities 2nd ed (Georgian House 1975) Troy P N ed Urban redevelopment 1n Australia {Urban Research Untt A N U 1967) W1lhams M The making of the South Australian landscape (Academic 1974)

Untts 6

39209 LEISURE AND RECREATION Dr W Vamplew (Economic History) Mr 0 E Cov1ck (Economics)

Mr A S Fraser (Geography)

Level Second or third year Duration First half year Class Contact 2 one hour sessions per week and 1 two hour session per fortnight

307

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

A study o( the problems Cor 1nd1v1duals and commun1ues 1n providing for leisure and recreation in modern urban societies

Areas The nature of leisure and recreauon work and play lhe vanet1es of leisure and recreation current trends

Sport An emp1ncal study the place of sport 1n society with particular reference to socr1l 1nsutuuons roles and problems professional and amateur sport the nse of mass sport

Social and physical planning for leisure and recreation Spatial aspects of Ie1sureact1villes leisure and the environment pohc1es and planning of recreauon fac1hties \Vlth special reference to South Austraha and the Netherlands

Reference books Clawson M and Knetsch J L Economics of outdoor recreation (Johns Hopkins 1966) Coppock J F and Duffield B S Recreation in the countryside a spatial analysis (Macmillan 1975) Davies H The glory game (Pan 1972) Dunning E The sociology of sport (Cass 1971) Fischer D W Lewis J F and Priddle G B Land and leisure concepts and methods in outdoor recreation (Maarouta 1971) Loy J W and Kenyon G S Sport cul ure and society (Macmillan 1969) Mcintosh P Sport 1n society (Wans 1968) Mercer D Leisure and recreatzon 1n Australia (Sarrett 1976) Rothman s football yearbook - vols I 7 (Queen Anne Pr 1969 1976) Simmons I G Rural recreation in the 1ndustnal world (Arnold 1976) Walv1n J The peoples game (Allen Lane 1975) Vample\V W The turf (Allen Lane 1976)

39211 DEMOGRAPHY Dr G ] Hugo (Geography) Professor R ] Blandy (Economzcs)

Professor K ] Hancock (Economics) and Dr M Polasek (Economics)

Units 6 Level Second and thud year Durauon Second half year Class Contact 3 hours per \veek Pre requ1snes None

Demography concerns itself with the study of the size d1stnbut1on 'l.lld ~tructure of populauons and the processes whereby these undergo change In a six unit topic 1t is clearly not possible to attempt a comprehensive coverage of tins very broad field Inste'l.d this topic seeks to introduce students to the study of Demography by focussing on seven! contemporary demographic problems Major sources of demograpluc data basic demographic measures and some important aspects of demographic theory are introduced However the topic is not one 1n technical demography and techniques 'l.re introduced only \vhere they assist 1n the analysis and understanding of the major processc'\ ..ind problems \vh1ch are our main concern 1n this topic The perspective of the top1c1s not tied spec1£ically to the exam1nat1on of the demography of one particular region and \VIII

consider populauon trends 1n both developed countries and less developed countries However special attention will be focussed on Australia and Southeast Asia The topic begins with a cons1derauon of some fundamen1al demographic theones and 1hen moves on to introduce some basic demographic measures 'l.nd techn1queso£ analysis These form a necessary foundauon for lhe remainder of lhe topic which 1s concerned with analysis of a small range of contempor'l.rydemograph1c problem areas The f 1rst of these 1s the issue of population planning There 1s then an cxam1nauon of thenatu1eof Australian populauon gro\vth and Its relat1onsh1p to several pol icy areas Finally a problem onentcd approach ts adopted to examine the de1erm1n'l.nts and consequences of some contemporary developments in feruhty mortahty and migranon 1n 1 h1rd World countnes

Preliminary reading Pressat R Population (Penguin 1973)

308

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Reference books Caldwell J C ed Population growth and socio economic change in Jt'est Africa (Columbia Univ Pr 1975) Cald,vell J C Toward a restatement of demographic transition theory (M1meo 1976 1n reserve collecuon) Karmel P H and Polasek M Applied slatist1cs for economists (Puman 1970) Chapler 15 Demography Mamdan1 M The myth of population control family caste and class 1n an Indian village (Monthly Review Pr 1972) National Populauon Inquiry Population and Australia 2 vols (AG PS 1975) Sc1enuhc Amencan The human populatzon (Freeman 1974) Shyrock H S and others The methods and materials of demography 2 vols (U S Bureau of Census 1973) Unued Nauons Determinants and consequences of population trends (UN 1974)

Units 6

39212 PUBLIC DECISION MAKING Professor R ] Blandy Mr R H Wallace (Economics)

Professor W A Sinclair (Economic History)

Level Second or third year Durallon Second half year Classs Conlact 27 lectures and 10 tutonals Pre requisnes None Thts topic 1s concerned pnmanly with government expendnure decisions A general d1scuss1on of pnnciples applied 10 the pub he sector including the effect of pohucal and bureaucrauc constra1n1s wlll be followed by apphcat1ons drawn from four specific areas education health social welfare and urban history

Reference books Bl.tug M An introduction to the economics of education (Penguin 1972) D Cruz J and Sheehan P TherenewalofAustralianschools(PnmaryEducat1on 1975) Evans A 'V The economics of residenttal location (Macmillan 1973) Fuchs V R Health economics and social choice (Basic Books 1975) Goodall B The economics of urban areas (Penguin 1972) HarmJn G S and Selby Smith C Read1ngstn thepoliticsandeconom1csof Australian education (Pergamon Pr 1976) Hanle D G A theory of the expenditure budgetary process (Toronto Univ Pr 1976) Hecla 1-:1 and W1ldavsky A The private government of publ1cmoney(Macmillan 1974) Kn1ghl K and WlllShire K Formulating government budgets Aspects of Australian and North American experience (Queensl'lnd Univ Pr 1977) Perloff H S and Wingo L Issues 1n urban economzcs (Johns Hopkins 1969) Schultze C L The politics and economics of public spending (Brookings Insutuuon 1968) Scouon R Medicine in Australia an economic diagnosis (Sun Books 1974) Sheehan J The economics of education (Allen & Unw1n 1973) Suk1n G The uzsible hand the fundamentals of economic planning (McGraw Hill 1968) Weller P and Cutt J Treasury control in Australia a study in bureaucrallcpolit1c:. (Ian Novak 1976)

39213 SOCIAL STRUCTURE OF MODERN BRITAIN

(Not offered 1n 1978)

309

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

39214 RESEARCH TECHNIQUES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS IN THE SOCIAL SCIENCES

Mr E A Cleland (Psychology) Mr R ] Stimson (Geography) and Dr D H ]aensch (Pol!lzcs)

Units 6 Level Second or thud year and Dip Soc Sc1 Duration First half year Class Contact 2 two hour lectures/workshops per week plus £1eld survey work that may involve up to 4 days of the May vacauon Pre requ1s1tes None

This topic examines a selection o{ research techniques that are common to two or more Social Science d1sc1phnes in the analysts of apphed soaal phenomena The major emphasis ts on social survey research 1nclud1ng sampling methods questionnaire design and data analysis Other topics covere<l may include observauonal techniques expenmentauon content analysis analysis of spatial daca including social 1nd1catorsand social strauficat1on the analysis of leg1slauve behaviour apporuonment systems and aggregate electoral behaviour public op1n1on polls market research community development analysis Students will be required to parttapate1n the design and conduct of a research pro1ect 1nvest1gat1ng a social phenomenon While no statistics w1II be taught tn the topic students who have tn the past avoided topics because of their statistical content should s1mtlarly avoid this one

Preliminary readzng Silvey J Deczphenng data the analysis of social suroeys (Longman 1975)•

Text book Warwick DP andL1n1ger CA The sample survey theoryandpract1ce(McGraw HtlI 1975)•

310

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Topics in Social Admznzstrat:on

GENERAL INFORMATION Bachelor of Social Admzrustration

The two year programme cons ts ts of a core first year and a second year tn which the student undertakes two areas of study tn assoc1at1on wtth a practtcum First Year 50811 Human Development and the Social Environment 50812 Introduction to Social Work 50813 Social Work Methods I 50814 Social Work Methods II 50815 Social Adm1nistrauon 50816 Social Pohcy 50817 Social Welfare Services 50818 Social Work Practice

Second Year 50911 Advanced Practice 50912 Management in Social Welfare 50916 Soctal Pohcy Analysis 50918 Advanced Practicum

Fzrst Year Topics

50811 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND THE SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT

Units 6 Level Graduate Duration Fust and second terms Class Contact Two hours weekly Co-requ1sttes None

Dr Eisen

Thts topic w1ll 1ntroduce the study of ind1v1dual family and personality development as a basts for social work pracnce and social poltcy formulation Cnncal aspects of cultural and soc1olog1cal studies will be examined as they relate to theones of 1ntervent1on

Preliminary reading Axehne V D1bbs 1n search of self (Ballanune 1964) Enkson E H Childhood and society (Penguin (Pelican) 1969) Foss B New perspectives 1n child development (Penguin 1974) Fraiberg S The magic years (Methuen 1959) Frank A The diary of Anne Frank (Pan 1959) Isaacs S The nursery years - the mind of the child from birth to six years (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1929) Ltdz T The family and human adaptation (Hogarth 1964) Winnicott D W The child the family and the outside world (Penguin 1964)

Units 3

50812 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK Mrs E Martin

Level Graduate Duration Fust term Class Contact Two hours weekly Co requ1s1tes None

311

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

This topic aims to provide introductory material relevant to thew hole course and to raise issues which will be followed up in other topics and 1n fieldwork practice It includes an historical perspecuve on the emergence of social work as a profession and recent developments in South Austraha some contemporary issues 1n social work such as Its functions 1n relation to other professions consumers and self help groups and professional accountab1hty interrelauonsh1ps between social workers and the organizauons in which they operate

Reference books Woodroofe K From charity to social work in England and the United States (Routledge& Kegan Paul 1962) Lawrence R J Professional social work :n Australra (AN U 1965) Meyer C H Social work practice 2nd ed (Free Pr 1976) Jones H ed Towards a new social work (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1975) Bailey R and Brake M eds Radical social work (Arnold 1975) Stuart R The reality of organizations (Anchor 1973)

50813 SOCIAL WORK METHODS I Miss M Norton

Unns 4 Level Graduate Durauon Second and thrrd terms Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 seminar weekly Co requ1s1tes 50812 Social Work 50818 Social Work Pracuce

Following a bnef introductton to relevant agency structure this topic will deal with casework as a major method of service deltvery This will be an approach to casework wah client and target groups broadly conceived so that auenuon can be given not only to one to one treatment but also to work wtth famihes and other natural groups Concurrent practical expenence is required

Reference books Middleman R R and Goldberg G Social service delivery a structural approach (Columbia Univ Pr 1974) S1ponn M Introduction to social work practice (Macmillan 1975) Parad H J ed Crisis 1nteruent1on (Famtly Service Assoc1auon 1966)

50814 SOCIAL WORK METHODS II Mrs MA Hanen

Units 4 Level Graduate Duration Second and thud terms Co requ1sttes 50812 Social Work 50818 Social Work Practice except by pnor arrangement

An introduction to small groups and their d1fferent1al use in social work practice and adm1n1strauon vthich focuses on developing knowledge of group structure processes components and hfe cycles The study of group ,.,ork method 1s intended to provide students wah experience in groups as \Vell as equip them \Vlth the conceptual tools and basic skills to assess and paruc1pate 1n and work \Vtth groups

Text book Davies B The use of groups in social work practice (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1975)

Reference books Glasser P Sarn R and V1nter R eds Individual change through small groups (Collier Macmillan 1974)

312

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Northen H Social work with groups (Columbia Univ Pr 1969) Roberts R W and Northen H eds Theories of social work with groups (Columbia Univ Pr 1976) Schwartz W and Serapio Z The practice of group work (Columbia Univ Pr 1971) Thelen H Dynamics of groups at work (Chicago Univ Pr 1970) Trecker H B Group process in administration (Womans Pr 1950)

Untts 3 Level Graduate Duration Fust term

50815 SOCIAL ADMINISTRATION Professor R G Brown

Class Contact 1 lecture and 1 seminar weekly Co requisites None

An 1ntroduct1on to social welfare pohcy a cons1derauon of some concepts useful for understanding welfare pohcy and prov1s1on 1nclud1ng need and vulnerab1hty elements of sooal pohcy levels of respons1b1luy for policies and frameworks of analysis of pol1c1es Reference book Australia Commission of Inquiry into Povery Poverty in Australia main report 4 vols (AG PS 1975)

Unns 4 Level Graduate Durauon Second term

50816 SOCIAL POLICY Dr A Graycar

Class Contact Lectures and seminars averaging two hours weekly Co requisues 50815 Social Adm1n1stration

This topic follows on from topic 50815 The governmental contexts of social policy values strategies and constraints in the formulation and 1mplementat1on of social policy are studied

Reference books Galper J The politics of social services (Prentice Hall 1975) Gilbert N and Specht H Dimensions of social welfare policy (Prenttce Hall 1974) Graycar A Soczal policy an Australzan introduction (Macmillan 1977) Detailed references will be issued dunng the course

Units 4 Level Graduate Duration Thud term

50817 SOCIAL WELFARE SERVICES Professor R G Brown

Class Contact I lecture and 1 seminar weekly Co requisites 50816 Social Policy 50811 Human Development and the Social Envuonment

This topic 1s an examtnauon of recent developments 1n the organ1zat1on and prov1s1on of social welfare services In 1978 public welfare services will serve as the focus for the study Detailed references will be issued at the start of the toptc

313

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Units 8 Level Graduate Duration Full year

50818 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE Miss M Norton

Field ContacL The equivalent of two days weekly Co-requisites 50813 and 50814 Social Work Methods I and II except by pnor arrangement

Students spend part of each week of the academic year in the acquisition of pracuce skills Prehm1nary practice laboratory sessions serve as preparauon for movement into duect service roles in social welfare settings such as hospital social work departments child guidance clinics family service agencies correctional services Students must demonstrate a satisfactory level of competence in social work pracuce before proceeding to the second year of the course This topic must be passed at NGP level

Second Year Topics

In the second year the student nominates two areas of study which he pursues throughout the three terms Concurrent with these studies is an advanced practicum The following topics will be avatlable in 1978

50911 Advanced Practice 50912 Management in Social Welfare 50916 Social Pohcy Analysis 50918 Advanced Practicum

Units 12 Level Graduate Durauon Full year

50911 ADVANCED PRACTICE Miss M Norton Topic Co ordinator

Class Contact The equivalent of three hours weekly Pre-requisites 50818 Social Work Pracuce Co requ1snes 50918 Advanced Practicum

This topic follows on from Topics 50813 and 50814 in the first year It 1s concerned with social work 1ntervenuon 1n increasingly complex situauon involving 1nd1v1duals families small groups and larger social systems encountered 1n a range of practice s1tuat1ons The determinants for choosing different levels of 1ntervenuon are examined

In addiuon to the perunent literature the topic makes use of examples of pracuce including the students concurrent fieldwork for analysts and d1scuss1on of the theories pnnc1ples and processes of social work pracuce Detailed references will be issued at the start of the topic

50912 MANAGEMENT IN SOCIAL WELFARE

Units 12 Level Graduate Duration Full year

Mrs E Martin Topic Co ordinator

Class Contact Three hours weekly Pre-requ1sttes 36 units of fust year level topics Co-requ1s1tes 50918 Advanced Pracucum except by pnor arrangement

314

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

This topic ts concerned wuh the study of complex organ1zauons engaged in theprov1s1on of human services uuhz1ngopen systems theory asa mode of analysis Parucularattenuon is directed to aspects of management critical to social work practice in a vanety of organizanons faced with limited resources Depending on staff ava1lab1hty students may have the opportunity to concentrate for part of the year on one of the follov.nng areas changing welfare service systems d1f£erent1al use of 'velfare manpower staff development and training the use of research strategies for the purposes of programme design and evaluation Detailed references will be issued at the start of the topic

Units 12 Level Graduate Durauon Full year

50916 SOCIAL POLICY ANALYSIS Dr A Graycar

Class Contact Three hours weekly Pre requisites 50817 Social Welfare Services Co requisites 50918 Advanced Practicum except by pnor arrangement The present emphasis in tlus topic is on macro pohcy analysis Within this framework various analyucal approaches to social pohcy planning are studied Pohcy planning is viewed both as a pohucal and a technical exercise Analyucal models of social pohcy formulauon implementation and evaluation are developed to study values strategies and content 1n certain pohcy areas Particular attention ts paid to points of intervenuon informauon resources and soaal expenmentauon Depending on the availab1l1ty of add1t1onal staff with the relevantexperuse students may have the opportunity to do some part of the year s work on the analysis of social pohcy as 11 relates to parucular target populations 1nclud1ng the impact of soaal pohcy on the dehvery of services and the contr1but1on of research 1n this area

Reference books Graycar A Social policy an Australian introduction (Macmillan 1977) Warreq R L Social change and human purpose (Wtley 1977) Rein M Social science and public policy (Penguin 1977)

Untts 12 Level Graduate Durauon Full year

50918 ADVANCED PRACTICUM Miss M Norton

Field Contact Twenty hours per week Ind1v1dual and group tutorials Pre-requ1s1tes 36 units of hrst year level topics except by pnor arrangement Co requ1s1tes 12 units of second year level topics

Fieldwork is conrurrent wllh classroom work throughout the three terms of the second year Students spend the equivalent of three days per week 1n selected government departments hospitals voluntary agencies or other suitable auspices working under supervision at the pohcy and planning management or service dehvery levels By arrangement between supervisor student and staff members in the students elected areas of study the practicum may be vaned to meet the special needs of an elected area of study

Post Basic Topics in Social Administration

Graduates holdmg the Degree of Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strauon and diplomatcs holding the Diploma in Social Studies of the Un1versny of Adelaide or their equivalent may enrol as non degree students in the following topics

315

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Level Post basic

50958 ADVANCED PRACTICE (4 units) 50959 ADVANCED PRACTICE (8 units)

50911 ADVANCED PRACTICE (12 units) Miss M Norton Topic Co ordinator

Durauon One two or three terms Class Contact 3 hours weekly Pre-requ1s1tes As above Co requ1s1tes None

The syllabus will consist o[ one two or three terms of work 1n the topic 50911 Advanced Practice (See second year topics tn the Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strat1on )

50961 MANAGEMENT IN SOCIAL WELFARE (4 units) 50962 MANAGEMENT IN SOCIAL WELFARE (8 units)

50912 MANAGEMENT IN SOCIAL WELFARE (12 units) Mrs E Martin Topic Co ordinator

Level Post basic Duration One two or three terms Class Contact 3 hours weekly Pre-requ1s1tes As above Co requisites None

The syllabus will consist o[ one two or three terms of work 1n the topic 50912 Management 1n Soaal Welfare (See second year topics in the Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strauon )

Units 12 Level Post basic Duration Full year

50916 SOCIAL POLICY ANALYSIS Dr A Graycar

Class Contact 3 hours weekly Pre requtsttes As above Co-requtsttes None

For syllabus see second year topic 1n the Bachelor of Social Adm1n1strauon

50955 SUPERVISION IN SOCIAL WORK Mrs MA Hanen

(This topic may not be offered tn 1978)

Unns 6 Level Post basic Durauon Second half year Class Contact 2 seminar hours weekly and tutonals Pre requisites None Co requ1s1tes Concurrent involvement tn student or staff superv1s1on

Tuts topic explores the function of superv1s1on 1n social service systems The follow1ng

316

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

areas of superv1s1on will be developed differenual types of supervision components of superv1s1on including learning theory contract for learning methods of assessment programming of learning tasks professional development apphcatton of theory to practice and the skills required for superv1s1on

Preltmtnary reading Argyns C and Schon D Theory in practice increasing professional effectiveness (Jossey Bass 1975)

Reference books Knowles M The adult learner a neglected species (Gulf 1973) Pohek M Teaching and learning 1n social work education (Council on Social Work Educauon 1970) Towle C The learner in education for the professions (Chicago Univ Pr 1964)

Master of Social Administration

The Degree of Master of Soc1alAdm1n1strat1on requires twelvemonths full t1mestudy or its equivalent 1n part time study It is a 48 unit programme half by d1ssenauon and half by course work Three topics each of eight units make up the course work for the Degree Before being accepted as higher degree students in Social Adm1n1strauon candidates will be expected to submu sausfactory proposals for then studies to their prospective supervisors who will consider them in consultauon wtth the head of disc1phne and with other members of the d1sc1phne concerned with higher degree studies A proposal should outline a relatively well def med area of interest which will determine both the coursework and dissertauon topic of the Masters programme The proposal should make clear the candidates present grasp of the subJect as well as gaps in his/her understanding and it should indicate how he/she proposes to use the Masters year to further that understanding All candidates will be expected to take part in work 1n progress seminars and to present papers to these seminars The quahty of work for worK in progress seminars will be considered when assessments are made The course work will take the form of supervised reading 1n selected topics by arrangement with the staff members working 1n those areas and the presentation of papers to staff student seminars Assessment will be of the candidates supervised 1nd1v1dual work and of the seminar papers The d1ssertauon 1s expected to be about 15 000 words It should involve a substanual analysts of a problem or issue 1n social po hey 1n the adm1nistrat1on of SOLtai programmes or in the provision of social services Two copies of the dissertauon should be submitted to the School of Social Sciences for 1nclus1on 1n the Fhnders Universuy Library They should be in the format specified for honours theses in the School Candidates will be expected to choose topics for their supervised reading from amongst the following Social Pohcy (8 or 16 unas) Social Research (8 or 16 units) Social Work Practice (8 or 16 unlls)

Masters Topics

50501 SOCIAL POLICY (8 units) 50505 SOCIAL POLICY (16 units)

Dr A Graycar Level Postgraduate Durauon Half year OR year Class Contact By arrangement with supervisor

317

SYLLABUSES-SOCIAL SCIENCES

Pre-requ1s1tes B SocAdm1n with credit or disuncuon (or its equivalent)

A supervised reading course in the general area of social pohcy as tlus relates to the subject of the students d1ssertat1on

50502 SOCIAL RESEARCH (8 units) 50506 SOCIAL RESEARCH (16 units)

Mrs EM Martin Level Postgraduate Duration Half year OR year Class Contact By arrangement with supervisor Pre-requisites B Soc Adm1n with credit or d1suncuon (or its equivalent)

A supervised reading course in the general area of social research as this bears upon the subject of the students d1ssertatton

50504 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE (8 units) 50507 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE (16 units)

Miss M Norton

Level Postgraduate Duration Half year OR year Class Contact By arrangement with supervisor Pre-requ1s1tes B SocAdm1n with crecht or d1sunctton (or its equivalent)

A supervised reading course 1n the general area of social work pracuce with parucular reference to those aspects of pracuce suggested by the students dtssertauon topic

318

SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

GENERAL INFORMATION Students are expected to procure the prescnbed edtt1on of all set text books Where no edition u. prescribed they should procure the latest ed1t1on Those books 1nd1cated by an astensk (•) are ava1lable in paperback or student ed1uons

The name of the staff member pnmanly responsible for a topic and to whom enqu1nes about the topic should be directed is shown in italics below the topic Lille

Firsl Ylar Topics

First year algebra and calculus topics will normally be taken 1n one of thecomb1nauons (1) (n) (111) (1v) (v) below Each of (1) (11) (111) (1v) (v) may 1n turn becomb1ned wtth one or both of 67111 Computing I (3 units) and Compuung II (3 unns)

(1) 12 units compnstng 61127 Algebra BI 61128 Algebra Bii 63126 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bl A 1...nowledge of Matnculauon Malhemal1cs IS is the m1n1mal pre rcqu1slle for tlns combtnauon Tins combination provides entry to all second year mathematics topics

(n) 10 units compr1s1ng61 l28Algebra Bii 63126 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus BI A knowledge of Matr1culauon Mathemaucs IS is the m1n1mal pre requ1s1te for this combinauon This comb1nauon provides entry to all second year mathemaucs topics except for 65251 Probability and Stausucs I and 61241 Combinatoncs

(iu) 24 unlts compns1ng 61116 Algebra A and 63116 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Al Only students who have at least an A pass 1n each of Matnculat1on Mathematics land II should enrol for this combinauon This combination provides entry to all second year ma1hemaucs topics

(1\) 19 units compns1ng6l l l6Al~ebra Aand631l4 D1£fcrcnual andinte~ral Calculus SI Only students who have at least an A pass 10 each of Matnculauon Mathematics I and II should enrol for this comb1nauon This combtnauon provides entry to all second year mathemaucs topics (v) 91un1ts comprising 60116 Introductory Mathematics This provides entry to all other comb1nattons (1) (n) (111) (1v) For further information concerning first year program1nes of \Vork winch include mathe1naucs topics see schedules 3 4 5 of statute 10 l

60116 INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICS Units 9 Level First year Class Contact 3 lectures and 2 tutorials a week for three terms Pre requ1s1tes No formal pre requisites but a knowledge of mathemaucs at the fourth year level of high school will be assumed Successful compleuon of this topic wtll qualify students to enrol in Algebra IB Algebra IIB and Calculus IB This topic may not be taken concurrently with 61127 Algebra Bl 61128 Algebra Bii 63126 Differential and Integral Calculus BI 61116 Algebra A 63116 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus AI or 63114

Sets relauons functions The principal number systems especially real and complex numbers L1m1tsof sequences b1nom1al theorem anthmeucandgeometricsenes Inftn1te senes Taylors senes for polynomtals and rauonal funcuons Limits denvat1ves o( rauonal functions and X r for r rauonal Deftnlte integral and anudenvauves Apphcations to scales of measurement dimensional analysis mathemaucal modelling rates of change areas tangents and normals approx1mauons 2nequaht1es andsoluuon o{ equauons Sketching graphs of functions and determ1n1ng properues of functions Extreme value problems Algebra of hnear equauons (up to three equattons in three unkno,vns) algebra of matrices and vectors (up to order 3) and determinants Apphcauons to mixtures analyucgeometry changes of coordinates 1nvanants and reduction of quadrauc cutves in the plane

401

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Polynomial algebra including remainder theorem muluple roots Taylor expansion Lagrange interpolauon formula fundamental theorem of algebra and factonzation of real polynomials into hnear and quadrauc factors Graphing polynomials Polynomial equations Rauonal funcuons Sketching the graphs Partial fractions decompostuon Power senes expansions Geometry Review of plane geometry and trigonometry Polar coordinates Analytical representation of plane curves 1n exphca imphcitand parametric forms Classification of quadratic curves and review of the conic secuons Elementary geometry of hnes and planes in Euclidean space Planesecuons of elementary geometric figures Volume and onentat1on Orthogonal coorchnates in space three dimensional vector algebra with geometrical apphcat1ons Elementary functions (polynomial rational algebraic tngonometnc logar1thm1c and exponenual) their properues (Note that d1fferent1at1on and integrauon of tr1gonometnc loganthm1c and exponenual functions w11l not be treated) and applications to the descnpuon of wave phenomena damped osc1llauons exponenual growth and decay loganthm1c scales (decibels bns pll etc) loganthm1c graphs Denvauves and integrals of exponenual loganthm1c and trigonometric funcuons

Text book Abrahamson B and Gray M C The art of algebra (Rigby)

Units 2 I cvel First year Dur1t1on Term l

61127 ALGEBRA Bl Dr R ] Baxter

Class Contact 2 lectures and a two hour tutonal a week Pre requ1stte A knowledge of Matt1culat1on Mathematics IS

Sets subsets and the algebra of union 1ntersecuon complement and product Counung Addnive counting and the inclusion exclusion formula Mult1phcattve counung B1nom1al and mult1nom1al coeff1c1ents and expansions The number of k partitions of n Pigeon hole pnnc1ple and apphc1.l1ons Comb1natonal probab1hues 1-lypcrgeometnc and runs probability functions Cond1uonal probab1hty and independence B1nom1al probabilay funcnon NOTE Thts topic will be a pre requ1s1te for the second year mathemaucs topics 6525 l Probab1hty and Stansttcs I and 61241 Comb1natoncs

Units 4 I cvel First year Durauon Terms II Ill

61128 ALGEBRA Bii Dr R ] Baxter

Cl-iss Contact 2 lectures and a two hour tutonal a week Pre requisite A knowledge of Matr1culat1on Mathematics IS

Informal discussion of number systems Pnnciple of induction Linear equauons numerical calculauon of soluuon sets Linear comb1n1.t1ons of vectors 1n R" hnear independence and rank of a system of vectors The soluuon set of mxn homogeneous non homogeneous systems of hnear equations Matnces and the algebra of sum product transpose inverse Existence of inverse 1.Ild column rank Dctenn1nants recursive dehn1t1on and calculauon The sign of a permutanon Permutauon definll1on of determinants and proofs of their basic properties The inverse matnx and Cramer s rule Vector geometry of hnes and planes 1n R31 Geometry of hnear independence and rank Algebra and geometry of scalar vector and triple products

402

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Complex numbers elementary algebra and geometry Integers and polynomials the division algorithm greatest common divisor partial fractions Factorisation of complex polynomials into linear factors and of real polynomials into linear and quadratic factors The co efficients as symmetric functions of the roots

NOTE Tins topic will be a pre requ1slle for all second year mathematics topics

Unus 6

63126 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS Bl Professor G I Gaudry

Level Fust year Duration Terms I II III Class Contact 2 lectures and a two hour tutorial a week Pre requisite A knowledge of Matr1culat1on Mathematics IS

An 1ntu1uve treatment of real and complex numbers Functions L1m1ts and conunutty Derivatives with apphcat1ons Sequences and senes Exponenual logaruhm1c trigonometric functions Exponenual function of a complex variable Pnmllive functions Integral Elements of functtons of several vanables

Reference book Consult lecturer

Unlts 9 Level Fust year Duration Terms I II III

61116 ALGEBRA A Dr ] W Wamsley

Class Contact 3 lectures and a two hour tutorial a week Pre requistte Thts topic is recommended only for students who have at least a B pass in each of Matnculat1on Mathematics I and II

The syllabus of this topic comprises the syllabuses of 61127 Algebra BI 61128 Algebra Bil and 61221 Matnx Theory I Text books Halmos P R Naive set theory (Van Nostrand 1960) Lipschutz S Linear algebra (McGraw Hill 1968) Lipschutz S Finite mathematics (McGraw Hill 1966)

Units 15

63116 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS Al Professor B Abrahamson

Level Fust year Duration Terms I II III Class Contact 5 lectures and a two hour tutonal a week Pre requtslle This topic 1s recommended only for students who have at least a B pass 1n each of Matnculauon Mathematics I and II

An axtomauc treatment of the real number held infimum supremum complex numbers Funcuons polynomials conunutty funcuons continuous on an interval Denvat1ves mean value theorems Sequences and senes Elementary convergence tests Sequences of functions Uniform convergence Power senes Exponenual loganthm1c tr1gonometr1c and inverse trtgonometrtc funcnons of a real vanable Theu associated d1fferent1al equauons The exponenual function of a complex vanable The 1ndeftntte integral Evaluauon of integrals The deftntte integral Apphcauons of the definite integral Improper integrals The Cauchy mean value theorems Taylors theorem Convex funcuons and 1nequahues Ordinary d1fferenual equattons with apphcauons to mechanics Funcuons of several vanables hmlls cont1nully parual denvat1ves dtfferenuals Impllcll functions Extrema Extrema wtth constraints

403

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

NOTE This syllabus covers the material in the syllabuses of 63211 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus All and 63241 D1fferenual Equations I C:Onsult lecturer for text books

63114 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS SI Professor B Abrahamson

Units 10 Level Fust year Durauon Terms I II Class Contact 5 lectures and a two hour tutorial a week Pre requisite This topic is recommended only for students who have at least a B pass 1n each of Matnculauon Mathematics I and II

This topic comprises the first two terms work of 63116 Differential and Integral Calculus AI

Unlls 3 Level Fust year Duration Term I

67111 COMPUTING I Dr M P Georgeff

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisite A knowledge of Leaving Mathematics I and II

An tntroducuon to programming The aim of tlus topic is to teach the students to use the computer for solving problems Baste concepts of algonthmic theory will be used and pracucal skill gained by solving a variety of problems For this purpose a programming language (FORTRAN APL or PASCAL) will be taught with further emphasis on programme structure (funcllons and subroutines) elementary data structure hie handltng (including input output) and usage of software packages (e g SPSS) Students will be introduced to both batch and interactive mode of computing

Reference books Jensen K and Wnth N Pascal user manual and report 2nd ed (Springer 1975) McCracken D D A guide to Fortran IV programming 2nd ed (Wiley 1972)

Units 3 Level Ftrst year Duration Term II

67112 COMPUTING II Dr M P Georgeff

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requtstte 67111 Computing I or experience in elementary programming

An introducuon to computer structure and organ1zat1on Topics include maclune structure and operauon PNS and ISP notation states process representation of tnformauon machine language assembly language assemblers addressing modes subroutines co routines macros input output interrupts example conhgurauons Reference books Stone H S Introduction to computer organzzat1on and data structures (McGraw Hill 1972) Pnce W T Elements of IBM 1130 programming (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1968)

67114 ELEMENTARY DATA PROCESSING A 67115 ELEMENTARY DATA PROCESSING B

Dr M P George// Umts 67114 3 67115 I 5 Level Fust year

404

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Duration Term II Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week Pre requ1sttes 67111 Compuung I

NOTE A student who enrols concurrently with Computing II must take 67115 Elementary Data Processing B

An elementary 1ntroduction to computer structure and data processing The students are first introduced to the machine structure andoperallon states processes representation of information and machine language Further attenuon is then given to aux1hary devices and theu charactenst1cs including device capactty cost and accessing modes Finally system software packages and methods of hie manipulation 1nclud1ng algorithms for searching sorting and merging are studied and practised on various apphcauons

Reference books Uhlmann J D Fundamental concepts in computing Kunth D E The art of computer programming vol III

Second Year Topics

63211 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS All Dr P G Dodds

Units 3 Level Second year Durauon Term I Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisites A sufhc1ently high standard tn 63126 D1£ferent1al and Integral Calculus BI and 61128 Algebra Bil Students who have completed 63116 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AI may not take this topic This toptc is designed for students who want to conunue in Differential and Integral Calculus A III and IV

l!.uchdean space of any d1mens1on Geometry and topology of sets 1n I:uchdean spaces Compactness Connectedness Transformation from Rm to R 11 Differential calculus of such transformations Inversion and tmphcll function theorems Extreme value problems

Units 3

63212 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS Alll Dr P G Dodds

Level Second year Durauon Term II Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1s1tes 63116 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or 63211 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus All

Integral calculus of several vanables General theory of the Lebesgue integral including convergence theorems Methods of calculauon 1nclud1ng iterated tntegrauon and transformauon o[ integrals

lJnits 3

63213 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS AIV Dr P G Dodds

Level Second year Duration Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week Pre requisite 63212 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus AIII

Integrauon on manifolds Extenor d1fferenual forms Field theory Stokes theorem the divergence lheorem

405

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

63221 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS Bii Dr R S Booth

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term I Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutonal a week Pre requisite 63126 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus BI and61128 Algebra Bii Students who have completed 63116 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AI may not take this topic

The matenal ls similar to6321 l D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus All but more emphasis 1s given to techniques and apphcauons and the treatment 1s more intuitive

Reference books Lang S A second course in calculus (Addison Wesley 1965) Curus P C Multivariate calculus (Wiley 1972) Apostol T Calculus vol 2 (Blaisdell 1969)

63222 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS Biii Dr R S Booth

Unns 3 Level Second year Duration Term II Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1s1tes 63116 Differential and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or 63221 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bii

The matenal is similar to 63212 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus Alli but more emphasis is given to techniques and applications and the treatment is more 1ntu1t1ve

63223 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS BIV Dr R S Booth

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1sites 63212 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AIII or 63222 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus Biii

The matenal 1s s1m1lar to 63213 D1£ferenual and Integral Calculus AIV but more emphasis is given to techniques and apphcat1ons and the treatment is more 1ntu1t1ve

Units 4

65204 INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS Professor f N Darroch

Level Any year Duration Terms I II Class Contact 2 lectures a week two hour laboratory class 1n the first term and a one hour tutonal in the second term Pre requ1s1tes A knowledge of matt1culat1on mathematics IS Students may not obtain credit both for this topic and 65251 Probab1hty and Stat1st1cs I

Considerable emphasis will be placed on the student acqu1nng through laboratory work .in emp1ncal as well as theoreucal understanding of the £01Iow1ng matenal Ind1v1duals samples populations vanables staust1cal inferences Sample descnpt1on histogram mean median vanance covanance correlation scatter diagram Probabthty as 1elat1ve frequency Independent events B1nom1al probab1ht1es Real and conceptu.il populations Discrete and continuous variables Population descnpllon Normal probab1ht1es Expectauon Random samples independent variables expectation and variance of sample mean central hm1t theorerr Est1mat1on of means variances and

406

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

probab1ht1es Non parametric tests sign Mann Whttney Wilcoxon rank correlauon Tests abou1 means normal t test one factor expenmenl linear regression Tests about probab1ht1es b1nom1al hypergeometr1c goodness of ht connngency tables

Reference book Daniel W W Bzostat1stics a foundation for analysts in the health sciences (Wiley 1974)

Units 3 Level Second year Duranon Term I

61221 MATRIX THEORY I Dr W H Cornish

Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutorial a week Pre requ1sue 61128 Algebra Bii This course may not be taken by studen1s who have completed 61116 Algebra A

Vector spaces examples hnear dependence span of set of vectors basis dimension subspaces sum and 1ntersect1on of subspaces Linear transformations between vector spaces examples range null space rank+ nullity =dimensions of domain 1nvert1b1hty pro1ect1ons and tdempotency Matrices ro\v rank column rank solution of linear equauons elementary matnccs equivalence matnx of a linear transformation change of basts s1m1lanty product inverse and determinant formulae for partitioned matnces matnx of a quadratic form pos1uve dehntte matnces Inner product spaces over the real and complex fields orthonormal vectors and bases Gram Schmidt process orthogonal complement orthogonal and unnary matnces orthogonal pro1ect1ons sum and difference of orthogonal pro1cct1ons Eigenvectors eigenvalues d1agonal1satton of symmetric and J.Icrm1t1an matrices pos1t1ve dehntte m'ltrtccs simultaneous reduction theorems for quadratic forms min max theorems for rauos of quadratic forms s1m1lanty to a diagonal matnx when there 1s a basis of eigenvectors Cayley Hamilton theorem

Reference books Ayres F Schaum s outline of theory and Problems of matrices (Schaum 1962) L1pschucz S Linear algebra (McGraw Hill 1968)

Untts 3 Level Second year Duration ferm II

61222 MATRIX THEORY II Dr W H Cornish

Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutonal a week Pre requisite 61221 Matrix Theory I or 61116 Algebra A

Functions of matnces exponenual use of spectrum 1n def1n1ng f(A) relation to polver senes dchn1uon calculauon of components 1n the Perron formula apphcauons 1nclud1ng y = Ay Determinant charactensauon of rank posll1ve definiteness Non negative matrices indecomposable decomposable non cychc basic spectral propernes stochasuc matrices Convex sets 1n R convex closures separanon of two d1s101nt convex sets hyperplanes vertices a convex set ts generated by ns vertices

Untts 3

61243 CLASSICAL DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY Dr B B Phadke

Level Second year Durauon Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutonal a week

407

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Co requ1slte 63213 D1fferent1al Jnd Integral Calculus AIV or 63223 Differential and Integral Calculus BIV

Theory of curves and surfaces Text book Do Carmo M P Differential geometry of curves and surfaces (Prenuce Hall 1976)

Units 3 Level Second year Durauon Term I

65251 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS I Dr M ]inna

Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutorial a week Pre requisues 63116 Drlferent1al and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or61127 Algebra BI and 61128 Algebra Bii and 63126 D1£ferenttal and Integral Calculu'i Bl Cond1uonal probab1hty and independence Discrete random vanables b1nom1al Poisson negauve binomial hypergeometr1c runs Joint distr1buuons and independence Expectation variance covariance Probability generating functions Sums of random variables Examples of stat1sucal inference Weak convergence of sample means

Text book Hogg RV and Craig AT Introduct1ontomathematicalstatist1cs 3rded (Macmillan 1970)

Unus 3 Level Second year Duration Term II

65213 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS II Dr N A C Cressze

Class Contact 3 lectures and a two hour tutorial a week Pre requ1s1te 65251 Probab1hty and Stat1sucs I

Conunuous random variables normal gamma Elementary transformauons of random variables Correlation coefhc1ent Moment generating £unctions Central hm1t theorem Elements of point and interval est1mauon Elements of hypothesis testing and the Neyman Pearson theorem Reference book Hogg RV andCra1g AT Introduct1ontomathemat1calstatistics 3rded (Macmillan 1970)

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term I

61241 COMBINATORICS Dr ] W Wamsley

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisnes 61116 Algebra A or 61127 Algebra Bl and 61128 Algebra Bii

Counung the members of a f tnlte set graphs and trees recurrence relauons and generaung funcuons

Reference book Liu C L Introduction to comb1natorzal mathematics (McGra'v Hill 1968)

408

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term II

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

67212 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS I DrTWSag

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week Pre requisues 63116 D1fferenttal and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or 61128 Algebra Bil and 63126 Differential and Integral Calculus BI and 67111 Computtng I

Non hnear equauons hnear equations matrix inversion determinant evaluation Iterative methods for the soluuon of algebraic eigenvalue problems Least squares curve fitung Fintte differences Dtfferentiauon and tnterpolauon formulae Elementary methods for numerical integration and integrauon of ordinary differential equauons

Reference books Ralston A A first course in numerical analysis(McGraw Hill 1965) Or Isaacson E and Keller H B Analysis of numerical methods (Wiley 1966) FrOberg C E Introduction to numerical analysis 2nd ed (Addison Wesley 1970) Henric1 P Elements of numerical analysts (Wiley 1964) Walsh J Numertcal analysis an introduction (Academic 1966)

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term III

67213 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS II DrTWSag

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisite 67212 Numencal Analysis I

Transformatton methods for the soluuon of algebraic eigenvalue problems Numencal integration Approx1mauon of funcuons Numencal soluuon of ordinary d1fferenual equations 1niual value problems one step and multi step methods Linear difference equanons

Reference books As for Numerical Analysts I

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term I

63241 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS I DrCRARao

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requis11es 61128 Algebra Bil and 63126 Differential and Integral Calculus BI This course may not be taken by students who have completed 63116 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus AI

Elementary methods of solv1rig ftrst 01der d1fferenual equauons and thetr apphcattons hnear equatJons of second and higher orders existence theory and the method of successive approximations Laplace transform method systems of first order equations

Reference books Rabenstein A L Introduction to ordinary differential equations 2nd ed (Academic 1972) Rubinstein Z A course zn ordinary and partial dtfferentzal equations (Academic 1969) Simmons G F Differential equations (McGraw Hill 1972) Leighton W Ordinary differential equations (Wadsworth 1966)

409

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term II

63242 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 11 DrCRARao

Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutorial a week Pre requ1s1tes 63116 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or 63241 D1fferent1al Equations I

Boundary and eigenvalue problems Green s function companson andosc1llauon theory phase plane methods fust order partial d1fferenual equations

Reference books As for D1fferent1al Equations I

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term II

67252 CLASSICAL MECHANICS Dr B B Phadke

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1s1tes 63116 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or 61128 Algebra Bii and 63126 Differenual and Integral Calculus BI

K1nemaucs-Normal and Tangential co ordinates Polar co ordinates Monon of a single parucle-pro1ecules Simple Harmonic Motion central force mouon Systems of particles and plane ng1d bodies moments of 1nerua Normal modes of v1brauon of a system wtth two degrees of freedom

Text book Synge J L and Griffith B A Principles of mechanics 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1959)

Reference book Hirsch M W and Smale S Differential equations, dynamical systems and linear algebra (Academic 1974)

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term III

67203 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS DrCRARao

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1snes 63212 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AIII or 63222 D1fferenttal and Integral Calculus Biii and 63241 D1fferent1al Equations I

Power series soluuons of d1fferent1al equations Beta Gamma functions Bessel Legendre Hypergeometnc functions orthogonal polynomials separation of vanables tn partial d1fferenual equations apphcauons

Reference books Carner G F Krook M and Pearson C E Functions of a complex variable (McGraw Hill 1966) Lebedev N N Special functions and their applications (Prentice Hall 1965) Sneddon I N Special functions of mathematical physics and chemistry (Oliver and Boyd 1961)

Units 3 Level Second year Duration Term II

410

61212 FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY Dr B B Phadke

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisites 63116 Differenual and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or61128 Algebra BU and 63126 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BI

The real affine plane and space treated ax1omat1cally Vectors and associated vector spaces coordinate frames Linear 'l.nd affine functions Rauo cross ratio area Theorems of Ceva Menelaus Pappus Desargues the complete quadnlateral The geometry defined by a symmetnc metric Euclidean and M1nkowsk1an geometnes Groups of mouons and assoc1.ited 1nvanants Apphcat1ons to k1nemattcs and Special Relat1v1ty

Unus 3 Level Second year Durauon Term III

61211 FOUNDATIONS OF ARITHMETIC Dr W H Cornish

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week Pre requisites 63116 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AI and 61116 Algebra A or61128 Algebra Bii and 63126 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BI

Properties of the real and complex numbers systems and their sub systems Natural numbers Integers Rational numbers Irrational numbers Other fields of numbers than the held of rational numbers Standard algonthms of anthmeuc and algebra The construction of real and complex numbers Natural numbers as cardinal numbers Pea nos system 0£ axioms Construction of 1ntegers Construction of rationals Construction of reals

Reference books Landau E (,. H Foundations of analysis, 3rd ed (Chelsea 1966) Olmsted J M H The real number system (Appleton Century Crofts 1962)

Units 3 Level Second year Durauon Term III

67113 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES Dr M P George//

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1s1te 67120 Data Structures and List Processing

Form'l.1 language theory and apphcauons tn the translatton of programming languages Topics w11l 1ndude sem1oucs phrase structure grammars precedence grammars lex1cal analysts parsing methods (top down and bottom up) syntax directed translauon schemes semanttc rouunes comptlers and tntetpreters

Reference books Aho AV and Ullman JD Thetheoryofparstng translationandcompiling(Prennce Hall 1972 73) Gnes D Compiler construction for digital computers (Wiley 1971) Lewis P M Rosenkrantz D J and Stearns R E Compiler design theory (Addison Wesley 1976)

Units 3

67120 DATA STRUCTURES AND LIST PROCESSING Dr l'vf P George//

Level Second year Duration Term II Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1s1tes 67112 Computing II

The representauon and processing of data structures Toptcs include discrete mathcmaucal structures computational structures hnear hsts hst structures hst

411

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

processing recursive programming LISP search based problem solving state space representation problem reducuon representauon search algonthms apphcauons

Reference books Bertzuss A T Data structures theory and practice (Academic 1971) Knuth D E The art of computer programming vols I and 3 2nd ed (Addison Wesley 1975) Nilsson N J Problem solving methods in arllf1c1al intelligence (McGraw Hill 1971) Pfatz J L Computer data structures (McGraw Hill 1977)

67273 DATA MANAGEMENT AND APPLICATIONS Dr M P George//

Units 3 Level Second year Durauon Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutorial a week Pre requisues 67112 Compuung II or Elementary Data Processing

File and data management for computer systems The material covered by this topic will include concepts of suuctured informauon directories and indexed structures sequenual access direct access storage allocauon and control techniques data bases management informauon systems idenuhcauon and security CODASYL Programming language COBOL wtll be taught and used to carry out examples of appltcauons

Reference book McCracken D D Introduction to COBOL programming

63243 POPULATION DYNAMICS Dr K Gopalsamy

Units 3 Level Second year Durauon Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutorial a week Pre requisite 63241 D1fferent1al Equauons I

Single species growth 1n 1solauon wuh unhmlted and hmtted resources constant and polluted envuonments disease and epidemics Mulllple species 1n 1nteracuon linear and nonlinear assoc1auons compeuuon symb1os1s scavenging Lotka Volterra prey predator systems pest control competition and co existence community stabilny and compel1t1ve exclusion histoncal actions and hereditary effects Volterra s populallon laws 1mm1grauon currents and age dependence struggle for existence and evoluuon human population 10 a closed system buth traJectones mating and marriage model~ 111 a bisexual population Reference books Kosutzm V A Mathematical brology (Harrap 1939) (out of pnnt) D Ancona U The struggle for existence (Bnll 1954) Lotka A J Elements of mathematical biology (Dover 1956) P1elou E C An introduction to mathematical ecology (Wtley lntersc1ence 1969) Keyfttz N Introduction to the mathematics of population (Addison Wesley 1968) Rosen R ed Foundations of mathematical biology vol III (Academic 1973)

Third Year Topics

63399 PURE MATHEMATICS READING COURSE Professor G I Gaudry

Units 3 Level Thud year Durauons Terms I II III Ch.ss Contact l hour a week

412

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Unit~ 3

60399 GENERAL MATHEMATICS READING COURSE Professor B Abrahamson

Level Thud year Durauon Tenns I II III Class Contact l hour a week

65399 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS READING COURSE Professor] N Darroch

Units 3 Level Thud year Durauon Terms I II Ill Class Contact l hour a week

Unns 3

67399 APPLIED MATHEMATICS READING COURSE Dr R R Huzlgol

Level Third year Durauon Terms I II III Class Contact 1 hour a week

61311, 61312, 61313 ALGEBRA I, II, Ill This compnses three topics which should be viewed as a whole Thus there may be 1n pracuce some minor rearrangement of matenal between terms 1n th ts sequence However each topic may be taken by itself by any student having the prescrtbed pre requisites or the equivalent Although ord1nanly these courses are at the thud year level they may be taken 1n second year

Units 3 Level Thrrd year Durauon Tenn I

61311 ALGEBRA I Dr ] W Wamsley

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requisite 61116 Algebra A or 61128 Algebra Bil

Groups subgroups complexes normal subgroups and homomorphisms Normal structure 1somorpl11sm theorems and Sylow theorems Class1hcauon of hnuely generated abehan groups

Reference books Herstetn I N Topics in algebra (Blai<1dell 1964) Macdonald I D The theory of groups (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1968)

Unns 3 Level Thud year Dur'luon Term II

61312 ALGEBRA II Dr W H Cornish

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1s1tes 61311 Algebra I and 61221 Matrix theory I

413

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Rings 1deals and nng homomorplusms Special types of rings Polynomial nngs Modules 1nd module homomorphisms

Reference book Herstetn I N Topics 1n algebra (Blaisdell 1964)

Units 3 Level Third year Duration Term III

61313 ALGEBRA Ill Dr R I Ba:>.ter

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requ1s1te 61312 Algebra II

Extensions of fields apphcauon to geometrical constructions and polynomial theory G'1lois theory Finite fields

Reference book Herste1n I N Topics 1n algebra (Blaisdell 1961)

Units 3 Level Third year Durauon Tenn I

63351 TOPOLOGY Dr B B Phadke

Class Conw.ct 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a 'veek Pre requ1s1te 63116 D1f£erenual and Integral Calculus Al or 63211 D1f£crcnt1al and Integral Calculus All or 63221 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bii

Topological spaces convergence cont1nu1ty connectedness compactness A i.clect1on of topICs from metnc spaces

Units 3 Level Third year Duration Term I

63311 COMPLEX ANALYSIS Dr R S Booth

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisite 63116 Differenual and Integral Calculus AI or 63211 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus All or 63221 Differential and Integral Calculus Bil Complex powersenes Its domain of convergence analyuc functions Principle of analytic continuauon the sum of a power senes as the generating function for us coefhc1ents Flementary transcendental funcuons in complex domain branch of argument branch of loganthm Holomorphtc funcuons Cauchy Riemann equations harmonictty of real and 1mag1nary pans Concept of the conformal mapping examples Mob1us Lransformauon preservation of harmontclty Compl{'X integration the Cduchy integral theorem Cauchy s integral formula and Its consequences Taylor senes Laurent scnes The residue theorem apphcauons especially on calculation of real integrals

Reference books Ahlfors L V Complex analysis 2nd ed (McGra\V Hill 1966) Carten H Elementary theory of analytic functions (Addison Wesley 1963) Levinson N and Redheffer R M Complex variables (Holden Day 1970) Con,vay J B Functions of one complex variable (Spnnger Verlag 1973)

414

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Unlls 3 Level Third year DurJllOn Tenn II

63312 FOURIER ANALYSIS Dr R S Booth

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tu tonal a week Pre requisnes 63212 Differenu-il and IntegrJI Calculu~ Alli or 63222 D1fferenUJI and Integral Calculus Biii and 6331 l Complex Analysis A or 63321 Complex Analys1~ B

founer senes Convolution of integrable functions Approximate tdcnnnes Fe1'€r kernel and Cesaro summability Uniqueness theorem Weierstrass approx1mauon theorem R1crnJnn Lebesgue le1nma Poisson and de la Valle?! Poussin kernels L2 theory R1esz fisher Plancherel and Parsev-il theorems Tests for convergence of founer senes at a point Divergence of Founer senes Founer tr1.nsforms Basic L 1 and L2 theory as for 'ienes The 1nvers1on theorem Rapidly decreasing functions

Reference books Edwards R E Fourier series a modern introduction 2 vols (P:>lt Rinehart& Winston 1967) 11offman K Banach spaces of analytic funcllons (Prentice 1-Iall 1965) Zygmund A Trigonometric series (Cambndge Univ Pr 1959) 81.ry N A treatae on trigonometric series vols I and II (Pergamon 1964) Stein E and \Ve1ss G Introduction to rourier analysis on Euclidean spaces(Pnnceton 1971) K1.t1nelson Y An introduction to harmonic analysis (\V1ley 1968) \Viener N The Fourier integral and certain of its applzcatzons (Ca1nbndge Univ Pr 1967) Dym H and McKean H P Fourier series and integrals (Academic 1972)

Unus 3

63362 ELEMENTARY HILBERT SPACE TECHNIQUES Dr P G Dodds

Level ThITd year Durauon Term II Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutorial a week Pre requisites 61116 Algebra A or 61221 Matnx Theoty I and 63222 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bill

Elementary geometry of Hilbert space orthonormal systems Gram Schmidt process orthogonal polynomials of Legendre Hermite Laguerre bestapprox11nat1on tn the sense of least squares founer coefficients Ricsz r1scher theorem onhogon1.l pro1ecuons completeness and general Founer expansions

Normed ltnear spaces and theIT duals hnear operators and LheIT Jd]otnts theorem of Ascoh Arzela compact operators Schauder s theorem R1esz Schaudcr theory spectrum resolvent Neumann series appl1cauons to integral equauons of Volterra and Fredhohn type

Spectral analysts of compact self ad101nt normal and unitary operators 111 Hilbert space 1-hlbert Schmidt operators Vanauonal methods for calculating eigenvalues of compact self ad101nt operators minimax theorem o[ Courant

Reference books Bancich S Thdorie des operations ltnCaires, 2nd ed (Chelsea 1963) Day M M Normed linear spaces (Spnnger Verlag 1962) Dieudonne J FoundatJons of modem analysis (Academic 1966) Dunford N and others Linear operators 3 vols (lntersc1ence 1963 71) R1esz F and SzOkefalv1 Nagy B Functional analysis (Ungar 1955) Rudin W Real and complex analysis (McGraw Hill 1966) Rudin W Functional analysis (McGraw Hill 1973) Soholev S L Partzal differential equations of mathematical physics (Pergamon 1964)

415

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Taylor A E Introduction to functional analysis (Wiley 1967) Wilansky A E Functional analysis (Blaisdell 1964) Yos1da K Functional analysis 4th ed (Spnnger Verlag 1974) 7aanen A C Linear analysis (North Holland 1960)

Units 3 Level Thud year Durauon Term III

63313 INTEGRATION THEORY Professor G I Gaudry

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1s1tes 63212 D1fferenttal and Integral Calculus AUi or 63222 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus Biii

A conunuat1on of the measure and 1ntegrauon theory of D1fferenual and Integral Calculus A III Complex measures The Radon Nikodym theorem R1esz Markov Kakutant representauon theorems Functions of bounded vanat1on Absolute conunuuy of funcuons and measures The fundamental theorem of calculus Lebesguedecompos1uon Lebesgue Suelt1es integrals

Reference books Rudin W Real and complex analysis (McGraw Hill 1966) Zaanen A C Integration 2nd ed (North Holland 1967) Royden H L Real analysis (Macmillan 1963) Saks S Theory of the integral 2nd ed (Dover 1964) Hewitt E and Stromberg K Real and abstract analysis (Spnnger 1965) Ash Robert B Measure integration and functional analysis (Academic 1972)

Units 3 Level Thud year Durauon Term I

65351 RANDOM VARIABLES Dr M ]inna

Class Contract 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requisites 63211 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus All or 63221 D1fferenttal and Integral Calculus Bil and 65213 Probab1hty and Stat1st1cs II

Charactenstlc funcuons Multivanale d1stnbut1ons transforms cond1t1onal d1stnbuuons muluvanate normal mulunom1al D1nchlet Functions of random variables x2 t F d1str1buuons Compound d1stnbuuons L1m1t theorems for sums of independent random vanables Order stausucs

Reference book Hogg R V and Craig A T Introduction to mathematical statistics 3rd ed (Macmillan 1970)

Units 3 Level Third year Durauon Term II

65342 MARKOV PROCESSES I Dr M ]irzna

Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutonal a week Pre-requ1s1tes 65251 Probab1luy and Stausucs I

Markov processes with discrete ume and with countably many states reducible irreducible penochc apenod1c hm1t theorems apphcauons to random walk with and without barners gamblers ruin special methods when there is a finite number of states Markov processes with a conunuous time parameter buth and death processes the Poisson process elements of queueing theory

416

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Reference books Karhn S and Taylor H M A first course in stochastic processes 2nd ed (Academic 1975)

Unus 3 Level Thud year Duration Term III

65353 MULTIVARIATE MODELS Professor] N Darroch

Class Contact 3 lectures and l tu tonal a week Co requ1sae 65313 Staust1cal Inference Ill

Multiple and partial correlauon Pr1nc1pal components Canonical correlatton Discnm1nant functtons Test of a mult1var1ate hnear hypothesis Random effects models for factorial experiments Comparison with fixed effects models Mixed models Second order stationary ume senes Autoregressive and moving average models Spectral density funcuon and its estnnauon

65311 65312 65313 STATISTICAL INFERENCE I, 11, 111 Dr N A C Cressie

Unus 3 3 3 Level Thud year Durauon Terms I II III Ch.ss Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requ1sue 61221 Matrix Theory I Cu rcqu1s1te 65351 Random Vanables

Linear models vector space descnpt1on 1denu£1ab1hty of parameters properties of orthogonal pro1ect1ons Gauss Markov theorern test of a single hypothesis Apphcat1ons to regression factorial and covanance models Test of a sequence of hnear hypotheses orthogonal hypotheses Experimental design crossed factors nested factors rephcat1on Laun squares incomplete blocks Sufficient stat1sucs Likehhood pnnaple Esumauon Blackwell Rao theorem Cramer Rao theorem large sample properues of maximum hkehhood estimates Hypotheses tesung Neyman Pearson theorem unbiased tests uniformly most powerful tests large sample properttes of hkehhood rauo tests Tests for quahtauve data goodness of fit contingency tables Confidence regions power relat1onsh1p with hypothesis testing

Reference books Hogg RV andCratg AT Introduct:ontomathemat1calstat1sl1cs 3rded (Macmillan 1970) Rao C R L:near statistical inference and Its applications (Wiley 1965) Cochran W l.r Sampling techniques 3rd ed. (Wiley 1977)

Untts 3 Level Thud year Durauon Term I

63341 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Ill Dr R R Huilgol

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week Pre requisite 63242 D1fftrenual Equauons II

Stab1hty and asymptotic behaviour of ltnear and almost hnear systems of d1fferent1al and d1fferenual difference equations L1apunov funcuons and funcuonals Volterra integral equauons the Po1ncare Bend1xson theorem orbital stab1hty appl1cauons to populauon ecology

417

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Reference books 'i1mmons G F Differential equations (McGra\V Htll 1972) \V1lkms J L Stabilzty theory of dynamical systems (Nelson 1970) Rabenstein A L Introduction to ordinary differential equations 2nd ed (Academic 1972) Bellman R E and Cooke K L Differential difference equations <Academic 1963) Miller R K Nonlinear Volterra integral equations (BenJam1n 1971) Brauer F and Nohel J A The qualitative theory of ordinary differential equations (Ben1am1n 1968) Hirsch M \V and Smale S Differential equations dynamical systems and linear algebra {Academic 1974)

Unns 3

63342 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS I Dr R R Huilgol

Level Third year Durauon Term II Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisites 63213 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus AIV or 63223 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BIV and 67203 Special Functions

Parual d1fferenual equations as mathematical models for physical phenomena Well posed problems

Introducuon to the study of hyperbolic parabohc and elhpuc equations Energy 1dent1t1es maximum pnnc1ples uniqueness and continuous dependence on the data

Separallon of vanables and Founer senes Laplace d1ffus1on and \Vdve equ'lt1ons 1n vanous domains Shortcomings of the method

Non Homogeneous problems Greens function and flnae Founer transform

Introducuon to transform methods for 1n1ual value problems

Reference boohs Courant R and Hilbert D !riethods of mathematical physics vol II Partial differential equations {lntersc1ence 1962) Rub1nste1n Z A course in ordinary and partial dtfferenlial equations (Academic 1969) Sneddon I N Elements of partial differential equations (McGra\V Hill 1957) Sobolcv S L Partial differential equations of mathematical physics (Pergamon 1964) \Velnbcrger H F A first course zn partial d1jjerent1al equations (Bla1sdell 1965)

Unus 3

63343 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS II Dr R R Hu1lgol

Level Thlfd year Durauon Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requisite 63342 Parual D1fferent1al Equation I

Class1ficauon of equations wnh many independent vanables Reducnon of equations 'vllh two independent vanables to canonical form

Maximum pnnc1ples for elhRlIC and parabolic equations and thcu consequences Phragmen Lindelof theorem and Its consequences

Introducuon to potential theory the mean value theorem and Harnack s 1nequahty for solutions to Laplace s equation

Transform methods for 1n1t1al value problems involving thed1ffus1on and wave equation

Klfchoff s formula for the wave equauon

Reference books As for 63342

418

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

67322 NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Dr ] Kautsky

Unus 3 Level Thnd year Dur.iuon Term II Class Contacl 3 lectures 1nd I tutorial a week Pre requ1s1tes 63211 D1Herenual and Integral Calculus All or 63221 D1fferenual and Integr.il Calculus Bii and 67213 Numencal Analysis II and 63241 Differenual J:quauons I Co requ1sne 63342 Parllal D1fferenual l!.quat1ons I

Ordinary differential equations In1t1al value problems-general inethods (consistency stability convergence) Boundary value problcms-shooting and direct hnue difference melhods Eigenvalue problems

Partial differential equations Laplace equanon eigenvalue problems Wdvc equation and an equivalent system Heat equauon-exphcu and 1mpl1c1t methods General theory of consistency convergence and stability

Reference books Babuska I Prager M and V1tasek E Numerzcal processes in d1fferenllal equations (Wiley 1967) Forsythe G E and Wasow \V R Finite difference methods for partial differential equations (Wiley 1960) Hennc1 P Discrete variable methods in ordinary d1fferenl1al equations ('V1ley 1962) Isaacson E and Keller 1-1 B Analysis of numerzcal methods (\V1ley 1966)-selected parts

Units 3

67312 NUMERICAL METHODS OF LINEAR ALGEBRA DrTWSag

Level Third year Duration Term I Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a \veek Pre rcqutsttes 67213 Numencal Analysis II and 61221 M.itnx Theory I

Numencal Soluuon of hnear equauons Errors ans1ng 1n numerical soluuon condition of the problem ehm1nat1on and tnangulanzat1011 methods for general matnces error analysis for Gaussian ehminauon Ehm1nauon methods for special matnccs orthogonal tnangularizat1on methods fonvard and back substnullon 1terauve methods estimates for overall perturbation errors in the solunon of linear equations Herauve scheme for improvement of solution of 1llcond1uoned equauons

Numencal Soluuon of algebraic e1genv1.lue problems Propernes of eigenvalues and eigenvectors of general and Hem11t1an matrices Snntlarny transformauon methods for reducuon of real symmetric matrices to diagonal or tridiagonal matrices and general complex matrices lo upper Hessenburg form The Q R and double shift Q R methods for detenn1n1ng eigenvalues of Hessenburg matrices Inverse iterauon methods for detennuung real and co1nplex eigenvectors of Hessenburg matrices

Reference book Wilkinson J H The algebraic eigenvalue problem (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1965)

Units 3

67313 APPROXIMATION OF FUNCTIONS Dr I Kautsky

Level Third year Durauon Term Ill Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week Pre 1equ1slles 63211 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus All or 63221 D11terenual and Integral Calculus Bii and 61221 Matnx Theory I

419

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

The approx1mat1on problem existence theorems Cuive fitting least squares and onhogonal funcuons Chebyshev approx1mat1on charactenzat1on uniqueness de la Vallt!e Poussin algonthm approx1mauon by un1solvent and ranonal functions Approx1mauon 1n the L 1 norm Weierstrass theorem Computational methods

Reference books Rice J R The approximation of functions 2 vols (Addison Wesley 1964 69) Davis P J Jnttrpolatzon and approximation (Blaisdell 1965) Isaacson E and Keller H B Analysis of numerical methods (Wiley 1966)-selected parts

Units 3 Level Third year Durauon Term I

67331 LINEAR PROGRAMMING Dr D K Kulshrestha

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requ1slte A suff1c1ently high standard 1n 61128 Algebra Bil

Linear 1nequahues Convex sets The bnear programming problem The simplex method Preparauon of a problem for simplex method Dualuy Examples of linear programming problems Interpretation of duahty Flows in networks Integer linear programming

Unns 3 Level Thud year Durauon Term II

67361 CLASSICAL HYDRODYNAMICS Dr R R Hutlgol

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week Pre requisites 63213 D1fferenllal and Integral Calculus AIV or 63223 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus BIV

Kinematics Velocity fields streamhnes traJectones conunu1tyequauon cuculat1onand vorticity rotauonal and 1rrotat1onal flow velocity potential Dynamics of ideal flow Equauons of mouon barotropy energy equation Bernoulh s equauon Irrotatzonalflow Streamfuncuon Veloc1typotenual Sources Sinks Doubtlets Vortices General motion Kelvins cuculauon theorem Voruc1ty equauon and theorems in Helmholtz and B1erknes Motion of a body Milne Thomson s cucle theorem Blasius theorem Kutta Joukowsk1 theorem Joukowsk1 profiles

Reference books Rutherford D r: Fluid dynamJcs (Oliver and Boyd 1966) Milne Thomson L M Theoretical hydrodynamics 5th ed (Macmillan 1972) Curle N and Davies H J Modern fluid dynamics vol I Incompressible flow (Van Nostrand 1968)

Unus 3 Level Thtrd year Duration Term III

67363 PERTURBATION METHODS Dr R R Hu1lgol

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week Co requ1s1te 63343 Parual D1fferenual Equations II

Classical perturbauon techniques Potncare s method singular perturbauons method of strained coordinates method of matched asymptotic expansions method of muluple scales domain perturbation method change of eigenvalues

420

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Reference books Cole J D Perturbation methods in applied mathematics (Blaisdell 1968) Nayfeh A H Perturbation methods (Wiley 1973) 0 Malley Jr R E Introduction to singular perturbations (Academic 1974) Van Dyke M Perturbation methods in fluid mechanics (Academic 1964)

Unus 3 Level Thud year Duration Term III

67353 ANALYTICAL MECHANICS Dr R R Huzlgol

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week Pre requ1s1tes 63211 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus All or 63221 Differenual and Integral Calculus BII and63242 D1fferenual Equations II and67252 Classical Mechanics

Generalised coordinates holonom1c systems work function The Euler Lagrange formulauons the Hamilton formulauon Canonical transformations Small osc1llat1ons

Reference books Goldstein H Classical mechanics (Addison Wesley 1964) Whittaker E T A treatise on the analytical dynamics of particles and rigid bodies 4th ed (Cambridge Untv Pr 1964)

Units 3 Level Thud year Duration Term I

67351 CONTINUUM MECHANICS Dr R R Huzlgol

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week Pre requ1s1tes 63213 Differential and Integral Calculus AIV or 63223 Differenual and Integral Calculus BIV

Tensor notauon concept of stress properties Rate of strain tensor compaub1hty conditions Eulerian and Lagrangian equations of motion Constitutive equations of conunua Navier Stokes equation non Newtonian fluids Strain tensor equauons of elast1ctty Strain energy function boundary value problems of elasucuy uniqueness of soluuons Apphcauons to beams reducuon of the dynamical equations to wave equations

Reference books Fung Y C A first course in continuum mechanics (Prentice Hall 1969) Sokolnikoff I S Mathematical theory of elasticity 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1956)

Untts 3 Level Thud year

Units 3 Level Thud year Duration Term III

67389 COMPUTATIONAL PROJECT Dr ] Kautsky

67303 CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS Professor I Kluvanek

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week Pre requisites 63211 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus All or 63221 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bii and 63242 D1££erent1al Equations II

421

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Classical problems on extrema of functionals Differential of funcuonal Second differential Condtt1ons of extrema Euler s equation Cond1uonal extrema Functionals with several unknown funcuons Lagrange funcuon Funcuons of several variables Reference books Gelfand I M and Fom1n S V Calculus of variations (Prentice Hall 1963) Sh1lov G E Mathematical analysis a special course (Pergamon 1965) Bliss G A Calculus of variations (Mathemaucal Assoc of Am 1962) Bliss G A Lectures on the calculus of variations (Chicago Univ Pr 1947) L1ustern1k L A Shortest paths (Pergamon 1964) Lavrent ev M A Variational methods for boundary value problems for systems of elliptic equations (Noordhoff 1963) Akh1ezer N I The calculus of variations (Blaisdell 1962)

Untts 3

67365 LINEAR THEORY OF ELASTICITY DrCRARao

Level Thud year Durauon Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week Pre requisite 67351 Continuum mechanics

Two d1mens1onal problems-Plane strain and Plane st1ess Any s stress funcuon Soluuon of the b1harmon1c equation Apphcauons Three dimensional problems Vanauonal Methods

Reference books Muskhehshv1h N I Some basic problems of the mathematical theory of elasticity (Noordhoff 1963) Sokolntkoff I S Mathematical theory of elasticity 2nd eel (Mc.Graw Hill 1956)

Units 3

67332 INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONAL RESEARCH I Dr D K Kulshrestha

Level Thud year Duration Term II Class Contact ~ lectures and I tutorial a week Pre requ1s1te 65251 Probab1ltty and Stausucs I

Inventory Control Determ1nist1c models Probab1hstic models Dynamic Programming models Forecasting Replacement Capual equipments Non maintainable ttems Staffing problems Miscellaneous replacement problems Scheduling Processing n Jobs through m machines The travelhng salesman problem Reference books Ackoff R L and Sas1en1 M W Fundamentals of operations research (Wtley 1968) H1lher F S and Lieberman G J Introduction to operations research (Holden Day 1968)

Units 3

67333 INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONAL RESEARCH II Dr D K Kulshrestha

Level Thud year Durauon Term III Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutonal a week Pre requisites 67331 Linear Programming and 65251 Probabihty and Statistics I

Topics of Games Theory Infintte games Two person general sum games Linear programming approach to the solutton of matnx games

422

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Queueing Theory Poisson amval and exponential service times Poisson arnvals and Erlang service umes channels 1n parallel channels in senes Pollaczek Kh1ntch1ne formula for expected wa1ung ttme Rehabthty Theory Measures of dependab1hty Parallel and Senes systems Redundancy Force of mortahty Non maintainable systems Theory of maintenance

Refetence books Ackoff R L and Sas1en1 M W Fundamentals of operations research (Wiley 1968) H1lher F S and Lieberman G ] Introduction to operations research (Holden Day 1968)

Units 2 Level Third or fourth year Duration One term

65317 SAMPLING THEORY Dr N A C Cressie

Class Contact 2 lectures a week Pre requtsttes 65311 Stat1sucal Inference I and 65312 Stat1st1cal Inference II The role of samphng theory Simple random sampling esumat1on of populatton charactensucs esumauon of sample sIZe subpopulauons esumators for totals proporuons Double Sampling The ratio esumate bias Linear regression large sample approx1mat1ons Sttauf1ed random sampling m1n1mum variance allocation relative prec1s1on of esumates Cluster samphng Acceptance Samphng Reference book Cochran W G Sampling techniques 2nd ed (Wiley 1963)

Unus 3

67337 DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND NETWORKS Dr D K Kulshrestha

Level Third of fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week Pre requ1s1tes 63116 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AI or 63221 D1££erent1al and Integral Calculus Bii 65251 Probability and Stausucs I Dynamics Programming Baste Theory-General approach Mulustage problem Serial multistage dec1s1on system Decompos1uon-addtt1ve returns Terminal opum1zauon Decision tree and the principle of opt1mahty Generalised decomposition Recursive equauons for final state and 1n1ual frnal state opum1zation Baste Computations-General scheme Opum1zauon with ftnue number of states Arbarary monoton1cally increasing convex return functions Lagrange mulupher and Kuhn Tucker cond1uons M1n1mizat1on of maximum return Addiuve and muluphcauve objective functions and constraints Sens1uv1ty analysts Integer opt1m1zat1on Computattonal Reftnements-F1bonacc1 search Coarse gnd approach Generahzed Lagrange multtpher method State variable reduction used Lagrange mult1phers Risk and Uncertainty-Opumizauon under nsk Markovian dec1s1on processes Dynamic Programming Formulauon of Examples-Networks Inventory control Rehabthty Allocauon and Scheduhng Networks Maximal Flow·s-Introducuon Max flow and min cut theorem Labelhng method for maximum flow Relauon between hnear programming and network flows Shortest Chains and M1n1mal Cost Flows-Shortest chains Decompos1uon algorithm M1n1mal cost flows M1n1mum cost improvement of an ex1sung network

Reference books Hu T C Integer programm1ng and network flows (Addison Wesley 1969) Nemhauser G L Introduction to dynamic programming (Wiley 1966)

423

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Fourth Year Topics

The school of Mathemaucal Sciences and the DepartmenlS of Pure Mathemaucs Applied Mathematics Computing Science and Stausucs of the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide collaborate in a JOint programme for fourth year honours students Students registered at enher University attend a selecuon of courses offered at each 1nstttut1on Each student ts allocated to a supervisor who wtll advise on the choice of curriculum A selection from the following topics will be offered by the School of Mathematical Sciences in 1978

61406 HONOURS SEMINAR IN PURE MATHEMATICS Professor B Abrahamson

Untts 8 Level Fourth year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact 2 hours a week

60400 HONOURS SEMINAR IN DIDACTIC PROBLEMS OF MATHEMATICS

Units 4 Level rourth year Durauon Whole academic year Contact l hour a week Pre requ1sue At least third year standing in Mathematics

The seminar will 1nvest1gate the phllosophtcal analysis from the standpoint of advdnced mathematics of vanous didacttcal problems tn mathemaucs

Reference books rreudenthal H Malhemat1cs as an educational lash (D Reidel 1973) Gnfhths H B and Howson A G Mathematics society and curricula (Cambndge 1974)

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration Term I

63411 TOPICS IN COMPLEX ANALYSIS Professor G I Gaudry

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1sues 63311 Complex Analysts A or 63321 Complex Analysts B and 63313 Integration Theory

Conformal mapping the Riemann mapping theorem Picard theorems Approx1mauon by polynomials and rauonal functions Runge s theorem Weierstrass factonzauon theorem Mittag Leffler theorem Reference books Ahlfors L V Complex analysis 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1966) Cartan H Elementary theory of analytic functions (Addison Wesley 1963) Rudin W Real and complex analysis (McGraw litll 1966) Saks S and Zygmund A Analytic functions 3rd eel (Elsevier 1971)

424

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Unas 4 Level Fourth year Durauon Term III

63453 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS Dr P G Dodds

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisites 63362 Elementary Hilbert Space Techniques

Linear topological spaces Hahn Banach theorems convex spaces Banach spaces Dual spaces and duahty theory Linear mappings Batre category theorem barrelled spaces Banach Steinhaus theorem Theorems of Alaoglu Goldsttne Krein Milman Open mapping and closed graph theorems Weak compactness weakly compact operators

Reference book Robertson A P and Robertson W J Topological vector spaces 2nd ed (Cambridge Umv Pr 1973)

Units 4

63463 ADVANCED HILBERT SPACE TECHNIQUES Dr P G Dodds

Level Fourth year Durauon One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisite 63312 Founer analysis 63352 Elementary Hilbert Spdce Techniques

Linear (unbounded) transformauons in Htlbert Space closed Henuan self ad101nt transformations defect indices Cayley transform spectral resoluuon of self ad101nt transformations Analytical theory of semi groups representatton by means of 1nf1nitesimal generator Stones theorem Apphcat1ons to stochasuc processes and to the equauons of evoluuon the d1££us1on equation the wave equation Schrodinger equation Linear passive network theory causahty tn Hilbert space hnear causal and passive n ports relations between causality and pass1vtty ume invariance frequency response faltung representation physically reahzable scattenng matrices impedance and admittance matrices

Reft"rence books Szokefalvi Nagy B Speklraldarstellung linearer Transformationen des Hiberlschen Raumes (Springer Verlag 1967) Yoshula K. Functional analysis, 4th ed (Springer Verlag 1965)

Units 4

63472 CONVEXITY AND OPTIMIZATION Professor I Kluvanek

Level Fourth year Durauon One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisites 67303 Calculus of vanat1ons

Convex sets and convex cones tn vector spaces N armed vector spaces examples inner product spaces Duahty extension and geometnc form of Hahn Banach theorem separauon of convex sets Optimuauon of functionals local theory Calculus of vanattons global theory convex and concave functionals con1ugate functions dual opumizauon problems Min Max theorem of Game theory Constrained opttmizatton positive cones and convex mappings Lagrange mult1phers sensiUvlty duahty local results for equahty constraints Kuhn Tucker theorem Iterative methods of opum1zation methods for solving equauons steepest descent method methods for solving consta1ned problems Remarks on newer theories of economic equ1hbnum

Reference book Luenberger D G Optimization by vector space methods (Wiley 1969)

425

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration Term I

61411 GROUP THEORY Dr ] W Wamsley

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1s1te 61311 Algebra I Solvable and nilpotent groups free groups group representations

Reference books Hall Marshall The theory of groups (Macmillan 1964) MacDonald I D The theory of groups (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1968)

63449 TOPICS IN DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS Professor I Kluvanek

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duratton One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requislle 63313 lntegrauon Theory

This course will deal with topics from the theory of ordinary and partial differenual equauons at an advanced level

Units 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

63471 CONTROL THEORY Professor I Kluvanek

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisites 63222 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus Biii 67303 Calculus of vanauons

Examples of Control Problems Formulation of Control Problems relauonsh1p with the Calculus of Vanations Existence theory with convexlly assumptions Existence without convextty The maximum Principle and some of tts apphcat1ons Time optimal control bang bang pr1nc1ple Examples Problems of reahzat1on

Reference book Berkovlt.z L D Optimal control theory (Spnnger Verlag 1974)

Units 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

61427 MATHEMATICAL LOGIC Dr R ] Baxter

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1s1te 61313 Algebra III

Syntax and semantics of formal languages Model theory of hrst order languages The ultraproduct construcuon Construction of models wtth specific properties apphcat1ons to algebra and analysis

Reference book Bell J L andSlomson AB Modelsandultraproducts anintroduclion(NorthHolland 1969)•

426

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Unus 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

61499 SET THEORY Dr R ] Baxter

Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Topics selected from the following Cardinal and ordinal numbers axiomatic set theory the axiom of choice and its equivalents point set theory foundanons of set theory

Reference book Kuratowski K and Mostowski A Set theory (North Holland 1968)

Unus 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term

65421 CONTINGENCY TABLES Professor j N Darroch

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisite 65313 Stat1sucal Inference III

Syllabus to be selected from the follo\v1ng Bnef discussion of two dunens1onal tables Muluphcauve models for three and mulu dimensional tables Responses and factors General tnteracuons Maximum hkehhood est1matton Likelihood rauo tests x2 tests and exact tests Sequences of hypotheses Markov fields cond1t1onal independence decomposable models Add1t1ve models Iterative scahng Caphlre recapture as a 2k table

65422 MATHEMATICAL PROBABILITY

Unlls 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Dr M ]111na

Pre requ1s1te 65351 Random Vanables

Construcuon of measures for stochasuc processes (Kolmogorov theorem) cont1nu1ty of 1ra1ectories and related problems cond1uonal probab1hnes and expectauons d1Herent kinds of convergence of random variables stochastic integrals martingales and some apphcat1ons (strong law of large numbers der1vauves of measures)

Units 4

65423 ROBUSTNESS AND DATA ANALYSIS Dr N A C Cress1e

Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisite 65313 Stausucal Inference III

The course will develop bnefly the mathemaucal approach to robustness followed by P Huber deahng wnh M esttmauon and 1n£luence curves Then the emphasis wtll change to a more pracucal data analytic approach based on J Tukey s work at Princeton Un1versuy Examples of topics covered are the anthmeuc mean and students t l/J w technology order staust1cs and afhne generahzauons htung and regression resistant smoothing the 1ackkn1fe There 1s no recommended text material \Vtll be dra,vn from seminar notes and 1oumal articles

427

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Unns 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

61428 PROJECTIVE GEOMETRY Professor B Abrahamson

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisite 61313 Algebra III Algebraic pro1echve geometry of flats quadrics conics and higher curves Connecuons with the theory of groups non Euchdean geometry and the foundauons of geomeuy

Reference book Hodge W V D and Pedoe D Methods of algebraic geometry vols 1 and2 (Cambndge Univ Pr 1952 54)

Unns 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term

61417 GROUP REPRESENTATIONS Dr J W Wamsley

Class OJntact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1sue 61411 Group theory

The representation theory of hnue groups The symmetric group

Unus 4 Level Fourth year Durauon Term III

61437 DIFFERENTIABLE MANIFOLDS Dr B B Phadke

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisites 61243 Classical d1£ferenual geometry and 63351 Topology

General theory of d1£ferenuable manifolds tangent and cotangent bundles d1££erent1al forms and vector ftelds

Untts 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

61438 RIEMANNIAN GEOMETRY Dr B B Phadke

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1s1te 61437 D1fferent1able Manifolds R1emann1an and pseudo R1emann1an manifolds tensors connections geode'itCs curvature

Untts 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

65442 MARKOV PROCESSES II Dr M Jinna

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1s1te Markov Processes I

Markov process with a general state space Feller type Markov process therr structure

428

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

(exponential waiting times) more detatled study of the Poisson process queueing theory D1ffus1on processes physical ongins (Brownian mouon) Kolmogorov partial differenual equauons the Wiener process the Uhlenbeck Ornstein process absorbing and reflecung barriers

65417 NON-PARAMETRIC STATISTICS

Unas 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Dr M ]inna

Pre requisite 65313 Stat1st1cal Inference III

Rank tests of the hypotheses equality of two treatments and equahty of several treatments when obseivauons are not blocked blocked Most attenuon will be given to Wilcoxon type tests with emphasis on the treatment of ued ranks asymptotic nonnahty power under shift models asymptotic e££1c1ency The median sign Siegel Tukey Smunov Kruskal Walhs Fnedman Cochran tests will also be discussed'

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duratton One term

65439 STATIONARY TIME SERIES Professor J N Darroch

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1s1te 65333 Stochastic Processes II

Stnct sense and w1desense dehniuon Hilbert space of random vanables pro1ecuons the correlauon funcuon the spectral funcuon and the spectral densay the1r interpretation hnear filters elements of pred1ct1on theory estimauon of the correlauon funcuon and of the spectral denslly

Reference book IAglom A M An introduction to the theory of stationary random functions (Prenuce Hall 1962)

65449 BRANCHING PROCESSES

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Dr M ]irina

Pre requisite 65332 Stochastic Processes I

Gaitan Watson processes with one type of parucle degeneracy Yaglom hmit theorems Gahan Watson processes with n types of particles Gahan Watson processes with 1mmigrauon branching processes with a conunuous ume parameter d1£ferenual equations for generating functions age dependent branching processes

Units 4

65458 PROBABILITY LIMIT THEOREMS Dr M ]inna

Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week

429

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Pre requisite 65351 Random Variables

Convergence in d1str1buuon (weak convergence) convergence of characteristic funcuons central hmtt theorems for triangular arrays 1nfin1tely divisible d1str1but1on weak law of large numbers central hmtt theorems for some dependent random variables weak convergence of stochastic processes and Its apphcat1ons in stausucs

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duranon one term

67464 SIGNALS IN SYSTEMS Dr M ]1rina

Class Contact 3 lectures and l tutorial a week Pre requisues 65213 Probab1hty and Stattsttcs II and 63312 Fourier Analysis

Concept of a source of 1nformat1on Its characterisucs discrete sources Concept of a channel capacity of a channel Coding, general Shannon theorems special codes economy of a code Continuous signals ume domain analysis frequency domains analysts properues and characteristics of hnear filters non hnear filters Band hmtted signals sampling theorems other d1scretizat1ons t entropy Filtering and pred1ct1on

65466 HONOURS SEMINAR IN STATISTICS Dr M ]ir1na

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration Whole academic year Class Contact 1 hour a week

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term

63448 INTEGRAL EQUATIONS Professor I Kluvanek

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1s1tes 63212 Dtfferennal and Integral Calculus AIII or 63222 Dtfferenual and Integral Calculus Bill and 63242 D1fferenual Equations II

Integral equations as models for some phenomena Boundary value problems reduced to integral equations Volterra and Fredholm types Resolving kernel Neumann sertes Fredholm theorems

Reference books Lovitt W V Linear integral equations (Dover 1950) Mtkhlin S G Integral equations 2nd ed (Pergamon 1964) Tncom1 F G Integral equations (lntersctence 1957)

Untts 4

67437 TOPICS IN CONTINUUM MECHANICS Dr CR A Rao

Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisite 67365 Linear Theory of Elast1cay

Boundary value problems in Linear Elastodynamics-Wave propagation in sohds­Surface waves in homogeneous and layered med1a-d1scuss1on of comparauve

430

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

techniques-Haskell s Matnx methods the method of Helmholtz potenuals and the method of stress equations Problems 1nvolv1ng Sources

Reference books Brekhovsk1kh L M Waves in layered media (Academic 1960) r:,v1ng W M and others Elastic waves in layered Tnedia (McGraw Hill 1957) Kolsky H Stress waves in solids (Dover 1963)

Units 4 Level fourth year DurJt1on One term

67417 ASYMPTOTIC METHODS Professor I Kluvanek

Class Contact 3 lectures a 'veek

Asymptotic series 1n general The Euler Maclaurin formula Method of Laplace Steepest descents Asymptotic formulae for soluuons of d1£ferenual equauons Applications to the transcendental funcuons

Units 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

63447 POTENTIAL THEORY Professor I Kluvanek

Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Equations Of Laplace and Poisson and related equations Potenuals of mass d1stnbuuons Apphcauons of Greens formulas Denvatives of potentials of mass d1str1but1ons Poisson 1n1egral and us apphcauons Mean value theorem and its apphcauons The maximum pnnc1ple 1n general setting and its apphcat1011s Brelot and \Viener techniques

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duranon One term

67465 SYNTHESIS OF SYSTEMS Professor I Kluvanek

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 1utonal a week Pre requ1sues 61127 Algebra BI 61128 Algebra BII 63221 Differential and Integral Calculus BII and 76283 Electronics or a knowledge of elementary Circuit Theory

Sw1tch1ng cucu1ts Boolean algebra Boolean funcuons theu reahzauons and m1n1mal representations Normal forms Logical design Elements of reahzabtlny theory Causality Stability Hurwitz polynomials Pade approx1mants Elementary synthesis procedures Synthesis of one port net\vorks Elements of transfer funcuon synthesis Topics in filter design Wiener Hopf 1echn1que

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duranon One term

67418 APPROXIMATION THEORY Dr J Kautsky

Class Contact 3 lec1ures a week

Theoreucal background for me1hods used in numencal analysis Approximations in different funcnon spaces Tchebysheff type of approximation Approx1mauon with polynomials and 'vuh rauonal funcuons

431

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

67419 NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF INTEGRAL EQUATIONS Dr ] Kautsky

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisite 67213 Numencal Analysis II

Numencal soluuon of Fredholm equauons of the second kind using approx1mauon by step funcuons approx1mauon by quadrature formulae and approx1mat1on by degenerate kernels and orthogonal funcuon expansions Numerical solution of Fredholm equauons of the first kind by means of eigenfuncuons Numencal soluuon of non linear integral equauons

Unus 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

67427 FINITE DIFFERENCE METHODS Dr ] Kautsky

Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Net methods for the solution of ordinary d1fferent1al equations systems of ordinary d1fferenual equauons or partial d1fferenual equations Theory of difference equauons Accumulauon of round off errors A pnon and a postenon esumates Intervals analysts

67428 OPTIMISATION AND STABILITY OF NUMERICAL PROCESSES Dr ] Kautsky

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Asymptouc behaviour of numencal processes viewed both theoreucally and practtcally Influence of the representauon of numbers and operations \v1th them 1n computers Cnucal study of the efficiency and su1tab1hty of classical and modem numencal methods for solving problems in algebra ordinary d1fferenual equations parual d1fferenual equauons and/or integral equations Der1v1ng methods opumal with respect to given cond1uons

Unus 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One tenn

67467 THEORY OF ELASTICITY DrCRARao

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisites 67365 Linear Theory of Elasucuy

Unns 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

63477 ERGODIC THEORY Professor I Kluvanek

Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Classical dynamical systems L1ouv1lle s theorem Po1ncare s theorem on recurrence Problems of staust1cal mechanics Abstract dynamical systems Ergodic theorems Ergod1ctty Problems of class1hcat1on Spectral 1nvanants Entropy Problen1s of stabthty

432

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Reference book Arnold V I and Avez A Ergodic problems of classical mechanics (Ben1am1n 1968)

Units 4 Level Four th year Duration One term

61447 LATTICE THEORY Dr W H Cornish

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre rcquisue 61312 Algebra II

Posets lattices D1sttibuuv1ty modularity and complementation Lattice of ideals and congruences Relations between ideals and congruences Subdirect representations Pnme ideals Hull kernel topology Represcntauon and compacuflcauon theorems Dedekind Mac Neille compleuon Complete Boolean algebras A selecuon from either (1) current theory of varieties of distnbut1vepseudo complemented lattices or (2) modular and complemented modular latuces wuh arm at applications 1n nng and group theones and pro1ect1ve geometty

Reference books Szasz G Introduction to lattice theory 3rd ed (Academic 1963) B1rkhoff G Lattice theory 3rd ed (Amer Math Soc 1967) Gratzer G Lattice theory (Freeman 1972)

Untts 4 Level Fourth year Duranon One term

61448 TOPICS IN ALGEBRA Dr W H Cornish

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requisite 61313 Algebra III

A selection of topics in advanced algebra

Unus 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term

61449 APPLIED ALGEBRA Dr I W Wamsley

Class Contact 3 lectures a week Pre requ1stte 61313 Algebra III

A selection of topics in advanced algebra

Unus 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term

67447 NUMERICAL MODELLING DrTWSag

Class Contact 3 lectures a week

Numerical methods of solution of equations representing fluid systems F1nue difference methods for steady and time dependent suuauons Spectral methods in the atmosphere and closed regions Lagrangian and marker and cell techniques

433

SYLLABUSES-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

67471 CONTROL STRUCTURE AND ORGANIZATION Dr M P George//

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration One term Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week Pre requtsttes 67120 Data Structures and List Processing

Control structure and organ1zauon tn 1nformanon processing systems Topics include sequennal processes concurrent processes program structures process control hierarchical control heterarclucal control cooperating processes mutual exclusion synchron1zanon deadlock interprocess commun1cat1on global and local env1ronments data driven processes hypothesis driven processes pattern 1nvocauon demons procedural attachment frames CONNIVER and apphcauons 1n arllhc1al intelligence and data base management

Units 4 Level Fourth year Durauon One term

67472 OPERATING SYSTEMS Dr M P George//

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week Pre requ1s1tes 67471 Control Srructures and Organ1zanon

Computer operaung systems Topics include memory management virtual memory buffering interfacing commun1catton and interrupt handling channel management virtual conhgurauons mult1programm1ng operauon software execution software interprocess protection commun1cat1ons networks and muluorocessors mult1access1ng and mult1plex1ng batch and 1nteract1vemodes human eng1neenngaspects performance monitoring

Graduate Topics in Mathematics Graduate students may select fourth year topics and 1n certain circumstances thud year level topics also Certain topics given by the Departments of Mathemaucs and Statistics at the Un1vers1ty of Adelaide will also be available to them In addll1on there will be the follo\Vlng seminars each of which \VIII meet for one or l\VO hours a week for part or all of the year

GI SEMINAR IN ANALYSIS G2 SEMINAR IN ALGEBRA G3 SEMINAR IN GEOMETRY G4 SEMINAR IN FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS G5 SEMINAR IN STATISTICS GIO SEMINAR IN APPLIED MATHEMATICS

434

SCHOOL OF PHYSICAL SCIENCES Students are expected to procure the prescnbed edttJon of all set books \Vhere no echuon 1s prescribed they should procure the latest edition Those books 1nd1cated by an astensk (•) are available in paperback or student ed1t1ons The name of the staff member pnmanly responsible for a topic and to whom enqu1nes about the topic should be d1rected 1s shown 1n ualtcs below the topic utle

Interdisciplinary Topics

PERSPECTIVES IN PHYSICAL SCIENCE Unlts Nine topics are offered 1n 1978 :Cach topic has a we1ghung of 2 unus Pre requ1snes None

Tlus senes of topics 1s an extension of the topics previously listed wllh topic nu1nb<.rs 75 under 75110 Physics and Modern Man They are designed to provide •n understanding of some of the ma1or concepts and developments in chemistry and physics winch are related to soct.tl poht1cal and plulosoph1cal aspects of society The topics are non mathematical 1n character and no previous kno'\ ledge of science 1s assumed The topics consist of case studies h1ghhghung rhe basic science involved 1n the development of our understanding of the physical environment Essays tutonals and seminars will be used to develop these concepts and to show their relevance lo the development of modern society The 1une topics will be treated independently each occupying about half a term and compns1ng two lectures and one tu tonal (or seminar) a \Veek There will be no laboratory 'vork

First half of first term

70115 SPACE, TIME AND RELATIVITY Professor M H Brennan

The contnbuuons of Galileo Newton E1nste1n and others to our understanding of space t1n1c and motion

Reference book Einstein A Relativity the speczal and the general theory (Meli1uen 1964)

70132 MINERALS AND GEM STONES Professor D ] A<t Bevan

The external shape of crystals and us relauon to the 'lttracuve forces between atoms Occupancy of lattice sites Symmetry of thesuuc1u1e 'v1th1n solids Intcrst1ual and foreign atoms and their relauon to physical properties such as the colour of gem stones 'lnd inferences for sohd state devices

Reference book To be nouhed 1n first lecture

Se1 books and Tex1 books are requned read mg on which students may be tested Smd~nts are exptcted to ha~ediurown copKs o[ all books listed 1s Set books orl l'Xl books muluple cop1ts of thut books will not be ,iv,ulable 111 the Library Prehmmary readmg 1s readmg wh1d1 lhe smdenl 1s expected to have compkied before lhecommencemtnt of 1eachmg and on which he may at any ume be lesled Further read mg and Recommended read mg v. hen nm olhl'rn 1se spt'Clfll'd md1ca1e readmg which 1he studlnt Is expcctl'tl. IO do m lhe course of studymg the Set I.looks Rcfertnce books are bool.s which the smdent will fmd useful m tht course of studymg tht topics for winch 1hey arc sptc1hed

501

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Second half of first term

70117 PHYSICS TO SEE AND ENJOY -THE PHYSICS OF LIGHT

Dr A L McCarthy Optical physics has always held 'ln important place in the development o( our understanding of the physical \Vorld Opucal devices and techniques have been \Vldely used 1n sc1ennf1c expenments and 1n the world at large This topic will treat the phenomena and htstory of opncs 111 d way to provide a background £01 students to understand the social impact of this part of physics Reference books A reading ltst will be given 1n the first lecture

rirst half of second term

70114 MATTER AND ANTI-MATTER Dr I R A/nan

The evolutton of our undersrnnd1ng of the funda1nental constituents of matter the elementary particles will be traced up to the present The social and pohucal 1mphcauons of the funding of expensive sctcnuhc projects such 'ls accelerators to study elementary parncles will be discussed

Reference book Goutran R Parl1cles and accelerators (World University Library 1967)

70130 THE EXHAUSTION OF THE FOSSIL FUELS Professor] 0 M Bockns

C1v1hsauon since the 1ndustnal revoluuon has depended on ener~y obtained from coal and more tecently from 011 and natural gas The end of the supply 1snow 1n su~ht at least for the latter sources and thetr replacement by atomic and solar sources facci. dtfhculues which may have widespread repercussions for the hv1ng standards of affluent soc1ct1es Estimates of discovery rate the 1nethods used to pro1ect the maximum use rate D1scuss1on of several estimates for Lhe exhaustion umes Connection to 1.he rate of cconom1c expansion H1stortcal evidence of the ume necessary to make the technolog1cal changes Economics of the conversion of 011 to coal and atomic reactor building

Reference book Bockns J 0 M Environmental chemistry (Plenum 1977)

Second half of second term

70112 A REVOLUTION IN COMMUNICATION Dr ] Fletcher

The use of electrornagneuc rad1auon tn modem commun1cauons forms lhe theme of tlns topic Computers lasers 'lnd m1croc1rcuitry are some examples of developments which \VIII have a major impact on society

Reference book Sc1ent1£1c Amencan Communications (Freetn'ln 1974)

502

SYLLABUSI:S-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Fzrst half of thzrd term

70113 THE SKY AND BEYOND Dr P ] 0 Teubner

The 'ltmosphere pollution of the atmosphenc environment the e"plorat1on of the solar system stellar evolution cosmology Reference book Brennan L Explonng the cosmos (Lutle Brown 1973)

70131 CHEMISTRY IN THE MARKET PLACE Dr E McCoy

Chemistry provides one interface between basic aspects of sCience and the comforts of modern society The apphcat1ons of chemistry in industry 1n the manufacture of chemicals of textiles of synthetic foods and of pharmaceuticals is described

Reference book Selinger B Chemistry in the market place (AN U Centre for Adult r.ducanon 1974)

Second half of third term

70116 THE NUCLEUS MANS ULTIMATE SOURCE OF ENERGY Professor M H Brennan

Basic nuclear physics rad101sotopes 1n med1c1neand industry energy from nuclear fusion and fission the problem of limned world resources of energy

Reference books Abelson P H ed Energy use conservation and supply (Amencan Assoc1auon for the Advancement of Science 1974) Sc1enufic Amencan Energy and power (Freeman 1971)

General reference books for all topics Open Un1vers1ty Sczence and society (Open Un1vers1ty 1971) Phillips W B Physics for society (Addison Wesley 1971) Schroeer D Physics and its fifth dimension society (Addison Wesley 1972)

Untts 2~

70211 MECHANICS I Professor I E McCarthy

Pre requ1slles 76100 Physics I and either 63221 D1£ferenno.l and Integral Calculus Bii or 63321 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus All Three lectures and one tu tonal a week dunng second term

Linear and nonhnear oscillauons coupled oscillators Introductory Lagrangian mechanics, Pro1ecules Central field monon Rulherford scauenng Relauv1suc k1nemaucs Compton effect Non1nert1al frames of reference Staucs Syslems of particles

Set book Manon J B Classical dynamics of particles and systems 2nd ed (Academic 1970) Spiegel M R Schaum s outline of theory and problems of theoretical mechanics (McGraw Hill 1967)

503

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Unns 211

70212 MECHANICS 11 Dr R A D Byron Scott

Pre requ1snes 76100 Physics I 63116 Differential and Integral Calculus BI and 61128 Algebra Bil Three lectures and one tu tonal a week dunng thud term

Cartesian tensors and Orthogonal curv1hnear cO ordinates

Rigid body dynamics

Fluid dynamics

Units 2

70300 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE Dr B G Baker

Pre requ1snes 76100 Physics I and 71100 Chemistry I Two lectures a \Veek 10 1978 (and1n alternate years thereafter) This topic is normally taken in a Third Year Programme alternaung with 70314 The New Energy Sources

The environmental problem Pollution of the atmosphere controlhng emissions from motor vehicle exhausts Supersonic fhght the ozone layer noise Quanutallve methods in environmental problems Radioacttv1ty Depleuon of resources Non polluung technology for the future

Reference books Bockns J 0 M ed Environmental chemistry (Plenum 1977) Meado,vs D and others The limitations to growth (New Amencan Library 1972) Bockns J 0 M The electrochemistry of cleaner environments (Plenum 1973) Strauss W ed Air pollution control (Wiley Intersc1ence 1971)

70311 MATERIALS SCIENCE I Associate Professor H ] de Bruin

Untts 21i Three lectures a week dunng first term

An 1ntroducuon to the microscopic properues of matenals 1on1c covalent metalhc and van der Waals bonding cohesive energies dose packing and crystal geometry three dimensional latuces experimental methods of suucture determination suuctures of metals and a1loys (ordered and disordered) structure of amorphous matenals glasses polymers defects 10 sohds point hoe and plane defects An introducllon to the macroscopic properues of matenals elasucandplasucdeformatton of sohds strength and hardness - the role of dislocations Phase equ1Iibna the Phase Rule 1nvanantreact1ons the iron carbon system Phase transformations liquid soltd sohd solid nucleation kinetics of crystal growth temperalure ume transformation curves and m1crostructure

Reference books Barrett C R Nix W D and Tetelman A S The principles of engineering materials (Prenuce Hall 1973) Hutchison TS andBaud D C Thephys1csofeng1neerzngsolids1 2nded (Wiley 1968) Van Vlack L H Materials science for engineers (Addison \Vesley 1970)• Wulff ] ed Structure and properties of materials 4 vols (Wiley 1964 1966)• Moore W ] Physical chemistry 5th eel (Longman 1972)• Huheey J E Inorganic chemistry (Harper & Row 1972)

Unus 2

70312 MATERIALS SCIENCE II Associate Professor H j de Bruin

Pre requistte 70311 Materials Saence I Two lectures a \Veek dunng second term

504

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Structure and propertte.-, of polymers Composite theory and apphcauons In situ composites for control of physical properties of matenals Equ1hbnum phase diagrams sohd1hcauon prec1p1tauon processes dispersion strengthening martens1uc transformations In1roduct1on to relauonsh1p of mechanical and physical propertles to m1crostructure

Set book Guy A G lntroductzon to materials science (McGraw Hill 1972)•

Reference books Van Vlack L H Materials science for engineers (Addison Wesley 1970) Cottrell A H Mechanical properties of matter (Wiley 1964)

70313 MATERIALS SCIENCE Ill Associate Professor H J de Bruin

Units 2 Pre requisite 70312 Matenals Science II Two lectures a week dunng third term Elasnc anelastic v1scoelast1c and plastic behaviour of matenals Atomic mechanism of strengthening Fracture phenomena Envuonment sens1nve behaviour \Vet and dry corrosion degradation of polymers 1ITad1auon damage absorpuon induced embnttlement stress corrosion cracking hydrogen embnttlement Relauonsh1p of mechanical Jnd physical propernes to m1crostructure and tts control

Set book and Reference books as for Matenals Science II

Unlts 2

70314 THE NEW ENERGY SOURCES Professor] 0 M Bockns

Pre requtsttes 76100 Physics I and 71100 Chemistry I Two lectures a week 1n 1979 (and in alternate years thereafter) This topic 1s normally taken in a Part III Programme altemaung with 70300 Envuonmental Science

Evidence concerning the time needed to change a technology Time constants to the end of fossil fuels Greenhouse effect and 1ts feedbacks Dnect energy conversion 11ydro and geothermal sources Status of hsston breeders fusion Solar photovoltaic phototherm1c ocean thermal Hydrogen Economy Transportauon Australia

Reference books Kettan1 Ah Energy conversion (Addison \Vesley 1974) Bockns J 0 M Energy the solar hydrogen alternative (Aust NZ Book Co 1978) 5c1ent1hc Amencan Enerf{y and power (Freem'ln lY/l)

70321 SOLID STATE SCIENCE Professor] 0 M Bockns and Dr E Weigold

This is an 1nterdisc1phnary topic common to Part III programmes 1n Physics and Chemistry

Units 211 Pre requ1snes 76351 Stausucal Mechanics or 76351 Thennal Physics or7331 l Stat1st1cal Thermodynamics Three lectures a week dunng tlurd term Crystallography Bragg s Law Electronic states in sohds Kron1g Penney model bands Fermi surface D1electr1c and magneucproperues of solids Semiconductors Defects Cohesive energy of crystals Electronic and nuclear spectra

Set book Omar M Ah An introduction to solid state physics (Addison Wesley 1974)

505

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Reference books Blakemore J S Solid state physics (Saunders 1969) El hot R J and Gibson A F An introduction to solid state physics and 1tsapplicat1ons (Maamllan 1974) Katel C Introduction to solid state physics 4th ed (Wiley 1971) Ziman J M Principles of the theory of ~ol1ds 2nd ed (Cambndge Univ Pr 1972)

Crangle J The magnetic properties of solids (Edward Arnold 1977)• Coles B R and Caplin A D The electronic structure of solids (l::d,vard Arnold I 976)•

Untts 5

70391 CHEMICAL PHYSICS LABORATORY Dr B G Baker

An average of six hours a week throughoul the year in bodt lhe chemistry and physics laboralones third year level expenments selected 111 hne with the topics taken tn Programme P51

506

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Topics in Chemistry Enqutnes relating to Chemistry topics may be directed to the staff member named

Students who are uncertain about which first year level course 1n Chemistry ts most suitable for their needs are advised to discuss the matter with the Chemistry d1sc1phne co ordinator at the earhest opportuntty

Units 9

71100 CHEMISTRY I Professor] 0 M Brockrzs

Students taking Chemistry I \vho intend to proceed to one of the Programmes P5 P6 P7 or PS should read carefully In the Calendar the hst of pre requ1s1tes for these Prosrammec; The topic consists of three lectures three hours practical work and one tutorial or pre laboratory instruction each week throughout the year

The lectures deal with physical and chemical equ1hbna thermodynamics introductory electrocherrustry 1ntroduc.t1on to atomic theory and chemical bonding chemical reacuons and properttes exemphfying correlauons within the penod1c table and stereochem1stry of organic molecules fission and formation of covalent bonds and electronic theories of organic chemistry apphed to ahphat1c and aromauc molecules The laboratory work 1s designed to serve as an 1ntroducuon to inorganic chemtstry physical chemistry and organic chemistry

Set books Richards J H Cram D J and Hammond G S Elements of organic chemistry (McGraw Hill 1967)' Dickerson R E Gray H B and Haight G Chemical princzples, 2nd ed (Ben1amin 1974)

Reference books Eastwood F W Swan JM andYouatt J B Organicchemzstry Programs I 6(Soence Pr 1967)0

Heslop R B and Wild G M Sl units in chemistry (Apphed Science 1971)• Mahan B H Elementary chemical thermodynamics (Ben1am1n 1963)• Schaum D and Rosenberg J L Outline of theory and problems of college chem1stry (McGraw Hill 1972)0

Traynham J G Organic nomenclature a programmed introduction (Prenuce Hall 1966)' Worrall J and Worrall I J Introduction to valence theory (Macdonald 1969)*

Units 9

71101 INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY Dr M R Taylor

Pre requisites No pnor knowledge of chemistry or of any other science is assumed Two lectures and two tutorials per \veek for three terms plus n1ne3 hour practical sessions in Term II

This topic has been designed specifically for students who have not studied chemistry beyond elementary levels at secondary school or who have not studied chemistry al Matnculauon level in recent years and 15 normally available only to them Students who are excluded under this prov1s1on may qualify for entry to 71102 (see below) The subject matter ln the topic has been chosen and organised to provide students with a background of chemical knowledge to assist them wt th thetr studies in otherdisc1pltnes of the Un1vers1ty It will be of special value to students who are 1nsuff1c1ently prepared 1n chemistry to enter 71100 Chemistry I and who intend to proceed to a degree in the Schools of Biological Sciences (B A or B Sc ) Med1c1ne and some disc1phnes of Earth Sciences and Social Sciences

507

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

The topic does not provide entry to any second year chemistry programme Successful completion of the topic provides entry to 71100 Chemistry I or forexcepttonal students to some second and third year chemistry topics• when these are taken as part of a degree in another School or d1sc1phne This topic may not be taken concurrently with 71100 Chemistry I nor by those \'lho have taken 71100 Chemistry I

Set books Hunter R J Simpson P G and Stranks D R Chemical science (Science Pr 1976) Dickerson R E and Geis I Chemistry matter and the universe (Ben1amin 1976)

•A hst of these topics may be obtained from the d1sciphne coordinator

Units 6

71102 INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY A Dr MR Taylor

Pre requ1s1tes A knowledge of physics and mathematics at Matnculauon level or some knowledge of chemistry Two lectures and two tutonals per week 1n Terms II and III plus nine 3 hour pracucal sessions 1n Term II

This topic 1s not avatlable to students who have obtained a grade of C or above in chemistry at a recent matriculation exam1nauon This topic compnses Terms II and III of 71101 Introduction to Chemistry

Set books As for 71101

Units 6

71103 INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY B Dr MR Taylor

Pre requ1s1tes No pnor knowledge of chemistry or any other science 1s assumed Two lectures and two tutonals per week in Terms I and II plus nine 3 hour practical sessions d1v1ded between Term I and Term II Th ts topic ts avatlable only to first year medical students with the approval of the Boards of the Schools of Medicine and Physical Sciences and to students enrolled 1n a B A or a B Ed This topic may not be counted for credit towards a B Sc degree Thts topic compnses Terms I and II of 71101 lntroducuon to Chemistry

Set books As for 71101

Second Year Topics in Chemistry

Second Year topics 1n Chem1stryrequ1re?llOOChem1stryiasapre requisite except when othenv1se spec1£1ed

Untts 2

71291 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II (ORGANIC) Dr M ] Thompson

Six hours a week tn the chemistry laboratones in hrst term 11lustrat1ng expenmental techniques in chemistry with emphasis on Organic Chemistry

508

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Untts 2

71292 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II (PHYSICAL) Dr B Baker

Six hours a week 1n the chemistry laboratories 1n second term illustrating experimental techniques 1n chemistry with emphasis on Physical Chemistry

Set book Shoemaker D P and Garland C W Experiments in physical chemistry 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1974)

Units 2

71293 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY II (INORGANIC) Dr N ] Clark

Six hours a week in the chemistry laboratories in thud term illustrating expenmental techniques 1n chemistry with emphasis on Inorganic Chemistry

Units 3!1

72200 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Dr D W Adcock & Dr E W Della

Two lectures per week and one tutorial every week throughout first 'lnd second terms deahng with the electronic theory of structure and reacuon mechanism in organic chemistry and synthetic procedures Set book Stre1twe1ser A and Heathcock C H Introduction to organic chemistry (Colher Macmillan 1976)•

Reference books Noller C R Chemistry of organic compounds (Saunders 1969) Breslo\v R Organic reaction mechanisms 2nd ed (Benjamin 1969)• Roberts J D and Caseno M C Basicpnnc1ples of organic chemistry (Ben1am1n 1965) Hartshorn S R Aliphatic nucleophillc substitution (Cambridge Univ Pr 1973)• Morrison R T and Boyd R N Organic chemistry 3rd ed (Allyn & Bacon 1973)•

Unus 2

72201 ORGANIC STRUCTURE DETERMINATION Dr M I Thompson

Two lectures per week and one tutorial every week in third term

This topic deals with the practical aspects of structure determ1natton of organic compounds using ultrav1olet infrared nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy and mass spectrometry The emphasis ts on interpretation and 1nstmmentauon

Set book Pankh V M Absorption spectroscopy of organic molecules (Addison Wesley 1974)

Reference books Dyer J R Organic spectral problems (Prentice Hall 1972)• Baker A J and others More spectroscopic problems in organic chemistry (Heyden 1967)0

Dyke S F and others Organic spectroscopy an introduction (Penguin 1971)• Pasto D J and Johnson C R Organic structure deterwunat1on (Prentice Hall 1969) Hill H C Introduction to mass spectrometry 2nd ed (Heyden 1972)

509

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units 2~

73200 CHEMICAL DYNAMICS Professor f 0 M Bockris

Three lectures a week dunng second term

The kinetic molecular model of gases dtstnbut1on of molecular energies colhs1ons v1scos1ty effusion The van der Waals equauon Reacuon rates expenmental methods simple rate laws effect of temperature on rate theories of reacuon rates reaction mechanisms - 1nterpretat1on of rate laws reactions in solution catalysis reactions at electrodes Electrolyte solutions conductance transport numbers Collo1dal systems electrok1neuc phenomena

Set book Moore W J Physical chemistry 5th ed (Longman 1972)•

Reference books Harris G M Chem1cal kinetics (Heath 1960) Bockns J 0 M Bonc1ocat N and Gutmann F An introduction to electrochemical science (Wykeham 1974) Laidler K J Theories of chemical reaction rates (McGraw Hill 1969) Moelwhyn Hughes E A Physical chemistry (Pergamon 1966) Bockns J 0 M and Reddy A K Modern electrochem1stry vol I (Plenum 1973)

Unus 2~

73201 THERMODYNAMICS Dr D B Matthews

Three lectures a week dunng third term

The fust law and thermochem1stry state funcuons temperature heat work enthalpy heat capacity isothermal ad1abauc and reversible processes heats of reacuon formauon dtluuon and solution standard states latent heat bond energies The second law entropy and free energy the equihbnum crttenon reversible processes heat engines and efficiency of energy conversion Introduct1on to stat1sucal thermodynamics thermodynamic quant1ues tn terms of the paruuon function thermal and conf 1gurat1onal entropy Homogeneousequ1hbna fugac1ty standard states acuv1ty Chaogesofstate the phase rule Solutions ideal soluuons Raoult slaw solub1hty colhgauve properues real solutions Henry s law Heterogeneous equihbna open systems chemical potential hqu1d hqu1d hquid vapour sohd liquid and sohd vapour equihbna adsorption Electrochemical equllibna

Set book Moore W J Physical chemistry 5th ed. (Longman 1972)•

Reference books Nash L K Elements of classical and statistical thermodynamics (Addison Wesley 1970) Denbigh K The principles of chemical equilibrium (Cambndge Univ Pr 1964)

Units 2~

73203 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY Dr N f Clark

Three lectures a week and one tutonal every second week dunng thud term

The emphasis of this toptc is on broad general pnnc1ples of the comparative chemistry of the elements rather than the detailed descriptive chemistry of 1nd1v1dual compounds The areas to be discussed 1n the topic are as follovvs bonding and stability of assembhes of atoms empu1cal pred1ct1ons based on electronegauviues redox properues of the non metals the halogens interhalogens and related species oxygen class1f1cat1on of oxides aqueous soluuons of oxides oxyac1ds chemical processes in non aqueous solvents the di.emistry of boron nitrogen and sulphur trans1t1on metal chemistry including stereo chemistry and isomerism complex ions in solution stability constants electrostatic

510

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

crystal held theory for octahedral and tetrahedrd.l cases magneuc phenomend (high and lo\v spin complexes) 'lnd molecular orbital descnptions of metal ligand bonding

Reference books Cotton E A and Wilkinson G W Basic inorganic chemistry (Wiley lntemat1onal 1977) Couon E A and W1Ik1nson G W Advanced1norgan1cchem1stry 3rded (lntersc1ence 1972) Huheey J [. Inorganic chemistry (1-Iarper &: Row 1972) Ph1lhps C S G and Wtlhams R J P Inorganic chemistry vols I and II (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1966)

Units 2~

73204 MOLECULAR PROPERTIES Dr E 1\-fcCoy

Three lectures a week dunng second term

Quantum chemistry and Its application to simple problems Approximate methods Atomic structure the orbital concept and the penod1c table angular momentum .tnd the vector model of the 'ltom Molecular structure valence bond theory hybnd17atlon resonance molecular orbuals and the structure of simple molecules The electncal properties of molecules polar17at1on polanzabihty dipole moments refractive index Molecular spectroscopy rotational v1brat1onal and electronic energy levels the spectra of small molecules lVIolecular symmetry

Sel book Huheey J E Inorganic chemistry (Harper & Row 1972)

Reference books Moore W J Physical chemistry 5th ed (Longman 1972) Pnnentel G C and Spratley R D Chemical bonding clarified through quantum mechanics (I-lolden Day 1970)• 0 o,vyer 1\1 F Kent J E Brown R D Valency (Monash Univ 1975)• Cotton F A Chemical applications of group theory 2nd ed (Intersc1cnce 1971)

Units 2~

73205 BIOINORGANIC CHEMISTRY Dr N ] Clark and Dr M R 1 aylor

Three hours per \VCek dunng third term

Pre requ1sue 71100 Chemistry I or a sausfactory performance 111 71101 Introducuon to Chemistry

The aim of tlus topic is to provide a basic introduction to the chemical properties of metal tons commonly found in biological systems and to relate these properties to theu b~ochem1cal funcuon Areas to be covered include trans1t1on element chemistry stcreochem1stry and 1somensm complex ions 1n soluuon stability constants electrostauc crystal held theory for octahedral and tetrahedral cases magnetic phenomena (high and lo\v spin complexes) metal hgand bonding and mechanisms of ligand subst1tut1on reacuons group IA and IIA elements the role of metal ions 111 metalloproteinsand metal activated enzymes the hard and soft acid base pnnctple LFSE and the entaucstate model syste1n studies reacuv1ty of coordinated hgands 1cdox and oxygen earners haemoglobin and syntheuc systems the 1nteracuon of metal ions \Vtth nucleic acids

Reference books Hughes M N The znorganu chemistry of biological processes (Wiley 1972) \V1lhams 0 R The metals of life (van Nostrand Reinhold 1971)

511

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units 4J.i

Tlnrd Year Topics in Chemistry

71392 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY lllA Professor] 0 M Bockrzs

Laboratory work illusrraung the basic expcnmental methods and techniques of chemistry Expenments appropriate to lecture topics occupying 6 hours a week throughout the year

Set book Shoemaker D P and Garland C W Expenmenls in physical chemistry 3rd ed (McGra\v Hill 1974) Chase G D and Rabinowitz J L Pnnciples of radio isotope methodology 3rd ed (Burgess 1975)

Units 3

71393 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY lllB Professor] 0 M Bockns

Laboratory work illustrallng the basic experimental methods and techniques of chemistry Experiments appropriate to lecture topics occupying 6 hours a week for two terms

Set book See 71392 Chemistry Laboratory IIIA

Units Bi

71394 CHEMISTRY LABORATORY lllC Professor J 0 M Bockns

Laboratory work illustraung the basic experiment<1l methods and techniques of chemistry Expenments appropnate to lecture topics occupying 6 hours a week for one term

Set book See 71392 Chemistry Laboratory IJIA

Units 2

72310 INTRODUCTION TO HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY Professor] W Clark Lewis

Pre requ1s1tes 72200 Organic Chemistry and 72201 Organic Structure Determ1nauon

Two lectures a week 1n first term on the main features of the chemistry and aromat1c1ty of five and stx membered heterocycles conta1n1ng nitrogen oxygen or sulphur electroph1hc and nucleophihc subsutuuon 1n heterocychc systems reactive methyl groups 1ndole benz1midazole qu1nohne qu1noxahne and similar benzologues pynm1d1nes purines ptendines cyclic amides and a bnef treatment of saturated heterocycles The topic deals with the essenual features of the many heterocychc nng systems important 10 organic chemistry and b1ochem1stry

Reference books Acheson R M An 1ntroducllon to the chemistry of heterocyclic compounds 2nd ed (Interscience 1967) Badger G M Chemistry of helerocyclic compounds (Academic 1961)•

Unus 2

72311 AROMATICITY Dr E W Della

Pre requisues 72200 Organic Chemistry and 72201 Organic Srructure Detenn1nauon

512

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Tv.•o lectures a week dunng second term deahng Wlth the Huck.el (4n + 2) rule and the apphcauon of perturbauon molecular orbital theory to monocychc and polycyclic conjugated hydrocarbons metallocenes and other trans1uon metal complexes

Reference book Gtll G B and W1lhs M R Pencycltc reactions (Chapman & Hall 1974)

Units 2

72312 PHYSICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Dr W Adcock

Pre requisites 72200 Organic Chemistry 72201 Organic Structure Determinauon and 72311 Aromauclly

T\IJO lectures a \Veek dunng thud term deahng with general principles of chemical reacuvuy 1n organic systems hnear free energy relauonsh1ps subsutuent effects and pencychc reactions

Reference books Giihom R D Introduction to phys1cal organic chemistry (Addison Wesley 1970) Johnson C D The Hammett equation (Cambridge Univ Pr 1973) Lehr R r: and Marchand A P Orbital symmetry_ (Academic 1972)• Dewar M J S and Dougherty R C The PM 0 theory of organic chemistry (Plenum Pr 1975)'

Unlls 2

72313 CHEMISTRY OF FREE RADICALS Dr M ] Thompson

Pre requisites 72200 Organic Chemistry and 72201 Organic Structure Determ1nat1on Two lectures a week in fust term dealing with free radical halogenat1ons homolyttc aromauc substitution free radical re arrangements carbenes and nitrenes

Reference book Pryor W A Free radicals (McGraw Hill 1966)

Unus 2

72314 MOLECULAR REARRANGEMENTS Professor j W Clark Lewis

Pre requ1s1tes 72200 Organic Chemistry and 72201 Organic Structure Determ1nauon

Two lectures a week dunng second term deahng \vllh carbon skeleton re arrangements 1nvolv1ng carbonium ions migrations to electron def1c1ent nitrogen and oxygen atoms and pencychc reacuons typical organic photo chemical processes and their syntheuc uuhty the conservation of orbital symmetry Reference book DePuy C H and Chapman 0 L Molecular reactions and photo chemistry (Prentice Hall 1972)'

Units 2

72315 MODERN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS Professor I W Clark Lewis

Pre requ1sues 72200 Organic Chemistry and 72201 Organic Structure Determtnauon

Two lectures a \Veek 10 third term deahngw11h the chemistry '1.nd synthet1capphcauons of carban1ons yhds enam1nes and selected ox1dauon and reducuon procedures

Reference book Carruthers W Some modern methods of organic synthesis (Cambndge Univ Pr 1971)•

513

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units 2

72316 ORGANOMETALLIC CHEMISTRY Dr W Adcock

Pre requ1snes 72200 Organic Chem1s1ry and 72201 Organic Structure Determ1nallon

Two lectures a week dunng thud term covering the structure bonding preparation and synthetic apphcauons of organometallic compounds of laluum sodium magnesium boron and alum1n1um

Reference book Coates G E Green M L H Powell P and Wade K Principles of organometallic chemistry (Methuen 1968)•

Unlls 2

73310 REACTION KINETICS Dr N ] Clark

Pre requ1slles 73200 Chemical Dynamics 73201 Thermodynamics 73202 S1ructure of Mauer or 76231 Quantum Mechanics I

Two lectures a \vcek dunng third term

Reactions in solution proton transfer reacnons kineuc isotope effects redox reactions photochemical reacuons crys1al growlh homogeneous catalysis non equ1hbnum thermodynamics Introducuon lo the lheory of rcacuon rates collision theory and acuvated stale theory potential energy surfaces Kinetic aspects of 1ntcrfac1al processes Fast reactions

Reference books Amdur I and Hammes G G Chemical kinetics (McGraw Htll 1966) Bamford C H and Tipper C F I-I Comprehensive cheniical kinetic-; vol II (Elsevier 1969) liarrts G M Chemical kinetics (Heath 1966) Laidler K J Theories of chemical reaction rates (McGraw Hill 1969)

Units 2~

73311 STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS Dr B Baker

Pre requ1s1tes 73201 Thermodynamics and 73202 Slructureo£Maueror76231 Quantum Mechanics I Three lectures a week dunng first term

Review of classical thermodynamics Calculanon and 1abulat1on of lhermodynam1cdata Relauonship between classical and stat1sucal thermodynamics The parouon function for translauon the perfect monatom1c gas Gas phase equ1hbna The perfect monatom1c crystal The thud law of lhermodynam1cs companson of c11.ss1cal and stausucal calculations of entropy Parut1on funcuons for rotauon and v1brauon the perfect d1atom1c gas Chemical potential heterogeneous t'C}Uthbna Real gases liquids solutions adsorption The grand paruuon funcuon quantunl statlsllcs eleclrons 111

metals

Reference books Denbigh K The principles of chemical equiltbriu,n (Cambndgc Univ Pr 1971) Gasser R P H and Richards W G Entropy and energ} levels (0 UP 1974)• Knuth E L l11lroduct1on to statistical thermodynamics (McGrl.W Ihll 1966) Moore W J Physical chemistry 5lh cd (Longman 1972)

Units 2

73314 ADSORPTION AND CATALYSIS Dr B G Baker

Pre requ1s1tcs 73200 Chemical Dynamics 73201 Thermodynamics Two lectures .i. 'veek dunng second term 1n 1978 (and 1n alteml.le }Cars the1eJfter)

514

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Charactenzat1on of sohd surfaces chem1sorpuon of gases on sohds methods of surface analysis K1neucs of surface reactions mechanisms of catalysed reacuons

Reference books Bond G C Heterogeneous catalysts principles and applications (0 UP 1974) Anderson J R ed Chem1sorpt1on and reactions on metallic films (Academic 1971) Thomson S J and Webb G Heterogeneous catalysis (Ohver & Boyd 1968)

Unlts 2

73315 SURFACE SCIENCE Dr B G Baker

Pre requ1sttes 73201 Thermodynamics Two lectures a week dunng second term in 1979 (and 1n alternate years thereafter)

Thermodynamics of sohd gas and hqu1d gas interfaces Surface tension and 1nterfac1al tension the solid liquid interface contact angles Absorpuon on sohds from gas phase and solution

Reference books Aveyard R and Haydon D A An introduction to the principles of surface chemistry (Cambndge Univ Pr 1973) SomorJat G A Principles of surface chemistry (Prenllce Hall 1972)

Units 2

73317 CRYSTAL CHEMISTRY Professor D ] M Beuan

Two lectures a week dunng first term Three d1mens1onal symmetry the descnpuon of important structure types 1n metals alloys binary and ternary oxide systems (1nclud1ng silicates) and chalcogentdes suucture relat1onsh1ps and the relat1onsh1ps between structure and properties

Reference books Evans R C An introduction to crystal chemistry 2nd ed (Cambndge Univ Pr 1964) Galasso F S Structure and properties of inorganic solids vol 7 Monographs in solid state physics (Pergamon 1970) International Union of Crystallography International tables for X ray crystallography vol I (Kynoch 1965) Krebs H Fundamentals of 1norgan1c crystal chemistry (McGraw Hill 1968) Wells A F Structural inorganic chemistry 4th ed (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1975) Adams D M Inorganic solids (Wtley 1974)

Units 2

73318 COMPUTING METHODS IN CHEMISTRY Associate Professor H I de Bruin

Pre requisites Sludents are expected to be conversant with FORTRAN IV programming language An introductory course will be given by the Computer Centre dunng onentauon \veek Two lectures a week dunng hrst term Introducuon to computer programming and its apphcauon to problems of phys1ochem1cal interest numencal methods of integration least squares curve fatting solunon of simultaneous equanons 1terauon recursion matnx mult1phcat1on and apphecl stansucs

Reference books Butler J N and Bobrow D G The calculus of chemistry (Ben1am1n 1965)• revision of pre requ1s1te matenal Dickson T R The computer and chemistry (Freeman 1975) Healy J J and Debruzz1 D J Basic Fortran IV programming self 1nstruclzonal manual and text (Addison Wesley 1968)•

515

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Young H D Statisttcal treatment of experimental data (McGraw Hill 1962) McCalla T R Introduction to numerical methods and Fortran programming (Wiley 1967)

Unns 2

73321 ELECTROCHEMISTRY (IONICS) Professor] 0 M Bockns

Pre requisites 73201 Thermodynamics Two lectures per week dunng third term in 1978 (and 1n allernate years thereahcr)

Introductton evolution of electrochemical science electrochem1stry and energy electrochem1stry and the envuonment science technology and time Ion solvent 1nteract1ons solvat1on numbers d1electncpolansat1on in solution ion interactions ionic transport 1on1c atmosphere protons in solution ac1d1ty strnctureof 1on1c liquids l1qu1d silicates

Set book Bockns J 0 M and Reddy A K Modern electrochem1stry vol I (Plenum 1973)

Reference books Bockns J 0 M and Fredle1n R A A workbook of electrochem1stry (Plenum 1973) Bockns J 0 M and Draz1c D Electrochemical science (T1ylor & Francis 1974) Gutmann F and Bloom H Electrochem1stry the last 30 years and the next thirty years (Plenum 1977)

Units 2

73322 ELECTROCHEMISTRY (ELECTRODICS) Professor] OM Bockrts and Dr D B Afalthews

Pre requ1s1tes 73201 Thermodynamics Two lectures per week 1n 1979 (and 1n alternate years thereafler) dunng the thud term

Electr1f1ed interfaces the thermodynamics of electr1hed interfaces structure of electrified interfaces adsorption isotherms con1peu11ve adsorpuon qu1ntum met.han1t.s of diarge transfef transient behaVtour mass transfer determ1rlit1on of reaction mechal11sm electrocatalys1s metal depos1uon and recrystalhsauon hydrogen evoluuon oxygen reducuon technology aspects of electrochem1stry

Set book Bockns J 0 M and Reddy A K Modern electrochemrstry vol II (Plenum 1973)

Reference books Bockns J 0 M and Fredle1n R A A workbook of electrochemistry (Plenum 1973) Bockns J 0 M and Nazy Z Electrochemistry for ecologists (Plenum 1974) Bockns J 0 M Rand D and Welch B Trends in electrochemistry (Plenum 1977)

Unlls 2\.i

73325 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY Dr M R Taylor

Pre requisites Either 73202 Inorganic Chemistry or 73205 B101norgan1c Chemistry and 73204 Molecular Properties Tluce lectures a week dunng second term

Nuclear chemistry nuclear stabthty of the elements semi emptncal b1nd1ng energy equation and theory of p decay Nuclear resonance absorpuon Nuclear reactions f1ss1on Interacnon of radiation and matter Detection <1.nd measurement of radiation Chemistry of the lanthan1des and acun1des Trans1l1on metal chemistry molecular orbital descnptton of metal ligand bonding spectra or coord1nauon compounds the spectrochem1cal senes complexes w1th.X acceptor and donor ligands low ox1dauon states of trans1uon mct,ls synergH. bondutg metal carbonyls olefin 1.,omplexes mctallo1.,enes metal clusters Coord1nat1on model of non aqueous solvents

516

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Set book Huheey J E Inorganic chemistry (Harper & Row 1972)

Reference books Couon F A and W1lk1nson G Advanced inorganic chemistry 3rd cd (Intersc1cnce 1972) Phillips C S G and \V1lhams R J P Inorganic chemistry vols I and II (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1966) Chase G D and Rab1nowaz J L Principles of radioisotope methodology 3rd cd (Burgess 1967) Duncan J F and Cook G B Isotopes in chemistry (Oxford Cl1rendon Pr 1968)

Units 2~

73326 VALENCY AND MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY Dr E F McCoy

Pre requisites 73204 Molecular Properl1es Three lectures a week dunng thud term

Pnnctples of quantum chemistry Approximate methods Ttme dependent processes Modern valency theory identtcal p1rttdes the exclusion pnnc1ple advanced molecular theones an assessment of simple valency concepts Molecular spectroscopy The pnnc1ples and techniques of microwave infra red Raman v1s1ble and ultr1v1olet spectroscopy magneucresonance spectroscopy photochemistry and luminescence lasers Set book Moore W J Physical chemistry 5th ed (Longman 1972)• Reference books Avery J The Quantum theory of atoms molecules and photons (McGra\V Hill 1972) 1-lannony M D Introduction to molecular energies and spectra (Holt Rinehart &: \V1nston 1972)

Units 1!?

73327 BIOINORGANIC SYSTEMS Dr M R Taylor

Pre requ1s1te 73202 Inorganic Chemistry Three hours per week tn the second half of term 3

Studies of the funcnon of metal ions 1n b1olog1cal processes wtth particular reference to structure stereochem1stry stability and mechanism Topics to be covered include metalloprote1ns metal acuvated enzymes transition metal tons 1n redox reacuons v1tam1n B12 oxygen earners nurogen fixation metal ion 1nteract1on \V1th nucle1cac1ds

This topic may not be taken for Lred1t 1f 7320;, B1oinorg1n1L Chcn11stry has been Lounted

517

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Topics in Physics

PHYSICS AND MODERN MAN

The individual topics in this subject have been augmented \Vllh some s1m1lar studies 1n chemistry to produce a senes which 1s now presented as Perspectives 1n Physical Science The des1gnauon Physics and Modern Man will be d1sconunued but the 1nd1vidual topics are continued with theu topic numbers in the 75 senes being repla(.ed by 70 numbers as for all topics in the Perspectives course

Units 9

75110 INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICS Professor M H Brennan and Professor H A B lev1n

Co requisites 63126 D1fferenual and Integral Calculus Bl or 63114 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus SI or 631 lb Differential and Inlcgral Calculus Al Three lectures and three hours laboratory work a \Veek throughout the year

This topic ts designed for students who have not taken Phys1csatSen1or level at secondary school or have not achieved sausfactory grades 1n Physics at Matnculat1on level Satisfactory completion of the topic enables enlry into second year physics topics including 76221 Electromagneuc Theory I and 76222 Waves and Optics Kinematics and dynamics of particle motion k1neuc theory of gases fluids eleclrostaucs and electnc current d c errants \Vave mouon (w11h parttcular reference to hght and sound waves) atomic and nuclear physics special relattvlly elecuomagneusm and electromagnetic waves The topic may not be taken concurrently with 76100 Physics I or by students who have aclneved a grade of C or better 1n 76100 Physics I

Set book Strother G K Physics, with applicat1on5i in life sciences

Reference books Greenberg L H Physics for biology and pre med students (Saunders 1975) Tilley D E and Thumm W College physics a text with apphcatlons to the life sciences (Cummings 1971) Thumm W and Tilley D E Physics 1n medicine (Cummings 1972) Burns D M andMacDonald S G Phys1csforb1ologyandpre med1calstudents 2nded (Addison Wesley 1975)

Unlts 6

75101 INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICS S Professor M H Brennan and Professor H A Blevin

Pre requ1s11es None Three lectures and three hours laboratory work J week in fusl and second term Tlus topic compnses the fust two terms of 75100 lnlroducuon to Physics and provides the level of knowledge necessary for a student to undertake study in related areas or subsequent further study in physics (76100 Physics I) It should be of special value to the student \vho has nol taken Physics at Matnculat1on level and who tnlends to proceed to a degree in the School of Mcchc1ne or the School of Biological Sciences K1nemancs and dynamics of particle motion k1net1c theory of gases fluids electrostattcs and electnc current d c cucutts wave motion (wuh particular reference to light and sound waves) atomic and nuclear physics The topic may not be taken concurrenlly with 76100 Physics I or by students who have achieved a grade of C or better in 76100 Physics I

Set book MacDonald S G G and Bums D M Physics for the life and health sciences (Addison Wesley 1975)

518

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCF..S

Reference books Greenberg L H Physics for bzology and pre med students (Saunders 1975) Tilley D E and Thumm W College physics a text with applications to the life sciences (Cummings 1971) Thumm W and Tilley D E Physics 1n med1c1ne (Cummings 1972) Burns D M and MacDonald S G Physicsforbiologyandpre medzcalstudents 2nded (Add15on Wesley 1975)

76100 PHYSICS I Dr I R Afnan Dr E Weigold and Dr ] Fletcher

Untts 9

This topic is designed for students who have shown some aputude for Physics at Matnculauon level

Three lectures and an average of three hours laboratory work a week throughout the year

The lectures and laboratory work deal with N ewton1an mechanics of single particles ng1d bodies and fluids special relauvay the elementary parucles and quantum phenomena wave motion optics electncny and magnetism

Set book Ford K W Classical and modern physics vols I and II (Xerox College 1972)•

Reference books Alonso M and Finn E J Physics (Addison Wesley 1970) Baker A Modem physics and anti physics (Addison Wesley 1970) Blanpied W A Physics its structure and evolution (Bla1sdell 1969) Feynman R P and others The Feynman lectures on physics vol I (Addison Wesley 1964) Ford K W Classical and modern physics vol III (Wiley 1974) Hazen W E and P1dd R \V Physics (Addison Wesley 1965) Kittell C and others Berkeley physics course vol I Mechanics (McGraw Hill 1965) Kleppner D and Ramsey N Quick calculus (Wtley 1966) McCarthy I E Quantum phenomena (The Author 1970)

Second Year Level Topics in Physics

All second year level topics normally require Physics (76100) and either D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus Bii (63221) or Differential and Integral Calculus All (63321) as pre requisites (or co requisites)

Units 1

75291 PHYSICS LABORATORY llS Dr P ] 0 Teubner

Co requisites 76221 Electromagneuc Theory I One three hour session a week dunng first term

The expenments are selected 1n the area of electnc1ty magneusm and AC circuit theory The experiment selection and scheduhng of the laboratory times ts done tn con1uncuon with the topic advisers from other d1sc1pltnes

Reference books Baud D C Experimentation an introduction to measurement theory and experiment design (Prentice Hall 1963) Brown T B ed The Lloyd William Taylor manual of advanced under graduate experiments in Physics (Add1i.on Wesley 1961) Diefenderfer A J Basic techniques in electronic instrumentation (Saunders 1972)

519

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units 1

75292 PHYSICS LABORATORY lllS Dr I R Jones

Co requisites 76222 Waves and Optics Two three hour sessions a \Veek for one half of second term

The experiments are selected 111 the area of opucal 1nd wave phenomena quantum phenomen1 1nd mechanics for students in non physics programmes The expenment selecuon and scheduling of the laboratory umes is done in con1uncuon \Vlth the topic advisers from other d1sciphnes Reference boo/ls Baird D C Expenmentatzon an 1ntroduct1on to measurement theory and experiment design (Prenuce Hall 1963) Brown T B ed The Lloyd William Taylor manual of advanced under graduate experiments in physics (Addison \Vesley 1961) Mehss1nos A C Expenments 1n modern physics (Academic 1966) Topping J Errors of observation and their treatment 3rd ed (Chapman & Hall 1965) Strong J Concepts of classical optics (Freeman 1958) Palmer C H Optics experiments and demonstrations (Johns Hopkins 1962)

Units 2~

76221 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY I Dr P ] 0 Teubner

Three lectures a 'veek and one turon1l every second wclk dunng ftrsr tc1m

Phy~1cs of conduct1v1ty TrJ11s1enrs AC circuit theo1y Vector field theory MT<well s equations in d1fferenual form for a vacuum i\l 1xwell s equauons 1n prc'ienc c of d1eltctnc and magnetic 1natcnals Electromagneuc 'vaves pola111ation L i\1 \Vavt.'i 1n condncrors and d1dectrtc<; E l\tl waves at bound 1ncs and gcometnc1l optics The Poynt1ng vector

Reference book Berkeley physics course vol II Electricity and magnettsm by L M Purcell (McGraw Hill 1966) Feynman R P and others The Feynman lectures on physics vol II (Addison Wesley 1965) Kip A F Fundamentals of electncity and magnetisni 2nd ed (l\ilcGraw Hill 1969)• Lorra1n P and Corson D Electromagnetic fields and waves 2nd ed (freeman I 970)• Reuz J R and Milford F J Foundations of electromagnetic theory 2nd ed (Addison Wesley 1967)•

Units 2~

76222 WAVES AND OPTICS Dr A L McCarthy

Pre requ1s1te 76221 Electromagneuc Theory I Three lectures a \Veek and one turonal every second week dunng second rerm

\Vaves geometnc opucs physical opucs photometry l1sers coherence and polanz1t1on Set book Hecht E and Zajac A Optzcs (Addison Wesley 1974)•

Reference books Born M and Wolf E Pnnciple5 of optics 4th ed (Pergamon 1970) Fowles G R Introduction to modern optics 2nd ed (I [oh Rinehart & \V1ns1on 1975) Klein M V Optics (\Viley 1970)• Longhurst R S Geometrical and physical optics 2nd cd (Longman 1967)• R1ch1rds J P and Williams R P JVaves (Penguin 1972) Smllh F G and Thomson J I-I Optics (Wtley 197!)•

520

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units 2~

76231 QUANTUM MECHANICS I Dr R G Storer

Three lectures a 'veek and one tu tonal every second 'veek dunng second term

The theme of this topic is the introducuon of 'vave mechanics using Lhe Schrod1nger equation This 1s applied to one d1mens1onal examples that 1llustratevanous important aspects of physics and to the study of the hydrogen atom

Set book Gas1orow1cz S Quantum physics (Wiley 1974)•

Reference books E1sberg R M Fundamentals of modern physics (Wiley 1963) Merzbachcr E Quantum mechanics 2nd cd (Wiley 1970)• Pohl H A Quantum mechanics for .science and engineering (Prenuce Hall 1967)• Scharff M Elementary quantum mechanics (Wiley 1969)• Schiff L I Quantum mechanics 3rd ed (McGra\V Hill 1968)•

Units 2~

76261 ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS I Dr R T Cahill

Pre requisite 76231 Quantum Mechanics I

Three lectures a week dunng thud term

The theme of this topic 1s the 1ntroduct1011 of 'l.tom1c molerular nuclear and elementary parucle phenomena treated by the methods of quantum mechanics The hydrogen and hehum atoms atomic and molecular spectroscopy nuclear forces the nuclear single parucle model radio acuve decay parucle decays and symmetnes

Set book Gas1orowicz S Quantum physics (Wtley 1974)• Reference books E1sberg R M Fundameritals of modern physics (Wiley 1963) Christy R W and Pytte A The structure of matter (Ben1am1n 1965) Ashby N and Miller S C Prznciples of modern phy.stcs (Holden Day 1970) Cohen B L Concepts of nuclear physics (McGraw Hill 1970)

Unlls 2~

76283 ELECTRONICS Dr E L Murray

Pre requ1s1te 76221 Electromagneuc Theory 1 Co requ1sue 76293 Electronics Laboratory Three lectures a week dunng thtrd term

C1Tcuit 'l.nalys1s sohd state devices amplifiers feed back systems pulse and log1cc1rcuits noise filters transm1ss1on hues

Set book Brophy J J Basic electronics for scientists 3rd eel (McGraw I-I1ll 1977)

Reference books Benedict P R Electronics for scientists and engineers 2nd ld {Prentice l-Iall 1976) Boylestad R and Nashelsky L Electricity electronics and electromagnetics -principles and applications (Prenuce Hall 1977) Millman J and Halk1as C C Electroruc fundamentals and applications for engineer~ and sc1enllsls {McGra'v Hill 1976) Sentuna S D and Wedlock B D Electronic circuits and applications (\Viley 1975)

521

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Unns 2

76291 PHYSICS LABORATORY II Dr P ] 0 Teubner

Co requ1slles 76221 Electromagneuc Theory I Two three hour sessions a week for the first term The expenments are selected in the area of electnctty magneusm and A C c1rcutt theory

Reference books Baird D C Expenmentatton an introduction to measurement theory and expenment design (Prenuce Hall 1963) Brown T B ed The Lloyd W1ll1am Taylor manual of advanced under graduate experiments in phys1cs (Addison Wesley 1961) Meltss1nos A C Expenments in modem physics (Acadenuc 1966) Topping J Errors of observation and their treatment (Chapman & 1-Iall 1965)

Untts 2

76292 PHYSICS LABORATORY Ill Dr I R ]ones

Co requisite 76222 Waves & Optics Two three hour sessions a week dunng second term

The laboratory will include e>..penments 1n the area of opucal and \Vave phenomena quantum phenomena and mechanics

Reference books Baird D C Experimentation an introduction to measurement theory and experiment design (Prentice Hall 1963) Brown T B ed The Lloyd W1ll1am Taylor manual of advanced under graduate experiments in physics (Addison Wesley 1961) Mehss1nos A C Expenments :n modern physics (Academic 1966) Topping J Errors of observations and their treatment (Chapman & Hall 1965) Strong J Concepts of classical optics (Freeman 1958) Palmer C H Optics, expenments and demonstrations (Johns Hopkins 1962)

Untts 2

76293 ELECTRONICS LABORATORY Dr E L Murray

Co requisite 76283 Electronics Two three hour sessions a week during thud term

The laboratory includes ex.penmen ts which are relevant to the topic 76283 Electronics

Reference books Brophy J J Basic electronics for scientists 2nd ed (McGraw J.hll 1972) Diefenderfer A J Basic techniques in electronic znstrumentalton (Saunders 1972)

Units 2

76294 PHYSICS LABORATORY llA Dr E L Murray

Pre requisite 76221 Electromagnetic Theory I Two three hour ~esstons a week dunng third term

The content of tlus topic 1s idenucal 'vtth 76291 and will normally only be taken by students enrolled in programme P3

522

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units 2~

Third Year Level Topics zn Physics

76311 ELEMENTARY MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS Dr I R ]ones

Pre requisites 76221 Electromagnetic Theory I 76231 Quantum Mechanics I 67203 Special Functions Three lectures a week dunng second term

Fourier analysis Parual d1fferent1al equations Laplace transforms

Reference books Boas M L Mathematical methods in the physical sciences (Wiley 1966) Kraut E A Fundamentals of mathematzcal physics (McGraw Hill 1967) Mathews ] and Walker R L !vfathematical methods of physics, 2nd ed (Ben1am1n 1970)' Lebedev N N Skalskaya I T and Uflyand Y S Problems of mathematical physics (Prenuce Hall 1965) Morse P M and Feshbach H Methods of theoretical physics vol I (McGraw 1-hll 1953)

Un11s 2~

76321 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY II Dr R T Cahill

Pre requisite 76221 Electromagnetic Theory I Three lectures a week dunng hrst term

Boundary value problems Vector potential Retarded potenuals Rad1at1on from accelerated charges Antennae Unbounded electromagnetic waves Bounded waves Rad1at1on pressure Wave guides Resonant cav111es Set book Lorra1n P and Corson D R Electromagneticfieldsandwaves 2nded (Freeman 1970)•

Reference books Reitz J R and Milford F J Foundations of electromagnetic theory 2nd ed (Add1~on Wesley 1970) Sch,varz W M Intermediate electromagnetic theory (Wiley 1964) Smythe W R Static and dynamic electricity 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1968)

Unus 2~

76331 QUANTUM MECHANICS II Professor 1 E !vlcCarthy

Pre requislte 76361 Atomic and Nuclear Physics II Three lectures a week and one tutorial every second week dunng thud term

The theme of this topic is the use of the matnx formulauon of quantum med1an1csand its rel'l.llonslup to the wa\.C mech.u11cs formalism \VI th many body bound st&te and scauennl., problems as ex&mples Angu!'l.r momentum perturbauon theory vanat1onal method

Set booh McCarthy I E Introduction lo nuclear theory (Wiley 1968)•

Unlls 2~

76341 DISCHARGE AND PLASMA PHYSICS Dr A L McCarthy

Pre requisite 76321 Elecrromagneuc Theory II Three lectures a \Veek dunng thud term

Colhs1011 processes 111 gases electncal breakdown charged p'l.rt1cle mouon 10

electromagneuc fields Basic properues of plasmas Waves in plasmas Plasmas for thermonuclear fusion

523

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Reference books University of New :Cngland Arm1dale An introduction to discharge and plasma physics ed by S C Haydon (Un1versay of New England 1964) Howatson A M An 1ntroduct1on to gas discharge (Pergamon 1965)• Brolvn S C Introduclzon to electrical discharge 1n gases (Wiley 1966) Engel A von Ionized gases 2nd ed (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1965) Spitzer L Physics of fully ionized gases 2nd rev ed (Intersc1ence 1962) Tanenbautn B S Plasma physics (McGraw li1ll l~b7)

Units 2~

76351 THERMAL PHYSICS I Dr R G Storer

Pre requisites 76231 Quantum Mechanics I or 73202 Structure of Mauer Three lectures a week dunng first term

Basic thermodynamics stattsttcal mechanics of systems of particles ensembles parut1on functions relation to thermodynamics ideal gases Fermi Dirac and Rose Einstein stausucs Applications to rad1at1on the electron gas hqu1d helium and sohds

Set book Reif F Fundamentals of statistical and thermal physics (McGraw H11l 1965)

Reference books Mandi F Statistical physics (\\Tiley 1971)• Knuth E L Introduction to stat1st1cal thermodynamics (McGraw· Hill l 966) Morse P M Thermal physics 2nd ed (Ben1am1n 1969) Katel C Thermal physics (Wiley 1969)

76352 THERMAL PHYSICS II

Dr I R ]ones

Untts 21-i Pre requisites 76351 Thermal Physics I or 73311 Stat1sucal Thermodynamics Three lectures a lveek dunng second term

Mean free path approach to k1net1c theory Transport processes I-Ieat transfer conducuon convection radtatton Solar rad1auon Thermoelectncny Fluctuations

Set book Reif F Fundamentals of statistical and thermal physics (McGra\v Hill 1965)

Untts 2~

76361 ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS 11 Dr I R A/nan

Pre requisite 76261 Atomic and Nuclvu Physics I Three lectures a week dunng second lerm

The theme of this topic is one-body sc-utenng theory lvtth one channel examples Formal scattenng theory integral equauon and Born approx1mat1on t matnx densuy of states optical model nuclear and atomic examples algebra1c structure of quantum mechanics mechanics

Set book Alonso M and Valk H Quantum mechanics principles and applicatzons (Addison \Vesley 1973)• Reference books de Sha ht A and Fcshbach H Theorel1cal nuclear physics nuclear structure (Wiiey & Sons 1974)

524

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units 2!i

76372 PHYSICS READING TOPIC II Dr E Weigold

Pre requisites Consult lecturer One tutonal a \veek dunng thud term Vanous aspects 1n astrophysics will be covered Set book Rose \V K A5trophysics {Holt R1neh.ifl & Winston 1973)

Units 2~

76383 INSTRUMENTATION Dr E L Murray

Pre requisite 76283 Electronics Co requ1sue 76393 Instrumentanon Laboratory Three lectures a week dunng second term

Transducers electronic 1nstrumenlat1on pnnc1ples of measurement data collection and processing noise recording systems

Set book There ts no set book however students should have available a copy of one of the books hsted as etther the set book or as a reference book for the topic 76283 Electronics Reference books D1e£fendcrfer A J Principles of electronic 1nstrumentat1on (Saunders 1972) Malmst.idt H V and others Electronic measurements for scientists (BenJa1n1n 1974)

Units 2Xi Pre requ1s1te None

76391 PHYSICS LABORATORY IV Dr P J 0 Teubner and Dr M G R Phillips

Eight hours a \veek dunng first term

Includes experiments on electromagnencwaves atom1cphys1cs nuclear physics plasma physics and sohd state physics

76392 PHYSICS LABORATORY V Dr P J 0 Teubner and Dr M G R Plull1ps

Units 21-S Pre requ1sues None Eight hours a week dunng thud term

The content of the topic is similar to that of 76391 Physics Laboratory IV

Units 2~

76393 INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Dr E L Murray

Co requisite 76383 Instrumentauon Eight hours a \Veek during second term

The topic illustrates the expenmental techniques associated with the subject 1natter of topic 76383 Instrumentauon

525

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Fourth Year Level Topics in Physics

76421 RELATIVITY AND ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY Dr I R A/nan

Three lectures a \Veek dunng first term

Special relauv1ty - four dimensional representation of equauons of mechanics and electromagnetic theory transformanon laws appl1cat1ons to charged paruclemot1on and colhstons relat1v1suc Lagrang1ans General relativity - Mathematical tools foundations of general rclauvuy expenmental tests cosmology Electromagneuc rad1at1on theory

Set books Jackson J D Classical electrodynamics 2nd ed {Wiley 1975) Sc1ama D W The physical foundations of general relativity {Doubleday 1969)

Reference books Anderson J L Prnzc1ples of relatzvzly physics (Academic 1967) Bergmann P G Introduclzon to the theory of relativity (Prenuce 1-Iall 1966) Chiu Hong Yee and Hoffman W r eds Gravitation and relativity (Ben1am1n 1964) Lorentz H A and others The principle of relativtty (Dover 1952)• Landau L D and Lifshitz E M Classical theory of fields (Perg'lmon 1962) Panofsky W K H and Ph1lhps M Classical electricity and magnetism 2nd ed (Addison \Vesley 1962) Pauli W Theory of relativity (Pergamon 1958)

76431 ADVANCED QUANTUM MECHANICS Dr R T Cahill

Three lectures a week dunng second term

Relauv1suc quantum mechanics the Dirac and Klein Gordon equauons apphcauons to electromagnetic strong and weak 1nteracuon

Set book B1orken J D and Drell S D Relativistic quantum mechanics (McGraw Hill 1964)•

Reference book Sch,veber S An 1ntroduct1on lo relat1v1stzc qua1ztum field theory (Harper& Row 1961)

76433 SPECTROSCOPY Not offered 111 1978

76441 ATOMIC COLLISION PROCESSES Professor H A Blev:n

Three lectures a week dunng thnd term

D1scuss1on of electron atom 1nteracuons 1nclud1ng elasuc scattcnng excnanon and 1on1zat1on Resonant scattering phenomena

Reference books Bransden B Atomic collision theory {Ben1am1n 1970) Fano U and Fano L Physics of atoms and molecules (Ch1cai;o Univ Pr 1972) Massey H S W Burhop E H S and Gilbody H M Electronic and zonic zmpact phenomena vol I and vol II (0 UP 1969) Mott N F 'lnd Massey H S W The theory of atonnc collisions 3rd ed (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1965)

526

SYLLABUSES-PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Units I~

76432 SPECIAL TOPICS IN QUANTUM MECHANICS Professor I E !vlcCarthy

Three lectures a ,veek during tlurd lerm

This topic \Vlll be devoted to elementarypart1clephys1cs and will cover- spectroscopy of paruclephys1cs determ1nat1on of quantum numbers and class1£1cauon according to SU(3) - strong interacuon dynamics dispersion relation with apphcauon to pion nucleon scattenng - \veak interaction

Set book Frazer \V R Elementary particles (Prenuce Hall 1966)

Reference book Levi Setu R and Las1nsk1 T Strongly interacting particles (Chicago Univ Pr 1973)

76442 PLASMA PHYSICS Dr !vi G R Phillips

Three lectures a week dunng second term

Stat1st1cal desc11pt1on of a plasma The continuum descnpuon of a plasma The connecuon between these two theoretical descnpt1ons Selected topics 10 plasma behaviour Wave propagauon 10 hol and cold plasmas

76451 ADVANCED STATISTICAL MECHANICS Dr R G Storer

Three lectures a week dunng first term

Stausucal mechanics of 1nteracllng parucles 1nclud1ng quantum effects Apphcat1ons lo hqu1ds solids super conductors hqu1d hehum etc

Reference books Huang K Statistical mechanics (Wiley 1963)• Mackinnon L Expenmenlalphys:csat low te1nperalures(Wayn1...StateUn1v Pr 1966) March N H Young W E-1 and Sampanthar S The many body problem in quantum mechanics (Cambndge Univ Pr 1967) Mauuck R D A guzde to Feynman diagrams 1n the many body problem(McGraw Hill 1967) Pryde J A The liquid ~tale (Hutchinson 1966) Rowhnson J S and others Liquids (Taylor & Francis 1971)• lsthara A Statistical physics (Academic 1971)

76461 NUCLEAR THEORY I Not offcr1...d 1n 1978

76471 PHYSICS SEMINAR One lecture a week throughout the year

76472 THEORETICAL PHYSICS SEMINAR One lecture 'l vJeek throughout the year

527

SCHOOL OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES Student~ are e>..pected to procurt'.. the prescribed ed1t1on of all set booJ...s Whe1 e 110

ed1t1on 1s prescribed they should procure the latest ed1uon Those books 111d1cated by an asterisk (-l<) are ,-1v,ul tble 111 pdp{.rback or ~tu<lLnt ed1t1ons

The n.in1e of the staff rnembcr pt 1m.inly n.sponstble for a topic and to'\ ho1n enqu111es 'lbout the topic should be du cc.led 1s shown 111 1tahcs below the topic title

Units 9 Le\ cl I irst yea1 Duration 3 terms

86100 BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE I Dr R V Baudinette

Class Contact 3 lectures and 3 hours pract1cal \\Ork pet week Prepardl1on A J...nowkdge of chLmtstry or phy~1cs to 1natn<-ulat1on level

A topic co1np11s1ng lectures 1nd practtcals 111 wluch the pnnc1ple'i u111f}lllg 1node1n biology are 1nt1oduced Emph t~1s 1s placed on the s11ntlc1nt1es 1n the hfe processeh of pldnts and animals at the various levels of b1ologtcal organ1hat1on (1nolecular cellular whole organ1sn1 population) This topic IS designed for B Sc ~tudents and clSSU!IlCS 'l knO\\ ledge or che1n1stry or physics to 1nat11c1tl.tt1on level Students who do not fulfil this 1equ11cmcnt should consult the topic co 01d111.ttor Othe1 students ate ach1sed to en1ol for 86110 Perspectives u1 Biology

Set hon!! V1llct. C A and D<.Lluer V G Bwiog1cal principles a11d processes., 2nd ed (Saundcth 1976)

Reference books Kruebe' R G el ii lntrod11ctwn lo microbwiogy (Collier tvfactndlan Jq73) Schn11dt Nielsen K Anunal Phy~wlog) adaf1tw11 and environment (C 11nb11dge Univ P1 1975) St1ycr L Biochemistry (Frec1nan 1975) Othe1 1efe1 enccs arc hsted 111 the B1olog1c 11 Science I rnanual

Units 12 Level I 1rst year Du1.it1on 3 tertnh

86110 PERSPECTIVES IN BIOLOGY Dr B A Barlow

Cl 1ss Contact 3 lectures 3 hours laboralo1 y wo1 k and one se1n111.t1 CJ.ch week

Th1h topic has been designed specd1call} for non science students 'l1ul assu1ncs no pre\ 1ous 1-.no\\ ledge of b1ology 01 an} of the other sc1<.11ces Co1nplet1011 ol this topic leads to 'l numbe1 of selected st.cond ond thud }e u options hO that biology rnay be taken tow.ti cb a non science degree rot hludents en1 oiled fo1 a B A deg1et. 111 the S<.hool of B1olog1c.tl Sciences Pe1spe<.tnes Ill Biology lc.tcb to the ll1olob} Cote of Pi og1 an11tH .. AB2 Tht. 111 un focus of the topic 1s on the b1oloby of 111.tn and h1h env1rontnent but 'lt the sd1ne tune the lect111 e~ pract1c'lls 'lnd se1n1n 11 ~ cxplo1 e a '\ 1dc r1ngc of b1olog1c'll principles and organ1s1n<;.

&t book\ -ind I ext boo I..\ 11 L rc11uir d I l ulmg on 1 Inch ~t11dt-11h ma) ht- tt-sttd !)tudLnb art tXptc!Ld t ) ha1t tht-ir o 111 ci p1t-s of -.11 boo I..~ h\I ti 1s Set book\ or l ext book~ muluplt- c ipit-s nJ tht-~e b mks 1 di 11\ t bi... a a la bk m the L1b1ar} I rd111111 ar} TL 1dmh 1s rcadmi, 1 h1d1 thL student l\Lxpc,tcd to h Ill co111p!ctcd bclnrL lht wmmcnctmtnt nl te1d1111i, .wd on 1 h!Ch ht- m I} .it .iny tnnL bt- lL~ILd furtla.r 1L1d111i, .md Ruommtnded rt.11lmb 1 he1 e not oLln 11 1\c spcciht-d md1cale re.td111b 11I11th the smdt-nl 1s Lxptacd LO m 1hc tourse of~tml}lllb the Set lmol..\ Rcfc1 ence boo I..~ u c bo iks luch the stmlem 111 find useful 111 tht course of ~uulpng the topic for 1 hKh thC) II\' ~pec1ficd

601

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Set boo/, Stephens G C and North B B Biology (Wtley 1974) or Tortora G J and Becker J F Life science (Mdcm1llan 1972)

Reference book Swanson C P The natural history of man (Prentice Hall 1973) Many reference books are available 1n the L1bra1 y The more unportant works are hsted 1n the course manual

Units 3Y.z Level Second year Duration I term

86201 CELL METABOLISM Dr j F Wluldral1e

Class Contact 3 lectures and 3 hours practical work per week Preparation Fam1hanty wtth the subject mattl.r of 86100 B1ologtcal Science I

Structure and synthesis of nucleic acids and control of metabohsm Structure function and synthesis of proteins (enzyme action and l..1net1cs allostenc proteins) The 1nolecular basis of transport of organic and macromolecules through cell barners Prnnary events Ill hormone action A general review of glycolys1s and the TCA C}cle leading on to b1oenerget1cs Pentose phosphate pathway glyoxylate cycle B1oenergetKs (general electron transport oxtdauve phosphorylation thl. dark reactions of photosynthesis)

Sel book Conn r. E and Stumpf P K Outluies of bwchemistry 4th ed (Wiley J 976)

Reference books Bernhard SA The structure and function of enzymes (W A Ben1am111 1968) Boh1nsk1 R C Modeni concepts ui bwdzemistry (Allyn & Bacon 1973) Dyson R D Cell bzolog; (Allyn & Bacon 1974)* Ferdinand W The enzyme molecule (Wiley 1976) Hall J L Flowers T j and Roberts R M Plant cell structure and metabolism (Long1nans 1974) Lehn1nger A L Bwchemzstry 2nd ed (Worth 1975) Metzler D 1'.. Bwc/1emzstry The chemical reactions of the living cell (Academic 1977) Stryer L Btochemistry (Freeman 1975) Goldsby R A Cells and energy 2nd ed (Mac1n1llan 1977)

Units 3Yi Level Second year Duration l term

86202 CELL PHYSIOLOGY Professor A B //ope

Class Contact 3 lectures and 3 hours laboratory work per week Preparation Fam1hanty with the subjt.Ct matter of 86100 B1olog1cal Science 1

Structure dnd function of cells 1n relation to the conservation of energy 1n photosynthesis the transport of water ions and non electrolytes the 1nteract1on of cells with the environment effects of temperature rad1at1ons gases heavy metals spec1alued cells motile cells muscle nerve Sensory receptors cell commun1cat1on the plasma membrane synapses

Text boo/1 Dyson R D Cell b1olog) (Allyn & Bacon 1974)*

Reference books Hall D 0 and Rao K K Photos;nthesis (Arnold 1972)* Katz B Nlrve, musch and synapsl (McGraw Hill I 966)* Usher-....ood P N R Nervous systems (Arnold 1973)*

602

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Units 2 ~ Level Second ye'lr

86203 CELL GENETICS Dr N G Brink

Duration Approximately V2 term Chss Contact 6 hours of lectures and practical work per week Preparation Fam1lianty with the subject matter of 86100 B1olog1cal Science I

The topic covers basic aspects of Cell Geneucs 1nclud1ng the nature and organuat1on of the genetic material the molecular basis of gene mutation geneuc recomb1nat1on gene action and extra chromosomal 1nhentance

Reference boo/IS Cove D J Genetics (Cambridge Univ Pr 1971r Dyson R D Cell hzowgy (Allyn & Bacon 1974) Goodenough U and Levine R P Genetics (Holt R1nch'lrt & \.Y1nston 1974) Lewis K R and John B The organ1mt1on of heredity (Arnold I 970)"" Stncl-.berger M W Genetic~ 2nd ed (Mac1n1llan 1976) Watson J D Molecular biology of the gen£ 2nd ed (Beruam1n 1970)

Un1ts 1 l/:!

86204 CELL GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Dr K L Dixon

Level Second year Duration Approximately V2 term Class Contact 6 hours of lectures and ptacucal work per week Preparation Fa1n1hanty with the subject matter of 86100 B1olog1cal Science I

In this topic the integrated functions of the whole cell will be emphasised 10 a discussion of grol\ th reproducuon and dtfferentlatton of cells

Reference books Lphruss1 B Hybndiz.atwn of mmatic eel~ (Pnnceton Univ Pr 1972)* 1-l'lnawalt P C Cell growth and proliferation (McGraw Hill 1974)* M1Lcluson J M The bwlogy of the cell cycle (Cambridge Univ Pr 1971)+ Davidson R L Somatzc cell hybndiz.atzon (Addison \Vesley 1973)*

86210 INTRODUCTION TO CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY Dr B A Barlow

Unus 4 Level Second ye'lr Durauon 2 te1 ins Class Contact 2 lectures per week plus a total of 6 hours of tutorial and four 3 hour pr'lct1c1.ls Preparauon Fa1n1lianty with the subject inaner of 86110 Perspectives 1n Biology

A course of lectures tutorials and pr'lct1cals designed to provide an elementary background 1n cellular and 1nolecular biology for students who have completed 86110 Perspectives 1n Biology and who wish to proceed with further studies tn the School of B1ologtcal Sciences for B A students enrolled 10 the School of B1ologtcal Sciences the course 1s part of the core and for other B A students the course 1s available as an option The course deals with un1celluldr orgdn1sms and cells 10 organs and tissues and includes topics such as cell ultrastructure ene1gy conversion dnd reproduction spec1ahzed funcuons cell genetics and d1fferent1at1on

Set book Dyson R D Cell bzology (Allyn & Bacon 1974)* OR G1lhe 0 The living cell (Th'lmes & Hudson 1971)*

603

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

86251 PLANT STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION

Units 3 Level Second year Duration I term

Dr N G A1annos

Class Contact 2 lectures and 3 hours of pracucal work per v..eek Preparation Famill'lnty with the subject matter of either 86100 B1olog1c1.I Science I or 86110 Pero;pect1ves 1n Biology

The Objectives 1n tins topic are to discuss selected phys1ohg1cal processes 1n plants 1n relation to the structure of the 01 gans tissues and cells that are involved tn these processes

Reference boo/ts Bidwell R G S Plant physwlogy (Macmillan 1974) Esau K Plant anatomy 2nd ed (Wiley 1967) Galston A \V The life of the g;reeii plant (Prentice Hall 1964) Salisbury F B and Ross C Plant physwlogy (Wadsworth 1969) Street H E and Op1k H The phynology efjlowering plants (Arnold 1971)

Units 3~

86252 ANIMAL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION Dr K E Dv:on

Level Second year Duration 1 term Class Contact 3 lectures or tuton1.ls and 3 hours of pracucal work per week Preparation Fam1hanty with the subject 1natter of either 86100 B1ologic.JI Science I or 86110 Pcrspccuves in Biology The aim of the toptc 1s to provide ab tstc 1ntroduct1on to animal biology through studies of the evolution of animal structure and function the d1vers1ty of an11nals and their adapuons 1n relauon to envITonment

Reference books Alexander R M Size and shape (Arnold 1970)"' Alexander R M Bwmechanics (Ch lpman & f-lall 1975)* Alexander R M The chordates (Carnbndge Univ Pr 1975)* Chapmdn G The bodyfluu!s a11d thnr functwns (Arnold 1967)* Clark R B Dynamics Ill metawan evolutwn (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1967)* Currey J D Animal slwletons (Arnold 1970)* Gardiner M S The bwlogy of invertebrates (M<.Graw Hill 1972) Gordon M S Zoology (Macmillan 1976)* Hardy R N Temperature a11d a111mal life (Ai nold 1973)* Head J J and Lowenstein 0 E eds Oxford biology readers (0 U P) The 1nd1v1dual volumes 111 the senes Oxford biology readers are 1ncxpens1ve and students are urged to purchase those which will be most useful 1n the topic"' Examples are Bone Q The ongin of chordates Gray E G The synapse Hughes G M The vertebrate lung Pritchard J J Bo11es Wigglesworth V B Insect respiratwn Hildebrand M Analysz.s of vertebrate structure (Wiley I 974) Kluge A G Chordate structure andfunctzon 2nd ed (Macmillan 1977) Morton J r. Guts (Arnold 1967)* Pennycu1ck C A111maljl1ght (Arnold I 972)* Russell Hunter W D A biology of lower invertebrates (Macmillan 1968)* Russell Hunter W D A biology ef !uglier invertebrates (Mac1ndlan 1968)* Stahl B J Vertebrate lnstory problems in evolutwn (McGraw Hill 1974) Usherwood P N R Nervous systems (A1nold 1973)*

604

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Units 3

86253 MICROBIAL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION DrKOCox

Level Second yeJ.r Dural1on 1 term Class Contact 5 hours of lectures J.nd practicals pe1 weeJ... Preparation Fam1hanty with the subject malter of either 86100 B1olog1cal Science I or 86110 Perspectives in Biology

The obJCCt1vc of this topic IS for students to understand sufficient of the baste theoretical and practical aspects of M1crob1ology to (1) appreciate the ways 1n which microbes function as hv1ng organ1s1ns and their role 1n the biosphere and (11) be able to work nnh 1n1crobes The lectures will cover the structure rephcauon and metabolic strategtes of cuJ...aryot1c microbes (fungi algae proto1oa) prokaryouc microbe.!> (predo1n1nJ.ntly bactena) and viruses and exJ.mples of the 1nteracuons betwc1..n microbes and the multicellular wot Id (symbiosis and disease) ~he practical classes wtll fam1hanse students wuh basic m1crob1olog1cal techniques for the handhng 1dent1ficat1on and enumeration of microbes

Reference books Berbey D H Buchanan R E and Gibbons N E eds Berge) s manual of dPtermuuit1ve bactenolog) 8th ed (Wdhams and W1lk1ns 1974) Cowan ST Manualfortheidentificalionofmedicalbactena 2nded (CJ.mbndgc Univ Pr 1974) Goodenough U and Levine R P Genetics (l-Iolt Rinehart & Winston 1974) Krueger R G Gillham N W and Coggtn J H lntrod11ct1011 to microbiology (~Iacm1!1J.n 1973) Skennan V B D Guidt lo the 1dentif1catwn of the genera ofbactena 2nd ed (W1lhams and Wilkins 1967) Stanier R Y Doudoroff M and Adelberg E A General microbiology 3rd ed (MJ.c1n1Ilan 1971)*

Units 2Y2 Level Second year Duration 1 Tenn

86254 BIOSTATICS Dr G C Kirby

Class Contact 2 hours of lectures and 3 hours of practtc..al work per week Preparation r 1mil1anty wuh the subject mattt.r of elllnr 86100 B1olog1cal t,c1ence I or 86110 Perspecuves in Biology

This !!lo a practice based short course 111 stausucs stress1nb the use of stat1sucal sampling and testing of b1olog1cal data and 1s suaable for students wtth a n11n11num of mathematical buckground

Text book Sokal R R 'lnd Rohlf F J lnlroductwn to bwstatislics (I rcetnan I 973)

Refert11ce booll Siegel S No11 parametric statistics for /he behavioural sciences (McGraw Hill 1956)

Unit~ 3Y2 Level Second yeJ.r Duration 1 tcnn

86261 POPULATION BIOLOGY Dr C M Bull & Dr G C Kirb>

Class Contact 3 lectures ind 3 hours pracucal \\ork per week Preparation Fanuhanty \\Ith the subject 1naucr of either 86100 B1ologtcal Science I or 86110 Perspe1..t1ves 1n Biology

605

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

This topic covers the pnnc1ples of populauon ecology and population genetics Populauon growth age specific btrth and de'lth processes regulation of nu1nbers 1n natural populauons genetic vanab1hty w1th1n populations polymorphisms differences between populations spec1at1on

Reference books Cook L M Population genetzcs (Chapman & Hall 1976) Goodenough U and Levine R P Genetics (l-lolt Rinehart & Winston l 974) Krebs C J Ecology the experiment analysz.s of dz.slnbutwn and abundance (Harpe1 & Row 1972)* Wdh.i.mson M The anal)S'l.S of biological populations (Arnold 1972)* Wilson [. 0 and Bossert W H A pnmerofpopulatwn biology (S1nauer 1971)*

Units 2!12 Level Second year Duration l term

87221 GENERAL METABOLISM Professor A W Murray

Class Contact 2 lectures each week Prep'lr.i.t1on ram1hanty with the subject matter of 86201 Cell Metabohsm

A topic compns1ng lectures on selected aspects of general 1netabohsm of general relevance to biology Regulatton of hptd metabolism glycolys1s gluconeogenests Synthesis and metabolism of punne and pyn1n1d1ne nucleot1des amino acids and urea

Reference books Lehn1nger A L Bwchemzstry 2nd ed (\Vorth I 975) White A Handler P and Smith E L Pnnc1/1les ofbtochemz.stry 5th cd (McGraw Htll 1973) Conn E L and Stumpf P K Outlines of biochemistry 4th ed (Wiley 1976)

Unus 3 Level Second year Duration 1 term

87255 VERTEBRATE PHYSIOLOGY Dr K ] Sanderson

Class Contact 2 lectures and I tutorial per week Prepar'ltton Fam1hanty with the subject matter of 86 l l 0 Perspectives 1n Biology

This topic is designed for B A or other students taking a 1najor sequence 10 Biology and 1s not avatlable as part of the B Sc degree An tntroduct1on to the physiology of organ systems and an analysis of thetr integrated acL1v1t1es 111 the total annnal

Reference books Gordon M S Animal phystolog'j 3rd ed (Macmillan 1977) Kall B Nerv£ muscle and synapse (McGraw Hill 1966)* Schmidt Nielsen K How atumals worh (Cambridge Univ Pr 1972)-+< Schmidt Nielsen K A111mal physwlogy adaption and environment (Cambridge Univ Pr 1975) Wate11nan A J Chordate 5lructure and function (Macm11lan 1971 )* Vander A J Sherman J H and Luciano D S Human physiolog) 2nd ed (McGraw Ht!! I 975)

Units 2!12 Level Second year Du1at1on 1 te1m

87263 PLANT EVOLUTION Dr B A Barlow

Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tuton'll each week Preparauon Fa1n1hanty '~uh the subject maucr of either 86100 B1olog1cal Science I or 86110 Perspecuves 1n B1ology

606

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

A topic compns1ng lectures and tutorials on the evolution of green pl'lnts with ~pec1al reference to structural adaptations 1n relauon to environment Evolutionary trends in algae Ong1n of land plants ong1n of the flower b1 ceding syst<.1ns d1spe1 sal mechanisms Pnnc1ples of plant geography ong1n of the Austrahan nora

Reference booh Delevoryas T Plant diversification (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1966)*

Units 2

87275 INTRODUCTION TO BEHAVIOURAL BIOLOGY Dr D H Overstreet & Professor R W Russell

Level Second year Duration l tenn Class Contact 3 hours of lectures tutorials and/or pracucals per week Preparation ram1hanty wnh the subJCCl matter of 86252 Animal Structure and Funcuon or 36206 Phys1ologtcal Psychology

This topic w11l 1ntroduce the student to the 1naJor themes 10 Behavioural Biology as reflected by the Psychob10Iog1cal .ind Ethological approaches to the study of behaviour Among the subjects to be discussed are

a) Basic concepts 1n Ethology b) Social behaviour tn animals c) B1olog1cal bases of behaviour d) B1olog1cal aspects of abno1 mal human behaviour

Refereme books Rech R and Moore K r. Introduction to ps)chophannacology (Raven 1971) Siegel S Nonparametnc statistics/or the behavioural sciences (McGraw Hill 1956) Thornpson R r An introduction to physiological psychology (1-Iarper & Row 1975) van Som1ners P The biology of behaviour (Wiley 1972) \i\r1lson E 0 Sociobiology the new synthesis (Belknap 1975)

87341 PLANT GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT A1 87342 PLANT GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT A2 87343 PLANT GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT A3

Dr N G Marinos Untts Al 212 A2 312 or A3 412 Level Third year Duration 12 tenn Class Conlact The three versions of the top1t.s entail the following contact umes 87341 A 1 2 lectures per \\eek 87342 A2 3 lecturcsor 2 lecturcs and I three hour practical per ''eek 87343 A3 3 lectures and I three hour practical per .veek Preparation fam1hanty with the subject m'ltter of 86251 Plant Structu1 e and Function

This series of topics deals with va11ous phys1olog1cal and develop1nent.il aspects of pl'lnts dunng their \egetative phase of growth and although self contained each complements Plant Grav.th and De,eloptncnt Bl (87344) B2 (87345) or B3 (87346) The nex1ble topic st1 ucture allows a considerable degree of choice 111 the amount of work that a student may undertake and also 111 the range of subjects that can be studied

Ref en nee boo!~ B1clwell R G S Plant physiology (Macm1lhn 1974) Culler E G 1 rends in plant morphogenesis (Longm'ln 1966) Es'lu K Plant auatomy (Wiley 1967) Galston A W and Davies P J Control mechanisms in /Jlant develo/nnent (Prentice Hall 1970) Leopold A C Plant growth aud developmenl (McGraw tltll l 964) Phtlhps 1 D J J11troduclwn to the bwchemislry and ph)swlogy of plant growth lwn11011es (McGraw Hill 1971) Salisbury F B and Ross C Plant physiology (\Vadsworth 1969) Stce\t.S T A and Sussex I M Patterns in plant develo/nnenl (Prentice Hall 1972) Stev.ard f C Growth and organization 111 plants (Addison Wesley l 968)

607

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Steward F C and Knkonan A D Plants chemicals and growth (Acadc1n1c 1971) Street H r: and Op1k H The phys10logy of flowering plants (Arnold 1970) Wareing P F and Phillips I D J The control of growth and different1atwn in plants (Pergan1on 1970) Wilkins M B Ph)swlogy of plallt growth and developme11t (McG1aw-Hdl 1969)

87344 PLANT GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 81 87345 PLANT GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 82 87346 PLANT GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 83

Dr N G Mannas Units Bl 2\.1! B2 3!4zorB3 4!h Level Third year Duration l Tenn Class Contact See topics 87341 87342 and 87343 Plant Growth and Development A Preparation Fam1hanty with the subject matter of 86251 Plant Structure and Function

This series of topics deals with various phys1ological and develop1nental aspects of plants during their reproductive phase of growth and although self contained each complements Plant Growth and Development Al (87341) A2 (87342) or A3 (87343) The structure of tlus series 1s s11n1lar to that of 87341 87342 and 87343 111 allowing flex1b1hty 1n the extent and kind of work that a student may choose to undertake

Reference books Same as 111 topic 87341 87342 and 87343

Units 3!/i Level Third year Duration l term

87362 PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS Dr R V Baudinette

Class Contact 2 lectures and 3 hour practical work per week Preparation ra1n1ha11ty with the subject matle1 of 86202 Cell Physiology and 86252 Animal St1 ucture and l unct1on

An outline of the 1nechan1sms operauve 1n the control of cu culatory respiratory and renal systen1s and their role 10 the maintenance of homeostasis Attention 1s paid to the integrated actions of thest. syste1ns through neural and endocnne pathways and their relat1onsh1p to the effecl of enviro111nt.nt on the total orgarustn The emphasis will be on vertebrates

Reference boo/is A1dley D J The physzology of excitable cells (Can1bndge Univ Pr 1971)* Bentley P CJ Comparative vertebralt oulocrinology (Ca1nbndge Univ Pr 1976)* Galow P Bwlo(!;l-cal maclunes A cybenut1c approach lo life (Ai nold I 976)* Dejours P Pnnczples of comparative respiratory physiology (North Holland 1975) Gordon M S An1111al ph)SlOlogy 3rd ed (1.1acm1llan 1977) Moffat D B The mammalzan kuiney (Cambridge Univ Pr 1975) Mountcastle V B Medical physwlog') 13th ed (Mosby 1974) Prosser C L Comparative animal jJhys10logy 3rd ed (Saunders 1974) Rech R C and Patton H D Physiology and b10bhysics 20th ed (Saunders I 974) Sclkurt E ~ Physwlogy 4th cd (Llltle Brown 1976)* Selkurt E E Baste physiology for the health scte11ces (Little Brown 1975)* Schmidt Nielsen K How anunals worh (Cambndbe Uni\ Pr I q72)* Sch1n1dl N1cJsen K Anunal physiology adaptwn and environmu1t (Cainbndge Univ P1 1975)*

608

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

87359 ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY Dr R V Bau.dinette & Dr N G lvlarnws

(Not available 1n 1978) Units 2\Ji Level Third year Duration I term Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutonal per week Preparation Fam1hanty with the subject matter of86251 Planl Structure and runct1on and 86252 Animal Structure and functton

The emphasis will be on the physiology of plants and animals under cond1uons of environmental stress (water temperature hght gase~ and chemicals) and the way addpt1ve and acchmauon 1ncchan1sms operate 111 various organisms

Reference boollS Bentley P J Comparative vertebrate endocrinology (Ca1nbndge Univ Pr 1976) Bidwell R G S Plant physwlogy (Macmillan 1974) Brown, F A Hastings J W and Palmer J D The bwlogzcal clock (Academic 1970) Gates D M andSchmerl RB Perspectivesofbwp!tysicalecology(Spnnger Verlag 1975) Gordon M S Animal physiology principles and adaptations (Macmillan 1972) Monteith J L Pnnciples of environmental ph)stcs (Arnold I 973) Robertshaw D ed Environmental ph)stology (Butterworth 1974) Salisbury F B and Ross C Planl physiology (Wadsworth 1969) Schmidt Nielsen K Animal phys1oloffj adaptwn and environment (Cambridge Univ Pr 1975)

87360 NEUROPHYSIOLOGY OF THE BRAIN 87361 NEUROPHYSIOLOGY OF THE BRAIN

Dr K J Sanderson Units 87360 21'2 87361 3\/i Level Th1rd year Duration 1 term Class Contact 87360 2 lectures and I tutonal per week 87361 2 lcctures and I tutonal per week and 27 hours practical work per term Preparation famdiaruy with the subject matte1 of 86202 Cell Physiology and 86252 Anunal Structure and Function

A course on neurophysiology of the vertebrdte brain The areas covered wtll 1nclucle a) Comparauve an'ltomy and physiology of the verteb1 ate retina b) Motor and sensory areas 111 the cerebral cortex c) The cerebellum neuronal connections synaptic transmitters and control of 1novement d) Plast1c1ty 111 the central nervous system the develop1nent of nervous pathways c) Abnormal brain pathways which arc genetically determined £) Techniques used for neurob10Iogy studies

Reference boollS Cooper JR Bloom FE and Roth RH Thebtochem1calbas1Sof11europharmacology 2nd ed (0 UP 1974)* Eccles JC I'heunderstandingofthebrain (McGraw Hill 1973)* Mountcastle V B cd Medical physiology 13th ed (Mosby 1974)

Units 3\Ji Level Third year Duration I term

87363 ECOLOGY Dr C M Dull

Class Contact 2 lectures and 3 hours practical work each ·week Prcparauon Fam1hanty with the subject matter of 86261 Population Biology

This topic considers the 1nter'lct1ons wuh1n ecological commun1t1es Lectures will apply

609

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

the principles of populat1011 biology to the structure of ecosystems the d1vers1ty of species w1Llun them and the 1nteracllons between species on the same and at different trophic levels Pracucal work will en1phas1ze field experiments testing hypotheses about 1nteract1on'i between species

Reference books Colher B D and others D)tuzmic ecolog) (Prentice Hall 1973)* Colinvaux P A Introduction lo ecology (Wiley l973):t Lmlen J M Ccolo[!;j an evolutionary approach (Addison Wesley 1973) Krebs C J Ccology lhe expenmental anal)SlS of dtstnbutwn and abundance (Harper & Row 1972)* McNaughton S j and Wolf L L General ecology (llolt Rinehart & Winston 1973) Ricklefs R E Ecology (Nelson 1973)

Units 3Y2

87376 BEHAVIOURAL BIOLOGY A (PSYCHOBIOLOGY) Dr D H Overstreet

Level Third year Du1 atton I term Cl'lss Cont'lct Seminar and pract1c'll work a1nount1ng to 5 hours per week Preparation Fam1hanty with the subject matter of 87275 Intro<luct1on to Behav1ou1 al Biology

In this topK the student will be required to present orally the findings of recent research p'lpers in the area of psychobiology 'lnd con1plete a pracucal project or two 1n1n1 ptOJects 1n an area of his/her special interest New developments 1n the following areas wdl be emphasised a) B1olog1cal Bases of Learning and Memo1 y b) Behav1oural aspects of Chohncrg1c Transm1ss1on c) B1ologtcal Mechanisms underlying Drug Tolerance d) B1olog1cal factors 1n Abnonnal I-I uman Behaviour e) Others to be determined by interest of students

Reference books Rech R 'lnd Moore D E Irtroduclwn to jJsyclwphannacology (Raven Pr 1971) Goodman L S 'lnd G1hnan A The pharmacological basis of therajJeutics 5th ed (~f.icmdlan l 975) Siegel S Nonparamet1cs stalisttcs for the behavioural sciences (McGraw Hill 19156) Quarton G C The neurosciences tlurd study program (Rockefeller Univ Pr 1974)

Units 3Yz

87377 BEHAVIOURAL BIOLOGY B (ETHOLOGY) Dr D H Overstreet Dr C NI Bull & Dr R T Wells

Level Tiurd year Du1 at1on 1 term Class Conlact Lectures seminars and practical work amounting to 5 hours per neek Preparation familnnty with the subject malter of 87275 Introduction to Behavioural Biology

This topic will provide a b1oad coverage of th1 ee areas of act1\ e development w1tlun the field of Lthology Soctal Behaviour 111 anunals Co1nmun1C'lt1on and Evolutionary (1nclud1ng geneuc) aspects of Behaviour Students will be involved 111 pr act1cal projects that wtll 1ncorporate both observauonal and expenmental methods to study behaviour

Reference boo/rs Alcock J Animal behaviour an evolutionary approach (S1naut:.r 1975) Bateson P P G lnd Klopfer P H Perspectives 1n etholog) (Plenum Pr 1973) Brown J L The evolutwn of behaviour (Norton 1975) Klopfe1 P I 1 Iiab1tal:> and terntoriei; a study of the use of space by animals (Basic 1969) \V1hon E 0 Socwbwlogy a uew S)nlhesis (Belknap Pr 1975)

610

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Units 3Y2 Level Third year Duration l term

88333 CVTOGENETICS Dr B A Barlow & Dr N G Bnnk

Class Contact An aud1otutor!al course with se1n1nars and practicals amounting to 5 hours per week Preparation ram1hanty with the subject matter of 86203 Cell Genetics

This topic \\Ill consider vanous aspects of plant and animal cytogenetlcs 1nclud1ng chromosome structure the occurrence and inheritance pattern of chromosome aberrauons normal and abnormal chromosome behaviour at cell d1v1s1on the genetic control of me1os1s and recomb1nauon the study of the chromosome set as an adapted unlt variations 1n structure and number 1n chromosome sets of higher organisms and their s1gn1ficance 1n adaptation and evoluuon permanent structural hybnd1ty polysomy aneuplo1dy polyplo1dy, permanent polyplo1d hybnd1ty

Reference hooks Hamkalo B A and Papaconstanunou J eds Molecular cytoge11et1cs (Plenum 1973) Stebbins G l Chromosomal evolution in higher plants (Arnold 1971) White M J D The chromosomes 6th ed (Chapman & Hall I 973) Moore D M Plant cytoge11i!l1cs (Chapman & Hall 1976)* John B Population C)loge11et1cs (Arnold 1976)* McDermott A Cytogenet1cs of man and other animals (Chapman & Hall 1975)

Unns 3!4 Level Third year Duration I term

88334 POPULATION GENETICS Dr G G Kirby

Class Contact 2 lectures and 3 hours practical work each week Preparation Fam1hanty with the subject matter of 86261 Population Biology

This topic covers the basic concepts of population genetics and gives a bnef 1ntroduct1on to more complex mathematical models Results obtained from mathemaucal models wdl be applied to studies of chromoso1n<. 1nvers1on polymorplusms in Drosophila population structure 1n mice and snails chnal vanat1on 1n plants and animals and the evolution of parasites on crop plants

Reference boo/IS Lewont1n R C The genetic basts of lvolutzonary change (Colu1nb1a Univ Pr 1974) lvlettler L E and Gregg T G Populatw11 genetics and evolution (Prentice Hall 1969) Cook L M Population geuetics (Chapman & 1-Iall 1976)

Unlls 3Y.! Level ThITd year Duration I term

88335 DEVELOPMENTAL GENETICS Dr NG Brink

Class Contact Lectures tutonals and pracucals amounttng to 5 hours per week Preparauon fa1n1hartty with the subject matter of 86203 Cell Genetics and 86204 Cell Growth and Development

The topic will co,er cytolog1cal ,nd genetic aspects of the control of eukaryote devclop1nent 1nclud1ng the organ1zat1on of the genome gene magn1ficauon vanegated position effect chro1nosome 1nactivat1on the nature of the tr,nscnpt1on product transcnpt1on,tl and translational control geneuc aspects of determ1nat1on transdeterm1nauon and the d1ffcrent1ated state the role of mutations in studying development

611

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Reference books Beenn.i.n \V cd Developmental studies on giant chromosouns \ol 4 of Results a1ul problems in cell differentiation (Springer Verl.i.g I 972) Lewin B Gene expression vol II (Wiley I 974) Mai kctt C L 'lnd Ursprung Ii Developmental genetics (Prenr1ce Hall 1971),;. Ursprung H and Notluger R eds The biology of unagn1al dtscs \ ol 5 of Results and problems zn cell different1atwn (Spnnge1 Verlag I 972)

Units 3\4 Level Tlurd y<-ar Duration I te11n

88345 MICROBIOLOGY A Dr D E A Catclllszde

Class Contact 5 hours of lectures 'lnd pract1c'll work per week Prep.i.1 a11on fa1n1hanty with the subject 1natte1 of 86253 Microbial Structure and funcuon and 8620 I Cell Metaboh~1n

This topic tog<-ther with M1crob1ology B 1s designed to broaden and deepen the knowledge of 1n1crob1ology gained fro1n M1crob1al Structure .ind Function and to acquaint the student with the act1v1t1es of proless1onal 1n1crob1olog1sts The d1vers1ty of bacteria and viruses Bactenolog1cal and v1rolog1cal techniques 1nclud1ng the pnnc1ples of 1dcnuficauon Structure and b1osynthes1s of bactenal cell wall co1nponents Conti ol of nuc1 obes stenhsat1on ant1seps1o; ant1b1ouc therapy Microbe<; as p'lthogens 1n1Lrob1al dtse,ises of 111,in and ct1111nals ep1dem1ology The pracucal work 1s des1gn<-d to exp'lnd the skills 111 bactLnology a<.qun ed 1n rvhc1 obnl Structure and funcuon 10 introduce 1hc paruc1pants to the basic techniques of virology and 11111nunology and to apply these sJ...1lls to specific m1crob1olog1cal pi oblems of general interest

Refere11ce books BrocJ... T D BwlofJ of microorgantsms 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1974) Bun ows W Textbook ef microbtolog) 20th ed (Saunders 1973) Davis B D 'lnd othe1s Microbtolog; 2nd eel (Harper & Row Jq73) Frobisher rvI and Fuerst R Nficrobwfog) 111 health and disease 13th ed (Saundc1s 1973) HanJ...er L [ 'lnd Linton A H eds 1\11croorganisms fi111ct1011 form and c11v1ro11ment (Arnold I 971) Lechevaher H A and Pra1ner D 1 he microbe~ (L1pp1ncott 1971) Pnm1 oSL S B l11lroduclw11 lo modc111 v1rolog; (Black\\ ell 1973)* Stanier R Y 'lnd others General m1crob10logy 4th ed (l\.iacmtllan 1976)*

88346 & 88347 MICROBIOLOGY B

Unns 88346 2Yi 88347 3Yi Level Tlurd ye u Durauon I term

Professor E i"f 1\larti11

Class Contact 88346 2 lectuies per \\eel 88317 2 lecturcs and 3 hours pr'lcllcal pe1 \\eeJ... Prep'lr'lllon I 'lrlllhanty with the subject mallLI of 88345 M1crob1ology A

This topic 1s dC31bned to b1oaden and deepen the J...no\\kdge of 1n1crob1ology gained from ~hcrob1'll Structure tnd Function and fro1n M1crob1ology A Induo;trnl 1111crob1ology (general pnnuples p1 oduct1on of 'llcohols .iuds and ant1b1ot1cs v.astL chsposal) vu ology (rcphcat1on of .i.n1n1'll ctnd b.u:.tenal vu usc.s tu1nou1 v1ruses interferon plant .ind insect v11 uses) 1111crobial cnerg} n1etabohs1n (n1etabohc p'lth\\ a}S che1no lUtotrophy photosynthesis llllrogen fi'\. 'lt1on) hoo;t defence~ against !ll1<.rob1al 1nvas1on (the 11111nune responses antibodies 'lnllgens 'lnd co1nple1ncnt cell mediated respons<.s the 1nf1,i1n1nato1y 1espon~L seroloby) In topic 88347 the lectures are co1nb1ned with practical work 111 \\h1ch the1e 1s an e1nph,is1s on prOJCClS that lll'lke use of the tecluuques of bactenolog} \ irolog} and unn1unolog} co\ered 111 Miu ob1olof:,y A Students will be encouragc..d to select their O\\ n

612

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

p•oject [ro1n areas such as 1solauon and 1denuficauon ofbactern and viruses microbial ecology antibody production 'Ind fennentatton

Reference books See M1crob1ology A and A1ba S Hu1nphrey A E and Mdhs N I Biochemical engniecnng 2nd ed (Academic 1973) Fenner r 'Ind others Biology of animal viruses 2nd ed (Ac'l.de1n1c 1974) f1nter N B ed Interferon and n1terferon inducers (North I-lol11nd 1973) Gibbs A J Vtruses and invertebrates (North Holland 1973) Good R A and I tsher D \V Immu11ob1olog; (S1nauer 1971) Gordon B L Cssentials of unmunology 2nd ed (F A Davis 1974)* Jackson G G 'l.nd tvluldoon R L V1nises causing common respiralo1) uifectwns 111 man (Clucago Univ P1 1975) ivliller B M 'l.nd L1tsky W Industnal Ttucrobwlogy (NlcGr'l.W Hill I 976) Nossa! G Anl1bod1es and immunity (P(.11gu1n 1969) Pennington T I-I and R1tclne D A f\,Iole(,ular virology (C'h 1p111'l.n & Hall I 975)* Tooze J ! In molecular bwlo!fY of tumor viruses (Cold Spnng l-larbo1 1973) Z1nde1 N D RNA phages (Cold Sp11ng H'lrbor 1975)

Unus 3~ Le\el 1 lurd ye'l.r Durauon I tenn

88348 MICROBIAL GENETICS Dr D L A Catd1es1de

Class Contac..t lectures and pract1cil work amounting to 5 hours per v.eek Prepat'l.tton F'l.mthanty with the subject watter of 86203 Cell C'enet1cs and 88345 M1crob1ology A

1 Ins topic ex 11n111es the genetic syi.t(.1ns of 1n1crobes tnd the 'l.pphcat1on of the n1ethodoloby of 1n1c1 ob1al .ind molccul'lr genetics to the solution ofb1ological problems Genetic systems of viruses bacten'l 'Ind euJ...ar}OllC m1croorgan1!>n1s with an emphasis on the 1nolecul'lr processes of chro1noso1ne 1 ephcauon genetic exchange and recon1b1nat1on Plasn11ds 1-lolecular genetics as a research tool 111 v1tro genetic reco1nb1nat1on Recent research 111 1n1c1 obial genetics In the p1ac..t1c..al co1nponent .i series of experiments 11lustr'l.tn1g 1n1c1ob1al genetic pheno1nen1 and techniques fron1 the basis [or pi OJects designed en her to further 1nveslig'J.L(. 1n1crob1al beneuc systc1ns or to 1nvest1gate pheno1nena of more general b1olobl(. 11 -;1gntfic'l.nce using the 1nethodology of n11c1ob1.d genetic'>

Referencl book\ Clowes R C tnd Hayes W eds lv:pcnmenls 1n 1mcrobwl genl11cs (Blackwell 1968) Fincham J RS and Day P R I'ungalge11et1cs 3rd ed (Bltekwell 1971) H'lyes W I he ge1ut1cr ef bactena aud thezr vu uses 2nd ed (Blac..kwell 1968) Le\\ In B Nf Gene expression vol 3 (\V1ley 1977) ~I1ller J H I \f1enme11ls in molecular geuel1cs (Cold Sp11ng l-larbo1 Laboratory I 972) Stent G S Nlolecular genetics an 111troductory narrative (frce1nan 1971)

Units 3Vi Le,el Thud yc11 Dur.it1on 1 tenn

88349 IMMUNOLOGY Dr K 0 Cox

Class Conldct 5 hours of lectures lnd pr'l.ctlc'J.ls per \\eel.. Preparation 1'an11hanty \\Ith the.. 1mn1unology 1n 88346/7 M1c1ob1ology B

The obj(.<..lJVC ol tlus topic 1s for student!> to understand the properties tnd functions of antigen!> 1m1nunoglobuhns and the V'l.nous cells and 01g1ns ol the immune systctn 111 order to 1pprec1ate both nonnal 'l.nd <1bnonnal 1mn111ne luncuon

Concept-; to be c..overed tn the lecture sene~ 111clude onto1:,e11y ol Lh(. 11n1nune response roles of \'lrlOUS cells especially lytnphocytes hu1nor li 11n1nun1ty cell medt'l.ted

613

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

1mmunuy nature of 1mmunoglobuhns antigens and 1mmunogens 1nechan1s1ns of nnmunologtcal tolerance Iinmune processes 1n so1ne d1se<1se states (e g cancer and autoimmune disease} will abo be studied

The pracucal classes will fa1n1hanse students w1Lh both tn vivo and in vitro ass'l.ys 1n hu1noral and cell mednted 1mmun1ty and their apphC'n1ons

Reference books D'lv1s B D and others Microbiology 2nd ed (H<1rpcr and Row 1973) Gordon B L Essentials of immurwlogy 2nd cd (r A Davis I 974) l-Icrbert W J and \V1lk1nson P C A dictionary of1mmunolog) (Blackwell 1972) Park B H and Good R A Pnnczples of modern tmmunobwlogy (Lea and Feb1gcr 1974) \Veir D !vi ed Ha11dbook of exj1enmental nnmunology 2nd ed (Blackwell l97J) \Ve1ss L The cells and tissues of the Jmmune system (Prenuce Hall 1972)

88357 CELL AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY Dr KE Dixon

Units 3Y2 Level Third year Durauon 1 term Class Contact Lectures and practical work a1nount1ng to 5 hours per week Preparation Fam1hanty with the subject matter of 86201 Cell Metabo!Jsm 86203 Cell Genetics 86204 Cell Growth and De,elopment 'l.nd 86252 Animal Structure and runct1on

In this topic the processes of e1nbryogenes1s will be descnbed and analysed 111 tern1s of the development of the organ1s1n and the dtfferentiat1on of its cells

Reflrtnce books Bernll N J and Karp G Development (McGraw l-1111 I 976) llr'lchet J lntroductwn lo molecular emb1)ology (English Univ Pr 1974)* Davulson E H Gene activity in early development (Academic l 968) D<lv1dson E H Gene regulation and early development (tvlcGraw Hill 1974)* Deuchar E ivl Cellular u1teract1ons in anunal development (Chapman & Hall 1975) Lbert J D Interacting S)Slems in development 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & \V1nston l 970)* Ga1 rod D R Cellular develo/Jment (Chapman & Hall 1973)* 1-l'ldorn E Experimental studies of amplub1a11 development (~pnnger Verlag I 974)* Han1burgh M 7 heortes of differenitaiion (Arnold 1971 )* Ha111s H Nucleus and cytoplasm 3rd ed (Oxford Cla1endon Pr 1974)* Ho1 stad1us S E:>.perimental embryology of echmodenns (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1973) L'lsh J and Whittaker T R Concepts of development (S1nauer 1974) lvf'lclcan N The differentiation of cells (Arnold 1977) lvfonroy A Fertli1satwn and its b1ochem1cal consequences (Addison \Vesley 1973)* Spratt N T Developmental biolog) (\Vadsworth 1971) Trum'l.n D E S The bwchemistry of C)todifferenl1atwn (Bl'lcJ..well 1974)* \Vcssells N K Ttssue 111teract10ns in devel.opment (Addison Wesley 1973)"' Wolp1..rl L The development of jJatlern and form 1n annnals (Oxford Biology Readers 1972)*

Units 3 Level Tlnr<l year Dur'l.uon l term

89300 BIOLOGICAL EVOLUTION Dr R T Wells

CIJ.ss Contact 2 lectures 1 tutonal each neeJ.. Preparal1on Fam1hanly with the subject 1natter of An11n.il Structure and I unction (86252) and Introducl1on to Cdl J.nd MoleculJ.r Biology (86210) or Cell ivlet'lbohs1n (86201)

This topic co1npns1ng le1..tu1 es and tutonals deals w1lh Lhc J ok. of e\olut1ona1 y thcor} as a un1fy1ng concept 1n biology A1eas to be covered 1n the lectures include thcones of

614

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

evoluuon b1ogeochem1cal evolution e\Oluuon of macromolecules and cell formation dating the fossil 1 ecord dnft1ng continents 'lnd b1olog1cal cvolut1on cvoluuonary 1mphcauons of n1odern species d1stnbut1ons mechanisms of cvoluuon behavioural evolution Tutorials will be devoted to d1<;cuss1on of research papers covering current resc1rch 1n cvoluuon

Reference books Mayr E Evolution and the diversity of life (selected essays) (Harvard Un1vcrs1ty Pr l 977) Mayr E A111mal sjieczes in evolution (Harvard Un1vers1ty Pr 1963) Rohlfing D L and Opann A l eds iWolecular evolutwn prebiologzcal a11d bwlogzcal (Plenum 1972) Stahl B Vertebrate lustory /1roblems in evolution (McGraw Hill 1974) Stebbins G L Processes of organic evolutwn (Prentice Hall I 971) Lchn1nger A L Biochemistry 2nd ed (\North 1975)

89312 & 89313 BIOPHYSICS Professor A B Hope

Units 89312 3Y.! & 89313 2Yi Level Tlurd year Durauon I term Cl'lSS Contact 89312 2 lectures per week and expenm<...ntal projects a1nount1ng to about 6 hours each two weeks 89313 2 lectures and one se1n1nar per week Preparation Fa1n1hanty with the subject matter of 86202 Cell Physiology

An outline of the .ippheat1on of physics and physical chemistry to b1olog1cll systems particularly 'lt the le\ el of 1nolecules membranes and cells This includes such subjects as radiation and cells the sh'lpe of 1nolecules electncal phenomena in membranes sound and hght in relation to heanng and seeing thermodyna1n1cs and b1oenergeucs energy conversion 1n photosynthesis

Reference books Clayton R K Light and living matter vol 2 The bwlogzcal part (McGraw Hdl 1971)* tlope A B Ion transport and membranes (Butterworth 1971) K 'llchalsky A 'lnd Curr'ln P f Non equilibrium thermodynamics in bwph)sics (l-larv'lrd Univ Pr 1965) Snell F M and others Bwphysical pnnciples of structure and fu11ctwn (Addison \Vesley 1967)

89314 CELL AND MEMBRANE PHYSIOLOGY A1 89315 CELL AND MEMBRANE PHYSIOLOGY A2

Professor A B /lope & Dr G P Ttndlay

Unlls Al 2Y.i A2 3!4 Level Tlurd year Duration 1 term Class Conlact A I 2 lectures per week A2 2 lectures and an average of six hou1 s practical pc1 fortnight 1n the form of projects P1 cp.irat1on fam1hanty with the subjecl 1natter of 86202 Cell Physiology .ind 86251 Plant Structure and Function

This topic deals p1edom1nantly with the cellular physiology of plants and fungt Emphasis 1s placed on the role of cell me1nbranes 111 1nteract1ng with hght and 1n controlhng solute 'lnd '' ater tr'lnsporl w1th1n ind between cells all as a part of the operation of such processes as photosynthesis 'lnd resp1rauon transport of solutes by t oats xyle111 and phloetn plant tnovements 1nclud1ng circadian rhythms

Reference books Bowhng D J F Uptake of wns by plant roots (Chapman & H di 1976) Chrkson D T fun transport and cell ~tructure 111 plants (!\.IcGr1w Hill 1974) Hope A B and \Valker N A The ph)SIDlog) of giant algal cells (Catnbndgc Univ Pr 1975)

615

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

1 uttge U and Pitman M G eds E11c)clopedta of plant phys10Wg;y 11ew series vol 2 part A Transport 1n plants cells (Springer 1976) Luttge U and Pitman M G eds Encycloped1aofplantphys1ology 11ewsenes vol 2 PartB Transport 1n plants tissues and OT(!ans (Springer l 976) Nobel P S Introductwn lo bwjJh)~lcal plant jJh)Swlogy (freent'ln I 974)

89316 CELL AND MEMBRANE PHYSIOLOGY B1 89317 CELL AND MEMBRANE PHYSIOLOGY B2

Professor A B Hope Dr G P Fine/lay

Units BI 2Y2 B2 3Vi Level Tlurd ye'lr Duration l tenn Class Contact B 1 2 k.cturcs per week B2 2 lectures and an avc.rJ.ge of six hours pr'lct1cal per fo1 tn1ght 111 the form of proJCC.ts

This topic deab tnainly with the cellular phys1ology ofannn'lb A detailed study 1s made of cell 1nembranes as energy transducers and thelT 1ole1n controlling solute and water 1novement w1th1n and bet\\een c.ells 'l.11 as part of the funct1on1ng of processes such as v1s1on hc.J.nng conduction of the nervous nnpulse n1uscular contruc.tion and epnhchal transpo1t

Rrferencl' books A1cllcy DJ lite phy~wlog;y of e"i:citable cells (C<unbridge Univ Pr 197l):i. B1ttar E F eel Membraries arid 1011 irausport vols 1 2 & 3 (Wiley 1970) Davson H Te>.tbook of general ph)swlogy (Churchill I 964) I louse C R Waler transport in cells and ttssues (Arnold I 974)

Units 2Y2 Level Third ye'lr Duration I tenn

89324 BIOLOGICAL INFORMATION MOLECULAR NATURE AND EXPRESSION

Dr L A Burgoyne & Dr G J Acton

Class Contact 2 lectures per week Preparation Fun11hanty with the subject n1atter of 86201 Cell ivlet'lboh3tll

The structure 'lnd synthesis of DNA and RNA chromatin structure hybndit'ltlon techniques protein synthesis

Referencp books Leh1nger A L Bwchemistry 2nd eel (Worth I 975) \Vh1te A Handler P and S1n1th E L Pru1e1ples ofbwchemistry 5th ed (ivlcGraw Hill 1973) Conz C r. 'lnd Sturn pf P K Oullines of bwchemL\lry 4th cd (Wiley 1976) ivlctzler D E Bwchem1stry the clu:m1cal reactwns of lrv111g cells (Academic I 977)

Units 2Y.?

89326 BIOCHEMICAL CONTROL MECHANISMS Professor A W Murra; Dr j I' J¥heldrake & Dr G j Acton

Level Third year Duration I tc.nn

1 Class Contact 2 lectures per ,H .. ek Preparauon F'ln11harity with the subject 1n'lttcr of 86201 Cell ~letabohsn1 Ac.lion of polypeptide. "lnd steroid honnones role of protein modification 1n control 'lllostenc proteins control of protein synthesis

Riferenu hooks Conn E L and Stu1npf P K Outlines of bwchemi~lry 4th eel (Wiley 1976) Dumont J and Nunez J eds Honnonesandcellregulatwn vol l (North Holland 1977) King R J B and lvfa111wanng \V 1 P Steroid cell lnhractwns (Un1\Crs1ty Park. Pr 1974)

616

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Lelnunger A L Biochemistry 2nd ed (Wo1th 1975) L1twack G ed Biochemical action of hormonls vol 3 (Acade1n1c 1975) N1erhch D P and Rutter W J Molecular mechanisms in the control of gene expresHon (Ac1den11c 1976) R1cl...enberg H V ed Bzochem1.stry of Jwrnwries (rvfTP Review of Science vol 8) Whtte A Handler P and S1n1th E L Pn11c1ple.s of bwcltuw.stry 5th ed (McGraw l-1111 1973)

U111ts 3

89329 BIOCHEMISTRY OF CELL SURFACES Dr G J Acton & Professor A W Murra)

Level Tlurd year Dur dt1on l term Class Contact 2 lectures and one tutorial per week PreparJ.uon Fan11haruy with the subject matter of 86201 Cell rvletabolism

The course 1s 111 two parts

Part 1 A series of lectures/tutonals orientated to provide a background lo the dynamic aspects of cell surface phenomena Topics covered 1ncludt. 1nembrane organization and ftu1d1ty b1osynthcs1s of membrane components role of glycohptds and glycoprote1ns b1ochenucal aspect.!> of transport dCI oss n1e1nbranes 111teract1ons of the cell surface with hormones and other external st1muh

Part 2 The production by each student of a cnttcal review of recent developments 1n an area of cell su1 face science of their choice These reviews will form an integral part of the COUIS(.

Referlncl books Ftncan J B Colcm'l.n R and M1chell R H Membranes and their cellular fu11ctunis (Blackwell I 974) Quinn P J The molecular biology of cell membranes (Macn111lan I 976)

89330 BIOCHEMISTRY LABORATORY Dr G J Acton Dr L A Burgoyne Dr D C l:,/lwt Professor A W A'furray & Dr J F

W!teldrahe

Unit~ 3 Pre requisites Enhcr 89324 B1olog1cal Infonuat1011 Molecular Nature '1.nd I:xpress1on or 89326 B1oche1nKdl Control Mechan1s1ns (taken concurrently) or 89329 B1ochen11stry of Cell Surfaces

Six hours of ldboratory work and one lecture a week 111 thud tenn dlust1at1ng expenn1ental techniques 111 b1ochem1stry The laboratory work will be pi OJect ont.nted and hnl...ed to one or 1nore of the pre requisite courses The lectu1 es \\Ill deal with the theoretical background and pracucal apphcauon of tt.cluuques of unportance 1n b1ochem1st1 y These will include hqutd sc1nullat1on counting chromatography gel electrophoresis ultt acentnlugat1on and rad101mmuno•ssay

89350 to 89399 SPECIAL TOPICS IN BIOLOGY Unns l to 4 units as a1rangcd Level Third year Prepar'1t1on As detenn1ned by the topic co ordinator

Speci.tl topics 1n biology md} be avatlable from un1e to tune depending upon the resources available to the school Enrohnent 1n any of these topics 1s subject to the specific approval of the topic co ord1n.ito1 and m'ly be subject to '1 quota wht.te resou1ces ne hmited Student~ ate invited to enquire about such topics fro1n the ch,111man or horn academic counsellor~

617

SYLLABUSES-BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Honours Topics in Biology

A candidate for the Honours topics 1n Biology 1s required to reach a high stand<1rd in his Ordinary Degree worJ... preferably in lus topic work as a whole but at least 1n those subjects relating to the field 1n wluch he wishes to undertake studies for honou1s Some parucular field of Biology will be studied more 1ntens1vely and research work wdl be undertaken Candidates are required to give their full time for at least an entire acade1n1c year to their studies

86400 HONOURS BIOLOGY Fields 1n which the topic 1s available include the following Animal Physiology Behavioural Biology B1ochem1stry Biophysics Cell Physiology Cytogenetics Develop1nental Biology Ecology Experimental Cytology Geneucs M1crob1ology Plant Physiology and Biology wnh Psychology

Enqu1nes should be directed to the Chairman

618

SCHOOL OF MEDICINE Students are expected to procure the l'ttest ed1t1on of all set books Those books 1nd1cated by an astensk (•) are available in paperback or student eda1ons The name of the staff member pnmanly responsible for the topic and to whom enqu1nes about the topic should be directed ts shon n 1n nahcs bclo'v the topic title

A COURSES FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR or MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY The first tnt'lke of students to the medical cour!lC at Flinders was admuted 1n 1974 Since constructton and comm1ss1on1ng of the Fhnders Medical Centre was then a tan early stage it was necess1ry 1n1ually to 1mplement 'ln 1ntenm curnculum (t.hc flr!ark I Curriculum) that \Vas some\vhat less integrated p'lrllcul'lrly between baste science and chntcal d1sc1phnes th'ln would be possible when the Medical Centre was fully operational Pl.inning for Lhe Mark II curnculum commenced early in 1976 shortly before Lhe adm1ss1on of Lhe first patients and the First Year of the ne'v course \VIII be offered for the firsl ume in 1978

Fzrsl Year Course

Mark II Curriculum (Fust Year Course Co ord1na1or Professor R S Aalticy)

The topics compnsing t.he first year course although taught mainly w1lh.1n the Schools of B1olog1cal Sciences and Physical Sciences 'lre pl'lnned spec1ftcally for medical students may be taken only by medical students and are designed as 'ln 1ntegr'll part of the overall six year medical curnculum and 111 parucular to lay the foundations for the study of the body sys terns that compnse the second dnd thir<l year courses Staff of the School of Med1c1ne are extensively involved 111 teaclung these topics The ftrst year course consists of three core topics 90150 The biological basis of medicine 90151 The physical and chemical basis of medicine and 90152 The behavioural basis of medicine 1n add111011 to which each student 1s requtred to study elecuve topics amounung to one quarter of tht. years work

FIRST YEAR CORE TOPICS

Unas 12

90150 THE BIOLOGICAL BASIS OF MEDICINE

Dr K 0 Cox

Lectures tutorials and pracucal work unounung to tlurtcen hours e'lch week 111 Tenn I six hours each week 111 Term 2 and sc,cn hou1<; edch wctk 111 rcrm 3

Tenn 1 Introductory biochemistry cell and membrane structure and (uncuon slructure and function of DNA molernlarevents 111 m1tos1s 'ln<l me1os1s dela1led funct1onsoCDNA and RNA the slruclure and roles of pr0Le1ns enzymes cell metabolism b1ocnergeucs

Unicellular organisms Prokaryouc cell structure the n1cchan1sms by which unicellular org u11sms move obtain and utilize nutnents and energy and reproduce vu uses the ecological role of m1croorgan1sms

701

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Structure and function of the human body an 1ntroduct1on to the organ systems of the body and then funcuons 1nclud1ng the mechanisms for controlling certain phys1olog1cal variables

Population biology 111terrelat1onslups between species factors affecting population dynamics hfe tables demography of human and other populations basic pnnc1ples of epidemiology 1mphcauons of demographic trends for health care systems

Scientific method h1stoncal background contemporary sc1enuf1c methodology normal and revoluuonary sciences strategies for solving problems d1scuss1on sessions in 'vh1ch vanous nelvspaper and saenuf1c arucles are cnt1cally examined

Term 2 Human genetics an outhne of basic geneuc concepts and of those aspects of human genetics which are of pracucal s1gn1f1cance tomed1c1ne the nature of thegeneuc processes underlying human evolution

Term 3 Human embryology an 1ntroducuon to the concepts and terminology of human embryology and a survey of early human development up to the end of the fourth week of ges1at1on

Microbiology and 1mmunob1ology the general properties of m1croorgan1sms then class1ftcatton and medical importance basic 1mmunolog1cal concepts at the molecular and cellular levels

Recommended preliminary reading Clegg A G and Clegg P C Man against disease (Heinemann 1973) Heer D M ed Readings on populatzon (Prentice Hall 1968) Medawar P G Induction and zntu1t1on zn scientific thought (Melhuen 1969)• Sc1ent1f1c Amencan Conditions for life (W H Freeman 1976)• Sc1ent1hc Amencan The human population (W H Freeman 1974)•

Set books All of these books should be retained for use 1n later years of the course Dyson R D Cell biology (Allyn & Bacon 1974) Gordon B L Essentials of immunology 2nd ed (Davis 1974)• Harnson G A and others Human biology 2nd ed (0 UP 1977)• Jawctz E Melnick J L and Adelberg [. A Review of medzcal microbiology 12th ed (Lange Medical 1976) Lehn1nger A L B1ochem1stry 2nd ed (Worth 1975)

Or

Lehn1nger A L Short course in biochemistry (Worth 1973) McKus1ck V A Human genetJCS! 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1969)• Moore K L The developing human clinically oriented embryology (Saunders 1973) Vander A J Sherman J H and Luc1'lno D S Human physiology the rnechan1smsof body function 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1975)

Reference books Beveridge W I B The art of scientific 1nvest1gat1on 3rd ed (Fle1nemann 1961)• Birch C and Abrecht P Genetics and the quality of lJ/e (Pergamon 1976) Cavalh Sforza L L and Bodmer \V F Tiu: genetics of hu1nan population (\V H Freeman 1973) Davis B D and others M1crob1ology 2nd ed (Harper & Row 1973) deBono E Po - beyond yes and no (Penguin 1972)• G1blett E R Genetic markers in human blood (Blackwell 1969) Harns H The principles of human biochemical genetics 2nd ed (North I-Iolland 1975) Krueger R G G11lham N W and Coggin J H Introduct1on to m1crob1ology (Macmillan 1973) Levttan M and Montague A Textbook of human genetics (0 UP 1971) Stanier R Y Douderoff M and Adelberg E A General microbiology 3rd ed (Macmillan 1971) \Vlute A Handler P and Sm uh E L Principles of b1ochem1stry 5th cd (McGraw Hill 1973) Young J Z An introduction to the study of 1nan (0 UP 1971)

702

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

90151 THE PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL BASIS OF MEDICINE Dr 1\1 G Clark

Units 9 Six lectures/tutorials a week in Terms 2 and 3 \v1th a total of seventeen pracucal sessions

This top1<. covers medical biophysics (Term 3) medical chemistry and biochemistry (Terms 2 and 3)

Medical biophysics (co ordinator Professor A B Hope) comprises a senes of lectures and tutonals designed to lay the foundations for the study of the systems courses to be taken 1n the second and thud years of the medical course Subjects dealt \Vlth include ctrculauon ussue mechanics b10 electnctty sound and heanng light and v1s1on heat and body energetics rad1auon b1ophys1cs and b1olog1cal feedback and control The pracucal component of the topic is designed to teach in the laboratory the art of measurement and the confident use of complex 1nstrumenlat1on

Medical chemistry (Professor D J M Bevan) comprises two parallel streams of organic and physical chem1suy 1n Term 2 The organic chemistry course is designed as an 1ntroducuon for the study of b1ochem1stry The relauonsh1p betw·een molecular structure and b1olog1cal funcnon 1:0, emphasised Topics include :o,tructure nomencl·uun. general class1hcat1ons homologous senes 1somensm aromatic and aliphatic compounds carbohydrates steroids and b1olog1cally important organic molecules The physical chemistry LOmponent 1s a senes of topics centred around a core 1nvolv1ng expenments relating to routine analysis tn a chn1cal b1ochem1stry dtagnosuc laboratory The topics dealt with include properues of water 1nteract1on of mauer and electromagnetic rad1auon thermodynamics equ1hbrnnn osmosts and che1n1cal k1neucs

The biochemistry co1nponent (Dr G j Barnu) of tlus topic covers the basic p'ttlnva} s of the mct1bohsm of protein carbohydrate and fat \vh1ch are of parucul'll 111tercs1 to med1c1ne This component 1s presented 111 Term 3 Set books Duncan G Physics for biologists (Blackwell 1975)• Lehn1nger A L B1ochetnistry 2nd ed (Worth 1975) Or Lehn1nger A L Short course in biochemistry (Worth 1973) Morns J Gareth A biologists physical chemistry 2nd ed (Arnold 1974)• Robinson J R A prelude to physiology (Blackwell 1975)• Snyder C H Introduction to modern organic chemistry (Harper & Row 1973)

Reference book \Vh1te A Handler P andSm1thE L Pnnciplesofb1ochemistry 5thed (Mc.Gra\v Hill 1973)

Unns 6

90152 THE BEHAVIOURAL BASIS OF MEDICINE Dr D 0 Southgate

Lectures tutonals and pncucal \vork amounung to 40 hours 111Term1 34 hours 111 Term 2 and 22 hours 111 Term 3 The three co1nponents of this course are hu1nan beliavzour and development (Terms I and 2) lhe biological basis of behaviour (Terms 1 and 3) and medicine tn the comniunlly (Terms l 2 and 3) Also included 111 llus topic 1s part1c1pauon in the St John Ambulance Associ.1t1011 I irst Aid Cou1se \\h1ch involves eight t\vo hour pracucal sessions Human behaviour and development (co ordinator Dr R D Harris) consist~ of lectures small group d1scuss1ons .ind semnrns presenung 'l developmental '1cw of hum.in behaviour \Vtth paruculdr auenuon to ages and stages As pat t of this course students will be involved 111 a commun1cauon skills \Vorl..shop The biological basis of behaviour course (Dr D H Overstreet) consists of lectures and practical sessions in \vh1ch students wtll learn and obsen e some aspects of tl1e dependence of human behaviour upon geneuc ethologu:al and psychob1olog1cal factors

Med1c1ne 1n the community (Dr D 0 Southgate) compnses an 1ntroducuon to communny medicine in \vlu<.h students in Term 1 visit general pracuuoners and in Term

703

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

2 v1s1t Lonsulung thnKs al Flinders Med1tal Centre lo observe thcmcellng of pauents wllh doctors the relauonsh1ps whu.h develop and theireffetton the outtomeof the visit These observauons will be duetted by lettures and analysed 1n small group dtstuss1ons In 1 e1m 3 students 'v1ll tonstruct and execute a project 1n tommunlly med1c1ne tlus \v1ll 1nclude an 1ntroducuon to and use of stausucs Recommended preliminary reading Hetzel B S Health and Australian soczety {Penguin 1975)•

Set books Argyle M The prychology of interpersonal behaviour 2nd ed (Penguin 1975)• Thompson R r Introduction to physzologzcal psychology (Harper & Ro'v 1975) Castle W M Statistics 1n small doses (L1v1ngstone)

Refere11ce books l'vicK1nney F Lonen R P and Zax M Effecl111e behaviour and hurnan development (Macm1l1an 1976) Millon T ed Medical behavioural science (Sdunders 1975)

NURSING ATTACHMENT Professor] McK Walls

Students \Vho enrolled tn the B M B S cour.!ie for the first tune after 1975 are requntd to undertake w1tlun the Flinders Mtdical Centre a nursing auachment off 1ve days dur'lt1on dunng scheduled vacdtlon periods flus attachment must be earned out between the <.nd of the first year of the course and die beg1nn1ngof the hf th year of the. course fu11 details of the specific obJecuves of this auachment the vacatton penods dunng \vh1ch 11 may be earned out and the grounds on which exemption may be granted arc available from the Secretary to the School Board

FIRST YEAR ELECTIVE TOPICS Each student is rcquued to take elecuve topics a1nounung to six contact hours a \Veek (or the equivalent of nine units) \vh1ch must be approved by the Chauman and Dean or lus nominee and are lo be selected from

(1) Topics available in any School of the Un1verslly for wluch the student has the necessary pre requisites and which the timetable for the core topics \Vlll permit 01

(11) Introductory topics 1n Chemistry Mathematics and/or Physics as appropnate (see syllabuses for topics 71101 71103 75100 75101 ·111d 90112) which students 'vho have not studied Chemistry Mathematics and/or Physics at matr1culauon level must take or

(111) Such other work as may be directed or approved In certain cases this may include topics included 1n the follow1ng hst Full details of these topics arc provided 1n the booklet School of Medicine Elective Topics \vluch ts available from the Secret'1ry to the Board of lhe School of Med1c1ne (Mr C L Bro,vn) Room 6E 112 Fhnders Medical Centre

90107/90108/90109 PROJECT IN FIRST YEAR MEDICINE Dr G C Kirby

90112 BASIC MATHEMATICS FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS Professor B Abrahamson

90115/90116/90117 EXTERNAL ELECTIVE STUDIES IN FIRST YEAR MEDICINE

Dr G C Ktrb}

704

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

90220 CONCEPTS IN MEDICAL CHEMISTRY Dr I ].. Teubner

Second Year Topics

Mark I Curriculum

From lhe commencement of lhe second year of thetr course medical sludents will undertake the ma1onty of then slud1es 1n the Flinders Medical Centre The second year course compnses l\vo core topics 90201 The Slructure and Function of the Human Body I and 90212 Some Conszderatzons in Medical and Health Care 1n add1uon to \Vhtch each student 1s requned to take elecuve topics amounting to one quarter of the years \vork \vh1ch must be approved in advance by the Chairman and Dean of the School or his nominee

SECOND YEAR CORE TOPICS

90201 THE STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF THE HUMAN BODY I Professor L B Geffen

An introductory survey of the human body followed by a detailed cons1derat1on of each organ system The topic also includes a cont1nu1ng survey of the b1ochem1cal basis of disease processes The topic will involve sixteen hours of class contact ruch week throughout terms I 2 and 3 The allocallon of this nme benveen lectures tutorials dnd practical work \VIII be advised at the beg1nn1ng of each term It 1s hoped to hold several chn1co patholog1cal conferences rclattng to appropnatc demon~trauons throughout terms 2 and 3 The vanous components of topic 90201 The Structure and Function of the Hunzan Body I and the staff members responsible for organ1s1ng them are

(1) The L1v1ng Cell (Dr G f Barritt) A review and extension of first year studies emphas1s1ng the role of cellular structure and functions 1n the maintenance of the living slate Occupies 36 contact hours 1n Term 1

(u) Introducuon to Histology (Dr ] B Furness) A course dealing \Vllh (1) the use of the light microscope (11) the basic tissue types and their appearances in l11stolog1cal secuon and (111) the features of cells and extra cellular ussue elements at an ultra structural level Occupies 20 contact hours 1n Term I

(111) The Molecular Basts of Disease (Dr A R Gnvell & Dr A M Edwards) A survey of cellular b1ochem1cal processes 1n relation to changes that occur 1n disease Occupies 20 contact hours in each of Terms 2 and 3

(1v) Organ Systems A detatled and integrated cons1derat1on of each organ system tn which the anatomy m1croscop1c suuctureand development of the organ concerned \vtll be closely linked to the study of its funcllon and of the b1ochem1cal processes specific to the system The final 'veek of each term will be devoted to a senes of probkm solving exercises emphas1s1ng an integrated approach lo the various organ systems studied 1n that term

The systems to be studied are I The musculo skeletal system (39 contact hours 1n Term 1 and 25 contact hours 1n Term 2 Co ordinator Dr ].. Straznrcky) 2 The penpheral nervous system (30 contact hours in Term l Co ordinator Dr R A Rush)

3 The d1gest1ve system (48 contact hours tn Term 2 Co ordinator Dr J B Furness)

4 Blood and the defence systems of the body (35 contact hours 1n Term 2 Co ordinators Dr J Bradley and Dr R Seshadrz)

I) The cardiovascular renal and respiratory systems (144 contact hours tn Tenn 3 Co ordinator Dr M lVest)

705

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Set books

Students are advzsed to purchase the latest available edition of these books all of which will be required in later years of the course

Barr M L The human nervous system 2nd ed (Harper 1976)• Guylon A C Textbook of medical physiology 5th ed (Saunders 1976) Ham1llon W ] Te;:..tbook of hunian anatomy 2nd ed (Macmillan 1977) Leeson T S and Leeson C R Histology 3rd ed (Saunders 1976) Lehn1nger A L Biochetnzrtry 2nd ed (Worth 1975) o, Lehn1nger A L Short course 111 biochemistry (\Vonh 1973)

Moore K L The developing human clinically oriented embryology (Saunders 1973) Rand M ] Raper C and McCulloch M W An introduction to the physiology and pharmacology of the aulonom1c neroous system (Australasian Pharmaceuucal 1973)•

Reference books Bloom W and J:<awceu D W A textbook of histology 10th ed (Saunders 1976) Comroe J H Physiology of respiration 2nd ed (Year Book Medical Pubh~hers 1974) Cooper J R Bloom F E and Roth R H The bzochenucal bases of neuro pharmacology 2nd ed (0 UP 1974)• Davenport H W The physiology of the digestive tract 3rd ed (Year Book Med1c-1l Publishers 1973) Duncan G G Diseases of metabolzsm 2 vols 7th ed (Saunders 1974) Folkow B and Neil E Ctrculatzon (0 UP 1971) Ganong W F Review of medical physiology 8th ed (Lange 1977) Goodman L S and G1hnan A The pharmacological basis of therapeutics 5th ed (Macm1l1an 1975) Gray H Anatomy 35Lh ed by R War.v1ck and P L \Vllhams (Churchill L1v1ngstone 1973) Ham11Lon W J and Mossman H W Human embryology 4th ed (Heffcr 1972) Monlgomery R and others Biochemistry a case onenlated approach (Mosby 1974) Mountcastle V B Medical phys1ology 13th ed (Mosby 1974) Noback CR andDemarest J Thehumanneruoussystem 2nded {McGraw l-l1ll 1975) Pttls R F Physiology of kidney and body fluids 3rd ed (Year Book Med1cul 1974) Stanbury J B and others Metabolic baszs of inhented disease 3rd ed (McGra\v Hill 1972) Truex R C and Carpenter M B 1-luman neuroanatomy 6th ed (\Vdhams &: 'Vtlktns 1969) While A Handler P and Smtth E L Principles of biochemistry 5th ed (rvicGraw Hill 1973) W1lhams R H Textbook of endocrtnology 5th ed (Saunders 1974)

90212 SOME CONSIDERATIONS IN MEDICAL AND HEAL TH CARE

Professor A f Radford and Mr R H Wallace

This topic ts conducted over three Lerms and cons1sls of lectures tutonals seminars and placements 1n vanous health care snuations

Part A lntroducllon lo health and medical care organisation

Co ordinator Professor A ] Radford

Th ts course opens lvtth th rec 10 troduclory lectures dehn1ng the levels of care and the range of skills avatl.ible 10 heallh and 1ned1cal services Students in groups will t.hen vtstt '1

number of heallh \Velfare and medical chn1cs and services to define thc1rong1ns range of services and fact.ors which facilitate or act as barriers to obta1n1ng services

Part B Social and economic factors 10 health and disease

Co ordtn Hor Mr R H Wallace

This course ts designed to enable students to explore lhe social economic pohucal and professional componenls of mec:hcal and health 1sues 1n Lhe communuy and apply Lhe mauer of analysis to heailh and medical sltuauons

706

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Emph'lSIS \Vtll be phced on ev'lluatlon of the allocat1on of resources using several major examples Consists of Len lectures and ten ttllonals throughout first second and third terms

Reference books Vanous prepared readings \Vtll be 'lva1lable on reserve 1n the iVledtc'll Library

SECOND YEAR ELECTIVE TOPICS

In 'ldd1uon Lo the core top1csdescnbed 'lbo' ceach student 1s requued to nkcelect1vc topics amounung to appro;...1n1'ltely St\. contact houn. J \\eek (or the equivalent of nine units for the year) which 1nust beapp1oved by the Chunn 111 and Dc'ln or hrs no1n1ncc_ ind n1u~t be selected from among (1) 1 op1cs ava1lablc 111 the Sd1ool of Med1c1ne or 1n any other School of the U111vers1ty for which the student has the necessary pre rcqu1sues and which the timetable for the core topics \VIII permll Or (u) Such other work as may be directed or approved

Second year level elecuve topics offered \v1th1n the School of Med1c1ne 111 1978 \v11l 1ncludc. those hsted below Some Thnd year level 1op1cs may also be sult.tblc for Second year studen1s run det'lils of the topics listed here and 1nfonna11on concerning any topics w·luch rnay subsequently be added to the list of those avail'lblc 'lrc provided 111 the booJ...kt School of Medicine Elective Topics \Vhtch is ava1lablc from the Secretaty to the Bo'lr<l of the School of Med1c1ne (Mr C L Brown) Room 6E 112 fhnders Medical Centre

90205 CELL DIVISION AND ITS CONTROL Professor A iv Rogers (Human Alorphology)

90206 DIET AND HEART DISEASE Dr P J Barter (Cltnical Biochemzstry)

90207 ALCOHOL AND ITS EFFECTS Dr D 0 Southgate (Primary Care and Communlly iVIedzcu1e)

90208 INSULIN AND ITS INTERACTION WITH CELLS Dr G J Barntt (Clirucal B1ochem1slry)

90209 COMPARATIVE SOLUTIONS TO PROBLEMS OF EXISTENCE Dr B f Gannon (Htanan 1\!Iorphology)

90210/90218/90219 PROJECT IN SECOND VEAR MEDICINE Dr G J Barnlt (Clinical B1ochem1stry)

90211 ASPECTS OF INTERPERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS Dr R D Harns (Pnrnary Care and Community iVIed1czr1e)

90215/90216/90217 EXTERNAL ELECTIVE STUDIES IN SECOND VEAR MEDICINE

Dr G ] Barna (Cl1111cal B1ochetn1stry)

90220 CONCEPTS IN MEDICAL CHEMISTRY Dr f K Teubner (Clinical Bzochemzslry)

90223 ADVANCED HUMAN GENETICS Professor A AI Clark (School of Biologtcal Sciences)

90227 ADVANCES IN THE NEUROSCIENCES Drs I W Chubb M Costa ] B Furness L B Ge/fen R A Rush and K Strazn1cky

(Human Physiology and fliunan Alor/Jhology)

90230/90231/90232 REMEDIAL STUDIES IN SECOND VEAR MEDICINE

Dr G ] Barritt (Cl1n1cal Biochemistry)

707

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Third Year Topics

Mark I Curriculum

In the ftrst term of third year studt'nts complete the 1n1ual study of the normal structure and function of the organ systems begun 1n second year (topic 90301 The structure and function of the human body II) In the second and thud terms the pnnc1plcs of disease processes are introduced together with an introductory study of pharmacology and the rudiments of chn1cal med1c1ne Anatomy d1ssect1on is undertaken 1n these terms and topics de'lhng with human behaviour and people and their envuonment are also studied The second term is of IO weeks duration and thud term is of 12 weeks durauon As in previous years students are requtred to take elective topics amounting to one quarter of the years work or the equivalent of rune units

THIRD YEAR CORE TOPICS

90301 THE STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF THE HUMAN BODY II Professor L B Ge/fen 1

Th ts topic 1s a conunuauon of the detailed cons1derat1on of the organ systems commenced 1n topic 90201 in second year It constitutes the whole of the core studies in tlH. £ust term of Thud year

The systems to be studied 1n this topIL tn 1978 arc 1 The Endot..nne System (36 contact hours Co ordinator Dr 1\'1 G Clark)

2 The Reproducuve System (36 contact hours Co ordinator Dr ] A Need)

3 The Central Nervous System (72 contat..t hours Co ordinator Dr M Costa)

Set books and Reference books are listed under topic 90201 The structure and function of the human body I

90302 DISORDERED STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF THE HUMAN BODY

Dr ] M Skinner This topic aims to cover the basic cellular and tissue changes related to disorders of structure and function wah emphasis on the mechanisms involved (pathogenesis) There is some emphasis on aenology (causauon) of disease and 1n tluscontext the top1cconta1ns a particular reference to virulence fat.tors and the action of drugs on m1t..ro organisms There 1s also a dtscuss1on of the biot..hemtcal t..onscquences of t..ell in1ury The topic attempts to integrate these components and is taught pnmanly by members of the Units of Pathology M1crob1ology and Chn1c1.I B1ochem1stry It occupies 166 contact hours 10 second and thtrd terms Assessment 1s based on a wntten test at the end of the course and on pracucals Set books Students are advised to purchase the latest available edition of these boohs all of which should be retained for use 1n later years of the course Garrod L P Lambert H P and 0 Grady F Ant1bzot1cs and chemotherapy 4th cd (Churchill Livingston 1973) Lehn1ngt..r A L Biochemistry 2nd ed (Worth 1975) o, Lehn1nger A L Short course n1 b1oche1n1stry (\Vorth 1973) Robbins S L Pathologic basis of disease 2nd ed (Saunders 1977) o, Robbins S L and Angell M Basic pathology (Saunders 1971) Youmans GP Paterson PY andSommers,H M Theb1olog1calandclin1calbas1sof infectious diseases (Saunders 1975)

708

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Reference books Davis B D and others Microbiology 2nd ed (Harper & Row 1973) Duncan G G Diseases of metabolism 6th ed 2 vol (Saunders 1974) Florey Sn H W General pathology 4th ed (Lloyd Luke 1970) Lcnnette EH Spalding D H and Truant JP Manualofclinicalmicrobiology 2nd eel (Amencan Society of M1crob1ology 1974) Moffett H L Clinical mtcrobzology (L1pp1ncou 1975) Stanbury J B and olhers Metabolic basis of inherited disease 3rd ed (McGraw II1ll 1972) Walter J B and Israel M S eds General pathology 4th ed (Churclull L1v1ngstone 1974) Whllby L G Percy Robb I W and Smith A F Lecture notes on clinical chemistry (Blackwell 1975) Whlle A Handler P and Smith E L Principles of biochemistry 5th ed (McGraw Hill 1973) Zilva J F and Pannall P R Clinical chemistry zn diagnosis and treatment 2nd ed (Yearbook Medical Publishers 1975)

90303 PRINCIPLES OF PHARMACOLOGY Dr L M H Wzng

A discussion of the general pnnc1ples of pha1macology 1nclud1ng the class1ftcauon of drugs and their sites of action drug/receptor 1nteracuon adverse drug reacuons and pharmacok1neucs Drug development and sources of drug 1nformauon will be examined Au tonom1c pharmacology will be included to extend previous coverage of autonomic physiology Occupies 41 hours in second and thnd terms

Set books Levine Ruth R Pharmacology drug actions and reactions (Latle Bro,vn 1973) Goodman L S -ind Gilman A G The pharmacological basis of therapeutics 5th ed (Macmillan 1975) Reference book Goldstein A Aronow L and Kalman S M Pnnciples of drug action - the basis of pharmacology 3rd ed (Wiley 1976)

90304 ANATOMY DISSECTION Dr M E ]ones

Each student lVlll prepare under superv1s1on a total of six dissecuons relaung the gross analomy to relevant chn1cal problems 1n a short wntten report The sludent lvill do one dissection w1tlnn each of thefollo,v1ng regions head and neck trunk and hmbs Occupies 20 hours 1n second term and 32 hours 1n third term

Sel book Romanes G J ed Cutinzngham s manual of practical anatomy l-Ols l 2 and3 14th ed (0 up 1976)

Reference book Laurenson R D An introduction to clinical anatomy by dissection of the human body (Saunders 1973)

90306 HUMAN BEHAVIOUR Dr R D Harns

Social and psycholog1cal development will be traced from infancy to seneo;cence wah human sexuality considered as a maJor theme The le<1ming of infancy and childhood will be dealt with as the basis upon \Vh1ch adolescent and adult relationships are established Cogniuve emouonal and personality factors \VJll be considered 111 interaction wnh family school and peer group pressures Analysis of the adolescent pcnod and the early adult penod 'vlll provide an opportunity to survey the precursors of adult social behaviour 1nclud1ng career choice and estabhshment mate selccuon marnage and f'l.m1ly styles

709

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Developmenl will be treated as a through the hfe process w·ith considerauon of the middle years later adulthood and senescence Occupies 50 hours 1n second term Leclures hims and panel presentauonsw11loccupy one half of the contact hours with a ma1or focus on small lulonal group acuv1ty for the remaining half of the contact hours Lach tu tonal group will discuss aspects of human behaviour with resource persons drawn from medical and behavioural sc1enced1sc1phnes

Reference book Developmental psychology today 2nd ed (Random I-louse 1975)

90307 INTRODUCTION TO CLINICAL MEDICINE Dr E Cant and Dr A M Mackinnon

This topic is designed (a) to fam1lianse students in an introductory way with the c11n1cal snuauon so that lhey may be at ease wt th and freely able to communicate with pauents (b) to llnk up wuh other components of the thud year course to provide clinical relevance to those componenls as far as possible and (c) to enable the sludent to acquire some of the rudiments of necessary chn1cal skills 1nclud1ng 1nterv1e\v1ng ..i. pauent taking a history and doing a physical exam1nauon The loptc will also include 111 tlurd term a senes of weekly cluuco pathological conferences and multi d1sc1phnary exercises linking pathology m1crob1ology and cluucal b1ochem1stry to appropnale chn1cal cond1uons The topic occupies 40 hours 10 second term and 84 hours 111 third term Set book Each student is expected to obtain the latest ed1uon of each of the follo\v1ng books \Vhtch will also be required 1n later years of the course

Davis A E and Bohn TD Physicald1agnos1s1n med1cine(PergamonPressAustral1a 1974)" Firkin F C and others A system of signs 3rd rev ed (Australta and New Zealand Book Company 1976) Morgan \V L and Engle G L The clinical approach to the patient (Saunders 1969)

90325 PEOPLE THEIR DISTRIBUTION, THEIR ENVIRONMENT AND THEIR DISEASES

Professor A I Radford and Dr D 0 Southgate

This topic will cover basic concepts 1n occupational and environmental health Students \'/Ill 1denufy the maJor demographic patterns in various pans of South Australia and discuss lheH health care tmphcauons The definition of common terms and baste pnnc1ples in descnb1ng the d1stnbution and determinants of health disease and health care services \Vlll be considered The role o( the environment 1nclud1ng soil water and work and their consequences will be considered 1n relatton to nutnuon cardiovascular disease accidents and mental health (some of these topics may be dealt \Vt th in lhe Clinical Sciences course in Fourth year) It will consider the maJor factors 1n the natural environment and the 1ndustnal environment wl11dt result 1n disease Particular emphasis will be placed on phys1c'll factors in occupauonal heahh and disease In Health Statistics the topic \VIII cover dehn1uons denvanon and 1nterpretauon of the more common rates used to descnbe morb1d1ty and mortality and the display of chntcal and laboratory data 1n graphs histograms and charts as \vell as a descnpuon of simple probab1hty theory Lectures and pracucal/tutonals occupy 4 hours in second term and 50 hours in third term

- Reference books Barker J P and Rose G Epidemiology in medical practice (Churchill Livingstone 1976)0

Gordon D Health sickness and society (Queensland Univ Pr 1976) Hetzel B S Health in Australian society (Penguin 1974)• MacMahon B and Pugh T F Epidemiology (L1ulc Brown 1971) Encyclopaedia of occupational health and safety 2nd ed (lntemauonal Labour Organ1sat1on)

710

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

THIRD YEAR ELECTIVE TOPICS

As 1n lhe earlier years of the course each student is rcquned Lo 1,kc elecllve topics amounung to six contact hours a lveek dunng the normal academic year (or the equivalent of nine units) \Vhtch may be chosen from topics available 1n other Schools or \v1th1n the School of Med1c1ne and must be approved by the Chairman and De.tn or his nominee Third Year level electtve topics offered w1th111 the School of Mechc1ne tn 1978 \V1l11nclude those listed below· Some Second Year level topics may also be su11able for Third Year students Full details of the topics ltsted here and 1nfonnat1on concerning any topics \vh1ch may subsequently be added to the hst of those available are provided 1n the booklet School of Medzcine Elective Topics which ts ,v·ulablc fro1n the Secretary to the Bo.trd of the School of Mechc1ne (Mr C L Brown) Room 6E 112 Flinders Medical Centre

90310/90318/90319 PROJECT IN THIRD YEAR MEDICINE Dr L M l-1 H11ng

90313/90328 MORPHOLOGY, RADIOLOGY, FORM AND FUNCTION

Professor G T Benness and Dr J Aloore

90314 MEDICAL CARE IN DISADVANTAGED COMMUNITIES Professor A J Radford

90315/90316/90317 EXTERNAL ELECTIVE STUDIES IN THIRD VEAR MEDICINE

Dr L M /-I Wing

90320/90329 BODY FLUID AND RENAL FUNCTION STUDY

Dr M R Sage

90321 COUNSELLING IN MEDICAL PRACTICE Dr R D Harns

90322 CANCER AND THE ENVIRONMENT Dr JH G Clark and Dr A H Cha{,ners

90326 NORMAL FLORA Dr A S Cameron and Dr C R Philpot

90330/90331/90332 REMEDIAL STUDIES IN THIRD YEAR MEDICINE

Dr L ~1 H Wing

90333 METABOLIC FUNCTION OF THE LUNG Dr T E Nicholas and Dr R G Johnson

711

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

90334/90336 HEAL TH INSTITUTIONS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA I AND II

Dr I Maddocks

90335 THE EFFECTIVENESS OF DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

Dr C G Fraser

Fourth Year Topics

Mark I Curriculum

The tourth year of the course compnses two core topics 90401 Clinical Slalls and 90402 Clznical Sciences and the equivalent of six hours a \Veek 1n elecuve studies 1n each of the first three teaching blocks This year of the course extends over four teadung blocks of ten weeks nine weeks nine weeks and four \Veeks respecnvely with a break of nvo \Veeks between each block

FOURTH YEAR CORE TOPICS

90401 CLINICAL SKILLS Associate Professor] H Alpers

This topic occupies f tve weeks a single \veek precechng the Chn1cal Soences topic and a block of four \Veeks following that topic It involves a m1n1mum of 24 hours a 'veek pnmanly spent in 1nterv1ewing pauents and small group tutorials The aim of this topic ts to enable the student to develop the requtstte skills so that on compleuon of the topic the student should be able to (1) 1nterv1e\v a patient and ehctt a comprehensive history 1nclud1ngpsycho social factors (11) perform a full physical exam1nauon (111) 1denufy common and elementary diagnostic procedures useful in themanagementof the pattent {iv) identify patients problems by tefernng to their history and to the results of the physical examination and relevant d1agnosuc procedures and (v) present tlus material 1n a clear and concise manner Assessment Two wntten commentJ.ncs to be subm1ued by the end of the four week block oral exam1nauons and the case commentaries and reports subm1ued by tutors at the end of each teaching block

Set books Students are advised to purchase the latest avazlable edition of lhesebookswluch should be retained for use in later years of the course Davis A E and Bohn TD Phys1cald1agnos1sinmed1cine{PergamonPres~Australla 1974)" F1rk1n F C and others A system of signs 3rd rev ed (Austr1.ha and New ZC1.land Book Co 1976)' Morgan W L and Engle G L The clinical approach to the patient {Saunders 1959)

90402 CLINICAL SCIENCES Assoczate Professor] H Alpers

A mulu d1sc1phnary study of organ systems 1n relauon to abnormahues of structure and function and their clinical man1£estat1ons Th<.. formal teaching progra1nme of lectures Jnd tutonals amounts to approximately 14 hours a week

712

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

In add1uon to the formal teaching sessions each student will be attached for nine weeks to (i) a medical untt (u) a surgical unit and (1n) a psych1atnc or paed1atnc unit Each student will attend tutorials with tutors from the relevant unll on two occasions dunng each week and \Vill also be required to complete three ind1v1dual case commentaries dunng the year It is intended that on completion of this course the student should be able to (1) explain the epidemiology and pathogenesis of common clinical disorders (where pathogenesis refers to the factors contribuung to the evoluuon and progress of a disorder including social and psycholog1cal factors) (n) relate specific disturbances of structure and function to chn1cal manifestations (111) recognise common disease patterns and chn1cal cond1t1ons (1v) explain the sc1enuftc basis for 1nvest1gat1on and treatment of patients and (v) explain the pharmacological basis of drug therapy

The systems to be studied 1n this topic are Block I Cardiovascular System (Co ordinator Dr M ] West) Respiratory System (Co ordinator Associate Professor] H Alpers) Renal System (Co ordinator Dr L ] Barratt) Block II Haemopo1et1c and Immune System (Co ordinator Associate Professor A A Morley) Gastro1ntest1nal System (Co ordinator Dr A M Mackinnon) Endocrine and Metabolic Systems (Co ordinator Dr R N Waltruley) Block Ill Musculo skeletal System (Co ordinator Dr R T Southwood) Nervous System (Co ordinator Associate Professor R ] Burns) Psycholog1cal Med1c1ne (Co ordinator Professor R S Kalucy)

Assessment A final exam1nat1on cons1sung of two three hour papers (muluplc choice and short answer/essuy) and a one hour histopclthology exam1n"1.t1on Throughout the year 1t ts hoped that sample questions \VIII be made available relaung to the courses studied 1n each block and that students \VIII be able to have their ans\vers to these questions assessed informally by staff from relevant d1sc1phnes In add1uon 1t 1s expected that computer assisted 1nstruct1on programmes 1nvolv1ng self assessment fac1ht1es \Vtll be made available to students These two components \vill not fonn part of the formal assessment Other activities Dunng tlus year of the course students are also requued to (a) Attend \Veekly CllnICo Pathological Conferences the matenal for which \VIII be broadly related to the current Clinical Sciences block (b) Attend autopsies and before the end of Fifth Year to fully document three autopsies and \Vnte a comprehensive report covering the patients chn1cal man1festat1onsand relate these to the au topsy report and (c) Examine appropnate histopathology slides 1n tutorial groups

Set books All of these books should be retained for later years in the course Dunphy J E and Way L W Currentsurgicaldiagnos1sandtrealment(LangeMed1caI 1975) Goodman L S and Gilman A The pharmacological basis of therapeutics 5th ed (Macmillan 1975) Kolb La\vrence C Modern clinical psychiatry 8th ed (Saunders 1973) Harvey A M Johns R R Owens A J Ross RS Princrplesandpractrceofmedicine 19th ed (Appleton Century Crofts 1976) Margolis S and Ilarvey A M Principles and practice of med1cine - a self assessment guide (Appleton Century and Crofts 1976) Pearson J R and Aus Un R T Accident surgery and orthopaedics for students (Lloyd Luke 1973) Robbins S L and Angell M Basic pathology (Saunders 1977)

713

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Zllva J F 'lnd Pannall P R Clinical chemistry in d1agnos1.s and treatment 2nd ed (Year Book Medical 1975)

Reference books Anderson W A D ed Pathology 2 vol 6th ed (Mosby 1971) Apley A G A syslem of orthopaedics and fraclure.s 4lh ed (Buuerword1s 1973) Cecil R la F Cecil Leob te-.:tbook of medicine Paul B Beeson and 'V McDermott eds 14th ed (Saunders 1975) Duncan G C Diseases of metabolism 7th ed (Saunders 1974) Freedman A M Kaplan H I and Sadcock B ] l'Ylodern .synopsis of Comprehensive textbook of Psycluatry II 2nd ed ('V1lhams & \Vilkins 1976) Kedd1e N Practical management of acute abdomen (Lloyd Luke 1976) Muu R 1extbookofpathology 9thed rev byD F C'lppellandJ R Andcrson(An1old 1974) Page E S Ville C A and V1l1e D B Human reproduction - the core content of obstetrics gynaecology and paedzatrzcs 2nd cd (Saunders 1976) Sabiston D C Davis Chrzstopher lextbook of surgery 10th eel (Saunders 1972) Sharrard W J \V Paediatric orthopaedics and fractures (Black\vell Sc1cnt1fic 1973) Solomon P and Patch V D Handbook of p~ychiatry 3rd ed {Lange 1971) Stanbury J B and others l'Yletabol1c basis of inherited disease 3rd ed (MLGra\V Hill 1972) Troup1n R H D1agnost1crad1ology 1n clinical medicine (Year Book Medical Inc 1973) Wlutby L G Percy Robb I W and Smtth A F Lecture notes on clinical chemistry (Bhckwell 1975) White A Handler P and Smtth F L Principles of bzochemzstry 5th ed (WILGraw Hill 1973) \V1ntrobe M rvI and others llarnson s principles of n1ternal niedicnze 2 vol 8th ed (ivlcG1aw· Hill 1977)

FOURTH YEAR ELECTIVE TOPICS In the Foun.h Year of the medical course each student is requued to t'lkc clec.ttve topics amounting lo approximately six hours a week (or the equivalent of nine unlls) dunng the fust three teaching blocks In most cases these 'lre expel.ted to be c.hosen from the clec.tive programmes offered \V1thin the School whu .. h are listed belo\v Any student w·ish1ng to take an elective topic outside the School or to undertake a resean.h pro1ect must fonvard a sub1n1ss1011 for app1oval by the Electives sub comm1ucc of the Curncuhun Con1m1Ltcc

90405 FOURTH YEAR MEDICAL ELECTIVE TOPIC (WHOLE YEAR)

90406 FOURTH YEAR MEDICAL ELECTIVE TOPIC (FIRST HALF YEAR)

90407 FOURTH YEAR MEDICAL ELECTIVE TOPIC (SECOND HALF YEAR) Professor G Al Kneebone

These topics compnsc programmes of tlect1ve study offered w1th1n the School of Medicine u rourth Yc'lr level 'lnd designed to 11low 111 depth sludy of the funcuons of <,pcc1f1c

d1agnostK or chnttal Unns They are olfered enheras half year {13 'veek) or\vholeyear (27 \Veek) programmes and eal.h involves approximately six contal.t hours a week du11ng wh1c.h the student ts attac.hed 10 the relevanl Unit paruc1pates 1n Its diagnost1t.ord1n1l.al activities and generally selects one aspect of its \Vork for particular study

The specific areas 1n which programmes are expected to be available in 1978 'lrc

Chntcal B1ochem1stry (half or whole year) Chn1cal Immunology (half year) Cl1n1cal Medicine (Respuatory Funcuon Elcctrocard1ography) (half year) Clinical M1crob1ology (half or \vholc year) Chn1cal Nutntton (half year)

714

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Haematology (half or whole year) Htstopathology (half or '"hole year) Primary Care and Community Med1c1ne (Medical and Family Counselling Primary Presentanon) (half year) Radiology (half year)

Full details of the programmes offered are provided in the booklet School of Medicine Elective Topics which 1s avatlable from the Sec.retary to the Board of the School of Med1c1ne (Mr C L Brown) Room 6E 112 Flinders Medical Centre

Fifth Year Course

Mark I Curriculum (Fifth Year Course Co ordinator Professor W R ]ones)

The hfth year of the course consists of hve core topics 90501 Medicine Term 90502 Obstelrzcs and Gynaecology Term 90503 Paediatrics Term 90504 Psychiatry Term and 90505 Surgery Term There IS no prov1s1on for elective studies dunng fifth year Dunng this year one flf th of the class 1s engaged at any one time on an assignment to one of the five clinical Unlts listed above and rotates through all five Untts throughout the ye'lr Each term IS of seven weeks duration In add1uon to the chn1cal assignments students paruc1pate throughout the year in the following weekly acuv1ues (a) Chn1co pathological case presentauons (b) Chn1cal pharmacology seminars (c) Seminars on the 1nterpretauon of laboralOry invest1gattons They should also attend autopsies as 1n Fourth Year and before the end of Fifth Year complete the requnement to fully document three autopsies and 'vnte a comprehensive report covenng the pauent s clinical man1festalions and relate these to the autopsy report

It IS intended that dunng the fifth year of the course the student should consohdate and develop the skills and knowledge acquired 10 the previous years of Lhe course and should apply these sktlls and knowledge to the care of pauents In parucular the student should be able al the end of the year to

I (a) arnve al a d1agnos1s (b) formulate a plan of p'luenl 1n'ln1bcment (c) prescribe drugs 1n a r'lllonal manner (d) evaluate paL1ent care u1d progress (e) co1np1le a con1prehens1ve problem onentated medical record

2 Acqune pracucal skills and expenence 10 the total care of patients

3 Perform a number of specific procedures relevant lo each of the chn1cal terms

4 Select and interpret simple laboratory tesrs and x rays

5 Find information from vanous sources 1nclud1ng the library 1n the ma1or 'treas of med1c1ne

Assessrnenl In 'lddiuon to the prog1ess1ve and end of term '1.ssess1nent '1.ssoc1atcd wllh each topic there '"111 be a comprehens1'e mulu d1sc1pl1n'lry e).J.min 1uon 'll the end of the ycJl compns1nb a 3 hour muluple choice quesuon pape1 and a 3 hou1 essJy/sho1 t 1nswer pJper Progression to theSr\.th Year of the coursC\\ 111 be determined by pe1formance111 the examrnauons n1 each topic 111 the'lulopsy reports and lt the end of the )C'lre'\.a1n111Juon~

90501 MEDICINE TERM Dr I Maddocks

This is intended to be a highly ptacucal and clnucal term 10 which the most important activity for students '"111 be an attachment to a clinical un1tas a \.,rork1ngmcmber ror this

715

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

reason formal sessions have been kepl lo a m1n1mum The acuv1l1es proposed include

I Attachment to a Clinical Un1l (1) Students \Vtll h'lve a cltntc'll attachment tluoughout the 7 week assignment As working members of clinical units students vnll paruc1pate in chn1cal care of the pat1e11ts of those unns from the Accident and Lme1gency Department through to wards thcaucs 1nvesug'lt1on laboratories and 111tens1vc care unus They \viii parnc1pate 1n clerk1ng'll all limes (11) Students will part1c1pate tn all the \Vorking acuv1ues of the Unll 1nclud1ng 'vard rounds x ray sessions and other Unu meetings (111) Student<; will each complete at least 5 case commentaries dunng their Unit attachment (1v) Students will follow the progress of a number of pauents after discharge from the Una v1su1ng them at home or 'lt \York 2 Clinical Tutorials Four tutonals will be conducted each "'eek for the students attached to mechcal units general medicine (2) neurology(!) cardiology (I)

3 Consultzng Clinic Attendances Dunng their medical unll attachment all students will be required to attend one dermatology outpanent session each week 111 add1uon to the normal chn1csof the Units to which they are attached

Assessment (I) A tutor nominated by the 5th year medicine term co ordinator will complete a comprehensive 1nd1v1dual report on each student (2) Case h1stones will form pan of this assess1nent (3) Towards the end of the Una attachment each !.tudent will attend an oral cl1n1cal exam1nauon

Set books Books already purchased for topics 90307 Introduction to Clinical Medicine 90401 Cl1n1cal Skills and 90402 Cl1n.1cal Sciences should be retained for lhts term

Reference books As !or topics 90307 90401 and 90402

90502 OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY TERM Dr G ] Andersen

The aims of lhis topic are

l To demonstrate lhe relevance of reproducllon and Its abnormahttes to health care 111 general

2 To equip the gradu·ue wah a kno\vledgt of the core contenl of Obstct11cs and Gynaecology at the primary care level 3 To equip the graduate to pursue vocational tra1n1ng as a General Practll1oner 01

Spec1al1st Obstetr1c1an Gynaecologist 4 To equip the graduate wuhout necessarily undertaking further trauung to (a) manage common gynaecological problems including contraception and sexual dtfhculues (b) 1n1l1ate management of obstetrical and gynaecolog1cal emergencies (c) deltver and resuscitate a newborn infant 1n an emergency The student will be attached to an obstetrical and gynaecological Unit for the seven weeks of the term The programme to be followed includes lectures small group tuton'lls cl1n1cal tutorials seminars Jnd chn1co patholog1cal conferences In add1uon the student 1s required to attend Special Chn1cs 1nclud1ng ram1ly Planning and Ferultty Chn1c~ 'ls rostered to be 1n auendance at the Labour Delivery Su11e as rostered and to pcrson'llly confine ftve pauenlS

Assessment (1) Case Commentaries Commcntane!. on the labour and delivery of the pauents pcrsonJlly conducted by the student

716

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

(11) Clinical examznation An ob1ecuve structured chn1cal exam1nat1on at the end of the assignment which \v1ll include real or simulated patients short patient management problems x rays pathological specimens and fetal monitor tracings

(111) Reports Reports on the students performance and attitudes in Small Group Tutorials Clinical Attachments and attendance 1n the Labour Delivery Suue

Set books Llewellyn Jones D Fundamentalsofobstetncsandgynaecology vol I-Obstetrics 2nd ed (Faber & Faber 1977) Llewellyn Jones D Fundamentals of obstetrics and gynaecology vol II - Gynaecolorey 2nd ed (F1ber & Faber 1978 Page E S V1llee C A and V11lee D B Human reproduction - the core content of obstetrics, gynaecology and pediatrics 2nd ed (Saunders 1976)

Reference books Pntchard J A and MacDonald P C Williams obstetncs 15th ed (Appleton Century Crofts 1976) Novak E R Jones G S and Jones H W Novak s textbook of gynaecology 9th ed (Wllhams & W1lk1ns 1975) Jeffcoate N Pnnciples of gynaecology 4th ed (Buuerworths 1975)

90503 PAEDIATRICS TERM Professor G M Kneebone

This topic is designed to provide a course in chn1cal Paed1atncs wl11ch will adequately educate the student 1n regard to basic and common problems 1n childhood The course will involve paediatric med1c1ne perinatal med1c1ne surgery and related subspec1alt1es e g orthopaechc surgery ENT ophthalmology child psyduatry and child health both at a hospital and communuy level The specific aims of the course are (1) To obtain a paed1atnc history from a child s family lvh1ch provides comprehensive 1nformat1on of the mechcal social and psychological aspects of the chtld and his famtly (2) To become sufficiently proftc1ent in the chn1cal examination of children that a reasonable and reasoned approach to the child s problems can be made (3) To be able to interpret the relevant factors in the history and exam1nat1on of chtldren to properly understand the physiolog1cal and biochemical basis of childhood disease and disorder (4) To become proficient 10 the following areas of chn1cal Paediatrics (i) common disorders or diseases of infancy and chtldhood (u) the nature and s1gn1hcance of diseases hav1ng genetic or tnhented potential (111) the relauonsh1p between disorders 1n growth and development and cluld health (1v) the common problems of the child and the communuy The course programme will include attendance at Consulting Chntc sessions ward rounds 1n neonatal and general paediatrics community paed1atr1c attachments case onented specialty seminars small group and whole group tutorials on chn1cal or related problems Each student will be requued to present three case reports arising from the Consulung Clinic sessions or ward rounds and a fourlh report on a matemo neonatal pro1ectrelaung to a newborn infant whose case will be allotted to the student at thecommencementof the term and whose progress will be followed throughout the term

Assessment will be based on (1) Reports on performance throughout attachment (11) Case reports ( u1) Clinical exam1nat1on

Set books Apley J Paediatrics (Batlhere Tindall 1973) Or Smith D ed Introduction lo clinical paedtalrtcs (Saunders 1977) Harper R and Yoon J Handbook of neonatology (Yearbook Publishers 1974)

717

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Jones P Clinical paediatric surgery (Ure Smuh 1970) Kempe C Sliver H andO Bncn D Currenlpaedzatncd1agno~Handlrealn1cnl(L1nge Medical 1976)

Reference book Nelson W L Textbook of paediatrics latesl cdtllon (Saunde1s)

90504 PSYCHIATRY TERM Professor R S Kalucy

Dunng this term students lVlll be altached to Senior Psych1atnsts rcpre~cnttng the dtsctphnes 0£ psychosomauc med1c1ne neuropsych1atry psychother 1py child 1dole~cence and fa1n1ly psych11try and gcner1l adult psychtdtry Students wtll be expected to hve 1n on a number of nights to gam expenence in the psychtatnc aspects of accident and emergency work and acute admission centres Emphasis will be placed on cl1n1cal experience and clerkship Seminars in Lhc form of cltntro patholog1cal sessions will be organised twice a week

Assessment \Vtll be based on (1) a supervisors report (u) a c1se comment1ry 1nd (111) an oral cxamtnauon emph1s1s1ng skills tn history taking mental st ue ex un1111t1on d11gnost1c skill and baste management procedures

Set book Kolb L C 1Ylodern clinical psycl11atry 8th ed (S1unders 1973)

Reference books Freedtnan A i\tl K1plan Fl I and Oarlock B J Alodern ~ynopsls of cornprehe11s1ve textbook of psychiatry/II 2nd ed (Williams&: 'V1lk1ns 1976) Solomon P and Patch V C flandbook of psycl11atry 3rd ed (L1ngc 1971)

90505 SURGERY TERM Dr V R Marshall

Dunng the Surgery term It is planned that each student will undertake the follo\vtng attachments Anaesthesia One week 111 the Unnof Anaesthesia with supe1v1s1on by a membe1 of Lhc 1n1e<;thettc st1ff Instruction will he given 1n tnaesthet1c techn1qu<. auwty m11nten1nce rtsp1r1tory physiology .ind care and 1nanag<.menl of the unconscious p1ttent

Accident & £rnergency & Orthopaedics Tlus p lTl of the <;UTbery term lVould con<;1st of dttachments of one week c1ch to (1) The Accident & Emergency Department supervised by the Accident & Lmerge-ncy­Consultant and (2) The Orthopaedic Unll with involvement in Consulttng Clinics Plaster Chn1c and Hand Clinics to obtain a broad expenence in Orthopaedics

General Surgery fhe 1ema1n1ng four weeks will be devoted to General Surger) wtth 1nvolvcment 111

specialist Cl1111cs Dunng tlus 1lt1chmcnt the students will be supervised by '1 gencr.il ~urgcon fh1s will 1nvolve clerking pal1tnts wnung c1secom1nent 1ne5 1nd follo,vu1~ the c.ourse of each pauent s ho~p1t1lisauon

Ophthalmology & £ N T Dunng each of these attachments the equivalent of one day a week lVtll be devoted to ophthalmology and otorh1nolaryngology

Assessment will be based on ( 1) a comprehensive report on the students performance 1n cltntcal 'vork (u) c'1.se commentanes and (111) 1n oral cltn1cal exam1nat1on

718

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Set books Books already purchased for topics 90307 Introduction to Clinical Medicine 90401 Clinical Skills and 90402 Clinical Sciences should be retained for tlus term

Reference books As for topics 90307 90401 and 90402

B COURSES FOR THE HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MEDICAL SCIENCE

The regulations governing the Honours degree of Bachelor of Medical Science are set out in Schedule 12 to Statute IO l Bachelors Degrees and Diplomas It ts aoneyearcourse that may be taken by students enrolled 1n the B M B S course usually by an intercalated year of full ume study after completion of the Third Year of that course or tn exo"pttonal cases by concurrent part time study \Vluch may include work taken as lheelect1vec. 'lmponentof the medical course together wtth addtttonal work earned oul dunng the students own ume and in vat.ations The work for the degree Lonsists of the single top1e, 91401 Honours Medical Science

91401 HONOURS MEDICAL SCIENCE

Dr P ] Barter

This topic involves the equivalent of one year of full time study compns1ng (a) A programme of formal hterature review in an approved area leading to the submission of an essay at the c..ondus1on ol the eQu1valentof one term of full time study and (b) An approved research project leading to the subm1ss1on of a 1hes1s Students requ1nng further rnfo1mat1on concen1ini; the work n .. qu1re<l for the Honou1~ degree of Bachelor of Med teal Science are advised to consult the hedd of the Unit 111 'vh1ch they propose to carry out the work for the degree

C COURSES FOR THE POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMA IN NUTRITION AND DIETETICS

The course for the postgraduate diploma 1n nutrition and d1eteucs extends over one year Dunng this penod students undertake three terms of study (each of ten weeks duration) 1n the Flinders Medical Centre and 1n add1uon spend hf teen ·weeks in an 1ntemsh1p d.t an approved 1nstltutton The course consists of the single topic 92401 Dteteucs and human nutnuon

92401 DIETETICS AND HUMAN NUTRITION Dr Alan Stewart

This topic consists of two parts

Part One A course of lectures tutonals seminars and pracucal work dunng three ten week terms and amounung to approximately 30 contact hours a week The subject matter covered includes Food The complete range of actlv1t1es from the production of food to the delivery of a meal at a patients bedside food processing and storage transport marketing chemistry hygiene food regulations food preparauons the organ1sauon and management of insutuuonal food services Food and man The interaction between food as a source of nutrients and the nuu1ent requirements of 1nd1v1dual humans 111 both normal cond1uons and disease states metabohs1n of nutrients assessment of nutnuonal requirements use of food t'lbles med1cal aspects of dietary treatment diet therapy team approdch to health Cdredehvery

719

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Food and society The functions of food in society the use of food to express relallonslups and tosymbohsevalues the formation of atutudes to food the educal1onal respons1bilit1es of d1el1t1ans theetlucs and techniques of intervention to change food hablls measurement of the efficacy of nutnt1on education in the community nutrll1onal <;urvcys social and economic factors 1n the nutnuon of vulnerable groups

Part Two Students who sausfactonly complete Part One of the course \Vlll then undertake a period of internship lasting for 15 weeks At least half of this penod will be spent in the d1etet1c department of a hospital The remainder may be spent 1n ~ome ot11er appropnate inst1tullon such as acommuntty health centre or a large scale catenng service

Assessment Students are required to perform sausfactonly in each of the follo,v1ng three components (1) Term ex.J.mtnauons in the last week of term 1 and term 2 503 (u) Continuous assessment of work dunng the course (tutonals seminars project) 25% (111) Reports of supervisors of 1ntemsh1p tra1n1ng 25'31

Set books Davidson S Passmore R and Brock J r Human nutrition and dietetics 6th ed (Churchill L1v1ngstone 1975) Lagua R A Claudio V S and Thiele V F Nutrition and dzet therapy reference dictionary 2nd ed (Mosby 1974) Thomas S and Carden M Tables of composition of Australian foods 5th ed (Austrahan Government Pubhshing Service 1970) Williams S R Nutrition and diet therapy 3id ed (Mosby 1977)

Reference books Clements T W and Rogers J F Food and diet for family health in Australia and New Zealand (Reed 1972) Conn E E and Stumpf P K Outlines of biocheniistry 3rd ed (Wiley 1972)• Goodhart R S and Shils M E Modern nutrition tn heallh and disease 5th ed (Lea & Febtger 1973) McGilvery R W Biochemistry a functional approach (Saunders 1970) Mayer J Human nutrition zts physiological medical and social aspects(Thomas 1974) Robinson C H Fundarnentals of normal nutrition 2nd ed (Macmillan 1973) Robinson C Normal and therapeutic nutrition 14th ed (Macmillan 1973)

D THE DEGREE or MASTER OF SCIENCE IN CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY

The course of study for the degree of Master of Science tn Chntcal Biochemistry is offered on a two year full time or three year part ume basis One academic year wtll be devoted to course work and practical work and the remaining year will be spent in the supervised conduct of an ong1nal research project The course aims by tntegrauon of techniques and knowledge from a wide range of sc1ent1fic fields to provide dn introducuon to the basic b1ochem1cal and pathological informauon and theones knowledge of which ts a necessary pre requisite to the understanding of the analyses earned out tn diagno~t1c service chn1cal biochemistry laboratories It will emphasise the 1ntelhgent appltcdtton of the results of b10<-hemu .. al analyses 1n the d1a11nos1s dete<-tton prognosis and tre'ltmentof disease The course 1s designed to train persons already qualified 1n relevant baste sciences for employment tn d1agnost1c service medicdl laboratories The head of the Unll of Chntcal B1ochem1stry 1s Dr M N Berry Dr C G Fraser is the co ordinator of the course The topics for the course are

Part One 94501 Analyucal B1ochem1stry 94502 Chn1cal Laboratory Pracllce 94503 Laboratory Management 94504 Cbem1cal Pathology 94?05 Practtcal Chtucal Chemistry

720

(9 units) (3 unlts) (3 u111ts) (9 unlls)

(12 untts)

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Part Two 94506 Research Project and D1ssertatton for M Sc in

Chn1cal B1ochem1suy

94501 ANALYTICAL BIOCHEMISTRY

Units 9 Level Graduate (MSc) Duration Full year

Mr I Farrance

(36 unus)

Class (on tract 2 on<.. hour lectures \Veekly and p1act1cal work and scrn1n..1.1s an1ount1ng to ..i.pprox1mately 4 hou1!'.. weekly Pre requisites MSc Candidature Assessment By examination

The topic compnses pnnc1ples of analysis specuophotomeuy £lame and atomic absorption spectrophotometry fluonmetry chromatography electrophorcs1s rad1ochem1stry 1mmunochem1stry toxicology continuous flow andd1screteautom..1.t1on The topic aims to provide an apprec1auon of thepnnc1plesof laboratory 1nstrumentauon

Set books \VIilard H H Mernu L L and Dean J A Instrumental methods of analysis 5th eel (Van Nostrand 1974) Henry R J Cannon D C and Winkleman J W Clinical chemistry principles and techniques 2nd ed (Hatper & Row 1974) Wootton I D P Mzcroanalyszs zn medical biochemzstry 5th ed (Churchill L1v1ngton 1971)

Unlls 3

94502 CLINICAL LABORATORY PRACTICE Mr L A Penberthy

Level Graduate (M Sc) Durauon Fust half year Class Contact 1 one hour lecture \Veekly and practical \'/ork amounung to 3 hours a \'leek Pre rcqu1s1tes MSc Candidature Assessment By exam1nauon

The topic aims to give an 1ns1ght ullo the problems of samplecollect1on preservation and handling the theory pracuce and analysis of qu'll1tycontrol and labor'ltory accred11auon schemes the producuon of reference values and the use of untts and the production of reports The apphcat1on of data processing techniques calculators and co1nputens'lt1on of laboratories will then be considered

Set book Henry R J Cannon D C and \V1nkleman J W Clinical chemistry principles and techniques 2nd cd (Harper & Ro'v 1974)

Units 3

94503 LABORATORY MANAGEMENT Mr L A Penberthy

Level Graduate (MSc) Durauon Second half year Class Contact 1 one hour seminar per week seminars etc amounung to 3 hours 'l week Pre requ1saes M Sc Candidature Assessment By essays

The aim of this topic is to examine the development of cl1111cal b1ochemu.rry l'lbor 1tones ..i.nd the. staff \Vho are employed 1n them Hl order to p1ov1de an introduction to the manJgement Jnd organ1sauon of d1agnosuc service laboratories

721

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

Areas covered will be pnnc1ples of management technologist rra1n1ng budgeung and financial organ1sat1on organ1sauon of health services personnel management laboratory safety

Set book Johnson A P Organisation and management of hospital laboratories (Buttenvorths 1969)

94504 CHEMICAL PATHOLOGY Dr C G Fraser and Dr R N Walmsley

Unas 9 Level Graduate (MSc) Durauon Full year Class Contact 2 one hour lectures per w·eek l one hour tutonal per week 'Vard rounds and cltn1co patholog1cal conferences as arranged Pre requ1s1tes MSc Candidature Assessment By exam1nauon and by problem solving papers

The topic aims to provide students w1th a knowledge of b1ochem1stry phy::i1ology and mechc1ne 1n order to provide a basis for the understanding of the analyses carried out 1n d1agnost1c laboratones 111e topic lv11l emphasise the 1ntegranon of chn1cal and basic b1ochem1suy and the attention of the student 'v1ll be dtrected to the changes from normal which are found 1n pathological cond1ttons Theapphcat1on of theresultsofbtochemical analyses in the diagnosis treatment detection and prognosis of disease will becons1dercd in detail Areas covered w1ll 1ncludeb1ochem1stry of carbohydrates amino acids proteins v1tam1ns hp1ds and porphynns calcium phosphate iron and metal metabolism acid base and salt waterhomeostas1s inborn errors of metabolism chemical pathology of renal hepatic endocrine and gastro1ntesttnal funcuon c11n1tal en1ymolo~y them1cal pathology ofC S I

Set books Stanbury J B and others The -1nctabolic basH of inherited dnease 3rd cd (McGt '1\\

Hill 1972) Duncan G G Diseases of metabolism 7th ed (Saunders, 1971) 2 vol Ztlva J f and Pannall P R Clinical chemistry in diagnosis and treatment 2nd ed (Year Book Medical 1975) Whuby L G Percy Robb I W and Smith A F Lecture notes on clinical chemistry (Blackwell 1975)

94505 PRACTICAL CLINICAL CHEMISTRY

Units 12 Level Graduate (M Sc) Duration rull year Class Contact See below Pre requ1sttes MSc Candidature Assessment See below

Dr C G Fraser

Students will undertake supervised \Vork in the Sections of the rout1ned1agnost1cChn1cal B1ochem1stry service laboratory The aim of the topic is that the student should gain practical experience in all techniques used 111 Chnical Chemistry Assessment lv1ll be continuous by the appropnate Head of Section

94506 RESEARCH PROJECT AND DISSERTATION FOR M Sc IN CLINICAL BIOCHEMISTRY

Units 36 Level Graduate (MSc) Duration One year full time Class Contact Personal direcuon Pre requisites Sausfactory compleuon of hrst year M Sc programme

722

SYLLABUSES-MEDICINE

The d1ssenauon will be on a particular topic 1n Biochemistry Chn1cal Chemistry or Chemical Pathology The results of the research 1n a selected Secuon of the Department will be presented as a thesis On compleuon of the work students will be required to undergo an oral exam1nauon

723

SYLLABUSES-EARTII SCIENCES

SCHOOL OF EARTH SCIENCES Students are expected to procure the prescnbed edition of all set text books Unless othenv1se noted the latest edition should be obtained Those books indicated by an asterisk (•) are available in paperback or economical student ed1uons The name(s) of the staff member(s) pnmanly responsible for a given topic and to whom enqu1nes pertaining to the topic should be duected 1s shown in itahcs below the topic utle

First Year Topzc zn Earth Sciences

81100 EARTH SCIENCES I Untts 9 Class Cont.act 3 lectures and 3 hours of laboratory work a week throughout the year Attendance at field excursions will also be requued In a manner which emphasises the untty of Earth Sciences as a study of our physical environment the lectures will deal with

FIRST TERM Dr H H Veeh Geology-weathering processes depos1uonal environments origin and nature of rocks and minerals principles of stratigraphy palaeontology geology evoluuon of the continents

SECOND TERM Dr F H Chamalaun Geophysics-the solar system rotation of earth seismology and the earths interior the earths gravity and magnetic fields thermal evolution and ongtn of the earth

THIRD TERM Professor G W Lennon and Professor P Schwerdtfeger Oceanography-physical and chemical properties of seawater processes in the oceans energy sources boundary phenomena waves udes Meteorology-basic physical properties of au and the structure of the atmosphere

Field Work There will be the equivalent of three one day excursions dunng the yea1

Text book Press F and Siever R Earth (Freeman 1974)

Reference books Abell G Exploration of the universe 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969) Atlas of Australian resources 2nd senes geology 2nd ed (Department of National Development Canberra) Bennison G Introduction to geological structures and maps 2nd ed (Arnold 1969) Bott M HP The interior of the earth (Arnold 1971) Dana JD and Hurlbut CS Manual of mineralogy 18th ed (Wiley 1971) Garland GD Introduction to geophysics (Saunders 1971) Gross M G Oceanography a vzew of the earth (Prenuce Hall 1972) Mcintosh D H and 1 horn AS Essentials of meteorology (Wykeham 1969) Middlemiss F Fossils (Allen 1969) Pickard G L Descriptive physical oceanography (Pergamon 1963) Riehl H and Dickinson A Introduction to theatmosbhen;2nded (McGraw Hill 1972) Strahler AN The earth sciences 2nd ed (Harper & Row 1971) Sverdrup HU Johnson MW and Fleming RH Theoceans(Prenuce Hall 1963) Talbot J L and Nesbitt R W Geological excursions in the Mount Lofty Ranges and the Fleurieu Peninsula (Angus & Robertson 1968)

Set books and Text books are rt quired reading on which students may be tested StudentsaRexpected to have theuown copies of all books listed as Set books or Text books muluple copies of these books will not be available m thl' Library Prel1mmary readmg 1s readmg wh1Ch the studl'nt 1s expected to lnvecompkted before the commencement of teach mg and on which he may at any ume be te~ted Further reading and Recommeuded read mg where not otherwise speafied md1cate read mg which the student 1s expected to do m the course of smdymg the Set books Reference books are books v.h1ch the student will fmd useful m the comse of studying the lop1cs !or wh1Ch they are speofled

801

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

Group I lnterdisciplinary Topics in Earth Sciences

81202 COMPUTING TECHNIQUES IN EARTH SCIENCES Dr R A D Byron Scott

Unus 2 Class Contact l afternoon a week dunng first term Introducuon to computer programming and data analysis techniques

Text book. McCracken D D A gurde to ALGOL programming (Wiley 1962)

Reference book Bauman R and others Introduction to ALGOL (Prentice Hall 1964)

82214 HYDROLOGY Dr j Sunderland

Units 2 5 Class Contact 3 lectures a week dunng third term Prec1pitauon run off 1nhltrauon groundwater and stream flow Evaporauon tra.nspirauon the water budget

Reference books Bruce JP and Clark R H Introduction to hydrometeorology (Pergamon 1966)• Linsley R K Kohler MA and Paulhaus J L Hydrology for engineers (McGraw Hill 1958) Marshall T J Relations between water and soil (Commonwealth Agncultural Bureaux 1959) Mcintosh DH and Thom AS Essentials of meteorology (Wykeham 1969) Todd D K Ground water hydrology (Wiley 1959)

Group I Topics in Marine Geology and Geophysics

83204 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS I Dr F H Chamalaun

Unus 3 Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week dunng first term Pre requ1sue 81100 Earth Sc1nces I Pnnc1ples of geophysical methods used in study of the earth s crust and 1n mineral explorauon, potential theory gravity magnetic res1suvny and I P methods

Reference books Dobnn M D Introduction to geophysical prospecting 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1960) Grant F S and West G F Interpretation theory in applied geophysics (McGraw Hill 1965) Gnfftths DH and King R F Applied geophysics for engineers and geologists (Pergamon 1965) Keller G V and Fnschknecht F C Electrzcal methods in geophysical prospecting (Pergamon 1966) Orellana E and Mooney HM Master tables and curoesforvert1cal electrzcalsounding over layered structures (Intersc1ence 1966) Parasn1s D S Mining geophysics 2nd ed. (Elsevier 1973) Telford WM Geldhart LP Shernff, RE and Keys DA Applied Geophysics (Cambridge Univ Pr 1976) Van Nostrand R and Cook K Interpretation of resistivity data Geological survey Profess1onal paper 499 (US Govt Pnnung Office 1966)

802

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

Units 3

83208 EARTH'S CRUST AND UPPER MANTLE Dr ] Sunderland

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutonal a week dunng third term Pre requ1s1te 81100 Earth Sciences I

Gross surface features of the earth Gravny anomahes 1sostasy vanauon 1n crustal thickness Explosion seismology structure and nature of conunental/ocean1c crust/upper mantle Low velocuy zone paleomagneusm/cont1nental dnft Manne magnetic anomahes/seafloor spreading Earthquake d1stnbuuon mechanism/plate tectonics Heat flow convection plate dnv1ng forces Geolog1cal 1rrlphcat1ons

Text book Smith P J Topics in geophysics (Open Univ Pr 1973)

Reference books Bott M HP The interior of the earth (Arnold 1971) Gass T G Smith P J and Wilson RC L Understanding the earth (Artemis 1971) Hart P] and Belousov V V The earth s crust and upper mantle (Amencan Geophysical Union 1969) Jacobs J A Russell RD andTuzoWilson J Physics and geology 2nded (McGraw mu 1974) Le Pichon X Franchetau J and Bonnin J Plate tectonics (Elsevier 1973) Robertson E The nature of the solid earth (McGraw Hill 1971) Wylhe P J The dynamic earth (Wiley 1971)

83293 GEOPHYSICAL MAP INTERPRETATION LABORATORY I Dr F If Chamalaun

Units 2 Co requisites 83204 Exploration Geophysics I 81202 Compuung Techniques in Earth Sciences C...lass Contact l afternoon a week of laboratory work dunng first and second terms

Sampling and contounng gravity and magnetic interpretation computer programming with apphcauons to geology and geophysics

Reference books As for 83204 Also Davis JC Statistics and data analysis in geology (Wiley 1973) Harbaugh J W and Bonham C'.arter G Computer simulation tngeology(Wiley 1970) Harbaugh J W and Mernam D F Computer applzcatzons in stratigraphic analysis (Wiley 1969)

83294 GEOPHYSICAL MODEL EXPERIMENTS LABORATORY Dr I Sunderland

Units 2 Co requ1s1te 83204 Explorauon Geophysics I Class Contact 2 afternoons a week dunng second term

Expenments 1llustrat1ng a number of geophysical methods

Text and reference books As for 83204

Unlts 2 5

84211 PETROLOGY Dr M] Abbott

Class Contact 3 lectures a week dunng first term Pre requ1stte 81100 Earth Sciences I

Acuv1ty and evolution of magmas characteristics and class1ficauonof1gneous rocks and some common associations in the field contact and regional metamorphism-processes

803

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

reactions and products metamorphic fac1es and factes senes synthetic silicate systems­b1nary and simple ternary-and apphcauons to petrogenes1s Reference books Bayly B Introduction to petrology (Prenuce Hall 1968) Ehlers E G The 1nterpretat1on of geological phase diagrams (Freeman 1972) Mason B and Berry L G Elements of mineralogy (Freeman 1967) Verhoogen J and others The earth (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970) Wtlhams H Turner F and Gilbert C Petrography (Freeman 1954)

(Not offered in 1978)

Units 3

84213 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY Dr A E Grady

Class Contact 3 lectures and 1 tutorial a week dunng hrst term Pre requisnes 81100 Earth Sciences I

Recommended cognate topic - 84282 Structural Geology Laboratory Defonnauon of rocks descnpuon and class1f1cauon of cleavages faults and 101nts and folds 1nterpretauon of geological structures studies 0£ classic deformed regions

Text book Hobbs B E Means W D and Wtlhams Structural geology (Wiley 1976)0

Reference books Badgley PC Structural and tectonic principles (Harper & Row 1965) Dennis J G Structural geology (Ronald 1972) Suter LU de Structural geology 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1964) Hiils ES Elements of structural geology 2nd ed (Chapman & Hall 1972)• Spencer E W lnlroduct1on to the structure of the earth (McGraw Htll 1969)• Spry A Metamorphic textures (Pergamon 1969)• Verhoogen J and others The earth (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970)

84205 SEDIMENTARY ENVIRONMENTS MODERN & ANCIENT Professor C C von der Borch

Units 3 Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a 'veek dunng third term Pre requ1s1te Normally 8fl00 Earth Sciences l

Chemical mineralogical textural and structural aspects of sediments dynamics of sed1mentat1on modern depostt1onal systems tnterpretauon of ancient depos1uonal systems snaugraphic nomenclature tectonics and sed1mentauon

Text books Selley RC An introduction to sed1mentology (Academic 1976) Selley RC Ancient sedimentary environments (Chapman & Hall 1971)

Reference books Bathurst R G C Carbonate sediments and their d1agenesis 2nd ed (Elsevier 1975) Dunbar C and Rogers J Principles of stratigraphy (WiJey 1963) Folk R L Petrology of sedimentary rocks (Hemphill 1968) Gould HR (eel) Recogn1tzon of ancient sedimentary environments (Society of Economic Palaeontologists and M1neralog1sts Special Puhl 16 1972) Krumbein W C and Sloss LL Stratigraphy and sedimentation 2nd ed (Freeman 1968) PetUJohn F J and Potter P E Atlas and glossary of primary sedimentary structures (Spnnger Verlag 1964) Potter P E and Pett11ohn F J Palaeocurrents and basin analysu (Springer Verlag 1963) Reineck HE and Singh I B Depos1t1onalsed1mentaryenv1ronmenls(Spnnger Verlag 1973)

804

SYLI ABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

84281 OPTICAL MINERALOGY AND PETROGRAPHY LABORATORY Dr M J Abbott and Professor C C von der Borch

Unns 4 0 Co requisttes 84211 Petrology Class Contact. l lecture a 'veek and 9 hours laboratory \Vork a week dunng first term

Theory and m1croscop1c study of opucal properties of minerals and study of igneous sechmenrary and metamorphic rock types 1n thin section

Text books Deer WA Howie RA andZussman J An introduction to the rock forming minerals (Longman 1966)• or Kerr P Optical mineralogy 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1959)0

\Vilhams H and others Petrography (Freeman 1954)

Reference books Bloss FD Introduction to the methods of optical crystallography (Holt Rinehart&: Winston 1961) Dana JS and Hurlbut GS Manual of mineralogy 18th ed (Wiley 1971)• Folk R L Petrology of sedimentary rocks (Hemphills 1968) Mason B and Berry L G Elements of mineralogy (Freeman 1967) Pettijohn F J Sedimentary rocks 2nd ed (Harper 1956) Wahlstrom EE Optical crystallography 4th ed (Wiley 1969)

84282 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY LABORATORY (Not offered 1n 1978) Dr A E Grady

Unns 2 Class Contact 6 hours a week dunng fust term Pre requ1sne 81100 Earth Sciences I Co requisite 84213 Structural Geology

Geomelllc techniques tn structural geology and pnnc1ples of geolog1cal map interpretation

Reference books Compton R R Manual of field geology (Wiley 1962) Ph1lhps F C Use of stereographic pro1ectron an structural geology 3rd ed (Arnold 1971) Ragan D M Structural geology 2nd ed (Wiley 1973)•

Unas I 5

84283 OPTICAL MINERALOGY LABORATORY A Dr M] Abbott

Class Contact I lecture and 3 hours laboratory work a \Veek dunng first term

Theory and m1croscop1c study of optical properues of minerals

Reference books

Bloss F D Introduction to the methods of optical crystallography (Holt Rinehart and Winston 1961) Wahlsuom E E Optical crystallography 4th ed (Wiley 1969)

Unus 2

84299 GEOLOGICAL FIELD CAMP Professor C C von der Borch

Class Contact Dunng v'l.canon approximately seven days Pre requisite 81100 Earth Sciences I

nus toptc entails approximately 7 days held geological mapping The camp will be held in a locahty remote from Adelaide etther 1n the Flinders Ranges or

805

'lVLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

the Olary district Following the camp field data will be processed and a geological map and report prepared for assessment

Reference books Compton RR Manual of field geology (Wiley 1962) Lahee F H Field geology 6th ed (McGraw Hill 1961) Parkin L W ed Handbook of SA geology (C:oeol Survey of SA 1969)

Group I Topics in Meteorology and Oceanography

Units 2 5

82201 APPLIED ASTRONOMY Dr R A D Byron Scott

Class Contacl 3 leclures a week dunng second term Pre requ1s1tes See footnote [I] Reference systems in astronomy and geophysics spherical tngonometry elementary terrestnal nav1gauon the celestial sphere astronavrgauon

Reference books Hopkins F N ed Nones nautical tables (Imray Laune None and Wilson 1973) Nautical almanac for the year 1977 (HMS 0 1975) Smart WM Text book on spherical astronomy, 5th ed (C.ambndge Univ Pr 1965)• U S A Naval Oceanographic Office Sight reduction tables for marine navigation vols l 4 (US Govt Pnnung Office 1970)

82202 PLANETARY SCIENCE Dr f A T Bye and Professor G W Lennon

Units 2 5 Class ContacL 3 lectures a week dunng hrst term Pre requ1-.1tes See footnote [I]

Unperturbed planetary motions satellite orbits satelhte nav1gauon the rotauon of the earth tide generating forces

Text book. Van de Kamp P Elements of astromechanics (Freeman 1964)

Reference book Smart WM Text book on spherical astronomy 5th ed (Cambridge Univ Pr 1965)

Untts 2 5

82215 REGIONAL OCEANOGRAPHY DrjATBye

Class Contact 3 lectures a 'veek dunng first term Pre requtsnes See footnote [ 1]

Survey of problems and methods of oceanography c1rculat1on generauon and stat1sucs of ocean 'vaves ndes and their analysis Conservation equauons The energy balance Mean sea levels

1 ext book

Natural history of the Adelaide region (Royal Soc of SA 1976)

Reference books Dtetnch G General oceanography (Wiley 1963) Sverdrup HU and others The oceans (Prenuce Hall 1963) Von Arx W S Introduction to physical oceanography (Addison Wesley 1962)

(IJ These 1op1a have a common cote of pre requ1s11es vu 76100 Phys1a I 60120 Malhemalu:s or61I16 Algebra Aand

63114 Differential and Integral Calculus or 65156 D1fferenual and Integral Qi.kulus C

806

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

Units 2 5

82206 METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATOLOGY Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Class ContacL 3 lectures a week dunng second term Pre requisites See footnote [I]

Survey of problems and methods of meteorology chmatology meteorolog1cal observauons Rad1auon Thermodynamics of moist au The theory and practice of aHcraft alttmetry Stabthty of a straufJed env1ronment Geosuophtc gradient and cyclosuoph1c flow The theory 0£ pressure pattern flying The thermal wind and tts apphcation to differential chart analysis An masses Synopuc meteorology

Text book Natural history of the Adelaide region (Royal Soc of SA 1976)

Reference books Hidy GM The winds (Van Nostrand 1967) Mcintosh DH and Thom AS Essentials of meteorology (Wykeham 1969)• Neuberger H andCahtr J Principlesofclimatology(Holt Rinehart8cW1nston 1969)• Petterssen S Introduction lo meteorology 3rd ed (McGra\v Hill 1969)•

Units 1

82207 THE WEATHER FORECAST I Dr RA D Byron Scott

Class Contact l lecture a week during third term Pre requ1sue 82206 Meteorology and Chmatology

Observallonal techniques of synopuc meteorology Synopuc messages and the organ1sat1on of the global meteorological network The graphical representauon of synopuc data The lectures will be open-ended in durauon and by thetr nature will 1nv1te student part1c1patton

Unus 3

82291 METEOROLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHICAL AND HYDROLOGICAL MEASUREMENTS

Dr I M Bennett

Class Contact 3 hours per week throughout the year Co requisites 82204 Hydrology 82205 Regional Oceanography 82206 Meteorology

An introductory programme of laboratory and field measurements with emphasis on the illustration of physical principles

Reference book Schwerdtfeger P Physical principles of micro meteorological measurements (Elsevier 1976)

Group 11 Topics in Marine Geology and Geophysics

83308 EARTHQUAKE SEISMOLOGY AND THE EARTH'S INTERIOR Dr ] Sunderland

Untts 3 Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a week dunng ftrst term

Se1sm1c wave equauons refracuon and reflecuon energy part1Uoning ray path theory d1spers1on of se1sm1c waves plane waves in layered media Structure of the earth from free oscillauons and earth tides

l ] 1 hese topics have a common core 0£ pre req111s1tes viz 76100 Physics I 60120 Mathematics or61I16 Algebra A and

63114 D1fferenual and lntegr.il Calculus or 63136 D1fferem1al and ln1cgral Calculus C

807

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

Reference books Bullen K E Introduction to the theory of seismology 3rd ed (Cambndge Univ Pr 1963) Grant F S and West S F Interpretation theory in applied geophysics (McGraw Hill 1965) Garland GD Introduction to geophysics (Saunders 1971) Melchior P J The earth tides (Pergamon 1966) Simon RB Earthquake 1nterpretat1ons (Colorado School of Mines 1968) Whue J E Seismic waves (McGraw Hill 1965)

83314 HYDROGEOLOGY (Not offered in 1978) Professor] W Holmes Units 2 5 Class Contact 3 lectures a week during third term

Pnnc1ples of fluid flow 1n porous media groundwater resources petroleum occurrence two fluid flow clays and electrochemical effects

Reference books Davis SN and De Wiest R JM Hydrogeology (McGraw Hill 1966) De Wiest R J M Geohydrology (McGraw Hill 1967) Levorsen A I Geology of petroleum 2nd ed (Freeman 1967) Isotope techniques in groundwater hydrology 1974 (lnternat1onal Atomic Energy Agency Vienna 1974) Muskat M The/low of homogeneous fluids through porous medra(McGraw Hill 1946) (out of print) Pirson SJ Orl reserooir eng1neenng 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1958) Scheidegger A E Thephys1csofflowthroughporousmed1a 3rded (Toronto Univ Pr 1974) Isotope hydrology 1970, Proceedings of a symposium Vienna 1970 (International Atomic Energy Agency 1970) Todd D K Grou.nd~ater hydrology (Wiiey 1964) VerrutJt A Theory of groundwater flow (Macmillan 1970)

83310 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS II Unns 3 Dr l Sunderland Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a \veek dunng second term Pre requisite 83204 Exploration Geophysics I

Velocity of sound 1n rocks pnnciples of reflecuon and refraction seismology field technique Borehole logging pnnc1ples and techniques of electromagnetic prospecung Rad1ometnc methods Reference books Telford WM Geldhart LP Shcnff R r: and Keys DA Applied geophysics (c.ambndge Univ Pr 1976) Grant f S and West G F Interpretation theory 1n applzed geophysics (McGraw Hi11 1976) Dobnn MB Introduction to geophysical prospecting 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1976) Parasnis D S Mrrung geophysics 2nd ed (Elsevier 1973)

83391 GEOPHYSICAL MAP INTERPRETATION LABORATORY II Dr F H Chamalaun

Units 2 Class Contact I afternoon a week in hrst and second term Pre requisite 8~204 Exploration Geophysics I and 83310 Explorauon Geophysics II 83293 Geophysical Map Interpretation I A connnuat1on of 83293 together with res1suv1ty and se1sm1c 1nterpretat1on further computer apphcat1ons

Text and reference books As for 83204 and 83310

808

SYLLABUSES-E \RTH SCIENCES

Unlls 2

83392 GEOPHYSICAL EXPERIMENTS LABORATORY Dr I Sunderland

Class Contact 2 afternoons a week dunng thud term Pre requisite 83204 Exploration Geophysics I Co requ1sne 83310 Exploration Geophysics II

Seismic and electromagneuc modelhng measurement of rock properties

Units 3

84311 IGNEOUS AND METAMORPHIC PETROGENESIS Dr M] Abbott

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutonal a \veek dunng second term Pre requisite 84211 Petrology Occurrence association ongin evolution and petrogenes1s of igneous and metamorphic rock suites magmausm and metamorphism 1n crust and upper mantle meteontes

Reference books Carmichael IS E Turner F J and Verhoogen J Igneous petrology (McGraw Hill 1974) Hess H H and Poldervaart A (eds ) Basalts the Poldervaart treatise on rocks of basaltic composition vols I & II (Wtley 1967) Miyashiro A Metamorphism and metamorphic belts (Allen & Unwin 1973) Ringwood A E Compos1t1on and petrology of the earths mantle (McGral'>' Hill 1975) Turner F J Metamorphic petrology (McGraw Hill 1968) Turner F J & Verhoogen J Igneous and metamorphic petrology 2nd ed (McGraw Htll 1960) Vernon RH Metamorphic processes (Allen & Unwin 1976) Winkler HG r Petrogenests of metamorpluc rocks 4th ed (Spnnger Verlag 1976)• Wood J A Meteorites and the origin of planets (McGrw Hill 1968) Wylhe P J The dynamic earth (Wtley 1971) Yoder HS Generation of basaltic magma (Nat Acad Sci 1976)•

84314 ECONOMIC MINERAL DEPOSITS

(Not offered 1n 1978) Dr A E Grady Unns 2 Class Contact 2 lectures a week dunng thud term

Pnnc1ples involved 1n otl and coal explorauon descnpuon and genesis of ma1or base metal deposus

Reference books Busch D A Stratigraphic traps in sandstones-exploration techniques (Amencan Association of Petroleum Geologists 1974) Chapman R E Petroleum geology a concise study (Elsevier 1973) Haun J D and LeRoy R W Subsurface geology 1n petroleum exploration (Colorado School of Mines 1958) Halbouty MT Geology of giant petroleum fields (Amencan Assoc1auon of Petroleum Geologists Memoir 14 1970) Introduction to Schlumberger well logging (Schlumberger Document No 8 Schlumberger Well Surveying Corporation US A) King R E Stratigraphic 01land gas field (Amcncan Association of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin Memoir 16) (Society of Exploration Geophysicists Special Pubhcauon No 10 1972) Levorsen A E Geology of petroleum 2nd ed (Freeman 1967) Park CF (Jr) and MacD1arm1d RA Ore deposits 2nd ed (Freeman 1970) Pirson SJ Geologic well log analysis (Gulf Co Texas 1970) Stanton R L Ore petrology (McGralV Hill 1972) Young A and Galley J E Fluids in subsurface environments (American Assoc1auon of Petroleum Geologists Memorr 4 1965)

809

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

84315 SOIL SCIENCE Professor I W Holmes

Untts 2 5 Class Contact 3 lectures a week dunng fust term

The physics and chemistry of soils Weathenng clay mineralogy Genesis class1£1cauon and d1stnbution of soils with reference to Austraha and the tropics

Reference books Bartholomew WV and Clark FE eds Soil nitrogen (Amencan Society of Agronomy 1965) Bear FE Chemistry of the soil 2nd ed (Reinhold 1964) Brown G ed X ray identzfication and crystal structures of clay minerals (Mineralogical Society 1961) Childs EC Introduction to the physical basis of soil water phenomena(Wtley 1969) Foth HD and Turk L M Fundamentals of soil ~czence 5th ed (Wiley 1972) Gnm RE Clay mineralogy 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1968) Hagan R M and others Irrigation of agricultural lands (Amencan Society Agronomy 1967) Leeper G W lntroductzon to soil science 4th eel (Melbourne Univ Pr 1962) McLaren AD and Peterson G H Soil b1ochem1stry (Dekker 1967) Northcote K H A factual key for the recognition of Australian soils 3rd ed (Relhm 1971)0

Richards B N Introduction to the soil ecosystem (Longman 1974) Rose CW Agricultural physics (Pergamon 1967)• Russell E W Sozl conditions and plant growth 10th ed (Longman 1973) Stace H CT and others Handbook of Australzan soils (Rel11m 1968) Van Olphen H Introduction to clay colloid chemistry (Wiley 1963)

Unus 2 5

84316 HYDROLOGY AND VEGETATION Professor] W Holmes

Class Contact 3 lectures and I tutorial a week during first term

A d1scuss1on of vegetauon land resources and hydrolog1c change 1n the context of the history of man Quahty and quantity of water resources marginal and zones deserts and the d1stnbuuon of soil resources Plant \vater sotl relationships Sahne soils and land reclamation The sociology of irrigation c1v1hzauons

Reference books Russell E W Soil conditions and plant growth 10th ed (Longman 1973) Black CA Soil plant relationships (Wiley 1968) Monteith J L Principles of environmental physics (Arnold 1973) Slatyer R 0 Plant water relat1onsh1ps (Academic 1970) Stamp L D ed A l11story of land use in and regions (UNESCO 1961)

(Not offered in 1978)

Units 2

84317 TECTONICS Dr A E Grady

Class Contact 2 hours per \Veek dunng third term Pre requisites 83208 Earths Crust and Mantle 84211 Petrology 84205 Sedimentary Environments - Modern and Ancient and 84213 Structural Geology Co requ1s1tes 84311 [gneous and Metamorphic Petrogenes1s and 84205 Sedimentary Envuonments - Modern and Ancient

A topic 1nvest1gaung palaeotecton1cs (as evidenced by terrestrial geology and geophysics modern tectonics (as evidenced by global geology and geophysics) and their possible correlanons

Text book. Cox A Plate tectonics and geomagnetic reversals (Freeman 1973)•

810

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCt..S

Reference books Aubou1n J Geosynclznes (Elsevier 1965) Badgley PC Structural and tectonic principles (Harper&: Row 1965) Bemmelen R W van Geodynam1c models (Elsevier 1972) Le Pichon S Francheteau J and Bonnin J Plate tectonics (Elsevier, 1973) Runcorn S K eel Palaeogeophysics (Academic 1970) Sc1ent1hc Amencan Continents adrift readings (Freeman 1972) Sugimura A and Uyeda S Island arcs Japan and its environs (Elsevier 1973) Tarhng D H and Runcorn S K Implications of continental drift to the earth sciences (Academic 1973) lVylhe P J The dynamic earth (\\Tiley 1971)

Untts 2 5

84318 SEDIMENTARY GEOCHEMISTRY Dr H Veeh

Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutonal a week dunng first term

Basic pnnc1ples of chemistry as apphed to the solution of sedimentological problems equihbnum concepts in natural water systems mineral equihbna in sediments ma1or and minor element cychng through the envuonment isotopes tn sediments

Text book Bemer RA Principles of chemical sed1mentology (McGraw H1ll 1971)

Reference books Garrels RM and Mackenzie TT Evolution of sedimentary rocks (Norton 1971) Garrels RM and Chnst CL Solutions minerals and equilibria (Harper& Row 1965) ~tumm W and Morgan 11 Aquatic chemistry (Intersc1ence 1970)

Units 3

84392 IGNEOUS AND METAMORPHIC PETROGENESIS LABORATORY Dr M] Abbott

Class Contact 9 hours a week in second term Pre requ1s1te 84281 Opncal Mineralogy and Petrography Laboratory Co req u1sne 8431 l Igneous and metamorphic petrogenes1s

Laboratory study of representauve igneous and metamorphic rock suites

Text books Either Deer WA Howie RA and Zussman J An 1ntroduct1on to the rock forming minerals (Longman 1966) Or Kerr P Optical mineralogy 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1959) Wilhams H and others Petrography (Freeman 1954)

Reference books Jophn GA A petrography of Australzan igneous rocks 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1971) Jophn GA A Petrography of Australian metamorphic rocks (McGraw Hill 1968)

Units 3

84393 SEDIMENTARY ENVIRONMENTS LABORATORY Professor C C von der Borch

Class Contact 9 hours a week during thud term Co requtslte or Pre requ1sue Normally 84205 Sedimentary J:nvironments Modern and Ancient Manne geology of portion of St Vincent Gulf using ocanographtc launch straugraph1c

811

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

logging and analysis petrography of modern and ancient sedimentary rocks

Text book Folk R L Petrology of sedimentary rocks (Hemphill 1968)

Reference books As for 84205

84395 SEDIMENTARY ENVIRONMENTS AND PETROGENESIS LABORATORY

Professor CC von der Barch and Dr M Abbott

UnHs 4 Class Contact An average of 6 hours per week dunng second and third terms Pre requisite 84281 Optical Mineralogy and Petrography Co requisites 84311 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenes1s and/or 84205 Sedimentary Environments Modern 8c Ancient

Selected parts from 84392 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenesis Laboratory and 84205 Sedimentary Environments Modem & Anaent

Text and Reference books As for 84392 and 84205

84386 HYDROLOGICAL FIELD LABORATORY

(Not offered in 1978) Unus 2 5

Professor] W Holmes

Class Contact l afternoon a week throughout the year Pre requ1s1tes or co requisites 83304 Hydrogeology 84315 Soil Science and 84316 Hydrology and Vegetation

A study in the field using fixed sites and a mobile laboratory of techniques of held 1nvesugauons relevant to the lecture topics

84397 MINERALOGICAL AND GEOCHEMICAL METHODS Dr M] Abbott

Units 2 Class Contact 6 hours a week dunng first term Pre requisnes 73203 Inorganic Chemistry 71293 Chemistry Laboratory IIS Co requ1s1tes 84311 Igneous and metamorphic petrogenes1s 84305 Sedimentary environments - Modem and Ancient and 84318 Sedimentary Geochemistry

X ray diffraction studies (powder camera and d1ffracuon) determinations of mineralogy of mixtures and semi quantitative abundances cell sIZe and compos1t1onal determ1nauons of minerals 1n 1somorphous senes Geochemical studies of methods of preparation of s1hcate matenal for chemical analysis ma1or and some trace element analyses using the atomic absorption spectrophotometer

Reference books

Amos MD and others Basic atomic absorption spectroscopy (Vanan Techtron 1975) Ang1no E E and B1lhngs G K Atomic absorption spectrometry in geology, 2nd ed (Elsevier 1972)

Bennett H and Reed RA Chemical methods of silicate analysis (Academic 1971) Hutchison CS Laboratory handbook of petrographic techruques (Intersc1ence 1974) Jenkins R and de Vnes J L An introduction to x ray powderdiffractometry (Phillps n d) Nufheld E W X ray diffraction methods (Wiley 1966) Zussman J ed Physical methods zn determinative mineralogy (Academic 1967)

812

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

Units 4

84399 GEOPHYSICAL AND GEOLOGICAL FIELD CAMP Dr M] Abbott and Dr ] Sunderland

Class Contact Dunng May vacauon Pre requisites 84299 Geological Field Camp

This topic comprises a 12 day held camp involving geological mapping and geophysical held studies wlnch are combined in a Joint geological geophysical appraisal of a held area Subsequent laboratory processing of specimens and data is requucd and the results will be presented 1n the form of short seminars

Reference books Compton RR Manual of field geology (Wiley 1962) Dobnn MG Introduction to geophysical prospecting, 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1960) Grant F S and West G F Interpretation theory in applied geophysics (McGraw Hill 1965) Lahee F H Field geology 6th ed (McGraw Hill 1969) Parasn1s D S Mining geophysics 2nd eel (Elsevier 1972)

Unns 2

Group JI Topics in Meteorology and Oceanography

82306 SELECTED ASPECTSOFMETEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY

Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Class Contact 1 lecture per week in fust and thud terms

A senes of lectures deahng with novel developments 1n both meteorology and oceanography Spec1ahst v1s1ung lecturers from time to ume will contribute to this course There are no prescribed texts but books and papers will be suggested by the vanous lecturers

82303 DYNAMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY

Unns 2 Dr ] A T Bye Class Contact 2 lectures per week dunng third term Pre requisites [2] [3]

The governing equanons for mouon 1n the sea transport equauons and their use 1n thallasso model11ng Theory of oceanic phenomena 1nclud1ng tides and waves

Reference books Bye J A T The flow sen es of thallasso scale modelling (Selected topics 1n Atmosphenc and Manne Sciences No 6 Fhnders Un1versuy 1974) Heath R Lecture notes on the geostroph1c method (Selected topics In Atmosphenc and Manne Sciences No 4 Flinders Un1versny 1974) Proudman J Dynamical oceanography (Methuen 1963)

Untts 2

82305 DYNAMICAL METEOROLOGY Dr R A D Byron Scott

Class Contact 2 lectures per week dunng fust term Pre requisites [2J [3J

Denvanon of the scaled equations for mouon on a spherical rotaung earth Co ordinate transformauons and conformal mappings of large scale flow The vorucity equation and its use 10 simple prognostic models

Text book Holton JR An introduction to d'Vnam1c meteorology (Academic 1972) [2] thLse topu:s have common pre requ1sues vu normally at least £our topics 0£ second yc.ir level Physics and/or Mathemaucs

[3] These topics have a further common pre requ1s11e viz 70212 Mechanics II

813

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

82307 METEOROLOGICAL AND OCEANOGRAPHICAL DATA ANALYSIS

Units 2 Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Class Contacl 2 leclures per ,..,.eek dunng second lerm Pre requ1slle (2] 81202 Computing Techniques 1n Earlh Sciences Co requ1slle 82391 Meleorolog1cal and Oceanograph1cal Measurements II Analytical lechn1ques using geophysical data 1n theory and practice 1nclud1ng methods of numerical filtering Reference books Bendat J S and Piersol AG Random data of analysis and measurement procedures (Interscience 1971) Godin G The analysis of tides (Liverpool Univ Pr 1972)

82311 MICRO-METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATONOMY Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Units 2 Class Contact 2 lectures per week dunng lhtrd term Pre requ1s1tes [2]

A d1scusston of the energy fluxes through the atmosphenc boundary layer theu parametenzat1on and modelhng

Reference books Munn RE Descriptive micro meteorology (Academic 1969) Priestley CH B Turbulent transfer in the lower atmosphere (Chicago Univ Pr 1959) Sutton 0 G Micro meteorology (McGraw Hill 1953)

Text books Sellers W D Physical climatology (Chicago Univ Pr 1965) Schwerdtfeger P Physical principles of micro meteorological measurements (Elsevier 1976)

Units 2

82312 RADIATION IN THE ATMOSPHERE Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Class Contact 2 lectures per week dunng first term Pre requ1s1te [2]

A course deahng with solar and infra red rad1at1on atmosphenc attenuation processes and terrestnal albedos

Reference books Kondratyev K Yu Radiation in the atmosphere (Academic 1969) Robinson N Solar radiation (Elsevier 1966)

Paltridge G W and Plau C M R Radiative processes 1n meteorology and climatology (Elsevier 1976) Schwerdtfeger P Physical principles of micro meteorological measurements (Elsevier 1976)

Units l

82317 THE WEATHER FORECAST II Dr R A D Byron Scott

Class Contact I lecture per week dunng third term Pre requisite 82206 Meteorology and Climatology 82207 The Weather Forecast I

A d1scuss1on of basic forecasung methods with parucular reference to Southern Australia The lectures will be open ended 1n durauon and by their nature wdl invite student part1cipauon (2] These topics have common pre requisites vn normally a1 least four 1op1cs of second year level Physics and/or

Mathemaucs

814

SYLLABUSES-l!.ARTH SCIJ:NCES

82321 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY Dr ] A T Bye and Professor G W Lennon

Units 2 Class Contact 2 lectures a \veek during third term Pre requisite [2]

Physical properties of sea water and small scale processes 1n the ocean

Reference book Krause G Physical properties of sea water (FI AMS Flinders Univ 1973)

Text book Kraus EB Atmosphere ocean interaction (Oxford Clarendon Pr 1972)

Unns 9

82391 METEOROLOGICAL AND OCEANOGRAPHICAL MEASUREMENTS II

Dr J M Bennett and Professor P Schwerdtfeger

Class Contact 9 hours a week throughout the year Co requmtes 82303 82305 82307 82311 82312 82321

Expenments and analytical methods 10 meteorology and oceanography 1n the laboratory and 1n the field

Text book Schwerdtfeger P Physical principles of micro meteorological measurements (Elsevier 1976)

Honours lnterdisclplinary Topic in Earth Sciences

83401 ISOTOPE HYDROLOGY (Not offered 10 1978) Professor I W Holmes Class Contact 2 lectures a week in fnst term

A study of hydrology at both the local and global scale uuhs1ng both natural and artificial isotopes as 1nd1cators of hydrological processes

Honours Topics zn Marine Geology and Geophysics

83406 MARINE GEOPHYSICS Dr J Sunderland

Class Contact 3 hours a week dunng first term

A study of the advances made 1n manne geophysics as a result of improved expenmental techniques and observations in the following fields navigation gravity underway magnetic and se1sm1c measurements ocean bed instrumentation heat flow Emphasis will be placed on recent contnbuuons to the literature but general background reading is to be found in the following Hill MN ed The sea vol 3 and 4 (Intersctence 1970)

83409 SEMINARS IN TOPICAL GEOPHYSICS Dr F H Chamalaun and Dr J Sunderland

Class Contact l lecture a week for fnst and second terms

The seminar to be given by statf students and vis1ung lecturers will deal \Vtth recent advances in geophysics

[2] These topics have common pre reqmsnes VIZ normally at least four 10p1cs of second year level Physics and/or Mathemaucs

815

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

83306 GEOMAGNETISM Dr F H Chamalaun

Class Contact 2 lectures a \veek dunng first term

Global analysis of the geomagneuc held and ong1n of the dipole and non dipole held Power spectra of held vanattons Electrical conductivity of the mantle and lower crust

Reference books Chapman S and Bartels J Geomagnetism (0 UP 1961) Matsushita S and Campbell W H Physics of geomagnetic phenomena (Academic 1972) Riknake T Electromagnetism and the earths interior (Elsevier 1966)

83410 GEOMAGNETIC INDUCTION PHENOMENA

(Not offered in 1978) Dr A White Class Contact 2 lectures a week dunng first term l. he earth s magneuc held and short penod vanat1on electromagneuc 1nducuon theory magnetotelluncs magnetic deep sounding crustal conducuvuy phenomena radial conducuvuy of the mantle the Earth s core and ong1n of the geomagnetic held

Reference books Chapman S and Bartels J Geomagnetism 2 vols (0 UP 1961) Matsushita S and Campbell W H Physics of geomagnetic phenomena (Academic 1972) Rikitate T Electromagnetism and the earths interior (Elsevier 1966) Add1t1onal reading material will be made available dunng the course

83413 PALAEOMAGNETISM AND PLATE TECTONICS Dr F H Chamalaun

Class Contact 2 lectures a week dunng first term

Rock magnetism instruments magnetic chemistry of rocks and minerals ong1n of natural remanent magneuzauon magnetic stabthty apphcat1on to geological and geophysics problems

Reference books Irving E Palaeomagnettsm and its application to geological and geophysical problems (Wiley 1964) McElh1nny M Palaeomagnet1sm and plate tectonics (Cambridge Univ Pr 1973) Nagata T Rock magnetism 2nd ed (Maruzen 1961)

Stacey FD and Banerjee S The physical principles of rock magnetism (Elsevier 1974)

83414 SEISMIC DATA PROCESSING AND INTERPRETATION Dr I Sunderland

Class Contact 2 hours a week 1n second term

Se1sm1c sources and receiving systems for ]and and manne use move out correcuons common depth point stacking d1g1tal hltenng Structural interpretation Reference books Dobnn M B Introduction to geophysical prospecting 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1960) E\v1ng 'V M and others Elastic waves in layered media (McGraw Hill 1957) Grant F S and West G F Interpretation theory in applied geophysics (McGraw Hill 1965)

816

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

84401 PETROFABRICS AND EXPERIMENTAL DEFORMATION

(Not offered in 1978) Dr A E Grady t.lass Contact 2 lectures a week in first term

Crystallographic preferred onentauon pauerns their kinematic and dynamic significance experimental deformation of rocks and minerals in relauon to the development of m1crofabncs

84402 CURRENT ASPECTS OF MARINE GEOLOGY Professor C C von der Borch

Class Contact 2 lectures a week in second term combined w1thsupplementaryread1ngof recent contr1buuons to the hterature

Field and laboratory work may be required The study will include the bathymetry structure and sed1mentat1on in ocean basins and on continental margins

Reference books Hill MN ed The sea vol 3 (lntersc1ence 1963) Hill MN ed The sea vol 4 parts I and 2 (lntersaence 1970) Shepard F P Submarine geology 3rd ed (Harper & Row 1972)

84403 ADVANCED MINERALOGY AND PETROGENESIS Dr M] Abbott

Class ContacL 2 lectures a week in hrst term combined with supplementary reading Experimental and determinative mineralogy stabihues of synthetic s1hcate systems apphcat1ons of both to igneous and metamorphic petrogenes1s

Reference books As for84311 in addition Pttcher \VS and Fhnn G W Controls of metamorphism (Ohver & Boyd 1965) Sobolev VS ed The fac1es of metamorphism lA NU 1972) Wylhe P J Ultramafic and related rocks (\V1ley 1967)

84404 CURRENT ASPECTS OF MARINE GEOCHEMISTRY Dr H Veeh

Class Contact 2 hours a week during second term combined with supplementary reading of recent contrtbuuons to the hterature Further development of ideas introduced at the third year level with emphasis on the manne env1ronment Areas of study to be discussed include chemical models of the ocean hydrosphere lnhosphere 1nteract1ons chemical evoluuon of oceans and atmosphere

Reference books Broecker W S Chemical oceanography (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1974) Hill M N ed The sea vol 5 (lntersaence 1974) Stumm W and Morgan J J Aquatic chemistry (lntersc1ence 1970) Riley J P and Chester R eds Chemical oceanography vol 5 (Academic 1976)

84405 MINERAL EXPLORATION SEMINARS

(Not offered 1n 1978) Dr A E Grady A course in Terms I and II of guided literature search and reading culm1nat1ng in the presentauon of a seminar outhn1ng a hypotheucal explorauon plan for a particular deposit type taking into account the charactenst1cs of the deposit type and the regional setting The choice of deposlt type would be unrestncted 1nclud1ng all types of manne deposits

817

SYLLABUSES-EARTH SCIENCES

84406 PRINCIPLES OF STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS

(Not offered in 1978) Dr A E Grady Class Contact 4 hours per week dunng first term Co ordinated lectures and laboratory classes outhn1ng the techniques of analysis of geological structures 1n regions of complex multiple deformation

Reference books Hobbs B E Means W D and W1lhams P F An outline of structural geology (Wiley 1976)0

Ph1lhps F C The use of stereographic pro1ect1on 1n structural geology 3rd ed (Arnold 1971) Ramsay J Folding and fracturing of rocks (McGraw Hill 1969) Spry A Metamorphic textures (Pergamon 1969}• Turner F J and Weiss LE Structural analysis of metamorphic lecton1tes (McGraw Htll 1963)

Honours Topics in Meteorology and Oceanography

ADVANCED ASPECTS OF METEOROLOGY Class Contact An average of 3 hours per week throughout the year

A further development of subjects 1ntrcxiuced at the thud year level which usually includes 82401 Atmosphenc circulation theory (Dr R A D Byron Scott) 82402 Atmospheric development theory (Dr R A D Byron Scott) 82403 Atmospheric 1nstab1hty theory (Dr R A D Byron Scott)

and often includes special topics given by v1s1t1ng lecturers and other staff members

ADVANCED ASPECTS OF OCEANOGRAPHY Class Contact An average of 3 hours per week throughout the year

Areas of study in oceanography are given by v1sit1ng lectures or staff members In anyone year three of the following four topics 'v11l be offered

82405 Ocean cuculauon theory (Dr } AT Bye) 82406 Problems in geophysical fluid dynamics (Dr j A T Bye) 82407 Turbulence (Dr I A T Bye) 82408 Sea Level and Tides (Professor G W Lennon)

82409 SPHERICAL ASTRONOMY Dr RA D Byron Scott

Class Contact 3 hours per week dunng second tenn Pre requ1s1te Only available to those who have not taken 82201 Apphed Astronomy

The syllabus 1s the same as for 82201 Apphed Astronomy but candidates tackle harder homework problems and sit a more comprehensive exam1nat1on

818

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION

The syllabuses for topics w1th1n each programtne offered wuhtn lhc School of Educdtton arc set out 1n terms of the cut rent Degree .i.nd D1plo1na regulations (desc11bed 1n the schedules to Statute 10 l) Students enrolled 1n programmes leading to the degrees of Bachelor of .Cducat1on or Bachelor of fducauon (Physical Education) will need to consult the syllabuses for the School or Schools w1tlun wluch their non educat1on topics are chosen Students enrolhng 111 the1r first year of the programme for the B Ed or B Ed (Phys Ed ) are reminded that they need to enrol in 53110 Teaching Oncntat1on 1n J.dd1t1on to their topics from the other Schools Sn1dents are expected to procure the prescribed ed1t1on of set textbooks Books ava1lable 1n p1perback or student ed1t1ons 1re 1nd1cated by an 1stensk (*)

PROGRAMMES AVAILABLE

Bachelor of Education Bachelor of Education (Physical Education) Bachelor of Special Education Diploma in Lducat1on Diploma 1n Lducat1on.tl Ad1n1111str1t1on Master of Educational Adm1n1str1t1on ~faster of Ed ucat1on

Page

902 917 922 930 933 933 941

Enqu1nes about specific topics should be directed to the staff member whose name 1s shown below the topic title enqu1nes about the rcqu1re1ncnts of p1 ogrammcs should be chrcctcd to programme coordinators The assess1nent methods noted for each topic are those used 1n 1977 they will not necessanly be the same 111 l 978

Set books and Text books are reqmred read mg on which students may be ltsted Student~ are expected to have their own copies of all books hsted 'l~ Set books or Text books muluple topics of these blmks will not be 'lV'lilable m the Library Prehmmary read ng is n. 'tdmgwh1ch the student 1s n.qmred to havt completed bt.fore the commencement of teach mg and on which he may at anytime be tested Funht.rreadmgand Recommendul read mg where nototherv.1se spt.c1ficd md1C'llc rcadmgwh1ch the smdem 1~ expected toclo m thctounc ofsmdymgtheSet boo ls Reference books arc books which the smdent will find useful m the course of studymb tl1c topics for which they arl specified

901

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Bachelor of Education Coordinator Dr G R Teasdale

B Ed first year students are required to complete 53110 Teaching Onentat1on prior to the commencement of the second year of the programme This involves attendance at a one day seminar at the Un1vers1ty followed by a two \\eel period spent 1n a metropolitan primary school dunng November/December B Ed second year students are required to take two 6 unit topics 1n Education 53215 Curriculum Studies 53211 Human development and education The B Ed III year 1s organised in three phases which correspond Lhough not exactly \Vllh the three Un1vers1ty terms In Phase I concentration IS on Psychology and Teaching the Basic Subjects Problems of Educational Practice and Express1onal Act1v1t1es Phase II comprises two penods spent 1n metropolitan pnmary schools for 53340 Teaching Observation and Expenence During Phase Ill the B Ed Ill studentSJOin with Diploma tn Education students for Educauonal Studies selec..llng two topics from those available Relative we1ght1ngs of the different parts of the B Ed III year are as follows

Problems of Education Pracuce 6 Psychology and Teaching of the Basic Subjects 10 Express1onal Act1v1t1es 4 I:ducat1onal Studies 12 Teaching Observation Experience 4

for P'lrt IV of the B Ed degree (the Internship year) the student 1nay be employed aS a full tune paid teacher tn or near Adelaide Dunng the Internship year (53401 Teaching Internslup) the students teaching ts supervised by staff of the Un1vers1ty In addtt1on students are requ1red to take two topics 53410 Apphcat1ons of Educational Theory and 53480 Pnmary School Methods Requirements for these courses include attendance at three 1n service conferences for wluch the teacher ts released from lus school duties

Units None Level First year B Ed

53110 TEACHING ORIENTATION Coordinator Dr G R Teasdale

Duration Two weeks full unie pnor to the co1nmence1nent of B Ed Pt II Pre requ1s1tes None

All first year BachelorofEducat1on students are required to complete a two week penod of teaclung orientation 10 a 1netropohtan pnmary school Tlus penod nonnally wdl be completed during the post exam1nat1on period 1n November/December and will be pieccded by a one day senunar at the Un1verMty on Teaclung 1n the Pnmary School The main purpose of teaching onentat1on 1s lo allow students to fam1harize Lhemselves with the organ1zat1on of pnmary schools to observe classroom act1v1ties and procedures and to develop teaching skills with 1nd1v1dual children and with small groups Accordingly students wdl be expected to part1c1pate 10 the follow1ng ways

(1) observation of school routines (e g assembhes use of hbrary and other resource areas use of teaching aids and equipment organ1zat1on of sport and other extra curncula acuvtttes etc) (u) part1c1pauon 1n classroom teac..lung and act1v1ues (e g ass1st1ng the teacher 1n supe1v1s1on of group work prepanng lesson materials marking pupils work etc) (111) Teaching 1nd1v1dual children on a one to one basis (1 e by g1v1ng remedial assistance etc ) (iv) teaching small groups of children (v) attending seminars 10 the school

Refere11ce books Jarolnnek J and Foster C D Teaching and learning in the elementary school (Mactndlan 1976) Logan L M and Logan V G Educating young children (McGraw Hill I 974) McFarland H S N lntelllgenl leach111g (Routledge 8... Kegan Paul I 973)* Walker R and Adelman C A guide to classroom obseroatwn (11ethuen l 975)*

902

SYLLABU"iES-EDUCATION

Units 6

53211 HUMAN DEVELOPMENT AND EDUCATION Dr A Russell

Level Second year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and I seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment By assignment and seminar preparation and parttc1pat1on

Tlus topic 1s intended to introduce students to theory evidence and issues 1n Developmental Psychology which are of relevance 1n Education Throughout the course students are expected to have regular involvement with children The 1na1n areas to be covered in the topic are

The observational study of children Genetics and the biology of development Language development The development of cogn1t1ve ab1ht1es Social emotional development The effect of the home environment on development

Seminars wdl focus on issues 10 developmental psychology and educauon

Reference books Bernard H W and Huckins W C Explonng human development rnter disciplinary readings (Allyn & Bacon 1972)* Bronfenbrenner U ed Influences on human development (Dryden 1973)* Busse T V Mansfield R S and Messinger L J Activities in child and adolescent development (Harper & Row 1974)* Cohen S Social and personality develojnnent zn c/nldhood (ivlacmdlan 1976)* Developmental jJsychology today 2nd ed (CRM 1975) H,rvey G Cluld psychology (Wiley 1975)* Hetherington E M and Parke R D Child psychology (McGraw Hill 1975) Lefrancois G R OJ children (Wadsworth 1973)* Levin G R A self directing guide to the study of child psychology (Brooks/Cole l 973)* Med1nnus G R Child study and observatwn guide (Wiley 1976)* Mussen P H Conger J J and Kagan J Child development and personality 4th ed (Harper & Row 1974)* N,sh J Developmental faS)Chology a psychob10lo1J2cal approach (Prentice Hall 1970)*

Units 6

53215 CURRICULUM STUDIES I (Curriculum Theory) A1r K Szmpson

Level Second year Duration First half year Pre requs1tes None Class contact 2 lectures per week. seminar every two weeJ..s

Tlus topic attc..mpts three tasks

(1) The 1dent1ficat1on of a set of basic choices which confront any person engaged tn the educational process which are baste 1n the sense that they commit the process to aims at a general level (11) the 1dent1ficat1on of those d1sc1phnes/cons1derat1ons relevant to the rat1onah1at1on and tmplementauon of basic dec1s1ons and (111) the use of (1) and (u) as a framework for the analysis and exam1nat1on of a specific educauonal theory to be selected when the topic commences

Reference books T1bble J W The study of education (Routledge & Kegan Paul I 966) Hirst P H and Peters R S The lof52C of education (Routledge & Kegan Paul I 970) Dearden R r Hirst P H ,nd Peters R S Education and the develojnnent of reason (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1973) Plulhps D C Theories values and educatwn (Melbourne Univ Pr 1971)

903

SYLLABUSES~EDUCATION

Whitehead A N The aims of education (Benn 1932) Dearden R F The philosophy of fmmary education (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1968) Curt1:!i S J and Boultwood M E A A short history of educational ideas 4th ed (U n1vers1ty Tu tonal Pr 1966) Smith B 0 Stanley W and Shores J Fundamentals of curriculum development rev ed (Harcourt Brace & World 1957) out ofpnnt Lapp D and others Teaching and learning (Macmillan 1975)

EDUCATIONAL STUDIES The topics offered under Educational Studies are not specifically onented to the school s1tuat1on They are open at the second and third years levels to all students with an interest 1n the educational processes 1n our own and other soc1et1es Of the two Philosophy topics 53224 and 53227 only one may be taken of the three History topics 53221 53228 and 53229 only one may be taken and of the two Sociology topics 53223 and 53241 only one may be taken All topics will be offered tn the second half of the year and topic 53223 may also be offered in the first half of the year

Unas 6

53221 POWER AND AUTHORITY IN EDUCATION Dr B K Hyams

Level Second or third year Dip Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures per week and a minimum of 6 tutonals for the half year Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment 2 tutorial essays (25% each) and a take away exam1nat1on paper (50%) The focus of this topic 1s on the d1stnbut1on of authonty 1n education and the competing claims for power 1n educational dec1s1on making It will have the h1stoncal d1mens1on of the nineteenth and twentieth centunes and wdl concentrate on the Enghsh speaking world largely Bnta1n Australia and the United States of Amenca The follow1ngaspects may be offered

(a) The democratic state and education the state and the 1nd1v1dual compulsory schooling state and church 10 education de schooling (b) Education bureaucracies rationale forcentrahsm 1n Australia the changing balance 1n decentralized systems federalism 1n educauonal development - U S A and Australia parent power (c) Teacher power teachers and the bureaucracy the quest for professional status collective acuon (d) Student power the aims growth and effects of student power 1n un1vers1t1es and schools

Preliminary reading International encyclopedia of the social sciences (Macmillan and the Free Press 1968) See entnes under Power and Authonty Hyams B K and Bessant B Schools for the jJeople an 1ntroduclton lo the htstory of State education zn Australia (Longman 1972)*

Units 6

53222 PSYCHOLOGY AND EDUCATION Dr M] Lawson

Level Second or third year Dip Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and l tutonal per week Assessment Topic tests assignment and project Pre requisite None

The purpose of this course 1s to provide

(1) a survey of relevant theory research and pracuce 1n selected areas of educauonal psychology

904

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

(2) an opportunuy fora detailed exJm1nat1on of specific topics 1n educational psychology of interest to the student

Purpose (I) w1ll 1nvolve large group lectures and tutorials Purpose (2) will entail preparauon of seminar reports and one major paper Lectures will be concerned with topics 1n the follow111g areas

(I) Educauon leaching and 1nstruct1011 human1st1c and other approaches to education (2) Learning and memory cond1t1on1ng and 1nformat1on processing (3) Development 1ntellectual and moral development adolescent development (4) Complex cogn1uve behaviour th1nk1ng problem solving (5) Motivauon (6) lnd1v1dual differences 1ntelhgence ab1ht1es and cogn1t1ve styk. (7) Group behaviour (8) Instruction systematic instruction mastery learning and evaluauon (9) Exam1n1ng teaching interaction analysis

Text book Lefrancois G R Ps;choloifjfor leaclung a bear usually faces the front 2nd ed (Wadsworth 1975)

References Gagne R M Essentials of learningfor instruction (Dryden 1974) Biggs J B Information and human learning (Cassell 1971) Lefrancois G R Of cluldren (Wadsworth 1973) Russell I Motivation (Brown 1971) Tyler L Individual differences (Appleton Century Crofts 1974) Merrill M D Jn.structural design (Prentice Hall 1971) Block J Mastery leanung (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1971)

Units G

53223 SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION Dr J Maddock

Level Second or third year Dip J<..d Duration First or second half year Class contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assesstnent Essays

The aim of the course wdl be to 1nd1cate the way 1n which a soc1olog1st views the processes of teaching and learning Topics w11I include discipline and social control strauficauon and the curnculum and 1nnovat1ons affecting the roles of the teacher and the pupil

Preliminary reading Berger P L & Berger B Socwlo{fj a hwwaplncal approach (Penguin 1976)

Units 6

53224 AESTHETICS AND EDUCATION Dr N A Nilsson

Level Second or third year Dip Ed Durauon Second half year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessments Assignments and end of year exam1nauon

By 'l.estheucs 1s meant phdosoplucal aesthetics Tlus topic 1s concerned centrally with disputes about values but 1n particular about what 1s 'l.Csthet1cally good and bad Tins concern 1s not restncted to what goes on 111 concert halls and picture gallenes Questions about the quahtyof our hves and the importance of ourenv1ron1ncnt are to a great extent aesthetic questions and should be as 1nteresung to thoughtful students of the physical and social ~ciences as to students of the hu1nan1t1e:,

905

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

This central concern with values 1s used as a point of entry into the general plulosophy of aesthetic cnt1c1sm In this such matters as the following are introduced artistic representation the nature of works of art n1ean1ng and truth 1n the arts art as the expression of emotion art and morality creat1v1ty The relevance of these questions to formal education 1n literature and the arts IS obvious The educational relevance of the course is not however restricted to schooling Fund·unental educational questlons such as 1ndoctnnat1on and the develop1nent of taste will be discussed Indeed returning to the cent1 al concern with values the whole course could well be focused upon the quesuon If there 1s no d1sput1ngabout taste can there be anything properly called an aestheuc education at all'

Text books Beardsley M C Aestheiic.s (Harcourt Brace & World 1958) Coleman F J ed Contemporary studies in aesthetics (McGraw Hdl 1968)*

Reference books Beardsley M C and Schueller H M Aesthetic inquiry (Dickenson 1967) Beardsmore R W Art and rnoraliiy (Macmillan 1971)* Gombnch E H Art and illusion (Pha1don 1962) Goodman N Languages of art (0 UP 1969} Hospers J Meaning and truth in the art.s (North Carolina Univ Pr 1946)* Margolis J 1he Language of art and art criticism (Wayne State Univ Pr 1965) Osborne H ed Ae.sthetzcs in the modeni world (Thames & Hudson 1968) Royal lnst1tute of Philosophy Lectures vol 6 1971 72 Plnlosophy and the art.s (Macmillan 1973) Sparshott F r. The .structure of aesthetics (Univ of Toronto Pr 1963)

Units 6

53225 RESEARCH METHODS IN EDUCATION Professor] Anderson

Level Second or th1rd year Dip Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and practicals per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment By assignment and exa1n1nat1on

The topic 1s an 1ntroduct1on to the main approaches to rese'l.rch in the beh1.v1oural sciences survey research pred1cuve studies expenmental research field 1.nd case studies The focus will be on methods of collecung data (e g observation quest1onnalfes Interviews) and methods of analysing data (basic descnpuve stat1sttcs hypothesis testing) The m~or purposes of this topic arc to become fam1har wuh b1bhograpluc sources tn education to 1dent1fy researchable pt oblems and fo1mulate hypothesc~ to interpret and evaluate published research to develop procedures for observation collect1on recording and evaluaung data Practical classes will involve the collect1on of d.i.ta and the apphcat1on of rdevant stat1st1cal procedures Opportun1tKs wtll be provided to develop particular interest areas 1n the form of an 1nd1v1dual project No p1ev1ous work tn stat1st1cs is assumed

Text books Kerhnger F N Foundations of behavioural research 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973) Any text on basic stat1sucs such as 011e of the follow1ng Guilford J P and Fruchter B Fundamental stali.st1cs zn psychoWgy and education 5th ed (McGraw Hill 1973) Klugh H E Slal'lSlic.s the essential,.sfor research 2nd ed (Wiley 1974) Runyon R P and Haber A Fundamentals of behavioural statistics 2nd ed (Addison Wesley 1970)

Reference books Brown F L Amos J R and Mink 0 G Statistical concepts a bane program 2nd ed (Harper & Row 1975) Johnson M C A review of research methods in educatwn (Rand McNally 1977) Siegel S Nonparametnc statistics for the behavioural sczence.s (McGraw I hll 1956)

906

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Thorndike R L 'lnd l'Iagen r. P Measurementandevaluatwninpsychologyandeducatwn 4th ed (Wdey l 977) Turney B 'lnd Robb G Rtsearch in education (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1971)

53226 SCIENCE AND EDUCATION Dr A 1W Lucas

Units 6 Level Second or Llurd year Dip Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures per week 'lnd l two hour tutonJl per fortnight Pre requ1s1tcs None Assessment By seminar papers essays and final exa1n1nauons

The top1cwill examine pubhc percepuons of science and scientists and of educators roles 1n developing these percepuons Selected wnt1ng of sc1ent1sts h1stonans and philosophers of science and science educators will be reviewed and their pos1t1on compared with the content of formal science curncul'l from Australia Bnta1n and North Amenca Emphasis will be placed on "1ews of the sc1cnt1fic method the relauonsl11p of sue nee to pubhc needs and the moral values w1th1n science and the social respons1b1hty of sc1enl1sts Students will be encouraged to examine school texts 1n other d1sc1phnes (for ex'lmplc history and social studies) and popular literature for evidence of the view of science projected outside formal education 1n science

Text books Hempel C G Plulosophy efnatural science (Prentice Hall 1966)* Kuhn T S The structure of scientific revolutwns 2nd eel (Chicago Univ Pr l 969)* Refrrences A detailed reading hst will be issued at the beg1nn1ng of the topic The books below will provide background 1n curnculum developments 1n science (hst A) and an 1ntroduct1on to the lustory and phtlosophy of science (hst B) List A Andersen H 0 Readings zn science educalto1l for the seco11dary school (rvf'lcmdlan I 969)* Grohman A B The changing American school the role of the bwlogical sciences cumculum slud) (Doubleday 1969) Hurd P de H Newcumculum perspecltvesforjunwr!ttghschoolsc1ence (Wadsworth 1970)* Lee Dow K I'eaclnng science in Auslralian schools (Melbourne Univ Pr 1971)* Lucas A M 'lnd Ch1sm'ln D G A review of Bntish science cumculum pro;ects tmjJlicat1ons for curnculum developers (Centre for Science and Mathe1nat1cs :Cducauon The 01110 State Un1vers1ty 1973)* Ra1nsey G A Cu:rriculum development in secondary school science (A C E R 1972)* Scottish Lduc'ltton Dep'lrtment Cumculum paper 7 scze11ce for general education (HrvfSO l 969)* Lisi B Martin rvf Concepts of science education a plulosophical analysis (Scott Foresman I 972) Medaw'lr P B The art ef the wluble (Methuen I 967) 0 Ned W !i.1 Fact and theory an aspect of the philosophy ef sczence (Sydney Univ Pr J 969) Smart J J C Between science and plulosophy (Random House 1968)

53227 PHILOSOPHY AND EDUCATION Dr N Nilsson

Units 6 Level Second or tlurd year Dip Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requisites None Assessment Assignments and end of year exa1n1nat1on

Tlus topic 1s designed pnmanly for 1ntend1ng teachers but 1s open to any student with an Interest 111 wider educational issues It 1s concerned with the contnbut1on of plulosophy to educauonal theory but ID p'lrtlcular as this can g1\e perspecuve to a philosophy of teaching It includes what has Lome to be expected under the description plulosophyof

907

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

cduc1L1011 v11 the plnlosopluc.tl analys1<; of such couc.cpts as equality needs creat1\ 1ty teach1nb 1ndoctnnat1on - 1.nd educauon itself

It will not bL conhned to tin~ however 'lnd depending on lhe 1nterc~ts of students will pro\ 1de the opportunity to look at any educ'lUOn1.l problem to the solut1on of\\ l11ch plulosophy C'ln 1nake 1. contnbut1on

Preltm1nary readu1g Scnvcn M Primary pl11losophy (McGr'lW Hill 1966)

Text book Gribble J lnlruduct1on lo jJl11losophy of educatwn (Allyn & Bacon 1969)

Referu1ce books tlartnctt and N'11sh M Theory and the practice of educritwn vols I & 2 (He1ne1nann 1976) Powell J P Plnlosoph) of educatwn a select b1blwwa/Jhy (l\.lanchestcr Univ Pr)* Schefner l Conditions of knowledgr (Scott foresman 1965)* Snook I Indoctnnatwn and education (Routledge 1972)* Snook I ed Concepts of uuloctnnatwn (Routledge 1972)*

Journals As recommended 111 J P PO\\Cll 'lbove

53228 EDUCATION AND SOCIETY IN AUSTRALIA A Historical Analysis Dr D Grundy

Units 6 Level Second or tlurd year Dip 1 d Duration Second half year Clas<; Contact 3 hours per wceJ... Pre rcqu1s1tcs None Assessment Es<;'lys and/or Lxamln'ltton

The topic will draw matenal for lectures tutornls and essays fro1n the topics hsted below

('1) The church slate conflict and other 1dcolob1cal issues ind education po!Jcy 1810 1850 (b) Education and society 1n the self governing colonies 111 the mid 19th century (c) Ideological issues 111 establislung the secular st1.tc school systems (d) Government planning for public education - the growth of education bureaucracies and the 1mp1.ct of ccntrahsauon (e) Educat1on issues at the turn of the century - the probletns of reform (f) Education between the Wars - state secondary 'lad technical education school and o;;onety the problems of 1nnovat1on

1 exl book Austin A G and Selk.ck R J \V The Attslralian gover11me11t school l 830 l 914 (Pitman 1975)*

Reference books Austin A G Australian educatwn 1788 1900 (Pitman 1965)* Austin A G Sdected documents tn Austral1a11 education (Pitman 1963)* Barrett J That better counll) the religwus aspect of life HI ea~tern Australia 1835 18JO (Melbourne Un1\ Pr 1966) Cleverly J F The first generalwn school and soaely ni early Australza (Sydney Univ P1 1971)* Cleverly J f and Lawry J I eds A1tslraltan educatwn uz thetwenlleth century (Longman 1972)* Dow G lvf George Hzginbotham church and slate (Pitman 1964) fog'lrty R Catlwlic education in Australia 1806 1950 (Melbourne Univ Pr 1959) Gregory J S Church and stale (C1.ssell 1973)* Grundy D Secular compulsory and free (Melbourne Uruv Pr 1972)* Hya1ns B K 1.nd Bessant B Schools/or the people"f (Longtn'ln 1972)1< Selleck R J \V The 11ew educatio11 1870 1914 (P1t1nan 1968) Turney C P101uers of Austra!tan erlucalwn vols l and 2 (Sydney Univ Pr 1969 1972)

908

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

53229 HISTORY OF IDEAS SOME SOURCES OF CONTEMPORARY EDUCATIONAL THEORIES

Dr N A Nilsson Units 6 L<.\el Second or tlurd year Dip Ld Durauon Second h.tlf yea1 Ch.ss Cont lCt 3 hours per week Pre requ1snes None A"sessment Ass1gn1nents and end of year cx'lm1nat1on

Tiu~ topic will not be offered 1n I q7g

Units 6

53231 LANGUAGE IN EDUCATION Professor J A Richardson and Mr R Kelly

Level Third yea1 B f.d Dip Ld Duration Second half yed1 P1 c requ1sues None Assess1nent Ass1gn1nents and/or final exa1n1nat1011

The centr'll concern of tlus course is with the nature ol i'lngu 1gcs and verbal co1n1nun1tatlon wuh special en1phas1s on those aspects of the topic 1 ele\dnt to cdt1c'lt1on

MdJOr n1atttrs to lx.. cons1dc1ed a1e ( 1) Nature of language -phonolog1tal synt'lctlc 1nd semanuc systcn1s (b) Languag(, acq1us1twn anti Language Develojnnent (c) Language in Use -wntten and spoken English --<.omprehens1on 'lnd re1.chng -language and dunking (d) Socwl111guist1c molten

Reference books Barnes S Languagl the llar11er and the school (Penb u111 l 969) Britten J N Langimge antl leannng ( 1970) Ca~hden A & Gt ugeon L Language 111 educatwn (Routledge 8.. Kegan Paul 1972) 1'-lalhd.iy M A K I xplorat10ns in lhl' Junctwn~ of language (Arnold I q73) Halhday MAK Learninghowlomtan (A1nold 1975) L1\\ton D Social class language and educatwu (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1968) Luna A R & Judov1tch f Speech and the development of m£ntal processes 111 the clnld (Penguin I 973) S1nuh f Ps)clwlinguist1cs and readn1g (Holt R1neh1.rt & \V1n3ton I 973)

53218 CROSS-CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES IN EDUCATION lvf.r K R i\J.cG011nocl11e

Units 6 Lc\el Second or Lhnd )Cal Dip Ld Durauon Setond h1.lf) ear Cl 1ss Contatt 3 hou1 s/wcck Pre reqt11s1tc.s Nont Assessn1cnl By as~1gnment 1nd projtCl

NOTE Tl us top1t will not be offe1 td 111 I q78 I !us topic IS contcrned '\uh the luMory and current status of ethnic 1111nonty bl oups A reds of study to be co\ c1 ed w1ll 1nclude the develop1nent of r1.ce relations 111 Au<;traha the gro\\lh and poMtlon of 1n1nonty g1oups 111 Austr1.han Society 1.ncl the 1nllutnce edutat1on has had on these p1 oces~c~ Studc.nts will bt requn td to undtrtake l spec1 ti stud) 111 one of the folio\\ 1ng

909

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

-Abong1nal educal1on -The education of 1mm1grant and ethnic children -The place of race and culture 1n the general curnculum and -Social theory

Reference hooks Banton M Race relations (Basic Books I 967) McConnocl11e K R Realities in race (ANZ 1973) Price C A ed Australian immzgratwn a hihlwgraphy and digest nos 1 and 2 (Dept of Demography Institute of Advanced Studies AN U I966 1971) Rowley C The destmctwn of Ahorzginal society (Penguin I 972) Stevens r ed Racism the Australian expenaice 2nd ed (ANl 1975) TatL C M 1-nd McConnodne K R eds Black vzew polnls (ANZ 1975) Yanvood A T Attitudes to non European unm1grat1on (Cassell 1968)

Uruts 6

53241 EDUCATION AND SOCIAL THEORY Ms ] Kapferer

Level Second or third year Dip Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment 2 sem1n'lr papers 2 three thousand word essays

Since few of the m~or social theorists have addres::.ed themselves to the problems of education J1er se tlus topic 1s concerned to analyse problern areas 1n education 1n the light of the theories of some of the following wrucrs Plato Rousseau Hobbes Weber Toenn1es S1mmel Durkheun Marx Mannheim Merton Parsons Leav1s Ehot Ortega Mao Ellul and others Topics include conflict and consensus equality and cht1sm education and poht1cs education and the economy educauon and soc1dl change meritocracy technocracy and bureaucracy the pos1t1on of the radical nght of the romantics and of the rad1cal left In add1t1011 there wdl be one elective topic

Preliminary reading Berger P L Invztatwn to soczology (Pehcan 1966) Cohen P S Modern social theory (Heinemann 1966) Miils C W The soc10logical tmaginatwn (Penguin 1970) Seaman P and others Innovation and ideology (Open Univ Pr 1974)

53217 INTRODUCTION TO PEDAGOGY Co ordinator Dr M Lawson

Units 3 Level Graduate (Dip Ed) B Ed III & Phys Ed Durdt1on Term I Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1sttes None Assessment to be discussed

This topic provides an 1ntroduct1on to areas of central concern for 1ntend1ng teachers It wdl be based around an integrated d1scuss1011 of issues 10 teacher student 1nter'lct1on from several different perspectives It also aims to outline theoretical principles of relevance to Special l\-fethods courses MaJOI focus will be on the followtng I The art and science of teadung h1stor1C'li roots 2 The child as learner oper'lnt and 1nformat1on processing appro·u::hcs to le'lriung 3 The developing child 1ntelhgence ab1hty and cogn1t1ve develop1nent during adolescence 4 The teacher as instructor 1nd1v1dual differences systemauc 1nstrucuon types of learning 5 Teacher 'lnd children Symbolic 1nteract1on toles and role taking the self co1nmun1cauon and personal space

910

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

6 [.valuating student learning the roles of evaluation in teaching and learning characteristics of good 1neasurement and evaluation procedures evaluation reference points myths about measurement and evaluauon of student learning

Reference books Llk1nd D Childrenandadolcscents tnlerpntiveessayson]eanPiaget 2nded (0 UP 1974) Gagne R Essentials of leanungfor znstructzon (Dryden 1974) Gronlund N E kteasurernent and evaluation in teaching 3rd ed (Mac1ndlan 1976) Hargreaves D H Interpersonal relations and education (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972) Ro~e A ed Human behaviour and soczal processes (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1971)

5331 O PSYCHOLOGY AND TEACHING THE BASIC SUBJECTS

Units IO Level B Ed III Duration ferms I Ill

Co ordinator Mr G G Partington

Class Contact 6 hours per weel.. plus regular v1s1ts to metropohtan primary schools Pre requ1s1tes Sausfactory complet1on of B Ed I and II Assessment Essays and practical work

Tlus topic aims to give an understanding of -psychological theory relevant to the learning and teaching of the baste subjects -the s1gn1ficancc of research findings fo1 the primary school curriculum -modern approaches to teaching the basic subjects

The topic sections are as follows (.i.) The te'tchtng of English and reading

Reference books Dec.hant E ed Detection and correction of reading diffnulties (Appleton Century Crofts 1971) Downing J and Thackray D V Reading readiness (London Untv Pr 1971)* Lkwall E r. Psychological factors tn lhe teaching of reading (Merrill I 973) Lane S M and Kemp M An approach to creative wnt1ng in the pnmary school (Blackie 1967) Otto W .ind McMenemy R A Corrective and remedial teaclung 2nd ed (Houghton M1fflm 1973) Randall G C Teaching sbategies tn pnmary school English (McGraw 1-ldl 1972) Roberts G R English ui pnmary schools (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972)* Smnh F Understanding reading (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1971) Southgate V and Robcrrs G R Reading which approach'? (London Univ Pr 1970)* Vernon M D Reading and its difficult1es 2nd cd (Cambridge Univ Pr 1974)

(b) Approaches to the teaching of mathemaucs

Text book Copeland R W How cJnldren learn mathematics (Macmillan 1974)

Reference books Assoc1at1on of Teachers of Mathematics N~es on mathematics zn primary school (Cambridge Uni\ Pr 1969) B1bgs E E and MacLean J R Freedom to learn an acttVl approach to mathematics (Addison Wesley 1969) Chdpman L R ed The process of leanung mathematics (Pergamon 1972) Copeland R W Mathematics and the elementary teacher 3rd cd (Saunders 1976) Dienes Z P Mathematics in the primary school tev ed (Macmillan 1967) Larnon W E ed Learning and the nature of mathematics (S R A 1972) W1Ihams .C and Shuard H Primary mathematics today (Longman 1970)

(c) The teaching of science with particular e1nphas1~ upon the concept of Science as enquiry and cluld centred science programnies

Reference books Anderson R D and others Developu1g cJiildrens thu1k1ng thr011gh science (Prenuce Hall 1970)

911

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Kuslan L I and Stone A H Readings on trachingcluldren SCU'1Ue (Wadsworlh 1969)* Kuslan L I and Stone A H Teaclungchzldren science an enquiry approach (Wadsworth 1968) Lovell K The 1.,rrowth of basic mathematical and scientific concepts in cluldren t5th cd (London Univ Pr 1968)* 1-Iopman A B Helpuig cluldren learn sctence (N ST A 1966) S A Depa1 tlnent of [ducat1on Nature sae11ce grade 1 7 (SA Govern1nent Printer 1965 1970) Schmidt V E & RocJ..astle V N I'eachzng science wzth eve1)da) /lungs (~fcGraw Hdl 1968) Suence 5/ 13 project With objeclzvts in m111d guide to .science 5113 (Ma1..donald Lducat1onal for the Schools Counc1l 1972)

(d) Recent developments 111 social studies curricula and an'llys1s of teaching pracuces

Reference books Bruner J The process of educatwn (Vintage 1960)* Brunei J Toward a theory of uzstructwn (Belknap 1967)* l\11chaehs J U and Johnston A M The soc1al sciences (Allyn & Bacon 1965) (Out of pnnt) Mornssctt I Concepts and structure in the new soetal cumcula (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1967)' Preston R C I'laclung social studies in the elementary school 3rd eel (I-loll Rinehart & Winston 1968) Stretton H The pol1ttcal sc1£nces (Routledge & Keg•n Paul 1969) T dba l"l A teachers handbool for elementary social studies (Addison Wesley 1967)""

PROBLEMS OF EDUCATIONAL PRACTICE

Any two of the folio\\ 1ng lopJCs n1ay be selected Teaclnngwdl be concentrated 10 the f1rst term 53331 Proble1n~ P11nc1ples and Techniques of Evaluation (Not offered 1n I 978) 53332 School Organ1sdUon and Adm1n1stral1on (Not offered 1n I 978) 53333 lland1capped Cluldren 1n Ordinary Schools 53334 Soc1'll Interacuon (Not offered 1n 1978) 53335 Clear and Cnt1cal Th1nk1ng 53336 The School Education of Gifted Children (Not offered 111 1978) 53337 Lducattonal Med1d 53338 Abong1nes and Education

53331 PROBLEMS, PRINCIPLES, AND TECHNIQUES OF EVALUATION J\tlr D Hogben

Units 3 Level B Ld I II Duration Tenn I Class Contact 2 hou1s per \\CC~ Pre requisites None Assess1ncnt Written cxam1nat1on and 1ss1gn1nent Tlus topic \Hll not be offered Ill 1978

53332 SCHOOL ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION

Units 3 I t..vel B ~d III Duration Tern1 I Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre reqt11Mte~ None Assessn1cnt To be d1..1cnn1nc.d Tlus topic will not be offered 1n 1978

912

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

53333 HANDICAPPED CHILDREN IN ORDINARY SCHOOLS

U111ts 3 Level B I:d III Duration Tenn I

Mr D Thomas

Class Contact I lecture and I seminar per week plus v1s1ts to schools and 1nslltut1ons for the h.i.nd1capped Pre n.qu1s1tcs None Asscss1nent \Vntten exam1nat1on and assignment and a short 'l.nswer test

The 1ntroduct1on to tlus rop1c will concentrate on the social psychology of handicapped children generally Each student will select for detatled ~tudy one arc'l. 1n wluch he 1s parucularly 1nrerestcd In the second part of the topic emphasis ,\Ill be on problen1s 1n teaclung and 1nak1ng prov1s1ons for slow leanung children 1n the ordinary primary and secondary school 1 here will be opportun1ues for v1s1ts to f.i.c1hues for handicapped children 1n Adelaide reaching will be largely 1n seminar groups

Text book Telford C W and Sawrey J rvI Theexceptonal individual 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1972)

Refere11ce boo/is Dunn L M ed Excej1llonal cluldren HI the schools 2nd eel (Holt R1neh'1rt & Winston 1973) McLeod J ed The slow lear11er in the pnmaT) ~chool (Novak 1968)* Tansley A E and Gulhford R The educatwn of slow learning cll1ldre11 2nd ed (Routledge & Keg'l.n Paul I C)65)"

Unus 3 Level B Ed Ill Duration Tenn I

53334 SOCIAL INTERACTION Ats J Kapferer

Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1sacs None Assessment Two 1n uor ass1gn1nents one minor ass1bn1nent This rop1c will not be offered 111 1978

53335 CLEAR AND CRITICAL THINKING

Units 3 Level B Ed Ill Du11.t1on Tenn I Ch~s Contact 2 hour~ per week Pre 1 equ1s1tes None Assessment A<is1gnmcnts

.J\tfr K Simpson

A lop1c 1n ele1nenrary 1nforn1al logic cons1dcnng notions such as truth falsity vahdny 1nvahd1ty soundness 1nduct1on deduction simple dec1s1on procedure'i fallacies and related notions Cons1derat1on will 1.lso be given ro the elementa1 y fe'1tures of fo1 mal log1c.i.l systetns and to vanous possible foundations for belief

Reference books Bl1.ck WI Critical th11ll1111g 2nd ed (Prentice 1-Iall 1965) Scriven M Primary j1lulosoj1hy (McGraw Hill 1966) Cop1 I Introduction to logic 4th ed (Macm11lan 1972) H'l.rnbhn C L Falfocll!S (?i.1ethuen 1970) Stcbb1ng L S T!unlung to some purpose (Pehc'1n 1959) Strawson P r Introduction to logi.cal theory (Methuen 1952) Thoules R C Straight and crooRed thinking (Pan 1961)

913

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

53336 THE SCHOOL EDUCATION OF GIFTED CHILDREN Dr A Russell

Units 3 Level B Ed III Duration Term I Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment Ind1v1du1l assignments or examination This topic will not be offered Ill I 978

53337 EDUCATIONAL MEDIA i\1r K R McConnochie

Units 3 Level B Ed III Phys Ed Dip Ed Duration Term I Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment Students will be required to complete practical ass1gnn1ents

Tht. topic concerns itself with the apphcat1on of educallonal technology to the classroom and involves the demonstrauon cf the ways 1n which audio visual materials may be used to promote <.ffect1ve pupil Ieanung The c..ontent of this course will comprise an overview of the most common resources used 1n the classroom vtz models charts nat p1ctu1 es radio broadcasts overhead projector transparencies 31) mni slides filmstrips 16 mm and 8 1n1n films telev1s1on broadcasts audio and videotape Students will be required to learn how to use these resources and how to prepare audio visual matenals

Text books Brown J W Lewis R B and Harcleroad I F AV 1mtruct10n technology media and methods 4th ed (McGraw Hill 1973) Brown J W and Lewis RB AV1mtructwnaltechnologymanualfor1ndependentstudy 4th ed (McGraw Hill 1973)

Reference books Davis R H Alex1nder L T Yelon S L Learning ~ystem design (McGraw Hill 1974) Snelbec..ker G E Learning theory instructional theory and psychoeducatwnal design (McGra'v Hill 1974)

Units 3 Level B Ed III Du1 clt1on Term I

53338 ABORIGINES AND EDUCATION Mr K R McConnochie

Class Contact 3 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment To be decided aftt.r d1scuss1on with students

Tlus topic 1s concerned with the pos1t1on of Aborigines 111 Australian society and with the role education plays 1n deternun1ng tlus pos1t1on The topic will be structured around a series of lectures and se1n1nars with occas1on1l v1s1t1ng speakers Topic!> to be covered will include the p1.ttern of black/wlute relat1onsh1p!> 111 Australia the position of Aborigines 1n Australia today the importance of education Ill cstabhsh1ng patterns of do1n1nance and subord1nat1on

Rejlrence bouks To be advised

914

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Unus 4

53340 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND EXPERIENCE Co ordinator Dr G R Teasdale

Level B Ld III Duration Full year Class Contact 7 weeks full time Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of B Ed I and II

Students are required to undertake seven weeks of teaching dunng second term Students who have not achieved a satisfactory level of proficiency will be required to complete a further two week period of teaching dunng the August vacation or following the November exam1nat1ons Students who achieve at an above average level may be given the opportunity to part1c1pate 10 one or two weeks of spec1ahzed voluntary teaclung dunng the August vacation (e g 1n special schools or classes for the handicapped 1n experimental or open area schools in Aboriginal schools etc) Alhed with the teaclung programme seminars are held throughout the B Ld III year These seminars allow d1scuss1on of practical problems and d1fficult1es arising from the teaching situation as well as cons1denng broader aspects of teaching at the primary school level

Reference books Jarohmek J and Foster C D Teaching and learning in the elementary school (Macmillan 1976) Logan L M and Logan V G Educating )Oung cluldren (McGraw Hill 1974) Mcfarland H S N Intelligent teaching (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1973)* Walker R and Adelman C A guzde to clrusroom observation (Methuen 1975)*

Untts 8

53342 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND PRACTICE (Abonginal Education)

Mr K R McGonnoch1e

Level B Ed III Duration M1n11num of 9 weeks mainly 10 Term II Pre requ1s1te Enrolment on the Aboriginal educauon strand

Students are required to undertake the followtng (1) An 1n1t1al penod of two weeks classroom observation dunng late November 1977 or February 1978 (2) During the second term candidates will be involved 10 a programme of field experience and teaclung practice on isolated settlements Tlus programme will begin with an 1ntcns1ve onentauon at fhnders Un1vers1ty following this students will travel by road with a supervisor and observe a vanetyof 1nst1tut1ons 1n Central Australia After this 1n1t1al observation students will be placed 1n schools for teaching observation and experience Students who h.tve not achieved a sausfactOjy level of proficiency will be required to con1plete a further two week period of teach1ngdunng the August vacation or follow1ng the November exam1nauons

Units 4

53350 EXPRESSIONAL ACTIVITIES Co ordinator Dr D R Douglas

Level B Ed 111 Dip Ed (Primary) DuraL1on Terms 1 and III Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisites B Ed II and/or Dip Ed standing Assessment By a3s1gn1nents

Tlus 1s an integrated topic that deals with the following areas of the primary school curriculum art and craft drama and co1nmun1cat1on music and hu1nan movement

915

SYLLABUSF.S-EDUCATION

The topic will e:-.am1ne theoretical aspects of the teaching of express1onal act1v1t1es in the pnmary school and will emphasise their 1ntc..grat1on with other areas of the school curriculum Appropriate practical work wdl be earned out 10 a scnes of workshops 1n Term I and Term III

Reference books B1gge M L Learning theonesfor teachers 2nd ed (1-larper & Row 1971) Cheyette I .i.nd Cheyette H Teaching music creatively in the elementary school (McGraw Hill 1969) Colwell R The evaluation of musu: teaching and leanung (Prentice Hall 1970) Cratty B J Intelligence in action (Prentice Hall I 973) Gell H Mu.sic movement and the )Oung child (Australasian Pub Co 1973) Humphrey J andSulhvan D Teachingslowlearnersthroughacttvegames (Thomas 1970) Jameson K junior school art (Studio Vista 1973) Jones M Kimber R and Tnnder J Communication through drama Qacaranda 1973) Ga1tskdl D D Children and their art (Harcourt Brace and World 1958) Lowenfeld V and Bnua1n W Creative and mental growth 5th ed (Macmillan 1970) Mosston M Teaching Physical educatzon (Merrill 1966)

Units 6

53410 APPLICATIONS OF EDUCATIONAL THEORY Co ordinator Dr G R Teasdale

Level B Ed IV (Internship) Duration First half ye.ir Class Contact 3 two hour seminars 1 one day conference 1 two and a half day conference Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of B Ld I II and III Assessment written assignments

Tlus topic consists of a programme of seminars and conferences dealing with problems of educational pracuce An attempt 1s made to relate the theory to winch the student has been introduced dunnb l11s full time studies to the pracucal problems which he actu.illy 1s encountering dunng his 1nternsh1p year Evaluation 1s based upon the subm1ss1on of written papers

Reference books Bassett G \V and others Primary education ui Au.straluz modern developments (Angus & Robertson 1974)* Evans E D Transition to teaclung (Holt 1976)* Fisk L .ind Lingren H C A sunnval guuie for teachers (Wiley I 973) Jarohmek J and Foster C D Teacliing and learning tn the elementary school (Macm1llan 1976) Koun1n J S Discipluze and group management in classrooms (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970) Lett W R Im a problem al school case studies 111 Australian education (Angus & Robertson 1973)* Logan L M and Logan V G Des1gnforcreattve teaching (McGraw Hdl 1971)* Morrison A and Mcintyre D Social psycholog:J of teaching (Penguin 1972)* Patterson C H Humanzstzc education (Prentice Hall 1973)* Raths J Pancella J R and V'ln Ness J S eds Studying leaching 2nd ed (Prenuce Hall 1971)* Sadler J E Concepts 1n pnmary education (Allen & Unwrn 1974) Silberman C E ed The open classroom reader (Vintage 1973)* Stephens L S The teachers guide to open education (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1974)* \Valker R and Adelman C A guule to classroom obseroalto1l (Methuen 1975) Wdhams P ed Behaviour problems in school (London Univ Pr 1974)*

916

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Unus 6

53480 PRIMARY SCHOOL METHODS Co ordinator Dr G R Teasdak

Level B Ed IV (Internship) Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 two hour seminars 1 two and one half day conference Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of B Ed I II and III

This topic requ1res the study 1n depth of one of the basic areas of the pnmary school curriculum Areas of study offered 1n 1978 include Reading Mathematics Social Studies English Science and Physical Education The topic will involve a senes of seminars and the preparation of a major assignment The student also will be requJTed to demonstrate that he 1s applying the theoretical 1ns1ghts of his study 1n the practical teaching s1tuat1on

53401 TEACHING INTERNSHIP Co ordinator Dr G R Teasdale

Unns 6 Level B Ed IV (Internship) Duration Full year Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of B Ed I II and III

Dunng the B Ed IV year all students are required to undertake a period of teaching 1nternsh1p approved by the Chairman of the School of Education Students shall teach for three terms at least on a half time basis Alternatively those students who are unable to obtain paul employment as a teacher may undertake a fourteen week penod of teaching during the first semester Teaching will be supervised by v1s1t1ng staff from Fhnders Un1vers1ty and students will be requJTed to demonstrate thetr competence as classroom teachers 1n order to qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Education

53490 SPECIAL METHODS THEORY AND APPLICATION Units 9 Level Honours Durauon Full year Class Contact Up to 2 hours per week plus practical work as required Pre requ1s1tes Honours standing

This topic involves a special study 1n methodology or a related area which must involve the student 1n practical work 1n school or schools The student may also be required to undertake a period of three weeks practice teaching

Prospective students should consult the Chairman of the School in the first instance

Bachelor of Educatwn (Physical Education) Programme Co ordinator Dr T Withers

The B Ed (Phys Ed) programme allows the student to add to !us basic B Ed degree a spec1ahstqual1ficat1on The Physical Education topics hsted below are designed pnmanly to develop an understanding of physical act1v1ty that 1s adequate for the physical education general pract1t1oner However 1n 53261 53262 53362 53363 53364 53461 53462 and 53463 there 1s no specific onentat1on to the schools or any other field s1tuauon These topics may be regarded as a suitable part of a general hberal ed ucat1on­be1ng a mult1d1sc1phnary study focusing on the world of physical act1vtty Physical Educatwn in Schools 53450 and Teaching Internship (PE option) 53470 on the other hand are spec1fically vocational courses

917

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

53217 INTRODUCTION TO PEDAGOGY Co ordinator Dr M Lawson

Untts 3 Level Graduate (Dip Ed) B [d III & Phys Ed Durauon Term 1 Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment to be discussed

This topic provides an introducuon to areas of central concern for 1ntend1ng teachers It will be based around an integrated d1scuss1on of issues 1n teacher student 1nter-1ct1on from several different perspectives It also aims to outline theoretical pnnc1ples of relevance to Special Methods courses

MaJOr focus will be on the following I The art and science of teaching h1stoncal roots 2 The chtld as learner operant and 1nformat1on processing approaches to learning 3 The developing child 1ntelhgence ab1hty and cogn1t1ve development during adolescence 4 The teacher as instructor 1nd1v1dual differences systematic 1nstrucuon types of learning 5 Teacher and children sy1nbohc 1nteractton roles and role taking the self commun1cat1on and personal space 6 Evaluating student learning the roles of evaluation 1n teaching and learning charactenstlcs of good measurement and evaluation procedures evaluation reference points myths about n1easurement and evaluation of student learning

Reference books Llk1nd D Childrenandadolescents interpretiveessaysonjeanPiaget 2nded (0 UP 1974) Gagne R Cssentials of learning for instruction (Dryden 1974) Gronlund N E Measurement and evaluatzon in teaching 3rd ed (Macmillan 1976) Hargreaves D H Interpersonal relations and education (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972) Rose A ed Human behaviour and social processes (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1971)

53261 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY PHYSIOLOGICAL BASES

Units 6 Level Second year Duration Ftrst half year

Dr R T Withers

Ch.ss Contact 2 lectures 1 tutonal and 4 hours practical work per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment Laboratory reports 2 tests assignment and practical work

An 1ntroduct1on to the following areas of study (a) Human anatomy and physiology (b) Exercise physiology (c) 1-lealth and exercise (<l) Diet and weight control (e) The collect1on and 1nterpretat1on of laboratory data

Text books Horrob1n D f Essential physwloffJ (Medical and Technical 1973)* Joseph J Essential anatomy (Medical and Technical 1971)* Sharkey B J Physzoloffj and physical activity (Harper & Row 1975)*

Reference Books Durnin J V G A and Passmore R Energy work a1ld leisure (Heinemann l 967) Guyton A C Basic human phystoloffj nonnal function and mechanisms of disease (Saunders 1971)

Johnson P B Phystcal educatwn a problem solving approach to health and fitness (Holt Rinehart & W 1nston 1966)*

918

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Mayer J Ovenue1ght causes cost and control (Prentice Hall 1968)* Morgan R E and Adamson G T Circuit training 2nd ed (Bell 1961) DeVnes I-I A Physwlogy of exercise for physical education and athletics (Brown 1974)

Units 6

53262 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY FORMS IN SOCIETY Dr D R Douglas

Level Second year Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures l tutorial 4 hours pracucal per week Pre requ1s1tes 53261 Assessment Tutorial papers essays

An 1ntroduct1on to the following areas of study Class1ficat1on of physical act1v1ty Physical activity as a d1vers1on-sport sportsmanship the pursuit of excellence - athletics exercise physical act1v1ty as play recreatton leisure education spectacle

Reference books Ball D W and Loy J W Sport and social order (Addison Wesley 1975) Edwards H Sociology of sport (Dorsey 1973) Dunning E The sociology of sport (Cass 1971) Hart M M Sport tn the socio cultural process (Brown 1969) Hu1z1nga J Homo Ludens (Paladin 1970) Johnson P E and others Sport exercise and you (Holt Saunders 1975) Loy J W and Kenyon G S Sport culture and society (Macmtllan 1969) Mcintosh P C Sport and society (Watts 1968) Metheny E Movement and meaning (McGraw Hill 1968) Miller S M and Russell K R Sport a contemporary view (Lea & Feb1ger 1971) Osterhoudt R G ed The plulosophy of sport (Thomas 1973) Slusher 1-1 S and Lockhart A S Anthology of contemporary readings (Brown 1966) Weiss P Sport a phtlosoph1c enquiry (S Ilhno1s Univ Pr 1969)

Units 6

53362 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT Dr D R Douglas

Level Tlurd year Duration WholL year Class Contact 4 6 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes 53262 Physical Activity forms tn society or Instructors approval Assessment Assignments tests projects

Tlns topic is designed to guide students towards a meaningful understanding of these aspects of physical act1v1ty wnh emphasis on laboratory and field experze11ces focusing upon the 0 12 years age range

Objectives I To develop an understanding of basic concepts ,nd principles related to growth parameters 2 To understand developmental char,cterisucs as they interrelate with nlotor behaviour 3 To develop an understanding and awareness of capac1t1es and 111nttat1ons for movcmenL at specific developmental levels

Reference books Gallahue D L Motordevelopmenlandmovementexpenencesfor)oungch1ldren(3 7) (Wiley 1976) Connolly K e<l Mechanisms of motor skill development (Academic 1970) AAHPER Foundatwns and practices in perceptual motor learning (AAHPER 1971) Morns PR &Whiting HT A Motorimpatrmentandcompensatoryeducalwn(Bell 1971) Cratty B J Physical expression of tnlellzgence (Prentice Hall 1972)

919

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Espenschade A S & Eckert H M Motor development (Merrill 1967) Cratty B J Perceptual and motor developmenl in infants and children (Macmtllan 1970) Tanner J M Education and physical growth (Lond Univ 1961)

53363 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS, MEASUREMENT & EVALUATION Dr R T Withers

Units 6 Level Third year Duration rull year Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requisites 53261 and 53262 Assessment Assignments tests and projects

The following 2 areas of study will be supplemented by appropnate laboratory experiences (1) B1omechan1cs the study of the physical pnnctples upon which efficient movement production 1s based (2) Mc'lsurement & Evaluation the pnnctples of measurement and evaluation test construction adm1n1strat1on of physical performance tests and stat1st1cal procedures

Text books Hay J G The bwmechan1cs ef sports technuim:s (Prenuce Hall 1973) I:ckert H M Practical measurement of physical performance (Lea & Feb1ger 1974)

Unns 6

53364 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY ACQUISITION OF SKILL Dr D R Douglas

Level Third year Duration Whole year Class Contact 2 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes 53262 Physical Act1v1ty Forms in Society or Instructors approval Assessment Assignments tests projects

This topic 1s designed to introduce students to the maJOr topics fundamental to an understanding of skilled movement e g learning transfer feedback etc The first term of this core study compnses Psychology topic 36305 Skills and Human Performance

Reference books Singer R N Motor learning and human performance 2nd ed (Macmillan 1975) Lawther J D Theleannngandperformanceofphysicalsktlls 2nded (Prentice HaJI 1977) Robb M D The dynamics ef motor skill acquis1twn (Prentice Hall 1972) Wh1ung H T A Acquiring ball skill (Lea & Feb1ger 1968)

53461 PHYSICAL ACTIVITY THEORY AND PRACTICE OF TRAINING Dr R T Withers

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration Term III Class Contact 2 lectures 1 tutonal and 3 hours pracucal work per week Assessment Laboratory reports and 2 tests

This topic 1s designed to develop (a) An understanding of the 1mmed1ate and long term effects of exercise on the body The differences ex1st1ng between trained and untrained subjects wdl be emphasised (b) An apprec1at1on as to how tra1n1ng schedules can be based on sound sc1ent1fic pnnc1ples (c) Competence 1n the measurement of physical performance

Text book Mathews D K and Fox E L The physiological basis of physical education and athletics (Saunders 1976)

920

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Reference books Astrand P 0 and Rodahl K Textbook of work physiology (McGraw Hill 1970)* Consolazio C F Johnson R E and Pecora L J Physiologzcal measurements ofmetabolu:

Junctwns in man (McGraw Hdl 1963) Fox EL and Mathews D K lntervaltra1ning-cond1twn1ngforsportsandgeneralf1tness (Saunders 1974) Johnson WR andBusl-.irk ER eds Sczenceandmedicineofexerciseandsport 2nded (Harper & Row 1974) Karpovtch P V and S1nn1ng W E Ph)siology of muscular activity 7th ed (Saunders 1971) Morehouse L r. and Miller A T Physiology ofexerc'lSe (Mosby 1971) Wilmore J H ed Exerc'lSe and sport sciences revzews vol I (Academic 1970)

53462 THE PHYSICAL EDUCATION PROFESSION

Units 4 Level Fourth year Duration Terms I and III

Dr D R Douglas

Class Contact One 2 hour seminar per week in first term and two 2 hour seminars per week 1n tlnrd term Assessment Essays

Students 10 this topic will exa1n1ne the roles of the professional physical educator 10

comtemporary society Students wtll be expected to draw on a wide range of relevant social soence literature tn order to (a) understand the factors f'lcthtattng and 1nlub1t1ng the achievement of professional aims and (b) provide the best basis for professional dec1s1on making Areas covered w1ll 1nclude The physical educator as a member of a profession Physical act1v1ty 1n tnodern society The promotion of physical act1v1ty The profession as a change agent Other agencies concerned with physical act1v1ty

Units 4 Level Fourth year Durauon Full year

53463 DIRECTED STUDY Dr D R Douglas and Dr R T Withers

Class Contact 1 tutorial per fortnight

Students wtll be able to pursue an area of study of their own choice Assessment wdl be on the basis of a 10 000 word paper presented by the end of the course

Units 6

53450 PHYSICAL EDUCATION IN SCHOOLS Dr D R Douglas

Level Fourth yeJr Duration Term I Class Contact 4 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes 53360 or equivalent standard Assessment Written and practical work

This topic 1s designed to give students guided pi act1ce 1n the unplemcntatton of physical education progran1mes 1n primary and secondary schools Through seminars workshops and practical sessions 1n schools students wtll be taught to use their underst'lnd1ng of physical act1v1ty 1n the educ'tllonal act1v1t1es of planning '\nd conducting programmes tn schools

Top:cs The physical education curriculum primary

921

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

The physical education curriculum secondary Setting aims and ObJeCttves Instrucuonal techniques Assessment Equipment and fac1ht1es Resources Organ1zat1on of classes compet1t1ons etc Physical education and other subjects

References Education Department of SA

Syllabus for Pnmary School Physical Education Syllabus for Secondary School Physical Educauon

Mosston M Teaching physical education (Merrill 1966) B1lbrough A andjones D Physicaleducatwnintkepnmaryschool 3rded (London Univ Pr 1972) Churcher B Physical education/or teaching 11th ed (Allen & Unw1n 1971)

Units 8

53470 TEACHING INTERNSHIP (P E OPTION) Co ordinator Dr D R Douglas

Level Fourth year Durauon Term II Pre requisite 53450

Students will be allocated full ume to selected pnmary and secondary schools dunng the second term of the Fourth Year Dunng this penod opportunity wtll be given for observation of and guided part1c1patton 1n school physical education programmes and 1n the teaching of other subjects where relevant The student will be 1ncreas1ngly involved 1n teaching dunng the 1nternsh1p and will be expected to reach a specified level of proficiency 10 class management by the end of the penod In cases where students do not intend to be teachers other equivalent appropnate field work may be arranged

53361 EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY (Medical School Elective) Dr R T Withers

Units 3 Level Third year Duration Term 2 Class Contact 1 Lecture 1 Tutonal and 1 three hour laboratory per week Assessment Laboratory reports

This topic will fam1hanse the student with the immediate and long term effects of exercise on the body A sound physiological basis will be given for exercise prescnpt1on

Text books American College of Sports Med1c1ne Guidelines for graded exercise testing and exercise prescnption (Lea & Feb1ger 1975)* Astrand P 0 and Rodahl K Textbook of work phystololfj (McGraw Htll 1970)* Mathews, D K and Fox E L The physiological basis of physical education and athletics (Saunders 1976)

The Bachelor of Special Education Programme Co ordinator Mr G M Cooper

The first year of the Bachelor of Special Education programme represents one year of full time study and compnses the follow1ng Dunng the first half year the three topics 53810 53802 and 53803 Dunng the second half year 53911 and two topics laking from 53804, 53805 53806 53807 and 53808 The second year of the degree may normally be taken 10 one year full time or two years part tlme It will com pnse the following topics 53905 53910 Advanced Reading and Seminar 10 Special Education-advanced reading

922

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

and sen11nar course tn two of the followtng 'lreas tnental 1eta1dat1on behavioural problems children from minority group backgrounds commun1cauon disorders and learning d1sab1hucs 1)3903 Pr'lct1cum with H'lnd1capped Children -practical experience with h'lnd1capped children over a period equivalent to one term full tune teaclung 53912 Research 1n Specnl [duc'lt1on or a fu1ther advanced reading topic

53802 INTRODUCTION TO EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN ISSUES IN SPECIAL EDUCATION

Mr G M Cooper & Dr B Mageean Unus 6 Level f1r~t year B Spec Ed Pre requ1s1tcs B Spec [J standing Du1 at1on First h.ilf year Chss Cont'lct 1 lecture 'lnd l sc1111nar practical work and field tnp As~essment By 'lss1gninent and exa1n1nauon

The major purpose of this topic 1s to provide a co1nprehens1ve survey of the field of Special Education that will give 1dent1ficat1on defin1t1ons 1nc1dencc classdicatlon .ind euology of e>..ccpuon·lln1es 'lll overview of current issues and problems 1n Special Education focus on the proble1n of h1nd1capp1ng condtuons 111 the ordinary classroom s1tuat1on probletns of educational dngnos1s 1ssessn1cnt and ascertainment typc.s of educat1on'll and rchab1htauon provisions and needs and curuculum organ1sat1on

Reference books Boswell D M and Wingrove J M The handicapped person in the communit; (Open Univ Pr 1974) H1nng N G cd Behaviour of £Xceptwnal cluldnn (Merrill 1974) I Ic.wett f M and Forn1..ss S R Educatwn of exceptional learners (Allyn & Bacon 1974) Jones R L New d1reclw11s in.special education (Allyn & Bacon 1970) Jones R L ed Problems and issues in the education of exce/Jltonal children (Houghton M>fflm 1971)

2nd cd (Houghton Nliffl1n 1972) Kirk S A Educating e::o.ceptwnal children S1nith R M 1nd Ne1sworth J T (McGraw Hill 1975)

The exceptwnal child a functional approach

53803 THE SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY OF EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN Dr G R Teasdale

Units 6 Level first yea1 B Spec Ld Duratton First h'llf year Cl tss Cont1.ct l lecture and 2 se1n1nars per week and field tnp Pre. requ1s1tes B Spec Ed stanchng Assessment Assignments seminar papers and exan11nat1on

It 1s hoped thal this topic will provide a deeper underst.ind1ng of the 1djustment diff1culucs encountered by the exceptional chtld Formal course work will be supplemented by first hand experience 1n the fo1 m of s1mulauon part1c1pant observation 1nterv1ews and so on Major focus wtll be placed on adjustment diffic.ult1es arising from social and cultural factors The following areas wdl be included a h1stoncal analysis ofatutudes to the disabled the cultural 01 socnl relatJv1ty of h.i.nd1c1p the d1~abled as a minonty group 1n society effects of the except1on1l child on intra family rel1t1onsh1ps d1fficulues of children wnh mild d1s1biht1es effects of 1nsutut1onahziit1on educauon and social welfare needs

Text book Telford C \V and Sawrey JM I'heexceptw11alu1d1v1dual 3rdcd (Prcnuce 1-lall 1977)

Reference books Anderson E Nf I'he dtsabled schoolchl/d (Methuen 1973) Bebab Wf J and R1d11rdson S A The mentally retarded and society a social science persj1ectivl (Un1vcrs1ty P.irk Pr 1975)

923

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Boswell D M and Wingrove J M eds The handicapped person in the community (Open Univ Pr 1974)* Corfman E Sllgma notes on the management of spoiled ulenttty (Penguin 1973)* McDaniel J W Physical disability and human behaviour (Pergamon 1969) Shakespeare R The ps)chology of handicap (Methuen 1975)* Wnght B A Physical disabtlzty a pS)chological approach (Harper & Row l 960)

53804 GENERAL MENTAL - SCHOLASTIC RETARDATION Mr G M Cooper

U111ts 6 Level First year B Spec Ed Durauon Second half year Class Contact 2 lectures and 1 tutorial weekly plus practical work Pre requisites 53801 53802 53803 Assessment By assignment and exam1nat1on

The focus of this topic will be on children who are functionally retarded tn all aspects of their mental scholasuc ab1ht1es (1 e those who 1n both 1ntelhgence and attainments are s1gn1ficantly below the mean of their age group) In terms of std! commonly used categories the course will be concerned with the mildly or educable mentally retarded and the moderately or trainable mentally retarded Students will be involved 1n continuing contacts and practical work with children throughout the topic and wtll be given the opportunity to concentrate on areas and groups of particular interest Major areas will include the following def1n1t1ons causes and ascertainment social cultural factors 1n retardation cogn1t1ve development and learning charactenst1cs of the retarded school programmes and curncula for (a) the trainable retarded (b) the educable retarded teaching methods with particular reference to behaviour modification techniques

Reference hooks Clarke A M and Clarke A D B eds Mental deficiency lhe changing outlook 3rd ed (Methuen 1975) Cooper G M Research profiler tn mental relardatwn (Helios Book 1977) Dunn L M ed Exceptional clnldren in the schools (Holt Rinehart & Winston I 973) Haywood H C ed Social cultural aspects of mental retardation (Appleton Century Crofts I 970) Jordan T E The mentally retarded 3rd ed (Mernll 1972) Kiernan C C and Woodford F D eds Behaviour modification with the severely retarded (Llsev1er 1975) Kolstoe 0 P Mental retardation an educational viewpoint (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1972) Rothstein J H Mental retardation readings and resources 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1971) Smith R M An introduction to mental retardation (McGraw Hdl 1971) Smtth R M Cluizcal teaching methods of instruction for l11£ retarded (McGraw H 111 1968)

53805 LEARNING DISABILITIES Dr B Mageean

Units 6 Level First year B Spec Ed Pre requ1s1tes 53801 53802 53803 Duration Second half year Class Contact 2 lecture:.!sem1nars and I day practical work tn schools Assessment By assignment 1nclud1ng case study

The topic provides a basic knowledge of learning d1sab1ltties and includes background and defin1uon of learning d1sab1hties screening diagnosis and assessment education practices and instructional strategies review of resedrch and parental problems

Reference books Anderson J ed Learning disabilities diagnosis and treatment (Univ of New England 1972)

924

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Gearheart B R Learning dtsabilities educational strategies (Mosby 1973) Hallahan D P and Cruickshank W M Psyclweducatwnal foundations of learning dtsab1lzt1es (Prentice Hall l 973) Johnson Dons J and Myklebust H R Leanung dtsabil1tus educational pnnczpl.es and practice (Grune & Stratton 1971) Kirk S A Educating exceptional cluldren 2nd ed (Houghton M1ff1111 1972) K1rk S A and McCarthy Jeanne M Learning dtsabiltttes selected ACLD papers (Houghton M1f£11n 1975) McCarthy J J amd McCarthy Joan f Leannng dzsabzltties (Allyn & Bacon 1969) Myers Patnc1a I and Hammill D D Methods for learning disorders (Wiley 1969)

53806 BEHAVIOUR PROBLEMS AND THEIR MANAGEMENT Dr A Russell

Units 6 Level First year B Spec Ed Pre requ1s1tes 53801 53802 53803 Duratton Second half year Class Contact 3 hours per week Assess1nent By assignment 1nclud1ng a practical report

This topic aims to provide an 1ntroduct1on to topics associated wtth the educauon of emot1onally disturbed or behavioural disordered children A variety of approaches

will be surveyed but special attenuon will be given to behaviour analysts and behaviour mod1ficdt1on strategies Areas of study to be covered include Competencies for teachers of the behav1ourally disordered Defin1t1ons and class1ficat1on Causes

Interpersonal rclat1ons/the humanistic approach Transactional analysis Reality therapy Behaviour analysis and mod1ficat1on

Text books Kauffman J M and Lewis C D ed reaching children with behaviour disorders (Mernll 1974) Worell J and Nelson C M Managing instructwnal problems a care study workbook (McGraw Hiil 1974) Dupont H ed Educating emotionally dtsturbed cluldren 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston I975)

53807 CHILDREN FROM MINORITY GROUP BACKGROUNDS Mr K R McConnoclne

Units 6 Level F1rst year B Spec Ed or G1 aduate (Dip Ed ) or B Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 hours per v.eek practical work as required Pre requ1s1tes 53801 53802 53803 or enrolment 1n Dip Ed (Abong1nal Educ opuon) or B Ed III (Abong1nal Educ option) Assessment By assignment and/or exam1natton Tins topic may not be offered 1n 1978

This topic 1s concerned with the cd ucauon of children from racial and ethnic m1nonty groups w1th1n Australian society Attenuon will be focused on the nature of social and psychological d1scont1nu1t1es between these m1nont1es and the donunant society and the responses of both groups to these d1Scont1nu1t1es

Reference books To be advised

925

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Untts 6

53808 COMMUNICATION DISORDERS Mr D Thomas a11d Mr R Kell)

Level First year B Spec Ed Pre requ1s1tes 53801 53802 53803 Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 hours se1n1nar and tutonals Assess1nent Se1n1n ir paper and exam1nat1on

The purpose ofth1s topic 1s to give students knowledge and 1nfonnat1on oflangu1.ge and commun1cat1on skills as they rehle to excepuonal 1nd1v1du1.ls A study will be made of the factors contnbut1ng to commun1C1.l1on disorders with particular emphasis on theones methodologies and issues Areas covered 111 tlus topic are Language 1~ development acqu1s1uon 1n cluldhood and relauonslup to cogn1L1ve processes lustoncal roots of commun1cat1ve disorder~ psychohngu1st1cs cross cultu1 al aspects of commun1cat1on non verbal co1nmun1cat1on disorders of speech and heanng problems 1n educating children with commun1cauve disorders prov1s1ons for commun1cat1ve disorders and issues 1.nd research 1n the study of connnun1cat1on

Reference books Chomsky N Language and mind 2nd e<l (l"iarcou1t Brace & World 1972) Dale P S Language develojnuent stnLclure and function (Dryden I 972) Davis l-1 and Silverman S R eds Hearing and deafness 3rd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970) Eisenberg A M and Smah R R Nonverbal commu~zcatwn (Bobbs Merrill 1971) furth 11 Thin!ung without language (Free Pr l 966) McNeil! D Theacqutsitwn of language the stud) of developmentalpS)cltolzngutsttcs (1-larper & Row 1970) Sap1r [ Selected wntings in language culture and per:.onaltty (C.ihforn1a Untv P1 1963) Vygotsky L S Thought and language ed and lr by L Hauf1nan and G Vaker (MIT Pr 1962) Who1 f B L Language thought and realtt) (lvl I T Pr I 956)

Units 6

53810 CURRICULUM THEORY AND SPECIAL EDUCATION Mr D Thomas

Level Ftrst year B Spec Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact Lectures & Se1n1nars 3 hours per wee!.. Pre requ1s1tes 53801 53802 53803 Assessment TBA

The 1n1ent1on 1s to provide the opportunny for students to have contact on one com1non topic that provides a framework w1th1n which to consider curnculu1n theory and Speu.il education Areas covered 1n this topic are h1stoncal conte1nporary plulosoplucal and theoretical perspectives 1n curnculu1n dcvelopmc..nts 111 special education educalional and psychologtcal influences on curn(.ulum development 10 special education curnculu1n process - 1dcnt1ficauon and analysis 1nstrucuon 1ntervc..nt1on and cvaluauon and pi act1cal work

Reference bool!S Deno E N ed I11struct10nal alltniatzve for exceptional children (Council for except1011.il children l 973) Repo1 t of the Committee on enquiry into education 111 S A 1969 70 Lducatwn in SA Report Chairman P H Karmel (S A Govt pr 1971) Jones R L New directions in special education (Allyn & Bacon 1970) Jones R L Problem~ and tssues 1n the educatton of exclptwnal cluldren (Houghton M1ff11n 1971) Kelly L J P!tzlosop!ncal perspectives tn special educatwn (Merrill 1971) Plulhpc; D C Theones values and education (Melbourne Univ Pr 1971)

926

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Schwartz L and Oscroff A The clinical teacher for special education Final Rcporl vols I & II (Florida State Univ 1975) Australian Dept of Education and Science Special Education in Australia (Aust Gov Pub Serv Canberra 1972) Wheeler D K Cumculum process (Univ of London Pr 1967)

Text books Anes P Centunes of cluldhood (Penguin 1974) Curtis S J and Boultwood M A shorl history of educational ul.eas 4th ed (Unl\ers1ty Tutorial Pr 1968) Ilhch 1 Deschooling society (J.Iarper & Row 1971) Kedd1e N Tinker tailor the myth of cultural d.epnvatwn (Penguin 1973) Postman N and Weingartner C Teaching as a subversive act1v1ty (Penguin 1972)

Units 6

53913 RESEARCH METHODS IN SPECIAL EDUCATION Professor J Anderson

Level First year B Spec Ed Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 hours of lectures and pracucals per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment By ass1gn1nent and exam1nauon

The topic 1s an introduction to the main approaches to research In the behavioural sciences survey research pred1cuve studies experimental research field and case studies The focus wdl be on methods of collecungdata (e g observation quesuonna1res 1nterv1ews) and methods of analysing data (basic descnpuvc statistics hypothesis testing) The maJor purposes of this topic are to become fam1har with b1bhograph1c sources 1n education to 1dent1fy researchable proble1ns and formulate hypotheses to interpret and evaluate published research to develop procedures for observation collect1on recording and evaluattng data Practical classes will involve the collection of data and the apphcatton of relevant stausucal procedures Opportun1ttes will be provided to develop particular interest areas in the form of an 1nd1v1dual prOJCCt No previous work 1n statistics is assumed

Texl books Kerhnger F N I'oundatwns of behavioural research 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973) Any text on basic stat1st1cs such as one of the following Guilford J P and Fruchter B Fundamental statistics in psychology and education 5th ed (McGraw Hill 1973) Klugh H E Statistics the essentials for research 2nd ed (Wiley 1974) Runyon R P and Hab<.r A Fundamentals of behavioural stattstics 2nd ed (Addison Wesley 1970)

Reference books Brown F L Amos J R and Mink 0 G Staltslzcal concepts a baste program 2nd ed

j~,~~~~~ ~R~v A1 ;~!~w of research methods in ~ducat1on (Rand McNally 1977) Siegel S Nonparametnc statistics for the beluivwural sciences (McGraw Htll l 956) Thorndike R L and Hagen E P Measurement and evaluation tn psychology and education 4th ed (Wiley 1977) Turney B and Robb G Research in education (Holt Rinehart & Winston l 971)

Units 9

53912 RESEARCH PROJECT IN SPECIAL EDUCATION Mr G M Cooper

Level Second year B Spec Ed Duration Full year Pre requ1s1tes Sausfactory compleuon of first years B Spec Ed topics Cl.iss Contact Pcrson1.I d1recuon Assessment D1ssenat1on up to 8 000 words

927

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

This is an optional course which wdl require students to design plan and carry out a pilot research project based on parucular areas of interest Topics and methods of research stud1ci. wdl be formulated by the students 1n consultation with their tutors

53903 PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE WITH HANDICAPPED CHILDREN Special Education Staff

Units 9 Level Second year B Spec Ed Duration Full year Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of first years B Spec Ed topics Assessment Detailed report and supervised practical work

Special education students will be employed 1n a vanety of situations where they will be dealing directly or indirectly with persons falling into vanous categones of excepttonahty dunng their second and third years of part time study for full time students a one semester pract1curn will be arranged Students will be expected to demonstrate competencies 1n planning and pracuce The most crucial aspect of the practicum 1s for students to appraise the contextual features of the s1tuat1on w1th1n wluch their programme 1s based and to provide objective evidence of the academic personal social and vocational changes which may result from their 1ntervent1on

Units 9

53905 ADVANCED READING MENTAL RETARDATION Mr G M Cooper

Level Second year B Spec Ed Duration Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of first years B Spec Ld topics Assessment Seminar paper 5 000 words plus assignments contracted by students 1n consultation w1th the tutor

The course of study 1s designed to give students the opportunity to appraise 1n depth an area of mental retardation Area or areas of study will be selected by students in consultation with the tutor 1n charge An 1ntens1ve review and analysis of the area chosen 1ncorporat1ng related bodies of knowledge from philosophy psychology sociology and other subject areas will be made The group will meet each week for both 1ndiv1duah1ed tutonal sessions and group work Reading hsts and m~or reference works are offered on an 1nd1v1dual basts related to the area chosen Assess1nent will be arranged by contact with 1nd1v1duals taking the course A m11or component of this assessment will be the seminar paper for which the requ1Tement will be at least 5 000 words

Units 9

53906 ADVANCED READING BEHAVIOUR PROBLEMS Dr A Russell

Level Second year B Spec Ed Duration Full year Class Contact 1 two hour session per week Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of first years B Spec Ed topics Assessment By 1nd1v1dual assignments

This topic aims to build on many of the topics introduced 1n topic 53806 The emphasis ts placed on skills and techniques for deahng with behaviour problems together with the underlying theoreucal and research literature Are'ls of study to be covered include work on interpersonal skills and the helping relat1onslup self control reahty therapy and dec1s1on making transactional analysis modelling and role playing group processes There 1s also scope 1n the course for students to develop the1r own area of interest

Reference books Brammer L 1\il Tiu: helping relationship process and skills (Prentice Hall 1973)*

928

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Egan G The skilled helper A model for systematic helping a11d interpersonal relating (Brooks/Cole 1975) Egan G Exercises in helping skills (Brooks/Cole 1975) Krumboltz J D & Thoresen C E Behavioural counselhng (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969) Mahoney M J & Thoresen C E Self control power to the person (Brooks/Cole 1974)* Watson D L & Tharp R G Self directed behaviour self modification for personal adjustment (Brooks/Cole 1972) W1tt1ner M J &Myrick RD Faczl1tatlveteach1ng theoryandpractzce(Goodyear 1974)*

53907 ADVANCED READING CHILDREN FROM MINORITY GROUP BACKGROUNDS

Units 9 Level Second year B Spec Ed Duration First half year

Mr K R McConnochze

Class Contact 2 hours tutoriaVsem1nar per week Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of first year B Spec Ed Assessment By assignment

Students will examine a variety of approaches to the educatJon of children from minority group backgrounds drawing on 1nformat1on from overseas s1tuat1ons Students will be given extensive freedo1n to study 10 areas of 1nd1v1dual interest This topic may not be offered 1n 1978

Reference books To be advised

53908 ADVANCED READING COMMUNICATION DISORDERS Mr R Kelly

Units 9 Level Second year B Spec Ed Duration Fust half year second year Class Contact 2 three hour tutonal/sem1nar per weeJ... Pre requ1sues Sattsfactory completion of first years B Spec Ed topics Assessment Seminar paper of 5 000 words plus assignments detcrm1n<.d by course tutor

Students will be expected to 1nvest1gate a topic 1n the area of language development as 1t relates to handicapped children and pool the results of the1r enquines 1n seminars which then become the basts for further d1scuss1on and lectures Add1t1onal lectures and seminars will serve to introduce topics of interest 1n the area of language and commun1cat1on and provide a wider basis for choosing 1nd1v1d ual topics Re'ldtng hsts will be provided on a group as well as an 1nd1v1dual basts

Unns 9

53910 ADVANCED READING LEARNING DISABILITIES Mr D Thomas

Level S<.cond year B Spec Ld Duration Full year Class Contact l two hour class per week Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of first years B Spec Ed topics Assessment Essay of 5 000 words and assignments determined by course tutor

This course of study wdl examine areas and issues relating to the dtf ficulues encountered by learning disabled children It w1ll 1nclude problems of organ1sat1ons as well as aspects of diagnosis and remed1at1on some of wluch nse out of course nu1nber 53805 and are examined tn depth Assessment wdl be determined by the course tutor 1n consultation with 1nd1v1dual students The main component will be an essay of 5 000 words which may be the bds1s for a se1n1nar and group d1scuss1on

929

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

The Diploma m Educatzon Programme Co ordinator Dr D Grundy

(See Statute 10 l Schedule 15)

The Diploma 1n Education may be taken either by 1ntend1ng secondary or by 1ntend1ng primary teachers

Diploma tn Education (Secondary)

The Diploma 111 Education for 1ntend1ngsecondary teachers 1s aw1.rded on the successful completion of one year of full time study It may also be taken on a part time basis over a penod of two years The programme for the Diploma 1n Education comprises the following areas of study topic 53217 Introduction to Pedagoby topic 53337 Educational Media Special Methods 3 topics of Educauonal Studies topic 53745 Teaching Observation and Practice The full time Diploma 1n Education 1s organised 1n three phases which correspond though not exactly with the three U n1vers1ty terms The first phase consists of an onentat1on week and eight weeks of lectures 1n the topics Introduction to Pedagogy Educational Media and Special Methods (topics selected to make up 9 onus) Dunng this phase an 1n1t1al week and subsequently one day per week 1s spent111 teach1ngobservat1on and prc1ct1ce 1n selected schools The second phase of the year compnses 53745 Teaching Observauon and Practice a penod of a further 7 weeks In schools Students return fro1n the schools (m1.1nly after school hours) during this time for continuing Special Methods classes according to fixed schedules A satisfactory rating on teaching pracuce 1s necessary to obtain the D1plo1na Students rated as unsatisfactory at the end of the block practice teaching penod may be given a further opportunity to reach a satisfactory standard at the end of the year Dunng the third phase of the year (the last three weeks of the second term and the whole of the third term) major concentration is on three topics selected from Educauonal Studies (for details of these topics see page 901

Diploma in Fducallon (Pnmary) This programme may be undertaken by graduates who wish to teach at the pnmary school level It compnses one year of full tnne study followed by a one year teaching 1nternsh1p tn a primary school in the Adelaide metropohtan area During the second year the student may assume full ume teaching rcspons1b1ht1es but is g.ven leave to attend short conferences and seminars at the Un1vers1ty The programme of students for the Diploma 1n Education (Pnmary) corresponds to Part III and Part IV of the Bachelor of [ducat1011 Dunng the first year the programme compnses the follow1ng areas of study

lntrod uct1on to Pedagogy 3 Educational Media 3 Psychology and Teaching of the Basic Subjects I 0 Express1onal Acttv1t1es 4 2 Educauonal Studies topics 12 as well as topic 53340 Teaching Observation and Expenence 4

During the second (1nternsh1p) year the student completes the followtng topics Teaching Internship (Dip Ed ) Apphcat1on of Educational Theory Primary School Methods

Special Methods (Dip Ed ) Students are required to select topics from the hst below to a total of 9 units The 1nformat1on preceding the hst of topics refers to the group of topics 53750 to 53768 as a whole Level Graduate (Dip Ed) Pre requ1s1tes A second ycc1r topic in each relevant area except for Junior Mathematics 1.ndjuntor Science for each of wluch an appropnate first year subject 1s a pre requ1s1te Durauon Terms l and 2 Class Contact A total of six hours/week 1n Term 1 and dunng 3 weeks a& arranged dunng 53745 Teaching Observation and Pracuce

930

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Assessment Short act1v1ty reports cssay(s) and a report based on school experience dunng 53745 Teaching Observation and Practice

The course provides an 1ntroduct1on to methodological studies 1n specific teaching areas of !>econdary schools Curricula teaching methods and assoc1ated problems are examined from a practical onentauon although a theoreucal basis 1s attempted to provide for the development of 1nd1v1dual teaching styles by students

Science graduates are strongly advised to take the following comb1nat1on of topics 53759 Special Methods Junior Mathematics 53761 Special Methods Junior Science

and one of 53760 Special Methods Senior Mathematics 53762 Special Methods Biology 53763 Special Methods Chemistry 53764 Special Methods Physics

Graduates from the School of Social Sciences and the School of H uman1t1es should draw on the following topics to make up 9 units

Available Topics 53750 Special Methods English 41h units 53751 Special Methods Drama 4!4 units 53753 Special Methods History 4!;2 units 53754 Special Methods Geography 4!h units 53755 Special Methods Economics lY.! units 53756 Special Methods Junior Social Science 3 units 53757 Special Methods Senior Social Science l !h units (May only be taken 1f 53756

Special Methods Junior Social Science 1s also taken) 53759 Special Methods Junior Mathemaucs 3 unas 53760 Special Methods Senior mathematics 3 units (May only be taken 1f 53759 Special

Methods Junior Mathematics 1s also taken) 53761 Special Methods Junior Science 3 units 53762 Special Methods Biology 3 unus 53763 Special Methods Che1n1stry 3 units 53764 Special Methods Physics 3 units 53765 Special Methods Icahan 4!h units 53766 Special Methods French 41h units 53767 Special Methods Spanish 4V2 units 53768 Special Methods Enghsh as a Foreign Language 41h unus (May only be taken 1f

53750 Special Methods English 1s also taken)

53745 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND PRACTICE Co ordinator Dr B K Hyams

U1uts 3 Level Graduate (Dip Ed ) Durauon M1n1mum of eight weeks mainly 10 term 2 Pre requ1sites None , Candidates for the Diploma 10 Lducauon take part in supervised teaching pracuce and observation 10 specified schools 10 the metropohran area A sausfactory level of proficiency tn practice 1s necessary for the award of the Diploma Some students may also be requITed to undertake two further weeks teaching pracuce following the November exam1nauons

Units 3

53746 TEACHING OBSERVATION AND PRACTICE (ABORIGINAL EDUCATION)

Mr K R McConnocJne

Level Graduate (Dip Ed) Duration M1n1mu1n of 9 weeks mainly 1n Term II Pre requ1s1te Lnrolment 1n the Abong1nal Education strand

931

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Students are required to undertake the following (1) Dunng the first term students will spend ume 1n schools with significant m1nonty group enrolments (2) Dunng the second term students will be involved 1n a programme of field experience and teaching practice on isolated settlements This programme wdl begin with an 1ntens1ve 9 day orientation at Fhnders Un1vers1ty Follow1ng this students wdl travel by road w1tha supervisor and observe a vanety of 1nst1tut1ons 1n Central Australia After this 1n1tial observation students wdl be placed 1n schools for teaclung practice Students who have not achieved a satisfactory level of proficiency will be required to complete a further two week period of teach1ngdunng the August vacauon or following the November exam1nauons

Units 6

53704 TEACHING INTERNSHIP (DIP ED ) Co ordinator Dr G R Teasdale

Level Dip Ed (Internship) Duration Full year Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of 36 Dip Ed units

During the year all students are required to undertake a penod of teaching internship app1 oved by the Chairman of the School of Education Students shall teach for three terms at least on a half Ume basts Alternal1vely those students who are unable to obtain paid employment as a teacher may undertake a fourteen week period of teaching pracuce during the first semester Teaching will be supervised by v1s1ung staff from Flinders Un1verstty and students will be required to demonstrate their competence as classroom teachers 1n order to quahfy for the Diploma 1n Educ.at1on

Unas 6

53705 APPLICATIONS OF EDUCATIONAL THEORY Dr G R Teasdale

Level Dip Ed (Internship) (Pnmary) Duration first half year Class Contact 3 two hour seminars 1 one day conference 1 two and a half day conference Pre requ1s1tes Sausfactory compleuon of 36 Dip Ed units

Tlu~ topic consists of a programme of seminars and conferences dealing with problems of education1.l practice An atte1npt 1s 1nade to relate the theory to which the student has been introduced during his full time studies to the practical problems \vhtch he actually is encountenng during hts 1nternsh1p year Evaluation 1s based upon the submission of written papers

Reference books Bassett G W and others Pnmary education in Australta modern developments (Angus & Robertson 1974)* Evans E D Transztwn to teaching (Holt 1976)* Fisk L and Lindgren H C A survival guule for teachers (Wiley 1973) Jarohmek J and Foster C D Teaclung and learning in the elementary school (Mac1ndlan 1976) Koun1n J S DlScipltne and group management 1n classrooms (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970) Lett W R Im a problem at school case studies tn Australian education (Angus & Roberlson 1973)* Logan L M and Logan V G Design for creative teaclung (McGraw Hill 1971)* Mornson A and Mel ntyre D Social ps)chology of teaching (Penguin 1972)* Patlerson C H Humanistic education (Prentice Hall 1973)* Raths J Pancella J R and Van Ness J S eds Studying teaching 2nd ed (Prentice Hall 1971)* Sadler J E Concepts in pnmary educatwn (Allen & Unw1n 1974) S1lbcnnan C E ed The open classroom reader (Vintage 1973)*

932

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Stephens L S The teachers guule to open education (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1974)* Walker R and Adelman C A guule to classroom observation (Methuen 1975) Wtlhams P ed Behaviour problems in school (London Univ Pr 1974)*

Untts 6

53706 PRIMARY SCHOOL METHODS (DIP ED ) Dr G R Teasdale

Level Dip Ed (Internship) Duration Second half year Class Contact 3 two hour seminars I two and a half day conference Pre requ1s1tes Satisfactory completion of 36 Dip Ed units

This topic requires the study 1n depth of one of the basic areas of the pnmary school curnculum Areas of study offered xn 1978 include Reading Mathematics Social Studies Enghsh Science Physical Education and Music The topic will involve a senes of seminars and the preparation of a m~or assignment The students also wdl be requued to demonstrate that they are applying the theoretical 1ns1ghts of their study 10 the practical teaching situation

Diploma m Educational Administration Programme Co ordinator Dr P W Onnen

For details of requ1rements 1nclud1ng quahficat1ons for admission see Statute 10 I Schedule 17 The Diploma will compnse eight topics

Master of Educational Administration Programme Co ordinator Dr P W OBnen

For detads of requirements 1nclud1ng quahficat1on for adm1ss1on sec Statute 7 3 Schedule 7

Units 4!-1?

53651 EVOLVING CONCEPTS OF ADMINISTRATION Ms D K Briggs

Level Graduate (M Ed Adm1n /Dip Ed Adm1n ) Durauon First half year Class Conract I two hour seminar weekly Pre requisites Dip Ed Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n standing Assessment Wntten assignments

This topic compnses a h1stoncal review of adm1n1strat1ve theory and ts intended to give the student some understanding of the development of theones of management and organ1sauon The topic will include Max Weber s bureaucratic model and the sc1enufic management of Fredenck Taylor the theones of Henn Fayol the emphasis on human relations in the penod of Elton Mayo and Mary Parker Follett the systems process approach and the later work of such writers as Argyts Bennis and Etz1oni Dec1s1on making as the key function of adm1n1strat1on wdl be examined

Text books Lane W R Corwin R G and Monahan W G Foundations of educatwnal administratwn (Macmillan 1967) 0 Shaughnessy J Patterns of bw1ness organization (Allen & Unw1n 1976) or Pollard H Developments in management thought (Heinemann 1974)

Preliminary reading De Bono E Lateral tlunkingfor management (McGraw Hill 1974) Jay A Management and Machiavelli (Hodder & Stoughton I 969) Jay A Corporatwn man (Cape 1972) Parkinson C N Parkinsons law (Penguin 1965) Peter L J and Hull R The PeITT fmnciple (Pan 1970)

933

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Units 4Y2

53652 PATTERNS OF ORGANIZATION AND ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE

Ms D K Briggs

Level Graduate (M Ed Adm1n /Dip Ed Adm1n) Duration Second half year Class Contact 1 two hour seminar weekly Pre requisites 53651 Evolving Concepts of Adm1n1strat1on Assessment Written assignments

This topic will examine alternative organ1zat1onal structures the formal and informal organ1zat1on and problems of bureaucracy Questions of d1v1s1on of respons1b1hty and of internal organ1zat1onal control will be considered An exam1nat1on of change and 1nnovat1on will be made with special reference to various approaches to planned change and change strategies theories of the change process and resistance

Reference books Bennis W G Benne K D and Chin R eds The planning of change 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973) [tz1on1 A A sociological reader on complex organizations 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969) 1-lunt J W The restless organization (Wiley Australasia 1972) L1ppttt R Watson J and Westley B Thedynamicsofplannedchange(Harcourt Brace& World 1958) Miles M B ed Innovation 1n education (Teachers College Pr 1964) Owens R G Organisational behaviour in schools (Prentice Hall 1970) Owens R G and Ste1nhof C R Administering change in schools (Prentice Hall 1976)

53653 COMMUNICATION AND INTERPERSONAL RELATIONS Mrs J Kapferer

Units 4Y2 Level Graduate (Dip Ed Admtn /M Ed Adm1n ) Duration first h.ilf year Class Contact 1 two hour seminar weekly Pre requ1s1tes Dip Ed Adm1n /M I:d Adm1n standing Assessment Written assignments

This topic is intended to enquire into the nature and functions of commun1cat1ons 1n soCiety 1n general and 1n specific work sauat1ons The pre cond1t1ons levels and functions of commun1cat1on will be exa1n1ned together with fac1htators and barners to 1t and channels of commun1cat1on and commun1cat1on systems The role of pubhc opinion and of the group will be studied together with the concept of influence the processes of op1n1on change and the importance of reference groups The topic will constitute an 1ntroduct1on to group dynamics

Reference books Cartwnght D and Zander A F eds Group dynam1cs 3rd ed (Harper & Row 1968) Katz E and Lazarsfeld P r Personal influence (Free Pr 1964) Thayer L Communication and commun1cat10n systems in organizations management and tnterpersonal relations (Irwin 1968) Reference will also be made to current JOurnal articles

Units 4Yi

53654 PLANNING TECHNIQUES Dr P W OBnen

Level Graduate (Dip Ed Adm1n/M Ed Adm1n ) Duration Second half year Class Contact I two hour sem1nar/pract1cal weekly Pre requ1s1tes 53658 The Planning Process Assignments Wntten assignments and practical work

934

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

This topic IS an introduction to planning forecasting and dec1s1on making techniques Topics to be stressed include the use of social fo1ecast1ng and projection techniques 1n educational planning and e1nphasis will be placed on the use of a methodology of social forecasung using techniques such as the Delphi techtuquc cross impact cross purpose matnces scenarios etc 1n exanun1ng proJCCtln1:, and evuluating trends in eductt1on

Text books Argenti J l\llanagemenl techniques (Allen & Unw1n 1969) Hencley S P 'lnd Yates J R eds I'utunsm in education melhodologzes (Berkeley McCutchan 1974) Hostrop R W Managing education for results (ETC Pub 1973)

Reference books Approp11ate references will be provided during the course

Units 41h

53655 PERSONNEL IN EDUCATION SYSTEMS Staff of School of Education

Lt.vel Graduate (Dip Ed Ad1n1n /M [.cl Adm1n) Duration Second half year Class Contact 1 two hour senuna1 weekly Pre requ1o;1tes Dip Ed Admin /M Ed Ad1n1n standing Assessment Written ao;s1gnments

This topic will be based on the study of theories of adm1n1strat1on 'lnd of personnel pohc1es and practices 1n 'lil areas of educational adm1n1strallon Students will have the opportunay to consider examples drawn from industry and commerce as well as pubhc adm1n1strat1on and they will be asked to relate concepts of democratic leadership and personnel pohcy to specific work s1tuat1ons Questions to be studied w11l 1nclude styles of leaderslup part1c1patory pohcy making profess1onahs1n and superv1s1on and planning fo1 profess1on'll growth

Rlference boollS Castettc1 W B 1 he personnel function in educational admznislratwn 2nd ed (Mac1ndlan 1976) Lucia W .H and McNeil J D Supervision a synthesis of thought and actwn 2nd ed (McGraw Hill 1969) Serg1ovann1 T J and Starratt R G Lmerging patterns of supervzswn (McGraw Hill 1970)

53656 RESEARCH METHODS FOR THE ADMINISTRATOR

Units 41h Professor C N Power

Level Graduate (Dip Ed Ad1n1n /M Ld Adm1n) Duration First half ye.ti Class Contact I lecture and one two hou1 seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes Dip Ed Adm1n standing Assess1nent Coursework problems and project

The topic 1s designed to introduce students to the basic features of educauonal research methodology It wdl cover the following Expe1 nnental and research design b1bhogr'lph1cal resenrch methods the use of questionnaire~ 1nterv1ews and other structured data collect1on techniques survey and S'llnphng 1ncthods cle1nentary descnpt1vc and 1nferenual stat1st1cs the use of lustoncal and unobtrusive methods and resea1 ch reporting Students wdl be asked to carry out simple analyses of data and to design a ~tudy these tasks will be used as the basis for assessment 1n the course

1 ext boo!• Fox D J The research process in educalwn (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969) Also acceptable as an alternauve Van Dalen D B Understanding educational research 3rd ed (McGraw Hill 1973)

935

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Referet1ce books Blalock H M Social statistics (McGraw Hdl 1960) Huff D How to lie with statistics (Gollancz 191}4) Moroney M Facts from figures (Penguin 1951) Siegel S Non parametric stattsttcs (McGrdW Hill 1956) Turney B L and Robb G P Research in educatwn (Dryden I 971) Van Dalen D B Understanding educational research 3rd ed (McGraw Hill l 973) Wiersma W Research methods in educatwn (L1pp1ncott l 969)

Unus 4\h

53657 THE AUSTRALIAN EDUCATION SYSTEM Dr B K Hyams

Level Graduate (Dip I:d Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n) Duration Second half yea1 Class Contact 1 two hour seminar weekly Pre requ1s1tcs Dtp Ed Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n standing Assessment Essays

This topic provides an exam1nat1on of the poht1cal context 1n which the adm1n1strat1on of educauon 1n Australia must oper.ite It offers a study of the follow1ng aspects (a) 1 he h1stoncal and const1tut1onal bas!!. the ong1ns development and ral!onale of the state education bureaucracies (b) Let:.al rights and respons1b1ht1es legal 1mphcauons of authority and accountab1hty of educauonal adm1n1strators 'll system aud 1nsututtonal level (c) Poht1cal influences the 1nteracuon of poht1cs and education including the role of poht1cal parties teachers organ11ations and federal state and co1nmun1ty pressure groups represenung parent dnd other sectional interests (d) Issues 1n the control of educauon debate and develop1nents 1n federal 1nte1 vent1on state decentrahtauon and the autonomy of educauonal 1nstttut1ons

Reference books Fen sham P J ed Rzghts and uu:qu.al1t1es in Australian educatzon (Cheshire 1970) Harman GS Thepoliticsofeducatwn ab1blwgraph2calgu1dl (Queensland Univ Pr 1974) ]eeks D A ed Influences ui Australian education (Cdrrols 1974) Partndge P H Society schools and progress ui Australia (Pcrgan1on 1973) Turney C ed P1011eers of Australian educatwn vol 2 (Sydney Univ Pr 1972)

Units 4lh

53658 THE PLANNING PROCESS Dr P W OBne11

Level G1 dduat<. (Dip Ld Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n ) Duration first half }<.dr Class Cont'lct One two hour seminar '\ week Pre rcqu1s1tes Dip Ed Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n Status Assei.sinent Wntten ass1gn1nents

This topic introduces students to the place importance and purpose of educational planning and to the need for plantung 1n the adnun1strauve process fhe course will also examine the role attributed to planning 1n the de\.elop1nent of adnun1strat1ve theo1y and changes 1n approaches to plann1ng111 the 1960s Steps 1n the planning process le\ els and types of planning and resources used by planners will also be discussed The cou1 se wdl exa1n1ne also the relat1onsh1p between forecasting planning and the policy sciences

Reference books Banghart F W and Trull A ]1 £rlucatw11al planning (Colher Macmillan 1973) Bncvc F J Johnston A P and Young K M Educational planning (Wadsworth I 973) Dr or Y Design for policy scunces (Elsevier 1971) Dror Y Ventures in /)()licy sciences concepts and applications (Elsevier 1971) Hencley S P and Yates J R f<utunsm in educatzon methodologies (McCutchan 1974) jdntsch E Technological forecasting in /1erspect1ve (OECD 1967) Lasswell H D A pre view of policy sczences (1!.lsev1er 1971)

936

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Orb ·1111sat1011 for Econo1n1c Co operation and Develop1nent Part1c1pator; pla11111ng 1n educatwn (01'..CD 1974) \Vdls G Wilson R M u1n1ng N and Hddebrandl R Technolog1calforecastn1g the art and its manag£.nal nnplnat10ns (P<.ngutn 1972)

53671 PLANNING AND ADMINISTRATION OF THE EDUCATIONAL PROGRAMME

Dr P rv OBnen Un1ls 4Vi Level Graduate (Dip J.<..d Ad111111 /~f Ed Adm111) Dur u1on Second h'llf ye'lr Cl'lss Contact I two hour seminar weekly P1 e requisites Dip Ed Adm in /M Ld Adrn1n standing As~css1nent Wt ltten ass1bnments

rlus topic 1s designed to provide '1 basts for curnculu1n plan111nb 1t all le\ els 1nclud1ng pninary sccond.i.ry lug her and fu1 titer educauon 01 for ext1 J. 1n'it1tuuon.1.l act1v1t1cs Students will first consider questions of curnculu1n policy dec1Mon 1n.1.k111b and of planning forcurnculum They will proceed to 1nvesugate the 1n1pllc'ltJOt?'i of curnculum for staffinb f'luht1es and equ1p1nent 'lnd the 'lllocat1on of reso11 <.e~

ReferencP book~ Burns R W 'lnd Brooks G D Curriculum dest!!;n in a changing society (Educauonal Technology Pub 1970) I l'lss G \Viles K and Bondi J C11rriculum plan11111g a new apj1roach (All} n & B icon 1974) ~101 phet E L and Ry'ln C 0 ecb Destgnn1geducalwnfor the future vols 1 8 (C1tat1on Press 19b6 1969) i\.1cCiure R WI The cumc11lum retrospect and Jiro~pect N'll1onal Soc1ely for the study of ecluc'ltion Yearbook 70th pt l (Clucago Univ Pr 1971) Rubin L j Tronturs in ~clwol leadenhip (Rand McNdly 1970) S.i.ylor J C and Alex 111der \V ~1 Plann111g curriculum for school.J (Hoh R1neha1t & Winston 1974) Tyler R W Banc prnictples of cznnculum and u1structwn (Chicago Univ Pr I 971)

Unns 414

53672 ECONOMICS OF EDUCATION A1s D K B11ggs and staff of Eco1w1111cs disciplnie

Level Graduate (Dip Lei Adm1n /iv[ Ed Ad1n1n) Dural1on Sc<.ond half year Chs.!> Cont ttl I two hour se1n1na1 weekly Pt e requ1s1tes Dip f.d Adm1n /Wl [d Adm1n standing Assessment \Vnuen assignments

It 1~ <.nv1sagcd that th1~ topic will C'ller for the needs of student<; likely to be engaged 111 both 1nacro and 1n1cro planning of educ'lllonal resoun.es Areas to be studied will include cost benefit .1.n'llys1s educc1l1on production funcuons 1nanpower planning ind the '1llocat1on of financ1 ti resources

Prdinunary n ruling Ah unad B and Blaub WI The j1ract1ce of manpower forcast1ng (rl'ievier 1973) Bl tug WI eel The eco11om1cs of etlucatwn 2 vols (Pengtun I 968 69) P'i'lcharopoulos G and H1nchhffe K Returns to erlucat1011 an 111ternatw11al companson (Elsevier 1973)

Text books Blaug WI An u1troductwn to the economtcs of etlucatw11 (Penguin 1972) Sheehan j The eco11om1cs ofeducatwn (Allt:n & Urwin 1973)

937

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

53673 CONCEPTS OF WORK, LEISURE AND RECREATION

Units 4!/:! Mr R ] Paddick

Level Graduate (Dip Ed Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n) Durauon Second half year Class Contact I two hour seminar weekly Pre requisite Dip [d Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n standing Assessment Essays and project This topic will not be offered in I 978

53674 THE SCHOOL AND THE COMMUNITY

Unns 4!/:! Ms D K Bnggs

Level Graduate (Dip Ed Admtn /M Ld Adm1n) Duration Second half year Class Contact I two hour seminar weekly Pre requisites Dip Ld Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n standing Assessment \Vntten assignments This topic will not be offered 1n 1978

53675 COMPUTERS AND MANAGEMENT

Units 4!/:! Professor] Anderson

Level Graduate (M Ed Adm1n) Durauon Second half year Class Contact I two hour sem1nar/practical weekly Pre requisites Dip td Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n standing This topic will not be offered 10 1978

Units 4Y.i

53676 PLANNING TECHNIQUES II Dr P W OBne1i

Level Graduate (Dip Ed Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n) Duration F1rst half year Class Contact l two hour seminar a week Pre requ1s1tes 53654 Planning Techniques Assessment Wnuen assignments and practical work

The purpose of the topic is to .i.llow students to examine 1n depth an integrated planning approach based on a synthesis of forecasting and planning techniques The content will be drawn from one of the follow1ng integrated planning approaches (1) The Anole Guide developed at the Un1vers1ty of Oregon by Thieman and cons1st1ng of a synthesis of the Delpln technique the educational charrette and bra1nstorm1ng (2) Determ1n1st1c trend cros!i impact forecasung developed at the Hebrew Un1vers1ty of Jerusalem by Bloom and cons1sung of a synthesis of trend cxtrapolat1on cross impact analy<>1s and syste1ns dynamics s1mulauon (3) Sandow s Pedagogical Planning Technique developed at Syracu!ie Un1ve1s1ty and synthcs1s1ng the Delphi technique future lustones/scenanos value sl11ft assessment future history analysis and review and cross 1mp'lctlcross purpose matnx techniques (4) The Manuke Approach synthes1s1ng trend extrapolation techniques the futures wheel technique panel consensus techniques 1.nd Dialcl1c forecasting techniques developed by Moreland (5) The Anasynthes1s approach de\ eloped by S1lvern

Reference books Henclcy S P .i.nd Yates J R eds I'utunsm tn education methodologies (McCutchan 1974) Hill J E How schools can apply S)Slems anal)Sts (Phi Delta Kappa 1972) Hostrop R W Managzng education for results 2nd ed (ETC Pub 1975)

938

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Jantsch E Technological forecasting in perspective (OECD 1967) Wills G Wilson R Manning N and Hildebrandt R Technological forecasting the art and its managenal unplzcatwns (Penguin l 972)

53681 THE ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESS

Units 4V2 Ms D K Bnggs

Level Graduate Duration First half year Class Contact l two hour se1n1nar weekly Pre requ1s1tes 53652 Patterns of Organ1zat1on and Organtzauonal Change Assessment By wntten assignments

This topic wdl pursue hnes of investigation already begun 1n the first year of the programme 1n 53652 Patterns of Organ1zat1on and Organ1zauonal Change Whereas that topic dealt mainly \V1th vanous types of organ1zat1onal structure and structural change this one will deal with the organ1zat1on at work and the pohcy process In this 1t wtll also butld on the 1nvesugat1ons concerned with dec1s1on making which the students have already made It 1s hoped that students will thus become familiar with research on the maJor organ1zat1onal problems encountered by the adm1n1strator and on strategies fordeahng with them Specific topics to be studied wtll 1nclude the follow1ng (a) Organtzauonal effecuveness and internal organ1zat1onal control (b) Intervention (c) Protest and its absorption (d) Collaboration and conflict

Reference books Argyns G Interpersonal competence and organiz.atwnal effectiveness (Tavistock 1962) Argyns G Integrating tlu indtvulual and the organn.ation (Wiley 1964) Etz1on1 A A sociological reader on complex organizations 2nd ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston l 969)

53682 CURRENT ISSUES AND PROBLEMS IN EDUCATION (Educational Admimstratlon)

Units 4Y2 Level Graduate Durauon F1rst half year

Dr B K Hyams

Class Contact 1 two hour seminar weekly Pre requ1s1te Dip Ld Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n stand1ng Assessment Wraten assignments

The aim of this topic 1s to allow students an opportunity to study 1n depth a small number of current problems which raise important issues for educational adm1n1strators Examples of possible subjects for exam1nat1on include the notion of accountab1hty of teachers and/or schools to society the question of compensatory education for the disadvantaged chtld the problem of inner city schools the relat1onsh1p of changing social values and the schools and the role of m1nonty groups 1n education The topics wdl be chosen 1n consultalton with the lecturer The topics wdl be examined 1n terms of their causes - societal economic poht1cal etc as well as adm1n1strat1ve - and possible adm11ustrat1ve strategies for dealing with the problems will be investigated The results of other fonns of action e g poht1cal legal will be examined 1n terms of their adm1n1strat1ve consequences Texts for reference wdl be specified 1n accordance with the issues selected for study

Recommended reading Ehlers H ed Crucial issues in education 5th ed (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1973) Hipple T W ed Crucial issues in contemporary educalwn (Goodyear Pub Co 1973) Westby Gibson D ed Education in a dynamic soctety a contemporary sourcebook (Addison Wesley 1972)

939

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

53683 ALTERNATIVE EDUCATIONAL STRATEGIES Ms DK Bnggs

Units 4\4 Level Graduate Duration Second half year Class Contact I two hour seminar weekly Pre requ1s1te Dip [d Adm1n /M Ed Adm1n standing Assessment Written ass1gn1nents

The aim oftlus topic 1s to allow students to 111vesugate the feas1b1hty merits hm1tat1onsn 1mphcat1ons etc of alternatives to the type of educational syste1n presently established in Australia future educauonal needs of the 1n<l1v1dual and of Australian society will be extrapolated from current trends and from alternative social futures scenarios and areas of potential difficulty 1denufied 'l.nd investigated Alternative educauonal futures will be exa1n1ned 1n terms of I) altc.rnat1ve uses of presently available resources for education and 2) alternatives to the p1esent formal syi.tems of schooling

Reference books Centre for Lducauonal Rei.carch and Innovation Alteniative educationalfutures in lhe Untied States and in Europe methods issues and policy relevance (Q[CD I 972) Emery F and others Futures we re 111 (ANU Centre for Cont1nu1ng Education I 974) Fenley W J ed Education in the 1970 sand 1980 s continuity and change tn Australian education (Hicks Smith 1970) Marien M and Ziegler \\7 L eds The potential of educational futures 0 ones 1972) Norman M H ed D1menswns of the future alternatives for tomorrow (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1974) Organ1sauon for economic Co operation and Development Long range policy planning in educatwn (OI:CD 1973) Pulha1n J and Bow1nan J R Educational futurism tn pursuance of survival (Okl'lhoma Univ Pr 1974) Toffler A ed Lean11ngfor tomorrow the role of the future in education (Vintage 1974)

53684 SPECIAL INTEREST TOPIC (Educational Admlmstrat1on)

Dr P W OBnen Units 4Y2 Level Graduate Duration first half year or second half year Cla.ss Contact lnd1v1dual consultation and v1sns to appropriate 1nstttut1ons as requtred by the Su pcrv1sor Pre requ1snes Dip Ed Adm1n /M Ed Admtn standing Assessment Written assignments

Students taking this topic wdl select an 1nd1v1dual area of interest 1n consultauon with their superv1so1 The selecuon will depend on the availab1hty of spec1ahst advisers and may be frotn such areas as the foliow1ng

Adm1111strat1on of Aboriginal Education Adm1n1strauon of Higher Educ'l.uon Prov1s1on of Education for Migrants Adult Educauon The Educauonal Environment and Fac1ht1es Demographic Influence on Education

Study of these areas will compnse a survey of the relevant literature and research and where relevant an attachment to an appropriate 1nst1tuuon for practical experience The emphasis of this topic will be on the adm1n1strat1ve 1mphcat1ons of the issues tnvcsugated and candidates wdl be expected to develop a rationale for positive ad1n1111strat1ve strategies 1n their chosen area

940

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Units 18

53685 RESEARCH PROJECT (Educational Admimstrat1on)

Dr P W OBnen & 1Ws D K Briggs

Level Gradu'tte (M Ed Adm1n) Dur.1.t1on One year Class Contact To be arranged Pre requ1s1tes 36 units of the M Fd Adm1n programme including 53656 Research Methods for the Adm1n1strator

This project wdl afford students the opportunity of .1.pply1ng the research techniques relating to a parucular d1sc1phne 1n the pursuit of an 1nd1v1dual topic It is hoped that students will thus obtain practical experience of one of the kinds of research wluch they may be called upon to carry out as pract1s1ng .1.dm1111strators and that they will also use the project to examine 111 detail an aspect of adn11n1str'lt1on which interests them

The Master of Education Progrunme Co ordinator Professor J Anderson

Part I of the degree shall comprise four topics taken f1 om the following hst of which two topics \\di no1 mally be t"lken from Group A and the rcmanungtwo from either Group A or Group B Topic numbers 53550 and 53555 53530 and 53535 are mutually exclusive

Group A 53510 Educational Psychology 53520 Philosophy of Lducat1on 53530 Sociology of Educ"lt1on 53550 History of Western Education 53560 Stat1sucs and Research Methods 53501 Comp'lrat1ve Educ"ltlon 53555 Schooling Systen1s 53535 fducauon 'tnd Socl"ll Theory

Group B 53540 The Handicapped Child 53570 Science Educauon 53590 Lducauonal Ev"lluatton Issues Models and Techniques 53620 Physical Education Current Develop1nents dnd Resedrch in Theory and Practice 53565 Tertiary Education and 53502/53503 Directed Study Part II of the degree will comprise advanced course '\01 k and 53610 Thesis Course work wluch 1s prehm1nary to the Thesis will involve 1ntens1ve sup1..rv1sed reading 1n "'in are1. of parucular interest On the basts of tlus 1 ead1ng the student will be required to submit a paper 1n which he delineates and JUSt1fies 1n det"ltl a thesis propos,li This paper lHll be presented to a school lubhcr degree committee for exam1nauon Acceptance of the paper will allow the student to proceed to the 1 bests

Units 9

53510 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY Dr M J Lawson

Level Gradudtt. (M Ed P.trt I) Duration Full year Class Contact I tno hour seminar weekly P1 e requ1s1te None Assessment Topic tests scm1na1 reports one 1naJOI p.tper

This topic involves a sur\ey of current theory "'ind research 1n 1naJOI areas of psychology relevant to education \V1tl11n this wider framework students will examine 1n a 1naJOr paper theory "'ind research tn one "lrea of educ1.t1onal psychology The broad frunewot k of the topic will be covered 10 lectures in the follow1ng areas

I Learning and memory 2 Development"ll psychology 1ntellectual and 11101"11 deleloptnent development of

self concept 3 Fxtnnstc and 1ntnns1c n1ot1vat1on acl11eve111ent motivation group processes 4 Ind1v1dual differences 1ntelhgcnce and ab1ht1es cogn1t1ve style 5 Social learning theory and behaviour mod1ficat1on class1 00111 111anage1nent 6 lnstruct1onal psychology and evaluation

941

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Text book Hunt D E and Sullivan E V Between pS)chology and education (Dryden 1974) Reference books Elhs H C Fundamentals of human learning and cognition (Brown 1972) Hernot P Attnbutes to memory (Methuen 1974) Schmidt W H 0 Child development (Harper & Row 1973) Russell I Motivation (Brown 1971) Tyler L Individual differences (Appleton Century Crofts l 974) Bandura A Social leanung tluory (General Learning Press 1971) Block J Schools society and mastery learning (Holt Rinehart & Winston 1974)

53520 PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCATION

Units 9 Dr N A Nilsson and Mr K Simpson

Level Graduate (M Ed Part I)

Duration Full year Class Contact 1 two hour seminar weekly Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment Essays and exam1nat1ons

The topic comprises an 1ntroductton to philosophical issues and techniques relevant to educational theory The central areas here are theory of knowledge ethics and social philosophy In add1t1on however special interests (especially tn curncular areas - for example philosophy of science philosophy of history aesth~4cs) wtll be catered for All students should possess a copy of the text book B Ed Honours students taking this topic will be especially provided for 1n the hght of their overall programme of studies and a separate seminar might have to be provided for this purpose Assessment w11l 1nclude a final exam1nat1on

Text books Gorovitz S and Wdhams R G Plulosophtcal analysis an introduction to its language techniques 2nd ed (Random House 1969)* Hartnett A and Naish M Theory and the practice of education two vols (Heinemann 1976)

Preliminary reading Scnven M Primary philosophy (McGraw Htll 1966) Gnbble J Introduction to pht!osophy of education (Allyn & Bacon 1969)*

Reference books Dearden R F The philosophy of fmmary education an introduction (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1968)* Hirst P H and Peters R S The logic of education (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1970)* Peters R S Ethics and education (Allen & Unw1n 1966)* Scheffler I Conditions of knowledge (Scott Foresman 1965)* Snook I A ed Concepts of indoctnnation (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972)* Snook I A Indoctnnatwn and education (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1972)*

Unus 9

53530 SOCIOLOGY OF EDUCATION Dr J Maddock

Level Graduate (M Ed Part I) Duration Full yedr Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Assessment Essays

The topic will attempt a cnt1cal apprec1at1on of soc1ology theory and 1nethod as apphed to the study of education Seminar d1scuss1ons follow first hand contact with wnungs 1n the held Areas include culture and society role and status strauficat1on social mob1hty types of society soc1ahzat1on social change

942

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Topic requirements are as follows presentation of se1n1nar papers p1 eparallon of a bibliography part1c1pat1on 1n a research exercise

Preluntnary reading Berger P L Jnvitallon to sociology (Penguin 1966)* Cos1n B R ed School and .society (Routledge & Kegan Paul 1971)* Mills C W The sociological imagination (Penguin 1972)* Thompson K and Tunstall J eds Sociological penpectives (Penguin 1971)* Ttus topic will not be offered 1n 1978

53550 HISTORY OF WESTERN EDUCATION SOCIAL CLASS AND THE EDUCATION SYSTEM

Units 9 Level Graduate (M Ed Part I) Duration Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre requ1s1tes None

Oh;ectives f

Dr B K Hyam.s

(1) To enable students to treat select topits 1n education at considerable depth whtle becoming familiar with some of the unportant techniques employed by the h1stonan (2) To provide an opportunity to engage 111 h1stoncal research

Course (a) Seminars Students are requ1red to wnte two se1n1nar papers (of about 2 000 words) The worJ... will focus on the question of social class 111 educauon 1n the nineteenth and tw<.nlleth <.en tunes Details oftoptc and reading hsts are available f1om the school office (b) Research E.ssay Students will undc1 take a piece of ongtnal research prefe1ably on a topic dealing wuh South Australia and possibly relating to their own parucular field of interest Tlus wdl constitute an essay of at least 5 000 words wluch 1s to be undertaken with 1nd1v1dual superv1s1on by the lecturer 1n charge The essay (wluch IS to be retained by the school of education must be presented 1n a hard cover with double spaced typing on A4 sized pages and adequately footnoted Subm1ss1on date 1s 20th No' ember

AMessment fhere will be no exam1nauons Students arc a.!>sessed for their sc1n1n1r papers on their ab1hty to handle a parucular argument based on the evidence available Assessment for the 1 esearch essay rests on progress made under 1nd1v1dual supe1 v1s1on 111 techniques of research and presentation

53560 STATISTICS AND RESEARCH METHODS IN EDUCATION Professor J Ander.son and Mr D Hogben

Units 9 Level Graduate (M Ed Part I) Duration full year Class Contact 1 two hour sem1nar/pracucal ~er week Pre requ1s1tes 53225 Research Methods 111 Lducat1on or its equivalent Students w1sh1ng to enrol for the course but who have not completed Toptc 53225/53725 &hould consult with the lecturers concerned regarding the adequacy of the1r background knowledge 1n the area Assessment By assignments 1.nd exam1natton Tlus topic will not be offered in 1978

53501 COMPARATIVE EDUCATION

Units 9 Level Graduate (M Ed P1rt I) Duration I ull year Class Contact 2 hours per week

943

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Pre n,qutsttes None Assessment By essays and/or exam1nat1on This topic will not be offered 10 1978

Units 9

53570 SCIENCE EDUCATION Dr A J\1 Lucas

Level Gradu'lte (M [d Part I) Duration Full year Class Contact I two hour lecture/seminar per week Pre requisites None Assessment By essays This topic 1s offered 10 alternate years It will be offered 1n 1978

The content of the topic will depend upon the interests of the students but 1n Term I the following areas will be introduced (a) Curriculu1n dev<.lopments 10 primary and secondary science (b) ClJssroo1n 1esearch on science teaching (c) Scientific attitudes as an aim of science te1ch1ng (d) Environ1nental education as a focus of science education In Terms 2 and 3 each student will choose an aspect of science educauon to exa1n1ne 1n depth prepare a m~or paper based on an extensive research review and Jedd d1scuss1on of the topic during sc1n1nars

Reference books (a) Hui d P De l-1 Newcumculum perspectivesfor1unwrhighsclwolscience (\Vadsworth 1970)* Lee Dow K C Teaclnng sne11ce ni Australian schools (i\.1elbourne Univ Pr 1971)* Lucas A M and Ch1s1nan D G A review of British science curriculum projects implications

for curriculum developers (Centre for Science Jnd Mathe1nat1cs lducat1on Oluo State Univ 1973)* (b) Co1nber L C and Keeve J P Science education ni nineteen rountnes (Almquist and W1kscll 1973)* Keeves J P Cducatwna.l eriv1ronmentantlstudent acl1tevement (Almquist and \V1ksell 1972) Rosier M J Science achievement tn Atislralian secondary schools (A C E R I 973) (c) and (d) Journal papers hsts to be supplied by lecturer

Reference jounials Science educ'lt1on Journal of research 1n sCience teaching School sCience review Australian science teachers JOU! nal Studies 1n science education Research 1n science educauon

Units 9

53640 THE HANDICAPPED CHILD Mr G M CoojJeT & Dr G R Teasdale

Level Graduate (!\.-I I:d Part I) Dur ll1on Full year Class Contact 2 hours per week Pre 1 cqu1s1tes None As!iessment Ass1gn1nent and/or exa1n1nat1on Tlus topic 1s offered 1n altern'ltc years It will not be offered 1n I 978

944

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

53590 EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION ISSUES, MODELS AND TECHNIQUES

Unus 9 Level Gradualc (M Ed Part I) Duration Full year

Mr D Hogben

Cl'lss Contact I two hour sem1nar/d1scuss1on session per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment Practical project~ reports and seminar papers Tlus topic will noL be offered 111 l 978

53620 PHYSICAL EDUCATION CURRENT DEVELOPMENTS AND RESEARCH IN THEORY AND PRACTICE

Dr R T Withers Dr D R Douglas Units 9 Level Graduate (lvl Ed Part I) Durauon Full year Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes Students must have either an undergraduate quahfic.illon 1n physical e<lucauon or a ma1or study 111 one of the d1sc1phnes contnbut1ng to our understanding of physical acuvuy Assessment By ass1gnn1ent

This topic is intended pnm'lnly for practising physical educators although other interested people may apply It has two objecuves (a) To acquaint students with the most recent literature 1elev1nt to the practice of physical education and to examine that literature cnt1cally and (b) To develop the students understanding of selected areas from the study of physical act1v1ty by ex.inun1ng the current research 111 those areas These areas will be negotiated at the beg1nn1ng of the topic

Unus 9

53535 EDUCATION AND SOCIAL THEORY Ms J Kapferer

Level Graduate (M Ed Part I) Duration Full year Class Contact l two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment 3 seminar papers 2 essays

This topic compnses an 1ntroduct1on to the work of some of the major social theorists and an attempt to 'lpply their work to the study of education Since many of these dtd not address themselves to the problems of education per se the course 1s concerned to analyse some of these probletns 111 tenns of the tl11nk1ng of such writers as \Veber Durkheim Parsons Marx Mao and others There will be nine set topics and one elective topic thus

Terms I & II I Conflict and consensus 2 Lquahty and eht1sm 3 Educ1.t1on and pohttcs 4 I:ducat1on and the economy 5 Education and social change 6 Mentocracy technocracy and bureaucracy 7 The pos1t1on of the radical nght 8 The pos1t1on of the romantics 9 The pos1t1on of the radical left

945

SYLLABUSES-EDUCATION

Preliminary reading Cohen P Modern socwl theory (Heinemann 1968) Mills C W The sociological imagination (0 U P 1959) Berger P Invitation to sociology (Penguin 1975)

Units 9 Level Graduate Duration full year

53555 SCHOOLING SYSTEMS Dr D Grundy

Class Contact 2 hour seminar per week Pre rcqu1s1tes None Assessment Up to three 5 000 word essays and seminar papers This topic wdl not be offered 111 1978

53565 TERTIARY EDUCATION Mr P Sheldrake and Dr R Linke

Units 9 Level Graduate (M Ed Part I) Duration full year Class Contact 1 two hour seminar per week Pre requ1s1tes None Assessment By a major assignment and on material presented at seminars This topic will not be offered tn 1978

53502/53503 DIRECTED STUDY

Umts 53502 4'1 53503 9 Level Graduate (M Ed Part I) Duration 53502 one half year 53503 whole year Class Contact By arrangc1nent

This toptc allows students 111 exceptional cases to pursue a chosen program1ne of study under the dtrecuon of a 1nember of staff 1n an area not covered by topics already avatlable Students w1sh1ng to take this topic arc responsible for securing the agreement of a 1nember of staff to supervise and should for tlus purpose present as 1nformat1ve an account as possible of the proposed programme and show evidence of developed interest of an approprnte kind Normally the topic will be ava1hble to part time students only after they have commenced the Masters programn1e A description of the proposed program1ne and assessment together with the reco1nmendat1on of the staff member conce1 ned should be submitted for app1 oval to the St.ind1ng Commiuee of the School through the Higher Degrees Committee before the start of the half year 1n which the topK 1s offered

53610 THESIS Co ordinator Professor J Anderson

Level Postgraduate (M Ed Part II) Durauon One year full time Class Contact Personal direcuon Pre requ1s1tes ?vi Ed Part I

The M Ed Part I I consists of advanced course work leading to a thesis The course work which 1s prchnunary to the thesis will involve 1ntensl\ e supervised reading 1n an area of particular interest On the baMs of tlus rending the student will be required to subnut a thesis proposal and 1f tlus 1s accepted proceed to the thesis

946

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Numb£r Title Units Page

10110 English I 12 103 !0210 English II 12 104 !0221 Second Year f-lalf Cobnate 1n English A 6 149 !0222 Second Year Half Cognate 111 English B 6 149 !0310 English III 12 !04 !0320 Third Year Cognate 1n Enghsh 12 149 10321 Third Year Half Cognate 1n I.nghsh A 6 149 10322 Thtrd Year Half Cognate 1n I:nghsh B 6 149 10401 Old [nghsh A 9 170 !0402 Old Cnghsh B 9 170 10403 Middle English A 9 170 10404 Middle Enghsh B 9 170 10405 Old lceland1c 9 170 10406 Medieval Literature 9 170 10407 Shakespeare Studies 9 170 10408 English Ltter1ture of 17 and 18 Centuries 9 170 !0409 English Lner:llure of 16 and 17 Centu11es 9 170 !0411 English L1ter-uure of the Vtctonan Pcnod 9 170 !0412 Enghsh L1ter1ture of the Ron1ant1c Pet 1od 9 170 10413 English Literature of the 18th Century 9 170 !0114 Special Author 10 Enghsh (l) 9 170 !0415 Special Author 10 English (2) 9 170 10416 Spec1ctl Author in English (3) 9 170 !0417 Special Author in Enghsh (4) 9 171 !0418 Selected iv!odern Authors (1) 9 171 10419 Selected Modern Authors (2) 9 171 !0421 Selected Modern Authors (3) 9 171 !0422 Selected 1\-lodern Authors (4) 9 171 !0423 Special Genre 1n English (I) 9 171 !0424 Spcc1.i.l Genre In I:.ngh<;h (2) 9 171 !0425 Special Genre 1n Enghsh (3) 9 171 10126 Special Genre 1n Enbhsh (4) 9 171 !0427 American Literature (l) 9 171 !0428 American Literature (2) 9 171 !0429 American Literature (3) 9 171 10431 American Literature (4) 9 171 10432 Commonwe'llth L1teratu1 e (I) 9 171 !0433 Commonwe'llth Literature (2) 9 171 10434 Commonwealth Literature (3) 9 171 !0435 Con1n1onwe'llth Literature (4) 9 171 10436 Varieties of I:.nghsh (1) 9 171 !0437 Varieties of fnghsh (2) 9 171 10438 Australian Literature ( l) 9 171 !0439 Au!>tr'lhan Literature (2) 9 171 10441 Aust1ahan Lneraturc (3) 9 171 10442 Australian Literature (4) 9 171 104 l3 9 Spec1.i.l Topic 111 I:.nglish by Thesis (I) (7) ea 9 171 10451 9 Selected Studies 1n English (l) (9) ea 9 171 !0461 Selected Studies 111 I:.nghsh (I 0) 9 171 10991 9 Spcc1'll Half Topic 111 English (l) (9) 4Y2 171 11110 French I 12 !06 11113 Introductory French A 6 107 150

1001

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic f\lumber Tiile Units I agl

11114 hll1 oducto1 y frend1 B 6 108 150 11201 Contcmpor&ry french 1he1t1e 6 150 l 1202 Se\ c1ueen Centtlr) I r,nce G 151 11203 Cl 1ss1cal I rench L1Lc1 J.ture 6 bl 11204 French C1nc1na I 6 151 11205 l'rcnc..h C11u.1na II 6 152 11206 French Poetry b 152 11207 II1~to11cal I 1ench L1ngu1st1cs 6 152 11208 Lex1cology 6 152 11209 Special Topic 1n French I 6 lo2 11210 french II 12 108 11214 l rench L1tc1 &Lure 1820 1860 b 153 1121q Spcc1 tl Topic rn I rench II 6 153 11220 F1ench IIA 12 110 11310 fn.nch III 12 111 11311 l'rcnch Lanbuuge Ill b 11320 1 hnd Year Cognate 1n Frenc..h 12 153 11330 french IIIA 12 112 11401 I 1 cnc..h L.inguagc \V11Lte11 ind Spoken 9 171 11402 Es~ay 111 frcnch 9 171 11 !03 F1 cnch Literature Before I JOO 9 171 11104 frcnch L1te1 1ture 111 14 ancl 15 Ccntu11es q 171 11105 It c..nch L1te1 ·uure 1n 16 Century 9 171 11406 I rcnch Literature 111 17 (,cntury 9 171 11 107 l 1 ench L1ter,ture 111 18 Century 9 171 11408 ft cnch L1tcr,ture 111 19 Centu1 y 9 171 11109 French L1te1 1ture in 20 Century 9 171 l l ll I H1stoncal I rench L1ngu1st1c~ 9 171 11412 Speu.il Topic in I rench 9 171 11413 rviont ugne 'Ind Pasc..&l 9 171 11411 l t cnch C111c1na 9 11415 Run1an1an L 1ngu'lgc and l 1teratut e 9 171 ! I I lb Special Topic.. 111 L1ngu1st1c..s 9 171 11117 Rotnance I 1ngu1sucs q 171 11118 General L1ngu1st1t.s 9 171 11419 L,tv1an lnt10 L1ngu1st1c Rc~t. 1n.h Method 9 171 11121 Provencal Lnerature 111 Middle Ag<..s 9 171 11422 l\leche\a) L.i.tin L1ter,1urc 9 1 71 11123 Spcual Topic in Ru1nan1an 9 171 11908 I r<..nch L1rer'lture 111 19 Centu1y 4Yi 171 11 '112 Spcc1.d H,Jr Topic 111 frenc..h 4\> 171 l Jql I I rcnch C1nc1na 4Vi 171 11916 Speu li l l ti! Topic 111 L1nbu1~11cs 4Y.! 171 11g13 Gene1 'll L1nb1usuc3 4!/z 171 12110 Sp'!n1sh l 12 l !J 12120 Sp unsh IA 12 111 r21gq Spuush IB(9) 9 114 12210 Sp&tush II 12 115 12310 Spanish I I I 12 116 12320 fhud Ye'l.1 Cognate 111 Sp uu~h 01 Pot tugue~<.. 12 103 12401 Spanish L'lnguag(. 9 171 12102 E.ssay 111 Sp uu~h 9 171 12103 l hstory of Spanish L'lngu,ge 9 171 1240 l Spdn1sh Literature &nd Dr una 1192 1700 9 171 12 lOo Sp'l111sh l11story and C1v1hsat1on 1492 1700 9 171 12406 L 1 Ccles11111 '1.nd lnutatlons Golden Age Ltteraturc 9 171 12107 Ro1n1ncero a11d flft.cts on C..olde11 Age L1t(.rltLne 9 171 12108 Rchb1ou~ L1tcratu1 c and Dr 1111'! Golden Agc.. 9 l 71

1002

INDEX TO TOPICS

7 ojnc Number T1tU Untb Page

12409 Sp1.rush Dr1.n1a befo1e Lope De Vega 9 171 12111 Medieval Sp u11sh Llt(.rature 1.ncl H1<;to1 y 9 172 12412 Sp 1n1::.h Liter llure 1.nd History 111 I 9 Century 9 172 12413 L ·ll1n A1ne11c 111 Literature and H1sto1} 111

19 1.nd 20 Century 9 172 12414 Sp<.u 11 Topic 111 Spanish 9 172 12115 Spani .. h Philology and f\1ed1eval Stud1e::. 9 172 12416 Portuguese 1.lld Bra11h1.n Studies I 9 172 12417 Portugue::.c 1.nd Br1.71han Studies II 9 172 12418 I 9th Century Spanish No\el 9 172 12419 Mexico under Cardenas I 934 1940 9 172 12420 Ard11tectu1 (. of Latin A1nenc t "l.nd Pluhpp1nc::. 9 172 13110 D1 una I 12 119 13130 Int1oduct1on lo Production and I erfo11nancc

1 Lchn1qucs 12 154 13210 Dr una II Modern D11.ma Concepts and Pr 1ct1ccs 12 119 13211 Special Half rop1c Ill D1a1n I (1) 6 119 13212 Spcual Half Topic tn Dra1na (2) 6 119 I ~213 Spcc1 ti Hall fop1c 111 Drarna (3) 6 119 13220 Dr.11111. IIA Cinema Studies I 12 120 13230 Dr1.1n1. IIB Australnn The 1t1c and C1ne1n1 12 120 13250 Drun'l IID Plays 'lnd I 1hns u1 their Lontexts ll

- R1tu..i.ls 12 121 13260 l'roduct1on 'lnd Perfonnan<.c Techniques I 12 155 13270 Dr·una IIE fhcatre StudK::. 12 121 13300 D1 un.i 1110 Pr.i.cucc tnd P11nc1ple::. of C'nt1c1sm 12 122 13310 Dr"l.1n t III C..1nema Studies 11 12 122 1~320 D1arn1 I llA Au<ill 'lilan Thc111 c and C1nen11 12 122 13310 D1 un1. IIIB Ritual<; 12 122 13340 P1oduct1011 ind Per{o1111ancc rechn1qucs II 12 155 1J350 Theatre Dtrecuon 12 155 13360 Stag(. 1.nd Pr oduct1on rvl.inagcrnent 12 156 13370 I echn1que<; ol f1hn 'lnd Tclcv1s1on 12 156 13380 lvlo\e1ncnt \\Ith ivl1n1t.. 01 Mode1n D1net... 12 156 13390 Dr-in11. IIIC.. Bertolt Brecht 12 123 11401 ConH .. d) 9 172 1J406 T1 igcdy 9 172 134" 01 in1 l 111 Lduc1t1on 9 123 11422 rv1oven1cnt ctnd !vlunc A 9 172 13426 Au .. 111h..i.n rhea.trc and C1uen1a 9 13127 l\Iodcrn The1trc 9 172 13429 D1 .-tn1 1 and Soc1ecy 9 134l2 Sh 1k(.'>pe1re 9 13431 P10JCCL D1 una 1n Fducauon 9 13434 Spcu li TopK 111 Dr una 9 172 13111) Pei fot rnancc A (3rd year) q 172 13136 Per{o11nancc B (3rd year) 9 172 134l7 Pei fo1 mancc C (4th } t..ctr) 9 172 1~438 Pcr(onnanct.. D (4th year) 9 172 134 Jt) 1 h(. lll c Du t..ct1on (31 d ye..i.1) 9 134 II St1g(. 1nd Producuon i\1an.ige1nent A (31 d ye u) q 172 13412 St1gt.. and Producuon fv[anag(.111cnt B (J1 d }Cu) 9 172 134 IJ St lbC and P1oduct1on !vlctn-igc1nent C (1th )Ctr) q 172 13114 St lb(. 1.nd P1 oduct1on !\fanagc1nent D (4th ye1r) q 172 13440 P1 Oj(.Ct 111 fhcatre Dtrecuon 9 13416 Proicct 111 Stage and Production i\-f·u11bcn1ent 9 13447 Proj<.Ct 111 f1hn Proc\u(.tlon 9 13448 Proiect 111 Tckv1s1on P1oduu1011 9

1003

INDEX TO TOPICS

1opzc Number Title Units Page

13419 Project 1n Radio Production 9 13450 Project in Radio Production (4th year) 9 172 13451 Pro1cct 1n Tclev1s1on P1oduct1on (4th year) 9 172 13452 Movement and Vfnne B or tvfovement and i\.fodern

Dance B 9 172 13453 tvlovcment and Mnne C or Movement and tvfodern

Dance C 9 172 13404 Moveinent and M1n1c D or Movement and Modern

Dance D 9 172 13455 History of Cinema 9 13456 Bertolt Brecht 9 172 13457 Wnt1ng for I 1lm and Telev1s1on (3rd year) 9 172 13458 Directing for Film and Telev1s1on (3rd year) 9 172 13459 Practice of R'1d10 (3rd year) 9 172 13460 Wnt1ng for Theatre 9 172 13461 Project tn Theatre Dlfectton (4th year) 9 172 13462 PrOJ~Ct Ill Stage and Production rv1anage1nent 9 172 13463 Proiect Documenta1y Film P1oduct1011 (4th ye'lr) 9 172 13464 Project F1ct1on Film Production (4th year) 9 172 13465 Special Genre 1n Fdm 9 172 13466 Nineteenth Century Drama 9 172 13467 Tw(.nt1eth Century Drama 9 172 13901 Dra1na and Sexuahty 4Yi 13902 Austrahan Theatre 4V2 13903 National Cinema Studies 4Y2 172 13934 Special Half Topic in Drama 4Yi 172 14110 Plulosophy l 12 124 14111 Special Introductory Topic 111 Plulosophy A 6 157 14112 Special Introductory Topic 1n Philosophy B 6 157 14113 Special Introductory Topic 111 Philosophy C 6 157 14201 Ep1ste1nology and Metaphysics I 6 126 14202 :Cp1stemology and Mt.taphys1cs II 6 126 14203 Moral Phtlosophy 6 126 14204 Logic II 6 126 14205 Logic III 6 126 14207 Social Plnlosophy 6 126 14208 Philosophy of History and Social Science 6 127 14209 Marxism Len1111s1n I 6 127 14210 Philosophy II 14211 Mai x1sm Len11usn1 II 6 128 14214 Special Studies 111 Poht1cal Plulosophy I 6 128 14215 Special Studies in Pohucal Philosophy 11 6 128 1421b Ancient and l\fed1eval Phdo~ophy 6 128 14217 Mode1 n Philosophy 6 128 14218 Ph1lo~ophy of Mathc1n'1t1cs 6 129 14219 Spcual Topic 111 Philosophy 6 129 14221 Onenral Plulosophy 6 129 14222 Plulosophtcal Proble1ns of Econon11c Theo1 y 6 129 14223 Wo1nen s Stud1es 6 130 14224 Fem1n1n1sm 6 130 14225 Poht1cs and Art 6 130 14226 History and Philosophy of Science 6 14227 Soc1'1l aestheucs 6 131 14228 Impe1nhs1n 6 132 14310 Philosophy III 14401 Ep1st(.1nology 9 173 14402 Philosophy of Langu'lge 9 173 1440 ! Adv'lnced Logic 9 173

1004

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title U111f.s Page

14405 Formal Sc1nanttcs and Tt uth I hcory 9 173 14406 Th<.ory of Con1putdb1hty 1.nd Recursive functions 9 173 14407 Non Slandard Logics I 9 173 14408 ivlctaphy~1cs 9 173 14409 Philosophy of Mn1<l 9 173 14411 Mor.ii Philosophy 9 173 14413 Acsthetu.s 9 173 14414 Special Topic 111 Philo:.ophy (I) 9 173 14115 ~farx1s1n Len1111:.n1 9 173 14416 Philosophy of H1slory 1.nd Soc11.I Sc1en(.e 9 173 14417 Non Stand.i.rd Logics II 9 173 14418 T} pe Theory and Ant1no1n1es 9 173 14424 History of Plulosophy 9 173 14125 Plulosophy of l'vlathen1aucs 9 173 14126 Soc11.I Plulosophy 9 173 14427 Oriental Philosophy q 173 14428 Philosophy of Science 9 173 14129 Poht1cs and Art 9 173 14131 \Vo1nen s Studies q 173 14432 Ph1losoph1cal Problems of [cono1n1c Theory 9 173 14133 Special Topic 111 Plulosoph} (2) 9 173 14434 Speual Topic 1n Ph1losophy (3) 9 173 14901 Special l-11.lf Topic 111 Plulosophy 4MI 173 15110 Italian I 12 131 15120 Italian IZ 12 136 15130 ItaliJ.n Ill 12 135 15210 lt1.han II 12 137 15211 Special Topic 111 Italian I (6) 6 158 115230 Italian Language (12) 12 lo9 15232 hah1.n Language (6) 6 159 15221 Second Y(.1.1 Half Cognate 1n It than 6 160 15298 lt1.'1an Language (9) 9 159 15299 SpLual Topic 111 Italian I (9) 9 158 15310 It1hanIJI 12 139 15320 Thn d Year Cogn1.tC 111 Itdhan 12 160 15321 Tlnrd Year Half Cognate 1n Italian 6 160 15401 Advanced ltahan Langu 1bc 9 171 15404 lLahan D11.lcctology 9 173 154lb Special Topic 1n It than 9 173 15117 Special Author 111 Italian 9 173 15420 lt1.han Plulology I 9 173 15421 Italian Plulology II 9 173 15422 It1.lian Plulology III 9 173 15123 Italian Lncr1.tu1 c I 9 173 15424 Italian Lucraturc II 9 173 15425 Italian L1tL1aturc III 9 173 15426 Italnn Lucrature IV 9 173 15427 Itah1.n Literature V 9 173 15428 D1ssertauon 1n I ta Inn L1tcratu1 e Plulology

Dialcctology or L 1.nguage 9 173 15901 Ad\1.nced Italian Langu1.ge 1MI 173 15904 It1.h tn Dnlcctology 4Vi 173 15916 Special Topic 111 It than ( !Yz) 4Y, 173 15917 Special Author 1n Italian 4Vi 173 15920 Italian Pl11lology I 4Yft 173 15921 Ilalian Ph1lology II 4Yz 173 15922 lt'lhan Plulology Ill 4M, 173 15923 Itah.in Literature I 4Yz 173

1005

INDEX TO TOPICS

rop1c Number Tith

l5q24 l5q25 15926 h927 l1q28

16110 lb201 lh202 16203 lb204 16205 16206 16207

16208 16211 16212 16213 lb214 lb2l5 lb299 16318 16398 153qg 16401 16402 16403 16!04 16405 16406 16!07 16408 16409 lb4l l 16412 16413 16414 171 l l 17112 17113 1721 l 17212

17310 17401 17402

17403

17404 17405 17406 17407 17408 17409 18201 18202

1006

It.than Literature II It-.han L1teratu1e III Italian L1terattnc IV It than Literature V Speual Half Topic by D1~sertat1on 111 Itaban Literature Ph1lology D1alectology of Language Visual Arts I ltahan Renaissance Art Ro1nantic1sm Fr1ncc Fngland 1730 1830 [urope'ln Art 1830 1914 Austrahan Pa1nt1ng T\\ent1cth Century Architecture Nineteenth Century Arch1tecuire 3 D1mens1onal 'lnd Process Arts of the l \\Cntleth Century 1 heory of Art "Ind Cnt1c1sm S1..cond or Th1rcl Year 1 lalf Cognate 111 Vtsu.i.l Arts Visual C'o1nmun1t.auons Poht1cs 'lnd Art 1 he I heory of P1ctorml Rcprc!ientat1on The Pr.i.ct1ce of P1ctonal Representation Special Topic 111 V1st1ctl Arts roundations of Amenc tn Ardutecture 1770 1880 Special Cognatt. 1n V1!iual Art!! SpeC1al Topic 111 Visual Arts J<uropc.u1 G1aph1c A1t Theatrt. Design l op1cs 1n A usu ahan Arch1te1..ture l 1te1 ature of the Fine Arts Special Topic 111 Visual Arts Special fop1c 111 Arclutecture Problerns of 16 Century Art Special Artist Specrtl Genre 111 V1su'll Arts Late rned1eval P'l1nt1ng 1n No1 thern [ urope Art Science TechnolObY Rel ll1onsh1p fheones of Twentieth Century Art Spec1'll Top11.. 111 Art History l-hsto1y of \\'cstern Music to 1800 The Foundatt(lll of Musical Notations History of \Vestern Music 1800 1950 fhe Foundations of ivlus1cal Analysts [Jcmentary T1..c.h111ques of Ivlusical C..01npos1uon 111 the Rena1SS'lnce and Baroque Advanct.d Cnt1cal Studies Music Ii Notu1ons Wtcd1cv1l Pla111s()ng for the Ro1nan Rite of the Church Congn.g.i.uon ii .i.nd Do1nest1c Rehg1ous Music tn the Refo11n'lt1011 fhe Art of tht. Conunuo Ph} er The Baroqut. Concerto The B1roquc C1ntalc1 Oratorios of B.i.ch and Handel I 'lrly L1ghteenth Century Keyboa1d tvlus1c Spec1'll Topic 111 tvlus1c Introduction to Children s L1teratu1e Nc1uve A1nenc,n The1nLs 'ln<l Style.,

Uuits Page

4!/.z 173 4Vi 173 4\4 173 411> 173

4Yi 173 12 141 6 6 142 6 142 6 6 142 b 143

6 143 6 144 6 6 144 146 160 6 144 6 144 6 145 6 145 6 146 161 6 147 161 6 145 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 9 173 6 162 6 162 6 162 6 163

6 163 12 148 9 174

9 174

9 174 9 174 9 174 9 174 9 174 9 174 9 174 6 164 6 165

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Tllle Unzts Page

18203 Half Cognate 1n Co1nmun1cat1on Studies I 6 165 18204 Half Cognate 1n Conunun1cat1on Studies II 6 166 18205 SLud1es 111 Cluld1 ens L1terJ.ture 6 166 182!0 American L1t<..rature 12 166 18220 Con11nu111cat1011 Studies 12 167 18240 A rt - Soc1ct y 12 167 18250 Prints 1.nd P11ntn11.kers 12 169 18401 Com1nun1cat1on Stucl1cs 9 174 18402 Special Topic 1n Co1nmun1cat1on Studies 9 174 18403 Cluldn .. n s L1tt.rature 9 174 18404 Att Museum Studies 9 174 18405 Saure 10 Art 9 174 18406 Special TopK A 111 l-hstonog1 aphy of A1 t 9 18407 Special Topic B 111 H1sto11ograph) of Art 9 18411 Art and Arclutectu1 c of Australn 9 18412 Aetiology of Art 9 30110 I:cono1n1cs I 12 202 30201 Mac1 oe{.ono1n1cs 6 201 30202 M1croeconon11cs 6 204 30203 E{.onon11c Stat1sucs A 6 205 30204 Econonuc StJt1st1cs B 6 205 30301 Internauonal Lconom1cs 6 205 30302 Economic Devclop1ncnt 6 206 30303 The J.<..conom1c-. of Labour 6 207 30304 Industrial Org.i.n1sauon 6 207 30305 Public f 111anct. 6 208 30307 ~1oney and f1nan<..e 6 208 30308 Co1np native Ccononuc Syste1ns 6 209 30309 Lcono1netn{.s 6 210 30311 ~fathen1atu.al Fcononucs 6 210 30312 Alte1 nJ.t1ve Appro1ches 111 Econo1n1cs Mar>..1s1n

Radical New Left and other 6 211 30401 Advanc<..d ~lac1 oecono1n1cs 4 202 30402 Advan{.ed M1c1oeconom1cs 4 202 30406 [cononucs Honou1 s Speual Topics 4 202 30409 Rcad1nb Sen11na1 4 202 30430 Econo1n1cs Honour& Thesis 14 202 31202 The Ongtns of Economic Dcvelop1nent

The British Case 6 213 31204 The De\elop1nent Enigma Japan and South

Arnenc'l 6 214 31301 Australian [conom1c De\tlop1nent 6 215 31302 Amenc,n l<..{.onom1c Development 6 215 31304 Coercive Labo1 Syste1ns 6 31401 Econon11c Growth 1n \Vestcrn I:urope 6 216 31402 ~l1crocconon11c History 6 216 31403 Econon1ctnc History 6 31404 Labour Theory and H1stor} 216 31430 [cono1n1c H1~to1 y Honours Th<..s1s 12 32110 Geograph} I 12 219 32202 1 he And Lands 6 220 32203 Develop1nent Geography 6 220 32204 Phys1c1l Geobr1.ph) Geo1norphology 6 220 32205 1 he GeogrJphy of Australia 6 220 32206 The Geography of B1ot1c Resources 6 221 32207 The Geography of Lcononnc A{.tlVll} 6 222 32208 rechn1que~ Ill Geog1 aphy 6 222 32209 Food and Ag11cultur'll Dc,elop1nent 6 223

1007

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title Unit.s Page

32211 Htstoncal Geography of the U S A 6 223 32212 South East Asia 6 224 32301 Hum.in Geography 6 32302 Urban Geography 6 224 32303 Envtronmental Percepuon and Behaviour 6 225 32304 Geography and Pubhc Pohcy 6 225 32401 Location Theory and Regional Econo1n1cs 6 218 32402 Environmental Perception 6 218 32403 Historical Geography 6 218 32405 Urban Social Geography 6 218 32406 Geomorphology 6 32407 Geography of Sods 6 32408 Rural Geography 6 32409 Special Topic 6 218 32411 Urban1sat1on and Development 1n S E Asia 6 218 289 32412 Welfare Geography 6 218 32413 Advanced Physical Geography 6 218 32422 Modern Geographical Thought 6 218 32440 Thesis and Literature Review 18 218 33120 History IB The roundauon of Austraha

and New Zealand 1770 1870 12 228 33130 History IC The Colonial Amencas 1492 1826 12 229 33140 History ID Cont1nu1ty and Change 1n

Pre Modern Asta 12 229 33150 History l[ Three [uropean Revolutions 12 230 33201 19 and 20 C Latin An1enca 6 231 33204 Consensus and D1v1s1on 1n 20 C Australia 6 231 33208 Nat1onahsm and Communahsm Sth Asia 1858 1971 6 232 33211 Waterloo to Luneburg Heath 6 232 33212 Scand1nav1a 6 232 33213 Emergence of Modern America 1880 Present 6 233 245 33217 Bnt1sh Industrial Revolution 6 233 33218 Bntatn and India 1757 1947 6 233 33219 History of Modern China 1840 1949 6 234 33221 The Rise and Fall of European Impenahsm 6 234 33222 Popular Protest and Bnt1sh Society 1780 1860 6 234 33223 Nazi Germany 6 235 33302 The Partition of India 1935 1947 6 235 33303 Metropolitan Colonial Relations 33304 Mexico under Cardenas 1934 1940 6 236 33306 European Poht1cal Thought Roussei.u to Lenin 6 236 33307 Ulster and Ireland 6 237 33308 European Pohucal Thought Plato Locke 6 33314 Mex1ci.n Independence 1763 1830 b 237 33315 Victorians 10 Southern Afnca 1833 1902 6 237 33316 Australian Expenence 1n Two World Wars 6 237 33317 Reformation State and Society 10 16 C England 6 237 33318 Transformation of Br1t1sh Pohucs 1910 1931 6 237 33319 Reg1onahsm In Amencan History 6 237 33402 Australian Experience tn Two World Wars

(Honours) 12 240 33407 .Curopean Poht1cal Thought Rousseau to Lenin 12 241 33408 MexKan Independence 1763 1830 (Honours) 12 33409 The Struggle for India 1917 1939 12 241 33411 Cathohc Social and Poht1cal Thought 1931 1968 12 33413 Progressive L1berahsm 10 NSW 1890 1900

(Honours) 12 33414 VJCtonans 10 Southern Afnca (Honours) 12

1008

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title Units Page

33415 Studies 1n American Social Cnt1c1sm 12 242 248 260 33416 Reformation State and Soc1eLy tn 16 C England

(Honours) 12 242 33417 Transformation of Brittsh Pohucs 1910 1931

(Honours) 12 242 33418 The Part1t1on of India 1935 1947 (Honours) 12 33419 Mexico under Cardenas 1934 1940 (Honours) 12 243 33421 Ulster and Ireland 12 243 33422 New Ways 1n Social History 12 243 33430 History Honours Thesis 12 239 34202 Approaches to the Study of American Poht1cs 6 246 253 34204 Emergence of Modern A1nenca 1880 Present 6 233 245 34240 A1nerican Studies Second Year Seminar 246 34301 Literature and Society 1n America 6 164 247 34302 Contemporary American Society 6 247 299 34303 Structure of American Society

Cont1nu1ty and Change 6 34304 Rcg1onahsm 1n American H 1story 6 34340 American Studies Th1rd Year Seminar 247 34401 Studies 1n American Social Cntic1sm 12 248 260 34402 Studies 1n American Social Crit1c1sm 6 34430 American Studies Honours Thesis 12 35110 Poht1cs I 12 250 35201 Party Party System and Society 1n Austraha 6 250 35203 Govt and Pol of Chinese Peoples Repubhc 6 251 35204 Internauonal Poht1cs - Peace and War 6 251 35205 Pol Theory Radical Poht1cal Thought 6 252 35206 Approaches to the Study of American Politics 6 245 253 35207 The Poht1cs of De,elop1ng Areas The African Case 6 253 35208 Pohttcal Theory Problems of Democratic Theory 6 253 35209 Power Poht1cs and Society 6 254 35301 Pohttcal Change 10 20 C Cluna 6 254 35302 Australian Pubhc Polley an<l Adm1nslr'ltion 6 255 35304 Internatl Pol Australian Foreign Pohcy 6 255 35306 Southeast Asian Poht1cal Development 6 256 35308 An Amencan Governing Class;; Studies 1n

the Htstoncal D1stnbuuon of Power 1n America 6 256 35309 Social Contract 256 35312 People and Politics a cross national study of

Australia USA and Canada 6 257 35313 Com parat1ve Strategies for Development 6 257 35314 Social Theory from Marx to Freud

from Poht1cs to Social Science 6 258 35315 The Pohucs of L1m1ted War 6 258 35316 Government and Pohttcs in Western European

Society 6 259 288 35403 The Clunese Cultural Revolution 6 259 289 35405 Intcrnat1onal Poht1cs The Cold War 6 259 35406 Comparative Federalism 6 35408 Studies 1n Amencan SoCJal Cnt1c1sm 6 248 260 35409 Poht1cal Plulosophy 6 260 35416 Ehtcs 1n South cast Asia 6 260 35418 The Soc1ahst Idea 6 260 35419 Adm1n1strauon and Development 6 35421 General Paper 'lnd Reading Course 6 261 35422 Pohttcs Honours Topic (Adelaide Un1vers1ty) 6 35423 International Poht1cs The Behavioural Approach 6 35424 Dependency and Development 6 261

1009

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number J 1tle Units Page

35425 B1bliog1•pl11c SludH..'\ tn Pohtlc3 12 261 35426 The \Vh11l.i1n Go\ern1nenls 6 261 3'1427 St'1.b1hty <1nd Ch'lngL 1n Conte1npor u y France 6 261 35428 The ivhddle E'lst Confi1cl 6 262 35430 Pohl1cs Honours Thesis 12 262 36110 Ps} chology I 12 2bo 36201 Stat13t1cal Methods 111 Psychology 266 36202 Attitude I heory and Attitude Change 4 266 36203 Pc1sonahty 4 26b 36204 Le.ii n1ng 1nd ~1ot1v.t.tJon 4 267 36205 Hu1n'1.n Ab1hues 4 267 %20b Phy'>1olog1<-al P3ycholo1:,y 4 268 36207 Per<.cpt1on '1.nd Infonnal1on Processing I 268 36208 Hu1n.tn Develop1nc11L I 268 16211 Le 11111ng '1.nd tvlot1V1.t1on (6) 6 36212 Social Intu action and the Self 4 2b9 16301 Research Methods b 269 36302 Org1nu 1uon'1.l Ps)chology I I 270 16303 Sou d l\lfo11v.i.uon 4 270 16304 Ps)chop ttholob') '1.lld Dev1'1.nt Bt.ha\ 1our 4 271 l630o Skill'> and Hu1n 111 Perfonnance 1 271 3630b Cog1ut1on 4 271 353og C'ollccll\C Beh 1v1our 1 272 36312 ~lodcls 111<l Theo11cs 1n Psychology (4) I 272 36311 Psychopl1ys1olog} of Stalt.3 of Aw 1rencss 4 272 36315 Fnv1ronn1t.nt'll Psyd1olog} 4 2n 16316 Le'l.1111ng tnd Condn1on1ng I 273 36317 Models '1.nd ThL011t.s 1n Psychology (6) 6 16318 Sp<.cnhsed L1tL1 .itu1 c Re' IC\\ and Rc3carch ProJCCt 4 36401 Conceptu'll Found'1.lt011S of PS)Lhology 6 274 36402 H u1nan I LJ.nung 4 274 3640n 01 g u11z'1.t10n'1l Psyd1ology II 4 275 36406 Pe1Lt..ptton and Skill 4 275 16407 Design '1.nd ~It. 1su1 cn1enl 6 275 36408 Conlcn1por.iry Issues 111 S<lc1.il Psychology G 27b 3640CJ Ps)cho Cclucauonal Assess111cnt 4 36411 l11uodu<.t1on lo Counsel11ng 4 276 16412 P1olcss1onal Onenl<1t1011 ( 1) 4 276 36413 Pr'l.c\lce in Ps)chologKal Asses31nent I 277 3b41 I Group C..ounsLlltng 4 277 3641'5 Super\ 1sed Research Project G 277 36416 Profess1on 1l Onentauon (6) b 36417 Ps}cho Lcluc tt1on•I a3sessmLnl (6) 6 278 16418 Int1oduct1on to Gounsclhng (6) 6 3b419 Psychob1olog} 4 278 36421 C10.'l.'I Cultur.il Psychology 4 278 36422 Inuoducuon to Beh•v1ou1 lvlod1ftcauon 4 278 1642 l Int1oduct1on to Con11nun1ty Psycholog} 4 279 36125 CI11ucal Child Ps}chology 4 36426 Cl1111c'1.I Apphc'1.Uons to Bcha\1our therapy 4 279 3b427 Contt.1npo1a1y IssuLs 111 Soc1.il Psychology 4 280 36428 Pnnc1ples of Psychologtc'll Asscss1nent 1 1542g De31gn '1.nd Mc'l.Sllt en1cnt 1 3bl30 P'!}<hology Honours Thesis lb 280 36440 PsyLhology Honours Thesis 18 3b501 I 1eld Org•n1.1at1011 4 280 36502 Ci11ld De\ elop1nent 4 281 ~b.304 Sou'll and G1 oup P1 OLesscs 4 281

1010

INDEX TO TOPICS

1op1c Number Tith Units Pabe

36507 Resedrch Design and St'lt1st1cs 4 282 36508 [ducauonal Psychology 4 283 35;12 lnstr111nenlat1on 4 284 36513 Profcss1onal Ethics 4 284 36514 D1ssertat1on 6 284 36518 Psychopathology 6 281 36519 Psychod1agnost1cs 6 282 36521 Counselling 6 282 36522 Behaviour ~1od1fic'lt1on 6 283 36523 Practicum ( 12) 12 284 36524 Pract1cu1n ( 16) 16 284 36526 Chn1c'll Neutopsychology 4 37150 Indonesian I 12 285 37201 Rural and Urban Change 111 S 1'. Asia 12 287 372;0 I ndones1an 11 12 286 37302 PohtKal and [con Developtncnt Ill S [ As1.i. 12 287 37403 [htes Ill So1uheast Asia 6 259 288 37404 Conlr'lst1nb Models of Develop1ncnt The Case

of Japan vs China 6 37405 Urb.an1sat1on and Developn1ent 10 S Ii.. A 6 218 28q 37406 Struggle for India l 917 I 939 6 289 37407 The Clunese Cultut al Revoluuon 6 2o9 28q 37408 Soc1ology of the Tlurd World 6 290 37430 Asn.n Studies Honours Thesis 12 38110 Soc1ology I 12 292 38208 Soc1olob1cal Theory 6 292 38209 lntroduct1on lo Social Suucture 6 293 3821 l I am1ly Structures Sex Roles 'ln<l Pei sonahty 6 38212 Urban Soc1ology 6 293 38213 ranuly and K1nsh1p General P<.rspectl\es 6 294 38214 Pos1t1on of Women 1n Modern Society 6 294 38301 Soc1ology Tca1n Rc!)earch Soc1olog} of

Knowledge ProJCCt 6 295 38305 Soc1ology of the Thn d World 6 296 38306 Pohucal Soc1ology Class Analysis and the State 6 290 38307 Theoncs dnd Methods 111 Soc1olog1cal E11qu1ry 6 297 38308 Soc1ologtcal Team Reseat ch Sou al P1 oblems Pro1cc1 6 297 38309 Soc1olog1cal Tea1n Rese.u ch Social Mat g1nahty

ProJCCI 6 3831 l Contemporary Socl'lhsl Soueucs 6 298 38312 Social Inequality 6 2qs 38313 Conte1npo1dry A1nencan Society 6 247 299 3841 l Soc1,tl Resea1ch \.Yotk.shops 6 J84 l2 Poht1cal Sociology Class Analysis and the

State (Honours) 6 299 38413 Sociology of the Tlurd World (Honours) 6 290 299 38414 Urban Soc1ology (I-lonours) 6 299 38415 Contc1npor'lry Soc1.i.hst Soc1et1C!) (Honours) 6 300 38416 Soc1ology Honou1 s Reading Scnunar 6 300 38417 Soc1olog} Honours and Anthropology

(Adelaide Un1ve1s1ty) 6 38418 Thcor} of Souety 6 300 38430 Soc1ology Honours Thesis 12 38440 Soc1ology Honou1 !) The!)JS 18 300 38501 State l11tervc11t1on 'll1d Social Change 111 the

lc1st [uropcctn Soc1ahst ~oc1et1es 8 301 38502 lntelhgentsia and Planne1s 111 Ad\an<.cd Societies 8 301 38003 State Intervent1on and Social Change 111 Australia 8 302

!Oll

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title Units Page

38504 Marxism and Contetnporary Soc1olog1cal Thought 8 302 38505 Decolon1sauon 8 302 39000 Adelaide Un1vers1ty Course 12 39001 Adelaide Un1vers1ty Topic 9 39002 Adelaide Un1vers1ty Topic 6 39003 Adelaide Un1vers1ty Topic 15 39204 Abong1nes and Austrahan Society 6 304 39205 r::cology of Man and Society 6 304 39206 Revoluuon 6 305 39207 Social Change 1n Europe and Asia 6 306 39208 U rban1zat1on 6 307 39209 Leisure and Recreation 6 307 39211 Demography 6 308 39212 Pubhc Dec1s1on Mal-1ng 6 309 39213 Social Structure of Modern Bnta1n 6 309 39214 Research Techniques and their apphcal!on to

Soetal Sciences 6 310 50501 Social Pohcy 8 317 50502 Social Research 8 318 50504 Social Work Practice 8 318 50505 Social Pabey 16 317 50506 Social Research 16 318 50507 Social Work Practice 16 318 50811 Human Develop1nent and Social Environment 6 311 50812 Introduction to Social \Vork 3 311 50813 Social Work Methods I 4 312 50814 Social Work Methods II 4 312 50815 Social Adm1111strat1on 3 313 50816 Social Pohcy 4 313 50817 Social Welfare Services 4 313 50818 Social Work Pracuce 8 314 50911 Advanced Practice 12 314 316 50912 Manage1nellt 1n Social Welfare 12 314 316 50913 Personal Development and Superv1s1oll 12 50914 Research Ill Social Welfare 12 50915 Social Work in Selected Settings 12 50916 Social Pabey Analysis 12 315 316 50918 Advanced Practicum 12 315 50951 Management 111 Social Welfare 6 50952 ramdy Therapy 6 50953 Psych1atnc Social Work 6 50954 Personal Development 6 50955 Superv1s1011 1n Social Work 6 3lb 50956 Aging Ill Industnal Society 6 50957 AgJ.ng Persons with Special Needs 6 50958 Advanced Pracuce 4 316 50959 Advanced Pr1.ct1ce 8 316 50961 tyfanagt.ment 1n Social \Velfare 4 316 50%2 Management 1n Social Welfare 8 316 53110 Teaching Onentat1on 902 53211 Human Develop1nent and Education 6 9oq 53215 Curnculu1n Theory 6 903 53217 lntroduct1on to Ped1.gogy 3 910 918 53218 Cross cultural pe1spect1ves 1n Education 6 909 53221 Power and Authonty 1n Lducauon 6 904 03222 Psychology and Educauon 6 904 53223 Sociology of Education 6 905 53224 Aesthetics and Educ1.t1011 6 905

1012

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Tttle Units Page

53225 Research Methods 1n Education 6 906 53226 Science and Education 6 907 53227 Philosophy and Education 6 907 53228 Education and Society 1n Australia 6 908 53229 History of Ideas 6 909 53231 Language in Educauon 6 909 53241 Education and Social Theory 6 910 53261 Physical Acttvtty Phys1olog1cal Bases 6 918 53262 Physical Activity Forms 1n Society 6 919 53310 Psychology and Teaching the Basic Subjects 10 911 53331 Problems Principles Tech of Evaluation 3 912 53332 School Organ1zat1on and Adm1n1strat1on 3 912 53333 Handicapped Children in Ordinary Schools 3 913 53334 Soaal Interaction 3 913 53335 Clear and Cnucal Th1nk1ng 3 913 53336 The School Education of Gifted Children 3 914 53337 Educational Media 3 914 53338 Aborigines and Educauon 3 914 53340 Teaching Observation and Experience 4 915 53342 Teaching Observation and Practice 8 915 53350 Expressional Acuv1ties 4 915 53360 Physical Education II 12 53361 r.xerc1se physiology 3 922 53362 Physical Act1v1ty Growth and Development 6 919 53363 Physical Act1vuy Analysis Measurement

and Evaluation 6 920 53364 Physical Act1vtty Acquisiuon of Sktlls 6 920 53401 Teacl11ng Internship 6 917 53410 Apphcauons of Educational Theory 6 916 53440 Special Methods (P E ) 4 53450 Physical Lducation in Schools 6 921 53461 Physical Act1v1ty The Thc..ory and Practice of

Training 4 920 53462 The Physical Education Prdfess1on 4 921 53463 Directed Study 4 921 53470 Teaching Internship (PE ) 8 922 53480 Primary School Methods 6 917 53490 Special Methods Theory and Apphcauon 9 917 53501 Comparauve Education 9 943 53510 Educational Psychology (M Ed ) 9 941 53502 Directed Study 4¥2 946 53503 Directed Study 9 946 53520 Phtlosophy of Educauon (M Ed ) 9 942 53530 Sociology of Education (M Ed ) 9 942 53535 Ed ucat1on and Social Theory 9 945 53500 History of Western Education 9 943 53555 Schooling Systems 9 946 53560 Stats and Research Methods 1n Education 9 943 53565 Tertiary Lducauon 9 946 53570 Science Education 9 944 53590 Educ Evaluation Issues Models Techno 9 945 53610 Thesis 36 946 53620 Phys Ed Current Development Theory and Prac 9 945 53640 The Handicapped Child 9 944 53651 Evolving Concepts of Ad1n1n 4!/:! 933 53652 Patterns of Organ1s1.t1on and Organ1sat1onal

Chang<. 4V2 934 53653 Commun1cat1011 and Interpersonal Relations 41'\ 934

1013

JNDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title Units Page

53654 Planning Techn1quLs 4\h 934 53655 Personnel 111 Educauon Syste1ns 4V, 935 53656 Re&earch Methods for lhe Adm1n1st1 1tor 41'2 935 53657 Australian I:ducat1on S)stem 4V, 936 53658 The Planning Process 4V, 916 53671 Planning and Ad1n1n of the r..ducat1on Progra1n1ne 4V2 937 53672 Lconom1cs of Education 4V, 937 ,3673 Concepts of Work Leisure and Rec1eat1on 41'2 938 53674 The School and the Con11nunny 4V, 938 53675 Computers and Manage1nent 4!/2 938 53676 Planning Techniques II 4Yi 938 53681 The Organ1zauonal ProLess 4V, 939 53682 Cuncnt Issues and Proble1ns 10 Education 4V, 939 53683 Alternative Educational Strategies 4V:z 940 53684 Spec Interest Topic (Ed Ad1nin) 4V, 9!0 53685 Resea1ch PIOJect (Ed Ad1n1n) 18 941 53704 Teaclung I1uernslup (Dip Ed ) 6 932 53705 Applications of Educational Theory 6 932 53706 Prnnary School Methods (Dtp Ld ) 6 933 53740 Teaclung Observation and Practice 3 931 53746 Teaclung Obse1 Vallon and Prac..tice

(Aboriginal Education) 3 931 53750 Spec11J Method~ Lnghsh 4!/2 53751 Speual Methods Drama 41'2 53753 Special Methods li1story 4l'! 53754 Special Methods Geogrc1phy 4Yi 53755 Special Methods Economics 4l'! 537'6 Special Methods Junior Social Science 3 53757 Special f\.'lethods Senior Social Science IV, 53769 Special Methods Gene1 al Teaching Probs 3 53759 Speual M1..thods Junior Mathe1nat1cs 3 53560 Speual Methods Senior Mathcmat1ts 3 53761 Speci.il Methods Junior Science 3 53762 Special Methods Biology 3 03763 Special Methods Che1n1stry 3 53764 Special Methods Physics 3 53765 Special Methods Itahan 4V, 53766 Special Methods French 4¥i 53767 Special Methods Span1~h 4V, 53768 Special Methods Enghsh as a I ore1gi1 Language 4V, 53801 The Child and the School (B Spec :Cd ) 6 53802 Inlroduct1on to :Cxcepuonal Cluldren 6 923 53803 Social Psychology of Lxcepuonal Clukh en 6 923 53804 Gene1 al Mt.ntal Sd1olasuc retardation 6 924 53805 Leanung D1sab1ht1cs 6 924 53806 Behavior Problems and their Manabemenl 6 925 53807 Children from M1nonty Group Backg1ounds 6 925 53808 Comn1un1cat1on D1sordc1s 6 926 53809 Visual Handicap~ 6 53810 Curnculu1n Theory and Special Education 6 926 53903 Pract1cu1n with Handicapped Cluldren 9 928 5~905 Advanced Reading Mental Retardation 9 928 53906 Advanced Read111b Behaviour Proble1ns 9 928 53907 Advanced Reading Children from M1nonty Group

BacJ...grounds 9 929 ,3908 Advanced Read111b Co1nmun1cauon Disorders 9 929 53909 Advanced Reading Visual Handicaps 9 53910 Advanced Reading Learning D1sab1ht1es 9 929

1014

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title Units Page

53912 Research Project 1n Special Educdt1on 9 927 53913 Research ivlethods 1n Special Education 6 927 60116 Int1oductory Mathe1nat1cs 9 401 60400 Honours Setn1nar 111 D1dact1c Problems

of Mathematics 4 424 60399 General Mathematics Reading Course 3 413 61116 Algebr'l A 9 403 61127 Algebra Bl 2 402 61128 Algebra Bil 4 402 61211 foundations of Antluneuc 3 411 61212 Foundations of Geometry 3 410 61221 Matnx Theory I 3 407 61222 Matnx Theory II 3 407 61241 Comb1natoncs 3 408 61243 Classical D1fferent1al Geometry 3 407 61311 Algebra I 3 413 61312 Algebra II 3 413 61313 Algebra III 3 414 61406 I-Ionours Seminar in Purt. Mathe1nat1cs 8 424 61411 Group Theory 4 426 61417 Group Reprco:;entat1ons 4 428 61427 Mdthc1naucal Logic 4 426 61428 Projective Geo1net1 y 4 428 61437 D1ffercnt1Jblc Manifolds 4 428 61438 R1en1'lnn1an Geometry 4 428 61447 Lattice Theory 4 433 61448 Topics 1n Algebra 4 433 61449 Applied Algebra 4 413 61499 Set Theory 4 427 63114 D1ffercnt1al 'l.nd Integral Calculus SI IO 404 63116 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus AI 15 403 63126 D1ffercnt1al and Integral Calculus Bl 6 403 63211 D1fferenl1al 'l.nd Integral Calculus All 3 405 63212 Differential and Integral Calculu!i Alli 3 405 63213 D1ffercnt1al and Integral Calculus AIV 3 405 63221 D1fferent1al and Int<.gral Calculus Bii 3 406 63222 D1fferent1al and Integral Calculus Bill 3 406 63223 D1fferLntial Jnd Integral Calculus BIV 3 406 63241 D1ffe1<.nt1al Equations I 3 409 61242 Differential [quatlons II 3 410 63243 Population Dynamics 3 411 63311 Co1nplcx Analysis 3 414 63312 rouncr Analysts 3 415 63313 Integration Theory 3 416 63341 D1fferent1al [quat1ons Ill 3 417 63342 Partial Differential fquauons I 3 418 63143 PJ1t111 D1ffert.ntnl Lquauons II 3 418 63151 Topology 3 414 63362 [lementary l l1lbert SpdCC Techniques 3 415 63399 Pure ivf'lthe1n'l.t1cs Reading Course 3 411 63411 Topics 1n Co1nplex AnalyMs 4 424 63447 Potential Theo1 y 4 431 61448 Integral Equ1uons 4 430 63449 fop1cs 111 D1fferenual [quauons 4 426 63453 I unct1onal Analysis 4 425 63463 Advanced Hilbert Space fechn1ques 4 425 63471 Control Theo1 y 4 426 63472 Con\ex1ty and Opt11n1zauon 4 425

1015

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title Umls Page

63477 Ergodic Theory 4 432 65204 Introductory Staust1cs 4 406 65213 Probab1hty and Stat1st1cs II 3 408 65251 Probabtbty and Statistics I 3 408 65311 Stat1st1cal Inference I 3 417 65312 Stat1st1cal Inference II 3 417 65313 Stat1st1cal Inference III 3 417 65317 Sampling Theory 3 423 65342 Markov Processes I 3 416 65351 Random Variables 3 416 65353 Mult1vanate Models 3 417 65399 Probabduy and Stat1sucs Reading Course 3 413 65417 Non Parametnc Stat1st1cs 4 429 65420 Contingency Tables 4 65421 Robustness & Data Analysis 4 427 65422 Mathematical Probab1hty 4 427 65423 Robustness and Data Analysis 4 427 65439 Stationary Time Senes 4 429 65442 Markov Processess I I 4 428 65449 Branching Processes 4 429 65457 Mathematical Probab1hty 4 65458 Probab1hty L1m1t Theorems 4 429 65466 Honours Seminar 10 Stattstics 4 430 67111 Computing I 3 404 67112 Computing II 3 404 67113 Programming Languages 3 411 67114 Elementary Data Processing A 3 404 67115 I:Iementary Data Processing B 1 Y2 404 67120 Data Structures and List Processing 4 411 67203 Special Functions 3 410 67212 Numerical Analysis I 3 409 67213 Numencal Analysis II 3 409 67252 Classical Mechanics 3 410 67273 File and Data Management 3 412 67303 Calculus of Vanat1ons 3 421 67312 Numencal Methods of Linear Algebra 3 419 67313 Approx1mat1on of Functions 3 419 67322 Numcncal Soluuon of D1fferent1al Equations 3 419 67331 Linear Programming 3 420 67332 Introduction to Operational Research I 3 422 67333 Introduction to Operational Research II 3 422 67337 Dynamic Programming and Networks 3 423 67351 Continuum Mechanics 3 421 67353 Analytical Mechanics 3 421 67361 Class1cal Hydrodynamics 3 420 67363 Perturbation Methods 3 420 67365 Linear Theory of Elast1c1ty 3 422 67389 Computauonal Pro1ect 3 421 67399 A pphed Mathematics Reading Course 3 413 67417 Asym ptot1c ~lcthods 4 431 67418 A pprox1mat1on Theory 4 431 67419 Numerical Solutions of Integral Lquallons 4 432 67427 F1n1te Difference Methods 4 432 67428 Opt1n11sat1on and Stab1hty of Numencal Processes 4 432 67437 Topics 111 Continuum Mechanics 4 430 67447 Numencal lvlodelhng 4 433 67464 Signals in Systems 4 430 67465 Synthesis of Systems 4 430

1016

Topic Number

67467 Theory of Elast1c1ty

Tttle

67471 Control Structure and Organ1sat1on 67472 Operating Systems 70001 Science and Society 70112 70132 Perspectives 1n Physical Science 70112 A Revolution 1n Commun1cat1on 70113 The Sky and Beyond 70114 Matter and Anu Matter 70115 Space Time and Relat1v1ty 70116 The Nucleus - Ultimate Energy Source 70117 Physics to See and EnJOY The Physics of Light 70130 The Exhaustion of the Fossil Fuels 70131 Chemistry 1n the Market Place 70132 Minerals and Gemstones 70211 Mechanics I 70212 Mechanics II 70300 Environmental Science 70311 Materials Science I 70312 Materials Science II 70313 Materials Science Ill 70314 The New Energy Sources 7032 l Sohd State Science 70391 Chemical Physics Labor<ttory 71100 Chemistry I 71101 lntroduct1on to Che1n1stry 71102 I ntrod uct1on to Che1n1su y A 71103 Introd uct1on to Chemistry B 71291 Chemistry Laboratory II (Organic) 71292 Chemistry Laboratory II (Physical) 71293 Chemistry Laboratory II (Inorganic) 71392 Chemistry Laboratory IIIA 71393 Chemistry Laboratory IIIB 71394 Chemistry Laboratory IIIC 72200 Organic Chemistry 72201 Organic Structure Determtnauon 72310 lntroducuon to Heterocychc Chem1st1y 72311 Aromaticity 72312 Physical Organic Chemistry 72313 Chemistry of Free Radicals 72314 Molecular Rearrangements 72315 Modern Organic Synthesis 72316 Organometalhc Chemistry 72570 Research Seminars (Organic) 73200 Chemical Dynamics 73201 Thermodynamics 73203 Inorganic Chemistry 73204 Molecular Properties 73205 B101norgan1c Chemistry 73310 Reaction K1net1cs 7331 l Statistical Thermodynam1cs 73314 Adsorption and Catalysis 73315 Surface Science 73317 Crystal Che1n1stry 73318 Compul!ng Methods 10 Chemistry 73321 Llectrochem1stry (Ionics) 73322 Electrochem1stry (Elcctrodtcs) 73324 Bio 1norgan1c Che1n1stry 73325 Advanced Inorganic Chem1st;y

INDEX TO TOPICS

Units Page

4 432 4 434 4 434

ea 2 501 2 502 2 503 2 502 2 501 2 503 2 502 2 502 2 503 2 501

21h 503 2J!i 504

2 504 2V2 504

2 504 2 505 2 505

2J!i 505 5 506 9 507 9 507 6 508 6 508 2 508 2 509 2 509

4V2 512 3 512

l 1h 512 3V2 509

2 509 2 512 2 512 2 513 2 513 2 513 2 513 2 514

21;2 510 2J!i 510 2J!i 510 21;2 5 l l 21h 51 l

2 514 2J!i 514

2 514 2 515 2 515 2 515 2 516 2 516 2

21h 516

1017

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title U11its Page

73326 Valency and Molecular Spectroscopy 2Y2 517 73327 B101norgan1c Syste1ns I V2 517 73410 Crystallography 73411 Quantum Che1n1stry 73415 Mass Transport 1n Sohds 73416 Corrosion Science 73418 Electron Spectroscopy 73480 Chenustry Reading Course 73570 Physical and !not gan1c Chemistry Se1n1nar 75100 lntroductton to Physics 9 518 75101 Introduction to Physics S 6 518 75291 Physics Laboratory IIS l 519 75292 Physic!> Laboratory IIIS l 520 76100 Physics I 9 519 76221 Llectromagnet1c Theory I 2Yi 520 76222 Wave and Optics 2!/i 520 76231 Quantum Mechanics I 2!/i 521 76261 Atomic and Nuclear Phys1c.s I 2Y2 521 76283 Electronics 2Y2 521 76291 Physics Laboratory II 2 522 76292 Physics Laborato1 y III 2 522 76293 Electronics Laboratory 2 522 752g4 Physics Laboratory IIA 2 522 76311 Llementary Mathe1nat1cal Physics 21> 523 76321 Electromagnetic Theory I I 2Y2 523 76331 Quantu1n Mechanics II 21> 523 76341 Discharge and Plasma Physics 2.Y2 523 76351 Thennal Ph} sics I 2Y2 524 76352 Thermal PhySics JI (l 976) 2Y2 524 76361 Atomic and Nuclear Physics II 2Y2 524 76371 Physics Reading Topic I 2Y2 76372 Physics Reading Topic II 21> 525 76383 lnstru1nentdt1on 21> 525 76391 Physic!> Laboratory IV 2Y2 525 76392 Physics Labo1 atory V 21> 521j 76393 Instrun1entat1on Labotatory 2Y2 525 76411 Design Principles - Experimental Physics

76421 Relauv1ty and Electromagnetic Theo! y 526 76431 Advanced Quantum Mechanic!> 526 76432 Special Topics 10 Quantum Mechanics 2Y2 527 76433 Specu oscopy 526 76441 Atomic Coll1Mon Processe!> 526 76442 Plas1na Ph}s1cs 527 76451 Advanced St'l.t1st1cal Mechanics 527 76452 Physics of fluids 76461 Nuclear Theo1 y I 527 76462 Special Topics 10 Modern Physics 76471 Physics Seminar 527 76472 Theoretical PhysKs Seminar 527 81100 [arth Sc1en'Ccs I 9 801 81202 Con1put1ng rechn1ques Ill Larth Sciences 2 802 82201 A pphed Astronomy 21> 806 82202 Planetary Science 2Y2 806 82206 Meteorology and Chmatology 21> 807 82207 fhe Weather Forecast I l 807 82214 l-Iydrology 2Y2 802 82215 Regional Oceanography 2Y2 806

1018

INDEX TO TOPICS

I'opic Number Title Ututs Page

82291 \.leteorologtc'll Oceanograph1cal and Hydrological tvfeasure1nents 3 807

82302 Physical tvfeteorology and Oceanography 2 82303 Dynamical Oceanography 2 813 82305 Dynamical Meteorology 2 813 82306 Selected Aspects of Meteorology and Oceanography 2 813 82307 Meteorologtc'll and Oceanographtcal Data Analysis 2 814 82311 M1crometeorology and Chmatonomy 2 814 82312 Rad1at1on 1n the Atmosphere 2 814 82317 The Weather Forecast II I 814 82321 Physical Oceanography 2 815 82391 tvfeteorologtcal 1nd Oceanograph1cal

~1easurements II 9 Sia 82401 Almosphenc Ctrculat1on Theory 818 82402 At1nosphenc Development Th<.ory 818 82403 At1nosphenc Instab1hty Theory 818 82405 Oce1.n Cn culat1011 Theory 818 82406 Problems 1n Geophys1tal Fluid Dynamics 818 82407 Turbulence 818 82408 Sea Level and Tides - 818 82409 Sphencal Astro1101ny 818 83204 Explorauon Geophysics I 3 802 83208 Larth s Crust 1.nd Upp<.r Mantle 3 803 83293 Geophysical lvfap lntcrpretat1011 Lab I 2 803 83294 Geophysical Model Expcruncnts Laboratory 2 803 83306 Geomagnet1s1n 816 83308 f.1.rthquc1ke Sc1s1nology and The Earths 1ntenor 3 807 83310 Explorauon Geophys1ts 11 3 808 83114 Hydrogeology 2!4 808 83391 Gcophys1cal ~fc1p Interpretation Lab II 2 808 83392 GeophyMcal fxperuncnts Laboratory 2 809 83394 C..eochronology 2 83401 Isotope Hydrology 815 81406 Manne Geophysics 815 83109 Sem1nan, 1n fop1cal Geophysics 815 83410 Geo1nagnet1c Induct1on Phenomena 816 83411 fracture and Flow of Rocks 83413 P<1.laeo1nagnct1sm and Pl<1.te Tectonics 816 83114 Se1s1n1c Data Processing and lnterpretauon 816 84205 Sed1n1entary Environments Modern and Ancient 3 804 84211 Pelrology 2Yi 803 81213 SLruct111al Geology 3 804 84281 Optical tvltner'llogy and PetrOb'Taphy Lab 4 805 84282 Structu1 c1l Geology Lt1.boratory 2 805 84283 Optical tvhneralogy Ltboratory A I !h 805 84299 Geolog1c1.l Field Ca1np 2 805 84311 Igneou~ .ind Metamo1 phtc Petrogene::.1s 3 809 84314 Econo1111c ~hneral Deposits 2 809 84115 Soil Science 2Vi 810 84316 Hydrology and Veget1.tton 2Vi 810 81317 fectOlllCS 2 810 84318 St.d1mentary Gt.0Lhe1n1stry 2Vi 811 84386 Hyd1olog1cal I 1eld Laboratory 2!4 812 84392 igneous and ri.lcta1norpluc Petrogencs1s Laboratory 3 811 84393 Seclnnentary Lnv1ron1ncnts L iboratory 3 811 84395 ~t.d1mcncary Lnv1ron1nents 1nd Petrogenests

L ibor<1.tory 4 812 84397 M111e1 alogy and Geochc1n1cal Methods 2 812

1019

lNDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Number Title Units Page

84399 Geophysical and Geological Field Camp 4 813 84401 Petrofabncs and Experimental Defo1 mat1on 817 84402 Current Aspects of Manne Geology 817 84403 Advanced Mineralogy and Petrogenes1s 817 84404 Current Aspects of Manne Geochemistry 817 84405 M1ne1al Exploration Se1n1nars 817 84406 Principles of Structural Analysis 818 86100 B1ological Sc1ente I 9 601 861 IO Perspectives in Biology 12 601 86201 Cell l'vlet•bohsm 3M! 602 86202 Cell Physiology 3V2 602 86203 Cell Genetics 2 603 86204 Cell Growth and Development l V2 603 86210 Introduction to Cell and

Molecular Biology 4 603 86251 Plant Structure and Function 3 604 86252 Animal Structure •nd Function 3V2 604 86253 M1crob1al Structure and Funcuon 3 600 86254 B1ostatJst1cs 2!1.! 605 86261 Population Biology 3V2 605 86370 Biology Seminar 11'! 86400 Honours Biology bl8 87205 Human Biology 2 87221 General Merabohsn1 2V2 606 87255 Vertebrate Physiology 3 606 87263 Plant Evolut1on 2V2 606 87275 Introduction to Behavioural Biology 2 607 87341 Plant Growth and Development AI 2V2 607 87342 Plant Growth and Development A2 3Vi 607 87343 Plant Growth and Development A3 4V2 607 87344 Plant Growth and Development B 1 21'> 608 87345 Plant Growth and Develop1nent B2 3!1.! 608 87316 Plant Growth and Development B3 4V2 608 87357 Physiology A 2Yi 87359 Cnv1ronmcnt Physiology 2!1.! 609 87360 Neurophysiology of the Brain 21'> 609 87361 Neurophysiology of the Brain 3Y, 609 87362 Phys1olog1cal Systems 3V2 608 87363 Ecology 3M! 609 87376 Behavioural Biology A 3Y, 610 87377 Bch.iv1oural Biology B 3M! 610 88333 Cytogeneucs 3M! 61 l 88334 Population Geneucs 31;2 611 88335 Developmental Genetics 3V2 611 88341 Biology of i\-I1cro Organisms A 3M! 88342 Biology of Micro Organ1s1ns B 88345 M1crob1ology A 3!1.! 612 88346 M1trob1ology B 21'> 612 88347 M1crob1ology B 3J/:z 612 88348 M1crob1al Genf't1cs 3Vi 613 88349 Iinmunology 31'! 613 88357 Cell and Developn1enl Biology 3Y2 614 89300 B1ological Evolution 2Y, 614 89312 B1ophys1cs 3Y2 615 89313 B1ophys1cs 2Yi 615 89314 Cell and Membr.ine Physiology Al 2Vi 615 89315 Cell and Nle1nbrane Physiology A2 3V2 615 89316 Cell and Membrane Physiology BI 2Y, 616

1020

INDEX TO TOPICS

I op1c Number Title Units Page

89317 Cell and Membrane Physiology B2 3Y2 616 89324 B1ologtcal lnforn1at1on

Molccul.i.r Nature and Expression 2Vi 616 89325 B1ologtcal lnforn1at1on

Molecular Nature and Lxpress1011 4Vi 89326 B1oche1n1cal Control Mech'1.n1s1ns 2\.'I 616 89327 B1ochem1cal Control Mech'1.111s1ns 4Vi 89329 B1ochem1st1 y of Cell Surface~ 3 617 89330 B1ochem1stry L 'lboratory 3 617 89350 89399 Special Topics 111 Biology I 4 617 90107 Project 111 I 1rst Year Med1c1ne 9 704 90108 PrOJCCt 111 l 1Tst Yeat tvled1c1ne 6 704 90109 Project 111 F!Tst Year Wled1c1ne 3 704 90112 Basic Mathem'l.ucs fat Medical Students 2 704 90115 External Elecuvc Studies Ill r1rst Year Medicine 9 704 90116 Extern'll Llccuve Studies 111 F1rst Year Med1c1ne 6 704 90117 External Llect1v<. Studies 111 r!Tsl Year Med1c1ne 3 704 90ln0 The B1ologtcal B'1.s1s of Mcchc1ne 12 701 90151 The Phystcli and Che1n1c'1.I Basts of Med1c1ne 9 703 90152 rhe Behavioural B1s1~ of l\.Icd1c1ne 6 703 90201 The Structure and runctton of the Hurnan Body I 705 90205 Cell D1v1s1on and Its Control 707 90206 Diet 1.nd Heart Disease 3 707 90207 Alcohol and its Effects 3 707 90208 Insulin and Its lnteracuon with Cells 3 707 90209 Comparative Solution'! to P1oblc1ns of Lx1st<.nce 3 707 90210 Project 111 Second Year Wfed1c1ne 9 707 90211 Aspe<.ts of Interpersonal Rclauonsh1ps 3 707 90212 Some Constderauons 111 Med1cal and 1-:lealth Care 706 90215 I:xternal Elective Studies 1n Second Ye'lr Med1c1ne 9 707 90216 External Elective Studies 1n Second Y<.ar Med1c1ne 6 707 90217 External Elecuve Studies 1n Second Yea1 Med1c1ne 3 707 90218 Project 111 Second Year Med1c1nc 6 707 90219 PrOJCCt 111 Second Year Med1c1ne 3 707 90220 Concepts 111 Medical Che1n1stry 3 705 707 90222 Regional Anato1ny Prosecuon 3 Q0223 Adv'1.nced Hun1 in Genetics 3 707 90226 Red Blood Cell ~1et1bohsm 3 90227 Advances 111 the Neurosc1ences 9 707 90228 I und'1.mcnL1l Concepts 111 J.luman Nutntton 3 90230 Remedial Studies 1n Second Yeai Med1c1ne (Tenn 5) 3 707 90231 Re1ned1al Studies In S<.cond Year rvted1c1ne (T<.rm 6) 3 707 90232 Remedial Studies 1n Second Year i\1ed1c1ne

(Long Vac1t1on) 3 707 90301 The Structure •n<l Function of the I-:lu1nan Body 11 708 90302 Disordered Sti ucture and function of the

Hum1.n Body 708 90303 Pnnc1ples of Pha1 macology 709 90304 Anato1ny D1ssect1on 709 90306 Hum1.n Behaviour 709 90307 Introducuon to ChnKal Mcd1c1ne 710 90310 Project in Th1rd Year Mcd1c1ne 9 711 90313 rvrorphology Radtology Fann and Function 3 711 90314 i\1echcal Care 111 Disadvantaged Commun1t1es 3 711 90315 Lxtcrnal Elecuvc Studies 111 Th!Td Ye•r Med1c1ne 9 711 90316 Lxtcrnal Elective Studies 1n Third Year Med1c1ne 6 711 90317 Lxtern'll Elecuvc Studies 111 Th!Td Year ~led1c1ne 3 711 90318 Project 111 Third Year Mcd1c1ne 6 711

1021

INDEX TO TOPICS

Topic Numbt'r Title Units Page

90319 Project 1n Thnd Ye.tr Med1c1ne 3 711 90320 Body Fluid and Ren'11 Functton Study 3 711 90321 Counselling 1n Medical Pr'1ct1ce 3 711 90322 Cancer '"ind the Environment 3 711 qo325 People Their D1stnbuuon Their Environ1nent

and Their Diseases 710 qo325 Nonna! Flora 3 711 90328 Morphology R'1d1ology ronn and runcuon 6 711 90329 Body Fluid and Renal runct1on Study 6 711 90330 Rernednl Stuchcs 1n Thtrd Year Mechc1ne (Tenn 8) 3 711 90331 Remed1al Studies 1n Third Year tvled1c1ne (Term 9) 3 711 90332 Re1nedial Studies 111 Third Ye'"ir Med1c1ne

(Long V'1cat1on) 3 711 90333 Metabolic. Funcuon of the Lung 3 711 90334 He.ilth lnst1tul1ons of S A I 3 712 90335 The Effec1veness of Diagnostic Tests 6 712 90336 He dth lnsutuuons of SA II 6 712 90401 Cluucal Skills 712 go402 Clinical Sciences 712 90405 fourth Year Medical Elecuve Topic (\Vhole Year) 9 714 90406 Fourth Year Medical Elective Topic

(Fust Half Ye'1r) 4Vi 714 90407 Fourth Year Medic.ti Elective Topic

(Second Half Year) 4\i2 714 90001 Medicine Term 715 90502 Obstetnc.s and Gyn'"lccology Tenn 716 90503 Paed1atncs Term 717 90504 Psyclualry Tenn 718 90505 Surgery Tenn 718 91401 Honours Medical Science 719 92401 D1etet1cs and Hutnan Nutnt1on 719 94501 An'1.lyt1cal B1ochem1stry 9 721 94502 Cluucal Labor'ltory Prac.t1ce 3 721 94503 Laboratory M'"l.nagement 3 721 94504 Chemical Pathology 9 722 94n05 Practical Chn1cal Chemistry 12 722 q4505 Research Project and D1ssertauon for M Sc

111 Chn1cal B1ochcm1stry 36 722

1022

PRINCIPAL DATES

PRINCIPAL DATES FOR 1978

1978 Academic Year For the University generally 1st Term - Onentat1on Week begins

Classes begin Classes end A VCC Common Vacauon WeeJ... begins Exam1nattons MAY 24 30

2ndTerm- Begins Ends Exam1nat1ons AUGUST 21 25

6 MARCH 13 MARCH 12 MAY 15 MAY

12 JUNE 11 AUGUST

AVCC Common Vacanon Week begins 28 AUGUST 3rd Tenn- Begins 11 SEPTl.MBER

Ends 10 NOVEMBER

Exam1nauons 20 NOVEMBER - 1 DECE\fBER

For Diploma in Educatwn and Bachelor of Educatwn Ill students

Onentat1on Week begins 6 MARCH Term I (9 weeks) Begins 13 MARCH

Ends 12 MAY Tenn 2 (11 weeks) Begins 29 MAY

Ends 11 AUGUSI Term 3 (9 weeks) Begins 11 S1<.PTEMBER

Lnds I 0 NOVEMBER Exam1nat1ons 20 NOV1'.MBl!.R - I DECEMBER

For Bachelor of Education IV (Physical Education) Admtnr.slration studenls

Special Education and Educational

Onentauon Week begins Term 1 (9 weeks) Begins

Term 2

Term 3

Ends (13 weeks) Begins

Ends (9 weeks) Begins

Ends

6 MARCH 13 MARCH 12 MAY

30 MAY 25 AUGUST 11 SEPTEMBER 10 NOVEMBER

Exam1nauons 20 NOVEMBER - 1 DECJo.MBER

For the School of Med1c1ne

first and Second Year - i.s for the Un1vers1ty generctlly

Tlurd Year Term 1

Term 2

Term 3

Begins Ends

Exam1nat1ons MAY 24 30 ( l 0 weel..s) Begins

Ends l!.xam1nauons AUGUST 23 25 (11 weeks) Begins

Ends

13 MARCH 12 MAY

12 JUNE 18 AUGUST

4 SEPTEMBER 17 NOVEMBER

Exam1nctt1ons 27 NOVE\IBER - 1 DECE\tBER

Fourth Year

Term l (10 weeks) Begins Ends

Exam1nauons begin 21 APRIL

6 FEBRUARY 14 Al RIL

1023

PRINCIPAL DATES

Term 2 (10 weeks - 1ndud1ng week MAY 15 19 non programmed acttv1t1es) Begins 1 MAY Ends 7 JULY

Term 3

Term 4

1'ifth Year Term I

Term 2

Term 3

Term 4

Term 5

Exam1nat1ons begin 14JULY (9 weeki.) Begins

Ends Lxam1ndt1ons begin 29 SEPTEMBER (Chn1cal Skills - 4 weeks)

Begins Ends

I:xam1nat1ons 6 10 NOVEMBER

(7 weeks) Begins Ends

(7 weeks) Beg1ni. Ends

(7 weeks) Begins Ends

(7 weeks) Begins Ends

(7 weeJ...s) Begins I:.nds

Exam1nat1ons 6 10 NOVEMBER

Dzploma in Nutntwn and Dietetics

Term l (11 weeJ...s 1nclud1ng exam1nauons) Begins Ends

Term 2 ( 11 weeks 1nclud1ng cxam1nat1ons) Begins Ends

Internship Oncntat1on (2 weeks)

Term 3

Vacation Internship

Begins I:nds

(10 weeks) Begins Ends

NOVEMBER 13 17 (4 weeks) Begins

Ends Vacation DECEMBI:R 18 29

24 JULY 22 SEPTE\IBER

9 OCTOBER 3 NOVEMBER

31 JANUARY 17 MARCH 28 MARCH 12 MAY 22 MAY

7 JULY 17 JULY

l SEPTEMBER 11 SEPTEMBER 27 0CTOBJ<.R

20 FEBRUARY 5 MAY

22 MAY 4 AUGUST

7 AuGusr 18 AUGUST

4 SEPTEMBER 10 NOVEMBER

20 NOVEMBER 15 NOVEMBER

lnternslups (4 weeks) JANUARY 2 26 and JANUARY 29 - FEBRUARY 23

1024

2 MONDAY 3 TUESDAY 4 W£DNESDAY 5 THURSDAY 6 FRIDAY

9 MONDAY 10 TUESDAY

11 WEDNESDAY

12 THURSDAY 13 FRIDAY

16 MONDAY 17 TUESDAY 18 WEDNESDAY 19 THURSDAY 20 FRIDAY

23 !vJONDAY 24 TUESDAY 20 WI-..DNESDAY 26 THURSDAY 27 FRIDAY

30 MONDAY 31 TUESDAY

1 WEDNESDAY 2 THURSDAY 3 FRIDAY

6 !vlONDAY 7 TUESDAY

8 WEDNESDAY

9 THURSDAY 10 FRIDAY

13 MONDAY 14 TUESDAY 15 WEDNI-..SDAV

16 THURSDAY 17 fR.IDAY

PRINCIPAL DATES

University meetings Public Holidays and other prmcifial events

January 1978 Public Holiday for Nc'\v Years Day

Standing Committee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p m Examinations Board School of Social Sciences 1 00 p 1n Higher Degrees Con11n1ttee School of Social Sciences l 00 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Hurnan1ues 3 00 pm

Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm

Australia Day -Public Holtday Allocat1ono; Co1nm1ttee 2 00 p m

February Higher Degrees Committee School of Human1t1es 3 00 pm Standing Committee School of Education 2 00 p m Welfare Services Committee 9 15 am

Standing Committee School of Social Sciences l 00 p m Exam1nattons Board School of Social Sciences I 00 p 1n Academic Committee 7 30 p m Higher Degrees Com1n1ttee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p m Standing Comnuttee School of Human1t1es 2 00 p m Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Finance and Butld1ngs Committee 2 00 p m

Research Committee 2 15 p m Board of the School of B1ological Sciences 3 00 p m Board of the School of Human1t1es 2 00 pm Board of the School of Educauon 2 00 p 1n Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

1025

PRINCIPAL DATES

20 MONDAY 21 TUESDAY 22 WEDNESDAY

23 THURSDAY 24 fRIDAY

27 MONDAY 28 TUESDAY

I WEDNESDAY 2 THURSDAY 3 FRIDAY

6 MONDAY 7 TUESDAY

8 WEDNESDAY

9 THURSDAY IO FRIDAY

13 MONDAY 14 TUESDAY 15 WEDNESDAY

16 THURSDAY

17 FRIDAY

20 MONDAY 21 TUESDAY 22 WED~ESDAY 23 THURSDAY 24 FRIDAY

27 MONDAY 28 TUESDAY 29 WEDNESDAY 30 THURSDAY 31 FRIDAY

3 MONDAY 4 TUESDAY 5 WEDNESDAY 6 THURSDAY 7 fRIDAY

1026

Board of the School of Mathemat1cdl Sciences 2 00 p m Study Leave Committee 9 00 a m Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p m Board of the School of Medicine 5 15 pm Council 2 30 p m

Allocattons Committee 2 00 p m

March

Standing Committee School of Education 2 00 p m Welfare Services Committee 9 15 am

Onentat1on week begins Standing Committee School of Social Sciences I 00 p m Exam1nat1ons Board School of Social Sciences I 00 p m Academic Committee 7 30 p m Higher Degrees Committee Social Sciences 1 00 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Human1t1es 3 00 pm Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 p m Finance and Buddings Committee 2 00 p m

first Term classes begin Research Committee 2 00 p m Standing Committee School of Human1t1es 2 00 p m Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 p m Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m Council 2 30 p m

Board of the School of Hun1an1t1es 2 00 pm Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Good Friday - Public Holuiay

Easter Monday - Public Holulay

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p m

April

Allocat1ons Committee 2 00 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Human1t1es 3 00 p m Standing Committee School of Educauon 2 00 p m Welfare Services Committee 9 15 am

IO MONDAY 11 TUESDAY

12 WEDNESDAY

13 THURSDAY 14 FRIDAY

17 MONDAY 18 TUESDAY 19 WEDNESDAY

20 THURSDAY 21 FRIDAY

24 MONDAY 25 TUl:.SDAY 26 WEDNESDAY

27 THURSDAY 28 FRIDAY

I MONDAY 2 TUESDAY 3 WEDNESDAY 4 THURSDAY 5 FRIDAY

8 MONDAY 9 Tut..SDAY

10 WEDNESDAY

11 THURSDAY

12 FRIDAY

15 MONDAY 16 TUJ:o..SDAY 17 WFDNESDA y

18 THURSDAY 19 FRIDAY

22 I\-IONDAY 23 TUESDAY 24 Wt..DNESDAY

PRINCIPAL DA.TES

Standing Committee School of Social Sciences l 00 p m Academic Committee 7 30 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Social Sciences l 00 p m Standing Committee School of Human1ues 2 00 p m Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Finance and Bu1ld1ngs Committee 2 00 pm

Research Committee 2 00 p m Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 pm Board of the School of H umaniUes 2 00 p m Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Anzac Day - Publu Holulay Study Leave Committee 9 00 a m Board of the School of Mathematical Sciences 2 00 p m Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p m Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 p m Council - 2 30 p m

May

Allocauons Committee 2 00 p m

Standing Com1n1ttee School of Educa11on 2 00 pm Welfare Services Committee 9 15 am

Standing Co1n1n1ttee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p m Academic Co1nm1uec 7 30 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Human1t1es 3 00 pm Courses and Curricula Committee School of Social Sciences I 00 pm Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 p m Conferring of Degrees Ceremony p m First Term ends Finance and Buddings Committee 2 00 p m

Adelaide Cup Day - Pubhc Holufa,y Research Committee 2 00 p m Board of the School of B1ologtcal Sciences 3 00 p m Board of the School of Educauon 2 00 pm Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

First Term Exam1nat1ons begin Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p m

1027

PRINCIPAL DATES

25 THURSDAY 26 rRIDAY

29 MONDAY 30 TUJ:o.SDAY

31 WEDNESDAY

1 THURSDAY 2 FRIDAY

5 MONDAY 6 TUESDAY

7 WED'IESDAY 8 THURSDAY

9 FRIDAY

12 MONDAY 13 TUESDAY 14 WEDNESDAY

15 THURSDAY 16 FRIDAY

19 MONDAY 20 TUESDAY 21 WEDNESDAY 22 THURSDAY

23 FRIDAY

26 MONDAY 27 TUESDAY 28 WEDNESDAY

29 THURSDAY 30 FRIDAY

3 MONDAY 4 TUESDAY 5 WEDNESDAY 6 THURSDAY 7 FRIDAY

1028

Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Council 2 30 p m

First Term exam1nat1ons end Allocat1ons Committee 2 00 p m

June

Welfare Services Co1nm1ttee 9 11) am

Queens Birthday - Publtc Holiday Standing Committee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p m Exam1nat1ons Board School of Social Sciences I 00 p 1n Academic Committee 7 30 p n1 Higher Degrees Comm1ttce School of Human1t1cs 3 00 pm Courses and Curricula Committee School of Socrtl Sciences 1 00 pm Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Standing Committee School of l!.ducat1on 2 00 pm Exam1nauons Board School of Educauon 2 00 p 1n Finance and Bu1ld1ngs Committee 2 00 p m

Second Term begins Research Co1nm1ttee 2 00 p m Standing Committee School of Human1ues 2 00 pm Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 p m

Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p rn

Board of the School of Mathem'lUcal Sciences 2 00 p m Board of the School of Hurnan1Ues 2 00 p m Board of the School of Medtc1nc 5 15 pm Board of the School of Lducauon 2 00 p m Counc1l - 2 30 p m

Study Leave Committee 9 00 a m Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 pm

July

Allocations Committee 2 00 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Humanities 3 00 pm Standing Committee School of Education 2 00 p m Independence Day - No Classes

10 MONDAY 11 TUESDAY

12 W!:.DNESDAY

13 THURSDAY

14 FRIDAY

17 MONDAY 18 TUESD\Y 19 WEDNESDAY

20 THURSDAY 21 FRIDAY

24 MOND\Y 25 TUESDAY 26 WtDNESDA y

27 THURSDAY 28 FRIDAY

31 MONDAY

1 TUESDAY 2 WEDNESDAY 3 THURSDAY

4 FRIDAY

7 MONDAY 8 TUESDAY

9 WEDNl:.!>DAY

10 THURSDAY 11 fRIDAY

14 MONDAY 15 TUESDAY

16 WFDNl:.SDAY

17 Tl!URSDA \

18 FRIDAY

PRINCIPAL DATES

Standing Commtttee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p tn Exam1nat1ons Board School of Sooal Sciences 1 00 p m Academic Committee 7 30 pm Higher Degrees Committee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p n1

Standing Comtn1ttee School of l:luman1ttes 2 00 p m Courses and Curricula Committee School of Social Sc1enc..es l 00 pm Standing Comnuttee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Welfare Services Committee 9 15 am Finance and Buddings Committee 2 00 p m

Research Commutee 2 00 p m Board of the School of Hun1an1t1es 2 00 pm Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 p m Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p 1n Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Council 2 30 p m

August Allocauons Committee 2 00 p m Higher Degrees Commutee School of Hu1nan1t1es 3 00 pm Standing Committee School of Educauon 2 00 p m Exam1nauons Board School of Education 2 00 p m Welfare Services Co1nm1ttee 9 15 a m

Standing Committee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p 1n Exa1n1nat1ons Board School of Social Sciences 1 00 p m Academic Committee 7 30 pm Higher Degrees Committee School of SoC1al Sciences I 00 p m Standing Committee School of Human1t1es 2 00 pm Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Second Term ends Finance and Buddings Commntee 2 00 p m

Research Committee 2 00 p m Bo1rd o[ the School of Hu1nan1t1es 2 00 pm BoJrd of the School of B1olog1Cal Sciences 3 00 pm Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

1029

PRINCIPAL DATES

21 MONDAY 22 TUESDAY 23 WFDNESDA Y

24 THURSDAY 25 FRIDAY

28 MONDAY 29 TUESDAY 30 WEDNI'.SDAY 31 THURSDAY

FRIDAY

4 MONDAY 5 TUESDAY

6 WEDNESDAY 7 THURSDAY

8 [RIDAY

11 MONDAY 12 TUESDAY 13 WEDN1'.SDAY

14 THURSDAY 15 fRIDAY

18 MO\jDAY 19 TUESDAY 20 WEDNESDAY 21 THURSDAY 22 [RIDAY

25 MOND\Y 26 TUESDAY 27 WEDN~DAY

28 THURSDAY 29 [RIDAY

~ MONDAY 3 TUESDAY 4 WEDNESDAY 5 THURSDAY 6 FRIDAY

1030

Second Term Examinations begin Board of the School of Mathe1llat1cal Sciences 2 00 p m Study Leave Committee 9 00 a m Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p m Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 p Ill Council 2 30 p m Second Term exam1nat1ons end

Allocations Committee 2 00 p Ill

September Welfare Services Committee 9 15 a 1n

Standing Committee School of Social Sciences I 00 p m Examinations Board School of Social Sciences l 00 p m Academic Con1m1ttee 7 30 p m Higher Degrees Commntee School of Human111cs 3 00 p m Standing Comm1tte<.. School of Education 2 00 p m Exam1nauons Board School of Education 2 00 p tn Finance and Bu1ld1ngs Co1nm1tlee 2 00 p 1n

Tlurd Term begins Research Committee 2 00 p m Standing Committee School of Human1ucs 2 00 pm Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 pm Standing Com1n1ttee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p 111

Board ol the School of Humanities 2 00 pm Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m Council 2 30 p m

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p 1n Board of the School of Mcd1c1ne 5 15 p m

October

Allocauons Comm1Ltee 2 00 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Humantt1es 3 00 pm Standing Committee School of Education 2 00 p m Welfare Services Com1n1ttee 9 15 am

9 MO'iDAY

10 TUESDAY

11 WEDNESDAY

12 THURSDAY

13 FRIDAY

16 MONDAY

17 TUESDAY

18 WEDNFSDAY

19 T11uRSDAY

20 fRIDAY

23 MONDAY

24 TUESDAY

25 \VEDNESDAY

26 T11URSD\Y

27 FRIDAY

30 MONDAY

31 TUESDAY

l WEDl\ESDAY

2 THURSDAY

3 fRIDAY

6 J\.tQNDA\

7 Tu1-.sDAY

8 WED'i!<.SDAY

9 THURSDAY

IO fRIDAY

13 MONDAY

14 TUESDAY

15 WEDNESDAY

16 THURSDAY

17 FRIDAY

20 MONDAY

21 TUESDAY

22 WEDNESDAY

23 THURSDAY

24 FRIDAY

PRINCIPAL DATES

Labour Day -Public Holiday Standing Committee School of Social Sciences l 00 p m Acade1n1c Committee 7 30 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Social Sciences I 00 p m Courses and Curricula Cornmatee School of Social Sc1ence3 l 00 pm Standing Committee School of Medicine 5 15 p m Finance and Buddings Committee 2 00 p m

Research Committee 2 00 p m Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 p m Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m Board of the School of Social Science3 2 00 pm

Bo1.rd of Lhe School of Mathematical Sciences Study Leave Committee 9 00 a m Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p m Board of the School of Medicine 5 Pl p m Council 2 30 p m

Allocations Committee 2 00 p 1n

November Higher Degrees Committee School of Human1t1es 3 00 pm Standing Committee School of Educ1.tion 2 00 pm Welfare Services Committee 9 15 am

Standing Committee School of Social Sciences I 00 p m Exam1n<1llons Board School of Social Sciences I 00 p m Academic Committee 7 30 p m Higher Degrees Committee School of Social Sciences 1 00 p m St1.nd1ng Committee School of Humanities 2 00 pm Courses and Curricula Committee School of Social Sciences l 00 pm Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Third Term ends Finance and Budd1nbs Committee 2 00 p m

Research Commtttce 2 00 p m Board of the School of Human1t1es 2 00 pm Board of the School of B1olog1cal Sciences 3 00 p m Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m Board of the School of Social Sciences 2 00 p m

Exam1nat1ons begin

Board of the School of Physical Sciences 2 05 p m Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm Council 2 30 p m

1031

PRINCIPAL DATES

27 MONDAY 28 TUESDAY Allocat1ons Committee 2 00 p m 29 WEDNESDAY 30 THURSDAY

December FRIDAY Exam1nat1ons end

Welfare Services Com1n1ttee 9 15 a in

4 MONDAY 5 TUESDAY Academic Committee 7 30 p m 6 WEDNlbDAY Higher Degrees Co1nmittce School of Human1t1es 3 00 pm 7 Ttturui.DAY Standing Committee School of Education 2 00 pm

Examinations Board School of Education 2 00 p m 8 FRIDAY Finance and Buddings Committee 2 00 p m

11 MOND\Y 12 TUESDAY Exam1nat1ons Board School of Social Sciences 1 00 p 1n

Research Co1nm1ttee 2 00 p m 13 WEDNESDAY Higher Degrees Committee School of Social Sciences I 00 pm 14 THURSDAY Standing Committee School of Med1c1ne 5 15 p m 15 FRIDAY Council 2 30 p m

18 MONDAY 19 TUESDAY Standing Committee School of Social Science~ l 00 p m 20 WEDNESDAY 21 THURSDAY Board of the School of Med1c1ne 5 15 pm

Board of the School of Education 2 00 p m 22 l RIDAY

25 MONDAY Christmas Day - Public Hobday 26 TUESDAY 27 WEDNESDAY 28 THURSDAY Procla1nat1on Day - Public H oltday 29 I'RIDAY

1032

ENROLMENT OF STUDENTS

Admrssron

The University offers bachelors degrees in Arts Economics Educauon Med1c1ne and Science and students must apply £oradm1ss1on on the prescribed form copies of which are available from the South Austrahan Tertiary Adm1ss1on Centre (SATAC) 228 North Terrace Adelaide 5000 (Students who wish to proceed to a bachelors degree in Education should apply 1n the first instance for adm1ss1on to a bachelors degree 1n Arts Econom1cs or Science) Apphcat1ons for adm1ss1on must be lodged wuh the Adm1ss1ons Office by 3 lst October apphcat1ons submitted after this date will be sub1ect to a late fee

Admission of Overseas Students

Any private overseas student who 1s not resident 1n Australia and who wishes to enter the University must apply to do so on an Educauonal Record Form (Form Ml 130) copies of which are obtainable from all Australian Overseas M1ss1ons For overseas students whose entry quahflcauons were obtained outside Australia the closing date (or applications is 30th September of each year

Amendments to Enrolment and Withdrawal

A student who wishes to vary his enrolment must complete an Amendment to Enrolment form obtainable from the Academic Secuon of the Registry Students should 1mmed1ately notify the Registrar of any change of address A student w1sh1ng to wtthdraw from the University must inform the Registrar tn wntlng It ts not sufhctent that a student merely tell a member of the staff that he intends to withdraw from a topic A student who wishes to withdraw should be fam1har wah the prov1s1ons of the statutes and schedules relaung to enrolment and the vanous courses available Withdrawals from topics a£ter certain dates will be recorded as failures

Academic Progress

Clauses 8 and 10 of Statute 10 1 Bachelors Degrees and Diplomas provide that where a students academic progress has been unsausfactory the Board of the appropnate School may recommend to the Council that he be not permitted to continue his studies

1033

RULES APPLICABLE TO STUDENTS ON UNIVERSITY PREMISES

A GENERAL RULES

The attenuon of all students is drawn to the By laws made under The Fhnders Un1verstty of South Australia Act and to Statute 6 4 Maintenance o{ Order which are pubhshed 10 the Un1versuy Calendar

2 Any member of the academic staff may d1sm1ss any student from his class for any cause he shall deem sufhc1ent or he may report any breach of d1sc1phne to the Board of Enquiry for acuon

3 The fees paid by any student excluded from classes ford1sc1phnary reasons shall not be refunded to him unless the Council shall otherwise determine

4 The possession of fuearms fireworks home made explos1ves or explosive material of any kind on the University grounds or 1n any Un1vers1ty bu1ld1ng 1s forbidden

5 Each School shall have power to make ns own further rules about the use of Its facihues All students using those facihttes will be bound by such rules

B LABORATORY RULES

For students taking regular courses involving laboratory work an appropnate laboratory wtll be open at such hours as shall be considered necessary by a nominated staff member of the d1sc1phne concerned Persons engaged 1n advanced work or ong1nal research may work at such add1t1onal times as the supervisor may arrange

2 The £ac1ht1es of a laboratory may also be made available for ong1nal research earned on by students or graduates not proceechng to a degree tn the Universlly at such umes and under such cond1ttons as the Chauman of the School may determine the fee for use of a laboratory and its fac1hues and the charges for matenals to be determined in each case

g All preparations and equipment made from materials supplied by the Un1versuy shall remain the property of the Un1versay

4 No experiments of a dangerous nature may be performed without the express sancuon of the supervisor concerned

5 Any accident must be reponed at once to the person currently 1n charge of the laboratory

6 The Chauman of a School may impose a fine not exceeding .$10 for any breach of d1sc1phne misconduct misuse of apparatus or reagents or waste of gas water and electt1ctty or he may report any misconduct or offence on the part of a student to the Board of Discipline for such acuon as the Board may th1nkftt If he imposes a ftne the Chairman shall report in wnung to the Registrar the amount of such fine and the reason for It and the fine shall be paid to the Registrar w1th1n seven days of the time of HS 1mpos1uon

FOOTNOTE Lib ary Rulrscan be found m Volume I of 1he Calendar They are also ava1lablem a Jeafll'l from the Library

1034